Greek reader (prose) consisting of selections from Nenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Thucydides

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world’s books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

atthtto: //books.gqoogle.com/

2
ΕἸ

τὰς

™

as?
Pee
war *

et

“

yt

”

Digitized by Google

Lay 4

Arche Ht Freeanai,

Me. hy. Δ
reas

i el

Bosron, July, 1872,

GINN BROTHERS,
Publishers,

8 BEACON STREET, BOSTON.
Terms: Cash in Thirty Days. Wholesale and Ketail Prices.

ENGLISH.

Wholesale. Retail.

CRAIR’S ENGLISH OF SHAKESPEARE. Illustrated
in a Philological Commentary on his Julius Cesar, by George ἴω. Craix, Queen's
College, Belfast. Edited by W. J. Rotrz, Cambridge. Cloth - » 1.40 $1.75

HUDSON’S FAMILY SHAKESPEARE: Plays selected

and prepared, with Notes and Introductions, for Use in Families.

Volume I., containing As You Like it, The Merchant of Venice, Twelfth Night,
First and Second of King Henry the Fourth, Julius Caesar, and Hamlet.

Volume II., containing The Tempest, Tbe Winter's Tale, King Henry the Fifth,
King Richard the Third, King Lear, Macbeth, and Antony and Cleopatra.

And Hudson’s Life, Art, and Characters of Shakespeare. 2 vols.

4 vols. Cloth Φ . . e e Φ . Φ . e e e 7.20 9.00
Hal f morocco e e . e . . . . Φ e 12. 00 16.00
Full calf Φ Φ Φ Φ Φ Φ . . Φ . . Φ 16.00 20 00

HUDSON’S LIFE, ART, AND CHARACTERS OF
SHAKESPEARE. Including an Historical Sketch of the Origin and
’ Growth of the Drama in England, with Studies in the Poet’s Dramatic Archi-
tecture, Delineation of Character, Humor, Style, and Moral Spirit, also with
Critical Discourses on the following plays.— A Midsummer-Night’s Dream,
The Merchant of Venice, The Merry Wives of Windsor, Much Ado about Noth-
ing, As You Like It, Twelfth Night, All’s Well that Ends Well, Measure for
Bieasure, The Tempest, The Winter’s Tale, King John, King Richard the Second,
King Henry the Fourth, King Henry the Fifth, King Richard the Third, King
Henry the Eighth, Romeo and Juliet, Julius Cesar, Hamlet, Macbeth, King
Lear, Antony and Cleopatra, Othello, Cymbeline and Coriolanus. In Two Vol-

umes. Cloth, per vol., $2.50 ee * «© © «© « « 4.00 §.00
HUDSON’S. SCHOOL SHAKESPEARE. Cloth . 2.00 250
Containing As You {1ΚῈ It, ΤῊΣ Two Paars or Henzy IV.,
Tar MERCHANT OF VENIOR, JULIUS ΟΣΒΑΒ,

TWELFTa NIGHT, HAMLet.
Selected and prepared for use in Schools, Clubs, Classes, and Families. With In-
troductions and Notes. By the Rev. Henry N. Hupson.

HUDSON’S SCHOOL SHAKESPEARE. 2d Series. 2.00 2.50

Containing Tus Tempest, Kine RIcHARD THE THIRD,
- Tas WInTER’s Tate, Kine Lear,
Kine Henry Tue Firra, Macsera, ANTONY AND CLEOPATRA.

THE MERCHANT OF VENICE. In Paper Cover .
JULIUS CASSAR. In PaperCover . ... .
EHAMLET. InPaperCoverr . . . . . - «© -
THE TEMPEST. InPaperCoverr. . .. - -
MACBETH. InPaprCover . . - + + + * >

δ B&B δ 8
δ ΒΡ 8 8

4

Wholesale. Retail.

THE LIVING WORD; or, Bible Truths and Lessons. $1.00 $1.25

The distinguishing feature of this book is the arrangement, by subjects, of the
spiritual and moral truths of the Bible, so that all its most expressive utterances
upon a given subject may be read in unbroken succession. It is believed that this
will furnish what has been long needed for public and private reading in the home,
the school, and the church.

OUR WORLD, No.I.; or, First Lessons in Geography.
Revised edition, with new Maps, by Mary L. Hatt.

Designed to give children clear and lasting impressions of the different countries
rae aoe of the earth rather than to tax the memory with mere names and
etai

OUR WORLD, No. II.; or, Second Series of Lessons
in Geography. By Mary L. Hatt. With fine illustrations of the various
countries, the inhabitants and their occupations, and two acral series of Mapes,
physical and political e Φ Φ e . .Φ a “ . . .}1 «80

This book is intended, if used in connection with the First Tanabe: to cover the
usual course of geographical study. It is based upon the principle that it is more
useful to give vivid Salsa of the physical features and political associations of
different regions, than to make pupils familiar with lofi lists of places, and a great

array of statistics. "ἃ

Φ
TABLES OF LOGARITHMIC AND TRIGONO.
METRIC FUNCTIONS TO THREE AND FOUR PLACES OF DECIMALS.
By James Muts Paror, University peer ὍΝ χρυ νυ at Harvard
University. Cloth Φ Φ Φ ΓῚ Φ e e ° .60

THE ATLANTIC PRIMARY ARITHMETIC. By
G@. L. DemaRgsT . i a> fe ee ee Oe) Oe ΤΠ τῳ; τ

THE NATIONAL MUSIC COURSE. In Four Books.
For Public Schools. By Juxius E:cuserc, J. B. SaaRLanD, L. W. Mason, H. KE.
HoLt, Supervisors of Musip in Public Schools of Boston, Mass.

PRIMARY OR FIRST MUSIO READER
A course of exercises in the elements of Vocan Music. AND. Sianr- Smee,
with choice rote songs for the use of youngest pupils.

INTERMEDIATE MUSIC READER Ὁ a, fe δ ἀπο τὰν

Ineluding the Second and Third Music Readers. A course of instruction in

the elements of Vocal Music and Sight-Singing, with choice rote songs, in two
and three parts, based on the elements of harmony.

1.88

FOURTH MUSIC READER τ . . . «© « o« o «+ In Press.

SECOND MUSIC READER . ° ὁ . . δ: ee e . . Ν .88
THIRD MUSIC READER e ν e e ‘e e ® e ο Φ 383
THE NATIONAL MUSIC CHARTS. By Lutner Wair-
Ina Mason. An invaluable aid to Teachers of Common Schools, in imparting a
practical knowledge of Music, and teaching Children to sing at aight. In Four
Series, Forty Charta each. Price, § 10.00 each Series.
FIRST SERIES, or Pamrany ΟΠ Ὁ . «© © © «© © « © 10.00
SECOND SERIES, 10 00
THIRD SERIES, for INTERMEDIATE CHARTS . ee ee χο δῷ
FOURTH SERIES) © or ms ScHooL ΘΈΛΕΤΕ, by L. W. Mason and J. 8.
SHUARLAND Φ .9 Φ Φ e e Φ e e e i) 10. 00
THE NATIONAL MUSIC TEACHER. A Practical
Guide for teaching Vocal Music to Young Children. By L. W. Mason. .
A SYSTEM OF DRAWIN G. ‘By the late Joux 8. Woop-
Man, Of Dartmouth College . . . . . 80 1.00

ac.

GREEK READER

(PROSE) !

CONSISTING OF SELECTIONS FROM

XENOPHON, PLATO, HERODOTUS, AND THUCYDIDES,

WITH NOTES
ADAPTED TO GOODWIN’S GREEK GRAMMAR,

PARALLEL REFERENCES TO CROSBY'S AND HADLEY’S GRAMMARS,

~

AND LITHOGRAPHIC MAPS.

EDITED BY

WILLIAM W.' GOODWIN, Pu. D.,
ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY ’

AND

JOSEPH H. ALLEN, ,otks

CAMBRIDGE, MASS. he ee as
»

‘iw

REVISED EDITION. I an oe

BOSTON:
GINN BROTHERS.

1872.
νν “Δ

7
ἃ
COR Φ ον
>. Φ
. oe
φΦυ
.
eo?
9
> @
4 oa
ον
.
. 5 ᾽ο
oe ὃϑ
a oe .
ee q
e
e
eo? e
e e
e

{THENEW YORE}
PUBLIC 11BRa&.

940391.

ASTOR Lb. OX any
TILDEN FOUNDATIONS
1901 ;

.
τ:
1
4

Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871,
BY WILLIAM W. GOODWIN,
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washingtoa.

° %s
iy
᾽ Ϊ᾿
᾿ ὃς
: PS “es >
- νῷ 7 ge
. ra ae
a 83, ‘ at
« % @ 2
; eo.
“6. 8 ed
. . te
te Φ
e Φ
= ᾿ ἢ e Bs >
a 4 ΠῚ e
ey
University Press: WELCH, BiGELow, & Co.,
CAMBRIDGE,
o
."» ᾿ τ : re

PREFACE.

®
eeprom Sosa

Tus Reader is designed to supply an equivalent for
Xenophon’s Anabasis, which is now almost universally
read in preparation for American colleges. It surely needs
no argument to show that a better knowledge even of the
elements of a language is gained from a variety of styles
than from a single author, or that even the briefest course
of reading is the better for exhibiting the higher qualities
of the literature which it represents. The fact that the
Anabasis is accessible in carefully prepared editions has
given it a prominence in our schools which neither its
literary merit nor its historic importance could justly
claim; and its exclusive reign has not been without its
injurious effect on our scholarship.

Xenophon and Herodotus are perhaps the only strictly
classic prose-writers of Greece who can be studied with
success by beginners, except in selected passages. Demos-
thenes and Thucydides are by no means as well adapted as
Cicero and Caesar to the attainments of young students ;
and Plato must be divested, to a great extent, of his philo-
sophic robes before he can enter our schoolrooms. It will
therefore surprise no one that so large a part of the present
work is given to Xenophon and Herodotus.

We have attempted to select characteristic passages from

QUP.EXCH. 27 MAR. 4991
DREW THEOL. SEM.

Tes eM be. Mw et ot = *

1V PREFACE.

the four authors included in the work, and at the same
time to admit nothing which a diligent scholar cannot
reasonably be expected to master in the first two years of
his Greek studies. "We have given the Third and Fourth
books of the Anabasis entire, as being the most interesting
part of the Retreat of the Ten Thousand, and as admirably
adapted by its simplicity of style for elementary drill.
Then follows the greater part of the Second Book of the
Hellenica, describing the capture of Athens by the Spartan
Lysander, the tragic end of the long Peloponnesian war
in the destruction of the Piraeus and of the Long Walls
of Athens—the pride of Themistocles and Pericles — to
the insulting music of flutes, the odious rule of the Thirty
Tyrants, with the expulsion of the oligarchy and the res-
toration of the democracy by Thrasybulus and his band
of exiled patriots from Phyle; to which are added the last
sections of the Hellenica, describing the battle of Man-
tinea and the death of Epaminondas.

Next comes the first chapter of the Memorabilia, giving
the character of Socrates as drawn by Xenophon, followed
by the last section of the same work. The short extracts
from Plato which follow consist of the final address of
Socrates to his judges from the Apology, and the narrative
part of the Phaedo describing the last hours of the great
philosopher.

The selections from Herodotus are in four parts. The
first contains the account of the invasion of Darius and
the battle of Marathon. The three others contain the
most important passages in the Seventh and Eighth books,
forming a continuous account of the invasion of Xerxes, —
the pomp of the Great King’s preparation; the march of
the mighty host from Asia to Greece, including bridging

ΌὌ

PREFACE. Vv

the Hellespont and cutting the canal through Athos; the
preparations of the terrified Greeks; the wisdom of the
Delphic oracle and the craft of Themistocles; the battles
of Thermopylae, Artemisium, and Salamis; and finally the
immominious retreat of Xerxes from Salamis to Asia. The
campaign of Mardonius in the following year, with the
battles of Plataea and Mycale, is omitted for want of space.
In thus condensing two long books of Herodotus into so
small a compass, great pains have been taken to avoid
abrupt transitions; and often single sentences have been
taken from a chapter to keep up the continuity of the
narrative. It is hoped that the wonderful story of the
campaign of Xerxes has thus been presented to the pupil
in greater vividness and completeness than it could have
been by detached extracts.

The passage from Thucydides has been abridged by
omitting the speeches, and such parts of the narrative as
are not essential to the main account. As there is no
continuous passage of this length in Thucydides which
does not contain difficulties of construction or style too
great for beginners, occasional liberties have been taken in
omitting sentences or even clauses which are not essential
to the story, simply to avoid difficulties. There is perhaps
no other part of Thucydides from which so simple a narra-
tive passage of equal interest with this story of Pylus
could have been taken.

Although this Reader is especially designed for those
who are preparing for college, with a view of giving them
the best material afforded by the Greek literature to en-
liven the course of their earlier studies, it is yet hoped that
it may be of use also to those whose study of Greek must
be confined to the school or academy. It is especially

vi PREFACE.

hard for such persons to spend a year or more in reading
Greek, but to see nothing except the Anabasis, —a story
of an expedition saved from oblivion chiefly by a skilful
retreat, — when the great deeds of Marathon, Thermopylae,
and Salamis, Leonidas and his Three Hundred, Miltiades,
Themistocles, Aristides, Socrates, and Epaminondas are
equally within their reach. For such, and indeed for all
who may use the work, we desire that it may “enlarge and
not belittle the notion of what a classic language and liter-
ature mean. The best justification of classical study, after
all, is not its value as a means of mental discipline, but
that it combines that discipline with some guiding of the
mind towards the higher interpretation of history and the
deeper lessons of human life.”

The notes make no pretension to learning, and aim
merely at aiding beginners in laying a solid foundation for
future scholarship. The grammatical aid is given chiefly
in the form of references, in which alone it can be syste-
matic. No notes can supply all the collateral information
needed for the full understanding of an ancient historian.
Constant reference should be made to a classical dictionary
and to some Greek history. It may be.too much to expect
of school-boys in these days that they should read a history
like that of Grote ; but we cannot too strongly recommend
all who wish to catch the true spirit of the history they
are studying, to read Grote’s graphic account of the Per-
sian wars with Herodotus, his story of Pylus and Cleon
with Thucydides, and his chapters on the Thirty Tyrants
and on Epaminondas with Xenophon’s Hellenica. Many
parts too of his chapter on Socrates (in vol. viii.) would
be appreciated by every thoughtful reader of the extracts
here made from the Memorabilia and from Plato. We

PREFACE. Vill

believe, further, that the time spent in reading these chap-
ters of Grote would be more than saved by their aid as a
commentary to the Greek text, while the increased interest
which they would awaken might often change the study
from a task to a pleasure.

It is of course impossible in notes like these to give
special credit for every remark which is wholly or partly
borrowed. "We must therefore express, once for all, our
obligations to the long and familiar line of commentators
on Xenophon, Herodotus, Thucydides, and Plato; and
last, not least, to Grote, from whose notes many valuable
hints have been derived which could not be acknowledged
by quotation-marks. The maps at the end of the volume
are chiefly copied from larger maps in Kiepert’s “ Atlas
von Hellas.”

No Poetry has been added to this Reader, partly because
the masterpieces of Greek Poetry are nearly all accessible
in ἃ convenient form, but chiefly because no ancient poetry
is so well adapted to the minds of youth as the Homeric
poems, which every scholar should carry with him to
college without abridgment. One great advantage of the
extended course of preparatory study which, it is to be
hoped, all our best colleges will soon expect of those who
intend to be classical scholars will be the more thorough
acquaintance with Homer which young men will thereby
gain before they enter college.

In the extracts from Xenophon, the chapters and sec-
tions are numbered as they are in recent editions. The
other selections are divided into new sections as they stand,
and numbered accordingly. In all cases (except in Plato),
the numbers of the original chapter and section with which
the right-hand page ends are given at the top of the page.

Vill PREFACE.

No special lexicon is added to the volume, partly from
the impossibility of making a really complete small lexi-
con to such a variety of authors, but chiefly from the belief
that the use of a partial lexicon is injurious to sound
scholarship. We do not refer to such special works as are
really more full than a general lexicon, which are often
invaluable in reading a difficult author; but to such im-
perfect glossaries as are sometimes expected at the end of
a Greek Reader. The abridgment of Liddell and Scott's
Greek-English Lexicon, which admirably combines con- °
venience in size with completeness and exactness in
definitions, is now so easily accessible, that all cimeuity
in this respect is happily removed.

THE EDITORS.

CAMBRIDGE, Mass., July, 1871.

CONTENTS.

oe

XENOPHON.

I. RETREAT OF THE TEN THOUSAND. ὸ ° .
II. Fant AND RESTORATION OF ATHENS ° e °
Ill. Tue BATrLe oF MANTINEA . . . . °
IV. CHARACTER OF SOCRATES . : ° . . °

PLATO.
I. SocRATES BEFORE HIS JUDGES . ; ὃ .
II]. Tae DeatH ΟΕ SocRATES ᾿ ᾿ ; e .
HERODOTUS.
I. Invasion oF GREEcE By Darius. ᾿ ° e

II], Marcu or XERXES: PREPARATIONS OF THE GREEKS
11. Tae Pass or THERMOPYLAE. ‘

IV. ARTEMISIUM: MARCH oF XERXES TO ATHENS: SALAMIS:

RETREAT OF XERXES TO ASIA... ‘ x

THUCYDIDES.

PYLUs AND SPHACTERIA ᾿ : Ε ὸ ‘ Ξ

Notes Φ e Φ 9 Φ Φ Φ Φ Φ Φ

PARALLEL REFERENCES. § , ‘ ‘ Ξ ᾿-

TABLE ΟΕ DATES e e e e e e e e

Maps,

‘ 1

101

. 112
120
186

156

» 192

XENOPHON. '

a: oie eam

L RETREAT OF THE TEN THOUSAND.
(Anabasis, ΠῚ., IV.]

BOOK THIRD.
σ ιν . 9 3 ’ a 8 ’, «ἡ
I, “Oca μεν én ἐν τῇ ἀὐάβασει 7H peta Κύρου οἱ Ελ»-»
ληνες ἔπραξαν μέχρι τῆς μάχης, καὶ ὅσα ἐπεὶ Κῦρος
ἐτελεύτησεν ἐγένετο ἀπιόντων τῶν Ἑλλήνων σὺν Τισ-
σαφέρνει ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν λόγῳ δε-
δή > XN Ἁ ef 4 4 9
ἤλωται. 38. ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ TE στρατηγοί συνειλημμένοι ἤσαν,
a “a a »“ e ’ὔ
καὶ τῶν λοχαγῶν καὶ τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἱ συνεπόμενοι
ἢ , 3 ιν 3 ,ὕ 4 « αἡὖὺ'
ἀπωλώλεσαν, ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ Ελληνες,
2 ’ - 4 > N a , ’ 9
ἐννοούμενοι μὲν OTL ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἤσαν,
͵ ee ee ͵ δ . oy Ν ,
κύκλῳ δὲ αὐτοῖς πάντῃ πολλὰ καὶ ἐθνηὴ καὶ πόλεις
“ 3 Ν N Ia N ¥ 4 ¥
πολέμια. ἦσαν, ἀγορὰν δὲ οὐδεὶς ert παρέξειν ἔμελλεν,
» » δὲ a 4 Ελλ (ὃ 3 a “a ’ (δ e
ἀπεῖχον δὲ τῆς ados οὐ μειον ἢ μύρια στάδια, ἡγε-
Ν 3 ἐν ra ς "9 Ν Ν a 9 ᾽ὔ
pov δ᾽ οὐδεὶς τῆς ὁδοῦ ἦν, ποταμοὶ δὲ διεῖργον ἀδιά-
2 a ¥ eaia a? Ν > δ
βατοι ἐν μέσῳ τῆς οἰκαδε ὁδοῦ, προυδεδώκεσαν δὲ αὑτοὺς
Ν e ‘ 4 9 , , ’ Ν
καὶ οἱ σὺν Κύρῳ avaBaytes βάρβαροι, μόνοι δὲ καταλε-
/ ῷ IQr ¢ , Ins ’ὔ Ψ
λειμμένον ἦσαν, οὐδὲ ὑππέα οὐδένα σύμμαχον ἔχοντες "
ἤσαν,
ef ¥ o ¢ A \ In? A ,ὕ
ὥστε εὔδηλον ἣν OTL νικῶντες μεν οὐδένα ἂν κατακαάνοιεν,
ἔ , Ν > A 3 Ν 4 a 3 ἤ
ἡττηθέντων δὲ αὐτῶν οὐδεὶς ἂν λειφθείη. 8. ταῦτα ἐννοού-
\ 327 ¥ x. 7 ‘ 2 a 3 δ e ,
Hevot καὶ ἀθύμως εχοντες, ὀλίγοι μὲν αὑτῶν εἰς THY ἐσπε-
ὔ - 3 ’ 9 7 “ A > 4 > δ
pay σίτου ἐγεύσαντο, ὀλίγοι δὲ πῦρ αἀνέκαυσαν, ἐπὶ Se
ν ν 9 4 ,) Ν “΄ 3 ΄,
Ta ὅπλα πολλοὶ οὐκ ἦλθον ταύτην τὴν νύκτα, ἀνεπαύοντο
δὲ σ > » Ψ 3 ’ ΄ ¢ oN
€ που ετύγχανεν ἕκαστος, ov δυνάμενοι καθεύδειν ὑπὸ
A N ΄ / / a /
λύπης καὶ πόθου πατρίδων, γονέων, γυναικῶν, παίδων,
A ¥ > 3 P/ μή ¥ τ ᾿ Ν /
ous οὕποτ᾽ ἐνόμιζον ETL ὄψεσθαι. οὕτω μεν δὴ διακείμενοι
’ 9
πάντες ἀνεπαύοντο.
1

2 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [XeEn.

9 ͵ 3 a a 9 A ¥
4. Hv δε τις ev τῇ στρατιᾷ Hevopav ᾿Αθηναῖος, ὃς οὔτε
6
ἈΝ 4 “ ” , Aa
στρατηγὸς οὔτε λοχαγὸς οὔτε στρατιώτης ὧν συνηκολούθει,
3 N 4 > A ’ 39 4
ἀλλὰ Πρόξενος αὐτὸν μετεπέμψατο οἰκοθεν, Eevos ὧν
3 a e ἴω > A 2” Λ 2"
ἀρχαῖος" ὑπισχνεῖτο δὲ αὑτῷ, εἰ ελθοι, φίλον αὐτὸν Κύρῳ
4 A 7 N ΝΥ ’ ¢ a 4 4
ποιήσειν, ὃν αὐτὸς ἐφη κρείττω ἑαυτῷ νομίξειν τῆς πατρί-
e a μοὶ σι 3 ‘ N 9 “ 4
δος, ὅ. ὁ μέντοι Ξενοφῶν ἀναγνοὺς τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἀνακοι-
»“ , a ? / N a /
νοῦται Σωκράτει τῷ AOnvaip περὶ τῆς πορείας. καὶ ὁ
’ e 7 4 “ A Λ 3
Σωκράτης ὑποπτεύσας μὴ τι πρὸς τῆς πόλεως ἐπαίΐτιον
¥ ’ Λ “ Ψ In / a
ein Κύρῳ φίλον γενέσθαι, ὅτι ἐδόκει ὁ Κῦρος προθύμως
“ ’ > NS “ 3 4 A
τοίς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐπὶ tas AOnvas συμπολεμῆσαι, συμ-
/ a | a 3 , 9 Ν 9 a
βουλεύει τῷ Ἐξενοφῶντι ἐλθόντα εἰς Δεέλφους avaxowacar
Ὁ“ N A 4 9 “ “a 3 tA
τῷ θεῷ περὶ τῆς πορείας. 6. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ὁ Ἐενοφῶν ἐπήρετο
“ > Λ ’ A ’ A 3 ’ Λ
τὸν Απολλω, τίνι ἂν θεῶν θύων καὶ εὐχόμενος καλλιστα
ν͵ν ¥ “ eas A 9 ry Ν οι ,
καὶ ἄριστα ελθοι τὴν ὁδὸν ἣν επινοεῖ, καὶ καλῶς πραξας
/ . 5 > A e » Λ €e ν
σωθείη. καὶ ἀνεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ Αποόλλων θεοῖς ois εδει
᾿ > \ ων , 9 , N ,
θύειν. ἢ. ἐπεὶ δὲ πάλιν ἦλθε, λέγει THY μαντείαν τῷ
ld , ’ 3 a2 N ef δ σι
Σωκράτει. ὁ § ἀκούσας ἡτιᾶτο αὑτὸν ὅτι οὐ τοῦτο
a , ᾽ a ¥ 3 ’ A ,
πρῶτον NpwTa, πότερον λῷον εἴη αὐτῷ πορεύεσθαι ἢ μένειν,"
9 3 2͵)"» / 9 ἢ φ a 2 9 4 σ A
ἀλλ᾽ αὑτὸς κρίνας ἵτέον εἶναι τοῦτ ἐπυνθάνετο, ὅπως ἂν
, ’ 3 Ν td od 3 a>
κάλλιστα πορευθείη. ᾿Επεὶ μέντοι οὕτως ἤρου, tavt , edn,
δ . of ee ς δ ‘ A
χρὴ ποιεῖν ὅσα ὁ θεὸς ἐκέλευσεν. 8. O μεν dn Ξενοφῶν
ef , φ 3 ς Ν, 3{φ,, Ἁ
οὕτω θυσαμενος οἷς ἀνεῖλεν o θεὸς, εἐξεπλει καὶ καταλαμ»
’ > 4 ’ “ - a »
βάνει ev Σάρδεσι Προξενον καὶ Κῦρον μέλλοντας ἤδη
e “A δ ww ean A 4 4 ὔ
ὁρμᾶν τὴν ἄνω odov, καὶ συνεσταθὴ Κύρῳ. 9. προθυμουμε-
Ν A , \ ¢ a a “
vou δὲ τοῦ Προξένου, καὶ ὁ Κῦρος συμπρουθυμεῖτο pewas
ΡΥ, 9 νι o@ 93 Ν ’ e 4 ,
αὐτὸν " εἶπε δὲ ὅτι, ἐπειδαν τάχιστα ἡ στρατεία λήξῃ,
5 δι. 3 ΄ > » 5. ἢ \ oe , Ω 3
εὐθυς ἀποπέμψει αὐτὸν. ἐλέγετο δὲ ὁ στόλος εἶναι εἰς
Λ >] 4 “ N a 3 Ν 3
Πισίδας. 10. ἐστρατεύετο μεν δὴ οὕτως ἐξαπατηθεὶς οὐχ
eon , > ἐν Μ» Ν 9 N ’ e ἈΝ Iar
ὑπὸ Προξενου" ov yap ἤδει τὴν ἐπὶ βασιλέα ὁρμὴν, οὐδὲ
¥ ΔΘ. Ν a ¢ , Ν ’ 3 Ν 4
ἄλλος οὐδεὶς τῶν Ελλήνων πλὴν Κλεαρχου" ἐπεὶ μέντοι
9 7 N A ¥ In? 4 ef
εἰς Κιλικίαν ἦλθον, σαφὲς πᾶσιν ἤδη ἐδόκει εἶναι ὅτι

9
ΑΝΑΒ. 3, 1] Aenophon’s Dream. 3
e , M 3 AN 4 ’ » ‘ Cad ᾿
ὁ στόλος εἴη emt βασίλεα. φοβούμενοι δε τὴν odov, καὶ
¥ Crd e Y 3 3 rf . > , \
ἄκοντες, ὅμως OL πολλοὶ δι αἰσχυνὴν καὶ ἀλλήλων καὶ
4 4 @ @ Ν “" = 3 Q
Κύρου συνηκολούθησαν " ὧν εἰς καὶ Revopav ἦν. 11. Eset
eee , 4 ? a \ . a -» \ ᾽
ὃε ἀπορία ἦν, ἐλυπειτὸ μὲν συν τοῖς ἄλλοις, καὶ οὐκ
In Ζ ΄ ‘ > of x 3 ”
ἐδύνατο καθεύδειν. pixpov ὃ ὕπνου λαχὼν εἶδεν ὄναρ.
4 3 a A ld “ a 9 “
ἐδοξεν αὐτῷ βροντῆς γενομένης σκηπτος πεσεῖν εἰς THY πα»
,ὕ > + x 3 ’ ’ A ᾽ὔ
Tpwav οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ τούτου λάμπεσθαι πᾶσαν. A. περί-
3 “ 9 [2 XN “ ΝΥ Δ Ἧ y
φοβος δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἀνηγέρθη, καὶ τὸ ὄναρ πῇ μὲν ἔκρινεν
2 \ oe 9 , “A ον ’ φ ’ 3 “
aya0ov, ὅτε ἐν πόνοις ὧν καὶ κινδύνοις φῶς μέγα εκ Atos
b ] »“" Ww A . .Y 3 lal oa 9. AN “ ΝΥ
ἰδεῖν ἔδοξε" πῇ dé καὶ εφοβεῖτο, ὅτε ἀπὸ Ζιος μεν βασι-
, , ns “> a 4 , \ Ine
λέως τὸ ὄναρ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ εἶναι, κύκλῳ δὲ ἐδόκει λάμπε-
a a Ν 3 ΄ 3 a“ [4 3 “ a
σθαι τὸ πῦρ, μὴ ov δύναιτο ex τῆς ywpas εξελθεῖν τῆς
, 3 3 ” / e ’ 3 “
βασίλεως, αλλ εἰργουῦτο πάντοθεν ὑπὸ τινων ἀποριῶν.
e as 4 9 Q δ a y¥ 3 “ ¥
AS. οποίον Te mevTOL ἐστί TO τοίουτον OVvap ἰδειν, efeoTe
“Ὁ 3 nu J “ “ »¥ 4
σκοπεῖν ἐκ τῶν συμβάντων μετὰ TO ὄναρ. γίγνεται
Ν ’, + 2 Ν 3 ’ a ν» ά
γὰρ tude. εὐθυς ἐπειδὴ ἀνηγέρθη, πρῶτον μεν evvota
3 A 9 7 ὁ τί ’ ᾿ e δὲ x B a Ψ
αὑτῷ ἐμπίπτει" Ti καταάκειμαι; ἡ δε νυξ προβαίνει" ἅμα
‘ a ¢ A Ν ‘ / ef 3 ‘ /
δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ εἰκὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἥξειν. « εἰ δὲ γενησό-
> N “Ὁ 4 3 Ν Ν 2." ᾽; ‘ A
μεθα ἐπὶ βασίλει, τέ ἐμποδὼν μὴ ovyt πάντα μὲν τὰ
, 3 4 , Ν “ 4 [4
χαλεπώτατα emdovtas, πάντα δὲ τὰ δεινότατα παθόντας,
¢ , > »" @ 2 » ? 3 4
ὑβριζομένους ἀποθανεῖν; 14. ὅπως δ᾽ ἀμυνούμεθα οὐδεὶς
, ar 2 a 5] δ , τ
παρασκευάζεται οὐδὲ ἐπιμελεῖται, ἀλλὰ κατακείμεθα ὥσπερ
38 e ’ ¥ > A 4 ᾿ 2 ’ ,
ἐξον ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν. εγω οὖν τον ἐκ ποίας πόλεως στρα-
“ “~ A / 4 e 4 ?
τηγὸν προσδοκω ταῦτα πράξειν ; ποίαν δ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἐμαυτῷ
3 a 3 4 3 Q ΗΝ > Κ ΄ »
ελθεῖν ἀναμένω ; οὐ yap ἔγωγ᾽ ett πρεσβύτερος ἔσομαι,
3" tA A 9 “ a ’
ἐαν τήμερον προδῶ ἐμαυτὸν τοῖς πολεμίοις.
3 39.» , ἈΝ a a ,
16. Ex τοῦτον ἀνίσταται, καὶ συγκαλεῖ τους Προξένου
A 4 3 ον Ἁ “ ¥ 9 ’ >
πρῶτον λοχαγοὺς. ἐπεὶ δὲ συνῆλθον, edre~ev: Eyo, ὦ
¥” 4 ¥ ΄ ΄ ; ef 9 »
ἄνδρες λοχαγοὶ, οὔτε καθεύδειν δύναμαι, worrep οἶμαι ovd
e κι Υ̓͂ »“" a ec oa 3 ed 3 4 €
ὑμεῖς, οὔτε κατακεῖσθαι ETL, opwy ἐν οἱοίς ἐσμεν. 16. οἱ
“ x ’ A σ΄ 3 ’ “ e A “
sev yap πολέμιοι δῆλον OTL οὐ πρότερον πρὸς ἡμᾶς τὸν

4 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [XeEn,

, 9 4 Ἁ 9 4 n 4 e nw
πόλεμον εξεφηναν, πριν ἐνόμισαν καλῶς τὰ εαυτῶν παρε-
4° € a 2 3 Ν Jas b a oe e
σκευάσθαι" ἡμῶν ὃ οὐδεὶς οὐδὲν αντεπιμελεῖται ὅπως ὡς
, 2 , Ν Ν > ες ’ νΝ
κάλλιστα ἀγωνιούμεθα. AY. καὶ μὴν εἰ ὑφησομεθα καὶ
> AN a 4 / 4 , ἃ Ν
ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ γενησόμεθα, te οἰόμεθα πείσεσθαι; ὃς καὶ
a ς 4 δ e / 3 A \ 4
TOU ὁμομητρίου καὶ ὁμοπατρίου ἀδελφοῦ καὶ τεθνηκότος
¥ 3 “ Ἀ Ν Ν ‘ a 3 ’
ἤδη ἀποτεμὼν τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὴν χεῖρα ἀνεσταύρωσεν᾽
Coa ‘N e δ δ Ia SN 7 3 ΄
ἡμᾶς δε, οἷς κηδεμὼν μεν οὐδεὶς πώρεστιν, ἐστρατεύσαμεν
ν 9 9 > 4 φ “A 3 N ΄ tA 4 Ἀ
δὲ er αὑτὸν, ὡς δοῦλον ἀντὶ βασιλέως ποιήσοντες, καὶ
> A 9 / 7K 2» “ 9 3
αποκτενοῦντες εἰ δυναίμεθα, τί av οἰόμεθα παθεῖν ; 18. ap
2 A > ON A 2 ¢€ ς oA . 9 , a
οὐκ ἂν emt πᾶν ἐλθοι, ὡς ἡμᾶς τὰ ἐσχατα αἰκισάμενος πᾶ-
9 2 ’ ᾽ A a ’ > 9
σιν avOpwros φοβον παράσχοι τοῦ στρατεῦσαι ποτε eT
9 4 3 9 ὦ Ἀ 4 9 9 4 ’ 2
αὐτὸν ; αλλ ὁπὼς TQL μὴ ἐπ᾿ ἐκείνῳ γενησομεθα “παντα
, 3 ἈΝ . 4 ” N e a φ
ποιητέον. 19. ᾿Εγὼ μὲν οὖν, ἐστε μὲν αἱ σπονδαὶ ἦσαν,
Μ 3 ’ e a“ ‘\ 3 ᾽ ᾽ Ν Ν ‘
OUTrOTE ἐπαυόμην ἡμᾶς μεν οἰκτείρων, βασιλέα δὲ καὶ TOUS
Q 9 “" t , 39. A Ω Ν ’
συν αὐτῷ μακαρίζων, διαθεώμενος αὐτῶν ὁσην μὲν χωραν
Ν Ψ Υ € δὲ ” \ 9 “δ ed δὲ
καὶ οἷαν ἔχοίεν, ὡς δὲ αφθονα ta επιτηδεια, σους ὃὲ
ἤ Q 4 “ ‘\ , N
θεράποντας, Ὅσα δὲ κτήνη, χρυσὸν δε, ἐσθῆτα δέ" 20. τὰ
Ἂ a eos ’ ’ ψ x
δ᾽ αὖ τῶν στρατιωτῶν ὁπότε εἐνθυμοίμην, ὅτι τῶν μεν
2 A ἣ 9 N ς κα , 3 δ ’
ἀγαθῶν πάντων avoevos ἡμῖν μετείη, εἰ μὴ πριαίμεθα,
/ 9 3 4 4 9 ’ Υ̓ ¥ U
ὅτου & ὠνησόμεθα ἤδειν ETL ὀλίγους ἔχοντας, ἄλλως δε
’ . 2 , A ? ἢ ο xs
πως πορίζεσθαι τὰ επιτήδεια ἢ ὠνουμένους OpKOUS 707
a »Ἅ 3 φΦ 4 > ἢ, 4 ‘
κατέχοντας ἡμᾶς᾽ ταῦτ᾽ οὖν λογιξομενος, ἐνίοτε Tas σπονδὰς
va) 9 4 A fa! “ 4 3 Ν /
μᾶλλον ἐφοβουμὴν ἢ νυν τὸν πόλεμον. 388. ἐπεὶ μεντοι
3 κι ¥. ον 4 4 ἴω Ν ¢
ἐκεῖνοι ἔλυσαν τὰς σπονδὰς, λελύσθαι μοι δοκεῖ καὶ 7
3 , ΥΩ ν ¢ 6 ς / 2 / A ¥
ἐκείνων ὕβρις καὶ ἡ ἡμετέρα ὕποψία. ἐν μέσῳ yap ἤδη
a A ‘ 9 “ 9 e ’ A co oa δ ὃ
κεῖται ταῦτα τὰ ἀγαθὰ, ἀθλα ὁπότεροι ἂν ἡμὼν avdpes
> + 4 ’ , δ ε θ , 4 A δ᾽ fa ε
ἀμείνονες ὦσιν, ἀη γόθεται οἱ θεοί εἰσιν, ot σὺν ἡμίν, ὡς
“ ὍΝ ¥
TO €LKOS, ἐσονται. 22. οὗτοι μὲν γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἐπιωρκήκασιν'
ἡμεῖς δε πολλὰ ὁρῶντες ἀγαθὰ, στερρῶς αὐτῶν ἀπειχόμεθα
διὰ τοὺς τῶν θεῶν ὄρκους' ὥστε ἐξεῖναί μοι δοκεῖ ἱέναι
3." “ > A Ἃ Ν
ἐπὶ τὸν ἀγῶνα πολὺ σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι ἢ τούτοις.

ANAB. 3, L ] Council of Officers. 5

mw > ¥ ἤ e , , 4
28. "Er. δ᾽ ἔχομεν σώματα ἱκανώτερα τούτων, καὶ ψύχη
Ν I N , ’ ¥ N N ‘ ‘
καὶ θάλπη Kat πόνους φέρειν" ἔχομεν δὲ καὶ ψυχᾶς συν

“a a > ’ e ‘\ ¥ x N Α
τοῖς θεοῖς ἀμείνονας" οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες καὶ τρωτοὶ καὶ θνητοὶ
A econ A ς ν. ὦ N , ’ Coa
μᾶλλον ἡμῶν, ἢν ot θεοὶ ὥσπερ TO πρόσθεν νίκην ἡμῖν
ry 3 > Κὶ Ν ΧΝ a > 3 a
διδῶσιν. 24. adr tows yap καὶ ἄλλοι ταῦτ᾽ ἐνθυμοῦνται,
Ν, wn a) δ 3 4 y > ,3 ¢ A 3 a
πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, μὴ ἀναμένωμεν ἄλλους eh ἡμᾶς ελθεῖν
A > A Ν 4. Ὗ 3. > ¢ [ω] δ
παρακαλοῦντας ἐπὶ τὰ καλλίστα ἔργα, GAN ἡμεῖς ἄρξωμεν
a ? A Ν Ny > XN ) , ,
τοῦ εξορμῆσαι καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους emt τὴν ἀρετὴν. φανῆτε
a a wv N a a“ 3 4
τῶν λοχαγῶν ἄριστοι Kal τῶν στρατηγῶν ἀξιοστρατηγό-
>, N \ 3 ‘ e a 3 ᾽ a x 8
τεροι. 25. Kayo Se, εἰ μὲν ὑμεῖς ἐθέλετε ἐξορμᾶν ἐπὶ
A d ec oa 4 4 δ᾽ e a / 4
ταῦτα, ἕπεσθαι ὑμῖν βούλομαι, εἰ ὑμεῖς ταττετὲ με
ow Ian , ‘N e ,ὔ > ὟΝ 3 ,
ἡγεῖσθαι, οὐδὲν προφασίζξομαι τὴν ἡλικίαν, ἀλλὰ Kal ἀκμώ-
[ἡ aA > 3 > > 9 “ Ν 4
Cew ἡγοῦμαι ἐρύκειν am ἐμαυτοῦ Ta KaKa.
€ Ν a 29 ¥. e Ν Ἧ 3 4
26. O μεν ταῦτ ἐλεξεν᾽ ot δὲ Aoyayot ἀκούσαντες
Cc « > fF, , ‘ / Φ
ἠγείσθαι ἐκέλευον πάντες, πλὴν ᾿Απολλωνίδης τις ἦν,
΄ a φ 9 of , ᾧ
βοιωτιαζων τῇ φωνῇ" ovtos δ᾽ εἶπεν ὅτι φλυαροίη ὁστις
, γ , ἃ “ἃ 7) ,
λέγον ἄλλως πὼς σωτηρίας ἂν τυχεῖν ἢ βασιλέα πείσας,
2 ΄ ΔΝ ὦ ΝΜ , δ 3 ’ ς
εἰ δύναιτο, καὶ ἅμα ἤρχετο λέγειν Tas ἀπορίας. 2%. ὁ
’ “A νι ς Ν ¥ φ 9
μέντοι Ξενοφῶν μεταξυ ὑπολαβὼν ἔλεξεν woe. “2 θαυμα-
’ ¥ ’ 32Φ ΩΝ a ’ Ia 3
σιωτατε ἄνθρωπε, av ye οὐδε ὁρῶν γιγνώσκεις οὐδὲ ἀκούων
΄ 3 2...» , 4 ΄ / ‘
μέμνησαι. ev ταυτῷ ye μέντοι ἤσθα τούτοις, ὃτε βασιλεὺς,
3 N A 3 , 4 ’ 3? ON 4 4
ἐπεί Κῦρος ἀπέθανε, μέγα φρονήσας emt τούτῳ, πέμπων
> 2 , ". Ψ > SN are >
ἐκέλευε παραδιδόναι Ta ὅπλα. 328. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἡμεῖς ov παρα-
’ 3 9 4 3. ’ , 3
δόντες, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξοπλισάμενοι, ἐλθόντες παρεσκηνήσαμεν av-
“" ᾽ὔ 3 2 ᾽ 4 ’ N 9 A
τῷ, TL οὐκ ἐποίησε πρέσβεις πέμπων καὶ σπονδὰς αἰτῶν
N , . 2 , ” a > 4
Kal παρέχων Ta ἐπιτήδεια, ἐστε σπονδῶν ἔτυχεν; 39. ἐπεὶ
9 9 € N ἃ Ν {72 Ν N ?
δ᾽ av ot στρατηγοὶ Kat λοχαγοὶ, ὥσπερ bn Gu κελεύεις,
3 / > a ¥ Ψ 3 a
εἰς λόγους avTois ἄνευ ὅπλων ἦλθον, πιστεύσαντες ταῖς
a 3 A 3 a ’ 4 ¢e 4
σπονδαῖς, OV νῦν ἐκεῖνοι παιόμενοι, κεντούμενοι, ὑβριξόμε-
Jar 2 a ε , 7 δ n>
vot, οὐδὲ ἀποθανεῖν οἱ τλήμονες δύνανται, καὶ par οἶμαι
I a ΄ ἃ ὔ IAN \ \ > »
ἐρῶντες τούτου ; ἃ σὺ πάντα εἰδως, τους μὲν ὠμύνεσθας

6 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. (Xen.

a a ΝΝ , N Λ ’ 3,
κελεύοντας φλυαρεῖν dys, πείθειν δὲ παλιν κελεύεις ἰόντας ;
3 Ν S S wy a ‘ ” aA ΧΩ
80. ἐμοὶ δε, ὦ ἄνδρες, δοκει τὸν ἀνθρωπὸν τοῦτον μήτε
/ > > κα ς oa > ω 3 4 “
προσίεσθαι εἰς TavTO ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, ἀφελομένους TE τὴν
, ’ ϑ ς ’ n Φ
λοχαγίαν σκεύη ἀναθέντας ὡς τοιούτῳ χρῆσθαι. οὕτος
Q ‘ A 7 27 4 A ἈΝ ξ ,
yap καὶ THY πατρίδα καταισχύνει καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα,
7 ¢ KA an η΄ ἢ 3 a ς “
ort Ελλην ὧν τοιοῦτος ἐστιν. 81. ᾿Εντεῦθεν υπολαβων
3 ἢ , 9 ’ ἌΣ 2 Ν A
Ayacias Στυμφαλίος εἶπεν᾽ Αλλα τούτῳ γε οὔτε τῆς
’ὔ / IAs v a @¢ 4 ,
Βοιωτίας προσήκει ovdev, οὔτε τῆς Ελλάδος παντάπασιν,
> NX A > 9 ef \ 3 ’ . ©
ἐπεὶ ἐγὼ αὑτὸν εἶδον, ὥσπερ Avodov, ἀμφοτερα τὰ ὦτα
, N ef A N Φ 3 ?
τετρυπημένον. καὶ εἶχεν οὕτως. 82. τοῦτον μὲν οὖν ἀπή-
ig Ν δ N Ν 4 > 4 “
λασαν" ot δὲ ἄλλοι παρὰ τὰς τάξεις ἰόντες, ὅπου μεν
“ a ¥ “ δ μ e , “
στρατηγὸς σῶς εἰη, TOV στρατηγὸν παρεκάλουν, ὅποθεν δε
¥ “ ς ’ Ψ > φ δ a »
οίχοιτο, τὸν ὑποστρωτηγον, ὅπου δ᾽ αὖ λοχαγὸς σῶς εἴη,
Ν ,
Tov λοχαγον.
Ν Ν , a 4 Ν ’
88. Eve δὲ πάντες συνῆλθον, εἰς to πρόσθεν τῶν
e/ 3 ’ \ 9 & € ’ \
ὅπλων ἐκαθέξοντο᾽ καὶ ἐγένοντο οἱ συνελθόντες στρατηγοὶ
Ν Ν 2 Ν Ν ¢ ’ ed ‘ a 9 “
καὶ λοχαγοὶ audi tous ἑκατὸν. ote δε ταῦτα ἣν, σχεδὸν
4 9 ? ? “ e / 9 ζω
μέσαι ἦσαν νύκτες. 84. ἐνταῦθα ΪΙερωνυμος Ηλεῖος, πρε-
“ a a , a Υ , φ
σβύτατος ὧν τῶν Προξένον λοχαγῶν, ἤρχετο λέγειν woe.
‘H “ > ὃ Α Ν x Ν ς »"»" Ν ’
μῖν, ὦ ἀνδρες στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοὶ, ὁρῶσι τὰ παροντα
4 Α 4 Ta’ “a N ¢ A ’ v4
ἐδοξε καὶ αὐτοῖς συνελθεῖν καὶ ὑμᾶς παρακαλέσαι, ows
, ¥ 4 3 / ΄ 3 ¥
Bovaevoaipeba εἰ te δυναίμεθα ἀγαθὸν. λέξον δ΄, edn,
δ \ © wo a ef \ ιν roa 3 “΄
καὶ ov, ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, ἅπερ καὶ πρὸς ἡμᾶς. 885. εκ τούτου
4 , ἴω 9 “ “ “ Ν a 3
λέγει τάδε Ἐενοφῶν. ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ παντες ἐπι-
’ [2 Ν \ / ἃ Ν 3 ,
στάμεθα ore βασιλευς καὶ Τισσαφέρνης ovs μεν ἐδυνηθησαν
, ¢ ra a ” nm” d > ,’
συνειλήφασιν ἡμῶν, τοῖς δ᾽ ἄλλοις δῆλον OTL ἐπιβουλεύ-
ς Δ ΄ 3 / Coa ’ Άᾶ
ουσιν, ὡς ἢν δύνωνται atrorécwow. ἡμῖν δὲ γε οἶμαι
, / 6 / x 9 A a , ,
παντὰα ποιητέα ὡς μήποτ ἐπὶ τοῖς βαρβάροις γενωμεθα,
3 Ν a A , 3 a 249 “A 9
αλλὰ μᾶλλον, ἣν δυνώμεθα, ἐκεῖνοι eh ἡμῖν. 86. εὖ
/ > ἡ ed “ a Ν ed a
τοίνυν ἐπίστασθε OTL ὑμεῖς τοσοῦτοι ὄντες OTOL νῦν συνε-
’ἤ , ¥ Fd 4. ἈΝ A
ληλυθατε μέγιστον ἔχετε καιρόν. ol γὰρ στρατιῶται

Anas. 3, 1] Xenophon’s Advice. Ἷ

e 7 ‘ ς κ᾿ , a 4 Φ a en
οὗτοι πώντες πρὸς ὑμᾶς βλέπουσι, κἂν μὲν ὑμᾶς ορῶσιν
) 4 [4 ν» Ν ς “ 9 ὔ
ἀθύμους, πάντες κακοὶ ἔσονται, ἣν δὲ ὑμεῖς αὐτοί τε
, . ¢ > N ἃ ὔ &
παρασκευαζόμενοι φανεροὶ re emt τοὺς πολεμίους Kas
Ν “ “ 9 oe ψΨ en a
TOUS ἄλλους TWapaKadyre, εὖ ἐστε OTL ἔψονται ὑμῖν Kas
a a ΝΥ ‘4 N é J 9
πειράσονται μιμείσθαι. 87. tows δὲ τοι καὶ δικαιὸν ἐστιν
ry ’ 4 6 “a 4 3 a
ὑμᾶς διαφέρειν TL τούτων. ὑμεῖς yap ἐστε στρατήγοι,
So 9 ξ᾽’ 9 e “ 4
ὑμεῖς ταξίαρχοι καὶ λοχαγοί" καὶ OTE εἰρηνῆ ἣν ὑμεῖς: καὶ
χρήμασι καὶ τιμαῖς τούτων ἐπλεονεκτείτε" καὶ νῦν τοίνυν,
ἐπεὶ πόλεμος ἐστιν, ἀξιοῦν δεῖ ὑμῶς αὐτοὺς ἀμείνους τε
a 7 9 Α , , Ν Ps
Tov πλήθους εἶναι Kat προβουλεύειν τούτων καὶ προπονεῖν,
y ’ὔ Ν A σι “ A ec oa
qv που δέη. 88. καὶ viv πρῶτον μὲν οἶμαι ἂν ὑμᾶς μέγα
9 a 4. , 3 4 @ 3 a σ΄
ονῆσαι τὸ στράτευμα, εἰ ἐπιμεληθείητε ὅπως ἀντὶ τῶν
3 ’ φ ᾽ Ν Ν “ 9
ἀπολωλότων ὡς Τταχίστα στρατηγοι καὶ NOYaYOL ayTiKa=
a ¥ N 3 ,ὕ Jas “a # a
τασταθῶσιν. ἄνευ yap ἀρχόντων οὐδὲν ἂν οὔτε καλὸν
” 9 Ν [4 e Ν ,ὕ 4 φ- > “a 3
οὔτε ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο, ὡς μεν συνέλοντι εἰπεῖν, ουδαμοῦ, ἐν
Ν Ν “ “ / e “ LY > 4
de 57 τοῖς πολεμικοῖς παντάπασιν. ἢ μὲν γὰρ εὐταξία
, a ¢e - 3 , ‘ # 3 ’
σωζειν δοκεῖ, ἡ δὲ ἀταξία πολλοὺς ἤδη ἀπολώλεκεν.
3 \ Ν , \ Χ 4 a,’
39. ἐπειδὰν δὲ καταστήσησθε Tous ἄρχοντας ὅσους δεῖ, ἣν
ny oY ¥ ’ , Q ’
Kat TOUS ἄλλους στρατίιωτας συλλεγητε Kat παραθαρρύ-
A δι. 4 3 a A “ Ν
VTE, οἶμαι ἂν υμᾶς πανυ ev καίρῳ ποιησαι. 40. νυν yap
Υ ". εἐ a 9 7 e , 47 δ 9 > 8 nN
tows καὶ ὑμεῖς αἰσθάνεσθε ws αθυμως μεν ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὰ
Ψ 17 Ν nN \ , Ψ cd > 3
ὅπλα, αθύμως δὲ πρὸς Tas φυλακάς" ὥστε οὕτω Ὑ Exo
3 3 q@ wv , > “ ¥ “
των οὐκ οἶδα ὁ TL ἂν τις χρήσαιτο AUTOS ELTE νυκτὸς
δέοι Te εἴ Σ ἡμέ 41. ἣν δέ τις αὐτῶν τρέψη τὰ
εὐ τί εἰτε Και nf pas. : ἣν O€ τις πάις ρ ἢ τὰς
e [οὶ “a
γνώμας, WS μη TOUTO μονον ἐννοωνται TL πείσονται αλλα
ιν ’ , ‘\ 3 , ΝΥ > ἢ
καὶ TL ποίησουσι, πολυ εὐθυμότεροι ἔσονται. 42. εἐπιστα»
a Ν ὦ Vv A , 2 3, 3 ‘ ς 3 a
σθε γὰρ δὴ ore οὔτε πλῆθος eat οὔτε toxus ἡ ἐν τῷ
“ / a 3 > e ’ A Ν ἴω
πολεμῷ τὰς νίκας ποιοῦσα, αλλ ὁποτερον ἂν συν τοῖς
a A n 3 / ¥ 2." ‘ ’
θεοῖς ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐρρωμενέστεροι two emt τους πολεμὲ-
4 e 3 Ν Ἃ e 3 S > U
ous, τούτους ὡς ἐπὶ TO πολὺ οἱ ἀντίοι ov δέχονται.
3 , ¥ 9 Χ ἈΝ “Ὁ Η͂ e ’
48. ἐντεθύυμημαι δ᾽ ἐγωγξε: ὦ ἄνδρες, καὶ τοῦτο, OTL OTTOTOL

Φ

8 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. ΓΧεν.

Ἁ 4 a 3 “ ’ 3 “ a
μεν pactevovot ζὴν εκ παντὸς τρόπον εν τοῖς πολεμικοῖς,
φ ‘N a δ 9 n e > A δ N 9
OUTOL μὲν κακῶς τε καὶ αἰσχρῶς ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολυ αποθνή-
e , Ν Q \ , 93 ,
σκουσιν, ὁπόσοι δὲ Tov μὲν θανατον ἐγνωκασι πᾶσι κοινὸν
4 ., ἰδὲ 9 ὔ ον Ν “ ΄“ 9
εἶναι καὶ ἀναγκαιον ἀνθρωποις, περὶ δὲ τοῦ καλῶς ἀπο-
4 3 / 4 ¢ on “ , 9
θνήσκειν ἀγωνίζονται, τούτους ὁρῶ μᾶλλον πως εἰς τὸ
A ) , . o& KH A 2 ,
γῆρας αφικνουμένους, καὶ ἕως ἂν ζῶσιν εὐδαιμονέστερον
’ ἃ δ eoa A A " 3
διάγοντας. 44. ἃ καὶ ἡμᾶς δεῖ νῦν καταμαθόντας, ἐν
ν Ν a? > “4 ¥ ? δ 9
τοιούτῳ yap καιρῷ ἐσμεν, αὑτοὺς τε ἄνδρας ayaous εἶναι,
Ἁ Α Mv “
καί TOUS ἄλλους παρακαλειν.
ς aS τιν 9 / VY as a 9
45. O μεν ταῦτ εἰπὼν eravoato. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον εἶπε
/ > Ν ’ ‘ 9 A a
Χειρίσοφος. AdAa πρόσθεν μεν, ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, τοσοῦτον
’ > 4φ ¢ » 3 ω 9 A
μόνον σε ἐγίγνωσκον ὅσον ἤκουον AOnvaioy εἶναι, viv δὲ
\. 9 a 2 9? φ 4 \ 7 Ν /
καὶ ἐπαινὼ σε Ef οἱἷἱς λέγεις TE καὶ πράττεις, καὶ βουλοί-
A d ’ 9 4 \ 4 A
μὴν ἂν ote πλείστους εἶναι τοιούτους" κοινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη
. 9 ; LS oa \ λ o ¥ 3.9
TO ἀγαθὸν. 46. καὶ νῦν, edn, μὴ μελλωμεν, ὦ avdpes, αλλ,
> , ¥ ec oa ς ’ ¥” ,.͵ζ΄,
ἀπελθόντες ἤδη αἱρεῖσθε οἱ δεόμενοι ἄρχοντας, καὶ ἑλόμενοι
PY 9 N , a , Ν Ν ε ,
ἥκετε εἰς τὸ μέσον τοῦ στρατοπέδου, καὶ τοὺς αἱρεθέντας
Mv δ > ? “Ὁ a Ν ¥. ,
@QyeTE’ ἔπειτ EXEL σνγκάλουμεν τους ἄλλους στρατιωτας.
° , ca ΝΜ Ν , € a \
παρέστω δ᾽ ἡμῖν, ἔφη, καὶ Τολμίδης ὁ κῆρυξ. 47. καὶ
Ψ a? 9 SN > + e Ν I. 2 δ ͵
GLA TAVT ELTOV AGVETTN, WS μὴ μελλοιτὸο ἀλλα “περαίνοιτο
Ν , 3 ’ e Γ ¥ > N Ν
τὰ δέοντα. . ἐκ τούτου ἠρέθησαν ἄρχοντες ἀντὶ μεν Κλε-
’ ’ Ν > SS as , *-
ἄρχου Τιμασίων Aapsdavevs, ἀντὶ δε Σωκράτους Ἐανθικλῆς
3 “ 3 1 \ 3 / ὔ 9 Ὡ ἐγ ‘ 7
Ἀχαιὸς, ἀντὶ δὲ Αγίου Κλεάνωρ Αρκας, avti δε Μένωνος
3 “ 3 Ν Ν 4 μπῇ A 3 A
Φιλήσιος ᾿Αχαιὸς, ἀντὶ de Προξένου Ξενοφῶν A@nvaios.
ΤΙ "E Q δὲ a e / δὲ e 4 N
. ἔπει oe ἤρηντο, ἡμέρα τε ayedov uTepaive, Kas
N , @ εν ¥ 2 a
εἰς TO μέσον ἧκον οἱ ἄρχοντες. καὶ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προ-
Ἁ 4 ‘ [4 3 “
φυλακὰς καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν TOUS στρατιώτας. ETE
y a ” > 7 ἴω Ν
δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται συνῆλθον, ἀνέστη πρῶτον μεν
/ \ »¥. @ 4 ¥
Χειρίσοφος ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος, καὶ ἔλεξεν ὧδε. 2. Ω avdpes
a Ν Ν ’ , 3
στρατιῶται, χάλεπα μὲν τὰ παρόντα, ὅποτε ἀνδρῶν στρα-
a ’ ’ Α A “ wn
τηγῶν τοιούτων στερόμεθα, καὶ λοχαγῶν καὶ στρατιωτῶν,

ANAB. 3, I1.] Chirisophus: Xenophon. — 9

ιν ¥ Ν ε ? \ 9 a e 4 4
πρὸς δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ οἱ ἀμφὶ ᾿Αριαῖον ob πρόσθεν σύμμαχοι
Ψ 4 6 “a oe 4 a 3 ry ’
ὄντες προδεδώκασιν ἡμᾶς" 8. ὅμως δε δεῖ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων
9 υ ΄ Α Ν ς ’ 3 4 aA
ἄνδρας ayabous τελέθειν καὶ wn ὑφίεσθαι, ἀλλὰ πειρᾶσθαι
df a = , a a ᾽ 9 ‘
ὅπως ἣν μεν δυνωμεθα καλῶς νικῶντες σωζωμεθα" εἰ δε
“ > “ “~ 9 , e 4 “ o
LN, ἀλλὰ καλῶς ye ἀποθνήσκωμεν, ὑποχείριοι δὲ μηδέποτε
° “a “ f 4 \ 4, ¢ A
γενώμεθα ζῶντες τοῖς πολεμίοις. οἶμαι yap av ἡμᾶς
mn noe . » δ e 4 , 24
τοιαῦτα παθεῖν οἵα Tous ἐχθρους οι θεοι ποιήσειαν. 4. ἐπὶ
’ [4 9 ’ > ’ Ν Ἅλ φ 9 b
τούτῳ Κλεανωρ Ορχομενιος ἀνέστη καὶ ἔλεξεν ὧδε. ᾿Αλλ
ec “«᾿ “ > ν Ν 4 3 ͵ Ν ,»,
ὁρᾶτε μεν, ὦ ἄνδρες, τὴν βασιλέως επιορκίαν καὶ ασέ-
ς “ “ Ν e 3 ’ aA 4
βειαν, ὁρᾶτε Se τὴν Τισσαφέρνους ἀπιστίαν, ὅστις λέγων
e / Ν nt / \ \ , a
ὡς γείτων τε en τῆς Ἑλλάδος καὶ περὶ πλείστου ἂν
’᾽ A A AY . 8 a 3" 4 ,
ποιήσαιτο σῶσαι ἡμᾶς, καὶ ἐπὶ TOUTOLS αὐτὸς ὁμόσας
ς » ΣΝ Ν Ν ΣΝ 3 , Na ‘
ἡμῖν, autos δεξιας Sous, autos efatrarnoas συνέλαβε Tous
Ν Ν Ia , ’ IC? 2 \ 4
oTpatnyous, καὶ οὐδὲ Δία ξένιον ndecOn, ἀλλα Κλεάρχῳ
’ ’ ϑ ΄ 4 4 ,
καὶ ὁμοτράπεζος γενόμενος αὐτοῖς τούτοις εξαπατήσας
ΟΝ Mv 3 7 ϑ Ν A e a ’
τους ἄνδρας ἀπολώλεκεν. 5. ᾿Αριαῖος δε, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέ-
’ [4 “ 3 , Ν᾿ 3 ΄
λομεν βασίλεα καθιστωναι, καὶ eOwKapev καὶ ἐλαβομεν
Ἀ ἈΝ , 3 4 ‘ @ 4 ‘ ‘
πιστὰ μὴ προδωσειν ἀλλήλους, καὶ οὗτος OUTE τοὺς θεοὺς
7 ¥ ra 7 > Ν ?
δείσας οὔτε Κῦρον τεθνηκότα αἰδεσθεὶς, τιμώμενος μάλιστα
ΟΝ ΄ a aA N N 3 ὔἢ 3 4 ϑ 4
ὑπο Κύρου ζῶντος. νῦν πρὸς τους ἐκείνου ἐχθίστους ἀποστὰς
ς «a Ν , Λ A w“~ “A 9 “
ἡμᾶς Tous Kupov φίλους κακῶς ποιειν πειρᾶται. 6. adda
4 . € . 9 4 ~ Ν a “A o «Ἂ(ἷ
τούτους μεν ot θεοι «ποτίσαιντο' ἡμᾶς δὲ δεῖ ταῦτα opav-
’ ? A y ΟΝ a 3 Ν Ul
Tas μήποτε ἐξαπατηθῆναι ert ὑπὸ τούτων, ἀλλὰ μαχομέ-
e A ’ rd a Ψ A a a
vous ws ἂν δυνωμεθα κράτιστα, τοῦτο 6 τι ἂν δοκῇ τοῖς
θεοῖς πάσχειν.
> , a a) ᾽ ’ >
7. Ex τούτου Ξενοφῶν ἀνίσταται ἐσταλμένος ἐπὶ πόλε-
ς wr t ” / a e Ν
μον ὡς ἐδύνατο κάλλιστα, νομίζων, εἴτε νίκην διδοῖεν οἱ θεοὶ,
XN , a A , ¥ a
TOV κάλλιστον κόσμον TH νικᾶν πρέπειν, εἴτε τελευτᾶν
’ 9 A y n , e “ 9 , 2
δέοι, ορθῶς ἔχειν τῶν καλλίστων ἑαυτὸν ἀξιώσαντα ἐν
7 “ A ’ Ψ
τούτοις τῆς τελευτῆς τυγχώνειν' τοῦ λόγου δὲ ἤρχετο
φ Ν 4 9 ’ x. 3 4
woe. 8. Την μὲν τῶν βαρβάρων ἐπιορκίαν τε Kat ἀπιστίαν

10 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. — [Xen.

, 4 ) ,.ϑ 7 ‘ e « a 9
λέγει μὲν Κλεάνωρ, ἐπίστασθε δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς, οἶμαι. εἰ
‘ > ’ ͵ Σ᾽ es N , 9° > 2
μεν οὖν βουλευόμεθα πάλιν avtois διὰ φιλίας ἱέναι, avayKn
ς “ ω 3 ’ ¥ ecoa Ἁ ‘ .
ἡμᾶς πολλὴν αθυμίαν ἔχειν, ὁρῶντας καὶ TOUS OTPATHYOUS,

ἃ 4 , 2 a e N > / @ 4
dt διὰ πίστεως αὑτοίς EavTOUS ενεχείρισαν, ola πεπόνθα-
3 , , ‘ a / Φ
σιν" εἰ μέντοι διανοούμεθα συν τοῖς ὅπλοις ὧν τε πεποιή»
7 3 fr 3 [ω] N Ων Ἁ Α “A
κασι δίκην ἐπιθεῖναι αὑτοῖς, Kat τὸ λοίπον διὰ παντὸς
0 3 “ 4, s a“ ry N ς oa δ
πολέμου αὑτοῖς ἰέναι, συν τοῖς θεοῖς πολλαὶ ἡμῖν καὶ
4 / 9 ON a A N ; 3 rn
καλαὶ ἐλπίδες εἰσὶ σωτηρίας. 9. Τοῦτο δὲ λέγοντος αὐτοῦ
, , : > ’ 3 ς a ‘A
πτάρνυται τις" ἀκούσαντες δ᾽ οἱ στρατιῶται πάντες μιᾷ
e a , δ ’ ee ee a 4 a
ὁρμῇ προσεκύνησαν τὸν θεὸν. καὶ ὁ Ἐενοφῶν εἶπε" Δοκεῖ
ΦΧ 3 Ἁ * 4 ς a s ᾿] “
μοι, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἐπεὶ περὶ σωτηρίας ἡμῶν λεγόντων οἰωνὸς
a 4 Ν δῇ “Ἅ 3 , ve 6 a Oe a [4
τοῦ 4ιὸος τοῦ σωτῆρος εφανη, εὔξασθαι τῷ θεῳ τούτῳ
΄ , Ψ KA a 3 ’ , 9 ,
θύσειν σωτήρια ὅπου av πρῶτον εἰς φιλίαν χώραν αφικώ-
7 +) N a ΝΜ ᾽ ,
μεθα, συνεπεύξασθαι δε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις θεοῖς θύσειν κατὰ
΄ AY f a -φ 3 ¥ 4 4 Ν a“
δύναμιν. καὶ ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτ΄, ἔφη, avaTewuTw THY χεῖρα.
ee / 9 , ¥ ν 2 ’
Kai ἀνετειναν ἅπαντες. εκ τουτου ηὔξαντο καὶ ἐπαιάνισαν.
3 Ν \ ‘ A A a 9 ¥ } ΝΣ
ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ τῶν θεῶν καλῶς εἶχεν, ἤρχετο πάλιν woe.
93 Ν Ν ν 2
10. Ervyyavov λέγων OTL πολλαί καὶ καλαὶ ελπίδες
φ » 9 ’ “a ‘ Ν e ἴω Ἁ 2 nA
ἡμῖν εἶεν σωτηρίας. πρῶτον MEV γὰρ ἡμεῖς μὲν εμπεδοῦ-
Ν A a Ψ ¢ ον / 3 , ’
μεν tous τῶν θεῶν ὅρκους, ot δὲ πολέμίοι ἐπιωρκηκασὲ
\ " \ Ν by eo U4 e/
τε καὶ Tas σπονδὰς Kat Tous ὅρκους λελύκασιν. οὕτω
> 9 4 ὅν a \ ͵ 3 / 4 ‘
δ᾽ ἐχόντων, εἰκὸς τοῖς μὲν πολεμίοις ἐναντίους εἶναι τοὺς
‘ Coa ‘ , cf ε / > ν» Ν
θεους, ημῖν δὲ συμμάχους, οἵπερ ἱκανοί εἰσι καὶ τοὺς
’ Ἁ Ν ΄“ Ν ‘ ‘ A 9
μεγάλους ταχυ μίικροὺυς ποιεῖν, καὶ TOUS μικρους, κἂν εν
4 μ 3 aA a ’ ΕΣ
Secvois ὦσι, σώζειν εὐπετῶς, ὅταν βούλωνται. 11. ἔπειτα
ΛΝ.» ΄ ἈΝ | ‘ Ν a 4 a e ’
δὲ αναμνήσω γὰρ ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς τῶν προγόνων τῶν ἡμετέ-
f »“ Iaa φ 2 ao e a 4
pov κινδύνους, wa εἰδῆτε ws ἀγαθοῖς τε ὑμῖν προσήκει
, 4 s “ “ δ 3 , “ «
εἶναι, σωζονταί τε σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς καὶ ἐκ πανν δεινῶν οἱ
3 ’ 9 , Ἁ Ν a ιν a Ν 3 “
ἄγαθοι. ελθόντων μὲν yap Περσῶν καὶ τῶν συν αὑτοῖς
"AA f 9 , 3 δ 9 ,
παμπληθεῖ στόλῳ ὡς αφανιούντων αὖθις tus ᾿Αθηνας,
Ι4 n 9 “ 9 ἴω , 9 4 3 ὔ
υποστῆναι αὐτοῖς Ἀθηναῖοι τολμήσαντες ενίκησαν αὐὑτοῦς.

Anas. 3, τι. Aenophon’s Speech. 11

. 3g / 3 , eo? /
12. καὶ εὐξώμενοι τῇ Αρτέμιδι ὁπόσους κατακάνοιεν τῶν
3 4 , a a A 3 Q >
πολεμίων τοσαῦτας χιμαίρας καταθύσειν τῇ θεῷ, ἐπεὶ οὐκ
9 ε N eon ¥ > a > 3 ᾿
εἶχον ixavas eupew, ἐδοξεν αὑτοῖς κατ ἐνιαυτὸν πεντακο-
ye ᾽’ \ sy» ry a ᾽ ͵ Υ rT]
σίας θύειν, καὶ ett καὶ νῦν αποθύουσιν. 13. ἔπειτα ore
? ῦΨ 3 , x 9 / A
Ξέρξης ὕστερον ἀγείρας τὴν ἀναρίθμητον στρατιὰν ἦλθεν
2 A \ ε / © , > 7 ee ,
ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα, καὶ τότε ἐνίκων οἱ ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι
Ν ’ , 4 4 A N “ r
TOUS τούτων Tpoyovous καὶ κατὰ γὴν καὶ Kata θάλατταν.
e ym Ἁ ,ὕ a ‘ ’ , δ Ζ΄
ὧν ἔστι μεν τεκμήρια ὁρᾶν τὰ τρόπαια, μέγιστον δὲ μαρτύ-
3. ’ ΄ἃ Λ 3 φ e “ 3 ῆ a
ριον ἡ ἐλευθερία τῶν πόλεων εν als ὑμεῖς ἐγένεσθε καὶ
3 ’ 3 ’ 4 ΝΥ ’ὔ 3 ἃ “
ἐτράφητε" ovdeva yap ἄνθρωπον δεσπότην, adda τοὺς
Ἁ a vd ’ +] 3 >
θεους προσκυνεῖτε. τοιούτων μέν ἐστε προγόνων. 14. Ou
4 Ν ΠῚ ’ 3 “a e €¢ ~ Yd ? a 3 4
μὲν δὴ τοῦτο γε ἐρῶ, ὡς ὑμεῖς καταίσχυνετε αὐτοὺς" αλλ,
Υ ν ς᾽» 3.4} e 9 ͵ , a
οὕπω πολλαί ἡμέραι αφ ov αντιταξάμενοι τούτοις τοῖς
ΕῚ 4 3 4 4 e [2 > A 3 κ΄ ‘
εκείνων EXYOVOLS πολλαπλασίους ὑμὼν αὑτῶν ενίκατε συν
vad vad Ν \ Ν “\ a 4
τοῖς θεοῖς. 15. καὶ τότε μὲν δὴ περὶ τῆς Κύρου βασι-
’ ” 4 ἢ ͵ a e Sane /
λείας ἄνδρες ἦτε ἀγαθοί" νῦν δ᾽, ὁπότε περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας
/ e > ἡ 3 Ν ; ς oa , Ν
σωτηρίας ὁ ἀγὼν ἐστι, πολυ δῆπον ὑμᾶς προσήκει καὶ
) , Ν , 4 3 " δ
ἀμείνονας καὶ προθυμοτέρους εἶναι. 16. ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ
/ a 4 9 “ ‘ ’
θαρραλεωτέρους νῦν πρέπει εἶναι πρὸς Tous πολεμίους.
Ἅ Ν ¥ ¥ > A [2 “A ΝΜ
τότε μὲν Yap ἄπειροι ὄντες αὐτῶν τό τε πλῆθος ἄμετρον
vad ed 9 ᾽; Ν 4 ,
ὁρῶντες, OWS εἐτολμήσατε σὺν τῷ πατρίῳ φρονήματι
3., 3 > 4 A Ἅ ’ “ “ wv wv 4 “A
ἑέναι εἰς αὐτοὺς" νῦν δε, ὅποτε καὶ πεῖραν ἤδη ἔχετε αὐτῶν,
oe λ 4 , ¥ \ ς α
ott θέλουσι καὶ πολλαπλάσιοι ὄντες μὴ δέχεσθαι υμας,
4m ΟΦ « 4 7 κι Ἅ ’ὔ
τί ETL ὑμῖν προσήκει τούτους φοβεῖσθαι; 17. Mnde μέντοι
a a ὃ / ΝΜ 3 « Κ 7 , θ ‘ δ.
τοῦτο μεῖον doknte ἔχειν, εἰ οἱ Κύρειοι προσθεν συν ημῖν
, a 3 , ‘ φ , ’ 3
ταττόμενοι νῦν ἀφεστήκασιν. ἔτι γὰρ οὗτοι κακίονες εἰσι
“ 6,3 ¢ A e 4 ¥ a“ Ν 3 4
τῶν vp ημὼν ἡττημενων" εφευγον γοῦν πρὸς εκείνους
4 e A sy 2 9 Λ “ wv A
καταλίποντες ἡμᾶς. τοὺς ὃ εθέλοντας φυγῆς ἄρχειν πολυ
a Ἁ a“ Y , A ? A e /
κρεῖττον σὺν τοῖς πολεμίοις ταττομένους ἢ EV TH ἡμετέρᾳ
, e a 9 4 e A > a of ec An A 3
τάξει ὁρᾶν. 18. Ey δὲ τις ὑμῶν αθυμεῖι οτι ἡμῖν μὲν οὐκ
>, AN e a a Y ’ XN ’ 3 θ ,
εἰσιν ἱππεῖς, τοῖς δὲ πολεμίοις πολλοὶ πάρεισιν, ἐνθυμη-

12 ‘Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

4 ε 4 € ΛΝ. Y¥ / , »
Onre ὁτι οἱ μύριοι ὑππεῖς οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ μύριοί εἰσιν ἄνθρω-
Ἢ e “ A Ν [4 3 ‘ ΄ 3 Ν ’ Mv
ποι ὑπο μεν γὰρ ἱππὸυ ev μάχῃ our πώποτε οὔτε
“ e
δηχθεὶς οὔτε λακτισθεὶς ἀπέθανεν, ot δὲ ἄνδρες εἰσὶν ot
a ed A 3 a t κι
ποιοῦντες ὁ τι ἂν ἐν ταῖς μάχαις γίγνηται. 19. οὐκοῦν
A e 4 ae a 9 > 4 3 4 4.

TOV ἱππέων πολὺ ἡμεῖς ET ἀσφαλεστέρου οχήματος ἐσμεν"
ς Ν >.>? ὦ , ’ > Cc oA
οἱ μὲν yup ep tmmwv κρέμανται, φοβούμενοι οὐχ ἡμᾶς
’ 3 Q Q “ ΄“ 6 a > F NN “Ἢ ὔ
μόνον, ἀλλα καὶ τὸ καταπεσεῖν" ἡμεῖς ὃ ἐπὶ γῆς βεβηκό-

\ , 293 , / ¥ , Ν
és πολυ μεν ἐὐχυροτέρον παίσομεν, ἢν τις προσίῃ, πολυ
“a «sn
δὲ μᾶλλον ὅτου av βουλωμεθα τευξόμεθα. evi μόνῳ
’ ee “Ὁ ec oA 4 3 a 3 ,
προέχουσιν οὖ ππεις ἡμᾶς " φεύγειν αὑτοῖς ἀσφαλέστερον
3 A Cor > Ar as N \ , a
ἐστιν ἢ ἡμῖν. 30. Εἰ de δὴ τὰς μὲν μάχας θαρρεῖτε, ὅτι
Ἁ 3 ’ ca ’ ς ’ὔ aN A
δὲ οὐκέτι ἡμῖν Τισσαφέρνης ἡγήσεται οὐδὲ βασιλεὺς
4 \ 4 A Μ“ ’ ’ a
ἀγορὰν παρέξει, τοῦτο ἄχθεσθε, σκέψασθε πότερον κρεῖττον
6 ’ὔ » \ 3 ὔ ¢ #
Τισσαφερνὴν ἡγεμόνα ἔχειν, ὃς ἐπιβουλευων ἡμῖν φανερὸς
ϑ “A ἃ A e a μέ ὃ ’ ἐ a θ ἤ
ἐστιν, ἢ OVS ἂν ἡμεῖς avdpas λαβόντες ἡγεῖσθαι κελεύυωμεν,
\ ¥ Φ NS eo a , Ν Ν
δὲ εἴσονται ὅτι, ἦν TL περὶ ἡμᾶς ἁμαρτάνωσι, περὶ τὰς
e a Ν / e 4 7 Ν \
ἑαυτῶν ψυχὰς καὶ σώματα apaptavovot’ 921. τὰ δὲ
93 , , > A a 3 A > φ
ἐπιτήδεια πότερον ὠνεῖσθαι κρεῖττον ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἧς
φ n “ é na 3 ’ Ἁ A
OUTOL παρεῖχον, μικρα μέτρα πολλοῦ ἀργυρίου, μηδὲ τοῦτο
wv ” A 3 δ 3 aA ,
ETL ἔχοντας, ἢ αὐτοὺς λαμβάνειν, ἤνπερ κρατῶμεν, μέτρῳ
4 A dd 4. > v ~
χρωμένους ὁπόσῳ av ἕκαστος βούληται. 22. Εἰ δὲ ταῦτα
\ 4 ΥΩ / \ ‘N ‘ ¥
μὲν γιγνώσκετε OTL κρείττονα, τοὺς δὲ ποταμοὺς ἄπορον
/ 9 Ν A e “ 3 A lA
νομίζετε εἶναι, Kat μεγάλως ἡγεῖσθε εξαπατηθῆναι διαβαν-
’ 3 ¥ “a ‘ 4
τες, σκέψασθε εἰ apa τοῦτο καὶ μωρότατον πεποιήκασιν
, ‘ ν 4 N , a
οἱ βάρβαροι. πάντες yap ποταμοὶ, ἣν Kat πρόσω τῶν
Ν ¥ 4 ἐς: τῷ ‘ \ ‘ δ
πηγῶν ἄποροι ὦσι, προϊοῦσι πρὸς tas πηγὰς διαβατοὶ
ask δ 4 ’ 9 a,
γίγνονται, οὐδὲ τὸ γόνυ Bpéyovtes. 23. Εἰ δὲ μήθ᾽ οἱ
4 / a ¢ an a 3a?
ποταμοὶ διήσουσιν ἡγεμὼν τε μηδεὶς ἡμῖν φανεῖται, οὐδ
A ¢ia 3 , 3 , " \ A ° 2?
as ἡμῖν ye ἀθυμητεον. ἐπιστάμεθα yap Mucous, οὖς οὐκ
A ” , 9 / ¥ >
av ἡμῶν φαίημεν βελτίους εἶναι, ot. βασιλέως ἄκοντος ἐν
a , ’ , \ 2 , N t
τῇ βασίλεως χωρᾳ πολλάς τε Kat εὐδαίμονας καὶ μεγάλας

Anas. 3, τι. | Xenophon’s Speech. 13

9 a 93 ,ὔ Ν 4 e 4 ,
πόλεις οἰκοῦσιν, ἐπιστάμεθα δὲ Πισίδας ὡσαύτως, Avxaovas
Ν “ 2 Ν τ Ω͂ 3 a J AY 3 Α
δε καὶ αὑτοι εἰδομεν, OTL Ev τοῖς πεδίοις τὰ ἐρυμνὰ κατα-
, “ 7 4 “ “ e [οὶ
λαβόντες τὴν τούτων χώραν καρποῦνται. 934. καὶ ἡμᾶς δ᾽
a ΝΜ ¥ A ͵ Ν Φ ¥ e
av ἔφην ἔγωγε χρῆναι μήπω havepous εἶναι olxade wpun-
, 3 Ν 7 ς 2 a 7 7
μένους, ἀλλα κατασκευάζεσθαι ws αὐτοῦ που οἰκήσοντας.
Φ oS Ν ra) Ν N \ 6 ,
οἶδα yap ὅτι καὶ Μυσοῖς Bactrevs πολλους μὲν ἡγεμόνας
Ἅ / ‘ ϑὰ , ζω b Λ 3 ’
ἂν δοίη, πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἂν ὁμήρους τοῦ ἀδόλως ἐκπέμψειν, καὶ
{ ’ , >A 9 “" Q 93 Ἃ t 4
ὁδοποιήσειέ γ᾽ ἂν αὑτοῖς, καὶ εἰ συν τεθρίπποις βούλοιντο
9 lA SN “a 9) ἃ aw) ὦ 4 a 9 3 ,
ἀπιέναι. καὶ ἡμῖν y ἂν old ὅτι τρισάσμενος ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίει,
> ¢7 e “ ’ 4 3 Ἁ “
εἰ ἑώρα ἡμᾶς μένειν παρασκεναζομένους. 38. ἀλλα yup
, ν 4 Φ ’ ᾽ \ A . 9 3 ἢ
δέδοικα μη,ἂν ἅπαξ μάθωμεν ἀργοι ξῆν καὶ ἐν ἀφθόνοις
, δ , δ \ a a δ ,
βιοτεύειν, καὶ ἥηδων δε καὶ Περσῶν καλαῖς καὶ μεγάλαις
Ν Ν 4 e a » [4 e la
γυναιξὶ καὶ παρθένοις ὁμίλεῖν, μὴ ὥσπερ οἱ λωτοφαάγοι
2 , A ¥ aA a 9 ἽΝ
ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἰκαδε ὁδοῦ. 26. δοκεῖ οὖν μοι εἰκὸς
Sa a Ἂν 3 Ne , ‘ \ ‘
καὶ δίκαιον εἶναι, πρῶτον εἰς τὴν Ελλαδα καὶ πρὸς Tous
9 , a > a \, 9 a e
οἰκείους πειρᾶσθαι ἀφικνεῖσθαι, καὶ ἐπιδεῖξαι τοῖς Ελλησιν
Ψ ¢ uF / ων 3 a Y a 5 3 ᾽
OTL exovTes πένονται, ἐξον αὑτοῖς τοὺς νῦν OLKOL ἀκλήρους
2 ) , , a 3
πολιετεύοντας ἐνθάδε κομισαμένους πλουσίους ὁρᾶν. ἀλλὰ
ν a , a 9 Ν ra) [“ a ’
Yap, ὦ ἄνδρες, πάντα ταῦτα Tayada δῆλον OTL τῶν κρατούν-
3 ’ A N A n A tA 4
των ἐστί. 2%. Τοῦτο én δεῖ λέγειν, TWS ἂν πορενοίμεθα
ς 2 / Ν 93 4 , e ’
τε ὡς ἀσφαλέστατα, καὶ εἰ μάχεσθαι δέοι, ὡς κράτιστα
7] n N 7 ¥ a a)
μαχοίμεθα. “πρῶτον μεν τοίνυν, ἔφη, δοκεῖ μοι κατακαῦσαι
Ν ς / A ¥ “ὕ Ν 4 ᾽ὔ ec oa A
Tas ἁμάξας ἃς ἔχομεν, wa pn τὰ ζεύγη ἡμῶν στρατηγῇ,
2 ἈΝ σ Ἃ a a ’ Σ »
adda πορευώμεθα o1Tn ἂν TH στρατιᾷ συμφέρῃ" ἐπειτα
νι ON ᾿ ua φ ᾿ ay δ
καὶ TAS OKNVAS συγκατακαῦσαι. αὕται yap αὖ ὄχλον μεν
4 ¥ ra 3 Ian tA >] Ν ,
παρέχουσιν ἄγειν, συνωφελοῦσι 6 οὐδὲν οὔτε εἰς TO μάχε-
3 » N \ 3 , ¥ ¥ N ‘ A
σθαι ovr εἰς τὸ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἔχειν. 328. ἔτι δὲ καὶ τῶν
¥ a N \ 2 , . ¢ ,
ἄλλων σκευῶν τὰ περιττὰ «ἁπαλλαξωμεν, πλην ὁσα πολε-
ῦΨ a , a a ¥ 5" oe a ‘
μου ἕνεκεν ἢ σίτων ἢ ποτῶν ἔχομεν, LW WS WAELTTOL MEV
ς΄» 2 ~ ee a e 3 7 ‘N a
ἡμῶν εν τοῖς ὑπλοῖς ὦσιν, ὡς ἐλάχιστοι δε σκευοφορῶσι.
4 Ν Ν > ἡ d 3 ,
κρατουμένων μὲν yap ἐπίστασθε ort πάντα ἀλλοτρια"

14 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. ΓΧΕΝ.

“A ΙΝ a Ν Ν ’ a , ε
ἣν δὲ κρατῶμεν, καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους δεῖ σκευοφόρους ἡμε-
4 , ’ 3 a ὦ 8 ,
Tepovs νομίζειν. 29. Λοιπὸν μοι εἰπεῖν oTrep Kat μέγιστον
/ 4 eon Ν Ν ω ’ὔ cd 3 ’
νομίζω εἰναι. ορᾶτε γὰρ καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους OTL οὐ προ-
3 ἴω 9 Λ “ ig “a 4. 4M \
σθεν eEeveyxeiy ἐτόλμησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς πόλεμον, πρὶν τοὺς
Ν ς “ / ¥y ἈΝ a
στρατήηγους ἡμῶν συνέλαβον, νομίζοντες ὄντων μὲν τῶν
3 ’ \ e ζω ᾿ « ‘ 4 Con
ἄρχοόντων, καὶ ἡμῶν πειθομένων, ἱκανοὺς εἶναι ἡμᾶς περι-
4 “a 4 / Ν Ἁ wv 3 ’
γενεσθαι τῷ πολέμῳ" λαβόντες δε τοὺς ἄρχοντας, ἀναρχίᾳ
Ἃ \ 3 Ἷ > + ς α 3 , a 9
ἂν καὶ ἀταξίᾳ ενομιζὸον ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσθαι. 80. δεῖ οὖν
N Ν Ἁ Ψ 3 4 / Ἁ
πολυ μὲν τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἐπιμελεστέρους γενέσθαι TOUS
A “ ’ Ἁ Α Ἁ > 4 > r
νῦν τῶν πρόσθεν, πολὺ δὲ τοὺς ἀρχομένους EVTAKTOTEpPOUS
ΗΝ ᾽ὔ a “ ¥ “ A ’
kat πειθομένους μᾶλλον τοῖς ἄρχουσι νῦν ἢ πρόσθεν.
Δ , 2 ιᾳ4ἅ / \ ὅν awd ,
81. ἣν δὲ τις ἀπειθῇ, ἣν ψηφίσησθε τὸν ἀεὶ ὑμῶν ἐντυγχώ-
Ἁ ry x , ff e ΠῚ a
VOVvTa σὺν τῷ ἄρχοντι κολάζειν, οὕτως οἱ πολεμίοι πλεῖ-
3 4 4 “ Ν a e ἡ /
στον ἐψεύσμενοι ἐσονται" τῇδε yap TH ἡμέρᾳ μυρίους
Ψ 9 3 eon 7 Ἁ 3 ‘ 9 4
ὄψονται ἀνθ ἐνὸς Κλεάρχους, τοὺς οὐδενὶ ἐπιτρέψοντας
.»Ἷ»Ἶ 4 3 Ἁ Α Ν ¥ / ¥
κακῷ εἶναι. 82. Adda yap καὶ περαίνειν ἤδη ὥρα" ἴσως
Ἁ e 4 > + 4 Ω 4 a a
yap οἱ πολεμίοι αὐτίκα παρέσονται. OT@ οὖν ταῦτα δοκεῖ
x o * ε / a4 /
καλῶς ἔχειν, ETLKUPWOUTW WS τάχιστα, LY ἔργῳ περαίνη-
3 4 ” 4 A ’ , “ 9
ται. εἰ δὲ TL ἄλλο βελτιον ἢ ταύτῃ, τολμάτω Kal ὁ ἐδὲ-
4 ͵ Ν A 4 4
ὠτῆς διδάσκειν" πάντες, yap κοινῆς σωτηρίας δεόμεθα.
\ a / 9 3 > Ρ0ΟὨῆ} ͵7
88. Μετὰ ταῦτα Χειρίσοφος εἶπεν" AXX εἰ μὲν τινος
9. a A ’ ῷ ὔ a ἐν 3 ,
ἄλλου δεῖ πρὸς τούτοις οἷς λέγεν Ξενοφῶν, καὶ avtixa
ἢ n N gt oA ” n ε /
ἐξεσται ποιεῖν" ἃ δὲ viv εἰρηκε δοκεῖ pot ὡς τάχιστα
, 3, 4 ΛΝ cf a a 2
ψηφίσασθαι apiotov εἶναι" καὶ ὁτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀνα»
, . a > » Ψ 3 ‘ ‘
TELVUTW τὴν χειρᾳ. aveTewav ἅπαντες. 84. Avactus δε
ω 4 A 9 ¥ 3 ’ φ a
πάλιν εἶπε Ἐενοφῶν. “2 avdpes, ἀκούσατε wv προσδεῖν
a A (iA / e ω »“ῪὝ ΩΓ ef.
δοκεῖ μοι. δῆλον ore πορεύεσθαι ἡμᾶς δεῖ ὅπου ἕξομεν
N49 , > 42 \ , 2 \ ᾽ ͵
Ta ἐπιτηδεια" axovw δὲ κώμας εἶναι καλὰς οὐ πλέον
¥ ’ 9 ΄, > A 4 / 2
εἰκοσι σταδίων ἀπεχούσας" 88ὅ. οὐκ ἂν οὖν θαυμάζοιμι εἰ
e / ef e Ν 4 \ \ ,
Ot πολέμιοι ---- ὥσπερ οἱ δειλοὶ κύνες τοὺς μὲν παριόντας
5 , , Ν ’ a , δ ‘ !
ιωκουσίὲ τε καὶ δάκνουσιν, ἣν δύνωνται, τοὺς δὲ διώκοντας

AnaB. 3, I11.] The Order of March. 15

4 9 4 3 4 δ. 3 A 3 a
devyovoty — εἰ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡμίν ἀπιοῦσιν εἐπακολουθοῖεν.
y 9 3 ’ δ κ᾿“ v4
86. ἰσως οὖν ἀσφαλέστερον ἡμῖν πορεύεσθαι πλαίσιον
’ σι a Cd Ν ’ὔ \ ¢ ᾿
ποιησαμένους τῶν ὅπλων, LYA τὰ σκευοφορα καὶ ὁ πολὺυς
¥ 3 3 4 9 9 4 “a 2 ἢ é
ὄχλος ἐν ασφαλεστέρῳ ῃ. εἰ οὖν νὺν αποδειχθείη τίνα
Ν A , Ἁ Ν ’ a
χρὴ ἡγεῖσθαι τοῦ πλαισίου καὶ τὰ πρόσθεν κοσμεῖν, Kai
, >, A “A wn e 4 > 4 > 9%
τίνας ἐπὶ τῶν πλευρῶν ἑκατέρων εἶναι, τίνας δ᾽ ὁπισθοφυ-
in 3 a , ς ,ὕ ¥ ?
λακεῖν, οὐκ ἂν ὅποτε οἱ πολέμιοι ἔλθοιεν βουλεύεσθαι
¢ oa / b \ ΄ 2 4 2 δὺ "» ’ 3
ἡμᾶς δέοι, ἀλλὰ yp@ped ἂν ευθυς τοις τεταγμένοις. BY. εἰ
Ν 4 Μ ᾿ ea > », ? Ν
μὲν οὖν ἄλλο τις βέλτιον Opa, ἄλλως ἐχέτω" εἰ δὲ μὴ,
, ‘ e a 3 Ν εν 4 4 ?
Χειρίσοφος μεν ἡγοῖτο, ἐπειδὴ καὶ Δακεδαιμονιὸς ἐστι"
A Ν “ φ 4 4 “ , “
τῶν δὲ πλευρῶν ἑκατέρων δύο TW πρεσβυτάτω στρατηγὼ
3 4 δ 9 ἴω δ᾽ e “ «ς ’ 5) 2
εἐπιμελοίσθην" οπισθοφυλακοῖμεν ὃ ἡμεῖς οἱ νεωτατοι, Eyw
x 4 “ “A 9 “ “ A 4
τε καὶ Τιμασίων, τὸ νῦν εἶναι. 88. TO δε λοιπὸν πειρωμε-
᾽ὔ A ’ , 4 A aN /
vou ταύτης τῆς τάξεως, βουλευσόμεθα ὃ TL ἂν ἀεὶ KpaTte
a 9 b ’ ¥ ea “ ,
στον δοκῇ ewat. εἰ δὲ τις ἄλλο ὁρᾷ βελτιον, λεξωτω.
3 Ν Ν 3 ιν 3 4 9 ct a a 3
Ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδεὶς ἀντέλεγεν, εἶπεν" “Οτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ava-
’ Ν a ¥ a a / ¥
τεινάτω τὴν χεῖρα. ἔδοξε ταῦτα. 839. Νῦν τοίνυν, ἔφη,
> a a \ ΄ ".ὦ a
ἀπιόντας ποίειν δεῖ ta δεδογμένα. καὶ ὅστις τε ὑμῶν
‘N 3 ᾽ὔ 2 θ “ iS a 4 θ > NS 3 θὲ 4 :
Tous οἰκείους ἐπιθυμεῖ δεῖν, μεμνησθω ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς εἶναι
> ΣΝ ¥ v4 a Ψ ~ » A
ov yup ἔστιν ἄλλως τούτου τυχεῖν" ὅστις τε EnV ἐπιθυμεῖ,
’ a a Ν Ἁ 7 “
πειράσθω νικᾶν᾽ τῶν μεν γὰρ νικώντων TO κατακαΐίνειν,
n \ ὁ ,ὕ 2 ’ 3 ᾽ ν΄ Υὶ \
τῶν δὲ ἡττωμένων TO ἀποθνήσκειν ἐστί" Kat εἰ τις δὲ
ὔ 3 a ’ a \ ,
χρημάτων επιθυμεῖ, κρατεῖν πειράσθω" τῶν yap νικώντων
7 oN Ν Ν e a ’ ‘N “ a e
ἐστὶ καὶ Ta εαυτῶν σωζξειν καὶ τὰ τῶν ἡττωμένων λαμ-
/
βαάνειν.
4 ’ > J: “ 3 ’
III. Τούτων λεχθέντων ἀνέστησαν, καὶ ἀπέλθοντες
, ν , N \ N a Ν a
κατέκαον Tas ἅμαξας καὶ τὰς σκηνας, Tov δὲ περιττῶν
μ ν , , , 3 , Ν \o¥ 9
oTou μὲν δέοιτο Tis μετεδίδοσαν αλλήλοις, Ta δε ἀλλα εἰς
“ a 3 ’ὔ a , ἴω
Τὸ πῦρ ἐρρίπτουν. ταῦτα ποιήσαντες ἠριστοποιοῦντο.
3 , ‘ > an Ψ / se a
ἀριστοποιουμένων Se αὐτῶν ἔρχεται Μιθριδάτης συν ἱππεῦ-
id 7 “ id Ν Ν 3
σιν ὡς τριάκοντα, Kat καλεσάμενος Tous oTpAaTYYyOUs εἰς

16 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. ΓΧεν.

ἐπήκοον, λέγει ὧδε. 3. ᾿Εγὼ, ὦ ἄνδρες" Βλληνες, καὶ Κύρῳ
πιστὸς ἦν, ὡς ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε, καὶ νῦν νὰν εὔνους " καὶ
ἐνθάδε εἰμὲ σὺν πολλῷ φόβῳ διάγων. εἰ οὖν ὁρῴην ὑμὰς
σωτήριόν τι βουλευομένους, ἔλθοιμι ἂν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, καὶ τοὺς
θεράποντας πάντας ἔχων. λέξατε οὖν πρός με τί ἐν νῷ
ἔχετε, ὡς φίλον τε καὶ εὔνουν καὶ βουλόμενον κοινῇ σὺν
Coa Ν , “ ’ a
ὑμῖν τὸν στόλον ποιεῖσθαι. 8. Βουλευομενοις τοῖς στρα-
“" 3 ’ , κ᾿ »¥. 7
τηγοῖς ἔδοξεν ἀποκρίνασθαι τάδε" καὶ ἔλεγε Χειρίσοφος"
Ἥ a ὃ a 3 “ nA Coa > , ¥ ὃ ὃ ΄
μὲν δοκεῖ, εἰ μὲν τις εᾷ ἡμᾶς ἀπιέναι oLKade, διαπορευ-
Ν , ς Ἃ ’ > ’ ry ’
εσθαι τὴν ywpav ws av δυνωμεθα ἀσινεστατα" ἣν δὲ
e a “ ς a 3 ΄ a ’ὔ’ e Ἅ
TLS ἡμᾶς τῆς ὁδοῦ ἀποκωλύῃ, διαπολεμεῖν τούτῳ ὡς ἂν
’ / 3 ᾽ 3 a /
δυνώμεθα κράτιστα. 4. Ex τούτου ἐπειρᾶτο Μιθριδάτης

’ ” ¥ 4 3 A
διδάσκειν ws ἄπορον ein βασίλεως ἄκοντος σωθῆναι.
μή Ν > , v4 e ’ ¥ Ν “\ a
ἔνθα δὴ ἐγιγνώσκετο ὅτε ὑπόπεμπτος εἴη" καὶ Yap τῶν

? 4 9 ? / 7
Τισσαφέρνους τις οἰκείων παρηκολούθει πίστεως ἕνεκα.

\ 3 / Ian 7 a va ᾽ὔ 3
5. καὶ ἐκ τούτου ἐδόκει τοῖς στρατηγοῖς βελτιον εἶναι
, / > 7 4 ¥ 99
δόγμα ποιήσασθαι τὸν πόλεμον ἀκήρυκτον εἶναι ἐστ᾽ EV
a / V4 Ν ’ N
τῇ πολεμίᾳ εἶεν" διέφθειρον yap προσιόντες τοὺς στρατι-
4 [4 / / 3 /
wTas, καὶ ἕνα ye λοχαγὸν διέφθειραν, Νίκαρχον Apxada,
of 3 Ἁ Ν 3 4 e δ
καὶ WYETO ἀπιὼν νυκτὸς σὺν ἀνθρωποῖς ὡς εἴκοσι.
Ἁ a / Ν ’ “

6. Mera Ταντᾷ; ἀριστήσαντες Kat hae Sei τὸν Za-
πάταν ποταμὸν, ἐπορεύοντο τεταγμένοι τὰ ὑποζύγια καὶ
τὸν ὄχλον ἐν μέσῳ ἔχοντες. οὐ πολὺ δὲ προεληλυθότων

> «a 9 f / e
αὐτῶν, ἐπιφαίνεται πάλιν ὁ Μιθριδάτης, ἱππέας ἔχων ὡς

ΑΝ ὔ [4 e /
διακοσίους, καὶ τοξότας καὶ σφενδονήτας ws τετρακοσίους,

4 ? Ἁ ἈἉ 3 , ΝΥ ’ \ e 4.
μάλα eXadpous καὶ evSwvous. Ἶ. καὶ προσῇει μὲν ὡς φίλος
Ἅ Ν Vo @ ? ΝΟ) Ἁ > ἡ 3 , €
ὧν πρὸς τοὺς Ελληνας, ἐπεὶ 6 ἐγγὺς ἐγένετο, εξαπίνης οἱ

‘\ 2 Aa > 7 Ν δ a Ν Ἀ ee 5» “
μὲν αὐτῶν ἐτόξευον, καὶ ἱππεῖς καὶ πεζοὶ, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσφενδόνων

Ἁ > Ff e Ἁ 3 4 a e 4
καὶ eTiTpwoKov. ot δὲ ὀπισθοφύλακες τῶν Ελληνων
4 Ν A > , 3 as sf \ a
ETAT YOY μεν κακῶς, ἀντεποίουν ὃ οὐδεν" οἱ τε yap Κρής

΄ A A ’ ΑΨ \ ¥
tes βραχύτερα τῶν Περσῶν ἐτοξευον, καὶ ἅμα ψιλοὶ ὄντες

ΑΝΑΒ, 3,111.) Aftack by Mithridates. 17

¥ a Ψ , [4 3 ‘ ,
εἰσω TOV ὅπλων KATEKEKAELYTO, OF Te ἀκοντισταὶ βραχύ-
> 4 a e 3 a “ “a 3
τερα ἠκόντιζον ἢ ὡς ἐξικνεῖσθαι τῶν σφενδονητῶν. 8. ἐκ
7 = in δ... 7 , 4 . Jas ὡς
τούτου ξενοφῶντι εδόκει διωκτέον εἶναι" καὶ ἐδίωκον τῶν
n A Ἂν “ 3 4
τε ὁπλιτῶν καὶ τῶν πελταστῶν Ol ἔτυχον GUY αὐτῷ ὁπι-
“ ? “ 3 4 [4
σθοφυλακοῦντες " διώκοντες δὲ οὐδένα κατελαμβανον τῶν
»᾿ ς n 4 a Υ̓
πολεμίων. 9. οὔτε γὰρ ἱππεῖς ἦσαν τοῖς Ελλησιν, οὔτε
e Ἁ ‘ Ν 3 A 4 In 5
ot πεζοὶ Tous meCous ἐκ πολλοῦ φεύγοντας ἐδύναντο κατα-
λ 8 v4 > ὃ Pek Au \ ? er » > 8
apPuvey ἐν ολίγῳ Kopi’ πολυ γὰρ οὐχ οἷον τε ἣν ἀπὸ
a f 4 / e Ν 4
τοῦ ἄλλου στρατεύματος διώκειν. 10. οἱ Se βάρβαροι
ἢ a ‘ ΄ , > 7 ’ ” ,
ἱππεῖς, καὶ φεύγοντες ἅμα ἐτίτρωσκον εἰς τοὔπισθεν τοξεύ-
ΣΝ A ef ε »ν » ’ ed
οντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἵππων, ὁπόσον δὲ διωξειαν ot Ελληνες,
a 2 2 a 7, ¥ of
τοσοῦτον πάλιν ἐπαναχωρεῖν μαχομένους ἔδει. 11. ὥστε
“a 6 ᾽ oe. a 3 ’ tA a Ν
τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης διῆλθον ov πλεὸον πέντε καὶ εἰκοσι στα-
¢ 4 A 4 ’ 4 4 , δ Ν Λ
Siwy, ἀλλὰ δείλης ἀφίκοντο εἰς τὰς κώμας. Ἔνθα δὴ πάλιν
3 ᾽ @- ‘ , Α e 4 a
ἀθυμία ἦν. καὶ Χειρίσοφος καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτατοι τῶν στρα-
a td a 3 ra (4 Ia / 8 a 4.
τηγῶν Ξενοφῶντα ῃτιῶντο, ὅτι ἐδίωκεν ἀπὸ τῆς φάλαγγος
Ν 2. 9 , ‘ Α ’ ar a
καὶ αὐτὸς τε extvduveve, καὶ TOUS πολεμίους οὐδὲν μᾶλλον
In / 7 9 2 . A 4
ἐδύνατο βλάπτειν. 12. ἀκούσας Se Ἐενοφῶν ἔλεγεν ὅτι
δ “ “, a % x, 8 ,. 3 a) ᾽ὔ 4 4
ορθὼς αιτιῷντο, καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἔργον αὕτοις μαρτυροίη. ᾿Αλλ
> 9 , , > Ses eon ? a
eyo, ἐεφη, ἠναγκάσθην διώκειν, ἐπειδὴ ἑώρων ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ
/ a ‘ , 3 a Ν 3 ,
μένειν κακῶς μὲν πασχοντᾶς, ἀντιποιεῖν δε οὐ δυναμένους.
9 Ν Ἂν 3 7 2 A “ φ “ ᾽ A
. 18. ἐπειδὴ δὲ eduwxopev, αληθῆ, ἔφη, ὑμεῖς λέγετε" κακῶς
Χ ἮΝ σι ar a ? , Ν 4
μὲν yap ποιεῖν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐδυνάμεθα Tous πολεμίους,
3 “A Ἁ ὔ “ A 9 -“ ld
ἀνεχωροῦμεν δὲ πάνυ χαλεπῶς. 14. τοῖς οὖν θεοῖς χάρις
ef 3 x A , 3 Ν ‘ 94 ἡ [χά
ὅτι OU GUY πολλῇ ῥωμῃ ἀλλὰ σὺν ολίγοις ἦλθον, ὥστε
; \ \ , a , @ , a
βλαψαι μὲν μὴ μεγάλα, δηλῶσαι δὲ ὧν δεόμεθα. 15. viv
Ν εν ’ , νΝ a ef ¥
yap ot μὲν πολέμιοι τοξεύουσι καὶ σφενδονῶσιν ὁσον οὔτε
Bi K A ’ ΄ SY ¥ coy Ν β ΔΛ
t Κρῆτες ἀντιτοξεύειν δύνανται, οὔτε οἱ ἐκ΄ χειρὸς Baddov-
3 o ce * Ν > Ν , Ν ν 3
τες ἐξικνεῖσθαι. ταν δὲ αὐτοὺς διωκωμεν, πολὺ μὲν οὐχ
er 4 "ἙΝ “ ’ὔ’ 4 3 4 4
οἷον τε χωρίον ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατεύματος διώκειν, ἐν ολέγῳ
\ ‘ ¥ Ν N a , , 2
δε, οὐδ᾽ εἰ Taxus εἴη, πεζὸς πεζὸν ἂν διώκων καταλάβοι ἐκ

18 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. ΓΧΕν,

4 e/ ¢€ a 4 4 / ͵ Μ
τόξου ῥύματος, 16. Ἡμεῖς οὖν εἰ μέλλομεν τούτους εἰργειν
ec “ , ’ ea 4
wate μὴ δύνασθαι βλάπτειν ἡμᾶς πορευμένους, σφενδονη-

σι Ν ,ὔ a . ¢€ / 3 ͵ “
τῶν τὴν ταχίστην δεῖ καὶ ἱππέων. axovw δ᾽ εἶναι ἐν τῷ

’ 6 a € , @ N a 3
στρατεύματι ἡμῶν Ῥοδίους, ὧν τους πολλοὺς φασιν ἐπί-
a εν Ν / > A ΄
στασθαι σφενδονάν, καὶ τὸ βελος αὐτῶν καὶ διπλάσιον

a “A A A 9 n x

φερεσθαι τῶν Περσικῶν σφενδονῶν. 1. ἐκεῖναι yap, διὰ
Ν ( a ’; a 4 Sf \ 93 “
To χειροπληθεσι τοῖς λίθοις σφενδονᾶν, ἐπὶ βραχὺ ἐξικνοῦν-
e Ne Ν ω ’ > / A
ται, ot δὲ Ῥοδιοι καὶ ταῖς μολυβδίσιν ἐπίστανται χρῆ-
A Φ a > , ’ ,
σθαι. 18. ἣν οὖν αὐτῶν ἐπισκεψώμεθα τίνες πέπανται
odevd ’ α Ν ’ N ὃ “ > A ? td a δὲ
ovas, καὶ τούτῳ μὲν δῶμεν αὐτῶν ἀργύριον, τῷ δὲ
¥ ’ 35 ΝΜ 3 4 A Ν
ἄλλας πλεέκεῖν ἐθέλοντε ἀλλο ἀργύριον τελῶμεν, καὶ τῷ
ΝΣ Ω , Δ Ν. > »
σφενδονᾶν ἐντεταγμένῳ ἐθελοντε ἄλλην τινὰ ατέλειαν
¢ 7 Υ̓͂ N “a e Q δι.» 3 fa)
ευρίσκωμεν, LOWS τινὲς φανοῦνται ἱκανοὶ ἡμᾶς ὠφελεῖν.
. Ὅρω oe πποὺυς ὄντας ἐν τῷ στρατεύματι, TOUS μέν
»2 “ N Ν A ’ 5 4
τινας Tap ἐμοί, Tous δὲ τῶν KXeapyou καταλελειμμένους,
\ ‘ . oo” ᾽ ’ a A
πολλοὺς δε Kat ἄλλους αἰχμαλώτους σκευοφοροῦντας. ἂν

9 U 4 3 / ’ \ 3 a

οὖν τούτους πάντας εἐκλέξαντες σκευοφόρα μεν αντιδῶμεν,
Ἁ λῦ 3 ‘ / ¥ ‘ _@ 7
tous δὲ ἵππους εἰς ἱππέας κατασκευάσωμεν, LOWS καὶ OUTOL
‘ 4 3 4 ” a \
TL τοὺς φεύγοντας ἀνιάσουσιν. ἐδοξε ταῦτα. 20. Kas
4 A “ a 4 κω / > »9
ταύτης τῆς νυκτὸς σφενδονῆται μεν εἰς διακοσίους ἔγενοντο,
er ‘ ve re? ΞΕ ne so ,
ἑπποι δὲ καὶ ὑπηεῖς ἐδοκιμάσθησαν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ εἰς πεντη-
+. 4 Ν ’ 93 ἴω 3 ’ ὶ
κοντα, καὶ σπολάδες καὶ θώρακες αὑτοῖς ἐπορίσθησαν, κα
Cf 3 ’ ’ 4 3 a
ἵππαρχος δὲ ἐπεστάθη Λύκιος ὁ Πολυστράτου A@nvaios.
/ A ᾽ὔ ον e , n 9 ͵
IV. Μείναντες δε ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν, τῇ ἄλλῃ ἐπορεὺυ-
΄ 4 Ν 3 Ἀ»ν
OVTO πρῳαίτερον ἀναστάντες" χαράδραν yap αὑτοὺς ἔδει
A 3 €e 9 “A . 9 a 3 σι ὔ
διαβῆναι, eb ἢ ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ ἐπιθοῖντο αὐτοῖς διαβαϊίνου-
’ “ Ἅ 9 "“ ζ ,
σιν οἱ πολέμιοι. 2 διαβεβηκοόσι δε αὑτοῖς πάλιν φαίνεται
4 ¥ e 4 4 ’ Ν
ὁ Μιθριδάτης, ἔχων ὑππέας χιλίους, τοξοτας δὲ καὶ oder
3 / ( Ν ¥
Sovnras εἰς τετρακισχιλίους * τοσούτους yap ἤτησε Τισσα-

, ΟΜ, ς , A 4 μ
φέρνην, καὶ ἔλαβεν ὑποσχόμενος, ἂν τούτους λάβῃ, παρα-
ὃ ’ 9 A Ν “Ἐλλ ’ ¢ 3 a

WOELY AUT@ TOUS mvas, καταφρονησας, orl ἐν τῇ

Anas. 3, Iv.] Ruins of Nineveh. 19

ἢ aA 9 ’ » Ψ a Jas 4
πρόσθεν προσβολῇ ολίγους ἔχων ἔπαθε μὲν οὐδεν, πολλα
‘ 3 “A 3 Ν Ν ad
δὲ κακὰ ἐνόμιζε ποιῆσαι. 8. ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ “EdAnves διαβε-
9 ~ “A σ 4 .y 4
βηκότες ἀπεῖχον τῆς yapudpas ὅσον ὀκτὼ σταδίους, διέ-
Ne 4 wv δ ’ ;
βαινε καὶ ὁ Μιθριδάτης ἔχων τὴν δύναμιν. παρήγγελτο
x A -“ A 4 \ a a
δὲ τῶν τε πελταστῶν οὗς ἔδει διώκειν, καὶ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν,
N ~ e A » a“ s ε 3 ᾽
καὶ τοῖς immevow εἰρητο θαρροῦσι διωκειν ὡς ἐεφεψομένης
A 3 “ Ν rf
ἱκανῆς δυνάμεως. 4. ἐπεὶ. δὲ ὁ Μιθριδάτης κατειλήφει,
.»ν a N ‘4 3 a 3 ’ a
καὶ ἤδη σφενδοναι καὶ τοξεύματα εξικνοῦντο, ἐσήμηνε τοῖς
Cd a , Ν 7n* ὅθ e , φ ¥
Ελλησι τῇ σάλπιγγι, καὶ evOus ἐθεον ὁμόσε ots εἰρητο,
Aa Ν 2 Ia 2 9 9 wv
καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς ἤλαυνον" οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο, ἀλλ᾽ ἔφευγον
x, A ἈΝ , ? ’ὔ’ a [4 “~ ,
ἐπὶ τὴν χαράδραν. 5. ev ταύτῃ τῇ διωξει τοῖς βαρβάροις
a A 3 a a e é 3 a
τῶν te πεζῶν ἀπέθανον πολλοὶ, καὶ τῶν ἱππέων ἐν TH
, Ν 3. , 9 9 4 Ν Α 3
χαράδρᾳ wot ἐληφθησαν εἰς ὀκτωκαίδεκα. τοὺς δε απο-
2 @ > @
θανόντας αὐτοκέλευστοι οἱ Ελληνες ἠκίσαντο, ws ὅτι
’ “ J ¥ ec oA Ν [1 a
φοβερωτατον τοῖς πολεμίοις evn ὁρᾶν. 6. Kat οἱ μεν
,ὔ ed ’ 3. ὦ Ν α΄ 2
πολέμιοι οὕτω πράξαντες ἀπῆλθον, οἱ δε Ελληνες ἀσφα-
λῶ 4 Ν x “ a e ‘ 3 4 > A “
ὥς πορευόμενοι TO λοῖπον τῆς ἡμέρας, αφίκοντο ἐπὶ Tov
’ “ 3 a ‘4 3 I
Τίγρητα ποταμὸν. %. ἐνταῦθα πόλις ἦν ἐρήμη peyarn,
ed 3 > a 9 / ¥ 3 > N ἐν Ν
ὄνομα ὃ αὑτῇ ἣν Λάρισσα" @xovy δ᾽ αὐτὴν τὸ παλαιὸν
a A gt , > an 4 . 9 , . Ν
Μηῆδοι. τοῦ δε τείχους αὑτῆς ἦν τὸ εὕρος πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι
Ψ > 6 a ͵ e ,
πόδες, ὕψος δ᾽ ἑκατόν" τοῦ δὲ κύκλου ἡ περίοδος δύο παρα-
᾽ 3 4 ἊΝ / ”“ N
σώγγαι" ῳκοδόμητο δὲ πλίένθοις κεραμεαῖς" κρηπὶς δ᾽
a“ \ o& Ν a 4 Ἁ
ὑπὴν λιθίνη, τὸ ὕψος εἰκοσι ποδῶν. 8. ταύτην βασιλεὺς
a 4 ν δ 9 ιν x » ,

ὁ Περσῶν, ὅτε παρα Μήδων τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐλάμβανον Πέρσαι,
a ? ’ ’ a , Ν
πολιορκῶν οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ ἐδύνατο ἑλεῖν" ἥλιον δὲ νεφέλη

3 Λ e ”
προκαλύψασα ἠφάνισε, μέχρι ἐξέλιπον οἱ ἄνθρωποι, καὶ
" Ν / ‘ , 9
οὕτως ἑώλω. 9 Tapa TavTnvy τὴν πολιν ἣν πυραμὶς
N \ Φ ΄,
λιθίνη, τὸ μὲν εὗρος ἑνὸς πλέθρου, τὸ δὲ ὕψος δύο πλέ-
> 4 , \ a ΄ 4 ᾽ a
θρων. ἐπὶ ταύτης πολλοὶ τῶν βαρβάρων ἤσαν, ex τῶν
“ ’ 3 ral 3 a
πλησίον κωμὼν ἀποπεφευγότες. 10. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐπορεύθη-
N Ψ , A NY a ¥ ,
σαν σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασαγγας εξ, πρὸς τειχος ἔρημον μέγα

20 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xxn.

Ν , , Ν 1 9 , ,
πρὸς τῇ πόλει κείμενον" ὄνομα δὲ ἦν τῇ πόλει έσπιλα'
a > + ” 4 Loe 8 ‘ ,
Μῆδοι δ᾽ αὐτήν ποτε wxovv. ἦν δὲ ἡ μὲν κρηπὶς λέθου
- ᾿ N 4 7 a N
ξεστοῦ κογχυλιάτου, TO εὖρος πεντήκοντα ποδῶν, καὶ TO
f 4 3 ΝΣ Ν ’ 3
ὕψος πεντήκοντα. 11. ἐπὶ δὲ ταύτῃ ἐπῳκοδόμητο πλένθι-
a “ Ν » Ss “A Ν' Ν ed
νον τεῖχος, TO μὲν εὕρος πεντήκοντα ποδῶν, TO δὲ ὕψος
e , “A Ν ’ { ’ ἃ ’ 3 a
ἑκατὸν" τοῦ δε κύκλου ἡ περίοδος εξ παρασάγγαι. ἐνταῦ-
4 , Ν 7 A 9
θα λέγεται Μήδεια γυνὴ βασιλέως καταφυγεῖν, ὅτε ἀπώ-
Ν 3 Ν Ν “ A ’
λεσαν τὴν ἀρχὴν ὕπο Περσῶν Μῆδοι. 13.ταύτην δὲ τὴν
’ A ‘N 3 Ia 7
πόλιν πολιορκῶν ὁ Περσῶν βασιλεὺς οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὔτε
4 @. σι ¥ , Ν 9 3 ’᾽ “ ‘
χρόνῳ ελεῖν οὔτε Bia: Zevs δ᾽ εμβροντήτους ποιεῖ τοὺς
2 δ A
ἐνοικοῦντας, καὶ οὕτως ἑάλω.
9 “A 9 “ ff ,
18. ᾿Εντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας
4 9 δὰ Ν AN “ , >
τέτταρας. εἰς τοῦτον δὲ τὸν σταθμὸν Τισσαφέρνης ἐπε-
’ Ψ > ν ε / 4 ¥ δ . 9 ΄
φάνη, οὗς τε αὑτὸς ἵππέας ἦλθεν ἔχων καὶ τὴν Οροντα
’ a “ ’ 4 ¥ N ἃ “
δύναμιν, Tov τὴν βασίλεως Ovyatepa ἔχοντος, Kat ous Κῦρος
ἤ Ν ἃ 4 3 Ν ΑΥ̓͂
ἔχων ἀνέβη βαρβάρους, καὶ ods ὁ βασιλέως ἀδελφὸς ἔχων
a 2? 4 ’ “ᾧᾧ N ΝΜ
βασιλεῖ ἐβοήθει, καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ὅσους βασίλευς ἔδωκεν
3 a τ 4 ’ 4 x 3 4 14 3 “ δ᾽
αὐτῷ, ὥστε τὸ στράτευμα παμπολὺῦ ἐφανη. . EEL
9 Ν 3 “ - A 4 4 ¥ 4
ἐγγὺς ἐγένετο, Tas μὲν τῶν τάξεων εἶχεν ὄπισθεν καταστή-
Ν . 292 \ ͵ Ν 9 rn ‘ ’
σας, Tas δε εἰς Ta πλαγια Tapayayov ἐμβαλεῖν μεν οὐκ
μ 3 ΄ A Ἁ
ἐτόλμησεν, οὐδ᾽ ἐβούλετο διακινδυνεύειν, σφενδονᾶν δὲ πα-
’ Ν ’ ? N N 4 ee ,
ρήγγειλε καὶ τοξεύειν. 15. ere de διαταχθέντες οἱ ᾿ Ῥοδιοι
3 / > 7 Ν Ian
ἐσφενδόνησαν, καὶ οἱ Σκύθαι τοξόται ἐτόξευσαν, Kat οὐδεὶς
¢ of 3 ‘ IAN δ 9 ὔ a ec? 4
ἡμάρτανεν ἀνδρὸς, οὐδὲ γὰρ εἰ πάνυ προυθυμεῖτο ῥᾳδιον ἣν,
Ne / 4 4 ¥ a 9 ’ \
καὶ ὁ Τισσαφέρνης para ταχέως e€w βελῶν amexwpet, Kat
Μ / Ν Ν Ν a
αἱ ἄλλαι τάξεις ἀπεχώρησαν. 16. Καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς
e 4 φ Ν 3 > Φ) ἢ > »
ἥμερας οἱ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο" καὶ οὐκέτι ἐσένοντο
e / A , 3 7 ’ “ e
οὐ BapBapot τῇ τότε ἀκροβολίσει" μακρότερον γὰρ ot
rn a a /
Ῥόδιοι τῶν te Περσῶν ἐσφενδόνων καὶ τῶν πλείστων
A , Ἁ Ν A 9
τοξοτῶν. 2%. μεγάλα δὲ καὶ τὰ τόξα τὰ Περσικὰ ἐστιν"
“ » 4 ὔ A ’ ζω
ὥστε χρήσιμα ἦν ὁπόσα ἁλίσκοιτο τῶν τοξευματων τοῖς

ANAB, 3, Iv. ] The Order of March. 21

‘\ ΙΝ a [4 “ ” UU ?
Κρησὶ, καὶ διετέλουν χρώμενοι τοῖς τῶν πολεμίων τοξεύ-
\ 3 4 7 M” es . ͵ ς @
μασι, καὶ ἐμέλετων τοξεύειν ἄνω tevTés μακράν. εὑρί-
Ἁ \ A \ 4 a ’ 4 Λ
σκετο δὲ καὶ νεῦρα πολλὰ εν ταῖς κωμαῖς, καὶ μόλυβδος,
συ A 5 Ἁ 4
στε χρῆσθαι εἰς τὰς σφενδόνας.
1 8 K Q f Q a e § 3 ‘ ὃ 4
. Καὶ ταύτῃ μὲν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, eet κατεστρατοπεδεύοντο
ec @ A 3 ’ 3 “ ¢€ ξ΄
οἱ “EdAnves κώμαις ἐπιτυχόντες, ἀπῆλθον οἱ βάρβαροι
a 9 A , 3 , “ > “A
μεῖον ἔχοντες ev TH τότε ὠκροβολίσει" τὴν δ᾽ επιοῦσαν
᾿ς. »ν » ed N38 7 4 ᾿
ἡμεραν ἔμειναν ot Ελληνες καὶ επεσιτίσαντο' ἣν yap
Ἁ ἴω 3 A 7 Aa e ( 3 la
πολὺς σῖτος ἐν ταῖς κώμαις. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ επορεύοντο
Α “" 4 \ ’ [χὰ 3 ΄
δια τοῦ πεδίου, καὶ Τισσαφέρνης εἵπετο ἀκροβολιζομενος.
Ν / » f / 4 ,
19. ἔνθα δὴ οἱ“ EXAnves ἔγνωσαν ὅτι πλαίσιον ἰσόπλευρον
Ν , ¥ , e , > » , 2
πονηρὼ τάξις εἰηὴ πολεμίων ἐπομένων. ἀναγκὴ γάρ ἐστιν,
ΕἾ Ἁ A Ν , A ,ὔ ΓΝ fe) ,
ἢν μὲν συγκύπτῃ τὰ κέρατα τοῦ πλαισίου, ἢ ὁδοῦ στενωτέ-
¥ a 9 7 9 , ry ΄ 3 ;
pas οὔσης, ἢ opewy ἀναγκαζόντων ἢ γεφύρας, εκθλίβε-
Ν lA AY a a ao Ν
σθαι τοὺς ὁπλίτας, καὶ πορεύεσθαι πονήρως, ἅμα μεν
/ oS Ἁ “ 4 4 ,
πιεζομένους, ἅμα δὲ καὶ ταραττομένους " ὥστε δυσχρή-
2 > 7 > + ¥ Ψ > 4 ,
στους εἶναι avayKn aTaKToUs ovTas. "30. ὅταν ὃ αὖ διασχη
" , > ff 5 A θ ‘ 4 2 θλ ,

Ta κέρατα, ἀνάγκη διασπᾶσθαι τοὺς τότε ἐκθλιβομένους,
Ἀ Ν ᾽ “ 4, w“ , N 3 a
καὶ κενὸν γίγνεσθαι τὸ μέσον τῶν κεράτων, καὶ αθυμεῖν
\ aa, , , ς , Ν ,
TOUS ταῦτα πάσχοντας, πολεμίων ἐπομένων. καὶ ὁπότε

, , , A ¥ N , ¥
δέοι γέφυραν διαβαίνειν, ἢ ἄλλην τινὰ διάβασιν, ἔσπευδεν
vd 4 ’ a \ 3 , 9
ἕκαστος βουλόμενος φθάσαι πρῶτος" καὶ εὐεπίθετον ἦν
3 “-" “ 4 Ν ‘ “A ΗΓ e
ἐνταῦθα τοῖς πολεμίοις. 21. ᾽Ἔπει δὲ ταῦτ᾽ εἐγνῶσαν οἱ
Ν 3 / ad , 7 N ς “ ” Ν
στρατηγοί, ἐποίησαν εξ λόχους ava exatov avdpas, καὶ

XN 3 4 A 3. ἴω. “ Μ

λοχάγους ἐπέστησαν, καί ἀλλοὺυς πεντηκοντήρας, καὶ ἀλ-
τ 3 ’ /, Ν , ἢ ‘
λους ἐνωμοτάρχας. οὕτω δὲ πορευόμενοι, ὅποτε μεν

,. N , ς» e N
συγκύπτοι τὰ κέρατα, ὑπέμενον ὕστεροι οἱ λοχαγοὶ, ὥστε
Ν 3 “ “ ’ , Ν A "» “
μὴ ἐνοχλεῖν τοῖς κέρασι, τότε δὲ παρῆγον ἐξωθεν τῶν

, ες» ‘ ’ € \ A
κεράτων. 2. o7roTe δὲ διασχοιεν αὖ πλευραὶ Tov πλαι-
3 7 4 Ν ’ μ
σίου, τὸ μέσον ἀνεξεπίμπλασαν, ---- εἰ μὲν στενώτερον ELN

“ 7 “ S ? N ’᾽ ᾿ Ἀ
τὸ διέχον, κατὰ λόχους, εἰ ὃὲε πλατύτερον, κατὰ πεντη-

22 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. (LXE.

A 9 ‘ / Ν 4 3 , Φ 9."
κοστῦς, εἰ δὲ πάνυ πλατυ, κατ᾽ ἐνωμοτίας" ὥστε act
4 “ 4 ? Ν N 4 Ν
ἔκπλεων εἶναι τὸ μέσον. 38. εἰ δὲ καὶ διαβαίνειν τινα

, , ἃ 4g. 3 2 ὔ ᾿ 3 > 23 a
δέον διάβασιν ἢ γέφυραν, οὐκ εταράττοντο, αλλ ἐν τῷ
s e f “ ¥ / A
μέρει οἱ λοχαγοὶ διέβαινον: καὶ εἰ που Seo Te τῆς
, 9 7 φ ͵7 a ͵ 9 ,
φάλαγγος, ἐπιπαρηεσαν οὗτοι. τούτῳ Tw τρόπῳ ETOpEeu-
Ἁ 4

θησαν σταθμους τέτταρας.
€ / NN , 3 , 9 " ’
94. ᾿Ηνίκα δὲ τὸν πέμπτον ἐπορεύοντο, εἶδον βασίλειον
\ N 2." 4 ον “ XN ean ~ “
Tl, καὶ περὶ αὑτὸ κωμας πολλᾶς, τὴν δὲ ὁδὸν πρὸς TO

’ “A XN ’ ς lal ’ ἃ “~
χωρίον τοῦτο dia γηλόφων ὑψηλῶν γιγνομένην, ob καθῆκον
53. N ~ ¥ Ce? 28 6 ’ \ 9 AY N ,
ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους Up ῳ ἣν κωμη. καὶ εἶδον μὲν TOUS λόφους
¥ ed e oN a / ¥ ς ’
ἄσμενοι ot Ελληνες, ὡς εἰκὸς, τῶν πολεμίων ὄντων LITT EWV*

> ἈΝ “ ’ 32 “ / 3 ’ 3.ϑ. "ἈΝ “
25. ἐπεὶ δὲ πορευόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ πεδίον ἀνέβησαν ἐπὲ τὸν

A tA X 4 e 7 N Ν [74 3
πρῶτον γήλοφον καὶ κατέβαινον, ws ἐπὶ τὸν ἕτερον ava-

, ) a 9 , e , ν΄ Ὁ N A
Bawew, ἐνταῦθα ἐπιγίγνονται οἱ βάρβαροι, καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ
e A 3 Ν Ν 4 3 , > 7 eon
ὑψηλοῦ εἰς τὸ πρανες ἐβαλλον, ἐσφενδονων, eroEevoy ὕπο

/ \ ee ΕΝ . 2? ,
μαστίγων" 26. Kat πολλοὺς ετίτρωσκον καὶ ἐκρατησαν

“A ς ’ ᾽ N ὔ 9 Ἀ Ν,)
τῶν Ελληνων γυμνητων, καὶ κατέκλεισαν αὑτοὺυς εἰσω
a ef e/ “ ’ Ν ς 74 Ν
τῶν ὁπλων᾽ ὥστε παντάπασι ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν ἀχρήστοι
9 3 a ¥ Ψ Noe a \ ¢ ,
ἦσαν, ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄντες, καὶ οι. σφενδονῆται καὶ οἱ τοξόται.

3 Ν Ἁ 4 ς ὦ 3 / ’

27. ἐπεὶ δὲ πιεζόμενοι ob Εἔλληνες ἐπεχείρησαν διωκειν,

A Ἁ 93.ϑ A “ Υ͂ 3 fal € “ Μ ς ἣν
σχολῇ μὲν ἐπί τὸ ἄκρον αφικνοῦνται OTALTAL ὄντες, οἱ δε

4 ‘N 3 ’ὔ Λ Ν φ 4 3 4
πολέμιοι ταχὺ ἀπεπήδων. 28. πάλιν δὲ ὁπότε ἀπίοιεν

4 Q Mv / > N 4 Ν 9." a
προς TO ἄλλο στράτευμα, ταῦτα ἔπασχον, καὶ ἔπι TOU

, ’ > ~ 3.» / > Ν a ,
devtépou γηλόφου ταὐυτὰ ἐγίγνετο, ὥστε ἀπὸ TOU τρίτου

/ ¥ 3 a Ν a Ν , “
γηλοῴφου ἐδοξεν αὐτοῖς μὴ κινεῖν τοὺς στρατίωτας, πρὶν
> SN a A a a ’ > 4 “
ἀπο τῆς δεξιᾶς πλευρᾶς TOU πλαισίου ἀνηγαγον πελταστας

nN . oy 3 , Ὁ φ > + e oN a ς
πρὸς τὸ opos. 929. ἐπεὶ ὃ οὗτοι ἐγένοντο ὕπερ τῶν ἕπο-
4 4 > + 3 “ ε vA a
μένων πολεμίων, οὐκέτι ἐπετίθεντο οἱ πολέμιοι τοῖς κατα-
“ , Ν 3 ὔ Ν > 4
βαίνουσι, δεδοικότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν καὶ ἀμφοτέρωθεν
> Oa , ε “ [4 Ν Ν a
QuT@Y γένοιντο οἱ πολεμίοι. 80. Οὕτω τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς
_ δ, ἢ ’ e A nA (AA ἈΝ ἃ ’
ἥμερας πορευόμενοι, οἱ μὲν τῇ ὁδῷ κατὰ τοὺς γηλόφους, οἵ

AnaB. 3, rv.] The Persian Camp. 23

“ + \ ΕΣ ? , 9 ’ 3 ον 4
δὲ κατὰ TO Opos επιίπαρίοντες, αφίκοντο εἰς Tas κωμᾶς
> Ν ’ 3 4 Ἁ Ἀ 4 €
καὶ ἰατροὺς κατέστησαν ὀκτώ" πολλοὶ yup ἧσαν ot τε-

3 A wy e ’ σ΄ιὶ Ν “
τρωμένοι. 81. ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς, καὶ τῶν
4 ff Ν of > 7 . 4 ¥
τετρωμένων ἕνεκα, καὶ ἅμα ἐπιτήδεια πολλα εἶχον, ἄλευρα,
. Ν A ’ , a Y
οἶνον, κριθὰς ἔἕπποις συμβεβλημένας πολλας. ταῦτα δε

4 » 7 “A ’ ,
συνενηνεγμενα ἣν τῷ σατραπεύοντι τῆς χώρας, τετάρτῃ
δ᾽ a καταβαίνουσιν εἰς TO πεδίον.

. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ κατέλαβεν αὐτοὺς Τισσαφέρνης σὺν τῇ
ἀν ἐν ἐδίδαξεν αὐτοὺς ἡ ἀνάγκη “κατασκηνῆσαι οὗ πρῶ-
, N Ν , ” ͵
τον εἶδον κώμην, καὶ μὴ πορεύεσθαι ἔτι μαχομένους " πολ-

3 φ ’ 4 e 3 ’
Aot γὰρ ἦσαν ἀπόμαχοι οἱ τετρωμένοι, καὶ οἱ ἐκείνους
,ὕ \ oe a ͵ ν ὦῷ ’ 3 N
φέροντες, καὶ ot τῶν φερόντων τὰ ὅπλα δεξωμενοι. 88. επεὶ
- 7 . 3 4 2 A 3 ,
δε κατεσκήνησαν, καὶ ἐπεχείρησαν αὑτοῖς ἀκροβολίξεσθαε
e a Ν “ 7 S ‘ A
οἱ βάρβαροι πρὸς τὴν κωμην προσιόντες, πολυ περιῆσαν
οἱ "Ελληνεν" πολὺ γὰρ διέφερον ἐκ χώρας ὁρμῶντες ἀλέ-
ξασθαι, ἢ πορευόμενοι ἐπιοῦσι τοις πολεμίοις μάχεσθαι.
84. ἩΗνίκα δ᾽ ἦν ἤδη δείλη, ὥρα ἦν ἀπιέναι τοῖς πολεμίοις"
x “ 3 ΄ 4 J
οὔποτε yup μεῖον ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο ot βάρβαροι τοῦ
A ῳ ἢ» / Ν A
᾿Ἑλληνικοῦ ἑξήκοντα σταδίων, φοβούμενοι μὴ τῆς νυκτὸς
ew 2 a > oA N ‘ ,
of Ελληνες ἐπιθῶνται αὐτοῖς. 85. πονηρὸν yap νυκτὸς
2 / ’ a \ Φ 7 on A
ἐστι στράτευμα Περσικὸν. οἱ τε yap ἵπποι αὑτοῖς δέδεν-
Ν e > oN XN Ν ’ Ἵ»"» A - a
ται, καὶ ὡς ETL TO πολυ πεποδισμένοι εἰσὶ, τοῦ μη φεύγειν
[4 3 ᾽ 9.2 ’ὔ / ,ὔ a ?
ἕνεκα εἰ λυθείησαν " euy τὲ τις θόρυβος γίγνηται, δεῖ ἐπι-
4 Ν “4 , b \ a n ra) \
cafat tov ἵππον Πέρσῃ ἀνδρὶ, καὶ χαλινῶσαι Se, καὶ
΄ 9 a 7 AN Ν Φ A Ν “
θωρακισθεντα ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον. ταῦτα δὲ πάντα
Ν ΄ ιν / ¥ 4 Ψ
χαλεπὰ νύκτωρ καὶ θορύβου ὄντος. τούτου ἕνεκα πόρρω
3 4 “A e ὔ 3 Ἁ 2 / 3 ‘\
ἀπεσκηνουν Tov Ελλήνων. 86. ἐπεί δὲ εγίγνωσκον αὐτοὺς
cf Υ 3 ’ ‘ ,
EdAnves βουλομένους ἀπιέναι Kat διαγγέλλομενους,
3 ’᾽ ~ 4 ’ 3 4s a
ἐκήρυξε τοῖς "Ελλησι συσκευάζεσθαι ἀκουόντων τῶν πολε-
4 \ ; / 3 ’ “ ’ « 4
μίων. καὶ χρόνον μὲν τινα ἐπέσχον τῆς πορείας οἱ Bap-
3 ‘N Ν 9 a > 4 3 μ 3 Ἀ δ ’
βαροι, ἐπειδὴ δὲ oe ἐγίγνετο, ἀπῇεσαν" ov yap ἐδόκει

24 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

’ 3 ‘ Ν, 4 Ν [4 3 ON XN
λύειν αὐτοὺς νυκτὸς πορεύεσθαι καὶ κατάγεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ
7 9 ἈΝ Ν a 3 4 »¥ e7
στρατόπεδον. 8%. Ἐπειδὴ δε σαφῶς ἀπιόντας ἤδη ἑώρων
e e¢ > tA Ν 3 Ν , 3 f Q
ot EdAnves, emopevovto καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀναζεύξαντες, καὶ
a f ? 7 ‘ / a
διῆλθον ὅσον ἑξήκοντα σταδίους. καὶ γίγνεται τοσοῦτον
‘ a , ef ae , 3 2, »
μεταξυ τῶν στρατευμώτων, ὥστε τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ οὐκ ἐφα-
e Ud 2. Χ a , a Ν , “
νησαν οἱ πολέμιοι, οὐδε TH τρίτῃ" TH δὲ τετάρτῃ νυκτὸς
/ ; ’ 4 e , e ἤ
προέλθοντες καταλαμβάνουσι χωρίον ὑπερδέξιον οἱ βάρ-
ey ed , 3 / ¥
Bapou, ῃ ἐμελλον ot Εἔλληνες παριέναι, axpwvuyiay ὄρους,
ς,3 A e ’ 3 9 \ ‘
vp ἣν ἡ καταβασις ἦν εἰς TO πεδίον.
32 Χ ΝΟ ec? ὔ ᾿ td ‘
. Ἐπειδὴ δε ewpa Χειρίσοφος προκατειλημμένην τὴν
3 / A pom a > a > A \ 2
ἀκρωνυχίαν, Kader Ξενοφῶντα ἀπὸ τῆς οὐρᾶς, καὶ κελεύει
/ XN Ν , χ᾽ Ν ᾽ὔ
λαβόντα τοὺς πελταστας παραγενέσθαι εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν.
Η ν ἃς cy N \ ᾽ 3 3
39. ὁ de Ἐενοφῶν tous μὲν πελταστὰς οὐκ ἦγεν" ἐπιφαι-
’ \ er , Ἁ By / A
vouevpy yap ewpa Τισσαφέρνην καὶ τὸ στράτευμα πᾶν"
a NN N 4 4 ΄ 4 aA ς Ἀ a > A
αὑτὸς δὲ προσελάσας npwra, Te καλεῖς ; ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐτῷ"
¥ eae Λ Ν ς «. e εν a
Efectw ὁρᾶν' προκατείληπται yap ἡμίν ὁ ὕπερ τῆς
7 ’ Ν 3 4 a 9 Ν ?
καταβάσεως λόφος, καὶ οὐκ ἐστι παρελθεῖν εἰ μὴ τούτους
? ’ 3 \ / > » ‘ , ‘
ἀποκόψομεν. ἀλλὰ TL οὐκ ἤγες TOUS πελταστὰς; 40. ὁ δὲ
’ (v4 2 Ia/ > AH A .

Neyer OTL οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ Epnua καταλιπεῖν Ta ὄπισθεν,
/ 3 ’ Ν Ν 7 3 Vv
πολεμίων ἐπιφαινομένων. ᾿ἄλλα μην ὥρα γν» ἐφη, βου-
~ πῶς τις τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀπελᾷ ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου.

. ᾽Ενταῦθα Ἐενοφῶν ὁρᾷ τοῦ ὄρους τὴν κορυφὴν ὑπὲρ
αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἑαυτῶν στρατεύματος οὖσαν, καὶ ἀπὸ ταύτης
ΝΜ > ἈΝ ἈΝ ’ “ Φ ς “ Ν, 4
εφοδον ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον ἐνθα ἦσαν οἱ πολεμίοι, καὶ λέγει"
Κ , » xX / [ ae Cf θ ¢ ’ > SN “

ράτιστον, ὦ Χειρίσοφε, ἡμῖν ἵεσθαι ὡς ταχιστα ἐπὲ τὸ
»y LN A , > ᾽ ὔ e
ἄκρον" ἣν yap τοῦτο λάβωμεν, ov δυνήσονται μένειν οἱ
ς oN A “ὃ A Ἰλλὰ 9 B ae ’ 393. "' “ ’
ὑπερ τῆς ὁδοῦ. ἀλλα, εἰ βούλει, μενε ἐπὶ τῷ στρατεύματι,
> SN 2 Ins , ? Ν “ ’ > oN Ν
eyo ὃ εθεέλω πορεύεσθαι" εἰ δὲ χρῇζεις, πορεύου ἐπὶ τὸ
Μ“ 4 ἈΝ Ν “ 3 ΩῚ 3 Ἁ , a ¥
opos, eyw de μενῶ αὐτοῦ. 42. ἄλλα διδωμί σοι, ἔφη ὁ

. e / 7. e« 7 9 “ a
Χειρίσοφος, ὁπότερον βούλει ἐλεσθαι. εἰπὼν ὁ Bevohav
ff 7 ὔ 3 e a 7 ᾽ ,
OTL VEWTEPOS ἔστιν, αἱρεῖται πορεύεσθαι, κελεύει SE οἱ

Axas. 3, v.] Along the Heights. 20

, ,.Ν a , ¥ ny 4 9 9 8
συμπεμψαι aTO TOU στόματος ἄνδρας" μακρὸν yap ἣν ἀπὸ
~ 2 a“ “
τῆς oupas λαβεῖν.
Nf / ’ Ν 93." a a
43. Kai ὁ Χειρίσοφος συμπέμπει Tous amo τοῦ oTopa-
, ¥ ‘ \ 4 t A ,
τος πελταστὰς" ἔλαβε δὲ τοὺς κατὰ μέσον τοῦ πλαισίου.
i > > 7 > A Ἢ ‘ ’ A
συνέπεσθαι δ᾽ ἐκέλευσεν αὐτῷ καὶ TOUS τριακοσίους, οὺς
ΣΝ 9? a 3 ’ . N A 4 a /
QUTOS εἶχε τῶν ἐπίλεκτων ETL TO στόματι τοῦ πλαισίου.
3 a ’ ? e Ia 7 ’ ear? 2 νι
44. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐπορεύοντο ws ἐδύναντο τάχιστα. οἱ ὃ emt
A ’ a e 3 ’ 3 ἴω Ν 3 “ a
Tov Aoou πολέμιοι, WS ἐνόησαν αὑτῶν THY πορείαν ἐπὶ TO
Ν ΔΝ Υ > NN Φ e A > A Noy
ἄκρον, evOus καὶ αὐτοὶ ὥρμησαν ἀμιλλᾶσθαι ἔπι TO ἄκρον.
3 a Ν Ἁ Ν 4 na e a
45S. καὶ ἐνταῦθα πολλὴ μὲν κραυγὴ ἣν Tov Ελληνικοῦ
7 ὔ a ¢ n \ “
στρατεύματος διακελενομένων τοῖς ἑαυτῶν, πολλὴ δε κραυ-
x a 9 N 7) a e a 4
yn τῶν ἀμφὶ Τισσαφερνὴν τοῖς ἑαυτῶν διακελευομένων.
“ Ἁ 4 > Ns a of a
46. Ἐενοφῶν δε, παρελαύνων ert τοῦ ἵππου, TAPEKENEVETO *
Ww - 494 AN Ν < ’ 4 a ry
Avdpes, νῦν emt τὴν Ελλάδα νομίζετε ἁμιλλᾶσθαι, νῦν
a ‘ e ιν ‘ a A 9. 7 ,
πρὸς τοὺς Waidas Kal τὰς γυναῖκας, νῦν ολίγον ποονήσαντες
Σ Ν Ν Ν ͵ “ Ἁ ς
ἀμαχεὶ τὴν λοίπην πορευσόμεθα. 4%. Σωτηρίδας δὲ ὁ
Σ ’ ? O 3 ? ΝΥ > pa a 3 / “ ‘ \
ἐκυωνιος εἶπεν. Οὐκ εἕ toov, ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, ἐσμὲν" ov μὲν
“ 7,9 @ 3 a 7 SN N A , x 3 /
yap ep ἕππου ὀχεῖ, eyw δὲ χαλεπῶς κάμνω, THY ἀσπίδα
, ν ἃ 3 ΄ a , > 8
φέρων. 48. καὶ ὃς ἀκουσας ταῦτα, καταπηδησας ἀπὸ τοῦ
“ 9 A ΣΝ 3 a 7 ‘ ᾽ I 3
ἵππου, ὠθεῖται αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς τάξεως, καὶ τὴν ἀσπίδα ἀφε-
, ς ar / ¥ 3 , > 7
λόμενος ὡς ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἔχων επορεύετο" ετύγχανε
\ Q , Mv Ν e , ad 9 4 Ἁ
δὲ καὶ θωρακα ἔχων τὸν ἱππικὸν" ὥστε ἐπιέζετο. καὶ
nw Y x ς ’ 4 a \ #
τοῖς μὲν ἔμπροσθεν ὑπάγειν παρεκελεύετο, τοῖς δὲ ὄπισθεν
᾽ e 4 e ΕΝ a
παριέναι: μόλις ἐπομένοις. 49. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται
+. a ἃ ray ον ’ ¥
ma@ovot καὶ βάλλουσι καὶ λοιδοροῦσι τὸν Σωτηρίδαν, ἔστε
3 ’ Ν 3 “ ΄ e \ 3
ἠνάγκασαν λαβοντα τὴν ἀσπίδα πορεύεσθαι. ὁ δὲ ava-
‘ Wd 4 , a 2" a 9 ? Ν ῖ»ν
Bas, ἕως μεν βάσιμα ἣν eri τοῦ ἵππου ἦγεν, ἐπεὶ de ἄβατα
φ a x (vA ¥ “A Ν 4
ἣν, KaTaXIT@V Tov ἱππὸν ἐσπευδε πεζῇ. καὶ φθανουσιν
2" 4 / Ν 4
ἐπὶ τῷ. ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι TOUS πολεμίους.
¥ N ς \ / J δι φ
V. Ἔνθα δὴ οἱ μὲν βάρβαροι στραφέντες ἐφευγον n
og In 7 ς 3 ὦ 9 “ Ad e A
ἕκαστος ἐδύνατο, οἱ δ᾽ “Ελληνες εἶχον τὸ ἄκρον. οἱ δὲ

26 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Χεν.

9 / a9 a 3 , ¥. N
ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην καὶ ᾿Αριαῖον ἀποτραπόμενοι ἄλλην ὁδὸν
¥ .: at 2 N / ’ ’ N ,
ᾧῴχοντο. οἱ δὲ audi Χειρίσοφον, καταβωντες εἰς τὸ πεδίον,
3 rd 3 ’ “" a > A 4
ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο ἐν κώμῃ μεστῇ πολλῶν ἀγαθῶν. ἦσαν
A ΙΝ Ν “ Ν ’ a 3 a
dé καὶ adda κῶμαι πολλαὶ πλήρεις πολλῶν ἀγαθῶν, ἐν
’ a Se μὴ . Th ’ 2 e 4 δ᾽
τούτῳ τῷ πεδίῳ παρὰ τὸν Τίγρητα ποταμὸν. 2. ἡνίκα
4 Λ ᾽ ’ e ’ 3 ’ b a
ἦν Sern, ἐξαπίνης οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπιφαίνονται ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ,
AN a ’ J ’ ; ἴω
καὶ τῶν ᾿Ελληνων κατέκοψαν τινας τῶν ἐσκεδασμένων ἐν
a δί θ᾽ e , ᾿ Ν Ν Ν Ἃλ “ ’
τῷ πεδίῳ καθ ἁρπαγὴν" καὶ γὰρ νομαὶ πολλαὶ βοσκημά-
, 3 “ ’ a a - ,
των διαβιβαζομεναι εἰς TO πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ κατελήφθη-
3 ry ’ὔ Q e \ 3 “A 4
σαν. ὃ. Ἐνταῦθα Τισσαφέρνης καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ. κάειν
2 ’ὔ Ν ’ Ν A ς ’
ἐπεχείρησαν τὰς κῶμας. καὶ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων μάλα ἠθύμη-
,ὕ 4 , ‘ . 9 ’ 9 ’
σαν τίνες, ἐννοούμενον μὴ τὰ επιτήδεια, εἰ κάοιεν, οὐκ
a” e 4 J “ ς A 3 Q
eyotev ὁπόθεν λαμβάνοιεν. 4. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἀμφὶ Χειρίσο-
> 4 > a 4 e ‘ a 3 ιν
gov ἀπῇεσαν ex τῆς βοηθείας " ὁ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν ἐπεὶ κατέβη,
4 - ’ ¢ 9S > ἈΝ a ’ ᾽ ’
παρελαύνων τὰς τάξεις ἡνίκα απὸ τῆς βοηθείας ἀπήντησαν
ed +. e A 9 γ e/ e ’
οἱ ᾿Ελληνες, ἔλεγεν " 5. Opate, ὦ avdpes Ελληνες, ὑφιέν-
“ ’ » [2 ’ 9 A \ [2 3 ΄
Tas την χώραν ἤδη ἡμετέραν εἶναι ; ἃ γὰρ OTE ἐσπένδοντο
4 Ν ’ Ν ’ὕ [4 ΄“" 3 XN
διεπρώττοντο, μὴ κάειν τὴν βασιλέως χωραν, νῦν autos
’;» ¢ 9 a 9 > «af / é φ
καουσιν ὡς ἀλλοτρίαν. αλλ εαν που καταλίπωσι γε αὖ-
“- x. 9 , 4 . ¢ «A 9 A 4
τοῖς τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, ὄψονται καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐνταῦθα πορενομένους.
3 3 4Φ 7 wv a“ - 7 ON ‘
G6. ἀλλ΄, ὦ Xeipicoge, edn, δοκεῖ μοι βοηθεῖν ἐπὶ τοὺς
’ Ρ ΟΝ A e 4 e ‘ ’ὔ; 4
KaovTas ὡς ὑπέρ τῆς ἡμετέρας. ὁ δε Χειρίσοφος εἶπεν.
Οὐ 4 ὃ ae ἱλλὰ Ν 4 a 4 f ἣν
ὕκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ" ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡμεῖς, ἔφη, καωμεν, καὶ
Ν a ,
οὕτω θᾶττον παύσονται.
9 NS at oN Ν Ν 9 e , Ν
ὃ. Επει δὲ ἐπὶ tas oxnvas ἀπῆλθον, οἱ μὲν ἀλλοι περὶ
Ν 3 ’ φ Ν N Ν, ἈΝ δὰ
Ta επιτήδεια σαν, στρατηγοὶ δὲ καὶ λοχαγοὶ συνῆλθον.
. 9 a Ν 9 4 9 Μ Ν A »¥ 9
καὶ ἐνταῦθα πολλὴ ἀπορία nv. ἔνθεν μὲν yap ὄρη ἦν
φ 4 ¥ Ν φ a A Ν ’ e
ὑπερύψηλα, evOev δὲ ὁ ποταμὸς τοσοῦτος τὸ βάθος, ὡς
“ εν , φ 4 , a ’
μηδὲ τὰ Sopata ὑπερέχειν πειρωμένοις τοῦ βάθους.
9 4 9 3 a 4 9 oN e ὔ
5. ἀπορουμένοις ὃ αὑτοῖς mpocedOwy τις ἀνὴρ “Ρόδιος
» 3 N 1 “κῃ , eon 4
εἶπεν. Ἐγω θέλω, ὦ avipes, διαβιβασαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τετρα-

Anas. 3 v.] Plan for bridging the Tigris. 27

’ ς , ry > "λ»νφ , ς , 4
κισχιλίους ὁπλίτας, ἂν ἐμοὶ ὧν δέομαι ὑπηρετησήτε, Kat
, Ν 3 ’ ν @& ’
τάλαντον μισθὸν πορίσητε. 9. ἐρωτώμενος de ὅτου δέοιτο,
3 a ΨΥ 4 4 “ > ¢ a r
Ασκῶν, ἔφη, δισχιλίων δεήσομαι" πολλὰ 6 ὁρῶ προβατα
QA 4 \ a , ἃ 3 4 ‘ ’
καὶ αἶγας καὶ βοῦς καὶ ὄνους, ἃ ἀποδαρέντα και φυσηθέντα
͵ “a , δ , ’ Ν ‘ ᾿Ξ
ῥαδίως ἂν παρέχοι τὴν διάβασιν. 10. δεησομαι δε καὶ τῶν
- e a ‘Ne , ΄ 7 \
δεσμῶν οἷς χρῆσθε περὶ ta ὑποζύγια." τούτοις ζεύξας tous
’ Ν Ν 2 , ς “ σ΄ με Ν ,
ἀσκους προς ἀαλληλοῦυς, ορμίσας ἕκαστον ἀσκὸν λίθους
, , \. » Ν 4 2 ’ \ oe ὃ Ν
ἀρτῆσας καὶ ἀφεὶς ὥσπερ ἀγκύρας εἰς TO ὕδωρ, διαγαγὼν
4 “ff ’ 3 ~ ed Ν A 3 ’ὔ
καὶ ἀμφοτέρωθεν δησας, ἐπιβαλῶ ὕλην καὶ γὴν ἐπιφορήσω "
og ‘ 4 > > » , ¥
Al. ὅτι μὲν οὖν ov καταδύσεσθε αὐτίκα μάλα εἰσεσθε"
a \ ? “ ’ Υ̓ d “A Ν ω Ψ a
mas yap ἀσκὸς δύο ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι" ὥστε δε
ν , ¢ ὦ Δ ¢ a ’ 3 Ω
μὴ ολισθάνειν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἡ γῆ σχήσει. 33. Ακουσασι
Ρ᾿ a a ᾿ ᾿ 9 ΄ ’ mn 9
ταῦτα τοῖς στρατηγοῖς TO μεν ἐνθύμημα χαρίεν εἐδοκει εἶναι,
\ + In? 4 “ e ’ὔ /
τὸ δ᾽ ἔργον ἀδύνατον" ἦσαν yup οἱ κωλύσοντες πέραν
Ne a A InN a ? Jas KR 3 4
ToAXoL ἱππεῖς, Ob εὐθυς τοῖς πρώτοις οὐδὲν ἂν ἐπέτρεπον
᾿ “a 3 a “ Ν e 4 3 4
τούτων ποιειν. 18. ἐνταῦθα τὴν μεν ὑστεραίαν ἐπανεχω-
% ¥ A Ν a 3 Ν ? /
pour, εἰς τοὔμπαλιν [ἢ πρὸς Βαβυλῶνα], εἰς τὰς ἀκαύστους
, , ν eS Ὁ ε , ᾽
κωμας, κατακαύσαντες ἐνθεν εξήεσαν" ὥστε οἱ πολέμιοι OU
4 2 Ν 3 A ἈΝ [4
προσηλαυνον, urdu εθεῶντο, καὶ ὅμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμάζειν
ef ν / «ὦ N , ay
ὅποι ποτε τρέψονται οἱ Ελληνες καὶ τί ἐν νῷ ἔχοιεν.
> “ e N 2 “A 3 3
14, Evrav@a οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι στρατιῶται ἀμφὶ τὰ ἐπιτή-
ὃ 4 ς δὲ Ν Ν e Ν ’ὔ a
ela ἦσαν " οἱ 0€ OTPUTHYOL Kal οἱ AOYa'yoL πάλιν συνῆλθον,
Ν Ν φ , ¥ Ν 7
καὶ συναγαγοντες τοὺς εαλωκοτας ἤλεγχον THY κύκλῳ
A ? , ον» ¥ ς γ Ν᾿ Pv N
πᾶσαν χωραν Tis ἐκαστὴ en. 15. οἱ ὃ ἔλεγον ὅτι TU
~ Ν , “- 2." a ¥ Ν /
Kev πρὸς μεσημβριαν τῆς ἐπι Βαβυλῶνα evn καὶ Μηδίαν,
δι φ τ e Ν Ν d 7 SN ry ’ ΝΟΣ
t ἧσπερ ἥκοιεν" ἡ δὲ πρὸς ἕω ἐπὶ Σοῦσα τε καὶ Ex-
, 4 4 x. 3 / ’ ὔ
βιίτανα φέροι, ἔνθα θερίζειν καὶ ἐαρίζειν λέγεται βασιλεύς "
et δὲ , “ Ν Ἀ e 4 > Ns ’ N
ἢ Oe διαβαντι Tov ποταμὸν πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐπὶ Λυδίαν καὶ
T / , e Ἐὶ ὃ ‘ a > 7 : Ν ἐν Ν
ὠνίαν φέροι" ἡ δε δια τῶν ὀρέων, καί πρὸς ἄρκτον τε-
, » ᾽ , ¥ , \ oy»
Ττραμμένη, ὅτι εἰς Kapdovyous ayot. 16. τούτους δε εφα-
2 ἃ 9 8 . ¥ N ιν 4 N /
σαν οἰκεῖν AVA TU OPN, καὶ πολεμίκους εἶναι, καὶ βασίλέως

28 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [XEn.

> 9» “4 3 \ \. 2 A ? > SN Ν
οὐκ ἀκουειν" ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐμβαλεῖν ποτε εἰς auTous βασίλικην
Ν , “ » 3 3 ’ 4 aA
στρατιὰν, δωδεκα μυριάδας" τούτων δ᾽ οὐδένα ἁπονοστῆσαι
Ν Ν / € ’ vA Ν Ν ᾽ὔ Ν
Ova τὴν δυσχωρίαν. ὅποτε μέντοι πρὸς τὸν σατράπην τὸν
2 »-» / / Ν 3 ΄ a “\
ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ σπείσαιντο, καὶ ἐπιμιγνύναι σφῶν TE πρὸς
3 “ Ν 3 / x e / > ) 7
ἐκείνους καὶ ἐκείνων πρὸς εαυτοὺς. 17. AxKovoayTes
a € , 9 2 N ‘ ε ἢ
ταῦτα, οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐκάθισαν χωρὶς τοὺς ἑκασταχόσε
! Ia 2 ar a , / ΄
φάσκοντας εἰδέναι, οὐδὲν δῆλον ποιήσαντες ὅποι πορεύε-
¥ 9 , ἈΝ A “ 9 A 4
σθαι ἐμελλον. ἐδόκει δὲ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι
\ A . 7 3 ΄ 3 ; ͵ Ν
dia τῶν ὀρέων εἰς Καρδούχους εμβώλλειν" τούτους γὰρ
’ » 3 3 ’ / Φ 3 ’ 5
διελθοντας ἐφασαν εἰς Appeviay ἥξειν, ἧς Opovtas npyxe
a . 7 , 9 a > » ¥ 5
πολλῆς καὶ εὐδαίμονος. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ εὔπορον ἔφασαν εἶναι,
Ψ 9 Λ 4 > SN 7 3.7
ὅποι τις ἐθέλοι πορεύεσθαι. 8. ἐπὶ τούτοις ἐθύσαντο,
od eo N , na ,ὔ Ν ͵ a \
ὅπως ἡνίκα καὶ δοκοίη τῆς Wpas THY πορείαν ποιοῖντο" THY
Ν ς Ν a > » 3 / δ ,
γὰρ ὑπερβολὴν τῶν ορέων ἐδεδοίκεσαν μὴ προκαταληφθείη"
Ν ’ 3 Ν ’ ΄
καὶ παρηγγεῖίλαν, ἐπειδὴ δειπνησειαν, συσκενασαμένους
΄ 3 4 Vo ¢ so 4
πάντας ἀναπαύεσθαι, καὶ ἕπεσθαι ἡνίκ ἂν τις παραγγέλλῃ.

BOOK FOURTH.

Ν \ } a 2 ’ > 7+ ’ a
I. “Oca μὲν δὴ ev τῇ ἀναβάσει ἐγένετο μέχρι τῆς
’ \. o@& Ν Ν 4 9 a a A
μάχης, καὶ ὅσα μετὰ THY μάχην ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς ἃς βασι-
‘ \ ς Ν ΄ ’ ’ ed 3 ’
λεὺς καὶ οἱ συν Κύρῳ ἀναβαντες Ελληνες ἐποιήσαντο,
f / Ν 4 Ν
καὶ ὅσα, παραβάντος τὰς σπονδὰς βασίλεως καὶ Τισσα-
4 ) N Ν ὦ 3 ΄'
φέρνους, ἐπολεμήθη πρὸς τοὺς Ελληνας ἐπακολουθοῦντος
a Π a ’ 2 a ’ θ λό ὃ ὃ x
τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος, ev τῷ πρόσθεν λόγῳ δεδηλω-
3 Ν - > , ¥ ς ‘ “ Ν
ται. 2. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀφίκοντο ἐνθα ὁ μὲν Τιγρης ποταμὸς
/ ¥ 9 Ν Ν i Α , ,
παντάπασιν ἄπορος ἦν, dia τὸ βαθος καὶ μέγεθος, πάροδος
N > @ 3 VoA ΄ Ψ > εν 2 A
δε ove ἦν, adda Ta Καρδούχεια ὄρη ἀπότομα ὑπερ avtov
A ~ 3 ’ 3 ’ N A a A rn
τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἐκρέματο, ἐδόκει δὴ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς δια τῶν
9 ’ / 9 y Ν a ¢. 4
ὁρέων πορευτέον εἶναι. 8. ἤκουον γὰρ τῶν ἁλισκομένων

AnaB. 4,1] Villages of the Mountaineers. 29

ῦΨ 9 ᾿ , ¥ 9 a? , 4
ὅτι, εἰ διέλθοιεν τὰ Καρδούχεια ὄρη, ἐν τῇ Appevia τὰς
Ν A ’ A 4. Ὡ- a ’
πηγὰς τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ, ἣν μὲν βούλωνται, διαβη-
A “ Ν 7. 4 ἈΝ A ? ’ὔ
σονται, nv δὲ μὴ βούλωνται, περιίασι. καὶ τοῦ Evdparov
‘ 4 Ν 3, ,ὔ 3 4 an /
δὲ tas πηγὰς ἐλέγετο ov πρόσω τοῦ Τίγρητος εἶναι, καὶ
Ν ce wv Ν b 3 Ἁ ’ 2 Ν
ἔστιν οὕτως ἔχον. 4. την δ εἰς τους Καρδούχους ἐμβολὴν
e a ¢ \ ae , ψΨ S ,
ὧδε ποιοῦνται, ἅμα μεν λαθεῖν πειρώμενοι, ἅμα Se φθάσαι
4 ‘ J κι “ 54
πρὶν τοὺς πολεμίους καταλαβεῖν τὰ ἄκρα.
ὔ 2 4 2 N δ , ᾿ Ὗ
ὅ. ἭΝνιίικα δ᾽ ἦν ἀμφὶ τὴν τελευταίαν φυλακὴν, καὶ
3 ’ A Ν Ψ ” Ν ’
ἐλείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους διελθεῖν τὸ πεδίον,
a 3 ’ 9. AN Λ td
τηνικαῦτα ἀναστάντες ἀπὸ παραγγέλσεως, πορευόμενοι
3 on a A ¢ ͵ Ν “ yy 2 “
αφικνοῦνται ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ πρὸς τὸ ὄρος. 6. ἔνθα Sy
Χ 4 7 s e A A 4 x “ “ 3 9
εἰρίσοφος μεν ἡγέιτο τοῦ στρατεύματος, AaBwy TO upd
eon Ν “ a. ’ “a S ‘ a
αὑτὸν καὶ τοὺς γυμνῆτας TauvTas, Ἐενοφῶν δὲ συν τοῖς
9 / ς , “ Ia 7 v A
ὀπισθοφύλαξιν ὁπλίταις εἵπετο, ovdeva ἔχων γυμνῆτα "
In Ν ἐν ’ 0 7 4 ’ ΝΥ 7
ουδεὶς γὰρ κίνδυνος ἐδόκει εἶναι, μὴ τίς ἄνω πορευομένων
3 na > ἡ , 3 8 Ἁ \ om 3
ex τοῦ πισθεν ἐπίσποιτο. 7. καὶ ETL μὲν τὸ ἄκρον ava~
4 ’ 4 9 / a ,
Baiver Χειρίσοφος, πρίν τινα αἰσθέσθαι τῶν πολεμίων "
¥ ’ e “ ? ’ Ἁ 7 ἡ “ e ,
erecta ὃ ὑφηγεῖτο" εφείπετο δὲ aet TO ὑπερβάλλον τοῦ
’ 9 Ἁ ’ s 3 a ¥ 4 “
στρατεύματος εἰς TUS κωμας τας ἐν τοῖς ἄγκεσί TE καὶ
A A 3 ’ Wf Ν e Ν A 3
μυχοῖς τῶν ὀρέων. 8. ἔνθα δη οἱ μεν Καρδοῦχοι exri-
. ἢ N > » ¥ \ a Ν o yy
WOVTES TAS οἰκίας, ἔχοντες καὶ γυναίκας καὶ Traidas, Epev-
9 A . ΜΝ Ν . 9 , \ 4 ͵
γον ἐπὶ τὰ ὁρηὴ" ta δε ἐπιτήδεια πολλὰ ἣν λαμβάνειν,
9 Ν Ν , / ΄
ἦσαν δὲ καὶ χαλκωώμασι παμπόλλοις κατεσκενασμεέναι al
> » e 2 Κ εὖῷ Ia \ ᾽ ’
οἰκέαί, ὧν οὐδὲν εφερον οἱ Ελληνες, οὐδὲ τους ἀνθρωπους
2.5. e ’ 4 3 ’ € a
edtwxov, viropedopevot, εἰ πως εθελησείαν οἱ Καρδοῦχοι
’᾽ ? “ e Ν ὔ A ’ 3 4 A
διιέναι αὐτοὺς ws δια φιλίας τῆς Ywpas, ἐπείπερ βασιλεῖ
, 9 ‘N 4 3 , cf 3 4
πολέμιον ἦσαν " 9. TA μέντοι ἐπιτηδεία ὅτῳ TIS ἐπιτυγχώ-
2 » : > » \ 9 ¢ as a ”
vot ἐλάμβανον" ἀνάγκη yap ἦν. ot δὲ Kapdovyot οὔτε
4 ς ’ 5 Υ͂ Ν Ias 3 /
καλούντων ὑπήκουον, οὔτε AAO φιλικὸν οὐδεν ἐποίουν.
3 A Ν ς A na ’ 4
10. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ οἱ τελευταῖοι τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων κατεβαινον
4 QA ’᾽ 9.ϑ ON -Ξ Κ᾿ » ΄“ Ἁ ‘ “
εἰς TAS κωμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἄκρου, ἤδη σκοταῖοι, ---- δια Yap TO

30 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

“ 95 “ ean eo. “ e ’ 6 3 ͵ 3 a
στενὴν εἶναι τὴν ὁδον, ὅλην THY ἡμέραν ἡ ἀνάβασις αὑτοῖς
3 ΄ 4 7 3 Ἁ 7 ’ Ν
ἐγένετο καὶ κατάβασις εἰς TAS κώμας, ---- τότε δὴ συλλε-

΄ ἈΝ a 4 “ 4 9 ’
γέντες τινες τῶν Καρδούχων τοῖς τελευταίοις ἐπέθεντο,
> ἢ» ᾽ Ν ‘ ΄ /
καὶ ἀπέκτειναν τινας, καὶ λίθοις καὶ τοξεύμασι κατέτρωσαν,
>] / ΝΜ 3 ᾽ , Ἁ 3 “ 3 ΄ ‘
ολίγοι ὄντες" εξ ampoadoxytou yap αὑτοῖς ἐπέπεσε τὸ
e , 3 , ’ / 4
Ελληνικον. AL. εἰ μέντοι τότε πλείους συνελέγησαν,
> 4 A P A ‘ A 7 \
ἐκινδύνευσεν av διαφθαρῆναι πολὺ τοῦ στρατεύματος. καὶ
͵7 \ δ Ζ΄ / 2 ὡς , 2 ἡ
ταύτην [LEV τὴν νύκτα οὕτως εν ταῖς κωμαιῖς ηυλίσθησαν'
φ΄ Ν A Ἁ \ eM 4 > ON a 9 J
οἱ δε Καρδοῦχοι πυρὰ πολλὰ exaov κύκλῳ ἐπὶ TOV ὀρέων,
Ν , 3 , “ Ν a ¢ +s
καὶ auvewpwv ἀλλήλους. 2 Apa Se τῇ ἡμέρᾳ συνελ-
a a aA XN a A e ’ 3
θοῦσι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς καὶ λοχαγοῖς τῶν “Ελλήνων (δοξε
a ¢ / \ 3 a Q ’ ¥
τῶν τε uTolvyiwy τὰ ἀναγκαία καὶ δυνατώτατα ἔχοντας
΄ ’ ” Ν ef 9 \
πορεύεσθαι, καταλύποντας Tada, καὶ ὅσα ἦν νεωστὶ
αἰχμάλ ἱνδράποδα ἐν τῇ στρατιᾷ πάντα ἀφεῖναι
ἰχμώλωτα ἀνδράποδα ἐν τῇ στρατιᾷ πάντα ἀφεῖναι.
, Ν 2 ͵ Ν ἢ \ Κ \
18. σχολαιαν yup ἐποίουν THY πορείαν, πολλα οντα, TA
¢ ’ Ν \ 3 / Ν Ν e ),»"α ?
υποξυγια καὶ τὰ αἰχμάλωτα" πολλοι δὲ οἱ ἐπὶ τούτοις
Ψ 3 ΄ 3 / U 3 ’, 4 /
ὄντες ἀπόμαχοι ἦσαν, διπλασιά τε ἐπιτηδεια ἐδει Tropile-
N 4 a “ 3 , ¥ ’ὔ
σθαι καὶ φερεσθαι, πολλῶν τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὄντων. δοξαν
Ν a 9 ’ 14
δε ταῦτα, exnpvEav οὕτω ποιεῖν.
3 Ν. Ν 3 ’ 9 [4 e 4 9
14. Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀριστήσαντες ἐπορεύοντο, ὑπόσταντες ἐν

A e oN y e ὔ a 3 , Ἃ
στενῷ OL OTPATHYOL, εἰ TL εὑρίσκοιεν τῶν εἰρημένων μὴ
Ω ’ὕ 3 a : ε δ᾽ ? 6 7 εἴ ͵ ι
ἀφειμένον, ἀφῃροῦντο" οἱ ἐπείθοντο, πλὴν εἰ τίς T
Ὗ ς ὰ ΝΣ , A Ν a ’
ἐκλεψεν, οἷον ἢ Tatoos ἐπιθυμήσας ἢ γυναικὸς τῶν εὐπρε-

ms \ ΄ Ν N ec os f 9 ΄ \
πῶν. καὶ ταύτην μεν τὴν ἡμέραν οὕτως ἐπορεύθησαν, τὰ
4 ’ \ ‘ ν 3 ’ 2 - Ν
μὲν τι μαχόμενοι, Ta δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι. 18. εἰς δὲ τὴν
ς / / δ ‘ ἢ a > 9 ,
υστεραίαν γίγνεται χειμὼν TOAUS, ἀναγκαΐον ὃ ἣν πορευ-
3 Ν > € Ν > ’ Ν ¢ a ‘

εσθαι" ov yap Hv ikava ταἀπιτήδεια. καὶ ἡγεῖτο μεν

͵ 3 4 “\ A N e
Χειρίσοφος, ὠπισθοφυλακει δὲ Ἐενοφῶν. 16. καὶ ob

, 9 a > , Ν “ »Μ “
πολέμιοι ἰσχυρῶς ἐπετίθεντο, καὶ στενῶν ὄντων τῶν Yor

; ’ \ ἢ > 7 . 9 ἢ ef
ρίων, eyyus προσίοντες ἐτόξευον καὶ ἐσφενδοόνων" ὥστε
2 , ed 3 “ Ν A > 4
ἠναγκάζοντο οἱ ἔλληνες, ἐπιδιώκοντες καὶ πάλιν avaya-

Anas. 4,11 Attacks of the Mountaineers. 31

a 4 ιν Q 4 e
ζοντες, σχολῇ πορεύεσθαι" καὶ θαμινα παρηγγελλεν ὁ
~ ? a 3
Ἐενοφῶν ὑπομένειν, ὅτε οἱ πολέμιοι ἰσχυρῶς ἐπικέοιντο.
A ‘ “ ’
17. "Eva ὁ Χειρίσοφος ἄλλοτε μὲν ὅτε παρεγγυῷτο ὑπε-
‘ ᾽ ᾽ ? 3 4 »,
μένε, τότε δὲ οὐχ ὑπέμενεν, UAN ἦγε ταχέως καὶ παρηγγύα
a 4 f a / ¥ δ 9
ἕπεσθαι, ὥστε δῆλον ἣν ὅτι πρᾶγμά τι εἴη" σχολὴ ὃ οὐκ
93 3 σι 4 Ν ¥ a A ef e /
nv ἰδεῖν παρελθόντι TO alTLoy τῆς σπουδῆς" ὥστε ἡ πορεία
a a» 9 ΄ . 9 a
ὁμοία φυγῆ ἐγίγνετο τοῖς ὁπισθοφύλαξι. 18. καὶ ἐνταῦθα
NN 3 Ν ς ’ “
ἀποθνήσκει ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς Aaxwvixos Κλεωνυμος, τοξευθεὶς
" a“ 4 4 aA , 9 “ Q a
διὰ τῆς ἀσπίδος καὶ τῆς σπολώδος εἰς τὰς πλευρὰς, καὶ
“ “ 4 3 Q .Y
Bacias ᾿Αρκὰς, διαμπερὲς thy κεφαλήν. 19. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ
) ͵ὔ > N Ν 3 ὦ). ef 4 δ pom a
ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ σταθμὸν, εὐθυς ὥσπερ εἶχεν ὁ Bevodav
3 θὲ Ν N x , > A x8 oe ; e 8
ἐλθὼν πρὸς Tov Χειρίσοφον, ἡτιᾶτο avtov ὅτι οὐχ ὑπέμει-
> ? 9 f 4 oe ’ 4 φῳ
νεν, ἄλλ, ἠναγκαζοντο φεύγοντες ἅμα μάχεσθαι. καὶ νῦν
3 “ 2 a ΜΝ 9 4
δύο καλώ τε κἀγαθὼ ἄνδρε τέθνατον, καὶ οὔτε ἀνελέσθαι
, 9 , ? ἢ /
οὔτε θάψαι ἐδυνάμεθα. 20. ἀποκρίνεται ὁ Χειρίσοφος"
, \ . ¥ ν΄ mS Ἔ ” , ἢ ,
Βλέψον, ἔφη, πρὸς τὰ ὄρη, καὶ ἰδὲ ws ἄβατα πάντα ἐστί"
7 2 cd eas ἃ δ)-.ο 4 4 4( 3 A 7 3 ’
μία ὃ αὕτη ὁδὸς ἣν ὁρᾷς ορθία, Kai ert ταύτῃ ἀνθρώπων
a Χ ’ ΝΜ a / ,
ὁρᾶν ἔξεστί σοι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον, ct κατειληφύτες φυλάτ-
Ν Mv a 3 3 “ ww “ “
τουσι τὴν ἔκβασιν. 398. ταῦτ eyw ἔσπευδον, καὶ διὰ
a ¢ 3 e » ¥ / ͵ ν
τοῦτο σε οὐχ ὑπέμενον, εἰ πῶς δυναίμην φθάσαι πρὶν
a ‘ ς ΄ co e aA YY ¥
κατειλῆφθαι τὴν νπερβολὴν " οἱ 5 ἡγεμόνες ods ἔχομεν οὗ
Φ ¥ ’ Ν “ 3 >
φασιν εἷναι ἄλλην odov. 22. ὁ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν λέγει" ᾿Αλλ
> NO ΄ ¥ bd ‘ Ν ec oA , “
eyo ἔχω δύο avdpas. ἐπεὶ γὰρ ἡμῖν πράγματα παρεῖχον,
3 4 4 e wn 3 a 3 ,
evndpevoapev, ὅπερ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἀναπνεῦσαι ἐποίησε, καὶ
3 “ 4 a> A a > ’
ἀπεκτείναμέν τινας αὐτῶν, καὶ ξῶντας προὐθυμήθημεν λα-
a 3 A 4 od oe ’ 3 ’ Ν
βεῖν αὐτοῦ τούτον ἕνεκα, ὅπως ἡγεμόσιν εἰδόσι τὴν χώραν
’
χρησαίέμεθα.
N ΕΝ Δ, 9 ’ N 3 7 ¥
23. Kai evdus ἀγαγόντες τοὺς avOpwrovs, ἤλεγχον
4 3 “ ΝΜ Ν x
διαλαβόντες εἰ τινα εἰδεῖεν ἄλλην ὁδὸν ἢ τὴν φανερών. ὁ
oe 3 ΧΨ , a
μὲν οὖν ἕτερος οὐκ ἔφη, μάλα πολλῶν φόβων προσαγομέ-
2 Ἁ Ν χω 3 Λ ἋΛ ae a ¢ +
νων" ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν ὠφέλιμον ἔλεγεν, ὁρῶντος TOU ετέρου

82 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. | [Xen.

τ 2 ‘ ,. » Ψ φ ‘ 3
κατεσφαγη. 24. ὁ δὲ λοιπὸς ἔλεξεν OTL οὗτος μεν OV φαίη
\ a Ins ed Ξ a » 2 , > κα 3
dia ταῦτα εἰδέναι, ὅτε αὐτῷ ετύγχανε θυγάτηρ εκεῖ παρ
2 3 4 > & 2 Ν
ἀνδρὶ ἐκδεδομένη" αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἔφη ἡγήσεσθαι δυνατὴν καὶ
φ 4 4 e , 3 ’ 9 9 ¥
ὑποζυγίοις πορεύεσθαι odov. 38. epwrwpevos δ᾽ εἰ ein τί
9 3 “A , 4 ¥ 4 ¥ A 3
ἐν αὐτῇ δυσπάριτον χωρίον, én εἶναι ἄκρον, 0 εἰ μή τις
’ 3 ΄ ¥ a 9
προκαταλήψοιτο, ἀδύνατον ἐσεσθαι παρελθεῖν. 26. Εν-
a“ > ’ ’ Ν N Ν x
ταῦθα edoxet, συγκαλέσαντας λοχαγους καὶ πελταστὰς καὶ
a n , “ , A b δι Ν
τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, λέγειν TE τὰ παρόντα, καὶ ἐρωτᾶν εἴ τις
I a ” ? an 3 NY nt ry , \
αὐτῶν ἐστιν ὅστις ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς εθέλοι ἂν γενέσθαι, καὶ.
e Ν 3 Ν vd ᾿ e,/ A )
ὑποστὰς εθελοντης πορεύεσθαι. 2% ὑφίσταται τῶν μὲν
φ ra 3 , “ 9 \ 93
ὁπλιτῶν Apistwvupos Μεθυδριεὺς “Apxas καὶ Ayacias
4 Ν 2 Ν > a
Στυμφαλιος ᾿Αρκὰς, ἀντιστασιάζων δὲ αὐτοῖς Καλλίμαχος
/ +) Q “ φ ¥ 93 Λ ᾽ὔ
ITappuctos Αρκας, καὶ οὗτος edn ἐθέλειν πορεύεσθαι,
- “ 9 Ν 4 4 : a 7 > "
προσλαβὼν εθέλοντας ἐκ παντὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος" ἐγὼ
ιν »¥ 9 Ψ Ψ “ a 4 3 A e
yap, edn, οἶδα ὅτε ἕψονται πολλοι τῶν νέων ἐμοῦ ἡγου-
4 3 ’ 3 vw N a ,
μένον. 28. εκ τούτου ἐρωτῶσιν εἰ TIS καί τῶν γυμνήτων
’ 2217 a e ’ 2
ταξιάρχων eOedot συμπορεύεσθαι. ὑφίσταται ᾿Αριστέας
ΤΣ ἃ A a a A >] Ν ry
Χίος, ὃς πολλαχοῦ πολλοῦ ἄξιος TH στρατιᾷ εἰς τὰ τοιαῦτα
> ἢ
ἐγένετο.
. Φ XN Λ Μ € > 9 0 3 “ 9
II, Kai nv μεν δείλη ἤδη, ob ὃ ἐκέλευον αὐτοὺς ἐμ»
[4 Ν Ν e ’ ’
φαγόντας πορεύεσθαι. καὶ τὸν ἡγεμόνα δήσαντες παρα-
, 9 a Ν / Ν » ’ A /
διδόασιν αὑτοῖς, καὶ συντίθενται την μεν νύκτα, ἢν λάβωσι
Sy Ν / / d Ν a e Ὁ» “ ͵
TO ἄκρον, τὸ χωρίον φυλάττειν, ἅμα Se τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ σαλ-
’ Ν ‘\ ‘ ΝΥ Μ 3 > A ‘
Tuyye σημαίνειν" καὶ TOUS μὲν ἄνω OVTAS ἱέναι ETL TOUS
, N ‘ 4 2 ν Ν ,
κατέχοντας τὴν φανεραν ἔκβασιν, αὐτοὶ de συμβοηθησειν
3 / ς A ’ ,᾿" a ,
exBaivortes ws av δύνωνται τάχιστα. 2 Ταῦτα συνθεμε-
φ Ν 93 ’ a e oe ‘\
VOL, οἱ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο πλῆθος ws δισχίλιοι" καὶ ὕδωρ πολυ
a 3 > a A . oo” \ 9 ,
ἣν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ" Ἐενοφῶν δὲ eywv τοὺς ὁπισθοφύλακας
e aA \ Q Q ΨΥ oS 6 aA e a {
ἤγειτο πρὸς τὴν φανερὰν ἐκβασιν, ὅπως ταύτῃ τῇ οδῷ οἱ
4 4 “ a S e Λ ’ ε
πολεμίου προσέχοιεν τὸν νοῦν, καὶ ὡς μάλιστα λάθοιεν oF
περιιόντες. 8. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἦσαν ἐπὶ yapadpa οἱ ὀπισθαφύλα-
puovTes, Be ἤσαν ἐπὶ Yapadpa οἱ ὃ υ

Anaz.4,1.] ΚΖ ighting in the Eghlands. 33

a» , δ .Χ ἢ , a
Kes, ἣν ἐδει διαβάντας πρὸς τὸ ὄρθιον ἐκβαίνειν, τηνικαῦτα
> 4 e , e , e / Ν ’ὔ
εκυλίνδουν ot βάρβαροι ὁλοίτροχους ἁμαξιαίους, καὶ μείξους

.Ὁ 2 ἡ“ ἃ Υ A , ’
Kat ἐλάττους, Ob φερόμενοι πρὸς Tas πέτρας παίοντες
“- εν , Ia ͵ φ, > Φ4Φ
διεσφενδονῶντο" Kat παντάπασιν οὐδὲ πελάσαι οἷον T ἦν

a ’ , Mv ν nn “~ 9 a , ?
τῇ εἰσόδῳ. 4. ἔνιοι δὲ τῶν λοχαγῶν, εἰ μὴ ταύτῃ δύναιν-

¥. 3 A ἂν a 3 / 4 7
το. ἄλλη εἐπειρωντο" καὶ ταῦτα εποίουν μέχρι σκότος
3 , ᾿ 3 a Ν ” 9 “ φ 3 ὔ J ? ~
ἐγένετο" emes δὲ WovTO αφανεῖς εἶναι ἀπιόντες, TOTE ἀπὴλ-

3.» . a > f Ν Ἁ Σ) ἢ 4
Gov ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον" ἐτύγχανον δὲ καὶ ἀνάώρίστοι ὄντες

> oa ra) ? € ’ , IAs
αὐτῶν οἱ ὁπισθοφυλακήσαντες. οἱ μέντοι πολέμιοι οὐδεν
> 4 9 A A Q A \ 4
ἐπαύσαντο δὲ ὅλης τῆς νυκτὸς κυλινδοῦντες TOUS λέθους "
4 ) 9 a ’
τεκμαίρεσθαι ὃ ἣν τῷ ψόφῳ.
5 O; δ᾽ »” ὃ Ν € , 4 x 4
. Οἱ & ἔχοντες τὸν ἤγεμονα, κυκλῳ περιίοντες, κατα-
, ‘ vd ’ Ν a 4 ιν Ν
λαμβανουσι τους φύλακας aude πῦρ καθημένους " καὶ Tous
ΟΝ Ν “ c 2 “a 2 “
μὲν κατακανόντες, τοὺς δὲ καταδιωξαντες, αὐτοὶ ἐνταῦθ᾽
ν e “ ” ’ ς 3 3 a
ἔμενον WS TO ἄκρον κατέχοντες. G. οἱ ὃ οὐ κατεῖχον,
2 Ν Ν ε ον 2. a ἁ 4 e Ν 4
ἀλλα μαστος nV ὑπὲρ AUTwWY, Tap ov ἣν ἡ στενὴ αὑτὴ
eas >,> @ > e ᾽ “ , > +
odes, eb ἢ ἐκάθηντο οἱ φύλακες. ἔφοδος μέντοι αὐτόθεν
ἐ Ν Ν Xx / 9 a 7? A a “ e 5 a 3 0
πὶ TOUS πολεμίους NV, OL ETL TH Hhavepa od@m εκαθηντο.
Ἁ ‘ “ 4 3 A ’ 3 Ν > ¢ id
7 Καὶ τὴν μὲν νύκτα ἐνταῦθα διήγαγον" eres δ᾽ ἡμέρα
e a > ΄ A ’ 9 Ἁ *
ὑπέφαινεν, ἐπορεύοντο σιγῇ συντεταγμένοι ἐπὶ TOUS πολε-
23 τ ν Ns . oy > 7 2 ’ ‘
μιους " καὶ yap ομίχλη ἐγένετο, WOT ἔλαθον εγγὺυς προσελ-
, > Nat 4 3 , ψ Ἴ 9 ’
θοντες. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἶδον αλλήλους, ἥ τε σάλπιγξ ἐφθεγξατο,
Ἁ 3 » Ω“ 2 ON ‘ 3 , ε Ν 3
καὶ ἀλαλάξαντες tevto emt τους ἀνθρωπους" οἱ δὲ οὐκ
5.7 3 Ν ’ Ν eas ’ 4 4 3 ᾽
ἐδέξαντο, ἀλλα λίποντες τὴν ὁδον, φεύγοντες ολίγον ἀπε-
4 “ 9 e Ὁ > ἈΝ 4
θνησκον" εὔζωνοι yap ἦσαν. 8. οἱ de ἀμφὶ Χειρίσοφον,
> 4 ra Λ IAN Ω Υ̓ Q Ν
ἀκούσαντες τῆς σαλπίγγος, εὐθυς tevTO ἄνω κατὰ τὴν
Ν ea / ¥ Ν A a Ν 9 a
φανεραν odov> ἄλλοι δὲ τῶν στρατηγῶν κατα ατριβεῖς
ῸὩὦἷν 3 ΄ e » ef ” . 9 ,
ὁδους ἐπορεύοντο, ἢ ἔτυχον ἕκαστοι ὄντες, καὶ ἀναβάντες
ς 3φΩῳ 7 > » 3 , a , Ν Φ
ὡς ἐδυναντο, ἀνίμων ἀλλήλους τοῖς δορασι. Θ. καὶ oUTOL
’ a a Ἀ , =
πρῶτοι συνεμιξαν τοῖς προκαταλαβοῦσι TO χωρίον. Fevo~
a \ oy» na 9 ͵ Ν ᾿ς 9 ,
dav δε, ἔχων τῶν ὁπισθοφυλάκων Tous ημίσεις, ἐπορεύετο

8

34 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xex,

φ εν» ¢ , ΝΥ 3 ’ Ν φ ~ »Ρ»
ἤπερ οἱ τὸν ἡγεμόνα ἔχοντες " EvodwTaTN γαρ ἣν τοῖς ὑπο-
’ ‘ . ¢ Ff 54 a e / με
ζυγιοις" τοὺς δὲ ἡμίσεις ὄπισθεν τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἔταξε.

’ 3 4 ’ ον ~ a
10. Πορευόμενοι ὃ ἐντυγχάνουσι λοῴῳ ὑπερ τῆς ὁδοῦ,
Xx ’ e oN “ λ 4 ἃ KA 3 ’ 3 ’
κατείιλημμεένῷ ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων, OUS ἢ ἀποκόψαι ἀνάγκη
a a > ON rn ε ΄ So SN SN 4
ἢ διεζεῦχθαι απὸ τῶν ἄλλων Ελλήνων. καὶ avToL μὲν ἂν
2 ΄ e eo” Ν \ oe ΄ > ͵Φ κ"ν 4
ἐπορεύθησαν ἤπερ ot ἄλλοι, Ta δε ὑποξύγια οὐκ ἣν ἄλλῃ ἢ
, 2 “A ¥ “ [4 3 4
ταύτῃ ἐκβῆναι. UL. evOa bn παρακελευσάμενοι ἀλλήλοις,
4 x Ν ’ 3 ’ ἰω 4 3
προσβαλλουσι πρὸς τὸν λοῴφον ορθιοις τοῖς λοχοῖς, ov
͵ ’ A , ¥ a , ’ ἢ
κύκλῳ, αλλαὰ καταλιπόντες ἀφοδον τοῖς πολεμίοις, εἰ βου-
4 Ν 4 ‘ 4 ‘ 9 ,
AowTo φεύγειν. 13. καὶ τεως μὲν αὐτοὺς ἀναβαίνοντας,
Ψ In 5 « ΄ > 4 \ oY
ὅπῃ ἐδύναντο ἕκαστος, οἱ βάρβαροι ετόξευον καὶ ἔβαλλον,
3 Ν 3 ? ’ 9 ιν σι: , ὶ Ν /
eyyus 5 ov προσίεντο, ἀλλὰ φυγὴ λείπουσι TO χωρίον.
Ἀ ~ + 7 .ς of Ν vd
καὶ τοῦτον TE παρεληλύθεσαν οἱ EdAnves, καὶ ἐτερον
ς κα ¥ ’ , ΝΣ a 4
ὁρῶσιν ἔμπροσθεν λόφον κατεχόμενον" ἐπὶ τοῦτον αὖθις
In ἡ / 3 ’ C pat “ SY ’
ἐδόκει πορεύεσθαι. 18. Evvoncas ὃ ὁ Ἐενοφῶν, μη, εἰ
¥ ͵ 4 ς , ͵ ν , ’
ἔρημον καταλίποι τὸν ἡλῶώκοτα λόφον, καὶ παλιν λαβοντες
[2 ᾽ὔ 3 A “ δ é “ 7, 4
ot πολέμιοι ἐπιθοῖντο τοῖς ὑποξυγίοις παριοῦσιν, ---- επί
Ἀ 5 4 ‘N e ’ φ Ν a a ¢ A
πολυ ὃ ἦν τὰ ὑποζύγια, ἅτε δια στενῆς τῆς ὁδοῦ πορευο-
/ 3 a a \ ’
μενα, ----- καταλείπει ἐπὶ τοῦ λόφου λοχαγους Kndicodwpov
a 9 a “ 3 , 3 ’
Κηφισοφῶντος Αθηναῖον, καὶ Αμφικράτην Αμφιδημου
9 vad \ 3 ’ 9 a“ / 2" ‘ \
A@nvaiov, καὶ Αρχαγόραν Apyeiov φυγάδα, αὑτὸς δὲ συν
a a 2 4 >, A “ 4 J Ν πρὶ
τοις λοίποίς ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ TOV δεύτερον λόφον, καὶ τῷ
3 a 4 ‘ A e a 4 > 3 “
αὐτῷ τρόπῳ καὶ τοῦτον αἱροῦσιν. 34. Ere δ᾽ αὑτοῖς
/ ‘ Ν 9 \ 9 ’ ee oN a 2N
τρίτος μαστὸς λοιπὸς ἦν, πολυ ορθιωτατος, ὁ UTEP τῆς ETL
- Ν / a A ἈΝ οΝ a 3
τῷ πυρὶ καταληφθείσης φυλακῆς τῆς νυκτὸς VITO τῶν ἐθε-
a > XN aw? δ ’ ee ’
λοντῶν. 15. επεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐγένοντο ot Ελληνες, λειπου-
ς ’ ’ Ν Ν ἐν 4 Σ
σιν οἱ βάρβαροι ἀμαχητὶ τὸν μαστὸν, ὥστε θαυμαστον
a 4 x ¢ ? 4 3 \ “
πᾶσι γενέσθαι, καὶ ὑπώπτευον δείσαντας αὐτοὺς μὴ κυκλω-
4 σι 3 - e 9 Mv” 3 ἈΝ ~
θέντες πολιορκοῖντο ἀπολιπεῖν. οἱ ὃ apa απὸ τοῦ ἄκρον
a . Μ , , > A ‘ 3
καθορωντες τὰ ὄπισθεν γιγνόμενα, πάντες ἐπὶ τοὺς οπι-
θ ’,ὔ } ’ \ pow a ‘ AN a
σθοφυλακας eywpovy. 16. Kai Ξενοφῶν μεν συν τοῖς vew-

ANAR, 4, IL] Battle for the Height. 35

’ > » 9. " ΚΜ Q . Υ 2 ἡ
τώτοις ἀνέβαινεν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους ἐκέλευσεν
ς ᾽ὔ ef td - s ’ a
ὑπάγειν, ὅπως οἱ τέλευταίοι λόχοι προσμίξειαν, καὶ προ-

, 4, “ ear 3 n A ‘ ‘ (4
ελθοόντας κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ev τῷ ὁμαλῷ θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα
9
εἶπε.
17. Καὶ ἐν τού 2 χρόνῳ ἦλθεν᾽ Α Spas ὁ Αργεῖ
. Και ἐν τούτῳ tw χρόνῳ ἤλθεν ᾿Αρχαγόρας o Apyeios
“ \ , e 3 ; > NA a ͵ ,
πεφευγως, καὶ λέγει WS ἀπεκόπησαν ἀπὸ TOU πρωτον λόφου,

Ἧ oa “ e » ’ . ow
καὶ ὅτι τεθνᾶσι Κηφισοδωρος καὶ ᾿Αμφικράτης, καὶ ἄλλοι
¢ NP Φ / s aA yy ᾿ ν ’ ΄
ὅσοι μὴ ἄλλομενοι KATA τῆς πέτρας πρὸς τοὺς οπισθοφυ-

9 / a δ , € Ul
λακας adixovto. 18. ταῦτα de διαπραξάμενοι ot BapBa-
Φ >> 2 , , a « Spey a
pol ἧκον ἐπ ἀντίπορον λόφον τῷ μαστῷ" καὶ Ἐενοφῶν
7 ’ a 3 ° ’ γ a ‘ \
διελέγετο αὐτοῖς δι ἑρμηνέως περὶ σπονδῶν, καὶ Tous
‘ 3 ’ ς , 3 , ν.,3 e Ν
νεκροὺς amnret. 19. οἱ δὲ ἐφασαν ἀποδωσειν ep @ μὴ

, ‘ > 4 ’ a C my a 2 Φ
kuely τὰς οἰκίας... συνωμολόγει ταῦτα ὁ Hevohwv. ev w
Ν Ν ω ¥ , 4 e ω a ’
δὲ τὸ μὲν ἄλλο στράτευμα παρῇει, οἱ δὲ ταῦτα διελέγοντο,

’ ς 3 ’ A ’ ΄ 3 a
παντες οἱ EX τούτου TOU τόπου συνερρύησαν. 30. ἐνταῦθα
Ω͂ e , ἢ Ν 3 Ν 3 4 2"
ἔσταντο οὐ πολέμιοι. καὶ ἔπει ἤρξαντο καταβαίνειν ἀπὸ

A A Ν A v ¥ . @ ¥ Ψ
τοῦ μαστοῦ προς Tous ἄλλους, ἐνθα Ta ὅπλα ἔκειτο, ἵεντο

Ν e 4 a ’ὔ’ N e “ 3 Ἁ 3 ¢
δὴ οἱ πολέμιοι πολλῷ πληθει καὶ θορύβῳ" καὶ επει εγε-

3» οἷ a “ “a 2 ,? eC pw a ’
γνοντο ἔπι τῆς κορυφῆς του μαστου, ad ov Ξενοφῶν κατέ-

’ , “ Ses . ΄ δ ,

Bauer, εκυλίνδουν πέτρας" καὶ ἐνὸς μεν κατέαξαν τὸ σκέλος,
bend “a Σ “ 6 “ 4 5 ? 4 ’ 4
Ξενοφῶντα ὃε ὁ ὑπασπιστὴς ἔχων την ἀσπίδα ἀπέλιπεν "

3 7 “ \ 3 4 A 3 a
21. Εὐρύλοχος δὲ Aovarevs Apxus προσέδραμεν αὑτῷ,
e 4 Ν XN 3 “ Cd b] 4 “ €
ὁπλίτης, καὶ πρὸ ἀμφοιν προβεβλημένος ἀπέχωρει, KAL οἱ
¥ Ν Ν ’ ? a ?
ἄλλοι πρὸς τοὺς συντεταγμένους ἀπῆλθον. 3232. Ex δὲ

/ a ς .ΨἿ,Ὕ,.᾿᾽» Ne ‘ ν΄ 2 ΄
τούτου πᾶν ομοῦ ἐγένετο τὸ λληνικον, καὶ ἐσκηνησαν

3 ~ 3 a x A 9 v \ ? 4
QUTOU, ἐν πολλαῖς καὶ καλαῖς οἰκίαις καὶ ἐπιτηδείοις δαψι-

΄ ‘ ᾿ 4 . 9 ed 3 , a
λεσι" καὶ Yup οἷνος ToAUS HY, ὥστε EV AUKKOLS KOVLATOLS
, ne A . ‘ ἢ , /
εἶχον. 28. Ξενοφῶν δε καὶ Χειρίσοφος διεπράξαντο ὥστε

7 Ἁ “ 3 a “ e 4 “ [4
λαβόντες τοὺς νεκροὺς ᾿απέδοσαν τὸν ἡγεμόνα" καὶ TavTa
3 ’ »" 3 A 3 nf a ed a
ἐποίησαν τοῖς ἀποθανοῦσιν ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν, ὥσπερ Vopt-

2 ͵ 2 a
ζεται avdpuow ayabois.

36 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. (Xen.

φ 4 Τῇ δὲ e ? Υ͂ ¢ e 3 4 ‘ ,
. Tn δε votepaia ἄνευ ryepovos ἐπορεύοντο" μαχὸ-
3 @ , “ ¥ a ’
μενοι δ᾽ οἱ πολέμιοι, καὶ ὅπη εἴη στενὸν χωρίον προκαταλαμ-
’ > » Q , ¢ 8 . 4 a
βώνοντες, ἐκωλνον tas παρόδους. 25. ὁπότε μεν οὖν Tous
, ΄ os ” Ψ 2 ’ “ A
πρώτους κωλύοιεν, Ἐενοφῶν ὄπισθεν εκβαίνων πρὸς τὰ
y ν Ἀ > » ΡΞ ’ a , 9
ὄρη ἔλυε τὴν ἀποφραξιν τῆς παρόδου τοῖς πρώτοις, ἀνω-
a ’ ”“ ͵ “
τέρω πειρώμενος γίγνεσθαι τῶν κωλυόντων" 386. ὁπότε δὲ
- ¥y 4 ΄ a 3 ’ὔ] A ,
tows ὄπισθεν ἐπιθοῖντο, Χειρεισοῴφος εκβαίνων, καὶ πειρω-
9 ’ ’ a Ν. ἣ 3 3
μενος ἀνωτέρω γίγνεσθαε τῶν κωλνόντων, ἔλυε THY ἀπό-
a ’ “ 4 N98 SN ed 9 ὕ
φραξιν τῆς παρόδου τοῖς σπισθεν" Kat ἀεὶ οὕτως εβοηθουν
3 > a 3 , Ἁ
αλλήλοις, καὶ ἐσχυρὼς αλληλων ἐπεμέλοντο. 27. ἢν δὲ
Ἁ 3 σι ”~ 9 “ ’ὔ a
καὶ ὁπότε αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀναβᾶσι πολλὰ πράγματα παρεύχον
/ ΄. A
ot βάρβαροι πώλιν καταβαίνουσιν édadpoi yap ἦραν,
Ψ ΝΟΣ ὔ , . 4 Ia ἈΝ 9
ὥστε kat ἐγγύθεν φεύγοντες ἀποφεύγειν" οὐδὲν yap εἶχον
wv a Ν Ww Ἁ
ἄλλο ἢ τόξα καὶ σφενδόνας. 28. ἄριστοι δὲ τοξόται ἦσαν'
4 Ν ’ > “ ᾽ Ν Ν ? 4 a
εἶχον δὲ τόξα eyyus τριπήχη, τα δὲ τοξεύματα πλέον ἢ
φ N δ Ν ’ ΄ N δ
διπήχη" εἷλκον δὲ τὰς νευρᾶς, ὁπότε τοξεύοιεν, πρὸς τὸ
/ A , a ? o δὶ β , Ny δι
κάτω τοῦ τοξου τῷ ἀριστερῷ Todt προβαίνοντεςς. τα δὲε
v4 9 ’ N A 3 ’ὔ’ Q “ nA ¢
τοξεύματα ἐχωρει δια τῶν ἀσπίδων καὶ δια τῶν θωρακων.
3 A ‘ > A , > A / Ω
EX P@VTO δὲ αὑτοῖς οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἔπει λαβοιεν, ἀκοντίοις,
“A 7 a“ ’ A
ἐναγκυλῶντες. ἐν τούτοις τοῖς χωρίοις οἱ Κρῆτες χρησι-
, > 4 9 N ae. a ’
μώτατοι ἐγένοντο. ἦρχε δε αὐτῶν Στρατοκλῆς Κρης.
> 9 δ 2 3 a ,
TIT. Ταύτην δ᾽ αὖ τὴν ἡμέραν nuricOnoav ev ταῖς Ko-
A ζω. A Ν “ ’ὔ
pas ταῖς ὑπὲρ τοῦ πεδίου τοῦ παρα τὸν Κεντρίτην ποτα-
“ 9 e a ἃ e 4 “ 9 4 N “
pov, evpos ws δίπλεθρον, ὃς ὁρίζει τὴν Appeviay Kat τὴν
A ’ ΄ Ν ed 9 “ 3 7
τῶν Καρδούχων χωραν. καὶ οἱ Ελληνες ἐνταῦθα averrav-
ΝΜ 3 ᾽ ’ ? a Ν “" > ;
σαντο ἄσμενοι, ἰδόντες πεδίον" ἀπεῖχε δὲ τῶν ὀρέων ὁ
ν Apa ς \ ͵ a , , \
ποταμὸς εξ ἢ ἐπτὰ στάδια τῶν Kapdovywv. 2. τότε μὲν
4 . Y , ta 7 δ ’ ΄ ¥ ‘
οὖν ηυλίσθησαν para ἡδέως Kat ταπιτηδεια ἔχοντες, καὶ
\ a , , , e Ν
πολλὰ τῶν παρεληλυθότων πόνων. μνημονεύοντες. . ETA
‘ ¢ 4 σ΄ 3 4 Ν a /
yap ἡμέρας, ὅσασπερ ἐπορεύθησαν δια τῶν Καρδούχων,
/ , Λ Ἂν \ of ar
πάσας μαχόμενοι διετέλεσαν, καὶ ἔπαθον κακὰ ὅσα οὐδὲ

Anas. 4,1.] The Armenian Frontier. 37

A 4 e oN ΄ “ a e 9
τὰ σύμπαντα ὑπὸ Bacthews καὶ Τισσαφέρνους. ὡς οὖν
9 a ’ ¢ 7 4 lA
ἀπηλλαγμένοι τούτων, ἡδέως ἐκοιμηθησαν.
ea x aA ¢ , eon e 4 4 “
8. Apa de τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, ὁρῶσιν ἱππέας που πέραν τοῦ
A 3 4 e 7 7 Ἁ
ποταμοῦ, ἐξωπλισμένους ὡς κωλύσοντας διαβαίνειν, πεζους
>» ~ , ¥ ae ,
δ᾽ ἐπὶ ταῖς ὀχθαις παρατεταγμένους ἄνω τῶν ἱππέων, ὡς
, 9 ν 9 ͵ ? / 9 > @
κωλύσοντας εἰς THY Αρμενίαν ἐκβαίνειν, 4. ἦσαν ὃ οὗτοι
9 t . 9 4 ? 4 N [4 “ “A
Opovta καὶ Aprovya, Appeviot καὶ Mupdot καὶ Χαλδαῖοι
’ 3 ’ Ν [ “ 3, ’ “ N
μισθοφοροι. ἐλέγοντο δὲ ot Χαλδαῖοι ἐλεύθεροί τε καὶ
” 9 ad 3 9 ’ “ Ν ,
αλκίμοι εἶναι" ὅπλα ὃ εἶχον γέρρα paxpa καὶ λόγχας.
ς oo” φ 3,9 @ ΄ 2 4
5. αἱ δὲ οχθαι avrat, eh ὧν παρατεταγμένοι οὗτοι ἦσαν,
᾽ὔ A ’ > 8 a a 9 a eas
τρία ἢ τέτταρα πλέθρα ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀπεῖχον " ὁδὸς
Ν e 4 ΝΜ A / ’
δὲ μία ἡ ὁρωμένη ἦν ἄγουσα ἄνω, ὥσπερ χειροποίητος "
4 9 n / ς ὦ 3 \ Ν
ταύτῃ ἐπειρῶντο διαβαίνειν οἱ “EdAnves. 6 ἐπεὶ δὲ
/ ’ ff e ‘ Ὁ“ “ 3 , “
πειρωμένοις TO TE ὕδωρ UTED τῶν μαστῶν ἐφαίνετο, καὶ
‘ 9 e Ν λ 7 . 9 a
TPAaYXUS ἣν ὁ ποταμὸς μεγαλοῖς λίθοις Kat ολισθηροῖς, ---
. Ψ7 2 - os Ne ha ὃν ἢ Ae ΩΝ e
καὶ OUT ἐν τῷ ὕδατι Ta ὕπλα ἣν ἔχειν, εἰ δὲ μη, ἥρπαζεν ὁ
’ 2 / A a \ o@ ΝΥ , Ν
ποταμὸς" ἐπί τε τῆς κεφαλῆς τὰ ὅπλα εἰ τις φέροι, γυμνοὶ
3 / “ Ν 7 Ἀ ¥ / ? 4
ἐγίγνοντο πρὸς τὰ τοξεύματα καὶ τᾶλλα βελη, ----- aveywpn-
2 ray 9 7 N “ [2
σαν, καὶ αὐτοῦ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν.
y Ν 3 Ὡ ‘ , , 9 >? Ss a ΡΝ»
7 Ἔνθα δε αὐτοὶ τὴν πρόσθεν νύκτα ἦσαν ἐπὶ τοῦ opous,
¢ 7 \ 4 Ν a? 3 a
ewpwv tous Kapdovyous πολλοὺς συνειλεγμένους ἐν τοῖς
rd 9 ry Ν ‘ 3 4 a 7
ὅπλοις. ενταῦθα δὴ πολλὴ αθυμία ἦν τοῖς “Ελλησιν,
ἴω “ a A Ν ’ a AY Ἁ
ὁρῶσι μὲν τοῦ ποταμοῦ τὴν δυσπορίαν, ὁρῶσι δὲ τοὺς
’ 7 e A ἈΝ a 4 ϑ
διαβαίνειν κωλύσοντας, ὁρῶσι δε τοῖς διαβαίνουσιν ἐπικει-
, ‘ 7 ΜΝ “ > 4
σομένους τους Καρδούχους ὄπισθεν. Β. ταύτην μὲν οὖν
Ἀ ᾿ς“ ν δ ͵ ” 2 “.Ἵ ,) ΜΝ
τὴν ἡμέραν καὶ τὴν νυκτὰ ἐμειναν εν πολλῃ απορίᾳ ὄντες.
a ‘ Ψ 3Ξ᾿ 2 id 4 φ
Ξενοφῶν δε ὄναρ εἶδεν" ἔδοξεν ἐν πέδαις δεδέσθαι, αὗται
δὲ 3 n~ 3 4 “A ad Xx An N 8 8 an
ε αὐτῷ αὑτόμαται περιρρυῆναι., WaTE λυθῆναι Kat διαβαι
eof ? , > AX ar ¥ 4 ¥ δ
νεῖν ὁπόσον ἐβούλετο. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὄρθρος ἦν, ἔρχεται πρὸς
Ν ’ὔ Ν ’ Cid 3 / 4 a Δ
tov Χειρίσοφον. καὶ λέγει OTL ἐλπίδας ἔχει καλῶς ἐσεσθαι,
Ν - a OA ,. y ς \ of ͵ ὩΣ ,
καὶ διηγεῖται αὐτῷ τὸ ὄναρ. 9. ὁ δε ἥδετο TE καὶ WS Ta-

38 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

¢ e 7; 5.2 ’ ’ ς
χίστα ews ὑπέφαινεν, ἐθύοντο πάντες παρόντες οἱ στρατη-
, Ν \ Φ Ν \, » 3). ἘΣ a , Α
yo.’ καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καλὰ ἣν evOus ἐπὶ τοῦ πρώτου. Kal
3 ’ 3 " A“ e a ς ‘ 4M ‘ ὔ
ἀπίοντες απὸ τῶν ἱερῶν OL στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοῖ παρηγ-
“A “a 9 ΄“
γέλλον τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι.
‘ ? a “~ a 4 4
10. Καὶ ἀριστῶντε τῷ Kevopavtt προσέτρεχον δύο
/ ¥ \ , Ψ %e ἢ 2 A ΝΟΣ
νεανίσκω" ἤδεσαν γὰρ πώντες ὅτε ἐξείη αὐτῷ καὶ ἀρι-
a N a i a Ἀ 9 ᾽ὔ ᾽ /
στῶντι καὶ δειπνοῦντι προσελθεῖν, καὶ εἰ καθεύδοι εἐπεγεὶ-
3 a ¥ 4 » a ιν 4 ,
ραντα hen εἰ τὶς Te ἔχοι τῶν πρὸς τον πόλεμον.
Ε1. καὶ τότε ἔλεγον ὅτι τυγχάνοιεν φρύγανα συλλέγοντες
ὡς ἐπὶ πῦρ, κἄπειτα κατίδοιεν ἐν τῷ πέραν, ἐν πέτραις
καθηκούσαις ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν ποταμὸν, γέροντά τε καὶ γυ-
~ X “A f 4
ναῖκα καὶ παιξίσκας, ὥσπερ μαρσίπους ἱματίων κατατι-
’ > ? 3 , 9 a ’
θεμένους ἐν πέτρᾳ ἀντρωδει. 12. ιδοῦσι δέ σφισι δόξαι
9 4 9 ΄Ζ᾿Φ IAN δ “ 7 e a
ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι διαβῆναι" οὐδὲ γὰρ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἱππεῦσι
AY 93 \ “a 3 7 4 ΜΝ “
προσβατον εἶναι κατὰ τοῦτο. εκδύντες δ᾽ ἐφασαν ἔχοντες
? , \ 4 ’ ’ ’
τὰ ἐγχειρίδια γυμνοὶ ὡς νευσοόμενοι διαβαίνειν " πορευό-
\ ’ a \ 1 Ν In A
μενοι δὲ πρόσθεν διαβῆναι πρὶν βρέξαι τὰ αἰδοῖα" καὶ
’ "κῃ ΄ , / >
διαβώντες καὶ λαβόντες Ta ἱμάτια πάλιν ἥκειν. 18. Ev-
Ἁ 9 ε.. fom ry > ’ wv ‘ A é
Ous οὖν ὁ Ἐενοφῶν αὑτὸς τε ἐσπενδε, Kat τοῖς νεανίσκοις
3 a 2 y \ Μ θ a , θ a / 3 ,
ἐγχεῖν ἐκέλευε, καὶ εὔχεσθαι tots φηνασι θεοῖς ta τε ove-
\ a , .Y Q “\ 3 Ἁ 3 ’ὔ
pata καὶ Tov πόρον, καὶ τὰ λοίπα ἀγαθὰ επιτελέσαι.
, 3 nN 4 δ ’ Ν “ δ᾿
σπείσας δ᾽ εὐθὺς nye τους νεανίσκους παρὼ τὸν Χειρίσο-
4 a > 2 ἢ ΄ ν Nf ’
gov, καὶ διηγοῦνται ταυτα. 14. axovoas δε καὶ ὁ Xetpi-
4 3 / / » “ δῇ A
copes σπονδὰς ἐποίει. σπείσαντες δὲ τοῖς μεν ἄλλοις
, , 3 “A “ /
παρήγγελλον συσκευάξεσθαι, αὐτοὶ δε, συγκαλέσαντες
Ν Ν > 7 f A Λ a
τους aTpaTHyous, εβουλεύοντο ὅπως ἂν καλλιστα διαβαῖεν,
N ’ 4 le N e oN ἴω 4 Ν
Kal τοὺς τε ἔμπροσθεν νικῷεν, καὶ ὕπο τῶν ὄπισθεν μηδεν
A 7 A ΝΜ 3 ἴω ΄ -
πάσχοιεν κακὸν. 15. καὶ ἐδοξεν αὑτοῖς Χειρίσοφον μεν
A ᾿ / ¥ \ Ψ A 7
ἡγεῖσθαι, καὶ διαβαίνειν ἔχοντα τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ στρατεύματος,
4 2 ὦ ¥ e , Ν pad aA Ν νι ὁ ΄
τὸ ὃ ἥμισυν ετι ὑπομένειν συν Ξενοφῶντι, τὰ δε ὑποζύγια
Ν Ὡ “ 2 ΄ Ψ ’ 3 Ν ‘N
καὶ Tov ὄχλον ev μέσῳ τούτων διαβαίνειν. 16. ἐπεὶ δὲ

ANAB, 4, I11.] Ford of the Kentrites. 89

σι δι 4 3 ’ὔ e a e ’ 9
καλῶς ταῦτα εἶχεν, ἐπορεύοντο" ἡγοῦντο δ᾽ οἱ νεανίσκοι ἐν
2 a Ν ’ ‘ δι δὲ 4 ΣΝ Ν ὃ rd
ἀριστερᾷ ἔχοντες τὸν ποταμὸν" odos de ἣν ἐπὶ τὴν διω-
{ ΄ 4
βασιν ws τέτταρες στάδιοι.
,ὔ 3 >? A 9 4 ° 4 a
17. Πορευομενων ὃ αὐτῶν ἀντιπαρήεσαν αἱ τάξεις τῶν
e , > 4 \ 9 ‘ Α ’ a . ν
ἑππέων. ἐπειδὴ δὲ σαν κατὰ τὴν διάβασιν καὶ τας οχθας
aA a ΝΥ \ @& ‘ > A ΄“ ᾽
τοῦ ποταμοῦ, ἐθεντο τὰ οπλα, καὶ αὑτὸς πρῶτος Χειρισο-
, x. 9 Ν 3, 9 se “
hos, στεφανωσάμενος Kat atrodus, ἐλάμβανε Ta ὅπλα, καὶ
~ . , Ν νι . oa
τοῖς ANAOLS TAGE παρήγγελλε, καὶ τους λοχαγους ἐκέλευεν
» 4 , 9 , ‘ . 3 2 a a > 9
ἄγειν Tous λόχους ορθιους, τους μὲν ἐν ἀριστερᾷ, Tous ὃ EV
~ e a Ν e ‘ ’ i) ’ ’
δεξιᾷ ἑαυτοῦ. 18. καὶ ov μὲν μάντεις echaytalovto εἰς
Ν , e ω ’ > 7 ‘ - 9 ,
τὸν ποταμόν" οἱ δε πολέμιοι ἐτοξενον τε καὶ ἐσφενδόνων "
9 ? ΓΚ 9 “Ὁ . δ ‘ . ¢ ‘ ’
adr οὕπω ἐξικνοῦντος. 19. ἐπεὶ δὲ Kaka ἣν Ta σφαγια,
3 ͵ὔ 4 e A . 9 ΄ ,ὕ
ἐπαιανιζον παντες οἱ στρατιῶται καὶ ανηλαλαζον, συνωλο-
\ ιν e A of “ ‘ κε e a
λυζον δὲ καὶ at γυναῖκες ἅπασαι" πολλαὶ yap Noav ἐταῖ-
3 a ΄ “ ‘ Α .“, 0
ραι εν τῷ στρατεύματι. 20. Και Χειρίσοφος μεν ενεβαινε,
‘ € “ > s φ \ pe A A 9 ’
καὶ οἱ σὺν ἐκείνῳ" ὁ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν, τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων λα-
“ ‘ ? ’ ΝὟ 3 ‘ 4 , , 8 N
Bav τοὺς evlwvotatous, «Bee ava κράτος παλιν ἐπὶ Tov
“ “ Ἁ ‘ » x 9 ‘N “ 9 ͵ὕ
πόρον τὸν Kata τὴν exBaow τὴν εἰς τὰ τῶν ᾿Αρμενίων
¥ 4 ¢ \ 9 , N Q
Opn, προσποιούμενος ταυτῃ διαβας ἀποκλείσειν τοὺς Tapa
“ Ν e , e Ἁ ’ o oA A
TOV ποταμον ππεας. ZA. ov δὲ πολέεμίοι, ορῶντες μεν
ω 3 ‘ ’ 4 (ad Ν of σι e oa
tous audi Χειρίσοφον εὐπετῶς τὸ ὕδωρ περῶντας, ὁρῶντες
᾿Ὶ Ἀ 9 Ν a 4 9 »¥ ,
δὲ tous audi Ξενοφῶντα θέοντας εἰς τοὔμπαλιν, δείσαντες
4 2 / . > A [οὶ e “ A
μὴ ἀποκλεισθείησαν, φεύγουσιν ava Kpatos, ὡς πρὸς τὴν
΄σ“" a ” > - \ ‘ Ἁ ean > 4
τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἄνω ἐκβασιν. ἐπει δὲ κατα τὴν δον ἐγένοντο,
3 ν Ν . OM 4 > ν» A , ¥
ἔτεινον ἄνω πρὸς TO Opes. 322. Λύκιος ὃ ὁ την τάξιν ἔχων
a e ὕ ΝΥ 4 4 4 Q ᾽ a A a
τῶν ἱππεων, kat Atayivns ὁ τὴν Takiv τῶν πελταστῶν τῶν
9 \ / 9 ἈΝ ΓΝ » ἊΝ ὔ , of
ἀμφὶ Xetpicopov, emer Ewpwv ava Kpatos φεύγοντας. εἰ-
e ‘ (ad 3 4 Ἁ 3 / 3 Ἁ
ποντο" οὐ δὲ στρατιῶται eBowv μὴ ἀπολείπεσθαι, ἀλλα
/ > Av ἈΝ Ν / @ ? ιν
συνεκβαίνειν emt τὸ opos. 28. Χειρίσοφος δ᾽ αὖ επεὶ
J A Α e 4 3 γκ sn 4 \ \
διέβη, Tous μὲν ἵππέας οὐκ ediwKev, εὐθυς δὲ κατὰ τας
,’ M” > A ἈΝ Ἁ 9g? > AN N
προσηκούσας οχθας ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν εξέβαινεν emt Tous

40 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [ Xen.

Ν , € Q y ef oA 4 N e a
ἄνω πολεμίους. ob δὲ ἄνω, ὁρῶντες μὲν TOUS εαυτῶν
ς ᾽ 4 e “ 3 [4 ΄ 4 > a
ἱππέας φεύγοντας, ὁρῶντες ὃ ὁπλίτας σφίσιν ἐπίοντας,
3 ον σ΄“ a
ἐκλείπουσι TA ὑπερ TOU ποταμοῦ aKpa.
a 9 3 LY “ 4 ev A ’
24. Ἐενοφῶν 5, ἐπεὶ Ta περαν ἐωρα καλῶς γιγνόμενα,
᾽ . ͵ “ Ν a“ ͵
ἀπεχώρει τὴν ταχίστην πρὸς τὸ διαβαῖνον στρατευμα" καὶ
+ ς a ,. > 3 “ 4
yap οἱ Καρδοῦχοι φανεροῖ ἤδη σαν εἰς to πεδίον κατα-
΄ e ? / “ 4
βαίνοντες, ws ἐπιθησοόμενοι τοῖς τελευταίοις. 2S. καὶ
, \ * oN ” a / \ Ν 9 f
Χειρίσοφος μὲν Ta avw κατεῖχε, Avetos d€ συν ολίγοις
4 7 4 A Ὗ A 4 Ἁ e
ἐπιχειρήσας ἐπιδιῶξαι ἔλαβε τῶν σκευοφόρων τα ὑπολει-
, A ’ 3 na ΟΡ ‘ . 9 4
πόμενα, καὶ μετα τούτων ἐσθῆτα τε καλὴν καὶ ἐκπώματα.
Ν Ἁ ‘ J a € , “ Ww
26. καὶ τὰ μὲν oKxevohopa τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καὶ ὃ ὄχλος
2 \ ’ A “N ’ Ἁ Α ’
ἀκμὴν διεβαινε" Ἐενοφῶν δὲ στρέψας πρὸς τοὺς Καρδούχους
4 ,ὔ We 4 Ν \ , a ” 9
ἀντία Ta ὅπλα εθετο, καὶ παρήγγειλε τοῖς λοχαγοῖς κατ
2 “ ΄ ε Ν ε a 4 ’
ἐνωμοτίας ποιήσασθαι ἕκαστον τὸν EavTOU λόχον, παρ
3 } , δ 3 ’ > N , N
ἀσπίδα Tapayayovtas τὴν ενωμοτίαν ἐπὶ φαλαγγος " καὶ
“ Q LY ‘ Ν 9 ’ , a
τους μὲν λοχαγους καὶ Tous ἐνωμοταρχοὺς προς τῶν Kap-
, 3 9 Ν - ’ὔ \ A
δούχων ἱέναι, ovparyous δὲ καταστήσασθαι πρὸς τοῦ ποτα-
a \ a ¢ ess Ν 4 ,
μοῦ. 27. Οἱ δὲ Kapdovyor ws ewpwv τοὺς ὁπισθοφύλακας
a Ww , ὃ. ἡ 9 ’ A
τοῦ ὄχλου ψιλουμεένους, καὶ ὀλίγους ἤδη φαινομένους, θᾶττον
\ 3 4 sa ἢ ” € Ἁ ΄ > “A ‘
δὴ ἐπῆεσαν woas τινας adovtes. ὁ δὲ Χειρίσοφος, ἐπεὶ τὰ
3 > a 9 a 9 / \ =f a A
Tap αὐτῷ ἀσφαλὼς εἶχε, πέμπει Tapa Ἐενοφώντα τοὺς
\ ιν ’ὔ A ’ὔ Q ¢ “"
πελταστας καὶ σφενδονήτας καὶ τοξότας, καὶ κέλευει ποιεῖν
ef A , IOs \ 3 Ν ,ὕ
ὁ τὶ ἄν παραγγελλῃ. 28. ἰδὼν δὲ αὑτοὺς διαβαίνοντας,
C pat a , ¥ ὔ ? A ry > " a
o Ἐενοφῶν πέμψας ἄγγελον κελεύει αὐτοῦ μεῖναι ETL τοῦ
a ‘ 4 d > »νΚ ? Ν ,
ποταμοῦ μὴ διαβαντας" ὅταν δ᾽ ἀρξωνται avtot διαβαίνειν,
2 ’ ¥ \ a 3 / e ͵
ἐναντίους evOev καὶ ενθεν σφῶν ἐμβαίνειν ὡς διαβησομεένους,
Ἁ 3 \ Saar 4 ‘
διηγκυλωμένους τοὺς axovtiatas, καὶ ἐπιβεβλημένους τους
, Ἁ ’ N a a 4 a
τοξοτας" μὴ πρόσω δε τοῦ ποταμοῦ προβαίνειν. 329. τοῖς
Α > ε va / ? Ν ’ 3 A
δε Tap εαυτῷ παρήγγειλεν, ἐπειδὰν σφενδόνη εξικνῆται
Ν 4 Α A 4 aA 9 Ν
καὶ ἀσπὶς Yrodn, παιανίσαντας θεῖν εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους"
3 Ἁ \ » 4 ε 4 ee A a
ἐπείδαν δε ἀναστρεψωσιν οἱ TOAEMLOL, καὶ EX TOU ποταμοῦ

Anas. 4, rv-] Crossing the Ford. 41

Ἃ
e A a ‘ A 4 4 > AN
ὁ σαλπικτῆς σημήνῃ TO πολεμίκον, αναστρέψαντας ἐπὶ
e ω Ἁ ‘ 3 Ν a Ἁ 4 “
δορυ ἡγεῖσθαι μεν τοὺς ovpayous, θεῖν δὲ παντας, καὶ δια-
a ’ 4 ὦ Ἁ ’ 4 ¢ 4
βαίνειν ὁτι τάχιστα, ἢ ἕκαστος τὴν ταξιν εἶχεν, ὡς μὴ
Α ; ᾿ ᾿ “ 4 ” ¥ A 4
ἐμποδίζειν αλλήλους" OTL OUTOS ἀρίστος ἐσοιτο, ὃς ἂν
n 2 a , 4 e N “"
πρῶτος ἐν τῷ πέραν γένηται. 80. οἱ δὲ Καρδοὔχοι,
fon 9, ἡ ¥ Ν Ἁ Ν \ Ν a
Ὁρῶντες ὀλίγους ἤδη TOUS AOLTTOUS, — πολλοί Yap καὶ τῶν
μ ’ ¥ 3 ς ‘ e
μένειν τεταγμένων WYOVTO, ἐπιμελησομενοι OL μεν ὑποΐζξύυ-
φ A ἴω ¢ > e “A 3 a Ν 9 ’
γίων, οἱ δὲ σκευῶν, οἱ δ᾽ ἑταιρῶν, ---- ἐνταῦθα dn ἐπέκειντο
’ νιν» a ον ’ ς εν
θρασέως, καὶ ἤρχοντο σφενδονᾶν καὶ τοξεύειν. 8}. οἱ δὲ
"EX 7 d ὃ , > 3 9 , . e Se
nves παιανίσαντες ὥρμησαν δρόμῳ em αὐτοὺς οἱ δὲ
> Ws \ Ν 4 e , ς ‘ 3 a
οὐκ ἐδέξαντο" καὶ yap ἦσαν ὠπλισμένοι ὡς MEV ἐν τοῖς
» e A Ν “ 3 aA ‘ 7 Ν ‘ “
ὄρεσιν ἱκανῶς πρὸς TO ἐπιδραμεῖν καὶ φεύγειν, πρὸς δὲ TO
2 e , 2 ς a 3 4 ,
εἰς χείρας δέχεσθαι οὐχ ἱκανῶς. B2. ἐν τούτῳ onpaiver
ς , A e Ν , ΝΜ Ἂν a
O σαλπικτὴς " καὶ OL μὲν πολέμιοι ἔφευγον πολὺ ETL θᾶττον,
ΟΣ 7 3 , 7 ¥ oY a
οἱ ὃ “Ελληνες τἀναντία στρέψαντες ἔφευγον διὰ τοῦ ποτα-
a ψῳΨ ’΄ a ‘ / ς ,
μον ὁτε τάχιστα. 88. τῶν δὲ πολεμίων οἱ μὲν τίνες
2 θ ’ὔ / ὃ 7 N εν ἈΝ N ’ὔ
αἰσθομενοι πάλιν εἐὄραμον ἐπὶ τὸν ToTapov, καὶ τοξεύοντες
x. 7 4 e ‘ Ν / ¥ a ¢ /
ὀλίγους ἐτρωσαν, ot δὲ πολλοὶ καὶ πέραν ὄντων τῶν ᾿Ελλη-
¥” ν 9 , e as ,
νων ere φανεροί ἦσαν φεύγοντες. 84. οἱ δε ὑπαντήσαντες,
2 / Ν , a a ες ef
ἀνδριξόμενοι καὶ προσωτέρω τοῦ καιρόῦ προϊόντες, ὕστερον
a Sm a / Λ . 2 ,
τῶν peta Ἐενοφῶντος διέβησαν πάλιν" καὶ ἐτρωθησών
Ν 7
τίνες καὶ τούτων.
᾽ \ gs , 7 3 N , ς »
IV. Ἐπεὶ δε διέβησαν, συνταξάμενοι ἀμφὶ μέσον ἡμέ-
2 ’ Ν 3 / / /
pas, ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῆς Appevtas πεδίον ἅπαν καὶ
4 3, 3 “ A ᾽ ὔ 3
λείους γηλόφους, ov μεῖον ἢ πέντε παρασάγγας" ov yap
3 3 ‘ A a Ν . ‘N
ἤσαν eyyus τοῦ ποταμοῦ κῶμαι, dia τοὺς πολέμους TOUS
Ν ἈΝ ? 3 Ν A a ad “4
πρὸς τοὺς Καρδούχους. 2 εἰς δὲ ἣν ἀφίκοντο κωμην
μ ε aN 3 Ν B ἣν 9 a . ΑΛ; 32"
yarn τε nv, καὶ βασίλειον εἶχε τῷ σατράπῃ, καὶ ἐπὶ
a , 5. - 4 2 A δ , > 9
Tals πλείσταις οἰκίαις τύρσεις ἐπῆσαν" ἐπιτήδεια ὃ ἦν
A 3 a 3 4 N ’
δαψιλῆ. ἃ. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς δύο πα-
[4 [4 4 A a A “A /
ρασώγγας δέκα, μέχρε ὑπερῆλθον τὰς πηγὰς τοῦ Τίγρητος

42 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [ Xen.

΄- 3 a 9. 3 4 “ cad
ποταμοῦ, ἐντεῦθεν δ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμους τρεῖς παρα-
’ 3." Ν , ’ @ Ἵ
cayyas πεντεκαίδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν TnreBoav ποταμὸν. οὕτος ὃ
Φ Ν x , 3 3᾽ ω ‘ “ 4 ‘
ἣν καλος μεν, μεγας δ ov: κῶμαι δὲ πολλαὶ περί τον
Ἁ 9 ς Ν , φ ? / 2 a e
ποταμὸν ἦσαν. 4. ὁ δε τόπος OUTOS Apevia εκαλεῖτο ἡ
‘ e 4 ad 3 > > A 7 ξ Α
πρὸς ἑσπέραν. ὕπαρχος ὃ ἦν αὑτῆς Τιρίβαζος, ὁ καὶ
A I. “2 Ν φ 2 4 3
βασιλεῖ φίλος γενόμενος, καὶ ὁπότε παρείη, οὐδεὶς ἄλλος
7 9 NN Φ > “ 4
βασιλέα ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ἀνέβαλλεν. ὅ. οὗτος προσήλασεν
e , ¥ A / e / 9 “ vd
ἱππέας ἔχων, καὶ προπέμψας Epunvea εἶπεν ὅτι βούλοιτο
a “ 4 “ Ν “ 4
διαλεχθῆναι τοῖς ἄρχουσι. τοῖς δὲ στρατηγοῖς ἔδοξεν
9 “A “ 4 9 3 ’ 4 7 /
ἀκοῦσαι" καὶ προσελθόντες εἰς ἐπήκοον ἠρώτων τί θέλοι.
ς δὲ 9) Ψ 7 ᾽’ 3,3) Φ , > A Ν
ὁ δε εἶπεν ὅτι σπείσασθαι βούλοιτο, Ep ῳ μὴτε αὑτὸς τοὺς
a 3 a 7 3 7 ’ Ν ᾿) 4 /
Ελληνας αδικεῖν, μήτε exeivous καειν Tas οἰκίας, λαμβα-
ἢ , / , "» ΝΥ A
νειν TE ταπιτήδεια ὅσων δέοιντο. ἐδοξε ταῦτα τοῖς στρατήη-
a \ 93 4 3. N ’
yous, καὶ ἐσπείσαντο ETL τουτοίς.
9 A 2) 9 ΄ Ἁ a “ ,
7. ᾿Εντεῦθεν 8 ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμους τρεῖς δια πεδίου,
’᾽ / Ν , ᾽ὔ
Tapacwyyas πεντεκαίδεκα" καὶ Τιριβαξος παρηκολούθει,
4 x ς ΄ ’ ; 3 tA ς 4 ’ LY
ἔχων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν, ἀπέχων ws δέκα σταδιοὺυς" καὶ
9 7 43 λΛ Ν , / Ν a
adixovto εἰς βασίλεια Kat κώμας πέριξ πολλὰς πολλὼν
a ’ , ͵ ͵, ’ Xa
τῶν ἐπιτηδείων μεστάς. 8. στρατοπεδευομένων ὃ αὑτῶν,
4 A \ Ν ’ . of θ Pe)
γίγνεται τῆς νυκτὸς χιὼν πολλή" καὶ ἕωθεν εδοξε διασκη-
a δ 7 \ N \ δ Ν 7 3
νῆσαι τὰς τάξεις καὶ τους στρατηγοὺυς κατὰ Tas κωμας" Ov
Ἀ .ς» / IA 7 . 2 Ν In ἢ 4 Ν
yap ἕωρων πολέμιον οὐδένα, καὶ ἀσφαλες ἐδόκει εἷναι διὰ
Ν a a , > a 9 / . 3 ,
τὸ πλῆθος τῆς χιόνος. 9. ἐνταῦθα εἶχον παντα Ta ἐπιτὴ-
Ψ 3 \ 3 Ν ς ἴω a Ν A 97
dea ὅσα ἐστὶν ayaa, ἱερεία, σῖτον, oLvous παλαιοὺς εὐω-
3 “ ¥y tA »Ὃ Ν 3
δεις, ἀσταφίδας, ὄσπρια παντοδαπά. τῶν δὲ ἀποσκεδαν-
, \ > 8 A Ἴ “ Ψ ,
νυμένων τινὲς ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατοπέδου ἔλεγον ὅτι κατίδοιεν
ἤ Ν ’ὔ \ Ν / Ia?
στρατευμα, καὶ νύκτωρ πολλα πυρὰ φαίνοιτο. 10. ἐδόκει
Ν a n 3 9 Ν 3 ~ 3 Ν
δὴ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς οὐκ ἀσφαλες εἶναι διασκηνοῦν, adda
A Ν ’ , 3 A a
συναγαγεῖν TO στράτευμα πάλιν. ἐντεῦθεν συνῆλθον'
4 Ν Ian 7 ᾽ ’ ᾽ > A
καὶ yap εδόκει SiaOpiafev. 11. νυκτερευοντων ὃ αὑτῶν
3 amy 39 / Ν “ Ψ 3 , Ν \
ἐνταῦθ ἐπιπίπτει χίων ἄπλετος, WOTE ἀπέκρυψε καὶ TA

Axas.4,1v.] Snow in the Highlands. 43

[2 Ν ‘ 3 ’ , a \ 6 ἢ
ὕπλα καὶ TOUS ἀνθρώπους κατακειμένους " καὶ Ta ὑποξύυγια
rs ¢ , \ ‘ ¥ 4 5.»
συνεποῦισεν ἢ χίων" καὶ πολὺς OKVOS ἣν ἀνίστασθαι"
‘ ᾽ Ν ΕῚ e δ ’ a τ
κατακειμένων γὰρ ἀλεεινὸν ἣν ἡ χίων εἐπιπεπτωκυια, ὅτῳ
x / ? AY ν =— a 2 , “
μὴ Tapappvern. A. ever δε Ξενοῴφων ετολμησε γυμνος
) x 7) ΄ 4.3 3 ’ δ ¥ ’ 4
ἀναστὰς σχίξειν ξύλα, τάχ ἀναστὰς τις καὶ adXos, ἐκεί-
3 » 3 Ν ’ Ν e ow +]
vou ἀφελόμενος, ἔσχιζεν. ex δὲ τούτου καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ἀνα»
, a Ψ ν 9 ’ “ δ 3 “
σταντες πῦρ Exascy καὶ ἐχρίοντο" AB. πολυ γὰρ ἐνταῦθα
δὲ» a Φ 4 a » > 3 , ? ‘ /
ευρίσκετο χρῖμα, ᾧ ἐχρῶντο ἀντ ἐλαίου. σύειον καὶ σησω-
Q 3 , 4 aA “ ‘ ᾽ 9
μινον καὶ ἀμυγδαλινον εκ τῶν πικρῶν Kat τερεβίνθινον. Ex
Χ a 3 a ΄ N 7 ° 4
δε τῶν αὐτῶν τούτων καὶ μύρον εύὐρίσκετο.
\ A IA? , , Ά4 ’ N
14. Mera ταῦτα ἐδόκει πάλιν διασκηνητεον εἶναι εἰς τὰς
’ 4 , »” ‘ e a bs a
κωμας εἰς στέγας. ἔνθα δὴ ob στρατιῶται συν πολλῇ
és . ἐ a ¥ x9 νιν , . 893 ,
κραυγὴ Kat ἡδονῇ ἤέεσαν ἐπὶ τὰς στέγας καὶ Ta ἐπιτήδεια"
Ψ δὲ Ψ ᾿ , 3; #4 ‘ > 2 > » e oN
ogot O€,0TE TO πρότερον ἀπῇεσαν, τὰς οἰκίας ἐνέπρησαν VITO
“A 9 / / Ia? a a 2
τῆς αἰθρίας δίκην εδίδοσαν κακῶς σκηνοῦντες. 1ὅ. ἐν-
a Μ Ν , ,ὕὔ ¥
τεῦθεν ἔπεμψαν νυκτὸς Anuoxputnv Τημνίτην, ἄνδρας
ὃ ’ ὍΝ .»νγ » » ¢ 3 4
ovres, ἐπὶ Ta Opn ἔνθα Edacay οἱ ἀποσκεδαννύμενοι καθο-
5 \ / Φ Ν In / Ν ’ ν y»
pav τὰ πυρά" οὗτος yap ἐδόκει καὶ πρότερον πολλὰ ἤδη
2 a a \ oy . ¥ Q cy ‘\
ἀληθεῦσαι τοιαῦτα, Ta ὄντα TE WS ὄντα καὶ τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς
? y¥ Ν Ν Ν Ν Ν ? 4 ? a
οὐκ ὄντα. 16. Iopevdes δε, τὰ μὲν πυρὰ οὐκ ἔφη ἰδεῖν,
¥ \ . @ ” ¥ , Ν ‘
ἄνδρα δε συλλαβὼν ἧκεν ἄγων, ἔχοντα τόξον Περσικὸν καὶ
,ὔ Ν , of \ 9 / ¥
φαρέτραν Kat σάγαριν otavrrep καὶ ᾿Αμαζόνες ἔχουσιν.
93 ὔ Ἀ Ν A y 4 Ν yy 9
17. epwrwpevos δὲ τὸ ποδαπὸς ein, Πέρσης μὲν ἔφη εἶναι,
4 3 > Ν A , 7 Φ 9
πορεύεσθαι ὃ ἀπὸ τοῦ Τιριβάζου στρατεύματος, ὅπως ἐπι-
Ἰὸ 7 € 2 9 , > wv “ ’ 6 7)
τηδεια λάβοι. οἱ ὃ ἠρωτων αὑτὸν TO στρατευμα ὅπόσον
Υ̓ er kV , , ς \ 4 /
τε εἰη, καὶ ἐπὶ τίνε συνειλεγμένον. 18. ὁ Se εἶπεν ὅτι
/ 3 ΜΝ ’ e A ’ AY 7
Τιρίβαξος ein, ἔχων τήν τε ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ μισθοφό-
’ “ / 7 Ν 3
ρους Χωλυβας καὶ Taoyous: παρεσκευάσθαι δὲ αὐτὸν
» ς ΝΝ a € a a 3 “ a @
ἐφη ὡς emt τῇ υπερβολῃ τοῦ OpoUs εν τοῖς στενοῖς, περ
“ ¥ / ? “ 9 , a e
fovayn εἰη πορεία, ἐνταῦθα ἐπιθησοόμενον τοῖς Ελλησιν.
3 7 a a ”“ δ᾽ Ν ’
19. ἀκούσασι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ταῦτα ἐδοξε τὸ στράτευμα

44 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [ Xen,

A A 2A 7 ’ Ν
συναγαγεῖν" καὶ εὐθυς φύλακας καταλιπόντες καὶ στρατη-
a 2 \ a 4 / [2 ? 7
yov ἐπὶ τοῖς μένουσι Σοφαίνετον ATvuparsov, ἐπορεύοντο
4 ’ Ν Ν ? Ν \
ἔχοντες ἡγεμόνα τὸν ἁλόντα ἄνθρωπον. 20. Ἐπειδη δε
¢ / A yy e δ oe / Ν
υπερεβαλλον τὰ OPN, οἱ πελτασται, “προΐοντες καὶ κατι-
4 Ν 7 3 4 “ ¢ 4 > b
δόντες τὸ στρατόπεδον, οὐκ ἔμειναν τους ὁπλίτας, αλλ
9 ’ ¥ > NAN ὔ e Ν ͵
ἀνακραγόντες ἔθεον ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. 21. οἱ δὲ βαρ-
> 7 “ 4 3 e 4 3 >”
Bapot, ἀκούσαντες tov θόρυβον, οὐχ ὑπέμειναν, adr εφευ-
ef Ν “ 3 / ’ “ [4 N
γον" ὅμως δὲ καὶ ἀπέθανον τινες τῶν βαρβάρων, και
ed ef 3 ¥ NV « \ oe , eh
ὑπποι ἥλωσαν εἰς εἴκοσι, καὶ ἡ σκηνὴ ἡ Τιριβαζου ἐάλω,
A 3 2 a σι 3 ’ \ 3 [4 Ν e 3
καὶ ἐν AUTH κλῖναι ἀργυρόποδες καὶ ἐκπώματα, καὶ οἱ apTo-
’ Ν e 2 ’ J 9 > Ν Ν
κόποι καὶ οἱ οἰνοχόος φάσκοντες εἶναι. 232. ἐπειδὴ δὲ
9 / a ς a ry Ν In 7 ? a
ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα οἱ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν στρατηγοὶ, ἐδόκει aVTOIS
3 , “ 7 > A \ , 9 7]
ἀπιέναι τὴν ταχίστην ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, μή τίς ἐπίθεσις
, “ 7 A IAN 3 ’
γένοιτο τοῖς καταλελειίμμένοις, καὶ εὐθυς ἀνακαλεσάμενοι
a , > ἡ NS og 2 Ν > NS
τῇ σάλπιγγι ἀπῇεσαν, Kat ἀφίκοντο αὐθημερὸν emt TO στρα-
’
τοπεδον.
Awe , OP , 3 Ψ ͵
V. Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐδόκει ππορευτεον εἶναι ὅπη δύναιντο
/ Ν ἵ a Ν 4 Λ Ν
τάχιστα, πρίν συλλεέγηναν TO στράτευμα παλιν, καὶ κατα"
a Ἁ ’᾽ ’ ? IAN > ͵
λαβεῖν τὰ στενά. συσκευασάμενοι δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐπορεύοντο
‘\ 4 a € / 4 , Ν 3
δια YLovos πολλῆς, ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες πολλοὺς " καὶ αὐθη-
Ν e ( “ ¥ 2,3 em 3 ,
μερὸν ὑπερβαλόντες τὸ ἄκρον eh ᾧ ἐμέλλεν ἐπιτίθεσθαι
/ ᾽ 3 a 2 9 4
Τιρίβαζος, κατεστρατοπεδεύσαντο. 32. ἐντεῦθεν ὃ ἐπορεὺ-
Ν 9 , a , /
θησαν σταθμους ἐρήμους τρεῖς, παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα,
> NN x 3 ᾽; Ν “ 4 ὍΝ ,
ἐπὶ tov Ἐυφράτην ποταμὸν, καὶ διέβαινον αὐτὸν βρεχο-
Ν “ 9 ὔ ς 9 / ‘N 3 “” « Ν b
μενοι πρὸς τὸν ομφαλὸν. ἐλέγοντο δὲ αὑτοῦ al πηγαί ov
/ 3 2 ων 3 ’ ‘ “ A
πρόσω εἶναι. 8 Ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύοντο δια χιόνος πολλῆς
Ν “ Ν a ’ 4 ‘ ͵
καὶ πεδίον, σταθμοὺς τρεῖς, παρασάγγας πέντε. ὁ SE τρί-
3 ΄ Ν ΝΥ α 3 / Ψ
τος ἐγένετο χαάλεπος, καὶ ἄνεμος βορρᾶς ἐναντίος ἔπνει,
lA ? / ’᾽ Ἂ Ss N > ’
παντάπασιν aToKawy πάντα καὶ πήγνυς τοὺς ἀνθρωπους.
4 ¥ 6 δὴ a , , 3 ’᾽ θ A > 4
- ἔνθα δὴ τῶν pavTewy τις εἶπε σφαγίάσασθαι τῷ ανέμῳ,
Ν ’ Ν a Ν "“ ¥ ΄΄ὸ Ν
καὶ σφαγιαζεται" καὶ πᾶσι δὴ περιφανῶς ἔδοξε λῆξαι τὸ

ANAB, 4, v.] Famine and Frost. 45

Ων ry 4 9 Ἃ “A 4 “ [4
χαλεπὸν τοῦ πνεύματος. ἦν δὲ τῆς χιόνος τὸ βάθος
4 4 da Α a e ’ Ν a 3 4
opyua> ὥστε καὶ τῶν ὑποξυγιων καὶ τῶν ἀνδραπόδων

Ἁ > ’ Ν A “ e 4
πολλᾶ AMTWAETO, καὶ των στρατιωτων ὡς τρίιωκοντα.

΄ Ν “ἌΝ ’ a , id S 3
Διεγένοντο δὲ τὴν νύκτα πῦρ κώοντες" Evra δ᾽ ἦν ev
a a , € as 3, ‘ , ’ 9
τῷ σταθμῷ πολλά" οἱ δὲ οψε προσίοντες ξύλα ove εἶχον.
e > Λ \ Ἀ “ , 3 ’ Ὡ
οἱ οὖν πάλαι ἥκοντες καὶ τὸ πῦρ κώοντες οὐ προσίεσαν πρὸς
Ἁ “σ΄ Ν > ͵ > Ν a 4 a Ἁ a
TO πῦρ τοὺς οψίζοντας, εἰ μὴ μεταδοίεν αὐτοῖς πυρους, ἢ
” ¥ ¥ , ¥ ‘ / ’ ,
ἄλλο τι εἰ TL ἔχοιεν βρωτὸν. 6. ἔνθα dn μετεδίδοσαν adAn-

φ 4 Υ͂ ¥ Ν \ a > /
λοις ὧν εἶχον ἕκαστοι. ἔνθα δὲ τὸ πῦρ exaeto διατηκο-

, a , , ,. ἢ , ¥ 3 ) \
μένης τῆς χίονος, βοθροι ἐγίγνοντο μεγάλοι ἐστε ἐπὶ TO
7 4φ Ν - a Ἁ U ; a 4
“δάπεδον: ov δὴ παρὴν μετρεῖν τὸ βαθος τῆς χιόνος.

4 a ‘ Ν 3 a . ΄ e. 3 ’ 4
Ἐντεῦθεν δὲ την ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ὅλην ἐπορεύοντο δια
’ Ν N a 3 , ? / μ-
χίονος, καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων εβουλιμίασαν. Ἐξενο-
a > > a ἣν ’ Ν 4
dav δ᾽ ὁπισθοφυλακῶν, καὶ καταλαμβανων τοὺς πίπτοντας
a ἢ , 3 ’ Ψ ‘ ͵ ¥ ἢ ‘ ‘
τῶν avOpwrav, nyvoe ὃ τι TO πάθος εἴη. 8. ἐπειδὴ δὲ
εἶ φ > «a a 3 ,ὔ Ω͂ φῶ B x. an Ν
πε TLS αυτῷ τῶν ἐμπειρων ὅτι σαφῶς βουλιμιῶσι, a
᾽ , “ ὡ Ν ΄ rd °
φαγωσιν ἀναστήσονται, περιιὼν Tepe Ta ὑποζύγια, εἰ πον
ς , Ν \ 4 , ‘

Tt op@n βρωτον, διεδίδου, καὶ διέπεμπε διδόντας τοὺς Suva-
,ὔ ,ὕ ω a 3 Ν ld 3
μένους παρατρέχειν τοῖς βουλιμιῶσιν. ἐπειδὴ δέ τι ἐμ-

’ > » x 4 4
φαγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο καὶ επορεύὔοντο.
’᾽ ᾿ ὔ Ν 3 Ν 4 “

Πορευομένων δε, Χειρίσοφος μὲν ἀμφὶ κνεφας πρὸς

’ 3 “Ὁ Ν e 4 1 lal 4 “
κο μην ἀφικνεῖται, καὶ υδροφορουσας εκ τῆς KWLNS Tipe.
τῇ κρήνῃ γυναίκας, καὶ κόρας καταλαμβάνει ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ
ἐρύματος. 10. αὗται ἠρώτων αὐτοὺς τίνες εἶεν. ὁ 8

3
ἑρμηνεὺς εἶπε περσιστὶ, ὅτι παρὰ βασιλέως πορεύονται

N N , eas 32 , / ᾽ 3 aA
προς Tov σατράπην. at δὲ ἀπεκρίναντο ὅτε οὐκ ἐνταῦθα
ν 9 3 3 4 a 4 e 9 2 Ἁ 3 ὲν 9
en, αλλ ἀπέχει ὅσον Tapacuyyny. οἱ ὃ, ἐπεὶ oe ἦν,

“ “ , 4 a “ MM N “"
πρὸς τὸν κωμαάρχην συνεισέρχονται εἰς TO ἔρυμα σὺν ταῖς
e ’ Ι Ν 9 XN of 9 ,
υδροφοροις. Lb. Χειρίσοφος μεν οὖν. καὶ ὅσοι ἐδυνήθησαν

A 4 ? a > ? ω >
τοῦ στρατεύματος, ἐνταῦθα ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, τῶν ὃ
Ν a ς . ͵ , N eas
ἄλλων στρατιωτῶν οἱ μὴ δυνάμενοι διατελέσαι THY ὁδὸν

46 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

9 ’ v7 \. ϑ , “ 3 a ’
ἐνυκτερευσαν ἄσιτοι καὶ ἄνευ πυρὸς " καὶ ἐνταῦθα τινες
9 ’ φι ~ ’ὔ ΝῚ nw
ἀπώλοντο τῶν στρατιωτῶν. 12. ᾿Εφείποντο δὲ τῶν πολε-
’ 4 “ Q Ν Ν 4 a e
μίων συνειλεγμένοι τίνες, καὶ Ta μὴ δυνάμενα τῶν ὑποζὺυ-
4 ef ‘ 3 4 3 ᾽ “ 2 A 3 ,
γίων ἥρπαζον, καὶ ἀλλήλοις ἐμάχοντο περὶ αὐτῶν. ἐλει-
Ν A a a 4 e “ “A ,
ποντο δε τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἱ τε διεφθαρμένοι ὑπο τῆς χιόνος
Ν 5 Ν “ e oN a ’ Ν ΄ “
tous οφθαλμους, οἱ τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ψύχους Tous δακτύλους τῶν
a , / 9 x a . 9 a 3
ποδῶν ἀἁποσεσηπότες. 18. ἣν δε τοῖς μεν οφθαλμοῖς ἐπι-
2 a / Ν Z ¥ “ A 9
κουρημα τῆς χίονος, εἰ τις μέλαν TL ἔχων πρὸ τῶν οφθαλ-
“ 3 4 “Ὁ μ a ΝΥ [2] x 4
μῶν επορεύετο, τῶν δὲ ποδῶν εἴ. TLS κινοῖτο καὶ μηδέποτε
€ , ¥” Ν 3 Ν ΄ e ΄ ct .
ἡσυχίαν ἔχοι καὶ εἰ THY νύκτα ὑπολύοιτο' 14. ὅσοι δε
ς ’ ? “ 9 , 9 Ν ’ὔ ¢e 4
ὑποδεδεμένοι ἐκοιμῶντο, εἰσεδύοντο εἰς TOUS πόδας οἱ ἱμάν-
Ν Ν e ’ / Ν Ν 9
τες, καὶ τὰ ὑποδήματα περιεπήγνυντο" καὶ γὰρ ἧσαν,
> δὴ 2 Λ δ 23 a e , /
ἐπειδὴ ἐπέλιπε TA ἀρχαῖα ὑποδήματα, καρβάτιναι πεποιη-
4 2 a ᾽ “A \ Ν ΄ 9
μέναι εκ τῶν νεοδώάρτων βοῶν. 1. Δια τὰς τοιαύτας οὖν
> + ς , , A aA ON OMS
ἀνάγκας ὑπελείποντο τινες TOY OTPAaTLWTa@V* καὶ LOoVTES
4 7 Ν Ν 3 , 2» Ν ’
μέλαν TL χωριον διὰ To ἐκλελοιπέναι αὐτοθι τὴν χίονα;
Ν , ἐν ΄ Ν , Va f
εἰκαζον τετηκέναι" καὶ τετήκει διὰ κρήνην τινὰ ἣ πλησίον
2 3 , ? , ? ay? ἢ » ἢ
nv αἀτμιζουσα ev νάπῃ. ἐνταῦθ᾽ εἐκτραπόμενοι ἐκάθηντο,
N 3 Μ 4 ¢ Ν μ-ἶ A Ὑ
καὶ οὐκ ἔφασαν πορεύεσθαι. 16. ὁ δε Ἐενοφῶν ἔχων
9 θ / « 4 6 δ a 2 Aa , ’ Ν
οπισθοφύλακας ὡς ἡσθετο, ἐδείτο αὐτῶν Tuan τέχνῃ καί
a “ 3 , / ad ed Ν ᾽ὔ
μηχανῇ μη ἀπολείπεσθαι, λέγων ὅτι ἕπονται πολλοῖ πολε-
’ Ν “A 3 ’ ς Ἁ
μιοι συνειλεγμένοι, καὶ τελευτων εἐχαλέπαινεν. οἱ δε
, > ἡ > Α ΕἾ , θ a
σφαττειν ἐκέλευον" ov yap av δύνασθαι “πορευθῆναι.
2 A 3, , 9 Ν ς ,
17. ἐνταῦθα ἐδοξε κράτιστον εἶναι τοὺς ἐπομένους πολε-
¢ A ¥ 4 Ν / a 4
μίους φοβῆσαι, εἰ Tis δύναιτο, μὴ ἐπίοιεν τοῖς κἀμνουσι.
ν 4 Χ , ¥ e Ν 7 a ,
καὶ ἣν μὲν σκότος ἤδη, οἱ δὲ προσήεσαν πολλῳ θορύβῳ,
ω \, Φ 2 ’ ¥ Ν e ‘ 9
αμῴφὶ ὧν εἶχον διαφερόμενοι. 15. ἔνθα δὴ οἱ μεν οπι-
id ἐπ ¢t / ? 4. ¥ 9 Ν
σθοφύλακες, ἅτε ὑγιαίνοντες, ἐξανασταντες ἐδραμον εἰς τοὺς
’ e Ν ’ b] , f 9 v4
πολεμίους " οἱ δὲ κώμνοντες, ἀνακραγόντες ὅσον ἐδύναντϑ
[4 Ν 3 / “ ‘ , Mv € Ν
μέγιστον, τὰς ἀσπίδας πρὸς τὰ δορατα ἔκρουσαν. οἱ δὲ
’ ’ φ e Ν Ν A ’ 9 Ν
πολέμιοι δείσαντες ἡκαν ἑαυτοὺς KATA τῆς χίονος εἰς τὴν
’ὔ N 3 Ν » . 3 ~ ? ’
νάπην, Kat οὐδεὶς ETL ουδαμοῦ εφθεγξατο.

Anas. 4,v.] An Underground Village. 47

\ a AY A ς 4 2 “Ὁ 4 ’
19. Καὶ Ἐενοφῶν μὲν καὶ οἱ σὺν αὑτῷ, εἰπόντες τοῖς
3 a red na e , ad ΄ > 3 ? N ͵ὔ
ἀσθενοῦσιν ὅτι τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἥξουσι τινες ET aUTOUS, πορευό-
Q 4 ? n 3 ’ 2 a
μενοι, πρὶν τέτταρα στάδια διελθεῖν, EvtTvyyuvovow ἐν TH
tana 3 id > «A A 4 - “4 2
ὁδῷ ἀναπαυομένοις ἔπι τῆς χιόνος τοῖς στρατιωταῖς ἐγκε-
, Ν Ia Ν aw ’ , \
καλυμμένοις, καὶ οὐδε φνλακὴ οὐδεμία καθειστήκει" καὶ
> » 3 4 € 3 ». (v4 ς »Ψ 2
aviatagay αὐτοὺς. οἱ ὃ ἔλεγον ὅτι οἱ ἐμπροσθεν οὐχ
[ ἴω Ν “ ΝΥ ΄ Aa
ὑποχωροῖεν. 20. ὁ δε παρίωὼν, καὶ παραπέμπων τῶν πελ-
ΡῈ ν 9 ͵ > ἡ , , oo” N
ταστῶν τοὺς ἰσχυροτάτους, ἐκέλευε σκέψασθαι Ti εἴη TO
ae east > -&£ Φ of ᾽ 2 γ
κωλῦον. οἱ δὲ ἀπήγγελλον ὅτι ὅλον οὕτως ἀναπαύοιτο τὸ
A 3 a ‘\ ε 3 XN fumed na x. ἢ
στράτευμα, 28. ἐνταῦθα καὶ οἱ audi Bevohovra nuri-
> a ‘ \ ¥ Ν ” V7
σθησαν αὑτοῦ, ἄνευ πυρὸς Kat ἀδεύπνοι, φυλακὰς οἷας εἐδύ-
, 3 νον Ν .ς + 4 e uN
ναντο καταστησαμενο. Eres δὲ προς ἡμέραν ἦν, ὁ μὲν
ba A a 4 A Ν 3 “" Α 7
Ξενοφῶν πέμψας πρὸς tous ἀσθενοῦντας τοὺς νεωτώτους,
3 7 > f£ > , 4 ? δ
αναστήσαντας ἐκέλευεν ἀναγκαζειν προϊέναι. 22. ev δὲ
΄ , , i ᾽ a , ’
τούτῳ Χειρίσοφος πέμπει τῶν EX τῆς KWUNS, σκεψομένους
κι. ” e a e ‘N »” 4 , Ἅ Q
πῶς ἔχοιεν οἱ τελευταῖοι. οἱ δε, ἄσμενοι LOOVTES, TOUS μὲν
3 “A 4 4 / 23" Ν 6
ἀσθενοῦντας τούτοις παρέδοσαν κομίζειν ἐπὶ TO στρατόπεδον,
> AX er 2 , ‘ N ¥ , 7
αὐτοὶ δε ἐπορεύοντο, καὶ πρίν εἴκοσι στάδια διεληλυθέναι
9 “ a 4 ¥ 4 ? / 3
ἤσαν προς TH κωμῇῃ ἐνθα Χειρίσοφος ηυλίξετος 28. επεὶ
δ , 5) , ¥ ‘ \ , 3
δὲ συνεγένοντο ἀλλήλοις, ἐδοξε κατὰ τὰς κώμας ἀσφαλὲς
9 \ , a ‘ ’ ‘ 3 a
εἶναε Tas ταξεις σκηνοῦν. Kat Χειρίσοφος μὲν αὐτοῦ ἔμε-
eas ¥ , a ev ’ 3 ,
vey, ot de ἄλλοι διαλάχοντες ἃς Eewpwv κωμας ἐπορεύοντο
4 ἣν e a ΝΜ 2 Ν ° ,
ἕκαστοι τους εαυτῶν ἔχοντες. 24. ἔνθα δὴ Πολυκρώτης
3 a “ > 4. 3 ΄ e 4 Ν Ν
Αθηναῖος λοχαγὸς ἐκέλευσεν ἀφιέναι ἑαυτὸν " καὶ λαβὼν
‘ Σω 7 / 7 8 N , ἃ 5. » — A
Tous εὐξζωνους, θέων ἐπὶ THY κωμὴν ἣν εἰλήχει Ἐενοφῶν,
’’ 7 4 ‘ ’ AN “ ,
καταλαμβώνει πάντας evdov TOUS κωμήτας καὶ τὸν κωμάρ-
‘ 4 ᾿ 9 “ a 4 e 7
VV, καὶ πωλους εἰς δασμὸν βασιλεῖ τρεφομένους ETTAKAL-
LY δ ’ “ ’ 3 ’ 7
δεκα, καὶ τὴν θυγατέρα τοῦ κωμάρχου, ἐνάτην ἡμέραν
4 e 3 > Ν I OA Ν Υ ’ “
γεγαμημένην" ὁ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ αὑτῆς Aayws wyeTo θηράσων, καὶ
> ῳ, ἢ a , ων, 8 ,
οὐχ ἥλω Ev ταῖς κώμαις. 25. αἱ d οἰκίαι ἦσαν κατάγειοι,
‘ a ͵ ed 4 ’ 3 3 a e δὲ
τὸ μὲν στόμα ὥσπερ φρέατος, κάτω ὃ εὑρεῖαι" αἱ δὲ

48 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. | (Xen.

¥ : a N e , 4 4 e No ’
εἰσοδοι τοῖς μεν ὑποξυγίοις opuKTat, ot δὲ avOpwrot κατε-

7 N , ’ δ . > sf > 9 9
ιβαινον emt κλίμακος. ev δε ταῖς οἰκίαις ἧσαν αἶγες, οἷες,

‘ ν A “ "» ? ἈΝ a 4 7
βόες, ὄρνιθες, καὶ τὰ ἔκγονα τουτων" τὰ δὲ κτηνὴ πάντα
. > , 4 Ν Ν Ν Ν \
χίλῳ ἔνδον ἐτρέφετο. 26. ἤσαν de καὶ πυροῖ καὶ κριθαὶ
, sy A iy) , 3 a Joa ‘
καὶ ὄσπρια Kat οἶνος κρίθινος ἐν KpaTnpow. ἐνῆσαν δε
Ν 2 δ ς \ 93 a Ν 4 9 4 et
Kat αὐταὶ αἱ κριθαὶ ἰσοχειλεῖς, καὶ κάλαμοι EVEKELYTO, οἱ
N 7 ς No P , 3 ¥ ,
μὲν μείζους οἱ O€ ἐλάττους, γόνατα οὐκ ἔχοντες " 3. ToVv-
Ἂν φ ’ 4 4 3 “ , 7
τους δ᾽ ἔδει ὁπότε τις διψῳη λαβόντα εἰς τὸ στόμα μύζξειν.
Ν ’ ¥ >. ἢ , ef ’ ’ Ν ’
καὶ πάνυ ἄκρατος ἦν, εἰ μὴ τις ὕδωρ επιχέοι" καὶ πάνυ
eas ’ N a 4 ε ν a δ
nov συμμαθόντι τὸ πῶμα ἦν. 35. Ὃ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν τὸν
» a) [4 ΄ ’’ 3 ᾽ a
ἄρχοντα τῆς KwuNs ταύτης σύνδειπνον ἐποιήσατο, Kat θαρ-
Cd 7 N 9 Λ / a 3 “A , ’
ρείν αντον εκέλενε, λέγων OTL οὔτε τῶν τεκνων στερήσοιτο,
’᾽; 4 7 3 a 2 , a 9 / 3 f
τὴν TE οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ ἀαντεμπλήσαντες τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀπία-
“A 2 ‘ a ΄ 2 / /
σιν, ἣν ἀγαθὸν τι τῷ στρατεύματι ἐξηγησάμενος φαίνηται,
Ν 3 4( δ ιε ’ ς Ἁ a
ἐστ᾽ ἂν ἐν ἄλλῳ ἔθνει γενωνται. 29. ὁ δὲ ταῦτα ὑπισ-
a ΙΝ ’ 4 Ν ” 4
χνεῖτο, καὶ φιλοφρονούμενος οἶνον ἐφρασεν ἐνθα ἣν κατορω-
“ ᾽ > > » ΄ - ,
ρυγμένος. ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν vuKTa διασκηνήσαντες,
of 3 ΄ ? a 3 , ’ e σι
οὕτως ἐκοιμήθησαν εν πᾶσιν ἀφθόνοις πάντες οἱ στρατιῶται,
4 a~ ‘N 4 4 Ν ’ > A a
ἐν φυλακῇ EXOVTES TOV κωμάρχην καὶ TA τέκνα αὐτοῦ ὁμοῦ
ἐν ——

0. Τῇ δ᾽ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ Ξενοφῶν λαβὼν τὸν κωμάρχην
πρὸς Χειρίσοφον ἐπορεύετο. ὅπου δὲ παρίοι κώμην, ἐτρέ:-
πετο πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ταῖς κώμαις, καὶ κατελάμβανε πανταχοῦ
εὐωχουμένους καὶ ᾿εὐθυμουμένους, καὶ οὐδαμόθεν ἀφίεσαν

Q ray 3 “ ww 3 9 3 a 3
πρὶν παραθεῖεν αὐτοῖς ἄριστον" 88. οὐκ nv ὃ ὅπον ov
, 2 Ν Ν > N / “ ¥ > »
παρετίθεσαν emt τὴν αὑτὴν TpaTrelay κρεα ἄρνεια, ἐρίφεια,
/ , 9 , ‘N aA ¥ a ‘
χοίρεια, μοόσχεια, ορνίθεια, συν πολλοῖς ἄρτοις τοῖς μεν
7 ry “ , e / ’ ᾽’ὔ
πυρίνοις τοῖς δὲ κριθινοιςς. 82. ὁπότε Se τις φιλοφρονού-
’ ΄ a 4 an Ν a ¥
μενὸς τῳ βούλοιτο προπιεῖν, ELAKEV ETL τὸν κρατῆρα, ἐνθεν
3 ώ aw e a / [χά a Ν a
ἐπικύψαντα «det ῥοφοῦντα πίνειν ὥσπερ βοῦν. καὶ τῷ
, / , Ψ ? . sy
κωμάρχῃ ἐδίδοσαν AayBuverv ὃ te Bovdotto. ὁ δὲ ἄλλο

Anas. 4, v1.] The Guide and is Boy. 49

‘ ar Sar Ψ , a a ¥ 4
μεν οὐδὲν ἐδέχετο, ὅπου δὲ τινα τῶν συγγενῶν ἐδοι, προς
> , 3 Vw 9 N
ἑαυτὸν ἀεὶ ἐλάμβανεν. 88. ᾿Επεὶ 5 ἦλθον πρὸς Xetpico-
4 9 a > ’
pov, κατελάμβανον κακεένους σκηνοῦντας, ἐστεφανωμένους
a ra) a ’ ἐν ζω 3 ’
τοῦ ξηροῦ χιλοῦ στεφώνοις, καὶ διακονοῦντας Appevious
A ‘ a [4] φι A “ Ν
παῖδας σὺν ταῖς βαρβαρικαῖς στολαῖς" τοῖς δὲ παισὶν
3 4 [-24 a oe 4 a“ 3 9
ἐδείκνυσαν ὥσπερ eveois ὅ TL δέοι ποιεῖν. 84. ἐπεὶ ὃ
> > / ἃ
ἀλλήλους ἐφιλοφρονήσαντο Χειρίσοφος καὶ Ἐενοφῶν, κοινῇ
‘9 ’ N \ a t e ,ὕ
δη ἀνηρώτων τὸν κωμάρχην διὰ τοῦ περσίξοντος ἑρμηνέως,
, oo ε r cy ¥. ζφζΦ ps ἢ ,
τίς en ἢ χώρα. Ο ἔλεγεν ὅτε Αρμενια. καὶ πάλιν
u ’ ΜΝ. a
ἠρώτων τίνι οἱ ἵπποι TpepowwTo. ὁ δ᾽ ἔλεγεν ὅτι βασιλεῖ
᾿ , ΄ Χ Φ ,
Sacpos: τὴν δὲ πλησίον χώραν ἔφη εἶναι Χάλυβας, καὶ
‘ Can ΝΜ φ ¥ ‘N , AN , N #
τὴν ὁδὸν ἐφραζεν ἢ etn. B35. Kat αὐτὸν τότε μὲν ᾧχετο
¥ a Ν Α ¢ aA > 2 . Ω A
ἄγων Ἐενοφῶν πρὸς τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ οἰκέτας, καὶ ἵππον ὃν
9 ΄ ’ ’ aA 7 ? ’
εἰλήφει παλαίτερον δίδωσε τῷ κωμάρχη αναθρέψαντι κα-
a ed x ἝΝ ς “ 9 nae 4 Ν
ταθῦσαι, ὅτε ἤκουσεν αὐτὸν ἱερὸν εἶναι τοῦ ᾿Ηλιου, δεδιὼς
. 9 , 9 , δ εν A , x 8 ‘
μὴ ἀποθάνῃ" ἐκεκάκωτο yap ὑπὸ τῆς πορείας " αὐτὸς δὲ
n ’᾽ 4 a ”. A
τῶν πώλων λαμβάνει, καὶ τῶν ἄλλων στρατηγῶν καὶ
» 4 σὰ 4
λοχαγῶν ἔδωκεν ἑκάστῳ πῶλον. 86. ἦσαν δ᾽ οἱ ταύτῃ
er , Ν A a , Ν ΄
ἐπποι μείονες μεν τῶν Περσικῶν, θυμοειδέστεροι δὲ πολύ.
> wn ‘ “ , e 4 A “ ’ A“
ἐνταῦθα δη καὶ διδάσκει ὁ κωμάρχης περὶ τοὺς πόδας τῶν
A Ἃ a ς ’ a Ψ A a
inT OV καὶ τῶν ὑποζυγίων σακία περιειλεῖν, ὅταν Sia τῆς
’ A ¥” Ν a / 4
χίονος ὥγωσιν" ἄνευ yap τῶν σακίων κατεδύοντο μέχρι
a ’
τῆς γαστρος.
3 δ e 7 9 9 , ‘ δ e ᾽
VI. ᾿Επεὶ δ᾽ ἡμέρα ἦν ὀγδόη, τὸν μὲν ἡγεμόνα παρα-
ὃ ‘5 x / Ν δ᾽ > @ λ / a ’
ἐδωσι Χειρισόφῳ, τους δ᾽ οἰκέτας καταλείπει τῷ κωμαρχῇ,
Ν ζω ς κἊ« Ὁ ΝΥ̓ φ 4 ” 3 Ul
πλὴν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἄρτι ἡβάσκοντος " τοῦτον δ᾽ ᾿Επισθένει
2 ’ὔἢ 7 ef 9 a e ’
Αἀμφιπολίτῃ παραδίδωσι φυλάττειν, ὅπως, εἰ καλῶς ἡγή-
MM Ἁ “ 32 9 Ἀ > », ? “A
σοιτο, ἔχων καὶ τοῦτον ἀπίοι. καὶ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ
3 ’ φ In ἢ A A 3 7 3
εἰσεφόορησαν ws ἐδύναντο πλεῖστα, καὶ ἀναζεύξαντες ἐπο-
/ ¢€ a δ᾽ 2 a e / , ὃ Ν
pevoyto, 2. ἤγειτο ὃ αὕτοις ὁ κωμάρχης λέλυμενος OLA
, . ¥ 9 3 A ’ “ Ν 4
Neoves* καὶ ἤδη Te ἦν ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ σταθμῷ, καὶ Χειρίσοφος
4

50 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. (Xxx.

> a? , e ’ ) ’ Ϊ e δ ¥.
αὐτῷ εἐχαλεπάνθη, ὅτι οὐκ εἰς Kwpas ἤγαγεν. ὁ ὃ ἔλεγεν
Ψ 3 9 2 a / ΄ ε Ν / ΣΝ
ὅτι οὐκ εἶεν εν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ. ὁ δε Χειρίσοφος αὐτὸν
wv Α ” +] 3 3 Ν , 3 “ a)
ἐπαισε μεν, ἐδησε ὃ οὐ. B. ἐκ δε τούτου ἐκεῖνος τῆς νυ-
“ 3 Ν ¥ ἈΝ “ ε, An é Ν
κτὸς ἀποδρὰς ᾧχετο καταλιπὼν τὸν υἱὸν. τοῦτο γε δὴ
’ Α “ Ud ? 3 4
Χειρισοόφῳ καὶ Ἐενοφῶντι μόνον διάφορον ev τῇ πορείᾳ
» ’ e a ¢ ’ “ 3 9
ἐγένετο, ἡ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος κάκωσις καὶ ἀμέλεια. ᾿Επισθένης
» , a Ν ἈΝ ¥ / 7
δὲ ἠράσθη τοῦ παιδὸς, Kat otxade κομίσας πιστοτάτῳ
> ra “ a 3 ΄ e Α ‘
eypnto. 4. Mera τοῦτο ἐπορεύθησαν entra σταθμους,
> νΝ ’ ’ ς ’ Ν ς a
ava πέντε παρασώγγας τῆς ἡμέρας, παρὰ τὸν Φᾶσιν ποτα»
a 9 a b “ 2 ’ Ἁ
μον, eupos πλεθριαῖον. 5. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμους
’ , , > SN Ν a 9 Ν ’ e a
δύο παρασώγγας δέκα" ἐπὶ δὲ τῇ εἰς TO πεδίον ὑπερβολῇ
> , 2 a / x 4 Ν 4
ἀπήντησαν αὑτοῖς XadvBes καὶ Taoyor καὶ Pacravoi.
ΕΣ Ν » ‘ ’ > Ν na e
6. Χειρίσοφος ὃ eres κατεῖδε Tous πολεμίους ἐπὶ TH ὑπερ-
a 9 , , > » 9 , ἢ
βολῇ, ἐπαύσατο πορευόμενος, ἀπέχων εἰς τριάκοντα σταδι-
" N δ ’ Ν ΄ ,
ous, Wa μὴ κατὰ κέρας ἄγων TANTLATH τοῖς πολεμίοις '
, Ν Ν, a / Ν , σ
παρηγγείλε δε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις παράγειν τους λόχους, ὅπως
9 Ν᾿ 4 v] Ν 4 9 ‘ δὲ 9
ἐπὶ harayyos γένοιτο τὸ στράτευμα. % ἐπεὶ δὲ ἤλθον
e »"» , ’ ΝΥ Q δ
ot ὁπισθοφύλακες, συνεκάλεσε στρατηγοὺς καὶ λοχαγοῦς,
\ ¥. φ ς XN 4 ς ς κα ’ Ν
καὶ ἐλεξεν woe Οἱ μὲν πολέμιοι, ὡς ὁρᾶτε, κατέχουσε τας
a Ψ ‘ ΄ Ψ ε ἢ
ὑπερβολὰς τοῦ ὄρους " ὥρα δὲ βουλεύεσθαι ὅπως ὡς καλ-
2 ’ὔ 9 4 Ἀ Φ 5 A Ps
Mota aywvioupeba, 8. enol μεν οὗν δοκεῖ παραγγειλαι
Ν 9 a a 4 ¢ oA Ν 4
μὲν ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι τοῖς oTpatiwtais, ἡμᾶς δὲ Bovreve-
ΝΜ , ¥ ΑΥ̓͂ δι΄ 6 4 . Ψ
σθαι evre τήμερον εἰτε αὔριον δοκεῖ ὑπερβάλλειν TO ὅρος.
¥ 4 a > AN 3 b]
9. ᾿Εμοὶ δέ ye, ἐφη ὁ Κλεάνωρ, δοκεῖ, erav τάχιστα αρι-
’᾽ 3 a e / 97 > «A ‘
στήσωμεν, ἐξοπλισαμένους WS τάχιστα ἰέναι ἐπὶ TOUS
¥” ) \ , ‘ , e os ov
avipas. εἰ yap διατρίψομεν τὴν τήμερον ἡμέραν, οἱ TE
A toa a , 4 ¥ Ν
νῦν ἡμᾶς ὁρῶντες πολέμιοι θαρραλεωώτεροι ἐσονταῖ, καὶ
¥ 2. SN a ,’ ,ὔ ΄
ἄλλους εἰκὸς τούτων θαρρούντων πλείους προσγενέσθαι.
A a“ 9 3 Ν [.4
10. Μετὰ τοῦτον Ἐενοφῶν εἶπεν. ᾿Εγὼ δ᾽ οὕτω γι
“ 9 Ν > » 9 Ν 4 a ζω
γνωσκω. εἰ μὲν ἀνάγκη ἐστὶ μάχεσθαι, τοῦτο δεῖ παρα’
’ ef ε “ ΄ Ν
σκευάσασθαι, ὅπως ὡς κράτιστα μαχούμεθα" εἰ δὲ βου"

AxaB.4, v1] Consullation on the March. 51

φ A e ’ a ’ a ¢
λόμεθα ws ῥᾷστα ὑπερβάλλειν, τοῦτό μοι δοκεῖ σκεπτέον
od , » Ν ΄ ’ ¢ x», 7
εἶναι, ὅπως ἐλάχιστα μὲν τραύματα λάβωμεν, ὡς ἐλάχιστα
Ν 4 3 “ 3 , “ 4 φ Ν
δε σώματα ἀνδρῶν ἀποβαλωμεν. IL. τὸ μὲν οὖν ὄρος
9 Ν ΝΡ ’ 4 ΕἾ 99d Ces ’ ” ὃ δ᾽
ἐστί TO ὁρώμενον πλέον ἢ Ed ἑξήκοντα στάδια, ἀνδρες
2 A , ce a / 4 3 3 A >
ουδαμοῦ φυλάττοντες ἡμᾶς φανεροὶ εἰσιν, αλλ ἢ KAT
ΣΝ Ν ea ) ‘ 4 δι ~ 3 A ww \
αὑτὴν τὴν ὁδὸν" πολὺ οὖν κρεῖττον TOU ἐρήμου ὄρους καὶ
’ - A 4 . 4 4
κλέψαι τε πειρᾶσθαι λαθοντας, καὶ ἁρπάσαι φθάσαντας,
A ’ “A A ‘ 93 a ’ , “ ὃ
ἣν δυνώμεθα, μᾶλλον ἢ πρὸς ἰσχυρα χωρία καὶ ἄνδρας
4 ’ ‘ Ν a . 4
παρεσκευασμένους μάχεσθαι. 13. πολὺ yup ῥᾷον ὄρθιον
3 x. 94 A «Ὁ Ν ¥ \ oy / ¥ Ν
ἀμαχεὶ ἰέναι ἢ ὁμαλες ἐνθεν καὶ ἐνθεν πολεμίων ὄντων, καὶ
7 3 N “Ὁ A “a “ a e td A
νύκτωρ ἀμαχεὶ μᾶλλον ἂν τὰ πρὸ ποδῶν ὁρῴη τις ἢ μεθ᾽
ς ’ ve a a \ ᾽ Lo «a
ἡμέραν μαχόμενος, καὶ ἡ τραχεῖα τοῖς ποσὶν ἀμαχεὶ ἰοῦσιν
» ’ὔ A Ν N δ ’ ιν
εὐμενεστέρα ἢ ὁμαλὴ τὰς κεφαλας βαλλομενοις. 18. καὶ
, ᾽ 2 In 7 , a 4 ϑων \ N
κλέψαι δ᾽ οὐκ advvatov pot δοκεῖ εἶναι, ἐξὸν μὲν vuKTos
37 6 Ν φ wn ΩΝ ἍἍ 3 a) “ e “
tevat, ὡς pn ὁρᾶσθαι, e€ov δὲ ἀπελθεῖν τοσοῦτον ws μὴ
¥ ΄ “ wv ’ ’
αἴσθησιν παρέχειν. δοκοῦμεν δ᾽ ἄν μοι ταύτῃ προσποιού-
a 2 / a a Υ͂ x a
μενον προσβαλεῖν ἐρημοτέρῳ ἂν τῷ ἄλλῳ ρει χρῆσθαι"
‘ Ν > A a 3 ’ e ΄ > A
μένοιεν γὰρ avTou μᾶλλον abpoor οἱ πολέμιοι. 14. atap
ror N s A t ea ” 4
τί ἐγὼ περὶ κλοπῆς συμβάλλομαι; ὑμᾶς yap ἔγωγε, ὦ
/ 3 4 ‘ , “ 3 Ἂ ἴω,
Χειρίσοφε, axovw τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, ὅσοι ἐστε τῶν
“ ᾽ὔ ΣΝ 3 iA , “A N 2 4 “
ὁμοίων, evOus εκ παίδων κλέπτειν μελετῶν, καὶ οὐκ αἰσχρὸν
9 ? Ν Ν , rd Ν ᾽ὔ ’ a
εἰναι ἀλλα καλον κλεπτεῖν OTA μη κωλύει νόμος. 15. oTTWS
‘ e , 4 Ν “A ’ ’
δε ὡς κράτιστα κλέπτητε καὶ πειρᾶσθε λανθάνειν, νόμιμον
¥ ς « 2 aN a , A
apa ὑμῖν ἐστιν, ἐαν ληφθῆτε κλέπτοντες, μαστιγοῦσθαι.
a 4 , , 3 3 / oY ,
νῦν οὖν μάλα σοι καιρὸς ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι την παιδείαν,
, Ν A -ὅ“,᾿ of Cd a
καὶ φυλάξασθαι μὴ ληφθῶμεν κλέπτοντες TOU ὄρους, ὡς μὴ
Ν 7
πληγὰς λάβωμεν.
3 Ν 4 μή / 7 N δ oA Ν
16. ᾿άλλα μέντοι, ἔφη ὁ Χειρίσοφος, kaya ὑμᾶς Tous
3 ’ > + δ 9 , ‘ / X.
Αθηναίους ἀκούω δεινοὺς εἶναι κλέπτειν τὰ δημόσια, καὶ
ΓΝ A A 7 a 4 4 Ν
μάλα ὄντος δεινοῦ τοῦ κινδύνου τῷ κλέπτοντι, καὶ TOUS
’ , ” ea e / ¥
κρατίστους μέντοι μάλιστα, ELTEP ὑμῖν οἱ κράτιστοι ἄρχειν

52 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [ Xen.

9 a ed e \ . 3 f Ν ’
ἀξιοῦνται" ὥστε wpa καὶ cos ἐπιδείκνυσθαι τὴν παιδείαν.
3 ‘ N / ¥ pom a Ψ , 9 iy
17. Eyo μεν τοίνυν, edn ὁ Ἐξενοφῶν, ἕτοιμος eis Tous
9 ΄ ¥ 2 \ , 27
omtcOopvAaxas ἔχων, ἐπειδὰν δειπνήησωμεν, ἱέναι κατα-
’ . oy» ¥ \ nN ς , ς N
ληψόμενος TO pos. ἔχω δε καὶ ἡγεμόνας" οἱ yap γυμ-
a a ¢ 4 ᾽ς.» a ΝΜ ͵ 2 4
νῆτες τῶν ἐπομένων ἡμῖν κλωπῶν ἐλαβὸν τινας evedpev-
, Ν , 4 3 ¥ U 2 Ν
σαντες" τούτων καὶ πυνθανομαι ott οὐκ ἄβατον ἐστι τὸ
»» 3 ἈΝ é 9 geX Ν 7 oS ar of
ὅρος, ἀλλα νέμεται aki καὶ βουσίν" ὥστε ἐάνπερ ἅπαξ
, ’ na ΡΝ Ν ‘ a 6 ’ ¥
AaBwpev τι τοῦ ὄρους, Bata Kat τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις EoTal.
3 ,ὔ - Ian ΑΝ 7 ¥ 3 \
15. ἐλπίζω Se οὐδὲ τοὺς πολεμίους μενεῖν ἔτι, ἐπειδᾶν
” e ΓΟ 3 a“ @e , , A “A ΝΥ 2 ΘΝ AY a
ὑδωσιν ἡμᾶς EV τῷ ὁμοίῳ ETL τῶν ἄκρων" οὐδὲ γὰρ νῦν
3,7 ’ δι A 3 »ν [4 Χ ’
ἐθέλουσι καταβαίνειν nu εἰς τὸ σον. 19. O δε Χειρίσο-
9 \ ’ a C\ 7 Ν ν 93
gos εἴπε. Kas τί δεῖ σε ἰέναι καὶ λιπεῖν τὴν ὁπισθοφυλα-
, 3 Ν τ 4 A 7 3 ΄ ’
κίαν ; ἀλλα addous πέμψον, ἂν μὴ τινες εθελούσιοι φαί-
( 3 , Ν ΝΥ
νωνται. 30. ᾿Εκ τούτου Αριστωνυμος Μεθυδριεὺυς ἐρχεται
e , ¥ . 93 ’ a A QA 4
ὁπλίτας exo, καὶ Aptoteas Χίος γυμνῆτας, καὶ Νικόμαχος
9 Aa Ν ’ ? , ς 4 4
Otratos γυμνῆτας " καὶ σύνθημα ἐποιήσαντο, ὁπότε exotev
\. » ἈΝ ’ ’ “A ξ΄ 4
τὰ ἄκρα, πυρὰ Kaew πολλα. Bl. ταῦτα συνθέμενοι ἠρι-
3 Ν A > ? , e ’ Ν
στων" ex δὲ τοῦ ἀρίστον προήγαγεν o Χειρίισοῴος τὸ
4 ra « ’ ,ὔ Ν Ν ’
στράτευμα πᾶν ὡς δεκα σταδίους πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους,
ed ε 4 / / ’
πως a μάλιστα δοκοίη ταύτῃ προσάξειν. "- ες
‘

22. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐδείπνησαν καὶ νυξ ἐγένετο, οἱ μεν
᾿ , Ν \ , \ ¥ eas #
τάχθεντες ῴχοντο, καὶ καταλαμβάνουσι TO Opos, οἱ dé ἄλλοι

.3 a? ? e NX 4 3 xv Υ 3 ,
αὐτοῦ ἀνεπαύοντο. ot δὲ πολέμιοι ἐπεὶ ἤσθοντο ἐχόμενον
\ ? ’ ἮΝ Ν Ν Α 4
TO Opos, ἐγρηγόρεσαν Kat exaov πυρὰ πολλὰ δια νυκτός.
3 Ν ‘N ec oF > ἢ / Ν ,

23. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, Χειρίσοφος μεν θυσαμενος
4 ΓΝ ιν eas ς Ν ". »y» ὔ : \ ‘
ἦγε κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, οἱ δὲ TO Opos καταλαβοντες κατὰ τὰ
ΝΡ 93 ’ aA 9 9 ᾿ Ν Vy
ἄκρα emnecay, 24. τῶν ὃ av πολεμίων TO μὲν πολὺ ἐμε-
9 a “Ὁ ς Aa A Γ᾿ 4 3 3 »ὍἬ 3 ,
νεν ἐπὶ TH ὑπερβολῇ τοῦ Opous, μέρος ὃ αὐτῶν amnvTa
ζω \ \ ΕΣ Ἁ \ @ ry 9 ‘\ Ἃ 3
τοις KATA τὰ AKpa. "πρὶν δε ὁμοῦ εἶναι τοὺς πολλους αλ-
, , e ‘ , yy s a e "R
λήλων, συμμιεγνυασιν οἱ KATA τα ἄκρα, Kal νικωσιν οὐ LA-
᾿ δ , 3 ᾽ὔ \ \ 6.) ΝΥ
ληνες καὶ διώκουσιν. 32ὅ. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ καὶ οἱ ἐκ τοῦ πεδίου

Anas. 4, vi1.] On the Heighis. 53

e ‘ Ν ἴω e v4 , ¥, “ ω
οἱ μὲν πέλταστας τῶν Ἑλλήνων δρόμῳ ἔθεον πρὸς τοὺς
’ὔ A , \ 9 ’ ‘\
παρατεταγμένους, Χειρίσοφος δὲ βαδην ταχὺ ἐφείπετο συν
a ͵ὕ e ‘ 4 eo. ~" "ana 9 “
τοῖς ὀπτλέταις. 36. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι οἱ ἐπι TH ὁδῷ, ἐπειδὴ
. ev a ’ , \ 9 4 - 9
τὸ ἄνω ἑώρων ἡττώμενον, φεύγουσι" Kat ἀπέθανον μεν ov
“ ‘4 N 4 4 , A ed
πολλοὶ αὐτῶν, yeppa Se πάμπολλα ἐληφθη" ἃ οἱ Ελληνες
a 7 , ᾿ > a 9 ’ ε 7 > 4
ταῖς μαχαίραις κόπτοντες ἀχρεῖα ETToLOVY. 2% ws ὃ aveE-
4 “\ , , ’ 4
βησαν, θύσαντες καὶ τρόπαιον στησάμενοι, κατέβησαν εἰς
‘\ ‘ 3 , a Α 3 a ’
τὸ πεδίον, καὶ εἰς κώμας πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν γεμουσας
9
ἤλθον.
> \ , 3 ’ 3 4
VIE. Ex δὲ τούτων ἐπορευθησαν εἰς Taoyous, στα-
Ἁ 4 4 ’ Α 2 ,
θμοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας τριάκοντα" καὶ ta ἐπιτήδεια
> » , Ἁ ¥ 9 Ἁ ς 4 3 @ A
ἐπέλέπε" χωρία yap ᾧκουν ἰσχυρα οἱ Τάοχοι, ἐν ols Kat
\ 9 / , 9 > , > Sw
Ta ἐπιτήδεια πάντα εἶχον ἀνακεκομισμένοι. 2 επεὶ ὃ
γ,.,, ν ,ὔ ἃ ’ Ἁ 9 9 Jes > ,
αφίκοντο πρὸς χωρίον Ὁ πόλιν μὲν οὐκ εἶχεν οὐδ᾽ οἰκίας,
4 > 7 > » ,. y Ν “ Α
συνεληλυθότες ὃ ἤσαν avtoce Kat avdpes καὶ γυναῖκες καὶ
, AY / N “ a 4
κτήνη πολλα, Χειρίσοφος μὲν πρὸς τοῦτο προσεβαλλεν
δὰ of 3 Ν N ¢ 4 ’ > ἢ ¥
εὐθυς ἥκων" ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ πρωτὴ τάξις atréxapvev, ἄλλη
4 ιν 9 M. 9 “ Φ 9 ’ io
mpoonje Kat αὖθις ἀλλη" ov yap nv abpoors περιστῆναι,
3 Ἁ Ν > 4 3 N Ἁ A
ἀλλὰ ποταμὸς ἣν κύκλῳ. 8. ἐπειδὴ δὲ Ξενοφῶν ἦλθε
δ rs 9 4 “ a x e / 3
συν τοῖς οπισθοφυλαξι καὶ πελτασταῖς καὶ ὁπλίταις, ἐν-
Ἂς Ν , 7 9 \ ὦ ‘ δ
ταῦθα dn λέγει Χειρίσοφος" Εἰς καλὸν ἥκετε" τὸ yap
’ e [4 a XN a 9 Ν Ἁ 9 ,
χωρίον αἱρετέον" τῇ Yap στρατιᾷ οὐκ ETL τὰ ἐπιτήδεια,
eee, / \ , 3 n Ν a 9
εἰ μὴ ληψόμεθα τὸ χωρίον. 4. Ἐνταῦθα δὴ κοινῇ εβου-
’ A ~ “-.« a 3 a 4 \ ry ¥
λεύοντο" καὶ TOU KevohwvTos ἐρωτῶντος TL TO κωλῦον εἴη
3 »-» 3 ’ , ad 4 4 3
εἰσελθεῖν, εἶπεν ὁ Χειρίσοφος" Μία αὕτη παροδὸς ἐστιν
a ea v4 4 4 A 4 ’
ἣν ὁρᾷς " οταν δε τις ταύτῃ πειρᾶται παριέναι, κυλίνδουσι
΄ Α 4 a e 4 A A
λίθους ὑπερ ταύτης τῆς ὑπερεχούσης πέτρας" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν
A , , Ν
καταληφθῇ, οὕτω διατίθεται. ἅμα δ᾽ ἔδειξε συντετριμ-
’ 3 , , Ν a \
μένους ἀνθρώπους καὶ σκέλη καὶ πλευρᾶς. 5. Ἢν δὲ
\ 3 , ¥ a ¥ K Io\
Tous λέθους ἀναλώσωσιν, ἔφη ὁ Ἐενοφῶν, ἀλλο Tt ἢ οὐδεν
4 4 3 “ A a 9 , ς "» 3 A
κωλύει Traptevat ; οὐ yap δὴ ἐκ TOU ἐναντίου ορώμεν εἰ μὴ

54 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xex

3 é 4 3 , “ 4 4 XR a 4
OALYOUS τούτους ἀνθρώπους, καὶ τούτων δύο ἢ τρεις WTAL-
4 N δὲ / [ Ν Ἁ ςόΖ a δὸ 4
σμένους. 6. τὸ δὲ χωρίον, ὡς καὶ σὺ ὁρᾷς, σχεδὸν τρία
ὴ 35 ἃ a ’ a ,
ἡμίπλεθρὰ ἐστιν, ὃ δεῖ βαλλομένους διελθεῖν. τούτου δὲ
4 ‘ ’ ’ 4 9
ὅσον πλέθρον δασὺ πίτυσι διαλειπούσαις μεγάλαις, ἀνθ᾽
φ φ / Ν 7K 4 ς A a ’
ὧν ἑστηκότες ἄνδρες τί ἂν πάσχοιεν ἣ ὑπὸ τῶν φερομένων
4 a Ν a 4 Ν + 9 ᾽
λίθων ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν κυλινδομένων ; τὸ λοιπὸν οὖν ἤδη γίγνε-
’ A ad ,
Tat ὡς ἡμίπλεθρον, ὃ δεῖ ὅταν λωφήσωσιν οἱ λέθοι παρα-
a > A InN Υ e 4 3 4
δραμεῖν. % ᾿Αλλα εὐθυς, edn ὁ Χειρίσοφος, emevdav
3 , 3 Ν Α ’ “
ἀρξωμεθα εἰς τὸ δασὺ προσιέναι, φέρονται οἱ λίθοι πολλοί,
> NOON Ν “ ¥ a N 9 4 ‘
Αὐτὸ av, edn, τὸ δέον ein: θᾶττον yap αναλώσουσι τοὺς
͵ ’ Ν , ¥ a ,
λίθους. adda πορευώμεθα ἐνθεν ἡμῖν μικρὸν τι παραδρα-
na oo” Δ , ἢ a / a ἢ
μεῖν ἔσται, ἣν δυνώμεθα, καὶ ἀπελθεῖν ῥᾳδιον, ἢν βουλὼ-
μεθα.
3 a 9 4 , “ a Ἁ
8. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐπορεύοντο Χειρίσοφος καὶ Ἐενοφῶν καὶ
, 4 4 ‘ ¢ ε 7
Καλλίμαχος Παρράσιος λοχαγὸς" τούτου yap ἡ ἡγεμονία
4 a 9 ’ a 3 ’ ae ἢ ¢ al
ἦν τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων λοχαγῶν ἐκεινῇ TH ἡμέρᾳ. οἱ δὲ
4 . ἮΝ 3 a 9 A Y a 9
ἄλλοι λοχαγοῖ ἔμενον ἐν τῷ ἀσῴφαλει. μετὰ τοῦτο οὖν
3 a e Ἁ Α a ¥ ς e 4, 3
ἀπῆλθον ὑπο ta Sevdpa avOpwrot ὡς εβδομήκοντα, οὐκ
3 / > δ 9 α΄ 4 4 φ Ia ἢ
aOpoot ἀλλα καθ᾽ ἕνα, ἕκαστος φυλαττόμενος ὡς εδύνατο.
9 “ tA : a 3 ἦ
9. ᾿Αγασίας δὲ ὁ Στυμφάλιος καὶ Αριστωνυμος Mebv-
‘ s @ fn 3 4 \ WW ἈΝ
δριευς, καὶ οὗτοι τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων AOYayou οντες, καὶ
Ν ‘ ¥ A ὕ > VN 8 5) .
ἄλλοι δε, ἐφέστασαν ἔξω τῶν δενδρων" ov yap nv ἀσφαλες
3 ’ , 4 <A Ἁ ὕ 4 ΝΥ
ἐν τοῖς δενδροις ἑσταναι πλεον ἢ τὸν eva λῦχον. 10. ενθα
Ἁ A J ’ > A a 4
δὴ Καλλίμαχος pnyavatat τι" προέτρεχεν ἀπὸ τοῦ δεν-
> Φ 9 , A f , ? Ν Ν e /
δρου up @ ἦν αὐτὸς δύο ἢ τρία βήματα" ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ λίθοι
4 3 4 3 δι 443 ¢ ν \ “
φέροιντο, ἀνεχάζετο εὐπετῶς" ἐφ ἑκάστης δὲ προδρομῆς
4 / a 9 ’ ay
πλέον ἢ δέκα ἅμαξαι πετρῶν ἀνηλίσκοντο. 11. ὁ δὲ
7A 4 « ¢ a Ν Κ rr ἃ 3 ὔ N , 4
γασίας, ws opa τὸν Καλλίμαχον ἃ ἐποίει, καὶ TO στρα-
ἴω lA ’ Ἁ 93 “A 4 9
τευμα πᾶν θεωμενον, δεισας μὴ ov πρῶτος Tapadpapos εἰς
. , ¥ ᾿, 2 ᾽ὔ /
τὸ χωρίον, οὔτε Tov Αριστώνυμον πλησίον ὄντα παρακα-
΄ ¥ > ἢ Ν 4 ¢ / ¥ ¥
λέσας, οὔτε Εὐυρύλοχον τὸν Λουσιέα, eraipovs ὄντας, οὔτε

AnaB, 4, VIL] Chmbing the Ciffs. 55

3» se? φι > 8 .' , γ᾽
ἄλλον ovdeva, χωρεῖ αὑτὸς, καὶ παρέρχεται πάντας.
¢ gk , e en 98 , 3 ,
£2. ὁ δε Καλλίμαχος, ὡς ὁρᾷ aunoy TaplovTa, ἐπιλαμβά-
2 “ a δ 4 3 4 a
νεται αὑτοῦ τῆς iTvos: ev δὲ τούτῳ παραθεῖ auTous ’Apt-
4 a », 4 4
στώνυμος Μεθυδριεύς, καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Ευρύλοχος Λουσιεὺς"
’ ᾿ φ 3 A ᾽ a N ,
πώντες yap οὗτοι ἀντεποιοῦντο ἀρετῆς, καὶ διηγωνίζοντο
Ν 9 ’ “ ed 39.ϑ », φ a ιν ,
πρὸς ἀλλήλους" καὶ οὕτως ἐρίζοντες αἱροῦσι τὸ χωρίον.
ς ΝΥ ed ’ Ia s , Ν) > ἡ
ὡς γὰρ ἅπαξ εἰσέδραμον, οὐδεὶς πέτρος ἄνωθεν ἠνέχθη.
δι “ a e 4 a ’
18. ᾿Ενταῦθα δὴ δεινὸν ἦν θέαμα. at yap γυναῖκες, pi-
[4 ¢ » 3 , e
πτουσαι TA παιδία, ELTA καὶ ἑαυτὰς ἐπικατερρίπτουν, καὶ οἱ
¥ Ν 2, Λ 4
ἄνδρες ὡσαύτως. ἔνθα δὴ καὶ Αἰνέας Στυμφάλιος λοχαγὸς
2 ὔ , e e; e a Ν ¥ ‘
wv Teva θέοντα, ὡς ρίψοντα εαυτον, στολὴν ἔχοντα καλην,
3 ἤ φ ’ φ “ 7 8 3 δα
ἐπιλαμβάνεται ὡς κωλύσων" 14. ὁ δὲ αὐτὸν ἐπισπᾶται,
4 3 , ” a “ “ ἦ Q
kat ἀμῴφοτεροι w@yovTo κατὰ τῶν πετρὼν φερόμενοι Kat
> » ᾽ a ¥ κ᾿ 7 ,.. ἢ ’
ἀπέθανον. ἐντεῦθεν ἄνθρωποι μὲν πάνν ὀλίγοι ἐλήφθησαν,
’ὔ x \ y» Ν ’
Boes δε καὶ ὄνοι πολλοὶ, καὶ πρόβατα.
? δι ϑ ’ - v4 Α
15. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐπορεύθησαν δια Χαλύβων, σταθμους
e ν , , φ 4 e a
€mTa TWapacayyas πεντήκοντα. οὗτοι ἦσαν ὧν διῆλθον
2 , ἐν ? a ¥ ‘ ’
ἀλκιμώτατοι, καὶ εἰς χεῖρας ἤεσαν. εἶχον δὲ θωρακας
ra a n WW 3 a Ν 4 ,
λινοῦς μέχρι Tov. ἤτρου, ἀντὶ Se τῶν πτερύγων σπάρτα
. 29 , ‘ NN a \ ’
πυκνὰ ἐστραμμένα. 16. εἶχον δὲ καὶ κνημῖδας καὶ κράνη,
νΝ Ν ιν , ’ o , : " Φ
καὶ παρα τὴν Cwovnv μαχαίριον ὅσον ξυήλην Λακωνικὴν, @
ν @ a 4 b “A .
ἐσῴφαττον ὧν κρατεῖν δύναιντο, καὶ ἀποτέμνοντες ἂν τὰς
‘ ¥ 9 , . 9? . 3 @ e ’
κεφαλὰς ἔχοντες ἐπορεύοντο, καὶ δον καὶ ἐχόρευον ὅποτε
e , 3 Ν ¥ δ Α
οἱ πολέμιοι avTous ὄψεσθαι ἔμελλον. εἶχον δὲ καὶ δόρυ
ἢ , , , ¥ e » »
ὡς πεντεκαίδεκα πήχεων, μίαν λόγχην ἔχον. οὗτοι ἐνέμε-
3 δι 4 > δ Λ eg”
νον ἐν τοῖς πολίσμασιν" ΕἾ. ἐπεὶ δὲ παρέλθοιεν οἱ “Ελ-
of ΣΝ ’ ” 4 3 “ 9 ἴω
ληνες, εἴποντο ἀεὶ μαχόμενοι. ᾧῳκουν δὲ ἐν τοῖς οχυροῖς,
“ “ > , 3 4 3 ὔ od
καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἐν τούτοις ἀνακεκομισμένοι ἦσαν" ὥστε
“ , 3 ὔ \ σ 9 ’
μηδὲν λαμβάνειν αὐτόθεν τοὺς “Ελληνας, ἀλλὰ διετραφη-
“ ’ a 3 a 4 δι
σαν τοῖς κτήνεσιν ἃ ἐκ τῶν Ταόχων ἔλαβον.
3 , a 2 2 ν ὦ ;
15. “Ex τούτου οἱ “Eddnves ἀφίκοντο emt “Aprracop

o6 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

“ 4 A 4 3 A 3 ’
ποταμὸν, EUPOS τεττάρων πλέθρων. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορευθησαν
\ a ‘\ 4 ᾽ ¥ δ
δια Σκυθηνῶν, σταθμους τέτταρας παρασάγγας εἴκοσι, dua
’ 9 7 3 4 Υ̓ e / a , 9 ͵
πεδίου εἰς κῶμας " ἐν αἷς ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς καὶ ETECLTI-
᾽ δι “A “N ,
σαντο. 19. ἐντεῦθεν διῆλθον σταθμοὺυς τέτταρας παρα-
’ Ν . , / δ ’ ͵ \
σάγγας εἰκοσι, προς πόλιν μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα Kas
4 4 A 3 “A 7 3 γέ a ,
οἰκουμένην, ἣ ἐκαλεῖτο Tvupyius. εκ ταύτης ὁ τῆς χωρας
¥ a ὦ e ’ , ad N a ς
ἄρχων τοῖς EdAnow ἡγεμόνα πέμπει, ὅπως Sua τῆς ἐαυ-
“ ’ ’ wv > 4 3 Ν > ? *
τῶν πολεμίας χώρας ἄγοι αὐτούς. 20. ελθων δ᾽ ἐκεῖνος
4 4 ΝΜ 3 Ν , e ~ 4 ’ σ ¥
λέγει OTL ἄξει auTOUS πέντε ἡμερῶν εἰς χωρίον ὅθεν ὄψον-
ἤ 2 ‘ ‘ , ἢ n ‘
tat θάλατταν" εἰ de μη, τεθνάναι ἐπηγγείλατο. καὶ
e 74 3 ω 93 4 % ἈΝ e “ 4
ἡγούμενος, ἐπειδὴ ἐνέβαλεν εἰς THY ἑαυτοῦ πολεμίαν, παρε-
΄ ¥ Ν ’ Ν , φ Ν a > »
κέλεύετο αἰθειν καὶ φθείρειν τὴν χώραν" ᾧ καὶ δῆλον ἐγέ-
σ“ ’ Ψ ιέ 2 a a € 4 2 ,
VETO OTL τοῦτον ἕνεκα EXOoL, ov τῆς τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων ευνοίας.
. 9 a > 4 "ΜΝ A ͵ ςο »
21. Καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἔπι τὸ opos τῇ πέμπτῃ ἡμέρᾳ"
» Ν a + 9 ͵ 3 Ν Ν e ra! 2 ,ὔ
ὄνομα δὲ τῷ oper ἦν Θήχης. ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ πρῶτοι ἐγένοντο
> A ~ ΜΝ ‘ a Ν , Ν Ν
ἐπὶ TOU ρους Kat κατεῖδον τὴν θάλατταν, κραυγὴ πολλή
> 7 3 7 \ φΦ a . 459 ΄
ἐγένετο. 22. ἀκούσας δε ὁ Ξενοφῶν καὶ οἱ ὁπισθοφύλακες
>? ¥ ¥ 3 , “ἤ
ὠηθησαν ἔμπροσθεν ἄλλους επιτίθεσθαι πολεμίους " επον-
4 \, e 2 a 4 ᾽ὔ 4 > a
To yap καὶ ὄπισθεν οἱ ἐκ τῆς καομένης χώρας, καὶ αὐτῶν
| a J 4 3 ld Ul ’ x. 3 [4 > »
ot ὁπισθοφύλακες ἀπέκτεινάν τὲ τίνας καὶ εζωγρησαν eve
, \ 4 δῆ. a a 9
δραν ποιησάμενοι, καὶ γέρρα ἔλαβον δασειῶν βοῶν wyo-
’ 3 Ν Q Mv ‘ 3 SY ‘ Ν ’
βόεια ἀμφὶ τὰ εἴκοσιν. 23. επειδὴ de Bon πλείων τε
> 4 “ 3 ’ ΝἉ ς aN 9 ᾽ 2 ,
ἐγέγνετο καὶ ἐγγύτερον, καὶ οἱ ἀεί ἐπιόντες ἔθεον δρόμῳ
x, ON ‘N ἈΝ a “ a ! 3 lA e Ν
ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀεὶ βοῶντας, καὶ πολλῷ μείζων ἐγίγνετο n Bon
oe δ , > 9 Ie ‘ Ag! 9 a
ὅσῳ δὴ πλείους ἐγίγνοντο, ἐδόκει Sn μεῖζον τι εἶναι τῷ
a . 9 Ν ),3 δ δ 7, ἐν δ
Ξενοφῶντι" 24. καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐφ ἵππον, καὶ Avevoy καὶ Tous
e / 3 Ν ΄ N , δὴ 2 7
immreas ἀναλαβὼν, παρεβοήθει" καὶ τάχα δὴ ἀκονουσι
’ Co! aA ’ ? ‘\
βοώντων τῶν στρατιωτῶν Ouratrra, Θάλαττα, καὶ
, ” ν Ψ ͵ ee ε» ,
παρεγγυωώντων. ἔνθα δὴ ἔθεον πάντες καὶ ot οπισθοφύλακες,
Ἃ ’ “ ‘A 3 Ν Ν > ’
καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια ἠλαύνετο καὶ οἱ ἵπποι. 38. emer δὲ αφι-
, 3 ON Ν v 9 “a Ν ΄ - 93 4
KOVTO Waves ἐπὶ TO ἄκρον, ἐνταῦθα bn περιέβαλλον αλλη-

ΑΝΑΒ. 4, VILL Prospect of the Sea. 57

Ν ν N 4 . 3 ,
λους καὶ στρατηγοὺς Kat λοχαγοὺς δακρύοντες. καὶ e-arri-
ῳ΄ “ ’ “
νης, ὅτου dn παρεγγνυήσαντος, οἱ στρατιῶται φέρουσι λίθους
Q a SN 4 ? a 3 ,
καὶ ποιοῦσι κολωνὸν μέγαν. 26. ἐνταῦθα ἀνετίθεσαν δερ-
, A 3 ’ “ , 4 4 9 4
μάτων πλῆθος ὡμοβοείων, καὶ βακτηρίας, Kat Ta αἰχμάλωτα
’ e “ 9 , + A 4 “ “
γέρρα, καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν AUTOS TE κατέτεμνε TA γέρρα καὶ τοῖς
Υ͂ “ “ “ , qa
ἄλλοις διεκελεύετος 327. μετὰ ταῦτα τὸν ἤγεμονα οἱ " Ἐλ-
4 a 4 > A δὰ o
Anves ἀποπέμπουσι, Sapa δόντες ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, ἵππον καὶ
μ 3 Aa “ ‘N s “ Ν ? ᾿Ξ
φιάλην ἀργυρᾶν καὶ σκενὴν Περσικὴν καὶ δαρεικοὺς δέκα
¥ ’ \ ». ‘ “
ἥτει δὲ μάλιστα Tous δακτυλίους, καὶ ἔλαβε πολλοὺς παρὰ
ΝΕ ἣν N , > κα 4 ’
τῶν στρατιωτῶν. κώμην Se δείξας αὑτοῖς ov σκηνήσουσι,
Ν ‘ eas a , 3 , > NN e ,
καὶ τὴν ὁδον ἣν πορεύσονται εἰς ωακρωνας, ἐπεὶ ἐσπέρα
3 MM a A 3 ,
ἐγένετο, @YETO τῆς νυκτὸς ἀπίων.
a /
VIII. ᾿Εντεῦθεν δ ἐπορεύθησαν οἱ “EdAnves διὰ Ma-
Ἂ a 4 a 4 Ν
κρώνων, σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας δέκα. τῇ πρώτῃ δὲ
εο» 3,7 x NON , ἃ @ Ν a ,
ἡμέρᾳ αφίκοντο ἐπὶ Tov ποταμὸν os ὥριζε τὴν τῶν Μακρω-
Ν Ν a a e 4 4
νων καὶ τὴν τῶν Σκυθινῶν. 2. εἶχον δ᾽ ὑπερδέξιον χωρίον
4Φ J \. 9 3 “ ¥. “ ? A
οἷον χαλεπώτατον, καὶ εξ ἀριστερᾶς ἀλλον ποταμὸν, εἰς OV
, 3 Φ wy» a 2
ἐνέβαλλεν ὁ ὁρίζων, δι ov ἔδει διαβῆναι. ἦν δὲ οὗτος
N 4 O Ἂ A a t “A
Sacus δένδρεσι, παχέσι μὲν οὗ, πυκνοῖς δέ, ταῦτα ἐπεὶ
a ee 4 ΄ 3 a /
προσῆλθον ot ἔλληνες ἔκοπτον, σπεύδοντες ἐκ τοῦ χωρίου
e ͵ 9 a e Ν ’ Ψ ’
ὡς τάχιστα ἐξελθεῖν. 8. οἱ de Maxpwves, ἔχοντες γέρρα
’ a 9 23 ’ὔ ry
καὶ λόγχας καὶ τριχίνους χιτῶνας, κατ᾽ ἀντιπέραν τῆς δια-
4 ’ 9 δ 4 4 ,
Bacews παρατεταγμένοι ἤσαν, καὶ ἀλλήλοις διεκελεύοντο
Ν ’ὔ 3 Ν Ν 3 / 3 a Ν “A
καὶ λίθους εἰς TOY ποταμὸν ἐρρίπτουν" ἐξικνοῦντο δε οὗ,
Ia 2
οὐδ᾽ ἔβλαπτον οὐδεν.
4 a [οὶ a
4. Ἔνθα δὴ προσέρχεται τῷ Ἐξενοφῶντι τῶν πελτα-
A > A ? ’ 4 4
στῶν τις ἀνὴρ, Αθήνησι φάσκων δεδουλευκέναι, λέγων ὅτι
δ Ν a > 4 4
γιγνώσκοι τὴν φωνὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων. καὶ οἶμαι, ἔφη,
»ν , / 9 . 9 , 7 nF
ἐμὴν ταύτην πατρίδα εἶναι" καὶ εἰ μὴ Te κωλύει, ἐθέλω
ἴω A 3 2 “
αὐτοῖς διαλεχθῆναι. 5. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδὲν κωλύει, ἔφη, αλλὰ
ζω / 9 > 3 4
διαλέγου καὶ μάθε πρῶτον τίνες εἰσίν. οἱ δ᾽ εἶπον epwrn-

58 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen.

b ] 4 ‘4 ¥ 9 “ 3
σαντος ὅτι M ἄκρωνες. ἔρωτα τοίνυν, én, avrous, τί ἀντι-
, Ν 4 ec oa , 4 : € 2
τετάχαται Kat χρήζουσιν ἡμῖν πολέμιοι εἶναι. 6. Οἱ ὃ
3 4 A > oN Ν e 4 ᾽
ἀπεκρίναντο: Ὅτι καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐπὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν χώραν
¥ 4 - @ 3 “
ἔρχεσθε. Ayer ἐκέλευον οἱ στρατηγοὶ ὅτι ov κακῶς γε
;᾽ ? ἈΝ ἴω ’ 3 ὔ 3
ποιήσοντες, ἀλλα βασιλεῖ πολεμήσαντες ἀπερχόμεθα εἰς
Ν ’ 3 4
τὴν Ἑλλαδα, καὶ ἐπὶ θάλατταν βουλόμεθα ἀφικέσθαι.
4 , ? a 9 a A 4 ‘ 4 e 3
Ἴ. ἠρωτων εκεῖνοι εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά. οἱ ὃ
ΝΥ a“ Q “ 3 Λ 3 σ᾿"
ἔφασαν καὶ δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν ἐθέλειν. ἐντεῦθεν διδόασιν
Ν ’ὔ [4
οἱ Μάκρωνες βαρβαρικὴν λόγχην τοῖς “EdAnow, o δὲ
εἴ 4 > “a “ ν
Ελληνες ἐκείνοις ᾿Ελληνικήν" ταῦτα yap epacay πιστὰ
9 Ἃ ,. 9 , 3 ,
εἶναι" θεοὺυς Se ἐπεμαρτύραντο ἀμφότεροι.
rN ν N N IAN 7 4 ,
8. Mera δὲ ta πιστὰ evOus οἱ Μάκρωνες ta δένδρα
, ’ eas ς , ς ͵ 3
συνεξέκοπτον, τὴν τε ὁδὸν ὡδοποίουν ὡς διαβιβάσοντες, ἐν
’ 3 4 δι [2 N ? Ν a In 7
μέσοις ἀναμεμίγμενοι τοῖς Ελλησι" καὶ ἄγοραν οἱαν εἐδυ-
a , 3 N ον, fo. 3s
VAVTO παρεῖχον, καὶ παρήγαγον ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἕως ἐπὶ
σ / \ ef 3 A
Ta Κόλχων ὅρια κατέστησαν τους Eddnvas. 9 ἐνταῦθα
9 4 4 Ν 4 “ > ν ? ς ρμ
ἣν opos μέγα, προσβατὸν δέ" καὶ emt τούτου οἱ Κόλχοι
’ 9 \ CA ἈΝ a ἐσ
παρατετάγμενονυ ἦσαν. καὶ TO MEV Τρωτον οἱ ἔλληνες
2 / bs , € ef ¥ δ
ἀντιπαρετάξαντο κατὰ φάλαγγα, ὡς οὕτως ἄξοντες πρὸς
Ν »” » \ mM a a ΄
τὸ opos* ἔπειτα δὲ ἐδοξε τοῖς στρατηγοῖς βουλεύσασθαι
oe 9 a wy
συλλεγεῖσιν, ὅπως ὡς κάλλιστα ἀγωνιουνται. 10. Ἐλεξεν
9 a Ψ a 2 . δ t ,ὔ
οὖν Ἐενοφῶν, ὅτι δοκεῖ π᾿αὕὔσαντας τὴν φάλαγγα λόχους
9 ’ a φ Ν Ν Λ , ᾽
ὀρθίους ποιῆσαι" ἡ μὲν γὰρ φαλαγξ διασπασθήσεται εὑ-
4 a N “ ” a ἐν ¥ e , “ ΓΜ
Ous+ τῇ μὲν γὰρ ἄνοδον, τῇ δὲ evodov εὐρήσομεν τὸ ὄρος"
ἰν 7A’ a 3 / 4 rf 4 3 ,
καὶ εὐθυς τοῦτο αθυμίαν ποιήσει, ὅταν τεταγμένοι εἰς φα-
’ ’ ec oa ¥ “A Ν
λαγγα ταύτην διεσπασμένην ὁρῶσιν. AL. ἔπειτα ἢν μεν
3 Ν 4 7 a
ἐπὶ πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι προσάγωμεν, περιττεύσουσιν ἡμῶν
’ 0 a ad A /
οἱ πολέμιοι, καὶ τοῖς περιττοῖς χρήσονται ὃ τι ἂν βουλων-
aN L939 9 XL 9 , ¥ Jar a ¥
ται" ἐὰν Se er ολίγων τεταγμένοι ἴωμεν, οὐδὲν ἂν εἰη
+ 93 4 A ον 9
θαυμαστὸν εἰ διακοπείη ἡμῶν ἡ φάλαγξ ὑπο ἀθρόων καὶ
a) “ 3 , a 3 4 5 , A
βελῶν και ἀνθρώπων πολλῶν ἐμπεσόντων" εἰ SE πῇ τοῦτο

ANAB. 4, στ]. Arrival in Colchis. 59

yy a τῳ. Q ¥ 9 0 δ
ἐσται, TH ὁλῃ φάλαγγι κακὸν ἔσται. UB αλλα μοι δοκεῖ
4 ᾽ ᾿ a Y ’ὔ αι
ὀρθίους τους λόχους ποιησαμένους, τοσοῦτον χωρίον κατα-
δι , a ᾽ Ψ 4 ‘ ’ 4
σχειν διαλείποντας τοῖς λοχοις, σον ἐξω TOUS εἐσχατους
“ ’ a ’ ᾽ . Ψ > “
λοχοὺυς γενέσθαι τῶν πολεμίων κεράτων" καὶ οὕτως ἐσο-
a a“ , ,. Ψ ecw ,
μεθα τῆς Te τῶν πολεμίων φάλαγγος ἔξω οἱ ἔσχατοι λόχοι;
.} Ν e ’ oA a ’
καὶ ορθίους ἄγοντες οἱ κρατίστοι ἡμῶν πρῶτον προσίασιν,
φ A 4 9 a ¢ # e ’ ιν
ἢ τε ἂν εὕοδον ἢ, ταύτῃ ἕκαστος ἄξει ὁ λοχος. 18. καὶ εἰς
4 a > εν wv “ 4 4 a
τε To διαλεῖπον ov ῥάδιον ἔσται τοῖς πολεμίοις εἰσελθεῖν,
Ψ .ιΨ Ν) ’ > 08 wv
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν λόχων ὄντων, διακόψαι τε ov ῥᾳδιον ἔσται
, ¥ , 1» 4 , A a
λόχον ὄρθιον προσιόντα" eav Te Tis πιέζηται τῶν λόχων,
φ , 4 ¥ 4 fon a ’ ϑκς4
9 πλησίοῦ βοηθήσει ἣν τε εἰς πῇ δυνηθῇ τῶν λόχων emt
a) Α ΄ “
τὸ ἄκρον ἀναβῆναι, οὐδεις μηκέτι μείνῃ τῶν πολεμίων.
a \ 3 , 3 / ‘ ’
14. ταῦτα ἔδοξε, καὶ ἐποίουν ὀρθίους Tous λόχους. Hevo-
A ‘ 3 Ν 2." 4 9.» > NS a a ΝΥ. “
φῶν δὲ ἀπιὼν ἐπὶ τὸ εὐώνυμον απὸ τοῦ δεξιοῦ, ἔλεγε τοῖς
, Ν φ »,» 5 A ow 4 4 δ.
otpatiwtais* Avdpes, οὑτοί εἰσιν OVS ὁρᾶτε μόνοι ETL ἡμίν
3 4 a . ¥ Ν ¥ , 2 ΄ 4
ἐμποδὼν τὸ μὴ ἤδη εἰναι ἔνθα πάλαι ἐσπεύδομεν" τούτους,
4 ’ x, 3 “ a ἴω
nv πως δυνώμεθα, καὶ ὠμοὺς δεῖ καταφαγεῖν.
, se? a , Ψ > 9 N ‘
16. Eve δ᾽ ev ταῖς χωραιῖς ἕκαστοι ἐγένοντο, Kat τοὺς
, 3 / 3 “ > 9 Ν 4 a“ e a
λοχους ὀρθίους ἐποιήσαντο, EVEVOVTO μεν λόχοι τῶν οπλιτων
9 ᾿ ν 9 , eo as , “ Ὗ 4 \
audi τοὺς ὀγδοήκοντα, ὁ δε λόχος ἕκαστος σχεδὸν εἰς τοὺς
€ 4 Ν ‘ , ιν N Ν ’ a » ’
ἑκατὸν " τοὺς δὲ πελταστας καὶ τοὺς τοξοτας τριχῇ εἐποιή-
Ν Ν a ? ? M ‘ Α a a by
σαντο, τοὺς μὲν τοῦ ευὐωνυμου εξω, Tous Se τοῦ δεξιοῦ, Tous
- ‘ , Ν 4 / ς ἢ ᾽
δὲ κατὰ μέσον, σχεδὸν ἑξακοσίους ἑκάστους. 16. Ex
’ ’ὔ e 4 wv Ig ἢ AY
τούτου παρηγγύησαν οἱ στρατηγοὶ εὔχεσθαι" εὐξαμενοι δὲ
’ 9 4 ’ Ν
καὶ παιανίσαντες ἐπορεύοντο. καὶ Χειρίσοφος μὲν καὶ
μι A Ἁ φ ‘\ 3 a “\ A - A 4
Ἀενοφῶὼν καὶ ob σὺν αὑτοῖς πέλτασται τῆς τῶν πολεμίων
’ μέ ’ὔ 9 4 e Ν ,
φαλαγγος εξω γενόμενοι ἐπορεύοντο" 17. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι
e 5 > 8 4 ͵ὔ ε ‘ xX UN δ e
ὡς εἰδον auTous, ἀντιπαραθέοντες οἱ μὲν emt τὸ δεξιὸν, οἱ
ΝΟ. Ν “ 9.» ’ Ν Ν A ὁ oa ’
δε ἐπὶ τὸ evwvupov, διεσπάσθησαν καὶ πολὺ τῆς αὑτῶν φά-
3 a ’ “ ? ’ Ia 7 ν > “
λαγγος ἐν τῷ μέσῳ κενὸν ἐποίησαν. 18. ἰδόντες δὲ avToUS
, ε N . 9 N , @ 9
Ssayafovras οἱ κατὰ τὸ Αρκαδικὸν πελτασταὶ, ὧν ἦρχεν

-.

60 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen

9 ’ 6» A 4 4 9 A 4 wv
Αἰσχίνης ὁ Axapvav, νομίσαντες φεύγειν ava xpatos εθεον"
φ a > A ,. yy» 3 /
καὶ οὗτοι πρῶτοι ἐπὶ TO Opos ἀναβαίνουσι" συνεφείπετο
‘ n x 9 “x “ @ 9 a
δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ τὸ Αρκαδικὸν ὁπλιετικὸν, ὧν ἦρχε Kreavwp ὃ
’ Ν 4 € ὟΝ a > ἡ
"Opyopevios. 19. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι, ws ἤρξαντο θεῖν, οὐκέτε
¥ 9 “ ~a ¥ 9 ’ e Ν (ἡ
ἐστησαν, ἀλλα φυγῇ αἀλλος ἄλλῃ ἐτράπετο. οἱ de Ελλη-
3 Ἁ 4 a
ves ἀναβάντες ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἐν πολλαῖς κώμαις καὶ
x 9 ’ a ᾿ a ¥. 3
τἀπιτήδεια πολλὰ ἐχούσαις. 20. Και τὰ μεν ἀλλα οὐδὲν
f 4 δ Ω ᾽ 3
ἦν ὃ τι καὶ ἐθαύμασαν" τὰ δὲ σμήνη πολλὰ ἣν αὐτόθι, καὶ
- ’ὔ / ¥ [οὶ ral 4 wv
τῶν κηρίων ὁσοι ἔφαγον τῶν στρατιωτῶν πάντες adpoves
3 4 “N 4 ᾽ὔ 3 a
τε ἐγίγνοντο, καὶ ἥμουν, καὶ κάτω διεχώρει αὑτοῖς, καὶ ὀρθὸς
’ ”) 9 3 N 9. 7 3
οὐδεὶς ἠδύνατο ἰστασθαι" GAN οἱ μὲν ὀλίγον ἐδηδοκότες
,ὔ , 3 e ‘ Ν , e ‘
σφοδρα μεθύουσιν ἕῳκεσαν, ot δὲ πολυ, μαινομένοις, οἱ δὲ
\ 39 , ¥ Ν ad \ ὦ
καὶ ἀποθνησκουσιν. 24. εἐκείντο δὲ οὕτω πολλοὶ ὥσπερ
a a “ \N 4 3 4 A δ e ,ὔ
τροπῆς γεγενημένης, καὶ πολλὴ NY ἀθυμία. τῇ ὃ ὑστεραίᾳ
> “ δ In \ 3 Ἢ N δ > » oe 9 ’
ameBave μεν οὐδεὶς, aude δὲ THY αὐτὴν που ὥραν avedpo-
/ Ν Ν 6 1 7 [2 3
νουν" τρίτῃ δὲ καὶ τετάρτῃ ἀνίσταντο ὥσπερ Ex φαρμα-
’
κοποσίας.
3 a 9 2 ᾽ \ ’
22. ᾿Εντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν δύο σταθμοὺς παρασάγ-
e δ . 9 Π ’ 9 a Λ
yas ἔπτα, καὶ ἦλθον ἐπὶ θάλατταν εἰς Τραπεζοῦντα, πόλιν
’ 2 a 3 a 3 / ’ 4
᾿Ελληνίδα, οἰκουμένην ev τῷ Ευξείνῳ Πόντῳ, Σινωπέων
3 ͵ὔ 3 a Λ , 9 a Ν e tA
σποικίαν, ev τῇ Koryov xopa. ενταῦθα ἐμειναν ἡμέρας
’ yA , ’ a a t , 3 a
ὥμφι τὰς τριάκοντα, ev ταῖς τῶν Κόλχων copa’ καντεῦ-
3 δ ’ “ QA
Pev ὁρμώμενοι ἐληίξοντο τὴν Κολχίδα. 28. ἀγορὰν δὲ
a A tf 4 \ deaf ’
παρεῖχον τῷ στρατοπέδῳ Τραπεζούντιοι, καὶ ἐδεξαντὸ τε
\ @ f ¥ a VN M# \ ¢
tous EdAnvas, καὶ ξένια ἐδοσαν βοῦς καὶ ἀλφιτα καὶ οἶνον.
4 ‘ Α A / Λ
34. συνδιεπράττοντο δὲ καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν πλησίον Κόλχων
a -9 A , 4 9 ’ 4 4 ‘ 9
τῶν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ μάλιστα οἰκούντων, καὶ ξένια καὶ παρ
3 / ;
ἐκείνων ἦλθον βόες.
Q 4 a Ν A »¥ ’
25. Mera δὲ τοῦτο τὴν θυσίαν ἣν εὔξαντο παρεσκευα-
3 3 δὰ 9 A a ΝΥ a“
ζοντο" ἦλθον δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἱκανοὶ βόες ἀποθῦσαι τῷ Au τῷ
a ss re a e , 4 a ¥ a
Σωτῆρι, καὶ τῷ Ἡρακλεῖ ἡγεμόσυνα, καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοῖς θεοῖς

Hew. 2, 11.] Fall and Restoration of Athens. 61

A » 9 ’ ‘ A 9 A 4 9 na ww
ἃ εὔξαντο. ἐποίησαν δὲ Kat ἀγῶνα γυμνικὸν ἐν τῷ ὄρει
Υ 9 ’ σ΄. Α ’ ;
evOarrep ἐσκήνουν. εἴλοντο δὲ Apaxovtioy Σπαρτιατὴν,
a ¥ ~ ἃ ¥ a Υ ‘ ,
ὃς ἐφυγε παῖς ὧν οἰκοθεν, παίδα ἄκων κατακανὼν ξνηλῃ
a »» A a 3 a
πατάξας, δρόμου T ἐπιμεληθῆναι καὶ τοῦ ayavos προστα-
“ 4 Ἁ ’ Ἁ a a
τῆσαι. 26. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ θυσία ἐγένετο, τὰ δέρματα παρέ-
a 4 e “ > » cd SS
δοσαν τῷ Apaxovtiy, καὶ ἡγείσθαι ἐκέλευον ὅπου τὸν
’ Ν Ψ e Ἃ ’ὔ @ e ’ 23. 9
δρόμον πεποιηκὼς εἴη. ὁ δε δείξας οὕπερ ἑστηκότες ETUY-
e ¥ ᾿ , “ ¥
xavov, Οὗτος ὁ λόφος, ἐφη, κάλλιστος τρέχειν που ἂν TIS
΄ κν 4 Ν , t 3
βούληται. Πῶς οὖν, εφασαν, δυνήσονται παλαίειν ἐν
a \ a of € δ᾽ 4 a 4 ? ΄
σκληρῷ καὶ δασεῖ οὕτως ; ὁ ὃ εἶπε, άλλον τι ἀνιαάσεται
e ͵ 4 / ΝΥ “- N , a
ὃ καταπεσών. 2% ἠγωνίζοντο δὲ παῖδες μὲν στάδιον τῶν
? ρ 4 Ἃ A 7
αἰχμαλώτων οἱ πλεῖστοι, δόλιχον δὲ Κρῆτες πλείους ἢ
Ce? ¥ , 4 ΙΝ Ν Ν 4
ἐξηκοντα ἔθεον, πάλην δὲ καὶ πυγμὴν καὶ παγκράτιον
σ Ν Ν ’ > + ν᾿ . 4
ἕτεροι. καὶ καλὴ θεα eyeveTo* πολλοὶ yap κατεβησαν,
Ν o@ , a e ’ “ 3 »ν
καί, ἅτε θεωμένων τῶν εταίρων, πολλὴ φιλονεικία ἐγίγνετο.
Υ x ν ὦ ‘oN. y > A δ A a
28. εἐθεον δὲ καὶ ἵπποι, καὶ ἐδει avtous κατα TOV πρανοῦς
. 8 a ” 2 “ 4 ¥ Ν
ἐλάσαντας, ἐν τῇ θαλάττῃ ἀναστρέψαντας, πάλιν ἄνω πρὸς
Ν a ¥ ἣν ’ ‘ e x 9 a
Tov Bwpov yew, καὶ KATW μὲν Ot πολλοῖ εκυλενδοῦντο "
¥ A rN x 9 ce UM” , , 4 ᾽ e
ἄνω δὲ πρὸς TO ἰσχυρῶς ορθιον μόλις βάδην ἐπορεύοντο οἱ
oe ¥ Ν Ν ν Ν Λ
ἵπποι" ἐνθα πολλὴ Kpavyn καὶ γέλως καὶ παρακελευσις
> ν 2. a
ἐγίγνετο αὑτῶν.

I FALL AND RESTORATION OF ATHENS.

[Hellenica, Π.]

11. 3. ᾽Εν δὲ ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις, τῆς Παρώλου ἀφικομένης
A 3 4 φ “ x ¢ 9 x 93 A a
νυκτὸς, ἐλέγετο ἡ ξυμφορα, καὶ ἡ οἰμωγὴ ex τοῦ Πειραιῶς
a a a A a 4
διὰ τῶν μακρῶν τειχῶν ἐς ἄστυ διῆκεν, ὁ ἕτερος τῷ ἑτέρῳ
Λ σ > 3 / σι \ Ia 3 , 3
παραγγέλλων" ὥστ᾽ εκείνης τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδεὶς ἐκοιμήθη, OV

62 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

’ 3 ’ a 3 “ ‘\ a Ψ
μονον τους ἀπολωλότας πενθοῦντες, αλλα πολυ μᾶλλον ετε
> NX € Ν / / 2 ? / “
αυτοι εαυτους, πείσεσθαι νομίζοντες ota ἐποίησαν ηλιους

’ 3 / ¥ / /
te Δακεδαιμονίων ἀποίκους ὄντας, κρατήσαντες πολιορκίᾳ,
ς ΄ ᾿ ’ 4 tA “ 9 4
καὶ Iotiatéas, καὶ Sxiwvaiovs, καὶ Topwvaious, καὶ Αἰγινη-
“ δ “N A ς ’ a 9
τας, καὶ ἄλλους πολλοὺς τῶν EAAnvorv. 4. τῇ ὃ voTe-
ὔ 3 / 3 / > @ yw 4 4 3
paia ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίησαν, ev ἢ ἔδοξε Tous τε λιμένας ἀπο-
“ “ ean Q A , 9 4 . σ΄.
χῶσαι πλὴν ἐνος, καὶ τὰ τείχη εὐτρεπίζειν, καὶ φύλακας
ἢ 7 δ ν ’ e 9 ΄ ,
ἐφιστάναι, καὶ ταλλα πάντα ὡς ες πολίορκιαν ταρασκευα-
Ν μ \ Φ Ἁ a a
ζειν τὴν πόλιν. Kat οὗτοι μὲν περὶ ταῦτα ἦσαν.
/ 3 2 a ¢ 4 4
ὅ. Λυσανδρος 5 ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Ελλησπόντου ναυσὶ διακο-
4 3 ’ 3 , ’ , x
σίαις adixopevos εἰς AeoBov, κατεσκευάσατο tas τε ἄλλας
Λ 3 a a 4 ’ 3 Ν “ a, ON [4
πόλεις ἐν αὑτῇ, καὶ Μιτυληνην" εἰς δὲ τὰ ἐπὶ Opaxns
a2 , , ν 9 ’ a . 2
χωρία ἔπεμψε δέκα τριήρεις ἔχοντα Ereovixov, ὃς ta ἐκεῖ
͵ “ , , 37% \ \
πάντα πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους μετέστησεν. 6. εὐθὺς δὲ καὶ
¢ om ς ‘ 3 4 > / , /
ἢ ἄλλη Ελλας ἀφειστήκει Αθηναίων peta τὴν ναυμαχίαν,
Ν 4 @ Ν Ν a 4 ,
πλὴν Σαμίων. οὗτοι δὲ, σφαγὰς τῶν γνωρίμων ποιή-
ω Ν Λ ’ Ν ω a
σαντες, κατεῖχον τὴν πολιν. Ὦ. Avoavdpos δὲ μετα ταῦτα
“ » 4 + ] Λ 2 4
ἔπεμψε πρὸς Ayiv τε εἰς Δεκέλειαν καὶ εἰς Aaxedaipova,
σ a ‘ / , 4 ‘
OTL προσπλεῖ συν διακοσίαις vavot. Aaxedatpovios δε
ag, 0 ον 4 “
ἐξήεσαν πανδημεὶ, καὶ ot ἀλλοι Πελοποννήσιοι, πλην ’Ap-
’ ma ¢ » , ,
γείων, παραγγείλαντος Tov ἑτέρον Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλέως,
9 4, bY rd 3 93 Ν
Παυσανίον. Β. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἅπαντες ἠθροίσθησαν, ἀναλαβὼν
> A 4 ᾿ Λλ > ᾿ς 3 a? 5 ’
αὑτους, προς THY πόλιν ἐστρατοπέδευσεν ἐν τῇ Ακαδημίᾳ,
τῷ καλουμεῖ ῳ. 9. “Λύσανδρος δὲ, ἀφικό͵
@ καλουμένῳ γυμνασίῳ: 9. Avoavdpos ὃε, adixopevos
᾿ ¥ 3 ‘ 9 ’ ad In 2
πρὸς Atyivav, ἀπέδωκε τὴν πόλιν Αἰγινήταις, ὅσους ἐδὺύ-
, 3 4 3. κα ς 3 Ν Ν ,
vato πλείστους αθροίσας αὐτῶν" ὡς ὃ αὕτως και Μηλιοις,
Ν “ ¥. (4 A eon 3 ’ Ν Ν a
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ὅσοι τῆς αὑτῶν EaTEpovTo, μετα δε τοῦτο
’ a 7 . ἐν ‘ aA ιν
δηωσας Σαλαμῖνα, ὡρμίσατο πρὸς τὸν Πειραιᾷ ναυσὶ πεν-
, ν ὁ Ν NA a 9 a ”
τήκοντα καὶ EKATOV, καὶ τὰ πλοία εἶργε TOU εἰσπλου.
e 9 “ rd a Q
10. Οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πολιορκούμενοι κατὰ γῆν Kat κατὰ
f 4 4 Ν “Ὁ ¥ ¥
θάλατταν, ἠπόρουν τί χρὴ ποιεῖν, οὔτε νεῶν οὔτε συμμά-

Het.2,0.) Consternation in the City. 63

2 ~ Μ , > » δ᾽ 5 é 7
χων AUTOLS Ὄντων, οὔτε σίτου" ἐνομιζον ὃ ουδεμέαν εἰναι
ΓῚ x ἴω ἃ > 7 . ὔ bd A
σωτηρίαν τοῦ μὴ παθεῖν ἃ οὐ τιμωρούμενοι ἐποίησαν, αλλὰ
\ Ν 4 3 ’ ’ 3. 3 Q
dia τὴν ὕβριν ἠδίκουν ἀνθρώπους μικροπολίτας, οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ
a > 7 e 7 aA Ὁ > +» , .
μιᾷ αἰτίᾳ ἑτέρᾳ ἢ ὅτι ἐκείνοις συνεμάχουν. AE. διὰ
a s > 4 > [4 / 3 ΄ ιν
ταῦτα TOUS ατίμους ἐπιτίμους ποιήσαντες, ἐκαρτερουν" καὶ
3 4 a , A a ,
ἀποθνησκόντων ἐν τῇ πόλει λιμῷ πολλῶν, οὐ διελέγοντο
Ν 3 ιν »- a ¥ ς a 9 i
περὶ Suadrayns. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ παντελῶς ἤδη ὁσίτος ἐπελελοι-
¥ c . 9 , Φ
Tel, ἔπεμψαν πρέσβεις παρα Αγιν, βουλόμενοι ξύμμαχοι
9 / ¥ Ν ’ ιν \ a
εἶναι Λακεδαιμονίοις, ἔχοντες Ta τεύχη καὶ Tov Πειραιᾶ,
Α > 8 ΄ , ἴω ς ‘ 3 ‘ 3
kat ἔπι τούτοις ξυνθήκας ποιεῖσθαι. 422. ὁ δὲ αὑτοὺς ἐς
/ > " 3. 2 \ 4 ΄ 7 f
Λακεδαίμονα ἐκέλευεν ἱέναι" ov yap εἶναι κύριος autos.
3 a 3 ’ ς 4 A a 3 ’
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἀπήγγειλαν οἱ πρέσβεις ταῦτα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις,
¥ ? “N 3 ͵ὔ ΟῚ 3 \ 9 >
ἔπεμψαν αὑτοὺς ἐς Δακεδαίμονα. 8. οἱ δ᾽, ἐπεὶ ἦσαν ἐν
4 / A a \ 9 ΄ > A €
Σελλασίᾳ, πλησίον τῆς Λακωνικῆς, Kat ἐπύθοντο αὐτῶν οἱ
Ὗ ἂΔἃΔ Ἀἅ. y a? N . > +»
ἔφοροι ἃ ἔλεγον, ὄντα οἷα περ Kat πρὸς Αγιν, αὐτόθεν
> ON 2s 9 ἢ . sy , > ? ’
QUTOUS ἐκέλευον ἀπιέναι, Kat, εἰ TL δέονται εἰρήνης, κάλλιον
4 4 e Ν ’ 9 “
ἥκειν βουλευσαμένους. 14. Οἱ δὲ πρέσβεις ἐπεὶ ἧκον
¥ , 9 4 a 3 Ν , > Ῥ 3 4
οἰκαδε, καὶ απηγγείλαν ταῦτα ἐς τὴν πόλιν, ἀθυμία ἐνέπεσε
πᾶσιν" ᾧ tp avd δισθήσεσθ tL, ἕως ἃ /
σιν" @ovTo yap ἀνδραποδισθησεσθαι, Kat, ἕως ἂν πέμ-
φ 4 4 N a a 4 “
πωσιν EeTepous πρέσβεις, πολλοὺς τῷ λιμῷ ἀπολεῖσθαι.
“ ‘ a “ “᾿ ’ ? “ 3 rd
15. περί de τῶν τειχῶν τῆς καθαιρέσεως οὐδεὶς ἐβούλετο
’ 3 ΄ ἈΝ 4 “ >) a a
ξυμβονυλεύειν. Αρχέστρατος yup, εἰπὼν ἐν τῇ βουλῇ
A 5 4 ὔ » > 4? φ a
ακεδαϊμονίοις κρώτιστον εἶναι εᾧ ols προεκαλοῦντο
> » a 3 ω A Ν A “a
εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι, ἐδέθη" (προεκαλοῦντο δὲ τῶν μακρῶν
a 2 A , , a es > 2 N
τειχῶν emt δέκα σταδίους καθελεῖν ἑκάτερον ") ἐγένετο δὲ
? \ 23 a Q ’ 7
ψηφισμα μὴ εξειναι περὶ τούτων ξυμβουλεύειν.
’ " ¥ 9 > 9
16. Τοιούτων δε ὄντων, Θηραμένης εἶπεν ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ,
σ μὰ ’ , 8 a A 9
ὅτι, εἰ βούλονται αὑτὸν πέμψαι παρὰ Avaavdpov, εἰδὼς
[4 ’ 4 93 ’ I.
ἥξει Aaxedatpovious πότερον ἐξανδραποδίσασθαι τὴν πόλιν
3 / Ν a a x / 4
βουλόμενοι ἀντέχουσι περὶ τῶν τειχῶν, ἢ πίστεως ἕνεκα.
* 4 Ν 4 “a a
πεμφθεὶς δὲ διέτριβε παρὰ Avoavdpm τρεῖς μῆνας καὶ

64 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

ἢ 9 a a 3 a wv ,, 3
πλείω, ἐπιτηρῶν ὁπότε Αθηναῖοι ἔμελλον, διὰ τὸ ἐπίλε-
, N a Ψ a ’
λοίπεναι τὸν σῖτον ἅπαντα, ὃ τι τις λέγοι ὁμολογήσειν.
17 2 4 δὲ φ A f 4 9 ’ λ 9 3 x
. ἐπεὶ OF IKE τῷ τετάρτῳ μηνὶ, ἀπηγγεῖλεν ἐν EXKAN-
Seog 2 N , , N , 9 , °
σίᾳ ὅτι αὐτὸν Avaardpos τέως μεν κατέχοι, εἶτα κελεύοι ἐς
; , ἢ δ 9 ΄ e 3 A ᾽
Δακεδαίμονα ἰέναι" ov yap εἶναι κύριος ὧν ἐρωτῷτο ὑπ
3 A 3 Ν Ν 3 U Ν a e »
αὐτοῦ, ἀλλα τοὺς Edopous. peta ταῦτα npebn πρεσ-
Nae) , 3 ͵ , 3
Beurns ες Λακεδαίμονα αὐτοκράτωρ δέκατος αὐτός.
4 Ν a 3 ͵ ¥ ? a“
18. Λύσανδρος δε τοῖς Εφόροις ἔπεμψεν ἀγγελοῦντα
> 4 3 Λ ᾽ ω
per ἄλλων Μακεδαιμονίων Δριστοτέλην, φυγώδα AOnvaiov
¥ Ce 3 , 4 3 ’ ὴ
ὄντα, ὅτι ἀποκρίναιτο Θηραμένει ἐκείνους κυρίους εἶναι
4 72 Α 4 ᾽ Ν XN ς ΝΨ.
εἰρήνης καὶ πολέμους 19. Θηραμένης δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι
᾽ > Ss 4 3 , 3 ᾽ > A ,
πρέσβεις, eves ἦσαν ἐν Σελλασίᾳ, ἐρωτώμενοι ἐπὶ τένι
, ‘4 4 a > , \ 9 9 ν
λογῳ ἥκοιεν, εἶπον ὅτο αὐτοκράτορες περὶ εἰρήνης. μετὰ
δι em “ > 3 > φ 3
ταῦτα ot Εφοροι καλεῖν ἐκέλευον. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἧκον, ἐκκλη-
/ 3 , ? e# > » ’ Ν a ,
σίαν ἐποίησαν, ἐν ἢ ἀντέλεγον KopivOtor καὶ Θηβαῖοι pa-
ἐν Ν . wy a ς / ‘ ,
Mora, πολλοι δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι TOV ᾿Ελλήνων, μὴ σπένδεσθαι
3 4 3 3 “ , Ν 3 ΧΓ
Αθηναίοις, adr ἐξαιρεῖν. 20. ΔΜακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ οὐκ ἔφα-
, ’ 3 “ c 3 Ν 4
σαν πόλιν ᾿Ελληνίδα ἀνδραποδιεῖν, μεγα ἀγαθὸν εἰργα-
“ 3 a , / ’ὔ ae 7
σμένην ἐν τοῖς μεγίστοις κινδύνοις γενομένοις τῇ Ελλάδι"
9. > 9 a > » >.>? @ , Ν , δ Q
αλλ ἐποιοῦντο εἰρήνην, Ep @ Ta TE μακρὰ τείχη καὶ TOV
“ ’ “ Ὡ A Ν ’ ,
Πειραιᾶ καθελόντας, καὶ τὰς ναῦς πλὴν δωδεκα παραδὸν-
ἐν Ne ’ 4 Ν 9 NS > “ Ν
τας, καὶ τοὺς φυγάδας καθέντας, τὸν αὐτὸν ἐχθρὸν καὶ φίλον
΄ “΄ “ Ν a A ἈΝ
νομίζοντας, Λακεδαιμονίοις ἕπεσθαι καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ
A é Ν “ e
θάλατταν, ὅποι ἂν ἡγῶνται. 21. Θηραμένης δὲ καὶ οἱ
Ν 3. a. ’ ἢ ’ a 3 . 9 ,
συν αὐτῷ πρέσβεις ἐπανεφεροντο ταῦτα es tas Αθηνας.
2 ᾽ὔ 3 ‘ y ry Ν ?
εἰσιόντας 8 αὐτοὺς ὄχλος περιεχεῖτο πολὺς, φοβούμενοι
Ἂς A ef 2 Ν ¥ 3 , , . UN
μὴ ἄπρακτοι ἥκοιεν" ov γὰρ ἔτι evexwper μένειν Sea τὸ
“A A 3 ’ a a a Ν φ 4
πλῆθος τῶν ἀπολλυμένων τῷ λιμῷ. 22. Τῇ δε ὑστεραίᾳ
3 / ς , 94? @ e a
ἀπήγγελλον οἱ πρέσβεις ep οἷς οἱ Aaxedatuovioe ποιοῖντο
Ν > » ’ Ν 3.3. A 4 “ ς
τὴν εἰρήνην " προηγόρει Se αὐτῶν Θηραμένης, λέγων ὡς
Ν ,ὔ S Ν , a
χρὴ πείθεσθαι Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τὰ τείχη περιαιρεῖν.

Het. 2, u1.] The Thirty Tyrants. 65

ἀντειπόντων δέ τινων αὐτῷ, πολλῷ δὲ πλειόνων ἔυνε-
παινεσάντων, ἔδοξε δέχεσθαι τὴν εἰρήνην. 38. Μετὰ δε
a 4 ’ é 93 ᾿ ra Ἁ e
ταῦτα Avoavdpos τε κατέπλει ἐς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, καὶ οἱ
[4 “ Φ 9 3
φυγάδες κατήεσαν, καὶ τὰ τείχη κατέσκαπτον ὑπ᾽ αὐλητρί-
δων πολλῇ προθυμίᾳ, νομίζοντες ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν τῇ
“A 3
᾿Ελλάδι ἄρχειν τῆς ἐλευθερίας.
ag? 2 ¥ > @@ » . @ SN ,
TIT. Tod emcovre ἐτει ----ἐν ᾧ ἣν Ολυμπίιαᾶς, ἢ τὸ στα-
διον ἐνίκα Kpoxivas Θετταλὺς, Evdiov ἐν Σπώρτη ἐφορεύ-
οντος, Πυθοδώρου δ᾽ ἐν ᾿Αθήναις ἄρχοντος, ὃν ᾿Αθηναῖοι,
σ 9 9 ’ € 4 3 3 ᾽ ϑ 9 3 ’
OTL ἐν ολεγαρχίᾳ ῃρέθη, οὐκ ονομαξουσιν, αλλ ἀναρχίαν
Ν 3 a a > + Ν oe e ? 4 Φ
τὸν ἐνίαυτὸν καλοῦσιν" ἐγένετο δὲ αὕτη ἡ ολιγαρχία ὧδε ----
ry ἃ Ν
2. ἔδοξε τῷ δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, ob τοὺς πα-
’ ’ / 3 ἃ 4 Ν
τρίους νόμους ξυγγράψουσι, καθ οὺς πολιτεύσουσι" Kat
ἠρέθησαν οὗτοι, Πολυώρχης, Κριτίας, Μηλόβιος, ‘Im7e-
λοχος, Εὐκλείδης, ‘Iepwrv, Μνησίλοχος, Χρέμων, Θηρα-
4 9 ’ὔ A 4 Λ 9 ’
μένης, Αρεσίας, Διοκλῆς, Φαιδρίας, Χαιρέλεως, Avactios,
Πείσων, Σοφοκλῆς, ᾿Ερατοσθένης, Χαρικλῆς, ᾿Ονομακλῆς,
’ 9 4
Θέογνις, Αἰσχίνης, Θεογένης, Κλεομήδης, ᾿Ερασίστρατος,
Φείδων, Δρακοντίδης, Εὐμάθης, ᾿Αριστοτέλης, ᾿Ιππόμαχος,
Μνησιθείδης. 8. Τούτων δὴ πραχθέντων, ἀπέπλει Δύσαν-
Spos πρὸς Σάμον " ἾΑγις δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Δεκελείας ἀπαγαγὼν τὸ
πεζὸν στράτευμα, διέλυσε κατὰ πόλεις ἑκάστους. .. ..
e Ν ὔ ς ’ Ν 3 “ , “
11. Οἱ Se τριάκοντα ῃρέθησαν μὲν ewes τάχιστα τὰ
μακρὰ τείχη καὶ τὰ περὶ τὸν Πειραιᾶ καθηρέθη " αἱρεθέν-
. 97) 4 , ’ PY) ,
tes δὲ ep ᾧτε ξυγγρώψαι νόμους, καθ᾽ οὕστινας πολιτεύ-
σοιντο, TOUTOUS μὲν ἀεὶ ἔμελλον ξυγγράφειν τε καὶ ἀπο-
δεικνύναι, βουλὴν δὲ καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀρχὰς κατέστησαν, ὡς
ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς. 13. Ἔπειτα πρῶτον μὲν, ods πάντες ἤδε-
σαν ἐν τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ ἀπὸ συκοφαντίας ζῶντας, καὶ τοῖς
a Q > a aA Wy , e a)
καλοῖς καὶ ἀγαθοῖς βαρεῖς ὄντας, συλλαμβώνοντες ὑπήγον

a 4
θανώτου" καὶ ἥ τε βουλὴ ἡδέως αὐτῶν κατεψηφίζξετο, οἱ τα
᾿ς

66 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

A cd 4 € a \ ey a Fas
ἄλλοι, ὅσοι ξυνήηδεσαν εαυτοῖς μὴ ὄντες τοιοῦτοι, οὐδὲν
a 3 A Ν ΨΝ ?
ἤχθοντος 18. ‘Emre δὲ ἤρξαντο βουλεύεσθαι ὅπως ἂν
5... } > a a , a ῦΨ , 3 ΄
ἐξείη αὐτοῖς τῇ πόλει χρῆσθαι ὅπως βούλοιντο, ἐκ τούτου
A \ ’ 3 ’ 9 s .
πρῶτον μεν, πέμψαντες ἐς Aaxedaipova Αισχίνην τὲ καὶ
> Λ wv ’ \

Ἀριστοτέλην, ἔπεισαν Λύσανδρον φρουροὺς σφίσι Eup-
es 3 a a δ N Ν 3 . ,
πρᾶξαι ελθεῖν, ἕως δη, Tous πονηροὺυς ἐκποδὼν ποιησάμε-

4 . 4
vol, καταστήσαιντο THY πολιτείαν" θρέψειν δὲ αὐτοὶ ὑπι-
A e “ N 4 . ’
σχνοῦντο. ὁ δὲ πεισθεὶς, τούς τε φρουροὺς καὶ Καλλίβιον
Ν 4 3 a “
ἁρμοστην ξυνέπραξεν αὑτοῖς πεμφθῆναι.
e > 9 “ “ A Υ͂. “ a ͵
14. Οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ τὴν φρουρὰν ἔλαβον, τὸν μὲν Καλλίβιον
> ,ὔ , 4 / 3 4 ἃ /
. εθεράπενον πάσῃ θεραπείᾳ, ws πάντα ἐπαινοίη ἃ πράτ-
a“ \ ζω rd , 3 »
τοίεν" τῶν δὲ φρουρῶν τούτον ξυμπέμποντος αὐτοῖς obs
3 ΄ ͵ > ‘ ΄ ‘
ἐβούλοντο, ξυνελάμβανον οὐκέτι τους πονηροὺς TE Kat
9, 7 9e/ 3 3», Κ ἃ > ἡ σ΄“ Ν
ολίγον ἀξιους, adr ἤδη ous ἐνομιζον ἥκιστα μὲν παρω-
4 3 4 3 ’᾽ ’ 3 “-
θουμένους ἀνέχεσθαι, ἀντύπραττειν δὲ τι ἐπιχειροῦντας
,ὔ A Ν 4 , a Ν
πλείστους ἂν τοὺς ξυνεθέλοντας λαμβάνειν. 15. Τῷ μεν
3 ’ ’ὔ a ’ ¢ 4
οὖν πρώτῳ χρόνῳ ὁ Κριτίας τῷ Θηραμένει ὁμογνώμων τε
Ἴ 9 > S\ ea ὯΝ Ν ᾿ », φυν SN
καὶ φίλος ἦν > ἐπεὶ δὲ αὐτὸς μὲν πβοπετὴῆς ἦν ἐπὶ τὸ πολ-
Α 3 ͵ὔ ῷ a εν e a A ᾽ὔ e “
λους ἀποκτείνειν, ἅτε Kat φυγὼν ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, ὁ δε Onpa-
, i) o ᾽ >A » a ¥
μένης ἀντέκοπτε, λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰκὸς εἰὴη θανατοῦν, εἰ τις
3 a eon a 4 ν᾽ ἃ Α ? Ν -
ἐτιμᾶτο ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, τοὺς δὲ καλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς μηδὲν
AQ 4 ͵ὔ 9 “ “ 3 “ 4 “ Ν Ἧ Ἁ
κακὸν εἰργάζετο" Ene καὶ eyo, epn, καὶ συ πολλὰ δὴ
~ 9 48 Pv a Λ΄ . Κ . 9 ’
τοῦ ἀρέσκειν ἕνεκα τῇ πόλει καὶ εἰπομεν καὶ ἐπράξαμεν.
Ν ‘ 9 ( > “a a 4 3 ’
16. Ὃ δὲ (ἔτι γὰρ οἰκείως ἐχρῆτο τῷ Θηραμενει) avte-
Ψ >» 9 ἢ a a , \
λεγεν, OTL οὐκ ἐγχωροίη τοῖς πλεονεκτεῖν βουλομένοις, μὴ
9 9 “ a Ν e 4 4 9
οὐκ extrodwy ποιεῖσθαι τους ἱκανωτάτους διακωλύειν " Es
Ν [4 td f ? Ν 3 @ φ 4 ” σ
δε, OTL τριακοντά ἐσμεν καὶ οὐχ εἰς, ἧττον τι οίει, ὧσ-
4 ’ “ 93 a 9 “
περ τυραννίδος, ταύτης τῆς ἀρχῆς χρῆναι επιμελείσθαι,
>? >
εὐηθης εἰ.
> δ Ν 3 4 a 9
17. Ἔπει δε, ἀποθνησκόντων πολλῶν καὶ ἀδίκως,
“ a g , , a
πολλοὶ δῆλοι ἦσαν ξυνιστάμενοί te καὶ Oavpalovtes τί

Het. 2, 1π}]Ώ Last of Three Thousand. 67

» ° , Λ wy, ς ᾽ oe 9 ᾽
ἔσοίτο ἢ πολιτεία, πᾶνε eheyey 7) Θηραμένης, OTL, εἰ μὴ
τις κοινωνοὺς ἱκανοὺς λήψοιτο τῶν πραγμάτων, ἀδύνατον
ἔσοιτο τὴν ὀλιγαρχίαν διαμένειν. 15. ἐκ τούτου μέντοι
Κριτίας καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι τριάκοντα, ἤδη φοβούμενοι, καὶ οὐχ
oS a ’ὔ x a, AQ 3 "ἙΝ φ a
ἥκιστα tov Θηραμένην, μη συρρυείησαν προς αντον ot πολί-
/ 4 ‘N , 4 a
ται, καταλέγουσι τρισχιλίους Tous μεθέξοντας δὴ τῶν
‘4 4 4 φ lA 4 “ δε
πραγμάτων. 19. ὁ δ᾽ αὖ Θηραμένης καὶ πρὸς ταῦτα
¥. 4 , e a A “a a
ἔλεγεν, ὅτι ἄτοπον δοκοίη ἑαυτῷ εἶναι, TO πρῶτον μὲν
Ν , ζω δὰ ἃ ,
βουλομένους tous βελτίστους τῶν πολιτῶν κοινωνους ποιή»
’ ad ᾽ν 3 “ a 3 ’
σασθαι τρισχιλίους, ὥσπερ τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦτον ἔχοντω
> » . ΝΣ Ν 4 , νΝῈ»ν» 4
τινα ἀνάγκην κάλους καὶ ἀγαθους εἶναι, καὶ out ἕξω τούτων
’ vy? 9 x 4 ‘ @? ” 4
σπουδαίους, OUT ἐντὸς τούτων πονήρους οἱὸν TE EN γενέ-
δ΄ " cau # ’ὔ ec Aa a 3 ,
σθαι" “Eze:ta δ᾽, ἔφη, ὁρῶ ἔγωγε δύο ὑμᾶς Ta ἐναντιώτατα
, ] s 3 Ν ,. oh ζω 3 4
πράττοντας, βιαίαν τε THY ἀρχὴν καὶ ἥττονα τῶν ἀρχομε-
, € . a > ΜΝ. e 9
νων κατασκευαζομένους. 20. ‘O μὲν ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεγεν. οἱ ὃ
3 “ ’ a Ν 2 3 A 3 a a
ἐξέτασιν ποιήσαντες τῶν μεν τρισχιλίων ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ, τῶν
ΝΟΥ, ’ Υ. 3 ~ Ww 4
de ἔξω Tov καταλόγου ἄλλων ἀλλαχοῦ, ἔπειτα κελεύσαντες
, A . ὦ 3 e¢ 2 & b s ᾽ .
ἐπὶ TA ὅπλα EV @ εκείνοι απεληλύθεσαν, πέμψαντες TOUS
ω a a a δ 6 ’ e ‘
Gpoupovs Kal τῶν πολιτῶν τοὺς ὁμογνώμονας αὑτοῖς, TA
σ ’ Ν a ’ Λ . 3
ὄπλα πάντων, πλὴν τῶν τρισχιλίων, παρείλοντο" Kal ἀνα"
/ a 3 - ? ’ 4 9 a a
κομίσαντες ταῦτα ες THY ἀκρόπολιν, ξυνεθηκαν εν τῷ vag.
’ Ν vA ς Ig% ¥ a ϑ a
21. Τούτων δὲ γενομένων, ws ἐξὸν ἤδη ποιεῖν αὐτοῖς
΄ / ‘ . νΧ φ > ?

ὃ Tt βούλοιντο, πολλους μεν ἔχθρας EVEKA ATTEKTELVOY, ππολ-
Y \ ’ ¥ > A d ¥ ‘ “
λοὺς δὲ χρημάτων. ἐδοξε δ᾽ αὐτοῖς, ὅπως ἔχοιεν καὶ τοῖς
ζω 7 , Q “ / a 4
φρουροῖς χρήματα διδοναι, καὶ τῶν μετοίκων ἕνα ἕκαστον

ἴω Ν 3 Ἁ Ν 3 A “ ‘ ’ 3 a
λαβεῖν καὶ αὐτοὺς μὲν ἀποκτεῖναι, τὰ δὲ χρήματα αὑτῶν
ϑ 4 a - 4 x ,
αποσημήνασθαι. 22. ’Exedevov δὲ καὶ tov Θηραμένην

A“ od J > 9 ‘ 3 ? a
λαβεῖν ὅντινα βούλοιτο. ὁ ὃ ἀπεκρίνατο" ᾿Αλλ, ov δοκεῖ

ν) ῷ , , 9 . 3 ’
μοι, ἔφη, καλὸν εἶναι, φάσκοντας βελτίστους εἶναι, adinw-

a a 3 ω . Ν 3.ϑΝ ©

τερα τῶν συκοφαντῶν ποιεῖν. ἐκεῖνοι μὲν yap, παρ ὧν
, A ¥ ¢ oon Ν ’ a

χρήματα λαμβάνοιεν, Env εἰων" ἡμεῖς δὲ αποκτενοῦμεν

68 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

‘ 9 a [4 , , “" »
μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντας, wa χρήματα λαμβάνωμεν ; πῶς ov
a aA \ 3 4 > 4 2 3 3 ἈΝ
ταῦτα τῷ παντὶ ἐκείνων ἀδικώτερα ; 23. Οἱ ὃ, ἐμποδων

, > SN 9 a σι ad 4 ?
νομίζοντες αὑτον εἶναι τῷ ποιεῖν oT’ βούλοιντο, ἐπιβου-
4 b “ x 3 4 “ \ \ ΝΥ “
λευουσιν AUTO, καὶ ἰδίᾳ προς τους βουλευτὰς αλλος 7 pos
¥” , e / Ν , x
ἄλλον διεβαλλον, ὡς λυμαινόμενον THY πολιτείαν. καὶ

f 4 Ia ἡ 3 ,
παραγγείλαντες νεανίσκοις, ot ἐδόκουν αὐτοῖς θρασύτατοι
9 ’ὔ e os Λ ν ’ ’
εἶναι, ξιφίδια ὕπο μάλης ἔχοντας παραγενέσθαι, ξυνελεξαν
Ν , 3 \ Ν e o A 3 aN €
τὴν βουλήν. 24. ἐπεὶ δε ὁ Θηραμένης παρῆν, αναστὰς ὁ
’ 4 φ
Κριτίας ἔλεξεν ὧδε"
Φ ¥” \ > ’ ea / ’
Ὦ avdpes βουλευταὶ, εἰ μὲν τις ὑμῶν νομίξει πλέονας
a a 3 / 3 / ad σ -
τοῦ καιροῦ ἀποθνήσκειν, ἐννοησάτω ὅτι, ὅπου πολιτεῖαι
’ a a 4 4
μεθιστανται, πανταχοῦ ταῦτα γίγνεται " πλείστους δ᾽
> “ ἢ 3 ea) 9 ͵ A ,
QVAYKN πολεμιοὺυς εἶναι τοῖς ES ολιγαρχίαν μεθιστᾶσι, διά
“ , a ς Ν ld
τε τὸ πολυανθρωποτατην τῶν ᾿Ελληνίδων τὴν πόλιν εἶναι,
t διὰ τὸ πλεῖ νον ἐν ἐλευθερίᾳ τὸν δῆμο 4
καὶ va τὸ πλείστον χρόνον ἐν ἐλευθερίᾳ τὸν δῆμον TET PU-
e rs ΙΝ , “ a a ςΦ κ᾿ A
φθαι. 25. ἡμεῖς Se, γνόντες μὲν τοῖς οἱοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ
cea Ἁ ’ 4 4 4 ‘ of
ὑμῖν χαλεπὴν πολιτείαν εἶναι δημοκρατίαν, γνόντες δὲ ὅτι
᾽ὔ aA , e a e Ν δ
Aaxedaipoviots τοῖς περισώσασιν ἡμᾶς ὁ μὲν δῆμος οὑποτ᾽
A Λ ’ e Ν ’ INN ἣν a
av φίλος γένοιτο, ot de βελτιστοι ἀεὶ ἂν πιστοι διατελοῖεν,
Ν a Ν a ! 4 ᾽ Ν
δια ταῦτα συν τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων γνωμῃ τήνδε τὴν πολι-
4 4 . 3? 9 7 3 ’
τείαν καθίσταμεν. 26. καὶ cay Twa αἰσθανωμεθα ἐναντίον
a 9 ’ id , 9 Ν ’ \
τῇ ὀλιγαρχίᾳ, ὅσον δυνώμεθα ἐκποδὼν ποιούμεθα" modu
a ͵ 4 ¥ , a a
δὲ μάλιστα ἡμῖν δοκεῖ δίκαιον εἶναι, εἰ τις ἡμῶν αὐτῶν
a ,ὔ 2 δ
λυμαίνεται ταύτη τῇ καταστάσει, δίκην αὑτὸν διδόναι.
a 3 , ͵ . φ ΄
27. Νῦν οὖν αἰσθανόμεθα Θηραμένην τουτονὶ, οἷς δύναται,
) 4 e A Ν ς᾽» ς Ν a 3 a “A
ὠπολλύντα ἡμᾶς τε Kat ὑμᾶς. ὡς δε ταῦτα ἀληθῆ, ἢν
a ς » ¥ ᾽ὔ 2a? A q
κατανοῆτε, εὑρήσετε οὔτε ψέγοντα οὐδένα μᾶλλον Onpape-
x N , Ν ᾽ , ef Ν
νους τουτουὶ τὰ παροντα, οὔτε ἐναντιούμενον, ὁταν τίνα
2 “ , 4 a“ A 9 ᾿
ἐκποδὼν βουλωμεθὼ ποιήσασθαι τῶν δημαγωγῶν. εἰ μεν
2 a a / μ ‘ 9 δ
τοίνυν ἐξ ἀρχῆς ταῦτα ἐγίγνωσκε, πολεμίος μὲν ἦν, OV
a ͵ 4 ἡ / ? , A ‘
μέντοι πονηρὸς γ᾽ ἂν δικαίως ἐνομίζετο" 28. νῦν δε, ---

Hew.2,m.] Critias attacks Theramenes. 69

7, A ‘ »¥ aA- “ 4 ’ Ν
αὑτὸς μὲν ἄρξας τῆς πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους πίστεως καὶ
7 ,Ν N A A , 7 , Y
φιλίας, αὑτὸς δε τῆς τοῦ δήμου καταλύσεως, μάλιστα Se
> ‘4 e a ΄εὰ ’ e 4 4 e (
ἐξορμησας ἡμᾶς τοῖς πρωτοις ὑπαγομένοις εἰς ἡμᾶς δίκην
9 ’ A 3 N x, @ x ¢ “A A >
ἐπιτιθέναι, ---- νῦν, ἐπεὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς καὶ ἡμεῖς φανερῶς ἐχθροὶ
a , > 3 > A “ , > *
τῷ δήμῳ γεγενήμεθα, οὐκέτ᾽ αὐτῷ τὰ γιγνόμενα ἀρέσκει,
og 2." Ν 9 ) a 3 a a e « ‘ ,
ὅπως AUTOS μὲν αὖ ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ καταστῇ, ἡμεῖς Se δίκην
A a Γ 3 ὔ φ 3 a
δῶμεν TOV πεπραγμένων. 29. worTe ov povoy ὡς ἐχθρῷ
9 σε a 9 ‘ 4 φ ὃ ’ φ ~ Ἁ φ a
αὐτῷ προσήκει, ἀλλὰ καὶ WS προδοτῃ ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἡμῶν,
“ / ’ 4 Ν
διδόναι τὴν δίκην. καίτοι τοσούτῳ μὲν δεινότερον προδο-
, ’ od , 4 “ > ΩΝ
σία πολέμου, ὅσῳ χαλεπώτερον φυλάξασθαι τὸ αφανὲς
a A ? δ᾽ 4 4 λέ 4 ¥
τοῦ φανεροῦ" τοσούτῳ ὃ ἔχθιον, ὅσῳ πολέμιοι μεν ἄνθρω-
’ 9 ἐν Ν “ ἃ > ἃ
ποι καὶ σπένδονται αὖθις, καὶ πιστοὶ γίγνονται" ὃν δ᾽ ἂν
’ : , ’ ΝΜ) 3 ’ὕ ,
προδιδοντα λαμβανωσι, τούτῳ οὗτε ἐσπείσατο πώποτε
2 ¥ 3 3 / A [7 Ν INA
οὐδεὶς, OUT ἐπίστευσε TOU λοιποῦ. 80. Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε
oS 3 A A φ A b ) AY a ’ > Ἁ
OTL οὐ καινᾶ ταῦτα OUTOS ποιεῖ, ἀλλα φύσει προδότης ἐστιν,
2 , ¢ oa Q ᾽ὔ ’ @ A 2
ἀναμνήσω ὑμᾶς τὰ τούτῳ πεπραγμένα. οὗτος yap, εξ
3 ‘ ’ "ἝΝ a 7 “ “ ,
αρχῆς μὲν τιμώμενος ὕπο Tov δῆμον KaTa τὸν πατέρα
qd , 2.» » ,
Ayvwva, προπετέστατος ἐγένετο τὴν δημοκρατίαν μετα-
A 3 Ν ’ Ἁ 3 [4 3 3 ’
στῆσαι εἰς τοὺς τετρακοσίους, καὶ ἐπρώτευεν ἐν εκείνοις.
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἥσθετο ἀντίπαλό 7 Or f Ἵ
ῃσθετο αντίπαλοὸν Te τῇ ολιγαρχίᾳ ξυνιστάμενον,
a ee δ Aas >>> +» > oe
πρῶτος αὖ ἡγέμων τῷ δήμῳ eT ἐκείνους ἐγένετο. BA. ὅθεν
’ “ , 3 »“ \ ‘ ,
δηποῦυ καὶ κόθορνος ἐπικαλεῖται. καὶ γὰρ ὁ κόθορνος ἀρ-
, ‘ a \ 3 , a 9 ’ 9% 9
μόττειν μεν τοῖς ποσὶν ἀμφοτέροις δοκεῖ, ἀποβλέπει δ᾽ ἐπ᾿
bd 7 a Ν 9 , ¥ Ν x” A 3
ἀμφότερον. δεῖ δε, ὦ Θηρώμενες, ἄνδρα τὸν ἄξιον Env οὐ
v4 ‘ Ν 4 3 ’ Ν , A
προάγειν μεν Sewov eivat εἰς πράγματα Tous Evvovtas, ἢν
3 ns , 9 > 3
δέ τε ἀντικόπτῃ, εὐθυς μεταβαλλεσθαι" adr ὥσπερ ἐν νηὶ
a ef A μ 9 a 9 at ΙΝ a
διαπονεῖσθαι, ἕως ἂν εἰς οὖρον καταστῶσιν" εἰ δὲ μὴ, πῶς
A 2,7 , ¥ a 9 . ’ 3 , IAN
av ἀφίκοιντο ποτε evOa δεῖ, εἰ, ἐπειδὰν τι ἀντικόψη, evOus
. 3 / 4 \ > A ‘ ὔ ry "
ἐς ταναντία πλεοιεν ; 82. Καὶ εἰσι μὲν δήπου πᾶσαι μετα-
a ,ὔ Ἁ Ν Ν “ 3 /
Borat πολιτειῶν θανατηφόροι" ov δε, Sta τὸ εὐμετάβολος
9 , ‘ / 4 » 9 / en rs
εἶναι, πλείστοις μεν μεταίτιος εἰ εξ ὀλιγαρχίας ὑπὸ τοῦ

70 #$Fall and Restoration of Athens. [ Xen.

, 3 4 , 2 9 ’ e oN δε
δημον ἀπολωλέναι, πλείστοις δ᾽ ἐκ δημοκρατίας ὕπο τῶν
, Φ 4 3 ἃ ν . 3 7 e wn
βελτιόνων. Οὔὕτος S€ τοί ἐστιν, ὃς, ταχθεὶς ἀνελέσθαι ὑπο
ζω ω “ 4 > , 3 A
τῶν στρατηγῶν Tous καταδύντας Αθηναίων ἐν τῇ περὶ
͵ , >A > 9 , a a
AecoBoy ναυμαχίᾳ, αὑτὸς οὐκ ἀνελόμενος, ὅμως τῶν στρατη-
A A 3 ΄ ϑ - Θ᾽ 2 A
γῶν κατηγορῶν απέκτεινεν αὑτους, Wa αὑτὸς περισωθείη.
ad “ ’ 3 a N a ἈΝ
33. ootls γε μὴν φανερὸς ἔστι τοῦ μὲν πλεονεκτεῖν ἀεὶ
3 7 “A Ν A Q a Λ Ν 4
ἐπιμελούμενος, τοῦ δε καλοῦ καὶ τῶν φίλων μηδὲν ἐντρε-
/ A 4 , / a
πόμενος, πῶς τούτου χρή ποτε φείσασθαι ; πῶς δ᾽ ov
ΧΩ θ 9 ὃ ὔ 3 a Ν λὰ ς “ x e a
φυλαξασθαι, εἰδότας avrov tas μεταβολᾶς, ws μη Kat ἡμᾶς
3" a a e a 9 a ,
tavTo δυνασθῇ ποιῆσαι; ἡμεῖς οὖν τοῦτον ὑπάγομεν καὶ
« 3 ΄ N e ? e a Ν e nw
ws ἐπιβουλεύοντα, καὶ ws προδιδόντα ἡμᾶς τε καὶ ὑμᾶς.
e > > » a Ἀ in? 2 ͵ ’ὔὃ
84. ᾿ς 5 εἰκότα ποιοῦμεν, καὶ Tad ἐννοήσατες. καλλέστη
‘ \ , a ͵ 9 e ’ 9
μὲν γὰρ δηπον δοκεῖ πολιτεία εἶναι ἡ Λακεδαιμονίων " εἰ
) 9 3 ’ 3 ’ ’ a! 3 ’ 3 Ν a ΄
δ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνῃ ἐπιχειρήσειέ τις τῶν Εφόρων, ἀντὶ τοῦ τοῖς
’ , , Ν 9 Ν Q 3 A
πλείοσι πείθεσθαι, ψέγειν τε THY ἀρχὴν Kat ἐναντιοῦσθαι
a ’ 3 A ” ΣΙΝ xe I wa a
τοῖς πραττομένοις, οὐκ ἂν οἴεσθε αὐτὸν καὶ UT’ αὐτῶν τῶν
ϑ , . e 8 a ¥ e 4 4 a ΄
Ἐφορων καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς ἄλλης ἁπάσης πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης
/ 4 A x. ¢ “ 9 aN a ? 7
τιμωρίας ἀξιωθῆναι ; Kat ὑμεῖς οὖν, ἐἂν σωφρονῆτε, ov τού-
4 3 φ a 3 ἴω ͵ e @ “ .
Tov aAX ὑμῶν αὐτῶν φείσεσθε" ws οὗτος, σωθείῖς μεν,
\ 4 , a ’ὔ a 3 ΄ 4
πολλοὺς ἂν μέγα Ppovery ποιήσειε των EVAVTLA γιγνωσκον-
Φ᾽ κ᾿ bd , Ν ’ὕ δ a 3 A Λ Ν
τῶν ὑμῖν" ἀπολόμενος δε, πάντων καὶ τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει Kas
a Χ e 4 A \ /
τῶν ἔξω ὑποτέμοι ἂν τὰς ἐλπίδας,
Ν a 9 9 “ 3 ¢ Ν 9
35. ‘O μὲν ταῦτ εὐπὼν ἐκαθέζετο" Θηραμένης δε ava-
\ Μ΄ Ν a Ν ’ 9 ἃ
στὰς ἐλεξεν' AXA πρῶτον μεν μνησθήσομαι. ὦ ἄνδρες, 0
a >> a ® N , ‘ δ
τελευταῖον KAT ἐμοῦ εἶπε. φησὶ yap με TOUS στρατηγους
9 a “A 9 ων Ν 3 > 3 ’
ἀποκτεῖναι κατηγοροῦντα. ἐγὼ δὲ οὐκ ἦρχον KaT ἐκείνων
’ > 2 A ” ὔ e,? ε a
λόγου, αλλ ἐκεῖνοι ἔφασαν, προσταχθὲν μοι ὑφ ἑαυτῶν,
3 9 ’ “ Aa 9 a Ν /
οὐκ ἀνελέσθαι τους δυστυχοῦντας ev τῇ περὶ AcoBov vav-
/ >, Ν ‘ > 7 ς N Ν σι Ia’
payia. ἐγὼ δε ἀπολογούμενος, ws Sta τὸν χειμῶνα οὐδε
a \ Ψ 3 an \ oo» . 9 ¥
πλεῖν, μὴ OTL ἀναιρεῖσθαι τοὺς ἄνδρας, δυνατὸν ἦν, edoka
a , 2 4 4 3 “ . e a ad 3 /
τῇ πόλει εἰκότα λέγειν, ἐκείνοι δὲ ἑαυτῶν κατηγορεῖν εφαί-

ει, 2,11.) Defence of Theramenes. 11

, δ φ, 2 a . νκν
vovro* φάσκοντες yap οἷόν τε εἶναι σῶσαι Tous ἄνδρας,
’ 9 Ν 3 a 3 4 Mw” P
προέμενοι auTovs ἀπολέσθαι, ἀποπλέοντες ῴχοντο. 86. ov
,ὕ ’ Ν ΄ Ψ “
μέντοι θαυμαζω ye to Κριτίαν παρανενομηκεναν" ὅτε γὰρ
a = > Ν > 29 δ aS 2 , δ
ταῦτα ἦν, οὐ παρὼν ἐτύγχανεν, ἀλλ, ἐν Θετταλίᾳ μετὰ
4 4 4 \ 4
Προμηθέως δημοκρατίαν κατεσκεύαζε, καὶ τοὺς πενέστας
eo 2 8 Ν ’ φ Ν 4 φ
ὥπλιζεν ἐπὶ τοὺς δεσπότας. 87. wy μεν οὖν οὗτος
>I ay \ 3 7) , , , e
ἐκεῖ ἔπραττε, μηδὲν ἐνθάδε γένοιτο" Tude γε μέντοι ὁμο-
΄ 3 a ’ bd ξ [ “ a b ] a 4
Aoy@ ἐγὼ τούτῳ, εἰ τὶς ὑμᾶς μὲν τῆς ἀρχῆς βούλεται
a Ν 3 , ς oa ? ‘ a ,
παῦσαι, tous δ᾽ ἐπιβουλεύοντας ὑμῖν toxyupous Trove, δὲ-
a , 7 N , 4 σ
καιον εἶναι τῆς μεγίστης αὑτὸν τιμωρίας τυγχάνειν. ὅστις
4 e a , 3 AY A δ oa Λ
μέντοι ὁ ταῦτα πράττων ἐστὶν, οἶμαι ἂν ὑμᾶς κάλλιστα
é ? , N ἃ A 0 4
κρίνειν, Ta τε πεπραγμένα καὶ ἃ νὺν πράττει ἕκαστος
ς ΄“-)ο 3 , 9 ry , “ nA 6 A
ἡμῶν εἰ Katavonoete. 88. Ovxovy μέχρι μεν TOU υμᾶς τε
A 3 Ν tA Q > “ ϑ a “
καταστῆναι es τὴν βουλείαν, καὶ ἀρχὰς ἀποδειχθῆναι; καὶ
Ν ς 4 , e , 7 > N
Tous ὁμολογουμένως συκοφαντας ὑπάγεσθαι, πάντες ταυτὰ
2 , > A c @ ¥ ¥ ?
eyeyvwoxouev*> ἐπεὶ δὲ ye οὗτοι ἤρξαντο ἄνδρας καλούς
᾽ ν 7 3 , > \ 4 , ᾽
τε καάγαθους ξυλλαμβάνειν, ἐκ τούτου καγὼ ἠρξώμην τα»
’ ’ ’᾽ 353 A od bd ?
vavTla τούτοις γιγνώσκειν. 89. δεῖν yap ὅτι, ἀποθνή-
x 4 ra) t 3 “ a Ψ
σκοντος μὲν Λέοντος τοῦ Σαλαμινίου, ἀνδρὸς καὶ ὄντος
Ν ζω « A 9 9 ΠῚ Far A eo
καὶ δοκοῦντος ἱκανοῦ εἶναι, ἀδικοῦντος ὃ οὐδὲ ἕν, οἱ ὅμοιοι
4 4 N 3 , a a
τούτῳ φοβήσοιντο, φοβούμενοι Se ἐναντίοι tHd€ τῇ πο-
’ ΝΜ > » \ @ ,
λιτείᾳ ἔσοιντο. ἐγίγνωσκον δὲ ὅτι, ξυλλαμβανομένου
Ν yf A N , ὶ ’ Ν 3 δὲ ’᾽
txnpatouv του Νικίου, καὶ πλουσίου καὶ οὐδεν πώποτε
, ¥ 3 ra) 4 Aa s , e ’
δημοτικὸν οὔτε αὑτοῦ οὔτε τοῦ πατρὺς πράξαντος, οἱ τούτῳ
ce ὃ A Ca , 3 bY “ Ν
ὁμοιοῖ δυσμενείς υμιν yevnoowTo, 40. ἀλλὰ μην, καὶ
9 n ¢,? ὁ 2 4 ἃ 3 A ’ id
Ἀντιφῶντος ὑφ ὑμῶν ἀπολλυμένου, ὃς ἐν TO πολέμῳ δύο
᾽ὔ 4 ’ , ’ oa \ e
τριήρεις εὖ MEOVTAS παρείχετο, ἠπιστάμην OTL καὶ οἱ
’ὔ a 4 ’ ’ ς ’ ς κα
πρόθυμοι τῇ πόλει γεγενημένον πάντες ὑπόπτως ὑμῖν
Υ͂ 9 - Ν ν Ὁ a / Ψ ,
ἔξοιεν. ἀντεῖπον δὲ καὶ STE τῶν μετοίκων ἕνα ἕκαστον
a ¥ A x Ν 4 4 7 3
λαβεῖν ἐφασαν χρῆναι" εὐδηλον yap ἣν OTL, τούτων ὥπο-
7 Ν ς , ad 7 a “
λομένων, καὶ οἱ μέτοικοι ἅπαντες πολέμιοι τῇ πολίτείᾳ

72 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

Υ 9 A νι VN @W of a ’
ἔσοιντο. 44. ἀντεῖπον δε καὶ ὅτε τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ πλήθους πα-
ry > 7 A > A Ἀ , a Iar
ρηροῦντο; ov νομέξων χρῆναι ἀσθενῆ τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖν" οὐδὲ
‘ δ ἢ , ΄ ᾿
γὰρ τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἑώρων τούτου ἕνεκα βουλομένους
a ¢ OA d 3 ,ὔ / Ν 4
περισῶσαι ἡμᾶς, ὅπως, OALYOL γενόμενοι, μηδὲν δυναίμεθα
> Ἁ 3 ων IgA Ν 3 a 4 ’ 2 %a7
αὐτοὺς ὠφελεῖν" ἐξῆν yap αὐτοῖς, εἰ τούτον y ἐδέοντο,
\ A Peery et ¥ , ee ,
καὶ μηδένα λιπεῖν, ολύγον ETL χρόνον τῷ λιμῷ πιέσαντας.
9 “ Ν nw 4 é 3
42. οὐδὲ γε τὸ φρουρους μισθοῦσθαι ξυνήρεσκέ μοι, ἐξὸν
> A A 4 , ad 7
αὐτῶν τῶν πολιτῶν τοσούτους προσλαμβάνειν, ἕως ῥᾳδίως
ew 3 4 a 3 ’ , 9 ?
οἱ ἄρχοντες ἐμέλλομεν τῶν ἀρχομένων κρατήσειν. ᾿Επει
x Ν cP? 3 a , a 3 a a
γε μην ToAXOUS ἑώρων ἐν TH πόλει τῇ ἀρχῇ τῇδε δυσμε-
a Ἁ \ ’ὔ 4 3 9 Af
ves, πολλους δὲ φυγαδας γιγνομένους, οὐκ av ἐδόκει μοε
Μ ΄ ¥ ¥ ¥ 3 ΄
οὔτε Θρασύβουλον ovre “Avutov ovte ᾿Αλκιβιαδην φυγα-
/ ¥ Ν ¢ od N 3 , 9 Ν
δεύειν" Oey yap ὃτι οὕτω γε τὸ ἀντίπαλον ἰσχυρὸν
¥ 3 Ν 4 e 4 « ἢ Ν 4
ἔσοιτο, εἰ τῷ μὲν πληθει ἤγεμονες LKaVOL ππροσγενήσοιντο,
a ‘ e a 72 ’ Ν ,
τοῖς δὲ ἡγεῖσθαι βουλομένοις ξύμμαχοι πολλοὶ φανησοιντο.
e a 9 a 3 a a ’ 3 N
43. ‘O ταῦτα οὖν νουθετῶν ev τῷ φανερῷ, ποτερα εὐμενὴς
A , A / , 3 e 3 θ Ν Φ Κ
ἂν δικαίως, ἢ προδότης νομίζοιτο ; οὐχ οἱ ἐχθρους, ὦ Kpr-
, , Ν .“ Ia e ’, 4
Tia, κωλύοντες πολλους ποιεῖσθαι, οὐδε οἱ ξυμμαχους πλει-
, a“ φ “ / > ] “
στους διδάσκοντες κτᾶσθαι, ovTOL TOUS πολεμίους ἰσχυρους
a 9 \ x A ς Ia/ 4 3
ποιοῦσιν " ἀλλὰ πολυ μᾶλλον οἱ ἀδίκως τε χρήματα adat-
: \ Ν ϑὼχλ 3 a 9 / 2 /
poupevot, καὶ Tous οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀποκτείνοντες, οὗτοι
3 \ Ν ἃ 3 J a ιν
εἰσιν οἱ καὶ πολλοὺς τοὺς ἐναντίους ποιοῦντες, καὶ προδι-
, 3 ,ὕ Ν 3 Ν Ne Ν 3 9
δοντες οὐ μόνον τους φίλους, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἑἕαυτους, δι αἰσχρο-
/ 3 Ν . ν΄ “ e 4 a ,
κέρδειαν. 44. Εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄλλως γνωστὸν ore ἀληθῆ λέγω,
φ 3 Ug 4 4 4 \
ὧδε ἐπισκέψασθε. πότερον οἴεσθε Θρασύβουλον, καὶ
5] N ἊΨ t A? , a A
Avvutov, Kat Tous ἄλλους φυγάδας, ἃ eyw λέγω μᾶλλον ἂν
9 , v4 , A A @ 7 “ΙΝ
ἐνθαδε βούλεσθαι γίγνεσθαι, ἢ ἃ οὗτοι πραττουσιν ; εγω
Ν Ν 9 A N > ON / , ,
μὲν yap οἶμαε νῦν μὲν αὐτοὺς νομίζειν ξυμμάχων πάντα
ν,, 4 > as \ , a , a
μεστὰ εἶναι" εἰ δε TO κρατιστον τῆς πόλεως προσφίλως
cn 4 \ A ¢ «α 9 ΙΝ ἢ» ;
ἡμῖν εἶχε, χαλεπὸν ἂν ἡγεῖσθαι εἶναι καὶ τὸ ἐπιβαίνειν ποι
a ΄ ἃ 3 Φ 4 e 3 7 23 φ 32),
τῆς χωρας. 45. “4 ὃ αὖ εἶπεν, ὡς ἐγὼ εἰμι οἷος ἀεί ποτε

Herr. 3, 11 Defence of Theramenes. 73

}. 4 4 “ . “ a
μεταβάλλεσθαι, κατανοήσατε καὶ ταῦτα. τὴν μὲν yup
“A ͵ / Ἧ > A 4 e A 3
τῶν τετρακοσίων πολιτείαν καὶ αὐτὸς δηπου ὁ δῆμος ἐψη-
’ [2 φ ’ a 4
φίσατο, διδασκόμενος ws ot Δακεδαιμόνιοι πάσῃ πολιτείᾳ
a a a , ΄ ; > A ΄,
μᾶλλον ἂν ἢ δημοκρατίᾳ πιστεύσειαν. 486. επεῖ δέ γε
“2 a Ν Jas > » e ‘ 3 \ 3 Λ ιν
ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὐδὲν ἀνίεσαν, ot δὲ audi Αἀριστοτελην καὶ
’ ὔ a . 9 @
Μελάνθιον καὶ ᾿Αρίσταρχον, στρατηγοῦντες, φανεροὶ eye-
> 8 a , Ν , > a? ΄,
VOVTO ἐπὶ τῷ χώματι ἐρυμα τειχίζοντες, es ὃ ἐβούλοντο
‘ ς΄," e a “ a ec » Ν
τοὺς πολεμίους δεξώμενοι ὑφ᾽ αὑτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἐτέροις τὴν
t ’ 9 a>? ’ x Ns ,
πόλιν ποιήσασθαι, ---- εἰ ταῦτ᾽ αἰσθόμενος eyw διεκωλυσα,.
a 9 ¥ a lo! 3 An x
τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι προδότην εἶναι τῶν φίλων ; 47. ᾿Αποκαλεῖ δὲ
’ ’ e 3 ΄ 4 ’ σ
κόθορνον με, ὡς ἀμφοτέροις πειρώμενον ἁρμόττειν" ὅστις
Ν ’ Φ > 7 a 9 Ν a a 4
Se μηδετέροις ἀρέσκει, TovTOy-——@ πρὸς τῶν θεῶν “--- Ti
4 a Oo “ ον “ 9 “ A 4,
WOTE καὶ καλεσαι χρη; Gu yap 87 εν μεν Τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ
΄ ’ὔ ? 3 “ a 3 7
πώντων μισοδημότατος ενομίζον, ἐν δὲ τῇ αριστοκρατίᾳ
4 ’ 4 > NS > ΦΦ
πάντων μισοχρηστότατος γεγένησαι. 48. eyw ὃ, ὦ Κρι-
΄ > ’ὔὕ Ν > , A a ϑ ’ ? ,
τία, ἐκείνοις μὲν ἀεί ποτε πολεμῶ τοῖς οὐ πρόσθεν οἰομένοις
Ν A / 4 v \ ie a Ν ε
κάαλην ἂν δημοκρατίαν εἷναι, πρὶν καὶ οἱ δοῦλοι, καὶ οἱ
? 3 ’ὔ a A 2 ’ Ν ,
δι ἀπορίαν δραχμῆς ἂν ἀποδόμενοι τὴν πόλιν, δραχμῆς
, δ A 9 9 ν 2? , x N 2 ¥
μετέχοιεν" καὶ τοῖσδέ γ αὖ ἀεὶ ἐναντίος εἰμὶ, δὲ οὐκ οἵον-
δ 4 » , 9 , δ 3 νι ε»
Tat καλὴν ἂν ἐγγενέσθαι ολιγαρχίαν, πρὶν εἰς τὸ ὑπ
3 ͵ a Ν ’ ’ “ ,
ολέίγων τυραννείσθαι THY πόλιν καταστήσειαν. TO μέντοι
Ἃ A 4 Q Ω Ν 9 9 /
συν τοῖς δυναμένοις, καὶ μεθ ἵππων καὶ μετ ἀσπίδων
3 ΄“ “Q 7 Ν ’ 4 ¥ e rd
ὠφελεῖν δια τούτων THY πολιτείαν, πρόσθεν ἄριστον ἡγού-
9 Ν ζω 3 Λ ? 3 »
μην εἶναι, καὶ νῦν ov μεταβάλλομαι. 49. εἰ δ᾽ ἔχεις
2 a 4 / og > N Ν a a “a
εἰπεῖν, ὦ Κριτία, ὅπου ἐγὼ Evy τοῖς δημοτικοῖς ἢ τυραν-
a ‘ / 3 Ν 9 a , 3
νικοῖς Tous καλοὺς τε κώγαθους ἀποστερεῖν πολιτείας ἐπε-
4 4 aN Ἀ 3 A a wn ,
χείρησα, λέγε" ἐὰν yap ἔλεγχθῶ ἢ νῦν ταῦτα πράττων,
A , ὔ ray : N an “ ,
ἢ πρότερον πώποτε ταῦτα πεποιηκῶς, ὁμολογῶ τὰ πάντων
3 ΄ ἈΝ A / 3 4
ecyatwtata παθὼν av δικαίως ἀποθνήσκειν.
e 3 “ A 3 ’ὔ’ \ e “ Λ
50. ‘As δ᾽ εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἐπαύσατο, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ δήλη
2 » 3 a 3 ’ N e Κ ᾽’ σ 2
ἐγένετο εὐμενῶς ἐπιθορυβησασα, γνους ὁ Κριτίας ὅτι, εἰ

74 Fall and Restoration of Athens. ΓΧεν.

> a a a ὔ ον ϑ a 9 3
ἐπίτρέψει τῇ βουλῇ διαψηφίζεσθαι περὶ avrov, ἀναφευύξοετο,
΄ 3 a e , Ss
καὶ τοῦτο ov βιωτὸν ἡγησάμενος, προσελθων καὶ διαλε-
᾽ a , Ion . 3 “a 3 4. N
χθεις τι τοῖς τρίώκοντα, ἐξῆλθε, καὶ ἐπιστῆναι ἐκέλευσε TOUS
. 2) A ¥ ‘a a a , SN ”“ ’
τὰ ἐγχειρίδια ἔχοντας φανερῶς τῇ βουλῇ emt τοῖς Spuda-
, 3 Ν 4 4 ν § Ν 4
κτοις. SI. πάλιν δ᾽ εἰσελθὼν, εἶπεν " ᾿Εγὼ, ὦ βουλὴ, νομίζω
/ Ν 9 a a ia “A ea Ν Λ
προστάτου ἔργον εἶναι ovov δεῖ, ὃς ἂν ὁρῶν τοὺς φίλους
᾽ , ἊΝ) , oS 9 a ,
ἐξαπατωμένους μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ. καὶ ἐγὼ οὖν τοῦτο ποιήσω.
Ἢ ᾿ Ρ̓ e 5» , ¥ ea ᾽ ͵
καὶ yap oie οἱ ἐφεστηκότες ov φασιν ἡμῖν ἐπιτρέψειν,
> 9 »ν ¥ “ δὰ Ν 9 , ’ὔ
εἰ ἀνήσομεν ἄνδρα τὸν φανερῶς τὴν ολιγαρχίαν λυμαινο-
ΨΥ “ 3 wn“ a ’ὔ a “ 9 ~
μενον. ἔστι δε ἐν τοῖς καινοῖς νόμοις, τῶν μὲν ἐν τοῖς
’ ¥” , 3 ’ Υ A e ’
τρισχίλιοις ὄντων μηδενα ἀποθνήσκειν ἄνευ τῆς ὑμετέρας
,ὔ a 2 ¥ “A 4 , 4 Ν ,
anpou: τῶν ὃ ἐξω τοῦ καταλόγου κυρίους εἷναι τοὺς τριά-
aA 9. δ 9 ¥ 4 \ 3
κοντα θανατοῦν. ἐγώ ouv, ἐφη, Θηραμένην τουτονὶ εξα-
΄ 3 a a a oS ¢ a Ν
λείφω ἐκ τοῦ καταλόγου, ξυνδοκοὺῦν ἅπασιν ἡμῖν. καὶ
΄΄- ¥ e “ a
τοῦτον, edn, ἡμεῖς θανατούμεν.
9 4 a e 4 9 ’ὔ 44 \
52. Axovoas ταῦτα ὁ Θηραμένης ἀνεπήδησεν emt τὴν
ς ’ὔ ιν 9 Im δ 2 9 Ν € 4 \
Eotiav, καὶ εἶπεν" Ἐγὼ 5, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἱκετεύω τὰ
, ᾿ , \ 9 8 χ / 9 3 , ,
πάντων ἐννομωτατα, μὴ ἐπί Κριτίᾳ εἶναι ἐξαλείφειν μὴτα
93." , ( A A ’ . 3 3 4 4 @
ἐμε, μὴτε ὑμῶν ὃν ἂν Bovdrntat, adr, ὄνπερ νόμον οὕτοι
wv “ “~ 3 A ’ “ a“ Ν δ “
ἔγραψαν περὶ τῶν ἐν τῷ καταλόγῳ, κατὰ τοῦτον καὶ ὑμιν
,. 93 Q “ , 9 ‘ “ A . ΝΥ AY Ν.
καὶ ἐμοὶ τὴν κρίσιν εἶναι. δ. καὶ τοῦτο μεν, Epy, μα TOUS
Ν. 2 3 A oe > a 3 ’ ad e ’ > Q
Geous, οὐκ ἀγνοῶ, ὅτι ovdey μοι ἀρκέσει ὅδε ὁ Swpos* adda
᾽ « a ᾽ » oe e ᾽ , 2 8 δ
βούλομαι καὶ τοῦτο επιδείξαι, OTL οὔτοι οὐ μόνον εἰσε “περί
? , ? ΄ >. “ Ν “ Ν ? ,
avOpwrovs ἀδικωτατοι, αλλὰ Kat περὶ θεους ασεβέστατοι.
ς a ’ ¥ 9 κ᾽ δ 3 N , ’
Ὑμῶν μέντοι, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες xaror καγαθοὶ, θαυμάζω, εἰ
Ν 4 A 3 a Ἀ A , od
μὴ βοηθήσετε ὑμῖν αὑτοῖς, καὶ ταῦτα γιγνώσκοντες ὅτι
IAN . ΣΝ ¥ 2 ͵ A Ss e€ oa er
οὐδὲν TO ἐμὸν ὄνομα εὐεξαλειπτότερον ἢ TO ὑμῶν ἐεκαστου.
3 Ν 4 9 ἡ Ν e a ’᾽ a“
54. Ex δε τούτου ἐκέλευσε μεν ὁ τῶν τριάκοντα κὴἡρυξ
Α Ψ > 8 Ny ’ 2 a \ , ,
tous ἕνδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Θηραμένην. ἐκεῖνοι δὲ εἰσελθόντες
ὡ a e ; Cd 4 a a - δῇ na ;j
συν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις, ἡγουμένου αὑτῶν Σατύρου, Tov Opacv-
rn . A Noe , 4 Se ἢ
τάτου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀναιδεστάτον, εἶπε μεν ὁ Κριτίας " Παρα-

Het. 2, rv.] Thrasybulus at Phylae. 75

, ς κα » ’ “ a “
διδομεν ὑμῖν, ἔφη, Θηραμένην τοντονὶ, κατακεκριμένον κατὰ
Ν , e » Ἁ , . 9 , ed?”
τὸν νόμον" ὑμεῖς δε λαβόντες καὶ ἀπαγαγόντες, οἱ ἕνδεκα,
Lg ra “A 3 7 , ς “ a 9
ov δεῖ, Ta ἐκ τούτων πράσσετε. 85. ᾿ς δε ταῦτα εἶπεν,
2. N > Ν a a ͵ φ. ee ,
εἷλκε μὲν πὸ τοῦ βωμοῦ ὁ Σάτυρος, εἷλκον δὲ οἱ ὑπηρέται.
e ‘ ’ Ψ 98 . ν 3 a ‘
ὁ δε Θηραμένης, ὥσπερ εἰκὸς, καὶ θεοὺς ἐπεκαλεῖτο Kat
3 a A . , 4 Ἁ ον e 4
avOpwrrovs καθορᾶν ta γιγνόμενα. ἢ δὲ βονλὴη ἡσυχίαν
φ a “ ἈΝ >, A »“ ’ ’ὔ’
εἶχεν, ὁρῶσα καὶ Tous ἐπὶ τοῖς δρυφάκτοις ὁμοίους Σατύρῳ,
Q a ¥ a) ’ a fe
Kat to ἐμπροσθεν tov βουλευτηρίου πλῆρες τῶν φρου-
a Q 3 9 A a 3 » a
ρῶν, καὶ οὐκ ἀγνοοῦντες OTs ἐγχειρίδια ἔχοντες παρῆσαν.
5 6 « δ᾽ 3 ὔ Ν ¥ ὃ ὃ a a 3 a ha
- of δ' ἀπήγαγον τὸν ἄνδρα δια τῆς ἀγορᾶς, μάλα pe
Λ a A A φ » ’ ‘ a
γαλῃ τῇ φωνῇ δηλοῦντα ola ἔπασχε. Aeyerat de ἕν
Can a ; a 9 (4 93 ,
ῥῆμα καὶ τοῦτο αὐτοῦ" ὡς εἶπεν ὁ Σάτυρος, ὅτε οἰμώξοιτο
Ω ν ’ > » a ‘ a > » ¥
εἰ μη σιωπήσειεν, ἐπήρετο" “Av δε σιωπῶ, οὐκ apa, edn,
μ ’ Ν 3 ’ 3 4 > , “
οἰμώξομαι; Καὶ ἐπεὶ ye ἀποθνήσκειν ἀναγκαζόμενος τὸ
, δὴ ‘ ’ ¥ 3 ,
κωνείον ἔπιε, τὸ λειπόμενον ἔφασαν ἀποκοτταβίσαντα
3 A 3 ’ ’ ar Κ.Κ.Ἱ) a a Ss a
eumety αὐτον" Κριτίᾳ τοῦτ ἔστω τῷ karo. Kat τοῦτο
‘ ? > a oe a 3 7 3 3 Λ
μεν οὐκ ἀγνοῶ, ὅτι ταῦτα ἀποφθέγματα οὐκ ἀξιόλογα"
ϑ ΠῚ x 4 a 3 93 “ “ A a
ἐκεῖνο δὲ κρίνω τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἀγαστὸν, τὸ τοῦ θανάτου παρε-
4 4 Ν ‘A 4 4 “A 3 a
OTHKOTOS μῆτε TO φρόνιμον μήτε TO παιγνιῶδες ἀπολιπεῖν
3 A a
ἐκ τῆς ψυχῆς.
, ‘ ‘ / > 2 ε as ,
IV. Θηραμένης μὲν δη οὕτως ἀπέθανεν" οἱ δὲ τριά-
3 a ta! 3 “ A “
κοντα, ws εξὸν ἤδη αὐτοῖς τυραννεῖν ἀδεῶς, προεῖπον μὲν
a ww. A ’ Ν > , 3 ΝΥ 4 Ν
τοῖς ἐξω τοῦ καταλόγου μὴ εἰσιέναι ἐς τὸ ἄστυ, ἤγον δε
᾿ Sad / Sf. Ν ’ ? \
ἐκ TOV χωρίων, ἵνα αὐτοὶ Kat οἱ φίλοι τους τούτων ἀγροὺς
¥ , Ἃ > N A \ 3 a
ἔχοιεν. φευγοντων de es τὸν Πειραιᾶ, καὶ ἐντεῦθεν πολ-
‘N ¥ / : , Ν “ ,
Nous ἄγοντες, ἐνέπλησαν καὶ τὰ Μέγαρα καὶ tas OnBas
a 4
τῶν ὑποχωρούντων.
3 Ν 7 QM > a e
2. Ex δὲ τούτου Θρασύβουλος, ὁρμηθεὶς ex Θηβῶν ὡς
Ν Ν 4 9 4
συν ἑβδομήκοντα, Φυλην χωρίον καταλαμβάνει ἰσχυρον.
e x > 3 ~ Lad
ot δε τριάκοντα ἐβοήθουν εκ τοῦ ἄστεος σύν τε τοῖς τρισ-
’ ‘ ne A ‘ my 29 , ν.
χιοὸς καὶ συν τοῖς LATEVCL, καὶ Pad ενημερίας οὔσης.

76 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [ Xen.

3 Ν ν 9,7 InN Ν ’ ’ a 4°
ἐπεὶ Se adixovto, εὐθυς μὲν Opacvvopevot τινες τῶν νέων
7 ‘ N , \ 9 ’ ν ΩΝ 7
προσέβαλον πρὸς τὸ χωρίον, καὶ ἐποίησαν μεν οὐδεν, τραύ-
Ν ’ 3 a / Ν “A ,
ματα δὲ λαβόντες ἀπῆλθον. 8. βουλομένων δὲ τῶν Tpia-
3 / f . 4 3 Ν 3
κοντα ἀποτειχίζειν, ὅπως εκπολιορκήσειαν αὐτοὺς αποκλει-
3 ra δ 4 , a 3 ,ὔ 3 4 σι
σαντες αὑτοῖς τὰς ἐφόδους τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, ἐπιγίγνεται τῆς
NX Ν, » “ a φ : 4 e Ν ’
νυκτὸς χιὼν παμπληθὴς καὶ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ" οἱ δε νεέφομενοι
4 A 9 Ν ¥ 4 Ν a 4 ¢« oN
ἀπῆλθον εἰς TO ἄστυ, pada συχνοὺς τῶν σκευοφόρων ὑπὸ
“ 3 σε 3 ’ ’ Ν od ΝΥ
τῶν ἐκ Φυλῆς ἀποβαλόντες. 4. γιγνώσκοντες δὲ ὅτι καὶ
3 a 9 n , 2 ’ ΝΟ Μ
ἐκ τῶν ἀγρὼν λεηλατησοιεν, EL μὴ τις φυλακὴ ecotro, δια-
4 > ] Ν > “ [2 / 4 Ce.
πέμπουσιν ELS TUS ἐσχατιᾶς, ὅσον πεντεκαίδεκα στάδια ἀπὸ
Φυλὴ 4 ὺς πλὴν OAL Us, καὶ
υλῆς, τοὺς τε Aaxwyixovs πλὴν ολίγων dpoupous, Kat
nse / , , φ \ , 3
τῶν ἱππέων δύο φυλὰς. οὗτοι δὲ στρατοπεδευσάμενοι ἐν
, / 9, /
χωρίῳ λασίῳ, εφύυλαττον.
ς Ν / ΕΣ ’ὕ 9 ον 4
5. Ὃ ὃδὲε Θρασύβουλος, ἤδη συνειλεγμένων es THY Φυλην
Ν e 4 “ 3 \ / ζω
περὶ ἐπτακοσίους, λαβὼν avrous, καταβαίνει τῆς νυκτος"
’ Ν x ¢e e/ ’ KA , I > NS a
θέμενος δε τὰ οπλα Ὁσον τρία ἢ τέτταρα στώδια ἀπὸ τῶν
a e ,ὔ > 3 Nas Ν ς J > ἡ :
φρουρῶν, ἡσυχίαν εἶχεν. 6. ἐπεὶ Se πρὸς ἡμέραν eyiyvero,
\ » > 7 σ IQ 8 [4 4 N a ef
Kat ἤδη ἀνίσταντο, OTOL ἐδεῖτο ἕκαστος, ATO τῶν ὅπλων,
Ν ee ’ 4 ‘N 4 ’ 3 4 3
καὶ ob ἱπποκομοι Ψψήχοντες τους LTTOUS ψοῴον ἐποίουν, ev
4 3 ’ € Α ΄΄ Ν @ Ul
τούτῳ ἀναλαβόντες οἱ περὶ Θρασύβουλον ta ὅπλα, δρομῳ
, . ¥ S \ 2 A / /
προσέπιπτον" καὶ ἐστι μεν OVS αὐτῶν κατεβαλον, πάντας
Ν , Ins \ A Ὁ δ / . 9 ἡ
δὲ τρεψάμενοι ἐδίωξαν ἕξ ἢ erta στάδια" καὶ ἀπέκτειναν
a Ν ς a / A Ne \ a 1 e ,
τῶν μὲν ὁπλιτῶν TAEOV ἢ εἰκοσι καὶ ExATOV, τῶν δὲ ἵππέων
4 “ Ν Ν 3 ’ \ Ν Ν
Nixootpatov τε τὸν καλὸν ἐπικάλουμενον, Kat ἄλλους δὲ
,’ 3“, ’ 3 A > a 3 4
δύο, ἐτε καταλαβόντες ev ταῖς εὐναῖς. 5. ἐπαναχωρη-
Ἀ \ ͵ , / ω
σαντες δὲ καὶ τρόπαιον στησάμενοί, συσκευασάμενοι ὅπλα
¢ *. Ν ’ > A 3 ΄- e Ἁ 3
Te ὅσα ἔλαβον καὶ σκεύη, ἀπῆλθον ἐπὶ Φυλῆς. οἱ δὲ εξ
wv φ “ /, n Ἁ 4 3 4 ΚΥ̓
ἄστεος ἱππεῖς βοηθήσαντες τῶν μὲν πολεμίων οὐδένα ETI
9 4 ‘ ed Ν Ἁ 3 4. ¢
εἶδον" προσμείναντες δὲ ἕως τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀνείλοντο οἱ
͵ 3 , 3 . »
προσήκοντες, ἀνεχωρησαν ἐς TO ἄστυ.
3 Ν ΄ ε ’ > ἢ ’ὔ 3 a
8. “Ex δὲ τοῦτον οἱ τριάκοντα, οὐκέτι νομίζοντες ἀσφαλῆ

Heit. 2,1v.] Thrasybulus at Piraeus. 77

“ah δ og ἢ ’ a 3 ,
σφίσι τὰ πράγματα, ἐβουλήθησαν Ἐλευσῖνα ἐξιδιώσασθαε,
a 93 ἈΝ 93 é a 7]
ὥστε εἶναι σφίσι καταφυγὴν, εἰ δεήσειε. καὶ παραγγεί-
“ ¢e @ 9 3 a Ν
λαντες τοῖς ὑππεῦσιν, ἦλθον εἰς Ἐλευσίνα Κριτίας τε καὶ
e¢ Χ a Ign ’ 3, 3 a
οἱ ἄλλοι τῶν τριώκοντα " ἐξέτασίν TE ποιήσαντες EV τοῖς
e κ᾿ ’ τ. ? 4 ἐν ’
ἱππεῦσι, φάσκοντες εἰδέναι βούλεσθαι πόσοι εἶεν καὶ πόσης
A , > 4 9 ’ a
φυλακῆς προσδεήσοιντο, ἐκέλευον ἀπογράφεσθαι παντας"
Q Q 9 / mn Y “ a ’ > N * ,
τὸν δὲ ἀπογραψάμενον aet δια τῆς πυλίδος ἐπὶ THY θάλατ-
3 v4 > 8 Ἁ A 9 A Ν . e 4 4 Ν
ταν ἐξιέναι. ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ αἰγιαλῷ Tous μὲν Leas ἔνθεν καὶ
¥ 4 “ > 23 ( 74 ee 4 4
ἔνθεν κατέστησαν, tov § e€tovta aet οἱ ὑπηρέται ξυνεδουν.
2 ‘ ’ ’ 4 , “ 4
ἐπεὶ δὲ πάντες ξυνειλημμένοι ἦσαν, Λυσίμαχον τὸν ἵππαρ-
> OF, 2 κι > ‘ “ τῇ
Nov ἐκέλευσαν ἀναγαγόντα παραδοῦναι αὑτοὺς τοῖς ἕνδεκα.
a , 9 \ 9 a J Ν 3
9. Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ εἰς τὸ ᾿Ὠιδεῖον παρεκάλεσαν τοὺς ἐν
a ’ φ / Ν Ν ¥” ς / 9 Ν
τῷ καταλογῳ οπλίτας καὶ TOUS ἄλλους ἱππέας. ἀναστὰς
Ἁ 7 ¥. a »” 9 Ia @ econ
δε Κριτίας ἔλεξεν " “Hyeis, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, οὐδὲν ἧττον ὑμῖν
’ὔ ΝἯἭ , aA ¢ A 3 a a 9 ec oa
κατασκευάζομεν τὴν πολιτείαν ἢ ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς. δεῖ οὖν ὑμᾶς,
oe AY a a d Ν vd 4
ὥσπερ καὶ τιμῶν μεθεξετε, οὕτω καὶ τῶν κινδύνων μετέχειν.
a 2 , 3 , , > A
τῶν οὖν ξυνειλεγμενων Ελευσινίων καταψηφιστεον ἐστίν,
“ Ν᾿» Ν a ‘ a , ’
wa ταὐύτα ἡμῖν καὶ θαρρῆτε καὶ φοβῆσθε. Δείξας δὲ τι
, 9 a > » s 4 Ν A
χωρίον, εἰς τοῦτο ἐκέλευσε φανεραν φερειν τὴν ψῆφον.
e Ἁ Ν N 3 [4] e / a 3 4
10. οἱ δὲ Λακωνικοὶ φρουροὶ ἐν τῷ ἡμίσει τοῦ ᾿ιδείου
9 , 4 4 Ν a 3 A 4 a a
ἐξωπλισμένοι ἧσαν" ἣν δε ταῦτα ἀρεστὰ καὶ τῶν πολιτῶν
[4 Ν a ’ὔ ¥
ὅσοις TO TAEOVEKTELY μονον ἐμέλεν.
9 Ν ’ Ν ’ Ν 4. "ἈΝ
Ex δὲ tovrov λαβὼν ὁ Θρασύβουλος τους ἀπὸ Φυλῆς,
Ν Ul wx , 3 ° A Ν 3
περὶ χίλίους ἤδη ξυνειλεγμένους, ἀφικνεῖται τῆς νυκτὸς ἐς
“ A e Ἁ ’ 3 . a IAN
tov Πειραιᾶ. οἱ δε τριάκοντα, ἐπεὶ ἤσθοντο ταῦτα, evOus
3 ’ὔ 7 vad “ “ Ν »“ e a
εβοηθουν σὺν te τοῖς Λακωνικοις, καὶ συν τοῖς ἱππεῦσι
“ a e 4 ¥ 3 , Ν Ν > “
καὶ τοῖς οπλίταις" ETELTA EXWPOVY κατὰ τὴν εἰς TOD
a “ 3 , e “ x A “a
Πειραιᾶ ἁμαξιτὸν ἀναφέρουσαν. 11. οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ Φυλῆς
ν Ν 9 ᾽ ν 9 , 3 , N ry , ς
ETL μὲν ἐπεχείρησαν μὴ ἀνιέναι αὑτοὺς" ἔπει δὲ μέγας ὁ
΄ “A A A 8. κι y¥ σι
κύκλος ὧν πολλῆς φυλακῆς εδοκει δεῖσθαι, οὕπω πολλοῖς
4 , a en , e av 2 - a
οὖσι, συνεσπειράθησαν ἐπὶ τὴν Μουνυχίαν. οἱ de ἐκ TOU

78 Fall and Restoration of Athens. fXen.

x 4 - ε , 9 . » , a Y
ἄστεος εἰς τὴν ἵἱπποδάμειον ἀγορὰν edOovres, ρῶτον μὲν
“ oa 9 ra Ν eas A ’ ᾽ a
ξυνετάξαντο, ὥστε ἐμπλῆσαι THY ὁδὸν ἣ φέρει πρὸς TE TO
ἱερὸν τῆς Μουνυχίας ᾿Αρτέμιδος καὶ τὸ Βενδίδειον. καὶ
νυ ͵ >», A 8 , > ,
ἐγένοντο βάθος οὐκ ἔλαττον ἢ ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα ἀσπέδων.
ed 4 ’ 4 , ΕΣ e ‘ 3"
οὕτω δὲ συντεταγμένοι ἐχώρουν ἄνω. 83. οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ Φυ-
“A 3 ’ “ ΝᾺ eas A δ 4
λῆς ἀντανέπλησαν μὲν τὴν odov, βαθος δὲ ov πλέον ἢ εἰς
’ὔ ὔ 3 ’ 9 5 σ΄
δέκα ὁπλίτας ἐγένοντο. ἐτάχθησαν μέντοι ἐπ᾽ αὑτοῖς
ld Ν δ 3 “ > A Ἁ Fer i ς
πελτοφοόροι Te καὶ ψιλοὶ ἀκοντισταὶ, emt δὲ τοῦτοις οἱ
ΠΛ φ / . 9 ‘ A ᾽ ἤ
πετροβόλοι. οὗτοι μέντοι OVYVOL ἤσαν" καὶ yap αυτοθεν
φ N 4
προσεγένοντο, ἐν ᾧ δὲ προσήεσαν οἱ ἐναντίοι, Θρασύ-
Ἁ 3 > “~ 4 9
βουλος τοὺς pet αὐτοῦ θέσθαι κελεύσας τὰς ἀσπέδας,
x 3 κ᾿ ’ Ἁ > ΝΥ eo 4 “ 7
καὶ autos θεμενος, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα ὅπλα ἐχών, κατὰ μέσον
“ Ψ΄
στας, ἐλεξεν "
Ww N “ Ν “ 3
18. ᾿Ανδρες πολῖται, τοὺς μὲν διδάξαι, τοὺς δὲ ἀναμνὴη-
A ’ 4 2 a ’ e Ν “a
cat ὑμῶν βούλομαι, ὅτε εἰσὲ τῶν προσιόντων οἱ μὲν TO
‘ ¥ A e ” e , 4 ’ 4 ,
δεξιὸν ἔχοντες, ods ὑμεῖς ἡμέραν πέμπτην τρεψάμενοι εδιω-
3 A 3 ¥ @ Ν €
ξατε" οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου ἔσχατοι, οὗτοι δὴ οἱ τριά-
e aA “ Λ 2 ld als > A
κοντα, Ol ἡμᾶς καὶ πόλεως ἀπεστέρουν οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας,
Ν 3 Aa 3 4 Ἁ ω ’᾽ A e a
Kat οἰκιῶν ἐξήλαυνον, καὶ Tous Pidtareuvs τῶν ἡμετέρων
ΠΩ , 2 2
ἀπεσημαίνοντο. ἀλλὰ νῦν Tor παραγεγένηνται, οὗ οὗτοι
“ ¥¥ Ὗ e rad S aN 3 4 4
μὲν οὕποτε ῴοντο, ἡμεῖς Se ἀεὶ εὐχόμεθα. 14. ἔχοντες
4 [2 Ν 3 ’ 2 a , e δὲ θ Ν σ
γὰρ ὅπλα μὲν ἐναντίοι αὐτοῖς καθέσταμεν" οἱ δὲ θεοι ---- ὅτι
A ον ’
“ποτὲ καὶ δειπνοῦντες ξυνελαμβανόμεθα καὶ καθεύδοντες καὶ
”] A 3 ) In 29
ἀγοράζοντες, οἱ δὲ καὶ οὐχ ὅπως ἀδικοῦντες, αλλ οὐδ᾽ ἐπι»
Aa 9 aA ” e os
δημοῦντες ἐφυγαδευόμεθα — νῦν φανερῶς ἡμῖν συμμα-
A 3 a Ω͂ a
χοῦσι. καὶ yap ἐν εὐδίᾳ χειμῶνα ποιοῦσιν, ὅταν ἡμῖν
s Ν ¢ 3 a “a ¥ 3 tf
συμφερῃ " Kat ὅταν ἐγχειρῶμεν, πολλῶν ὄντων ἐναντίων,
Ψ U Ν a a
ὀλίγοις οὖσι τρόπαια ἵστασθαι διδόασι. 15. καὶ νῦν Se
, e¢ oa 9 , 3 φ φΦ Ν 4 aN
κεκομίκασιν ἡμᾶς εἰς χωρίον, ἐν w οὗτοι μεν οὔτε βαλλειν
na 4 ἃ “ a
οὔτε ἀκοντίζειν ὑπὲρ τῶν προτεταγμένων, διὰ TO πρὸς
ΝΜ) 27 , > Ν ¢ a ν- 3 εν ᾽ ιν
ὄρθιον ἱέναι, δύναιντ ἂν" ἡμεῖς δε, ἐς τὸ κάταντες καὶ

HELL, 2, rv.] The Fight a M unychia. 79

ἢ 8ι ἢ ee ‘ ’ ’ , ’
δόρατα αφιέντες καὶ axovtia καὶ πέτρους, ἐξιξομεθά τε
3 “ ‘ Ἁ [2 Ἁ ΝΥ . #
αὐυτων, Kat πολλοὺυς κατατρωσόομεν. 16. Kat weTo μὲν ἂν
4 a) , 3 a ,
tis δεήσειν τοῖς ye πρωτοστάταις ἐκ τοῦ tcov μάχεσθαι"
δι VA e a oS / ΄ 3 a ‘
νῦν Se, ἂν ὑμεῖς, ὥσπερ προσήκει, προθύμως ἀφιῆτε τὰ βέλη,
΄ V4 Ν Jas Φ ν eas (4
ἁμαρτήσεται μὲν οὐδεὶς ὧν ye μεστὴ ἡ od0s, φυλαττόμενοι
x 4 ΕΣ ᾿ς a 3 ’ Cd 9g?
Se δραπετεύσουσιν ἀεὶ ὕπο ταῖς ἀσπίσιν" ὥστε ἐξέσται
Ψ ‘ ’ . 98
ὥσπερ τυφλους καὶ τύπτειν, ὅπου ἂν βουλώμεθα, καὶ ἐναλ»
3 Σ 3 3 φ Υ̓ ¢ 4
λομένους ἀνατρέπειν. 17. AN, ὦ ἄνδρες, οὕτω χρη
τῶν Ψ 4 , a ’ ’ 93 ’
ποιεῖν͵ ὅπως ἕκαστός τις ἑαυτῷ συνείσεται τῆς νίκης αἰτιω-
4 oe ον δ a “ Λ a 3 ὔ
τατος ὦν. αὕτη γὰρ ἡμῖν, ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ, νῦν ἀποδώσει
ον ’ Ν Υ “ 3 ’ A 4,
καὶ πατρίδα καὶ οἴκους καὶ ἐλευθερίαν καὶ τιμὰς καὶ
a 2 > A ιν a Φ , a A
παῖδας, οἷς εἰσὶ, καὶ γυναῖκας. ὦ μακάριοι δῆτα, ot ἂν
e n 3 “ A e 4 e ld 3
ἡμῶν νικήσαντες ἐπίδωσι THY πασῶν ἡδίστην ἡμέραν" εὑ-
δαίμων δὲ καὶ ἃ ἑποθάώνῃ " €lov γὰρ οὐδεὶς οὔτ
μω nee ἂν τις ἀποθάνῃ" μνημείου Ὑ ρ δεϊτἰοντῷ
πλούσιος ὧν καλοῦ τεύξεται. Εξάρξω μεν οὖν eyo, nuix
a . ¢ a Ψ , oN. 2 4 4
ἂν καιρὸς ἡ, παιᾶνα" ὅταν δὲ tov Ἐνυάλιον παρακαλέσω-
’ , e S ᾽ e ε ,
μεν, τότε πάντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν, avO ὧν ὑβρίσθημεν, τιμωρω-
“
μεθα tous ἄνδρας.
ry 9 “ 4 “ “ “ 9
15. Ταῦτα δ᾽ εἰπὼν, καὶ μεταστραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς ἐναν-
’ e 4 4 Ν Ν ,ὔ , 2 a
TLOUS, ἡσυχίαν εἶχε" καὶ γὰρ ὁ μάντις παρηγγεῖλεν αὑτοῖς
ἐν 7 3 ͵ s a 4 4
μὴ πρότερον ἐπιτίθεσθαι, πρὶν τῶν σφετέρων ἢ πέσοι τις ἣ
/ 3 Ν 4 A , ‘
τρωθείη: Ἐπειδὰν μέντοι τοῦτο γένηται, ἡγησόμεθα μεν,
¥ ς a 4 NSN ¢ a e , > Ἁ A
edn, ἡμεῖς" νίκη δὲ ἡμῖν ἔσται ἑπομένη, ἐμοὶ μέντοι θάνατος,
σ > 3 aA 3 ’ 3 | a ?
ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ. 39. καὶ ove ἐψεύσατο, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἀνέλα-
NL @ > 8 \ ζ΄ ‘ , ιν 3
βον ta ὅπλα, αὑτὸς μὲν, ὥσπερ ὕπο μοίρας τινὸς ἀγόμενος,
2 ’ὔ a ) 4 a i] 3 ,
ἐκπηδήσας πρῶτος, ἐμπεσὼν τοῖς πολεμίοις ἀποθνήσκει"
/ 3 a
καὶ τέθαπται ev τῇ διαβάσει τοῦ Κηφισοῦ" οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι
95 : SN 4 ’ “A e ra ’ A
ἐνέκων καὶ κατεδίωξαν μέχρι τοῦ ὁμαλοῦ. ἀπέθανον δ᾽
3 a a Ν 7 “ x ¢ 4
ἐνταῦθα τῶν μεν τριάκοντα Κριτίας τε καὶ Immopayos:
a 3 ”~ / 3 ἢ 4 4
τῶν δ᾽ ev Πειραιεῖ δέκα ἀρχόντων, Χαρμίδης ὁ Γλαύκωνος "
> \ Nog ¥.
τῶν δ᾽ ἄλλων περὶ ἑβδομήκοντα. καὶ τὰ μεν ὅπλα ἔλαβον,

80 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xxn.

A 4 a 9 Q a “ 3 , 3 Q
tous δὲ χιτῶνας ovVdEVOS τῶν πολιτῶν ἐσκύλευσαν. ἐπεῖ
Ν A > » \ ‘ Ν ς , > /
δὲ τοῦτο ἐγένετο καὶ Tous νεκρους ὑποσπόνδους ἀπεδιδο-

[2 3 , SN ΄
σαν, προσιόντες ἀλλήλοις πολλοὶ διελέγοντο.
a N a ry a ἤᾳ 9 ¥

20. Κλεόκριτος δε, ὁ τῶν μυστῶν Knpvk, war εὔφωνος

A , Wf. ¥ a ’ ¢ ~
ὧν, κατασιωπησάμενος ἔλεξεν" Avdpes πολίται, τί ἡμᾶς

.3 s , 3 a Pn, e a Ν ς An
efeXauvete ; τὶ ἀποκτεῖναι βούλεσθε; ἡμεῖς yap ὑμᾶς
“ Ia a 9 4 , ‘ c¢ » ἈΝ
κακὸν οὐδὲν πώποτε ἐποιήσαμεν, μετεσχήκαμεν δε ὑμῖν καὶ
e a A 4 ‘N a “ e A A ,
ἱερῶν τῶν σεμνοτάτων, Kat θυσιῶν Kat ἑορτῶν τῶν KaAX-
Ν XN N x ’ N
στων, καὶ Evyyopevtat καὶ ξυμφοιτηταὶί γεγενήμεθα καὶ
nA “ “ e A 4 Ν
ξυστρατιῶται, καὶ πολλὰ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν κεκινδυνεύκαμεν κατὰ

a ᾿ς N ,ὔ ΟΝ a “a ϑ 4 e n
γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν ὑπερ τῆς κοινῆς ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν
ὔ Ν 3 ’ Ν a ’ Ν
σωτηρίας τε καὶ ἐλευθερίας. Zl. πρὸς θεῶν πατρῴων καὶ

Ἐν εὐ Ν ’ “ / xe 4 ,
μητρφων, καὶ ξυγγενείας, καὶ xndectias, καὶ ἑταιρίας (πάν-

ν᾿ 7 N ry 3 4 9 ’

TOV γὰρ τούτων πολλοί κοινωνουμεν ἀλλήλοις), αἰδούμενοι
Ν δι εν ? ΄ 4 ’ 3 Ν
καὶ Ocovs καὶ ἀνθρώπους, παύσασθε ἁμαρτάνοντες ἐς τὴν

͵ ‘N Ν / 3 / ’
πατρίδα, καὶ μὴ πείθεσθε τοῖς ἀνοσιωτάτοις τριάκοντα, ot
τ , ἕ x, ἢ a , , U 3
ἰδίων κερδέων ἕνεκα ολέγον δεῖν πλείους ἀπεκτονασιν Αθη-
, 3 9 Ν “ “A , ᾽ὔ 4 Ὗ
ναίων ἐν ὀκτὼ μῆσιν, ἢ παντες Πελοποννήσιοι δέκα ἔτη
A Ig 3 ec on 3 9 ’ὔ ’ὔ’
πολεμοῦντες. 22. εξὸν ὃ ἡμῖν ev εἰρήνῃ πολιτεύεσθαι,
e ᾿ , ¥ , N ’.- ν
οὗτοι τὸν πάντων αὐἰσχιστὸν τε καὶ χαλεπώτατον καὶ avo-
᾽ὔ . sy» ‘ a . 2 , ,,
σιώτατον καὶ ἔχθιστον καὶ θεοῖς καὶ avOpwrrots πόλεμον
εκ N 3 , , ~~ .9 4 , > +
μιν πρὸς ἀλλήλους παρέχουσιν. αλλ εὖ YE mEVTOL ἐπι-
oe ‘ a a ¢,9 ¢ A 3 , > 4
στασθε, ὅτι καὶ τῶν νῦν Up ἡμῶν αποθανοντων οὐ μόνον
a ἢ δ \¢ A A \ .
ὑμείς, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡμεῖς ἔστιν OVS TrOAAG κατεδακρύσαμεν.
ς S a 2 ε Ν » ¥ ; Ν Ν
Ο μεν τοιαῦτα ἔλεγεν. οἱ δὲ λοίποι ἄρχοντες, καὶ δια
ἈΝ A ’ὔ Ν > ¢ a > 4 9 Ν
TO τοιαῦτα προσακοῦειν, τους μεθ ἑαυτῶν ἀπήγαγον εἰς τὸ
ΝΥ 23 A δ᾽ e 4 e Ν ’ / δὴ
ἀστυ. . Τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν τριάκοντα πάνυ δὴ
ταπεινοὶ καὶ ἔρημοι ξυνεκάθ ἐν τῷ ξυνεδρίῳ τῶν δὲ
wot καὶ ἔρημοι ξυνεκαθηντο ev τῷ ξυνεδρίῳ" τῶν
4 if / 4 = “᾿ Ul
τρισχιλίων ὅπου ἕκαστοι τεταγμένοι ἧσαν, ᾿τανταχοῦ διεφέ-
a 3 4 ef ἈΝ N 3 4 ’
ροντο προς ἀλλήλους. OTOL μὲν γαρ εἐπεποιήηκεσωαν TE
4 x 3 A 3 ’ ¥. e 2 Ἀ
βιαιότερον καὶ ἐφοβοῦντο, ἐντόνως ἔλεγον ὡς ov χρὴ καθυ-

Hett. 2, τν. An Armistice. 81

4 3 4 . 9 } ‘ 9
φίεσθαι τοῖς ev Πειραιεῖ" ὅσοι δὲ ἐπίστευον μηδὲν ἠδικη-
, Σ , 3 , ιν Ν Υ. 3.
κέναι, αὐτοί τε ἀνελογίζοντο καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἐδίδασκον,
Ν 4 7 a A Ἃ a 4
ὡς οὐδὲν δέοιντο τούτων τῶν κακῶν, καὶ τοῖς τριάκοντα
3 y A 7 > > 4 3 rd
οὐκ ἔφασαν χρῆναι πείθεσθαι, οὐδ᾽ ἐπιτρέπειν ἀπολλύναι
N , \ ἐγ a 3 ,ὔ 9 , ᾿
τὴν πόλιν. καὶ τὸ τελευταῖον ἐψηφίσαντο εκείνους μεν
es Υ Noe» N a , Prd
καταπαῦσαι, ἄλλους Se ἐλέσθαι" καὶ εἴλοντο δέκα, ἕνα
23" “A
απὸ φυλῆς.
Ἀ « Ν 4 3 a f 3 ς “
24. Καὶ ot μὲν τριάκοντα ᾿Ελευσίνάδε ἀπῆλθον" οἱ δὰ
ta) 3 wv . 4. ld “ > ,
δέκα τῶν EV ἄστει, καὶ μάλα τεταραγμένων καὶ ἀπιστοῦύν-
9 2 Ν e a 3 4. 3 ’
των ἀλλήλοις, σὺν τοῖς ἑππώρχοις ἐπεμέλοντο. ἐξεκαθευ-
Ν N ee ἕω 3 a 9 / ’ Ὁ N A
Sov δὲ καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς ev τῷ Qideip, τοὺς τε ἵππους καὶ τὰς
3 tA ¥ a 2 3 4 3 ’ ἈΝ “ > 9?
ἀσπίδας ἔχοντες, καὶ δι ἀπιστίαν epwdevoy τὸ μὲν ad
ς 4 ‘ a 3 , ‘ Ν ’ Ν ᾿ “ ΝΜ
ἑσπέρας σὺν ταῖς ἀσπίσι κατὰ τὰ τείχη. TO δε πρὸς ὄρθρον
Α a 4 x nN 7 Ν 2 4 ,
συν τοῖς ἵπποις, ἀεὶ φοβούμενοι μὴ επεισπέσοιεν τινες
Ρ] n a 3 ~ e Ν 2 ¥
αὑτοῖς τῶν ex τοῦ Πειραιῶς. 48. Ov de, πολλοί τε ἤδη
4 Ν , of 9 a e Ἁ ,’ e Ἁ
ὄντες καὶ παντοδαποι, ὅπλα ἐποιοῦντο, οἱ μὲν ξύλινα, οἱ δε
> 4, “ a ? a Ν \ ¢ ’ 4
οιἰσύϊνα, Kal ταῦτα ἐλευκοῦντο. πρὶν δὲ ἡμέρας δέκα γενέ-
ν᾿ ef , ν 9 gs 2
σθαι, πιστὰ δοντες οἰτίνες ξυμπολεμήσειαν, καὶ εἰ ξένοι εἶεν,
? Λ ¥ 9g. / ‘ Ν ra
ἰσοτέλειαν ἔσεσθαι, ἐξήεσαν ToANOL μὲν ὁπλῖται, πολλοὶ
\ “a 3 ’ \ 3 ἴω δ ¢ a e x ς ,
Se γυμνῆτες (eyevovto δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἱππεῖς ὡσεὶ ἑβδομή-
N sy ’ “ 4
κοντα), προνομᾶς δὲ ποιούμενοι, καὶ λαμβάνοντες ξύλα καὶ
3 , > f , 3 a A > 2 a
oTwpav, ἐκάθευδον πάλιν ev Πειραιεῖ. 26. τῶν δ᾽ ex τοῦ
¥ Υ͂ A > ‘ Ν oS 9¢,/ e e a
ἄστεος ἄλλος μεν οὐδεὶς συν ὅπλοις ἐξήει, ob δὲ ἱππεῖς
¥ oS Ν Ἧ > Aa ἴω 3 a a Ν
ἔστιν OTE καὶ λῃστὰς ἐχειροῦντο τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς, καὶ
‘ , -> aw? , , - at NS a
τὴν φάλαγγα αὐτῶν exaxovpyouv. περιέτυχον Se καὶ τῶν
’ , ιν 3 Ν ς oa 3 Ν > A . 9
Αιξωνέων τισίν, εἰς τους αὐτῶν ἀγροὺς ἔπι Ta ἐπιτήδεια
id NX 4 4 ef
πορευομένοις " Kat τούτους Λυσίμαχος ὁ ἵππαρχος ἀπέ-
Ν 7 Ν ἴω A
σφαξε, πολλα λιτανεύοντας, Kal πολλῶν χαλεπῶς φερόντων
e 4 3 ’ Ἁ Α e 1 A n e
ἱππέων. 2%. ἀνταπέκτεινον δὲ καὶ οἱ ev Πειραιεῖ τῶν ἱπ-
, > 9 9 a ’ , a 4
πέων ἐπ᾿ ἀγροῦ λαβόντες Καλλίστρατον, φυλῆς Δεοντίδος "
Ἁ A .'4 / > ͵ Ψ Ν 4 . n κὺ
Kat γὰρ ἤδη μέγα ἐφρόνουν, ὥστε καὶ πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος τοῦ
6

82 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xuw.

3 ld 9 Ἁ “ a a ? cad a
ἄστεος προσέβαλλον. Ex δὲ καὶ τοῦτο δεῖ εἰπεῖν τοῦ μη-
“ a 9 an +f a 9 ¥ ad ‘ “ >
χανοποιοῦ τοῦ ἐν TH ἄστει, ὃς, ἐπεὶ ἔγνω OTL KATA τὸν ἐκ
, Λ Ν Ν ΄
“Λυκείου δρόμον μέλλοιεν τας μηχανὰς προσάγειν, τὰ ζεύγη
> » 4 e ,’ / ¥ Ν Λ
ἐκέλευσε πάντα ἁμαξιαίους λίθους ἄγειν, καὶ καταβώλλειν
- Ψ , an , ς \ a 2 f
ὅπου ἕκαστος βούλοιτο τοῦ δρόμον. ws δὲ τοῦτο ἐγένετο,
δ φ a 4 a
πολλὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν λίθων πράγματα παρεῖχε.
’ ‘ 4 9 a Ἁ
28. Πεμπόντων δὲ πρέσβεις ἐς Λακεδαίμονα, τῶν μὲν
0 9 3 a A 2 9 ’ 9 wv
τριάκοντα εξ Ἐλευσῖνος, τῶν δ᾽ ev καταλόγῳ εξ ἄστεος,
N A ’ e 9 ’ a , > 8
καὶ βοηθεῖν κελευόντων, ws ἀφεστηκότος τοῦ δήμου ἀπὸ
, ΄ / “ ς. Φ
Aaxedaipoviov, Λύσανδρος, λογισάμενος ὅτι οἷον τε εἶη
XN 9 A Ν 3 A a a “
ταχὺ ἐκπολιορκῆσαι τοὺς ev τῷ Πειραιεῖ κατά τε γῆν καὶ
S Λ 2 a 3 3 , ,
κατὰ θάλατταν, εἰ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀποκλεισθείησαν, ξυνε-
’ ΛΛ > a Aa ?
πραξεν ἑκατόν τε τάλαντα αὐτοῖς δανεισθῆναι, Kat αὐτὸν
A A aA e ω , Ἁ a 3 Q n
μὲν κατὰ γῆν ἅρμοστην, Λίβυν Se τὸν ἀδελφὸν vavapyoiv-
3 A ? Ν a SN \ 3 ἴω
τα ἐκπεμφθῆναι. 29. καὶ ἐξελθὼν αὐτὸς μὲν ᾿Ελευσίνάδε,
/ , Ν ’ Ἁ
ξυνελέγετο ὁπλίτας πολλοὺς Πελοποννησίους " ὁ δὲ ναύαρ-
Λ 3 4. Ψ A > an > ”
χος κατὰ θάλατταν ἐφύλαττεν, ὅπως μηδὲν εἰσπλέοι αὑτοῖς
a 9 , 4 Ν Λ 3 ? / 9 e 3
TOV ἐπιτηδείων" WOTE ταχὺ πάλιν EV ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν ot EV
a 9 a Λ 4 , 9 ἢ ’ a
Πειραιεῖ, οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῷ ἄστει πάλιν av μέγα ἐφρόνουν ἐπὶ τῷ
9 ‘ ‘
’ 4 4 e
Avoav8pe. οὕτω δὲ προχωρούντων, Παυσανίας ὁ βασι-
Ἁ , , 9 , a od
λεὺς, POovncas Avouvdpw, εἰ κατειργασμένος ταῦτα ἅμα
Ἁ 3 4 oe \ 39ea/7 4 A 3 ’᾽ ’
μὲν εὐδοκιμήσοι, ἅμα δὲ ἰδίας ποιήσοιτο tas AOnvas, πεί-
-“" 3 “Ὁ 3 4 ’ ’
σας τῶν ᾿Εφόρων τρεῖς, ἐξάγει φρουραν. 80. συνείποντο
Ἁ ‘ e 7 4 Ν A \ ¢
δὲ καὶ οἱ σύμμαχοι πάντες πλὴν Βοιωτῶν καὶ Κορινθίων.
φ > Δ \ ΓΝ 9 / 3 κι A
οὗτοι δ᾽ ἔλεγον μέν, oTe ov νομίζοιεν εὐορκεῖν ἂν στρα-
> 9 9 / \ ’ δὶ
Τευόμενοι ἐπ Αθηναίους, μηδὲν παράσπονδον ποιοῦντας"
¥ by A 4 4
ἔπραττον δε ταῦτα, ὅτε ἐγίγνωσκον Aaxedatpoviovs Bov-
4 Ν a 9 4 ’ 9 4 εν Χ
λομένους τὴν τῶν Αθηναίων χωραν οἰκείαν καὶ πεστὴν
4 e Ἁ ’ 3 ΄ Ἁ ?
ποιήσασθαι. ὁ δὲ Παυσανίας ἐστρατοπεδεύσατο μὲν ev
a ¢ 4 “ r a a ¥
τῷ ᾿Αλιπέδῳ καλουμένῳ πρὸς τῷ Πειραιεῖ, SeEvov ἔχων
, ΄ \ \ A , ‘ »>s
κέρας, Avoavdpos δὲ συν τοις μισθοφόροις TO εὐώνυμον.

HELL. 2, τν ] F ighting Renewed. 83

: c A 4° 4 “ A 9
34. Πεμπων δὲ πρέσβεις ὁ Παυσανίας πρὸς τοὺς ev
a 9 6 > 3 ΔΝ λε a > ‘ 3 3 ’
Πειραιεῖ, ἐκέλευεν ἀπιέναι ἐπὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν " ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οὐκ ἐπεί-
,ὔ “ aN d ¢ . \
θοντο, προσέβαλλεν ὅσον ἀπὸ Bons ἕνεκεν, oTras μὴ δῆλος
¥ ? Ν > a ¥ 9 4, δὼ." ϑ A A A
εἴη εὐμενὴς αὐτοῖς ὦν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἀπὸ τῆς προσβολῆς
a a , Ν Α
πράξας ἀπῆλθε, τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, λαβὼν τῶν μὲν Δακεδαιμο-
A Y 3 / ¢ , a A
νίων δύο μόρας, τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων ἱππέων τρεῖς φυλὰς,
n~ 2 A X “ A nA σε > 4
παρῆλθεν ert τὸν κωφὸν λιμένα, σκοπῶν πῆ εὐαποτείχι»
vy ς ΄ > Sar 29 , > a ,
στος εἴη ὁ Πειραιεύς. 82. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἄπίοντος αὐτοῦ mpoce-
, 9 a a 1] ον
θεόν τινες, καὶ πράγματα αὐτῷ παρεῖχον, ἀχθεσθεὶς παρ-
Ν Y ε ͵ 3 ΄ ? 3 ‘ > 7 ιν
ἤγγειλε Tous μὲν ἱππέας ἐλαύνειν εἰς αὐτοὺς ἐνέντας, καὶ
N , 7) ᾧ , ‘ \ a YY
tous ta Sexa ad ἥβης συνέπεσθαι" σὺν δὲ τοῖς ἄλλοις
> « 2 ΄ “ ? ὔ Ἁ 2 QA ’
αὑτὸς ἐπηκολούθει. καὶ ἀπέκτειναν μὲν εγγὺς τριάκοντα
“A A “ 9 Ν᾿ a \ 3? ry
τῶν ψιλῶν, Tous δ᾽ ἄλλους κατεδίωξαν πρὸς τὸ ev Πειραιεῖ
4 3 vad \ # 3 ’ Υ͂
Gearpov. 88. exer δὲ ἐτυχοὸν ἐξοπλιξόμενοι οἱ τε πελτα-
“ 4 € ¢ a“ A 9 φι “ € ‘
σταὶ πάντες, Kat οἱ ὁπλῖται τῶν ἐκ Πειραιῶς. καὶ οἱ μὲν
Ν δ δ 3 ’ , μή > »
ψίλοι εὐθὺς ἐκδραμόντες ἠκοντιζον, eBaddrov, ἐτόξευον,
3 4 e A 3 Ν > 3
ἐσφενδόνων" οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἐπεὶ αὐτῶν πολλοὶ ἐτι-
’ ’ ’ὔ 3 4 3 UN ’ ς >
TPWOKOVTO, μᾶλα πιεζόμενοι ἀνεχωρησαν ἐπὶ πόδα" οἱ ὃ
3 ΄ N ω > ἢ 3 a \. 9 ’
ἐν τούτῳ πολὺ μαλλον ἐπέκειντο. ἐνταῦθα δὲ ἀποθνήσκει
’ὔ Ν ’ ¥ , 4
Χαίρων τε καὶ Θίβραχος, ἄμφω πολεμάρχω, καὶ Aaxparns
ς 3 7 Ν y e ’ ’
ὁ ολυμπιονίκης, καὶ ἄλλοι οἱ τεθαμμένοι Λακεδαιμονίων
SS a a 9 a ec oa \ a e
πρὸ τῶν πυλῶν ev Κεραμεικῷς 84. ὁρῶν δὲ ταῦτα ὁ
a “ e¢ FF A 3 Ν
Θρασυβουλος καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ὁπλῖται, ἐβοήθουν, καὶ ταχυ
’ “ a ¥. > 9
ταρετάξαντο πρὸ τῶν ἄλλων er ὀκτώ. Ὃ δὲ Παυσανίας.
΄ : ‘ \ 3 ’ v4 4 ,
para πιεσθεις, καὶ ἀναχωρήσας Ὅσον στάδια τέτταρα ἢ
e Ν a \ , a ,
πέντε πρὸς λόφον tia, παρήγγείλε τοῖς Aaxedarpoviots
4 a Χ é 9 ad ον 3 A
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ξυμμάχοις ἐπιχωρεῖν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν. ἐκεῖ
A , a a Ν , ‘
δὲ συνταξάμενος βαθεῖαν παντελῶς τὴν φάλαγγα, ἦγεν ἐπὶ
\ 2 ΄ e ᾽ a N Ia Ν \
tous Αθηναίους. οἱ δ᾽ εἰς χεῖρας μὲν ἐδέξαντο, ἔπειτα δὲ
e A 9 4 9 A 3 a ε a “ [ , 3 ἢ
οἱ μεν ἐξεωσθησαν εἰς Tov ev ταῖς Αλαῖς πηλον, οἱ δε EvEe-
3 , 39. α , Ne ,
κλιναν, Kat ἀποθνήσκουσιν αὐτῶν ὡς πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατόν.

84 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen.

“ , 4 4 ’ 4 a
35. Ὁ δὲ Παυσανίας τρόπαιον στησάμενος ἀνεχωρησε"
.. 9 a? J 2 κα ‘ , , as
καὶ οὐδ᾽ ὡς ὠργίζετο αὐτοῖς, ἀλλα λαθρα πέμπων ἐδίδασκε
δ 3 a“ @ Ν ’ 4 4 .
tous ἐν Πειραιεῖ ola χρὴ λέγοντας πρέσβεις πεμπεῖιν πρὸς
e εν ‘ Ν ’ 3 ’ e 3 ,
ἑαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρόντας ᾿Εφόρους. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπείθοντο.
4 Ἁ Α A ? a ¥ 4 > #4 “ a
διέστη δὲ καὶ τοὺς ev τῷ ἄστει, καὶ ἐκέλευε πρὸς σφᾶς
/ € , “ 4 μέ
προσιένας ὡς πλείιστοὺς συλλεγομένους, λέγοντας οτι
IAt ΄ a > a a a 3 Ν
οὐδὲν δέονται τοῖς ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ πολεμεῖν, ἀλλὰ δια-
’ a 3 , ’
λυθέντες κοινῇ ἀμφότεροι Δακεδαιμονίοις φίλοι εἶναι.
cas σι ᾿ / 7 A ,
36. ἡδέως ταῦτα καὶ Ναυκλείδας “Edopos ὧν συνήκονεν "
“ Ν / ‘\ a7 a? ,
ὥσπερ γὰρ νομίζεται συν βασιλεῖ δύο τῶν ᾿Εφόρων συστρα-
’ Ν , a e + , 3 ἤ
τεύεσθαι, καὶ τότε παρὴν oUTOS τε καὶ ἄλλος, ἀμφοτεροε
A . 4 ao Vv A A a
τῆς μετὰ Παυσανίου γνώμης ὄντες, μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς μετὰ
’ a 9 \ 9 Ν ,
Avoavspov, Sia ταῦτα οὖν καὶ ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα προ-
᾽ ¥ ὔ > 9 A ¥ XN. a
θύμως ἐπεμπον τοὺς tT εκ Πειραιῶς, ἔχοντας tas πρὸς
, 4 \ ‘ > 8 a3 a om”
Λακεδαιμονίους σπονδας, καὶ τους ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῷ acTEL
3 ’ὔ 4 Ν 4 > Ν 4
ἰδιώτας, Κηφισοφῶντα τε καὶ ελητον. 87. Ἐπει μέντοι
φ Ν 3 ’ ” “ Q e oo A a
οὗτοι @yovto es Δακεδαίμονα, ἔπεμπον $n καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ
a a ΝΥΝ ’ [ 9 “ Ἁ v
κοινοῦ ἐκ TOU ἄστεος, λέγοντας OTL αὐτοὶ μὲν Trapadidoact
Ν 4 ’ ΔΎ Ν a 3 Ν ,
καὶ τὰ τείχη, ἃ ἔχουσι, καὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Λακεδαιμονίοις
4 η - 3 σ΄ 2 ¥ Ν Ν 3
χρῆσθαι 0 τι βούλονται" αξιοῦν ὃ ἐεφασαν καὶ τους ev Πει-
a 9 4 , ,
pase, εἰ φίλοι φασὶν εἶναι Λακεδαιμονίοις, παραδιδόναι τόν
a “a . . ἢ 3 7 Α ’
τε Πειραιᾶ καὶ τὴν Μουνυχίαν. 85. ἀκούσαντες δὲ πάντων
x a y ¥ 9gf /
αὐτῶν οἱ Eopot καὶ οἱ ἔκκλητοι, ἐξέπεμψαν πεντεκαίδεκα
” 3 3 4 ‘9 4“ ‘ ,
ἄνδρας εἰς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, καὶ ἐπέταξαν συν Παυσανίᾳ διαλ-
’ [2 va 4 e A 4 9,9 @
Aakat ὅπη δύναιντο κάλλιστα. Οἱ Se διηλλαξαν, ep ᾧτε
> Ss A ¥ e Ν 4 , 3 ’ δὲ > Ν \
εἰρηνην μὲν EXELY WS πρὸς GAANAOUS, ἀπιέναι OE ETL τὰ
e A e ’,ὔ a Ν Ὁ oe ἈΝ
ἑαυτῶν ἑκάστους, πλὴν τῶν τριάκοντα, καὶ τῶν ἕνδεκα, καὶ
a a φι 3 a a 3 ’ “a
τῶν ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ aptavtwy δέκα" εἰ δὲ τινες φοβοῖντο
io 3 ” y + a Ν 4 ‘A a
των εξ ἄστεος, ἐδοξεν αὑτοῖς την ᾿Ελευσινα κατοικεῖν.
4 \ “ Ἁ a “
39. Τούτων δὲ περανθέντων, Παυσανίας μὲν διῆκε τὸ
’ ς \ 9 “ A 9 , Ν a
στρατευμα" οἱ δὲ ex τοῦ Πειραιῶς, ἀνελθόντες συν τοῖς

Hew. 2,1v.] The Democracy Restored. 85

σ 9 a 9 , ¥ a a Ε] a ‘ o
ὅπλοις εἰς THY ἀκρόπολιν, ἔθυσαν τῇ "AOnva. eme. δε κατέ-
, νΨ ν ᾿ ΄ ¥.
Bnoav ot στρατηγοὶ, ἔνθα δὴ ὁ Θραυσύβουλος ελεξεν "
ἴω ΕΣ 9 2 an Ν 4 > A
40. Ὑμῖν, ἔφη, ὦ Ex τοῦ ἄστεος ἄνδρες, συμβουλεύω ἐγω
a ς oa 3 , , ,͵ ἃ t > 2 ,ὕ
γνωναᾶι ὑμᾶς AaUVTOVS, μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν γνοίητε, εἰ ἀαναλογι-
> SN 4 ea 4 4 3 Ἁ 2 6 ry
σαισθε, emt τίνι ὑμῖν peya φρονητεον ἐστίν, ὥστε ἡμῶν
ΑΥ̓͂ 3 a , 4 4? 2 9 @ ‘
ἄρχειν ἐπίχειρειν. πότερον δικαιότερος ἐστε; αλλ’ ὁ μεν
A e ry aA Jar a ΄ a
δῆμος, πενέστερος ὑμῶν ὧν, οὐδὲν πώποτε ἕνεκα χρημάτων
¢ oa ’ e a ‘ , 4 »¥
ὑμᾶς ἠδικησεν" ὑμεῖς δε, πλουσιώτερον πάντων oVTES,
A Ν ᾽ \ o@f , , 2 ΩΝ δ
TONAG καὶ αἰσχρὰ ἐνεκα κερδέων πεποιήκατε. ἐπεί δὲ
΄ Jas ea , , Κ΄ 5.» 9
δικαιοσύνης οὐδὲν ὑμιν προσήκει, σκέψασθε εἰ apa ἐπ
opera ὑμῖ γα Φ ‘ Al. καὶ τίς ἂν καλλίων
ανὸρείᾳ υμὲίν μεγα φρονητεον. . ς ί
᾽ 7 , A e 9 ᾽ ‘ 3 4
κρίσις τοῦτου γένοιτο, ἢ WS ἐπολεμήσαμεν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ;
XG , ᾿ γΆἍᾺἃ , ἃ ΓΚ Ν “ ΙΝ
αλλα γνωμῃ paint ἂν προέχειν, ol, ἔχοντες καὶ τεῖχος καὶ
od N , N , , eon
ὅπλα καὶ ypnuata καὶ ξυμμάχους Πελοποννησίους, ὑπὸ
~ 34." 2 3 ’ 7 ? 3 4 SN
τῶν οὐδεν τούτων ἐχόντων παρελύθητε; αλλ ἐπὶ Aaxe-
J ἈΝ ΝΥ , , 3 ‘ a cd
δαιμονίοις δὴ οἴεσθε μέγα φρονητεον εἶναι ; πῶς ; οἱ γε,
Υ͂ / / a , ,
ὥσπερ Tous δάκνοντας κύνας κλοιῷ δησαντες παραδιδοασιν,.
d 2 A Coa 7 a , ,
οὕτω KAKELVOL, ὑμᾶς παραδόντες τῷ ἠδικημένῳ τούτῳ δήμῳ,
¥ 9 , ἢ ’ ς «α 4. Κγ Ie A
οἴχονται ἀπίοντες ; 42. ou μέντοι ye ὑμᾶς, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἀξιῶ
> NSN @ 9 , a IAS 3 Ν Ν a Ν
εγω, ὧν ομῶμοκαᾶτε παραβῆναι οὐδεν. αλλα καὶ TOVTO προς
΄σ΄ι' wv ~ 3 a (4 + ες x. o& ᾽» 9
Tots ἄλλοις καλοῖς ἐπιδεῖξαι, OTL καὶ EVOPKOL καὶ ὅσιοι ἐστε.
9 ον Ν a \ eM. A \o Jar 4
Εἰπὼν δὲ ταῦτα καὶ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα, καὶ ὅτι οὐδὲν δέοι
a >. - a ’ “ γ᾽ , A
ταράττεσθαι, ἀλλα τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς ἀρχαίοις χρῆσθαι,
> ἢ ἣν 3 , \ ὔ . 3 ᾿
avecTnoe τὴν ἐκκλησίαν. 48. και TOTE μεν apYas κατα-
, 9 ? ᾿ e / ‘ t 3 ᾽ὔ
στησάμενοι ἐπολιτεύοντο" ὑστέρῳ δὲ χρόνῳ, ἀκούσαντες
4 A Ν 9 9 a a
£evous μισθοῦσθαι tous ἐν Ἐλευσῖνι, στρατευσάμενοι παν-
ιν 3 ϑ ἣν \ ‘N \ 3 9 ,
δημεὶ ἐπ᾽ αὑτοὺς, Tous μὲν στρατηγους αὑτῶν εἰς λογους
3 lA ? [2 ἴω Ν BZ 3 ’ Ν
ἔλθοντας ἀπεκτειναν, τοῖς δὲ ἄλλοις εἰσπεμψαντες τοὺς
ΛΑ “ > 4 ¥ a ‘N93 ’
φίλους Kal ἀναγκαίους, ἐπεισαν συναλλαγηναι ", καὶ Ομο-
a 4 Ν ‘ , ¥ SN ca ς a
σαντες OPKOUS, ἢ μὴν μὴ μνησικακήσειν, ETL καὶ νυν ομοῦυ
vd Ν a @ 2 4 e a
TE πολιτεύονται, καὶ τοῖς ὅρκοις ἐμμένει ὁ δῆμος.

86 The Battle of Mantinea. [ Xen.

ΠῚ, THE BATTLE OF MANTINEA.
[Hellenica, VII.}

> N . 9 § 3 ᾽ 3 a
V. 11. Ere δὲ ἐγένετο Επαμεινώνδας ἐν τῇ πόλει τῶν
a [4 N ¥ ¥ ? , a
Σπαρτιατῶν, ὅπου μὲν ἔμελλον ἕν τε ἰσοπέδῳ μαχεῖσθαι
Ἁ > Ν a 3 a 4 3 ᾽ “ ’ 2
Kat ἀπὸ τῶν οικιῶν βληθήσεσθαι, οὐκ εἰσήει ταύτη, οὐδ᾽
oa Ν , a a 9, 2 ‘ e ἱ
ὅπου γε μηδὲν πλέον μαχεῖσθαι τῶν ὀλίγων πολλοὶ ὄντες"
y ἣν a A > » a Ν “ ’
ἐνθα δὲ πλεονεκτεῖν ἂν ἐνόμιζε, τοῦτο λαβὼν τὸ χωρίον
3 x 3 > » 3 Ν Λ ϑ
κατεβαινε, καὶ οὐκ ἀνέβαινεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν. 12 τό γε
N > a , ” N ‘ a . A
μὴν evrevOev γενόμενον ἔξεστι μὲν τὸ θεῖον αἰτιᾶσθαι,
mM. N ’ ε a ) 3 Ian N A e
ἐξεστι δὲ λέγειν ὡς τοῖς ἀπονενοημένοις οὐδεὶς ἂν ὑπο-
, > «A Ν ες « 9 ͵ 2. ς ΙΝ ¥”
σταίη. ἐπεὶ yap ἡγεῖτο ᾿Αρχέδαμος οὐδὲ ἑκατὸν ἔχων
wv Q ‘ ef 9 ὔ ¥ J > 4
ἄνδρας, καὶ διαβὰς ὅπερ ἐδόκει τε ἔχειν κώλυμα, ἐπορεύετο
a wv 3 ον Ν 9 Λ 4 A \ φΦ a
προς ὄρθιον ems τοὺς ἀντιπάλους, ἐνταῦθα δὴ οἱ πῦρ
, e , Ν , ς
πνέοντες, οἱ νενίκηκοτες τοὺς “ακεδαιμονίους, οἱ τῷ παντὶ
“ Α 4 ς 4 ᾽ 4 2 Inf
πλέονες καὶ προσέτι ὑπερδέξια χωρία ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἐδεξαντο
δ Ν 9 ’ 9.9 “ Ν
Tous περὶ τὸν Αρχίδαμον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγκλέίνουσι. 18. καὶ οἱ
Ν a “A 9 ’ 3 ξ ᾽ “ td
μὲν πρῶτοι τῶν Ἐπαμεινωνδου αποθνήσκουσιν " ἐπεὶ μέν-
3 rr ’ a ’ 3 ὃ ’ ἐν ὃ θ ’ a
TOL ἀγαλλόμενοι TH νίκῃ εδιωξαν οἱ ἔνδοθεν πορρωτέρω τοῦ
a Φ Φ 23 , , S
καιροῦ, οὗτοε av ἀποθνησκουσι" περιεγεγραπτο yap, ὡς
4 e on a ’ 4 ad ς ,ὔ Ia 3 “-
ἔοικεν, ὑπὸ τοῦ θείου μέχρι ὅσου ἡ νίκη ἐδέδοτο αὑτοῖς.
Ne Ν \ 9 / ’ , [ἰώ ¥ 9 ᾽
καὶ ὁ μὲν δὴ Apyidapyos τρόπαιον τε ἔστατο ἐνθα ἐπεκρώ-
x a A ζω 4 ς ’
τῆσε, καὶ τοὺς ἐνταῦθα πεσόντας τῶν πολεμίων ὑποσπόν-
3
δους ἀπεδίδου.
? ’ : ᾿ Ψ a?! e
14. Ὁ δ᾽ ᾿Επαμεινώνδας, λογιξόμενος ὅτι βοηθήσοιεν οἱ
3 [4 9 “ / ϑ ξ΄ Ν, ϑ 8 Λ
Apxasdes εἰς την Δακεδαίμονα, ἐκείνοις μὲν οὐκ ἐβούλετο
“ a 4 ς ζω tA A M.
καὶ πᾶσι Λακεδαιμονίοις ὁμοῦ γενομένοις μάχεσθαι, ἄλλως
3 4 a Ν 9 ’ Λ Ν
τε καὶ εὐτυχηκόσι, τῶν δὲ ἀποτετυχηκότων" πάλιν δὲ
ἐν ς In 9 ,ὕ 9 Ν ᾽ Ν ,
πορευθεὶς ὡς εδύνατο τάχιστα εἰς τὴν Τεγέαν, τοὺς μέν
ς , > » N 2 ¢ 4 ¥ 9 δ ,
ὁπλίτας ἀνέπαυσε, Tous ὃ ἵππεας ἔπεμψεν εἰς τὴν αντιί-
Ν 3 a) A “ 7 e
veav, δεηθείς αὐτῶν προσκαρτερῆσαι, καὶ διδάσκων ὡς

HEL. 7, v] The Athenan Cavalry. 87

’ὔ ‘ 9. ¥ φ ‘ a , ,
πάντα μὲν εἰκὸς ἔξω εἶναι ta τῶν αντινεων βοσκήματα,
’ 4 Νν 3 , ” N , os
πάντας Se tous avOpwirovs, ἄλλως Te καὶ σίτου συγκομιδῆς

wy e 9 ἴω e a
οὔσης. 15. Kai ot μὲν ᾧχοντο" οἱ δ᾽ Αθηναῖοι ἱππεῖς
φ [2 2 3 »“ 3 td Ἃ > 3 a
ὁρμηθέντες ἐξ ᾿Ελευσῖνος ἐδευπνοποιήσαντο μεν ev Ισθμῷ,

4 9 , 9 N
διελθόντες δὲ τὰς Κλεωνὰς ἐτύγχανον προσιόντες εἰς τὴν
1 > A ’ 3
Μαντίνειαν, καὶ καταστρατοπεδευσάμενοι ἐντὸς τείχους ἐν
a 9 N “a a e (4
ταῖς οἰκίαις. ὀπεὶ δὲ δῆλοι ἦσαν προσελαύνοντες οἱ πολέ-
In 7 a a 2 4 a
μίοι, ἐδέοντο οἱ Μαντινεῖς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἱππέων βοηθῆσαε,
¥ F Ψ Α ιν “ , ὔ .“,
εἴ τι δύναιντο" ἔξω γὰρ εἶναι καὶ τὰ βοσκήματα Tuyta καὶ
Α 3 4 δ ‘ \ “a δ , a
Tous epyatas, πολλοὺς be καὶ παῖδας Kat γεραιτέρους τῶν
3. ’ 9 4 “ A «3 a 3 a
ἐλευθέρων" ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ Αθηναίοι εκβοηθοῦσιν,
4 ἦ. 2 » ΑἉ 3 A Ν ς οἵ > a
€TL ὄντες ἀνάριστοι καὶ αὐτοὶ καὶ οἱ ἔπποί. 16. ἐνταῦθα
Ν , ἣν 9 N ; ᾽ 4 ’ ,
δὴ τούτων αὖ τὴν ἀρετὴν τίς οὐκ ἂν ἀγασθείη ; οἷ καὶ
‘ ’ e on ‘ f , » ,
πολυ πλείονας ὁρῶντες τοὺς πολεμίους, καὶ ev Κορινθῳ
4 φ΄ a e a Jar ὔ
δυστυχήματος γεγενημένου τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν, οὐδὲν τούτων
9 4 3 og “ ’ Ἁ a
ἐπελογίσαντο, ovd ὅτε καὶ Θηβαίοις καὶ Θετταλοῖς τοῖς
ἢ ς a 9 A Υ , % .?
κρατίστοις ὑππεῦσιν εἶναι δοκοῦσιν ἐμέλλον μάχεσθαι, ἀλλ
3 , > 4 “ 3 ¢ Α
αἰσχυνόμενοι, εἰ παρόντες μηδὲν ὠφελήσειαν TOUS συμμά-
e 9 ’ N , 4 9 a
χους, ws εἶδον τάχιστα Tous πολεμίους, συνέρραξαν, ἐρῶν-
? 4 Ν ’ ’ ‘ 4
τες ἀνασώσασθαι τὴν πατρῴαν δόξαν. 1%. καὶ μαχόμενοι
¥ “ ? 4 δ» 7 a A ie)
αἰτιοι μὲν ἐγένοντο Ta ἔξω πάντα σωθῆναι τοῖς Μαντινεῦ-
3 a Ν Ὑ ’,’ ΗΝ 3 “ . 3 ’ὔ Ν
σιν, αυτῶν δὲ ἀπέθανον ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ, καὶ ἀπέκτειναν δὲ
A 4 4 Jar ν΄ ͵
δῆλον ὅτε τοιούτους" οὐδὲν γὰρ οὕτω βραχὺ ὅπλον ἐκάτε-
φ φ δ 2 a 3 , Ν Ν Ν ,
poe etXor Ὁ ῳ OUK eC RAUETS αλληλων. Kat ie as pious
νεκροὺς οὐ προήκαντο, τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ἦν οὗς ὑποσπόν-
δους ἀπέδοσαν.
> a 3 ’ [4 a, ἢ
Ὁ δ' αὖ ᾿Επαμεινώνδας, ---- ἐνθυμούμενος ὅτι ὀλέγων
Ἁ e a s a » 3 a 3 A
μεν ἡμερῶν ἀνάγκη ἔσοιτο ἀπιέναι, διὰ τὸ ἐξήκειν TH oT PAH
’ “ , > N ᾽ > » 4 7
τείᾳ τὸν χρόνον, εἰ Se καταλείψοι ἐρήμους ols ἦλθε σύμμα-
9 aA a A 3 a3 AN ἃ
χος, ἐκεῖνοι πολιορκήσοιντο ὕπο τῶν ἀντιπάλων, αὐτὸς δὲ
a ¢ A 4 , 4 e
ΤΊ €auToUu δοξη παντάπασιν ἔσοιτο λελυμασμένος, ἡττη-

88 The Battle of Mantnea. [XEn.

, . 4 3 , ἃ a e ae 98%. Ff
μένος μεν ev Δακεδαίμονι συν πολλῷ ὁπλιτικῷ ὑπ ολέίγων,
4 Ν 3 4 e 4 ¥ “
ἡττημένος δὲ ev Μαντινείᾳ ἱππομαχίᾳ, αἴτιος “δὲ yeyevn-
4 A Ν 3 ’ a
μένος, dia την εἰς Πελοπόννησον στρατείαν, τοῦ συνεστώ-
’ Ν , Ν} ‘ t
vat Aaxedaipoviovs καὶ ᾿Αρκάδας καὶ Αχαιοὺς καὶ ᾿Ηλεί-
. 9 ’ Ψ δ In ) » A ἣν 4
ους καὶ Αθηναίους " ὥστε οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ δυνατὸν εἶναι
4 ἐν a , [2 > Ν 4 4
apaxes παρελθεῖν, λογιζομένῳ ὅτι εἰ μὲν νικῴη, πάντα
“a 3 , > | Ν 3 , x
ταῦτα ἀναλύσοιτο" εἰ δὲ ἀποθώνοι, καλὴν τὴν τελευτὴν
e , ” 4 a 4 ϑ AY
ἡγήσατο ἔσεσθαι πειρωμένῳ τῇ πατρίδι ἀρχὴν Πεέλοπον-
, aA ΙΝ . 4 3 8 a
ynoov καταλίπειν. 19. To μεν οὖν αὑτὸν τοιαῦτα διανοεῖ-
5) ’ a \ 9 ’ Ν
σθαι ov wavy μοι δοκεῖ θαυμαστὸν εἶναι" φιλοτίμων γὰρ
93 »" Ν a“ , \ “ ’
ἀνδρῶν ta τοιαῦτα διανοήματα " τὸ μέντοι τὸ στράτευμα
᾽ e 4 4 > ’ ’
παρεσκενάκεναι ὡς πόνον TE μηδένα ἀποκαμνεῖν μὴτε νυ-
“ 4 « , ’ x 3 ᾽ ,
KTOS μήτε ἡμερας, κινδύνου τε μηδενὸς ἀφίστασθαι, σπανιώ
Ν 3 , » Ψ ,ὔ 34 “. A ’
τε τὰ επιτήδεια ἔχοντας ὅμως πείθεσθαι εθέλειν, ταῦτώ
a s 4 4 4 oa “-
μοι δοκεῖ θαυμαστότερα εἶναι. 20. καὶ γὰρ ὅτε τὸ τελευ-
ἴω 3 A , e ’ 2
Talov παρήγγειλεν αὑτοῖς παρασκευάξεσθαι ὡς μάχης ἐσο-
4 4 3 a ee a “ ’ 7
μένης, προθύμως μὲν ἐλευκοῦντο οἱ ἱππεῖς τὰ κράνη κελεύ-
3 , 3 ͵ . S ¢ a3 . δ ς a
οντος ἐκείνου, ἐπεγράφοντο δε Kal οἱ τῶν Αρκαδων ὁπλῖται
ef e a »¥ 4 δὲ 4 a“ “\ 4
βόπαλα, ws Θηβαῖοι ὄντες, Tavtes O€ NKOVWYTO καὶ AOYXaS
. , \ 9 7 δ 2 ,
καὶ μαχαίρας, καὶ ἐλαμπρύνοντο τὰς ἀσπίδας.
9 Ψ , % ?
21. ᾿Επεὶ μέντοι οὕτω παρεσκευασμένους ἐξηγαγεν,
¥ Φ a ἃ 39 a Ν \ ef
ἄξιον av κατανοῆσαι ἃ ἐποίησε. πρῶτον μὲν Yap, ὥσπερ
ἽΝ a bs J ’ Ia 7)
εἰκὸς, συνετάττετο. τοῦτο δὲ πράττων, σαφηνίζειν εδόκει
ed 3 , . , 3 , Ν 2.» I oA
OTL εἰς μάχην παρεσκευάζετο" ἐπεὶ YE μὴν ἐτέτακτο αὑτῷ
“ ’ 93 , ‘ ‘ ’ a
TO στράτευμα ws εβούλετο, THY μὲν συντομωτατην προς
Ν , > “ Ν ‘ “ ¢€ ’ ¥ ον
τοὺς πολεμίους οὐκ ἦγε. πρὸς δὲ Ta πρὸς ἑσπέραν OpH καὶ
3 4 A ,ὔ ¢ a“ 4 ’ a ”
ἀντιπέραν τῆς Τεγέας ἡγεῖτο" wate δόξαν παρεῖχε τοῖς
x 4 “ ? 6 4 3 4 a e¢ ld 29 Ν
πολεμίοις μη ποιήσεσθαι μάχην ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ. . καὶ
ΝΥ x e “ a 3 3 4 3 a ϑ 4 > a e
yap δὴ ws πρὸς τῷ ὄρει ἐγένετο, ἐπεὶ ἐξεταθηὴ αὐτῷ 7
, = “ A a ¥ ‘ od [4 3 t
φαλαγξ, ὑπὸ τοῖς ὑψηλοῖς ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα, ὥστε εἰκάσθη
é “a Ν td w+. Ν σε
στρατοπεδευομένῳ. τοῦτο δὲ ποιήσας, ἔλυσε μὲν τῶν

HELL. 7, v.] Victory and Death of Epaminondas. 89

’ , Ν 9 Ω a “ ,
πλείστων πολεμίων THY ἐν ταῖς ψυχαῖς πρὸς μάαχὴν παρα»
‘ ¥. δ N 9 a , 3 7 ᾿
σκευὴν, ἔλυσε δὲ τὴν ἐν ταῖς συνταξεσιν. emer γε μὴν
“ “ 3" 4 ’ ’ 3 é
παραγαγὼν TOUS ἐπὶ κέρως πορενομένους λόχους εἰς μετω-
> “X 3 ’ὔὕ Ν 4 e “ ΝΥ a x
πον, ἰσχυρὸν eToLnTaTO τὸ περί eauvToy ἔμβολον, τότε dn
3 a ὦ ς « ea ,
ἀναλαβεῖν παραγγείλας τὰ OTAG ἡγεῖτο" Ob ὃ ἠκολούθουν.
4 N ’ 3 , Fes I α
ot δὲ πολέμιοι ws εἶδον παρὰ δόξαν ἐπιόντας, οὐδεὶς αυτῶν
Cd , cf 46. 9 3 3 e - » 3 ἣ ’ὔ ς
ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν ἠδύνατο, adr οἱ μὲν ἐθεον εἰς Tas τάξεις, οἱ
ν [4 4 “ a 3 r € Ἃ ’
δε παρετάττοντο, ot δὲ ἔππους εχαλίνουν, οἱ δὲ θωρακας
3 , td \ é( ζω A ’ὔ
ἐνεδύοντο, πάντες δὲ πεισομένοις TL μᾶλλον ἢ ποιήσουσιν
3 23 Ὅ δὲ a 4 3 ’ ad
EWKET AY. Ἂ ε τὸ στράτευμα αντίπρῳρον ὥσπερ
, a , .2 3 Ν ’
τριήρη προσῆγε, νομίζων, ὅπῃ ἐμβαλὼν διακόψειε, διαφθε-
ἴω σ΄. ᾳ a“ > ͵ ’ 4 a a n~ a
ρεῖν ὅλον TO τῶν ἐναντίων στράτευμα" Kat yap δὴ τῷ μεν
, ’ἤ , 3 , AN a ,
ἰσχυροτάτῳ παρεσκευάζετο ἀγωνίζεσθαι, τὸ Se ἀσθενέστα-
, 2 , IAN Cd e ω 3 ’ A
Tov πόρρω ἀπέστησεν, εἰδὼς OTL ἡττηθεν αθυμίαν av πα-
’ὔ a φ a , . a 4 “
ράσχοι τοῖς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ῥώμην δὲ τοῖς πολεμίοις. καὶ
Ν N ς , e N U 2 / 4
μην τοὺς ἱππέας οἱ μὲν πολέμιοι ἀντιπαρετάξαντο ὥσπερ
e nn é , 9 ἂν “ 4
ὁπλιτῶν φαλαγγα βάθος, ἐφεξῆς καὶ ἔρημον πεζῶν ἀμέπ-
φ 2 9 [4 4 Q a e@ a”
πων" 24.06 Επαμεινωνδας av καὶ τοῦ ὑππικοῦ ἔμβολον
3 a 3 , NX 4 Ἁ ’ 3 a
ἰσχυρὸν ἐποιήσατο, Kat ὠμίππους πεζους συνέταξεν αὑτοῖς,
/ \ ¢ ‘ > ON ’ ζ΄. 4.»
γομιξων τὸ ἱππικὸν ἐπεὶ διακόψειεν, ὅλον τὸ ἀντίπαλον
Ν Α΄ Λ “ N Φ e Α 3 td
νενικηκὼς ἔσεσθαι" μαλα yap χαλεπὸν εὑρεῖν Tous εἐθελή-
4 3 ’ rd a e A a
covras μένειν, ἐπειδὰν τινας φεύγοντας τῶν ἑαυτῶν ὁρῶσι"
\ of ‘9 A @ 9 A > a, A 3 4
καὶ ὅπως μὴ ἐπιβοηθῶσιν ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐωνύμου
4 2" Ν 3 ’ὔ 3 2 oN ὔ A
κέρατος ἔπε TO ἐχόμενον, κατέστησεν ETL γηλοφων τινῶν
’ , 2 “ Ve , Ve , ‘ ,
ἐναντίους αὑτοῖς καί LTTTrEAaS καὶ ὁπλίτας, φοβον βουλόμενος
ιν 4 , ¢€ 3 ,ὕ ¥ @ 2
kat τοῦτοις παρέχειν ws, εἰ BonOnoatev, ὄπισθεν οὗτοι ἐπι-
, > κα N . N δ a 3 ,
κείσοιντο αὐτοῖς. τὴν μὲν δὴ συμβολὴν οὕτως ἐποιήσατο,
ν- 3 3 , a , S @
καὶ οὐκ ἐψεύσθη τῆς ἐλπίδος - κρατήσας γὰρ ἢ προσέβα-
of. 3 ’ “ A ? a 9 ’
λεν ὅλον ἐποίησε φεύγειν τὸ τῶν ἐναντίων. 3ὅ. Ἐπεί ye
Ν 3 a y¥ e ιν Jar a , 9 a 5 4 ὃ rd
μὴν ἐκεῖνος ἔπεσεν, οἱ λοιποὶ οὐδὲ TH νίκῃ ορθῶς ETL ἐδυνώ-
’ὔ 3 a 4 . ῳ ” δῇ Σ
σθησαν χρήσασθαι. ἀλλὰ φυγούσης μεν αὐτοῖς τῆς εναν-

‘90 Character of Socrates. . [Xen.

e Λ 3 ’ 3 ’ e a 3 “ “,
τίας φώλαγγος, οὐδένα ἀπέκτειναν οἱ ὄπλίται, οὐδε προὴλ-
? A 3, ἮὟ e “ 3 4
θον ἐκ τοῦ χωρίου ἔνθα ἡ συμβολὴ ἐγένετο" φυγόντων δ᾽
3 a a ’ 3 “ 350. e oe a ’
αὑτοῖς καὶ τῶν ὑππέων, ἀπέκτειναν μὲν οὐδ οἱ ἱππεῖς διώ-
¥” oe ’ ¥v e ; Ψ xe ,
κοντες οὔτε ἱππέας οὔθ᾽ ὁπλίτας, ὥσπερ δὲ ἡττώμενοι πεφο-
4 ον aA 4 , “
βημένως δια τῶν φευγόντων πολεμίων διέπεσον. καὶ μὴν
a se ᾿ aA ¢€ a
οἱ ἅμιπποι καὶ Ol πελτασταὶ, συννενικηκότες τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν,
3 7 XN 9 ἃ σι 3 ’ὕ ς a“ > ry eoUN
ἀφίκοντο μὲν ἐπὶ TOU εὐωνύμου, ὡς κρατοῦντες, ἐκεῖ δ᾽ ὑπὸ
a 3 ’ e a ? aA 3 4
τῶν Αθηναίων ot πλεῖστοι αὐτῶν ἀπέθανον.
, ν 4 2 ’ 2 , e
26. Τούτων δὲ πραχθέντων, τοὐναντίον ἐγεγένητο ov
39, g Υ͂ » ’ “
ἐνόμισαν πάντες ἄνθρωποι ἔσεσθαι. συνεληλυθνίας yap
ἐγ , a e / , Ia
σχεδὸν ὅπασης τῆς “EdXddos, καὶ ἀντιτεταγμένων, οὐδεὶς
σ 3 ” 9 ? Υ̓͂ ἃ Ν rd
ἦν ὅστις οὐκ WETO, εἰ μάχη ἔσοιτο, TOUS μὲν κρατήσαντας
wv Q “ 4 € ’ ΝΥ rd Aq a
ἄρξειν, tous δε κρατηθέντας ὑπηκόους ἔσεσθαι" ὁ δὲ θεὸς
oe 2 I of > ’ “ 4 e
οὕτως ἐποίησεν ὥστε ἀμφότεροι μὲν τρόπαιον ὡς νενικη-
’ ’ , N . ε 7 In? > 4
κότες ἐστήσαντο, Tous Se ἱσταμένους οὐδέτεροι εκῶλνον,
‘ ‘ 3 , “ ε , e , > »,
νεκροὺς Se ἀμφότεροι μὲν ὡς νενικηκότες ὑποσπόνδους ἀπέ-
> a Ν φ [ 4 e ’ > ’
δοσαν, ἀμφότεροι δὲ ὡς ἡττημένοι ὑποσπόνδους απελάμ-
4 ‘ é e¢ 7 v c
Bavov. 27%. νενικηκέναι δὲ φάσκοντες exatepot οὔτε χωρᾳ
4 μ vy? 9 a Ia 7 Ia 4 ¥ 9, /
οὔτε πόλει οὔτ ἀρχῇ οὐδέτεροι οὐδὲν πλέον ἔχοντες ἐφανη-
“a N N 3 δ N Ν
σαν ἢ πρὶν τὴν μάχην γενέσθαι" ἀκρισία δὲ καὶ ταραχὴ
¥ ἢ YN , > » A 3 ae |
ἔτι πλείων μετὰ THY μάχην ἐγένοτο ἢ προσθεν ev τῇ Ἐλ-
͵ ἌΞΕΙ ‘ Ν , ͵ , N N ‘
λάδι. enor μεν δὴ μέχρι τούτου γραφεσθω" τὰ de pera
a ” ¥
TAUTA LOWS ἄλλῳ μελησει.

IV. CHARACTER OF SOCRATES. |
[Memorabilia, I.]
I. Πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα, τίσι ποτὲ λόγοις ᾿Αθηναίους
ἔπεισαν οἱ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, ὡς ἄξιος εἴη θανάτου τῇ
Λ e \ Ν “ 9 3 a 4 4
πόλει. ἡ μὲν γὰρ γραφὴ κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοιάδε τις ἦν ----

Mem. 1, 1] is Prety. 91

3 “ / A bs e 4
Αδικεῖ Σωκράτης ods μεν ἡ πόλις vouiles
“ 3 / ‘ Α ’ 42
θεοὺς οὐ νομέξων, ἕτερα Se καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσ-
΄ 3 a Ν ΙΝ ‘\ ’ ’
φέρων: ἀδικεῖ δὲ καὶ τοὺς νέους διαφθείρων.
ra ‘ > 39 ὰ “Ὁ ,
3. Πρῶτον μεν οὖν, ὡς οὐκ ἐνόμιζεν οὺς ἡ πόλις νομίζει
‘\ 4 > 3 4 / 4
θεους, ποίῳ ToT ἐχρήσαντο τεκμηρίῳ ; θύων τε yap φανε-
“ 9 a . bf [4 ‘\ > " *” A
pos ἦν, πολλάκις μὲν οἴκοι, πολλάκις δὲ ert τῶν κοινῶν
a 7. re “ a s 2 3 Ν
τῆς πόλεως βωμῶν, καὶ μαντικῇ χρώμενος οὐκ ἀφανὴς ἦν"
΄. “ é A
διετεθρύλητο yap, ὡς φαίη Σωκράτης τὸ δαιμόνιον ἑαυτῷ
, aA | Ν δ ᾿ , a > 8 9 ᾽
σημαίνειν" ὅθεν δὴ καὶ μάλιστα μοι δοκοῦσιν αὑτὸν αἰτιω»
᾿ Ν 4 9 4, e Ν Ia ’
σασθαι καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσφέρειν. 8. ὁ δε οὐδὲν καινότε-
> ἡ“ ; a ¥ Ψ δ 7 5
pov εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσοι, μαντίκην νομίζοντες, οἰω-
a a \ 4 Ν ͵
νοῖς τε χρῶνται καὶ φήμαις καὶ συμβόλοις καὶ θυσίαις.
Φ ’ δ e r 3 4 ¥ Jas x
οὗτοε Te yap ὑπολαμβώνουσιν ov τοὺς ὄρνιθας οὐδὲ Tous
3 96, ἢ Ἁ ’ a 4
απαντῶντας eidevat Ta συμῴεροντα τοῖς μαντευομεένοις,
3 4 δ Α 4 ͵ > 4 , 3 a ef
ἀλλὰ τοὺς θεους διὰ τούτων αὑτὰ σημαίνειν, κακεῖνος ov-
> » 3 ϑ ‘ a /
τως ἐνόμιζεν. 4. ἀλλ, οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοί φασιν ὑπό Te τῶν
3 7 3 b ’ Ν
ὀρνίθων καὶ τῶν ἀπαντώντων ἀποτρέπεσθαϊ τε καὶ προτρέ-
» ν @ > », ad
πεσθαε" Σωκράτης δὲ ὥσπερ ἐγίγνωσκεν οὕτως ἔλεγε"
Q 4 a ¥ 4 ἃ ° Le) ’
τὸ δαιμονιὸν γὰρ ἔφη σημαίνειν. καὶ πολλοῖς τῶν ξυνόν-
a “ “ a “ Ν Ν ἊΝ -. (ἃ
τῶν προηγόρευε τὰ μεν ποιεῖν, ta δὲ μὴ ποιεῖν, ὡς τοῦ
, 4 a “ 4 a
δαιμονίου προσημαΐίνοντος. καὶ τοῖς μὲν πειθομένοις αὐτῷ
, vn δ “ 4 4 4
συνέφερε, τοῖς δὲ μὴ πειθομένοις μετέμελε. δ. καίτοι
, 2 4 , ? >
τίς οὐκ ἂν ὁμολογήσειεν αὐτὸν βούλεσθαι μήτ᾽ ἠλίθιον
393. 3 4 4 a = “" Ia 9 3 3
μήτ᾽ ἀλαζόνα φαίνεσθαι τοῖς συνοῦσιν ; ἐδόκει δ᾽ ἂν ἀμφό-
A ? »’ “ a
τερα ταῦτα, εἰ προαγορεύων ὡς ὑπο θεοῦ φαινόμενα εἶτα
’ lA “ 4 of 3 a >
ψευδόμενος ἐφαίνετο. δῆλον οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ ἂν προέλεγεν, εἰ
. 2 3 , a Los a χ ΄
μὴ ἐπίστευεν αληθεύσειν. ταῦτα δε τίς ἂν ἄλλῳ πιστεύ-
a a ΄, ‘ a r 9 9 \
ceev ἢ θεῷ; πιστεύων δὲ θεοῖς, πῶς οὐκ εἶναι θεους
>
ἐνομέζεν ;
ἣν 9 f ον “ 3 4
6. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν ἐποίει καὶ τάδε “ρος τοὺς ἐπιτηδείους.
N δ ’ A , ‘ t ε 2.»
τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀναγκαῖα συνεβούλευε καὶ πράττειν, ὡς ἐνὸ-

92 Character of Socrates. [Xen.

4 +) 4, ry QM “ ry Ie “ὁ σ
μιξεν ἀριστ ἂν πραχθῆναι" περὶ δὲ τῶν ἀδήλων ὅπως
ϑ ’ 4 ¥ 3 /
ἀποβήσοιτο, μαντευσομένους ἔπεμπεν εἰ ποιητέα. Ys Kat

Ν Λ ” ‘ 4 a 9
TOUS μέλλοντας OLKOUS TE καὶ πόλεις καλῶς οἰκήσειν pare
om ΝΥ “ “ “ “ A
τικῆς edn προσδεῖσθαι. τεκτονικὸν μὲν yap ἢ χαλκευτι-
‘ ‘ a 2? , ? δ a
κὸν ἢ γεωργικὸν ἢ ἀνθρώπων ἀρχικὸν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων
¥ 2 δ a Ν “a 3
ἔργων ἐξεταστικον ἢ λογιστικὸν ἢ οἰκονομικὸν ἢ στρατη-
Ν 4 ’ὔ Ν “A
γικὸν γενέσθαι, πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα μαθήματα καὶ ἀνθρώπου
͵ e , > » 9 N ΝΥ
γνωμῇῃ aiperea ἐνόμιζεν εἷναι" Β. τὰ δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν
΄, » \ Ν e a / φ Jas
τούτοις edn tous θεοὺς eautois καταλείπεσθαι, ὧν οὐδὲν
a a 3 , w¥ Ν A n
δῆλον εἶναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. οὔτε yap τῷ καλῶς ἀγρὺν
4 a 4 4 ¥ a
φυτευσαμένῳ δῆλον ὅστις καρπώσεται" οὔτε τῷ καλῶς
οἰκίαν οἰκοδομησαμένῳ δῆλον 6 ἰκήσει" οὔτε τῷ
μησαμένῳ δῆλον ὅστις οἰκήσει" οὔτε τῷ στρα-

ἴω a 4 a“ wv αι a

τηγικῷ δῆλον εἰ συμφέρει στρατηγεῖν " ovTe τῷ πολιτικῷ
A 9 ᾽ὔ a μ e Εν
δῆλον εἰ συμφέρει τῆς πόλεως προστατεῖν ' οὔτε τῷ καλὴν
, σ΄ ? , a ’ ν , > »
γήμαντι, ἵνα εὐφραίνηται, δῆλον ev δια ταύτην ανιάσεται"
¥ a Ν 3 a , Ν ’ a 3
οὔτε τῷ Suvatous ev τῇ πόλει κηδεστὰς λαβοντι δῆλον εἰ
“ / ’ὔ a Λ \ AY ‘
δια τούτους στερήσεται τῆς πόλεως. DB Tous δὲ μηδεν
a ͵ , ͵ ἢ 3 δ , A
τῶν τοιούτων οἰομένους εἷναι δαιμόνιον, ἀλλὰ πάντα τῆς
3 4 4 a Mv A“ Ν a XN
ἀνθρωπίνης γνωμης, Satuovay edn: δαιμονᾶν δὲ καὶ τοὺς
, ἃ a ’ ’ ¥ e N Py
μαντευομένους ἃ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἔδωκαν ot θεοι μαθοῦσι
’ 2 ” 3 ΄ , 3 ’
διακρίνειν " οἷον, εἰ τις ἐπερωτῳῴη πότερον ἐπιστάμενον
ς a oN A aa a Δ ΝΣ , 4
ἡνιοχεῖν ἐπὶ ζεῦγος λαβξῖν κρεῖττον, ἢ μη ἐπιστάμενον" ἢ
t 3 ’ δι 2." Ν a ra
πότερον ἐπίσταμενον κυβερνᾶν ἐπὶ THY ναῦν κρεῖττον da-
a “A \ 9 , A A ? 6 ΄ A
Bew, ἢ μη ἐπιστάμενον" ἢ ἃ ἔξεστιν αριθμησαντας 7 με-
Ld A 4 9 XN δ a Ny “
τρήσαντας ἢ στήσαντας εἰδέναι, τους τὰ τοιαῦτα παρὰ τῶν
a S ) 7 a “ Ν᾽ Ἀ a
θεῶν πυνθανομένους αθέμιτα ποιεῖν ἡγεῖτο. edn Se δεῖν,
ἃ ᾿» , a ec ἐν ’ ἃ Ν be
ἃ μεν pabovtas ποίειν ἐδωκαν ot θεοὶ, pavOuvev: ἃ δε μη
a a ? , 3 Ν A SN ro) Ν
δῆλα τοῖς ἀνθρωποις ἐστὶ, πειρᾶσθαι δια μαντικῆς mapa
a a , ‘ ‘ δ 4 ἡ 9 ΗΥ
τῶν θεῶν πυνθάνεσθαι" τοὺς θεοὺς yap, οἷς ἂν ὦσιν ἐλεῳ,
4
σημαίνειν.
9 Ν Ν > α΄» aN Ἁ 4 3 n A 4
10. ἄλλα μην εκεῖνος ye ἀεὶ μὲν ἣν ev τῷ φανερῷ" πρῷ

Mem. 1, 1.] False P hulosophers. 93

εν 3 δ ͵ ty ‘ , ¥ x
τε γὰρ εἰς TOUS περιπάτους καὶ Ta γυμνασια nel, καὶ TAN-
ἢ 5) a 2 A . 4 SN ν ,ἷἰιι e¢ 2
θούσης ἀγορᾶς εκεί havepos nv, Kat TO λοίπον ἀεί τῆς ἡμέρας
ad 4 Λ 4 “ δῇ Ν e
ἦν ὅπου πλείστοις μέλλοι συνέσεσθαι" καὶ ἔλεγε μὲν ὡς
\ X\ a y 4 IgA > a 3 ον “
τὸ πολυ, τοῖς δε βουλομένοις ἐξῆν ἀκούειν. UL. ovdeis δε
, ͵ Jar ) N IAS 2? 9 Υ̓ ,
πώποτε Σωκράτους οὐδὲν ἀσεβες οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον οὔτε πρατ-
ΜΝ ’ Ν Jar Ἃ ον a
TOVTOS εἶδεν, οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσεν. οὐδὲ γὰρ περὶ τῆς
a ’ 4 2 “a ΝΥ φ a 4
Tay παντων φύσεως, περ τῶν ἄλλων οἱ πλεῖστοι, διελέ-
a ed ἐ 4 e oN a
YeTO, — σκοπτῶν ὅπως ὁ καλούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν σοφιστῶν
’ δ 4 εν 4 9 A 4 4 a 3
κόσμος ἔχει, καὶ τίσιν ἀνάγκαις ἕκαστα γίγνεται τῶν οὑρα-
᾿ > ‘ 4 N 4 ‘ a ,
νίων, ---- ἀλλα Kat τοὺς φροντίζοντας Ta τοιαῦτα μωραίνον-
3 4
Tas ὠπεδείκνυ.
Ν A x x «a 3 0 4 4 ’
12. Kat πρῶτον μεν αὐτῶν ἐσκόπει, ποτερά ποτα νομὲ-
ς a ? ’ Ia 7 ¥ x vA AW N
σαντες ἱκανῶς ἤδη TavOpwrriva εἰδέναι, ἔρχονται ἐπὶ TO περὶ
a Δ 4 A \ “ 3 td ,
τῶν τοιούτων φροντίζειν, ἢ τὰ μὲν ἀνθρωπινα παρέντες,
Ν 4 Ν Aa ¢ ry ‘N 4 4
τὰ δαιμόνια δε σκοποῦντες, ἡγοῦνται TA προσήκοντα TpaT-
’ ΄ \ 3 ‘ N > «a 2 Ψ
τειν. 18. εθαυμαξε δὲ εἰ μὴ φανερὸν αὑτοῖς ἐστιν, ὅτι
a 3 , > 93 , ς 3 δ “x Ἁ
ταῦτα οὐ δυνατὸν ἐστιν ἀνθρωποῖς εὑρεῖν " ἐπεὶ καὶ τοὺς
[4 A“ , SN a Ν ,’ ξ΄ 3 3 A
μέγιστον φρονοῦντας ἐπὶ τῷ περὶ τούτων λέγειν OV ταὐτὰ
’, 3 , 3 Ν a“ 4 e ’ a
dofuley ἀλλήλοις, ἀλλα τοῖς μαινομένοις ὁμοίως διακεῖσθαι
Ν 9 , a ‘ ’ Ν Ν
προς ἀλλήλους. AS. τῶν TE yap μαινομένων τους μεν
Jar δ \ ᾽ ‘ Ν Ν ‘ ‘ Ν a
οὐδὲ τὰ δεινὰ δεδιέναι, τοὺς δὲ καὶ τὰ μὴ φοβερὰ φοβεῖ-
N a ‘ ~~ > »¥ 0 3 N 9 ,
σθαι" καὶ τοῖς μεν ovd ev ὄχλῳ δοκεῖν αἰσχρὸν εἶναι λέ-
“A al φ σ΄ a “ 1 9 J 9 3 4
yew ἢ ποιεῖν ὁτιοῦν, τοῖς δε ovd εξιτητέον εἰς avOpwrrous
ᾶ2 ᾿ ‘ δ . Δ) eS ¥ δ y »
εἶναι δοκεῖν " καὶ Tous μεν OVO ἱερὸν οὔτε βωμον οὔτε ἄλλο
a ᾽ὔ Jar A Ν Ν Q , \ ’ “
τῶν θείων οὐδὲν τιμᾶν, Tous δὲ καὶ λίθους καὶ ξύλα τὰ
φ N\ ᾽ὔ 4 Ν A A ,
τυχόντα καὶ θηρία σεβεσθαι" τῶν τε TEpL τῆς τῶν πάντων
, ’, a ‘ a ἃ ’ ν 4
φύσεως μεριμνωντων τοῖς μεν δοκεῖν ἕν μόνον τὸ ὃν εἶναι,
“- Ν Μ “ A Ν [2 Ν 9A ἴω] Ζ
τοῖς δε ἄπειρα τὸ πλῆθος" καὶ τοῖς μεν ἀεὶ κινεῖσθαι ππάν-
a “ aN δ A δι Ν 4
τα, τοῖς δε οὐδεν ἂν ποτε κινηθῆναι" καὶ τοῖς μὲν πώντα
’ , ee ee ἮΝ Ν ΠΕΣ Ὶ ,
γίγνεσθαί τε καὶ ἀπόλλυσθαι, τοῖς δὲ ovr av γενέσθαι
“ Ia 4“ 9 4 b 4 Ν ‘ > A
ποτε οὐδεν οὔτε ἀπολέσθαι. 15. Eoxore Se περὶ αὐτῶν

94 Character of Socrates. (Xen.

nN , 9° o e 9 ’ ? e a ,
καὶ τάδε" ap, ὥσπερ οἱ τανθρωπεια μανθάνοντες ἡγοῦνται
an’ of Kv , € a Ν a ¥ ef A
τοῦθ, ὅ τι ἂν μάθωσιν, ἑαυτοῖς τε Kal τῶν ἄλλων OTH ἂν
, , oe N e δ a a ’
βούλωνται ποιήσειν, οὕτω καὶ οἱ τὰ θεια ζητοῦντες νομί-
9 N a 4 > ἡ») o , ’
ξουσιν, ἔπειδαν γνῶσιν αἷς ἀνάγκαις ἕκαστα γίγνεται, ποιή-
Ψ , . > 7 "ὦ “ὦ \
σειν, ὅταν βούλωνται, καὶ ἀνέμους καὶ ὕδατα Kat ὥρας καὶ
Ψ A ΝΥ ΄ A , A a ιν Ias
ὅτου ἂν ἄλλου δέωνται τῶν τοιούτων ; ἢ τοιοῦτο μεν οὐδὲν
3 3 ’ > ad 3 ἴω a a @ a ΄
οὐδ᾽ ἐλπίζουσιν, ἀρκεῖ δ᾽ αὐτοῖς γνῶναι μόνον 7 τῶν τοιού-
d , δ Ἢ Φ δε
των ἕκαστα γίγνεται; 16. περι μεν οὖν τῶν ταῦτα πρα-
4 a Mv. ? 8 Ν A 3
γματευομένων τοιαῦτα ἔλεγεν. autos δὲ περὶ τῶν ἀνθρω-
, > A , a ’ὔ 3 - ’ 35 ’ “
πείων GEL διελέγετο, σκοπῶν τί evoeBes, τὶ ἀσεβὲες" τι
Xe ’ 2 ’ Α 4 ὃ 4 4 10 Pe , ’
καλον, τί αἰσχρὸν" τί δίκαιον, TE ἄδικον" TL σωφροσύνη,
,ὔ ’ὔ , 3 ὃ 4 4 4 ’ Λ 4 ’
τί pavia’ τί ἀνδρία, τί δειλία" τί πόλις, τί πολιτικὸς " τὶ
9 “ 3 , 4.9 “ 9 , ἙΝ Ν a Υ͂
ἀρχὴ ἀνθρώπων, τί ἀρχίκὸς ἀνθρώπων " καὶ περὶ τῶν ad-
ἃ \ ἐν Ins € a oY 8 \ 4
λων, ἃ Tous μεν εἰδότας ἡγεῖτο καλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθους εἶναι,
‘\ \ 39 a ? , ba “ σι
tous δὲ ἀγνοοῦντας ἀνδραποδωδεις ἂν δικαίως κεκλῆσθαι.
a Ὁ See . 2 ¢ ἫΝ ’
ΕἼ. Oca μὲν οὖν μη φανερὸς ἣν ὅπως ἐγίγνωσκεν, ov-
Ν εν εν / Ν 3 a !
δὲν θαυμαστῶν ὑπερ τούτων περὶ αὐτοῦ Tapayva@vat τοὺς
’ ὥ ‘ [αὶ Υ̓ “ 9 Ν ’
δικαστάς " ὅσα δὲ πώντες- φδεσαν, θαυμαστὸν εἰ μὴ τούτων
3 ’᾽ ’ 4 . “
ἐνεθυμηθησαν. 18. Bovrevcas yap wate, καὶ τὸν Bov-
x “a og 9 , ? e 4 ‘ Ν ᾽ Ro
ἐυτίκον ὅρκον ὁμόσας, ἐν ᾧ ἣν κατὰ τοὺς νόμου βου.
3 , 3 a ῇ ’ 3 ,
λεύσειν, ἐπιστάτης ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γενόμενος, ἐπιθυμήσαντος
a , NN ιν , 3 7 4 a ,
τοῦ δήμου παρὰ Tous νόμους ἐννέα στρατηγους μιᾷ ψήφῳ
“ 9 ‘ / , 9 3 a
tous audit Θράσυλλον καὶ Epacwidnv αποκτεῖναι πάντας,
3 4 f. 3 ’ 9 . A “ > a) A 4
οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἐπιψηφίσαι, ὀργιξζομένου μεν αυτῷ Tov δημου͵
[οἱ . x “Ὁ 3 4 3 “ XN 4
πολλῶν δε καί δυνατῶν ἀπειλούντων " ἀλλὰ περὶ πλείονος
3 ’ὔ 2 a A / a \ ;
ἐποιήσατο εὐορκεῖν ἢ χαρίσασθαι τῷ δήμῳ παρὰ το δι-
Ν , N ? σι Ν Ν
καιον καὶ φυλαξασθαι τοὺς ἀπειλοῦντας. 19. καὶ yap
3 a Ν > » 3 ’ > ἃ , ΐ
ἐπιμελείσθαι θεοὺς ἐνομιζεν ἀνθρώπων, οὐχ ὃν τρόπον οι
Ἂ / @ Ν A ¥ Ν \ \
WoL νομίζουσιν. ovToe μεν yap οἱονται tous θεοὺς τὰ
. mn 7 Vas ) IA 7 ’ “. ς a ,
μεν εἰδέναι, τὰ δὲ οὐκ εἰδέναι" Σωκράτης δ᾽ ἡγεῖτο πάντα
‘ θ Ν ἐδ / , ὔ Α , ‘ Ν
μεν θεους εἰδέναι, τὰ TE λεγόμενα καὶ πραττόμενα καὶ τὰ

Mem. 4, vur.] Character of Socrates. 95

a A Ἃ σι Α ’
σιγῇ βουλευόμενα, πανταχοῦ δὲ παρεῖναι, καὶ σημαίνειν
“ 3 ’᾽ ΄»“» > ᾽ ’
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις περὶ τῶν ανθρωπείων πάντων.
/ 4 Ψ Ν 2 4 a
20. Θαυμάζω οὖν, ὅπως ποτε ἐπείσθησαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι
, Q Ἁ ΑἉ “ a ἣν 9 “ ‘
Σωκράτην περὶ τοὺς θεους μὴ σωφρονεῖν, tov ἀσεβες μὲν
In’ “ Α Q vy? 3 a 4 ,
οὐδὲν ποτε πρὸς τοὺς θεους οὔτ εἰπόντα οὔτε πραξαντα"
a “ a ’ ὔ “ a 2
τοιαῦτα δὲ καὶ λέγοντα καὶ πράττοντα περὶ θεῶν, ola τις
ry ‘ , N 7 ¥ . / 3 ’
ἂν καὶ λέγων καὶ πράττων εἴὴ TE καὶ νομίζοιτο εὐσεβὲέ-
στατος.

(Book IV., ch. τί!)

aA as ; , φ 9 ε 9
11, Τῶν δὲ Σωκράτην γιγνωσκοντῶν OLOS Ἦν, οἱ ἀρετῆς
9 g 4 “ ~ “A 7 A
εφιέμενοι πάντες ἔτι καὶ νῦν διατελοῦσι πάντων μάλιστα
ry 3 A e ? 4 ¥ . 3 a 3
ποθοῦντες ἐκεῖνον, WS ὠφελιμώτατον ὄντα πρὸς ἀρετῆς ἐπι-
Λλ x, NON ν a a e > 8 ,
μέλειαν. ἐμοὶ μεν Sn, τοιοῦτος ὧν οἷον εγὼ Sunynuat, —
δ ΙΝ “ ed Ω Ν Υ͂ ΝΣ οι a 4
εὐσεβὴς μὲν οὕτως, ὥστε μηδὲν ἄνευ τῆς τῶν θεῶν γνωμης
a , . @o@ ͵ N Ν ‘ ,
ποιεῖν " δίκαιος Se, wore βλάπτειν μὲν μηδε μικρὸν μηδένα,
? a ‘ \ , δ , ς A 3 N
ὠφελεῖν δὲ τὰ μέγιστα TOUS χρωμένους ἑαυτῷ" ἐγκρατὴς
. rd ) r a 4 9 n a
δε, ὥστε μηδέποτε προαιρεῖσθαι τὸ ἥδιον ἀντὶ τοῦ βελτίο-
’ . ὦ N , ’ 4 ,
νος" φρόνιμος Se, ὥστε μὴ διαμαρτάνειν κρίνων ta βελτίω
‘ Ν , . Μ a 3 9 > »
Kal Ta χείρω, μηδε ἄλλου προσδεῖσθαι, add αὐτάρκης
4 N N ᾽ a e 4 ‘ 4 ὔ ᾽ a
εἰναι πρὸς THY τούτων γνῶσιν, ἱκανὸς δὲ καὶ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν
é a A 4 a “ . νγχΧ
τε καὶ διορίσασθαι τὰ τοιαῦτα, ἱκανὸς δὲ καὶ ἄλλους δοκι-
’ “ e ’ 3 4 ΗΝ ’ὔ
μάσαε τε καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντας ἐξελέγξαι, καὶ προτρεψασθαι
79 3 Ν ‘ 9 4 In 3 a @
ew ἀρετὴν Kat Kadoxaryabiav, — ἐδόκει τοιοῦτος εἶναι, οἷος
4 ¥ 3, ’ 3 ON X 3 ὔ 9 φ “
ἂν εἰη ἄριστὸς τε ἀνὴρ Kat εὐδαιμονέστατος. εἰ δὲ τῳ μὴ
> + a Λ a wv 4 ον a
ἀρέσκει ταῦτα, παραβάλλων TO ἄλλον ἤθος “ρος ταῦτα,

ῇ 4
οὕτω κρινέτω.

PLATO.

I. SOCRATES BEFORE HIS JUDGES.

3 A 95 o , o ¥ ? a
A. Ov πολλοῦ γ᾽ ἕνεκα χρόνου, ὦ ἄνδρες Αθηναίοι,
Ν Ψ. Ν > + e oN a , : Ν μ
ὄνομα ἕξετε καὶ αἰτίαν ὑπὸ τῶν βουλομένων τὴν πολιν
a e , 3 , ¥ , ,
λοιδορεῖν, ὡς Σωκρώτη ἀπεκτόνατε, ἄνδρα σοφὸν " φήσουσι
. ’ N 9 9 ᾿ . 9 8 € , eon
yap δὴ με coor εἶναι, εἰ Kat μὴ εἰμὶ, οἱ βουλόμενοι ὑμὶν
9 > »® , 7s ἢ > A a
ονειδίζειν. εἰ οὖν περιεμείνατε ολίγον χρόνον, απὸ TOU
3 7 KA e¢ oA A“ 3 4 “a ‘ “ ‘\ ¢
αὐτομάτου ἂν ὑμῖν τοῦτο ἐγένετο" ὁρᾶτε γὰρ δὴ THY ἡλι-
7 oe / ¥ 3 ΝἉ a ὔ ’ Q 3 ’
κίαν, ὅτι πόρρω ἤδη ἐστὶ τοῦ βίου, θανάτον δὲ eyyus.
, δὲ A 2 “ 4 cea 3 “ “ ‘ 3 aA
λέγω δε τοῦτο οὐ πρὸς TavTas ὑμᾶς, ἀλλὰ προς TOUS εμοῦ
¢ ’ , Ν “ a Ν
καταψηφισαμένους θάνατον. 3. λέγω δὲ καὶ τοδὲ πρὸς
\ 2 AY , ¥ ¥ > κῃ 3 ,
TOUS αὑτοὺς τούτους " ίσως με οἰεσθε, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἀπορίᾳ
, e , ’ e a ς « ¥ >
λόγων EartwxEevat τοιούτων ols ἂν ὑμᾶς ἐἔπεῖίσα, εἰ ῳμὴν
- @ a N , Ν᾽ ? A N ,
δείν ἅπαντα ποιεῖν καὶ λέγειν ὥστε ἀποφυγεῖν τὴν δικῆν.
a a 3 » 9 é “ e fp. 2 4 ’
πολλοὺυ γε δεῖ. αλλ ἄπορίᾳ μὲν εἐάλωκα, ov μέντοι λογῶν,
3 \ ,. . 9 U ιν a ? , \
ἀλλὰ τόλμης καὶ ἀναισχυντίας καὶ τοῦ ἐθέλειν λέγειν TpOs
¢ oa a 4Φ) a δὃόΛι.» ad 24 3 ’ a 4 ͵
ὑμᾶς τοιαῦτα οἱ ἂν ὑμῖν ἥδιστ᾽ ἣν ἀκούειν, θρηνοῦντος TE

x. 3 ,ὔὕ , y “a “ 4 ‘
μου καὶ odupopevou Kat ἄλλα ποιοῦντος καὶ λέγοντος πολλά

> > aie > 4 ν . oo» eo
καὶ ἀνάξια ἐμοῦ, ws eyw φημε" οἵα δὴ καὶ εἰθισθε ὑμεῖς
an » 9 7 > ? ¥ 4 4 a d
τῶν ἄλλων ἀκούειν. ὃ. αλλ οὔτε τότε w7Ony δεῖν ἕνεκα
σὰ 4 n I@s 9 4 ” “
τοῦ κινδύνου πρᾶξαι οὐδεν ἀνελεύθερον, οὔτε νῦν μοι μετα-
Λ “ 3 ,ὔ 9 AY Q a € a
μέλει οὕτως aTrohoynoapEv@, adda πολν μαλλον αἱροῦμαι
@ 9 ͵ ͵ ἃ » fo a Μ Υ ’
ὧδε ἀπολογησάμενος τεθνάναι ἢ ἐκείνως ζῆν" οὔτε yap ὧν
J ¥ >» 3 ὔ Ww”? 23 μ({κυἝυνν 3 ’ »“ a
dixn οὔτ᾽ ἐν πολέμῳ οὔτ᾽ ἐμὲ OUT ἄλλον οὐδένα δεῖ τοῦτο
a ed 3 4 a ” ᾽ \
μηχανᾶσθαι, ows ἀποφεύξεται πᾶν ποιῶν θάνατον. καὶ
Ν 3 σι ’ ’ A , ad 4
yap ἐν Tats puyats πολλάκις δῆλον γίγνεται τι τὸ γέ;

APOL.] Warning to lus Judges. 97

> wv 9 ’ Ἁ oS 3 Ν a 9.3 ¢
ἀποθανεῖν av τις ἐκφύγοι καὶ ὅπλα adels, Kat ep ικε-
j ,ὕ a νΝ ¥ ν
τείαν τραπόμενος τῶν διωκόντων " καὶ ἄλλαι μηχαναὶ
A 2 3 e ν» a , 2 ᾽ὔ
πολλαί εἰσιν ἐν ἑκάστοις τοῖς κινδύνοις ὥστε διαφεύγειν
΄ 3 A δὰ a 4M 7 9 Ν
θάνατον, ἐὰν τις τολμᾷ πᾶν ποιεῖν Kat λέγειν. 4. αλλα
N 3 a > 9 Ν 9 ν , 3 a 3 y
μὴ ov τοῦτ ἢ χαλεπὸν, ὦ ἄνδρες, θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, adrAa
Ἁ a tA [2] x ζὔ A
πολυ χαλεπώτερον πονηρίαν " θᾶττον yap θανάτου θεῖ.
Soa > SN . ΜΝ ‘ xy δ , eo. a
καὶ νῦν eyw μεν, ἅτε Bpadus ὧν καὶ πρεσβύτης, ὑπὸ τοῦ
͵, es. ς ,͵.͵͵͵͵»» , rd ὃ ν N
Bpaburepov ἑάλων, οἱ δ᾽ ἐμοὶ κατήγοροι, ate δεινοὶ καὶ
2 a ¥ Ν a“ Fd ry ‘ a 95 Χ"
ὀξεῖς ὄντες, ὑπὸ τοῦ θάττονος, τῆς κακίας. καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ
‘ Μ ee, € aA , , 3 8 @ δ᾽ e oN
μὲν ἄπειμι ὑφ ὑμῶν θανάτου δίκην ὀφλὼν, οὗτοι δ᾽ ὕπο
A > 4 3 é ’ “ 15 4 .Y 3 ,
τῆς ἀληθείας ὠφληκοτες μοχθηρίαν Kat ἀδικίαν. καὶ ἐγὼ
a , 9 / . @ a , ¥
τε τῷ τιμήματι ἐμμένω, καὶ οὗτοι. ταῦτα μὲν που Lows
Υ͂ . y a φ 94“ ON 4 ¥
οὕτω καὶ ἔδει σχεῖν. καὶ οἶμαι αὐτὰ μετρίως ἔχειν.
NX Ν Ν ᾿ Ν a 2 a ¢ oa A 4
ὅ. Τὸ δὲ & μετὰ τοῦτο ἐπιθυμῶ ὑμῖν χρησμῳδῆσαι, ὦ
4 / N / 3 ΕΣ 3 a 9 ¢
καταψηφισάαμενοί μου" καὶ yap εἰμι ἤδη ἐνταῦθα, ἐν ῳ
’ 4 »¥ fa) ad 4 3
μαλειστ᾽ ἀνθρωποι χρησμῳδοῦσιν, ὅταν μέλλωσιν ἀποθα-
- ον 4 Κ᾽ Δι") , 7
νείσθαι. φημι yap, ὦ ἄνδρες vt eue amrexrovate, τιμωρίαν
cn ef +, Ν ἐν ὩΣ Ἁ UA
ὑμῖν ἥξειν evOus μετα τὸν ἐμὸν θάνατον πολυ χαλεπωτε-
Ν ¢? A a > NX 22 U a “ ray ? 4
ραν, vn Ai , ἢ olay ἐμὲ ἁπεκτόονατε" νῦν yap τοῦτο eLpya-
>/ Ν 3 4 ’ ¥. a
σασθε, οἰόμενοι μὲν ἀπαλλάξεσθαι τοῦ διδόναι ἔλεγχον τοῦ
J “ XN ea \ 9 7 9 4 @e 9 ’᾽
βιου" τὸ de ὑμῖν πολὺ εναντίον ἀποβήσεται, ὡς eyo φημι.
’ ¥ eon en 7 ἃ “ “2λΑΑαΑἈννν n
6. πλείους ἔσονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἐλέγχοντες, OVS νῦν ἐγὼ KaTEL-
ς a x 3 3 , ‘ ’ ¥
xov, ὑμεῖς Se οὐκ ησθάνεσθε" καὶ χαλεπώτεροι ἔσονται
“ , 7 5 ,. εε)}Ἵ «6 a , , ,
ὁσῳ VEWTEPOL εἰσί, καὶ υμεῖις μαλλον ἀαγανακτήσετε. εἰ
Ν ” > 4 9 4 3 vd
yap οἴεσθε, ἀποκτείνοντες ἀνθρώπους, ἐπισχήσειν τοῦ
2 / Y\ ¢ aA @¢ 3 9 a a 9 3 a
ὀνειδίζειν τινὰ ὑμὶν ὅτε οὐκ ὀρθῶς Ente, οὐκ ορθῶς δια-
“ 3 f° ad ¢ 5 Ν ” , \
γοεῖισθε’ ov yap ἐσθ᾽ αὕτη ἡ ἀπαλλαγὴ οὔτε Travu δυνατὴ
\ ¥ Ν 9 > 23 4 ἈΝ / Α e/ Ν Ν
OUTE KAAN, GAN ἐκεινηῆ καὶ καλλίστη καὶ ρᾳστή, μὴ TOUS
Υ ’ 9 > ε “ 4 ¥
ἄλλους κολούειν, GAN EavTov παρασκευάζειν ὅπως ἔσται
e Λ i a Y 9 coa A f
ws βέλτιστος. ταῦτα μεν οὖν ὑμῖν τοῖς καταψηφισαμένοις

’
μαντευσάμενος ἀπαλλάττομαι.
7

98 Socrates before his Judges. [Piao

na ee) , fa? a , ι
7 Τοῖς de ἀποψηφισαμένοις ἡδέως ἂν διαλεχθείην ὑπὲρ
a 4 au 4 > @ ΦΧ
τοῦ γεγονότος τουτουΐ πράγματος, ἐν ᾧ οἱ ἄρχοντες ἀσχο-
’ ww “ 4 ” Φ ? 4 A ,
λίαν ἄγουσι, καὶ οὕπω ἐρχομαι ot ἐλθόντα με δεῖ τεθνάναι.
3 ’ 9 ww ’ κ᾿
ἀλλὰ μοι, ὦ ἄνδρες, παραμείνατε τοσοῦτον χρόνον " οὐδὲν
ον ’ “ “ ? 4 2
yap κωλύει διαμυθολογῆσαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἕως ἔξεστιν.
a ‘ Λ 4 3 - δ “
ὑμῖν yap ὡς φίλοις οὖσιν ἐπιδεῖξαι ἐθέλω τὸ νυνΐ μοι ξυμ-
ry , a 3 Ἁ 4 9 WV ’
βεβηκὸς ti ποτε νοεῖ. 8. ἐμοί γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί ---
ς oa “ “ a) 9 a A rd ’ ,
ὑμᾶς yap δικαστὰς καλῶν ορθῶς ἂν καλοίην ---- θαυμασιὸν
’ φ a 4 “ἢ ΝΥ An ’
τὸ γέγονεν. ἢ yap εἰωθυϊά μοι μαντικὴ, ἡ τοῦ δαιμονίου,
᾽ Ἁ a / , Ν 4 “ aA
ἐν μὲν τῷ πρόσθεν Yporp παντὶ Tavu πυκνὴ ἀεὶ ἦν, καὶ
9." a ? ’ Υ̓͂ , ‘9 A
πάνυ ETL σμικροῖς EVAVTLOUPLEVN, εἰ TL μέλλοιμι μὴ ορθῶς
4 “ Ἁ ΄ ’ 4 en \ 3 Ν
πράξειν" vure δὲ ξυμβεβηκε μοι, ἅπερ ὁρᾶτε καὶ αὕτοι,
\ of ἣν ? ’ ¥ Ν 4 ” a
tauTi ἅ ye On οἰηθείη ἂν τις Kat νομίζεται ἔσχατα κακῶν
φ > \ gs ¥ ᾽ / φ ¥ N
εἶναι. 9. ἐμοὶ Se οὗτε ἐξιόντι ἕωθεν οἴκοθεν ἠναντιώθη τὸ
a a vad A e 7 > 4 3 a 9 A ‘
τοῦ θεοῦ σημεῖον, οὔτε nvixa aveBatvoy ἐνταυθοῖ ἐπι τὸ
, ¥” > 9 a t 9 A 4 ’ ? A ig
δικαστήριον, οὔτ ἐν τῷ λόγῳ οὐδαμοῦ μέλλοντέ τι ερεῖν
’ 3 ΝΜ, 4 a ’ 3 ’ ’
καίτοι ἐν ἄλλοις λόγοις πολλαχοῦ δὴ με ἐπέσχε λέγοντα
’ Ν 4 a “ ὔ Ν a ¥y)? ?
μεταξύ" νυνὶ δὲ οὐδαμοῦ περὶ ταύτην τὴν πράξιν ovr ἐν
¥ 3 Ν ¥ > 9 (4 ? 4 ’ ’ 9
ἔργῳ οὐδενὶ ovT ev λόγῳ ἠναντίωταί μοι. 10. τί ow
¥ 9 e , > \N\ e€an Fa , ἢ
αἴτιον εἶναι ὑπολαμβάνω ; ἐγὼ ὑμῖν ἐρῶ" κινδυνεύει γάρ
Ἁ Ν a 9 Ν ’ Ν 3 ¥ θ᾽
μοι τὸ ξυμβεβηκὸς τοῦτο ayabov γεγονέναι, καὶ οὐκ ἐσ
d e¢ a 9 a e , d 20 Ν 9
ὅπως ἡμεῖς ὀρθῶς ὑπολαμβάνομεν, ὁσοι οἰόμεθα κακον εἶναι
bs ( , Ud 4 3 ‘
τὸ τεθνάναι. μέγα μοι τεκμήριον τούτου γέγονεν" οὐ yup
Ὗ > ὦ 9 9 ’ MM “ 4 Ν a 9 ,
ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως οὐκ nvavtiwbn av pot τὸ εἰωθὸς σημεῖον, εἰ μὴ
Ὗ > NS 3 Ν /
TL ἐμέλλον ἐγὼ ἀγαθὸν πράξειν.
9 4 N Ἁ Aa e Ν 9 4 3
AL. Εννοήσωμεν δὲ καὶ τῇδε, ws πολλὴ ελπὶς ἐστιν
9 δ +N 9 a Ν ’ , 5 Ν “ :
ἄγαθον αὐτὸ εἶναι. δυοῖν yap θάτερὸν ἐστι τὸ τεθνάναι
a ® ‘ ¥ , ‘
ἢ yap οἷον μηδὲν εἶναι, μηδ᾽ αἴσθησιν μηδεμίαν μηδενος
¥ δ A a Ν ‘ , ,
ἔχειν τὸν τεθνεῶτα, ἢ κατὰ τὰ λεγόμενα μεταβολὴ τις
’ 4 4 a a a ’ a
τυγχάνει οὖσα, καὶ μετοίκησις TH Ψυχῇ TOU τόπου TOU
3 4 > »¥. 4 ¥ é ¥ ‘
evOevde εἰς ἄλλον τόπον. 13. Καὶ cite μηδεμία αἰσθησιίς

APoL.] Death 13 a Gain. 99

9 3 ᾽ Φ φΦ 9 ’ ’ > »νκν
ἐστιν, αλλ οἷον ὕπνος ἐπειδὰν τις καθεύδων μηδ ὄναρ
4 ς κα , ᾽ A ¥ e , . Q
μηδὲν ὁρᾷ, θαυμάσιον κέρδος ἂν etn ὁ θάνατος. ἐγὼ yap
A 9 ¥ 9 ὔ ὔ ? x ΄ > @
ἂν οἶμαι, εἰ τινα ἐκλεξάμενον δέοι ταύτην THY νύκτα, ἐν ἢ
od , Ν᾿ > » 2” κα « . ¥
οὕτω κατέδαᾳρθεν wore pnd ὄναρ ἰδεῖν, καὶ τὰς ἄλλας
ΓΑ a e A “ nA c a ¢ 3
νύκτας Te Kat ἡμέρας τας τοῦ Biov τοῦ εαυτοῦ αντυπαρα-
’ ’ »“" ον 4 ὔ 3 a“ $s ww
θέντα ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ δέοι σκεψάμενον εἰπεῖν, πόσας ἄμει-
. of ἢ \ ΄ ΄ A N ͵
νον καὶ ἥδιον ἡμέρας καὶ νύκτας ταύτης τῆς νυκτὸς βεβίω-
ϑ9 a φ “A B ’ 7 A “ od 5 ’ a ἱλλὰ
κεν ἐν τῷ εαυτοῦ βίῳ, οἶμαι ἂν pn OTe ιδιωτὴν τινα, ἃ
ὟΝ ͵ , ᾽ , Kn ς κα >A ,
τον μέγαν βασιλέα εὐαριθμήητους av evpew αὐτὸν ταύτας
Ν “ ” e 4 Ν 4 3 » a e
“ρος TAS ἄλλας ἡμέρας Kat νύκτας. 13. εἰ οὖν τοίουτον oO
θ ᾽; 4.63 4 ὃ ¥ λέ : νΝ Ν 3 δὲ λ ’ ε
ἄνατος ἐστι, κέρδος ἔγωγε λέγω" καὶ yap οὐδεν πλείων ὁ
a , ἢ A Ν ? a / ’ ’ >
πᾶς χρόνος φαίνεται οὕτω δὴ εἷναι ἢ pia νύξ. Εἰ δ᾽ av
4 . a , ᾽ ’ ? ΕΑ ,
οἷον ἀποδημῆσαι ἔστιν ὁ θάνατος ἐνθένδε εἰς ἄλλον τόπον,
. 9 a 93 N ᾽ e oy > a? eo e
καὶ ἀληθὴ ἐστι Ta λεγόμενα, WS ἄρα ἐκεῖ εἰσιν ἅπαντες οἱ
a 4 “ 3 Ν ἢ Ν A 9 6M”
τεθνεῶτες, Tt μεῖζον ἀγαθὸν τούτου ein av, ὦ ἄνδρες δικα-
’ 3 7 3 4 2 τ΄ 3 ‘
σταί; 14. εἰ γάρ τις ἀφικόμενος εἰς Atdov, ἀπαλλαγεὶς
’ a ’ a δ » N 9
τούτων τῶν φασκόντων δικαστῶν εἶναι, εὑρήσει τοὺς ἀλη-
: a A «4 4 4 > A ’ ’
Gas δικαστας, οἵπερ καὶ λέγονται ἐκεῖ δικάζειν, ---- Μίνως
ἐ ’ Ν ᾿ “ LY , \ yy.
τε καὶ PadupavOus καὶ Ataxos καὶ Τριπτόλεμος καὶ ἄλλοι
ed a ¢e 4 ’ > Ὁ 3 a ε a ’
ὅσοι τῶν ἡμιθεων δίκαιοι ἐγένοντο ἐν τῷ ἑαυτῶν βίῳ. ----
9 ΄ A ¥ ¢ 3 , A 4 ? ’
apa φαύλη ἂν εἴη ἡ ἀποδημία; ἢ αὖ Ορφεῖ ξυγγενέσθαι
N 4 ve ’ x, ¢ 4 4 ἃ 4 ¥
καὶ Movoaip καὶ Ἡσιόδῳ καὶ “Ομήρῳ ἐπὶ πόσῳ ἂν τις
4 3 48 e A ΙΝ “ \ ’ 97 ,
δεξαιτ᾽ ἂν ὑμῶν ; 15. ἐγὼ μὲν yap πολλάκις ἐθέλω τεθνά-
3 “4“σ 39 9 Ν 3 A 9 wy Ν » a ιν
ναι, εἰ ταῦτ ἐστιν ἀληθῆ" ἐπεὶ ἔμοιγε καὶ αὐτῷ θαυμαστὴ
KA Υ e Ν > e , 2 ΄ , Ν
av εἴη ἡ διατριβη αὐτόθι, ὁπότε ἐντύχοιμι Παλαμήδει καὶ
4 a A .N My ¥ aA nw
Atavtt τῷ Τελαμῶνος καὶ εἰ τις addos τῶν παλαιῶν διὰ
, ¥ 4 3 Λ : Ν 3 A
κρίσιν ἄδικον τέθνηκεν, αντιπαραβώλλοντε Ta εμαυτοῦ
, N . 9 » ς > A 2 > 4 > @s #
παθὴη πρὸς TA ἐκείνων, ὡς ἐγὼ οἶμαι, οὐκ ἂν andes εἰη.
δ Ἁ “ lA “ 3 a 3 , . > a
Kat δὴ τὸ μέγιστον, tous ἐκεῖ ἐξετάζοντα καὶ ἐρευνῶντα
oe . 9 Ὰ ’ / o α ,) 5 Ν ͵
ὥσπερ tous ἐνταῦθα διάγειν, τίς αυτῶν σοφὸς ἐστι, καὶ TIS
¥ δ ¥ x 78 / 2 ¥ > ¥
οἴεται μὲν ἔστι δ᾽ ov. 16. ἐπὶ πόσῳ δ᾽ ἂν τις, ὦ avopes

240391

100 Socrates before las Judges. [PLato

X ’ 3 ’ “ > A 4 3 ὔ \
δικασταὶ, δεξαιτο εἐξετασαι τὸν ἐπὶ Τροίαν ἀγαγόντα τὴν
‘ a? , 4 , a Υ ἢ
πολλὴν otpatiav, ἢ Οδυσσεα, ἢ Σίσυφον, ἢ ἀλλοὺυς μυρι-
Ν M” ¥ A a 4 3 a ,
ous ἂν τίς εἴποι καὶ avdpas καὶ γυναῖκας ; ols εκεῖ διαλε-
N a . 9 ͵ > » A ¥ 2. ᾿
γεσθαι καὶ ξυνεῖναι καὶ e€erafew ἀμήχανον ἂν evn εὑδαι-
4 ’ 3 , ΄ ed e a 3
μονίας. πάντως ov δηπου τούτου γε ἕνεκα οἱ ἐκεῖ ἀπο-
’ ’ Ν ” 9 4 / 9 ¢ 3 a
κτεινουσι" Ta TE yap ἄλλα εὐδαιμονεστεροί εἰσιν οἱ εκεῖ
A 9 , ν oy δ N , γ.7 , 3
τῶν ἐνθαδε, καὶ ἤδη τὸν λοίπον χρόνον αθανατοὶ εἰσιν,
Υ̓͂ δ 4 4 a~ 9
εἰπερ γε τὰ λεγόμενα αληθὴ ἐστιν.
9 Ν ¢€ Aa Ν 9 mM “ 27
17. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ὑμᾶς χρη, ὦ avdpes δικασταὶ, εὐελπιδας
9 Ν ιν 4 No a a 4 N
εἶναι πρὸς τὸν θάνατον, Kat ἕν τι τοῦτο διανοείσθαι ἄληθες,
ee 9 ¥ ? Ν 4 Aa “ IAN ¥ “~ ¥
ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνδρὶ ἀγαθῷ κακὸν οὐδὲν οὔτε ζῶντι οὔτε
, ων 2? n eon A ἢ ΄ ἢ
τελευτήσαντι, οὐδὲ ἀμελεῖται ὑπὸ θεῶν τὰ τούτου πραγ-
ar ΝΠ > N a > NS a 3 ’ 4 ? 4
ματα" οὐδε Ta ἐμὰ νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου γέγονεν, adda
a. | 9 a f ΕΥ̓ / N 9 ’
μοι δῆλον ἐστι τοῦτο, ὅτε ἤδη τεθναναν καὶ ἀπηλλαχθαι
, 4 9 “\ a VY 9 AN 9 A
πραγμάτων Bedtiov ἦν pot. Sia τοῦτο καὶ ἐμὲ οὐδαμοῦ
9 4 ay a ,. a ,
ἀπέτρεψε TO σημεῖον, καὶ ἔγωγέ τοῖς καταψηφισαμενοις
Ν “ ’ > f / ͵ ᾽
μον καὶ τοῖς κατηγόροις οὐ TavU χαλεπαίνω. καίτοι Ov
’ a 7 , 4 Ν ’ ’ 9
ταύτῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ κατεψηφίζοντὸ μου καὶ κατηγόρουν, adr
3 - ’ὔ “ a 4 ‘4
οἰόμενοι βλάπτειν" τοῦτο αὐτοῖς ἀξιον μέμφεσθαι. 18. To-
C4 ’ 9. A “ Ν en > aN ‘pn?
σόνδε μέντοι αὐτῶν δέομαι" τοὺς υἱεῖς μου, ἐπείδαν ηβη-
᾽ὔ 9 ¥ > SN a a
σωσι, τιμωρήσασθε, ὦ avdpes, TavTa ταῦτα λνυποῦντες
ed >. NN ἜΣ ᾽ ’ oA ean a RK 4 a
ἅπερ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ελύπουν, ἐαν ὑμῖν δοκῶσιν ἢ χρημάτων ἢ
Sad ’ 4 a A 9 a XN ΡΝ a ot
ἄλλου του πρότερον ἐπιμελεισθαι ἢ ἀρετῆς, καὶ εαν δοκῶσι
4 Ν x 9 4 > ω 4 >, N e€ A d
Tt εἶναι pndev ὄντες, ὀνειδίζετε αὑτοῖς, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ULV, OT!
> 9 A e A . oY» , 4 ¥ 5 \
οὐκ ἐπιμελοῦνται ὧν δεῖ, καὶ OLOVTAL TL εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς
Ν XN ON a A / Ν > NSN
ἄξιοι. καὶ ἐὰν ταῦτα ποιῆτε, δίκαια πεπονθὼς Eyw ἐσομαι
€ so? ὁ A > », XN oe ec a
up ὑμῶν, AVTOS TE καὶ OL υἱεῖς.
3 Ν \ Μ ) 3 7 > Q “ 9 /
Adda yap ἤδη wpa ἀπιέναι, ἐμοὶ μὲν ἀποθανουμένῳ,
ea \ ς ἢ N ¢ oa ¥ ΑΝ
ὑμῖν δὲ βιωσομένοις " ὁπότεροι δὲ ἡμῶν ἔρχονται ἐπι apel-
a 1S λ ἐν Xn A a θ a
νον πρᾶγμα, ἄδηλον παντὶ πλὴν ἢ τῷ θεῳ.

PuaEDo.] The Death of Socrates. 101

Ii. THE DEATH OF SOCRATES.

[Phaedo, I.-V.; LXII.-LXVI.]

/ 7 N 9 , ,
1. Εχεκράτης. «Αὐτὸς, ὦ Φαίδων, παρεγένου Σω-
9 »"᾽" Ὁ 4 φ “ ’ ΝΥ 3 a
κράτει ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ, ἢ TO φάρμακον ἔπιεν ἐν TH δεσμω-
’ὔ ΕΝ y¥y
τηρίῳ, ἢ ἄλλου του ἤκουσας ;
, 9? ’
Φαίδων. Αὐτὸς, ὦ ᾿Εχέκρατες.
4Φ 4 25." ιν a ’,
E. Ti οὖν δή ἐστιν ἅττα εἶπεν ὁ ἀνὴρ πρὸ τοῦ θανά-
N A 3 “΄ eas \ a > NS 3 ΄
του; καὶ πῶς ἐτελεύτα ; ἡδέως γὰρ ἂν ἔγω ακούσαιμιε.
N 4 " A A ’ 3 “ 4 >
καὶ yap οὔτε τῶν πολιτῶν Φλιασίων οὐδεὶς πάνυ TL ἐπι-
‘\ a 3 Υ͂ 29a ,
χωριάζξει τὰ νῦν AOnvate, οὔτε τις ξένος ἀφῖκται χρόνου
Ὁ 9 la 4 A Φο id 3 a @? ᾽
συχνοῦ ἐκεῖθεν, ὅστις ἂν ἡμῖν σαφές τι ἀγγεῖλαι οἷος τ
9 Ν ΄ , Νν ὦ , Ν ’ 4
ἦν περί τούτων, πλὴν ye δὴ ὅτε φώρμακον πιὼν ἀποθάνοι"
a) 3
τῶν δὲ ἄλλων οὐδὲν εἶχε φραζειν.
IAN δ Ν a / ¥ > 7 A 4
3. ᾧ. Ovde ta περὶ τῆς δίκης apa ἐπύθεσθε ὃν τρό-
2 2
TOV ἐγένετο ;
Ν Ἃ δ» Υ , δ 9 ’ 4
E. Nat, ταῦτα μεν ἡμῖν ἤγγειλέ τις, καὶ εθαυμαξομέν
oS I. / a aA a
γε ὅτι, πάλαι γενομένης αὐτῆς, πολλῷ ὕστερον φαίνεται
ὃ 3 , 49> 9% a > /
ἀποθανων. τί οὖν ἦν τοῦτο, ὦ Φαίδων ;
, > a 9? , ¥ N
®. Τύχη tis αὐτῷ, ὦ Ἐχέκρατες, συνεβη" ἔτυχε yap
a a 7 ’ 3 4 A ᾽
τῇ προτεραίᾳ τῆς δίκης ἡ πρύμνα ἐστεμμένη τοῦ πλοίου,
a 39 a 3 a ,
0 εἰς Δῆλον Αθηναῖοι πέμπουσιν. :
A Ν Ν 4 3
E. Τοῦτο δε δὴ τί ἐστιν ;
“ἢ “ δι oS 9 “A 9
8. ᾧ. Τοῦτο ἐστι τὸ πλοῖον, ὥς φασιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐν

Φ ’ 3 ᾽ Q \ φ Ἁ 3 ’ Ὗ
@ Θησεὺς ποτε εἰς Κρητην τοὺς dis eta ἐκείνους ᾧχετο

¥ . ¥ , δ 2 N > » a 9 » ,

ἄγων, καὶ ἔσωσε τε καὶ αὑτὸς ἐσωθη. τῷ οὖν Ἀπόλλωνι
4 e ’ , 9 a e 7 54

evEavto, ὡς λέγεται, τότε, εἰ σωθεῖεν, ἐκάστου ἔτους θεω-
/ > 2 A A Noy Soa 5) > »

ρίαν απάξειν εἰς Δῆλον" ἣν bn ἀεὶ καὶ νῦν ἔτι εξ ἐκείνου

ΕΣ A a , 3 N > ν᾿

kat ἐνιαυτὸν τῷ θεῷ πέμπουσιν. ἐπειδὰν οὖν ἄρξωνται
A ’ὔ ’ 3 “ 3 a > A , ’

τῆς θεωρίας, νόμος ἐστὶν αὑτοῖς εν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ καθα-
΄ , Ν / / 3 , \

ρεύειν τὴν πόλιν, καὶ δημοσίᾳ μηδενα ἀποκτιννύναι, πρὶν

102 The Death of Socrates. [Piato

A 9 A >,? a a \ σι : A
ἂν εἰς Δῆλον ἀφίκηται τὸ πλοῖον καὶ πάλιν δεῦρο" τοῦτο
> 9 f 2 a ’ ’ rd ,
5 ἐνίοτε ἐν πολλῷ χρόνῳ γίγνεται, ὅταν τύχωσιν ἄνεμοι
3 , 32 4 b ] ‘ > 9 NX a 4 3 ‘ e
ἀπολαβόντες αὑτούς. ἀρχὴ ὃ eats τῆς θεωρίας, ἐπειδὰν ὁ
ε ἃ a 3 “In, ’ “ ΄ n
ἱερεὺς τοῦ Απόχλωνος στέψῃ THY πρύμναν τοῦ πλοίου"
a ¥ oe ’ A , Aa ,
τοῦτο δ᾽ ἔτυχεν, ὥσπερ λέγω, τῇ προτεραίᾳ τῆς Siens γεγο-
’ Ν A “ ͵ 24» A
vos. διὰ ταῦτα Kat πολὺς χρόνος ἐγένετο τῷ Σωκράτει
2 “ 4 e Ν A a ,
ev τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ, ὁ μεταξὺ τῆς δίκης Te καὶ τοῦ θανάτου.
yas Ν Ν ‘ > N ’ : >
4. Ε. Ti δε & τὰ περὶ αὑτὸν τὸν θανατὸν, ὦ Φαίδων;
, 4 N 7 Ν ᾿ ͵ ᾿ ἢ ε΄.
τίνα nv τὰ λεχθέντα καὶ πραχθέντα, καὶ τίνες ot παρα-
4 a 3 4 a » ’ὔ 3 ¥ ey
γενόμενοι τῶν ἐπιτηδείων τῷ ἀνδρί ; ἢ οὐκ εἰων οἱ ἄρχοντες
a 3 a, ¥ 4
παρεῖναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρημος ἐτελεύτα φίλων ;
2 a 3 Q a 4 ,
ᾧ. Ovédapas: ἀλλὰ παρῆσὰν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε.
a Ν ’ 4 e ’ en
E. Ταῦτα δὴ πάντα προθυμήθητι ws σαφέστατα ἡμίν
> 9 , / 3 ’ 4 4
ἀπαγγεῖλαι, εἰ μή τίς σοε ἀσχολία τυγχάνει οὖσα.
Ν , \ 4 e rd
ᾧ. ᾿Αλλὰ σχολάζω ye, καὶ πειράσομαι ὑμῖν διηγησα-
“\ A “ A 4 Ν 33" ’
σθαι" καὶ γὰρ τὸ μεμνῆσθαι Σωκράτους καὶ αὑτὸν λέγοντα
, # 9 ’ὔ 7 ” 7A ’ ed
καὶ ἄλλου ἀκούοντα ἔμοιγε act πάντων ἥδιστον.
3 . \ 4 / “ Ν 3 ὕ
E. ᾿Αλλα μὴν, ὦ Φαίδων, καὶ τους ἀκουσομένους γε
rd ¢ 7 ¥ 3 A A e “A a 3 4
TOLOUTOUS ETEPOUS ἔχεις" ἄλλα πείρω WS ἂν δύνῃ ἀκριβε-
ry ,
στατα διελθεῖν πάντα.
\ N ¥ 4 ¥ 4
5. ᾧ. Καὶ μὴν ἔγωγε θαυμάσια ἔπαθον trapayevope-
4 Ἁ , 4 3 “ 2 c
νος. οὔτε yap ws θανάτῳ παρόντα pe ἀνδρὸς επιτηδείου
3ῚῪ 3 4 3 ’ 4 e sn 3 / φ 3 4
ἔλεος εἰσῃει" εὐδαίμων yap pot avnp ἐφαίνετο, ὦ Ἐχε-
Ν “Ὁ ’ “\ A 3 ω Ν
κρατες, καὶ τοῦ τρόπου καὶ τῶν λόγων, ὡς ἀδεῶς καὶ γεν-
4 7 (<4 3 A 9 9
ναίως ἐτελεύτα, ὥστε μοι ἐκεῖνον παρίστασθαι μηδ᾽ εἰς
ad a7 A / / 7 3 Α > a ] ’
Διδου ἰόντα ἄνευ θείας μοίρας ἰέναι, αλλα κακεῖσε αφικο-
Φ ’ Υ ’ . Ὗ δὲ
μένον εὖ πράξειν, εἴπερ τις πώποτε καὶ ἄλλος. Sia On
a IAN 7 3 “ > ἢ e ὅΝ A ws
ταῦτα οὐδὲν πάνυ μοι ἐλεεινὸν εἰσήει, ὡς εἰκὸς ἂν δόξειεν
‘4 4 ¥ 9 » 3 ͵
εἶναι παρόντι πένθει" οὔτε αὖ ἡδονὴ ὡς ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ
a ¥ Ω͂ 27 \ 4 a ὔ
ἡμῶν ὄντων, ὥσπερ εἰωθειμεν" καὶ γὰρ οἱ λόγοι τοιοῦτοι
4 32: .5":ὄ 2 a ¥ / / / a !
τινες ἦσαν" ANN ατεχνῶς αἀτοπὸν τὶ μοι TAOS “παάρην, Kab

PHAEDO. ] Friends in the Prison. 103

97 “ 9 ᾽ὔ ΓῪ e a a e a
τις αήηθης κρᾶσις ἀπὸ te τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη ὁμοῦ
x })»"» a ? ϑ 4 ad > ἢ 9 ~ ¥
καὶ ἀπῸ τῆς λύπης, ἐνθυμουμένῳ ὅτι auTiKA ἐκεῖνος ἔμελλε
τελευτᾶν. καὶ πάντες οἱ παρόντες σχεδόν TL οὕτω διεκεί-
en “ A > , ‘N 4 @ . @ a
μεθα, ὁτὲ μὲν γελῶντες, ἐνίοτε Se δακρύοντες, eis δὲ ἡμῶν
καὶ διαφερόντως, ᾿Απολλόδωρος " οἶσθα γάρ που τὸν ἄνδρα
καὶ τὸν τρόπον αὐτοῦ.
6. Ε. Πῶς γὰρ ov;
ὦ. ’Exeivos τε τοίνυν παντάπασιν οὕτως εἶχε, καὶ
a A wv ? A Ν μ ¥.
@UTOS ἔγωγε ετεταραγμὴν καὶ Ob ἄλλοι.
E. “Ervyov δὲ, ὦ Φαίδων, τίνες παραγενόμενοι ;
ᾧ. Οὗτός τε δὴ ὁ ᾿Απολλόδωρος τῶν ἐπιχωρίων παρῆν,
\ e Ξ Ἁ e Ἁ 3 “ 4 “ [4
καὶ ὁ Κριτοβουλος, καὶ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ [Κρίτων], καὶ ἔτιὲ
€ 0 ‘x 93 , N 4 , \ 9 0
Eppoyevns καὶ Ἐπιγενης καὶ Αισχίνης καὶ Αντισθενης "
4 Ἁ δ , e “ ΙΝ ’ 4
ἣν δὲ καὶ Κτήσιππος ὁ Παιανιευς, καὶ Μενέξενος, καὶ
¥ “ A 9 4 4 “ 3 “
ἄλλοι τινες τῶν ἐπιχωρίων " Πλάτων δε, οἶμαι, ἠσθένει.
E. ἘΞένοι δέ τινες παρῆσαν ;
®. Ναὶ, Σιμμίας τέ γε ὁ Θηβαῖος καὶ Κέβης καὶ Φαι-
δωνίδης, καὶ Μεγαρόθεν Εὐκλείδης τε καὶ Τερψίων.
E. Τί δε; ᾿Αρίστιππος καὶ Κλεόμβροτος παρεγέ-
γοντο ;
9 a 3 > ἢ ‘ 94 ἢ
Φ. θυ δῆτα "ἘΣ Αὐγίνῃ γὰρ ἐλέγοντο εἶναι.
E. ᾿άλλος δε τις παρὴν ;
ὦ. Σχεδόν τι οἶμαι τούτους παραγενέσθαι.
E. Ti οὖν δή; τίνες, φὴς, ἦσαν οἱ λόγοι ;
7% Φ. ᾿Εγώ σοι ἐξ ἀρχῆς πάντα πειράσομαι διηγή-
7A A Ἁ ‘N 4 4 e ¢ 27
σασθαι. αεὶ yap δὴ καὶ tas πρόσθεν ἡμέρας ειωθειμεν
a “ > SN Ν e yw 4 “ 4
φοιτᾶν, καὶ ἐγὼ Kat οἱ ἄλλοι, Tapa τὸν Σωκρατη, συλ-
’ ΄ 3 Ν vd 9 @ e , > »
λεγόμενοι ἕωθεν εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον, ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἡ δίκη ἐγέ-
veto: πλησίον γὰρ ἣν τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου. περιεμένομεν οὖν
ἑκάστοτε, ἕως ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, διατρίβοντες per’
ἀλλήλων - ἀνεῴγετο γὰρ οὐ mpm: ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη,

104 The Death of Socrates. [PLato

2 Y . δ ͵ ‘ ‘ 4 ;
εἰσῆειμεν Tapa τὸν Σωκράτη, καὶ τὰ πολλὰ .διημερεύομεν
3 3 a XV Ν ἈΝ ’ eo ἢ 4
per αὐτοῦ. καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε πρωϊαίτερον ξυνελέγημεν.
a \ v Ρ a 4 x. 93 4 2 A
τῇ yap προτεραίᾳ ἡμέρᾳ, ἐπειδὴ ἐξήλθομεν ex τοῦ δεσμω-
e 4 3 4 ed “ a 3 ,
τηρίου ἑσπέρας, ἐπυθόμεθα ὅτε τὸ πλοῖον ἐκ Δήλου ἀφιγ-
4 ¥ Λ φ 3 , Φ ς . τῇ
μένον εἴη. “παρηγγείλαμεν ovy ἀλληλοιῖς ἥκειν ὡς TpPwiai-
3 \ 3 4 XN of N ea 3 N e
Tata εἰς τὸ εἰωθὸς. 8. καὶ ἥκομεν, καὶ ἡμῖν εξελθων ὁ
δ Cd 97 e 7 4 Q AN
θυρωρὸς, ὁσπερ εἰώθει ὑπακούειν, εἶπε περιμένειν καὶ μὴ
’ σ A a 7 4 A
πρότερον παριέναι, ἕως ἂν αὐτὸς κελεύσῃ " λύουσι yap,
ΝΜ ς , UA Ν , cd A
ἔφη, οἱ ἕνδεκα Σωκράτη, καὶ παραγγέλλουσιν ὅπως ἂν
75 a e ἢ λ , 2 λὺὶ δ᾽ 9 4 ?
τῇδε TH ἡμέρᾳ τελευτήσῃ. οὐ ToAvY ὃ οὖν χρόνον ἐπι-
“ φ , 3 @ | 9 ᾽ 3 ’ Φ
σχῶν, ἧκε καὶ ἐκέλευεν ἡμᾶς εἰσιέναι. εἰσίοντες οὖν κατε-
4 Ν Ἁ 4 ¥ A Ν N
λαμβάνομεν τὸν μὲν Σωκράτη ἄρτι λελυμένον, τὴν δὲ
punt / ΄ \ vy - 4 “ 4
Ξανθιίππην ---- γιγνώσκεις yap — eyovcay τε τὸ παιδίον
. κα Ν , ε 9 9 ς κα ε
αὐτοῦ καὶ παρακαθημένην. ὡς οὖν εἶδεν ἡμᾶς ἡ Ἐαν-
, 9 , ͵ Ν a> ” 9 e Α΄ 3,7)
θίππη, avevpnunoe τε καὶ τοιαῦτ ἀττα εἶπεν, οἷα δὴ εἰω-
e a ¢ ? ’ ed ,
θασιν αἱ γυναῖκες, ὅτι Q Σώκρατες, ὕστατον δὴ σε προσε-
a a e 3 4 Ἀ ἃ ’ὔ’ x, ¢ ’
ροῦσι νῦν οἱ ἐπιτηδείοι, καὶ σὺ τούτους. καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης,
’ 2 “ , Φ , ” ‘
βλεψας εἰς tov Κρίτωνα, 2 Κρίτων, efn, ἀπαγέτω τις
> A ΝΥ x. 3 ’ . 3 a 4 A A ͵
αὐτὴν οἰκαδε. καὶ ἐκείνην μεν ἀπῆγον τινες τῶν τοὺ Κρι-
a 4 Ν 4 e Α 4
τωνος βοῶσαν τε καὶ κοπτομένην. 9. ὁ δὲ Σωκράτης,
3 9 Ἁ ’ 4 4 “ ὔ
ανακαθιζόμενος εἰς τὴν κλίνην, συνέκαμψε TE TO σκέλος
Ν 4ς. A Ν ἈΝ 4 ee ‘Q ν »”
καὶ ἐξετρίψε τῇ χειρί, καὶ τρίβων apa, Mls ἀτοπον, edn,
φΦ ” ¥ / 9 a ἃ a e mM” θ
ὦ ἄνδρες, EOLKE τε εἶναι τοῦτο, ὃ καλουσιν ot ἀνθρωποι
tas e / , δ ιν a 3 ’ 3
ἡδύ" ὡς θαυμασίως πέφυκε πρὸς τὸ δοκοῦν εναντίον εἶναι,
Ν Xx x n of a 7 SN Ἁ θέλ ’ θ »
τὸ λυπηρον, τῷ ἅμα μεν αὐτὼ μὴ εἐθελειν παραγίγνεσθαι τῷ
4 , aN , , \ of N , ͵
ἀνθρώπῳ, eav δὲ τις διωκῃ τὸ ετερον καί λαμβάνῃ, σχεδὸν
4 ’ ’ Ἀ “ Cd ed 93 a
Tt ἀναγκάζεσθαι λαμβανειν Kat TO ἕτερον, ὥσπερ EK μιᾶς
A , ‘> + , a ΧἿΧ > 9
κορυφῆς συνημμένω δὺυ ὄντε. καὶ μοι δοκεῖ, ehn, εἰ ἐνε-
4 “4 AN ” a A a e e Ν
νόησεν avta Αίσωπος, μῦθον ἂν συνθεῖναι, ὡς ὁ θεος βου-
’ 3 A ᾽ὔ a 3 Ἁ 3 ᾽ὕ
λόμενος αὑτὰ διαλλάξαι πολεμοῦντα, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἠδύνατο,
A 93 Ὧ»ΔΦΝ ϑ A \ \ Ν A a @
ξυνῆψεν εἰς ταῦτον αὐτοῖς tas Kopudas, καὶ δια ταῦτα @

PHAEDO.] Why he wrote Poetry. 106

A . @ a 9 aoe a ,
ἂν τὸ ετερον παραγένηται, ἐπακολουθεῖ ὕστερον καὶ τὸ
if ad 9 Ἁ 9 a y 9 nen a
ἕτερον. ὥσπερ οὖν καὶ αὐτῷ μοε ἐοίκεν, ἐπειδὴ ὕπο TOU
a 9 3 a , ᾿ , .. } ‘ of
δεσμοῦ ἣν ἐν τῷ σκέλει πρότερον TO ἄλγεινον, ἥκειν δὴ
,ὔ 3 a Ων φῳ 7
φαίνεται ἐπακολουθοῦν to ηδύ.
9 , e “ SY “ ’ὔ 9 4
10. ‘O οὖν Κέβης ὑπολαβων, Nn τὸν Δία, ὦ Σώκρατες, -
4 9 3 4 ϑ 4 Ἁ ’ a
ἔφη, εὖ γ᾽ ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσας με. περὶ yap Tor τῶν
Φ 4 2 ’ Ἁ a 4 a ’
ποιημάτων ὧν πεποίηκας, ἐντείνας τοὺς τοῦ Αἰσώπου λο-
Ν “ 3 “ 3 , 4 VN 4
yous καὶ To εἰς Tov Απολλω προοίμιον, καὶ ἄλλοι τινες
¥ x 2 SN δ ΕΣ , of ‘ 5
pe ἤδη ἤροντο" ἀτὰρ καὶ Eunvos πρώην, ὃ τι ποτε διανο-
Ἁ 3 Ν a 4 > “ > A ’ 3 δὲ
ηθεῖς, ἐπειδὴ δεῦρο ἤλθες, ἐποίησας avTa, πρότερον οὐδεν
, , 9 Φ 4 Λ “χα ¥ 2 N >
πώποτε ποιήσας. εἰ οὖν TL σοι μέλει τοῦ ἔχειν ewe Ev-
a ? 7 od 9 ᾽ a 9 ἴδ A @
nvo@ ἀποκρίνασθαι ὅταν pe αὖθις ἐρωτᾷ (ev olda yap ὅτι
> +»? 4 ON 7 ’ , U ’ 5
ἐρήσεται), εἶπε τί χρὴ με λέγειν. LL. Λέγε τοίνυν, edn,
> a 4 3 oe 9 3 4 4 Iat
avto, ὦ Κέβης, ταληθῆ, ὅτε οὐκ ἐκείνῳ βουλόμενος ovde
Ξ 3 a ? , 4 3 a
τοῖς ποιήμασιν αὐτοῦ ἀντίτεχνος εἶναι ἐποίησα ταῦτα"
¥ Ν e > ee ¥ 3 3. 23 ’ a 2 ,
ἤδειν γὰρ ὡς ov ῥᾷδιον εἴη" ἀλλ᾽ ἐνυπνίων τινῶν «ποπειρω-
4 , \ 9 4 4 Κν ’ e
μενος TL λέγει, καὶ αφοσιούμενος εἰ apa πολλάκις ταύτην
Ν ’ὔ 2 , » ᾿᾽᾿
τὴν μουσικήν μοι ἐπιτάττοι ποιεῖν. ἦν γὰρ δὴ ἄττα τοι-
΄ 4 A “ > A 2 94 3 A
ade* πολλάκις μοὶ φοιτῶν TO αὐτὸ ἐνύπνιον ἐν τῷ παρελ-
,ὔ wv 3 A “ ’ δ" Ἁ
θοντι βίῳ, ἀλλοτ᾽ ev ἄλλῃ ores φαινόμενον, τα avta δε
΄ 3 / ¥y Ν ’ , 3 ,
λέγον, 42) Swxpares, ἔφη, μουσικὴν ποίει καὶ εργάζου.
.3λχ a , ὔ Pv ” ‘i
12. καὶ ἐγώ ev ye τῷ πρόσθεν χρόνῳ, ὅπερ ἔπραττον τοῦ-
e , > » , ᾽ὔ 4.2 ,
TO vireXapBavov AUTO μοι παρακελεύεσθαι τε καὶ ἐπικελευ-
[2 e a 7 4 \ 32 Ν ef
εἰν, ὥσπερ ot τοῖς θέουσι διακελευόμενοι" καὶ ἐμοὶ οὕτω
\ 2 Ψ ¥ a 3 7 δ
τὸ ἐνύπνιον ὅπερ ἔπραττον τοῦτο επικελεύειν, μουσικὴν
ω e /; Ν “ 4 A 3 A
ποιεῖν, ὡς φιλοσοφίας μεν οὐσης μεγίστης μουσικῆς, ἐμοῦ
Ν , A >? 23 “ 4 3 4 Ν
δε τοῦτο πράττοντος " νῦν δ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἥ τε δίκη ἐγένετο, καὶ
e a a ε Ν , 4 3 ’ Υ͂ a
ἡ Tov θεοῦ eoptn SsexwArve pe ἀποθνήσκειν, ἔδοξε χρῆναι,
ἽΥ a, ᾽ὔ a 3 4 ’ὔ x
εἰ apa TroAAaKis μοι TWpoTTAaTTOL TO ἐνύπνιον ταύτην τὴν
’ Ν x 3 3 A 3 ‘N ζω
δημωδη μουσικὴν ποιεῖν, μὴ ἀπειθῆσαι αὐτῷ, ἀλλὰ ποιεῖν.
3 , \ 4 ΝΣ: , N ᾽ , 6
ἀσφαλέστερον yap εἰναι μὴ ἀπιέναν πρίν ἀαφοσιωσασθαι

106 The Death of Socrates. [PLato

td a 4, A a 3 Ul 4
ποιήσαντα ποιήματα, καὶ πειθομενον τῷ ενυπνίῳ. 1B. ov-
‘ Ἁ "» 4 “ > ͵ @ 9 e A
tw Sn πρῶτον μεν εἰς τὸν θεὸν ἐποίησα, ov ἣν ἡ παροῦσα
, Sats δ 2 , ¢ N N ,
θυσία" pera δὲ τὸν θεὸν, ἐννοήσας ὅτι τὸν ποιητὴν δέοι,
ΗΥ͂ N 3 ’ 3 4 »
εὐπερ μέλλοι ποιητὴς εἶναι, ποιεῖν μύθους ἀλλ᾽ οὐ λόγους,
\ 9 8 > 9 ΝΥ A a Ν A ’
καὶ αὑτὸς οὐκ ἢ μυθολογικοὸς, dia ταῦτα δὴ οὖς προχείρους
Ν , ΄ Ν > 2 ? 2 ’
εἶχον καὶ ἤἠπιστάμην μύθους τοὺς Αἰσώπου, τούτους ἐποί-
i @ , > ¢ ra 4 Φ Κ [4 Ε 3 a
noa—ols πρώτοις ἐνέτυχον. ταῦτα οὖν, ὦ Κεβης, Eunve
, .»»ε ν ἃ a 98 ’ ς ,
φράξε, καὶ ἐρρῶσθαι, καὶ ἂν σωφρονῇ, ἐμὲ διώκειν ὡς τά-
¥ ‘ e 4 4 ΄ Ὡ
χίστα. ἄπειμι δε, ὡς ἔοικε, τήμερον" κελεύουσι γὰρ
᾿Αθηναῖοι.
νι ε , φ , ¥ 9
14. Καὶ ὁ Σιμμίας, Οἷον παρακελεύει, ἔφη, τοῦτο, ὦ
Σ 4 Ep a . λλὰ « ~5 3 4 “a 3 ὃ ἰ"
ὠκρατες, Eunve ; πολλὰ yap ἤδη ἐντετύχηκα τῷ avdp
Ν > 2 φ ΝΥ 3 e a ον
σχεδὸν οὖν, ἐξ ὧν ἐγὼ ἤσθημαι, οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν σοι ἑκὼν
9 / ; / ev ὦ > ’ > /
εἶναι πείσεται. Ti Sai; 45 ὃς" ov φιλόσοφος Eunvas ;
» ~ @ e , 3 td “ ¥ \
Epouye δοκεῖ, ἔφη ὁ Σιμμίας. ᾿Εθελήσει τοίνυν, edn, καὶ
> A N ed gs ὔ ’ ,
Ἐνηνὸς καὶ πᾶς ὅτῳ ἀξίως τούτου τοῦ πράγματος μετε-
> Νν / ς, > ,
στιν... ov μέντοι γ᾽ tows βιάσεται αὑτόν" ov yap φασι
“ 9 x. of 4 a A Ν ’
θεμιτὸν εἶναι. 15. Καὶ ἅμα λέγων ταῦτα καθῆκε τα oxe-
ΕΣ a , > A Ν “ Ν ’ Ω͂
λη [ἀπὸ τῆς κλίνης] ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ καθεξόμενος οὕτως
wv N ¥ 9 7 A e , a
ἤδη Ta λοιπὰ διελέγετο. ἤρετο οὖν αὑτὸν ὁ KeBns: Las
A ’ S 4 Q a a 9 φ a é
τοῦτο λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες, τὸ μὴ θεμιτὸν εἶναι eavtov βια-
3, 4 A 3 , Ν σ
ἕεσθαι, ἐθέλειν δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἀποθνήσκοντι τὸν φιλόσοφον ἕπε-
U ’ 3 3 ’ a “ ,
σθαι; Ti δὲ, ὦ Κέβης ; οὐκ ἀκηκόατε σύ τε Kat Σιμμίας
Ν U4 ’ , 7a ἡ
περὶ τῶν τοιούτων, Φιλολάῳ συγγεγονότες ; Οὐδὲν γε σα-
a Φ , 3 Ν Ν > N23 3 a ιν 35. a
φῶς, ὦ Σώκρατες. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν καγὼ εξ axons περί αὐτῶν
μ a ν δ, , 3 δ ’ In NS ,
λεγω" ἃ μεν οὖν τυγχάνω ακήκοως, φθόνος οὐδεὶς λέγειν.
Ν ¥ δ λ ’ 9. » 2
καὶ γὰρ ἴσως καὶ μάλιστα πρέπει, μέλλοντα ἐκεῖσε ἀποδη-
a a ἐγ a Q A 3 ὃ 4 a
pew, διασκοπεῖν τε καὶ μυθολογεῖν περὶ τῆς ἀποδημίας Τῆς
39. κ᾿ , ιν > SN 4 4 ’ εν ¥ ~
ἐκεῖ, ποίαν τινὰ αὑτὴν οἰόμεθα εἶναι " TLE yap ἂν TIS Καὶ
aw 3 a , ¢, ἢ a ,
ποιοῖ ἄλλο ἐν TH μέχρι ἡλίου δυσμῶν χρόνῳ ;

PHAEDO.] Concerning his Burial. 1C7

9 Α , ¢ \ @ ἢ Φ
16. "Adda τούτων δὴ ἕνεκα χρὴ ὧν διεληλύθαμεν, ὦ
/ ΄ὰ a ad > a ‘ 4 3 a 4
Σιμμία, πᾶν ποιεῖν, ὥστε ἀρετῆς Kat φρονήσεως ev τῷ βίῳ
a . 9 \ Ε N ’
μετασχεῖν " καλὸν γὰρ τὸ ἄθλον, καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς μεγάλη.
κα ‘ % ͵ \ Soe
ὑμεῖς μὲν οὖν, ἔφη, ὦ Σιμμία τε καὶ Κέβης καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι,
> OA ad ΄ 2 A \ A
εἰσαῦθις ἔν τινε χρόνῳ ϑὅκαστοι πορεύσεσθε" ἐμὲ δὲ νῦν
Υ a ,) ἃ > AN N ee , N ,
ἤδη καλεῖ, φαίη ἂν avnp τραγικὸς, ἡ εἱμαρμένη, καὶ σχεδὸν
σ 4 “ “ ’ a 4 Ν ,
τί μοι ὥρα τραπέσθαι πρὸς τὸ λουτρὸν" δοκεῖ γὰρ δὴ βέλ»
4 va “ ’ “ ᾽ν J
τιον εἶναι λουσάμενον πιεῖν TO φάρμακον, καὶ μὴ πράγ-
. a ’ “ ’
ματα ταῖς γυναιξὶ παρέχειν νεκρὸν λούειν.
4 3 a ,ὔ ¥ 9
17. Ταῦτα δὴ εἰπόντος αὐτοῦ, ὁ Κρίτων, Elev, ἔφη, ὦ
, reas 7 4a 7 SS? ON Noa
Σώκρατες " τί δὲ τούτοις ἢ ἐμοὶ ἐπιστέλλεις, ἢ wept τῶν
͵ a , d ¥ a ¢ a»?
παίδων ἢ περὶ ἄλλου Tov, ὃ TL ἂν σοι ποιοῦντες ἡμεῖς EV
, ra qa aN 4 ¥ 9
χάριτι μάλιστα ποιοῖμεν; “ἽΑπερ act λέγω, ἔφη, ὦ Kpi-
ω ζω > A 3 ’
τῶν, οὐδὲν καινότερον " ὅτι ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιμελούμενοι
@ “ 3 Α a 3 a x ec 3 a 3 a
ὑμεῖς, καὶ ἐμοὶ καὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς καὶ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς ἐν χαρίτε
, a or a δ a , x
ποιήσετε ἅττ᾽ ἂν ποιῆτε, κἂν μὴ νῦν ὁμολογήσητε" ἐὰν
Χ cea AY > >? a “ δ oS >
δὲ ὑμῶν μὲν αὐτῶν ἀμελῆτε, καὶ μὴ θέλητε, ὥσπερ κατ
¥ ᾿ Ν a ᾽ , 3 ao
ἰχνή, κατὰ Ta νῦν τε εἰρημένα καὶ τὰ ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν
’ a > 3A x e ’ 4 fn ’ “
χρόνῳ ζην, ovd ἐὰν πολλὰ ὁομολογήσητε EV τῷ πάαροντι καὶ
’ Fas 4 A Ν
σφοδρα, οὐδὲν πλέον ποιήσετε. 18. Ταῦτα μὲν τοίνυν
͵ ¥ od Ὰ , ,
προθυμηθησόμεθα, ἔφη, οὕτω ποιεῖν" θάπτωμεν δέ σε τίνα
’ [4 A ¥ 4. 3 , 4
τρόπον ; “Orrws av, ἔφη, βούλησθε, ἐάνπερ ye λαβητέ με,
N . 3 ᾽ eon , ιν. ΨΦ ς a \ ‘
καὶ μὴ expuyw ὑμᾶς. γέλασας δὲ ἅμα ἡσυχῇ, καὶ πρὸς
ς κ᾿ 3 ,ὕ 9 ἜΣ) > γ᾽ ,
ἡμᾶς ἀποβλέψας, εἶπεν" Οὐ πείθω, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, Kpi-
ε > » 3 φ ς ’ e Ν 4
TWVA, WS ἐγὼ εἰμι οὗτος ὁ Σωκράτης, ὁ νυνὶ διαλεγόμενος
x s A a 4 3. 3 Υ̓͂ ,
καὶ διατάττων ἕκαστον τῶν λεγομένων, ἀλλ OLETAL pe
2... δ 9 ἃ ¥ ὃ. / “ Ν . 2 A
ἐκεῖνον εἶναι, OV ὄψεται ολίγον ὕστερον νεκρὸν, καὶ ἐρωτᾷ
Ν a , 4 . 9 NS Λ ‘ U
δὴ πῶς με θαπτη. ὅτι δὲ ἐγὼ πάλαι πολὺν λόγον πε-
e 3 “ ’ “ ? 4 e¢ a
ποίημαι, WS, ἐπειδὰν πίω TO φάρμακον, οὐκέτι ὑμῖν παρα-
ai ee, ee ee > ON 9 , , 5
μενῶ, ἀλλ οὐχήσομαι ἀπιὼν εἰς μακάρων δὴ τινας evdat-
, a », a 2. a κ΄ , ,
μονίας, ταῦτά pot δοκῶ αὐτῷ ἄλλως λέγειν, παραμυθοῦ-

108 The Death of Socrates. ὀ᾽ [Prato

oe δ coa od δ Ε ᾿ 3 ,
μενος ἅμα μεν ὑμᾶς, ἅμα ἐμαυτὸν. 19. εγγυήσασθε
4 Ν , ¥ ν 2 , > 7 τ ἃ Φ
οὖν με πρὸς Kpitwva, ἔφη. την ἐναντίαν ἐγγύην ἢ ἣν ovTos

δ ‘ Ν a e ‘ . 9 SN
πρὸς tous Stxactas ἠγγνᾶτο. ovTos μεν yap ἦ μὴν παρα-
σι e [4] ‘ φ Ν “ A ᾽ ᾽ὔ 3
μενεῖν" ὕμεις δὲ ἢ μὴν μὴ παραμενεῖν εγγνήσασθε, ἐπει-
. 3 7 3 N 3 , 3 a , a
dav ἀαποθάνω, αλλα οὐχήσεσθαι πίονται, tva Κρίτων ῥᾷον
7 ᾿ ~ 4 A Q σι A , A ’
φέρη, καὶ μὴ ὁρῶν μου τὸ σῶμα ἢ καιόμενον ἢ KaTOpUTTO-
a “Ὃ φ “ , 4
μενον ἀγανακτῇ ὑπερ ἐμοῦ ws Sewa πάσχοντος, μηδὲ λέγῃ
? a a e A 6 Σ 4 “A 3 4 A
ἐν TH ταφῇ, ὡς ἢ προτίθεται Σωκρατη ἢ ἐκφέρει ἢ Kato-
΄ Φ Ν Υ θ 4 δ᾽ ἃ ΦΥ K, / Ν Ν
ρύττει. εὖ yap tobe, ἦ ὃς, ὦ ἀριστε Κρίτων, τὸ μὴ
A , 3 , 3 >, A A ‘ ἡς A
KAXWS λέγειν οὐ μονον εἰς AUTO τοῦτο πλημμελες, AAG
Ν ’ὔ ᾽ A A “ 3 Ν wn X
καὶ κακὸν τι ἐμποιεῖ ταῖς ψυχαῖς. adda θαρρεῖν τε χρῆ,
Ν / > SN a Ἶ ‘ , «“ od
καὶ φάναι τουμὸν capa θάπτειν, καὶ θάπτειν οὕτως ὅπως
Υ̓ Λ 9 N Λ ς κ᾿ ’ 9
av got φίλον ἢ, καὶ μάλιστα ἡγῇ νόμιμον εἰναι.
a 2? 9 SN > A Ν > , 2 Υ͂ , e
20. Ταῦτ εἰπὼν ἐκεῖνος μεν ανίστατο εἰς οἰκημᾶ TL ὡς
᾽ὔ \ oe / ef 2 A eo oa 3 > th
λουσόμενος, καὶ ὁ Κρίτων εἰπετο αὐτῷ, ἡμᾶς δ᾽ εκέλευε
’ ’ 4 “ e A 3 ‘N ,
περιμέμειν. περιεμένομεν οὖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς auTous διαλεγο-
‘\ 3 ’ ‘3 : A Ν 3 4
μενοι περὶ τῶν εἰρημένων, καὶ ἀνασκοποῦντες, τοτε δ᾽ αὖ
Ἀ “-- A t e ς 2 a ¥ 3
wept τῆς ξυμφορᾶς διεξιοντες, ὅση ἡμῖν yeyovula εἴη, ate-
ἊὉ [ ’΄ ) “ 4 ͵ > “
VUOS ἡγούμενοι ὥσπερ πατρὸς στερηθέντες διάξειν ὀρφανοὶ
N ¥ ͵ 3 ν as 2 7 So 2 3
τὸν ἔπειτα βίον. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐλούσατο, καὶ ἠνέχθη παρ
> Ss N / , δ > aA εε ν 4 φ
αὑτὸν Ta παιδία ---- δύο yap αὐτῷ υἱεῖς σμικροὶ ἤσαν, εἰς
‘ 4 δ >] a a 3 / 3 4, 3
Se μέγας --- καὶ αἱ οἰκεῖαι γυναῖκες αφίκοντο, ἐκείναις ἐναν-
/ a , ’ Ν 3 Λ ef
τίον τοῦ Κρίτωνος διαλεχθεὶς τε Kat επιστείλας ἅττα
2 7. Ν “ [4] N “ 4 3 ’ 9 XE
ἐβούλετο, τὰς μὲν γυναίκας καὶ τὰ παίδια ἀπίεναι εκέλευ-
> N \ @ 2 € A
σεν, autos δὲ κε παρ ημᾶς.
> "ν 3 Ν ς- 7 , N
21. Kai ἣν ἤδη eyyus ἡλίου δυσμῶν" χρόνον yap πο-
“ ΄ Ε 2 9. XN +3 5» 4 4 “ 3
λυν διέτριψεν ἔνδον. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ἐκαθέξετο λελουμένος, καὶ ou
, > Ν a , , @ e a red
πόλλ, ἅττα μετὰ ταῦτα διελέχθη" καὶ ἧκεν ὁ τῶν ἕνδεκα
ς a, δ > FN 4 , ¥ 5)
ὑπηρέτης, Kal στὰς Tap αὑτὸν, 2 Σώκρατες, ἔφη, ov κατα-
’ a ¥ , Ψ
γνώσομαι σοῦ ὅπερ ἄλλων καταγιγνώσκω, OTL MOL χαλε-
’ὔ a “A 3 Ν 3 “a 4
παίνουσι καὶ καταρῶνται, ἐπειδὰν αὐτοῖς παραγγέλλω

PHAEDO.] The Cup of Hemlock. 109

4 A ? 3 ’ a 9 é “
πίνειν τὸ φάρμακον, ἀναγκαζόντων τῶν ἀρχόντων. σὲ δ᾽
ΟΝ ¥ ¥ 2 ’ a 4 ’
ἐγὼ καὶ ἄλλως ἔγνωκα ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ γενναιότατον

‘ \ γ ¥ . 4 a 4 a
καὶ πραότατον Kat ἄριστον avdpa ὄντα τῶν πώποτε δεῦρο
3 7 ‘N x oY a 9 ae of 3 3 Ἁ 4
ἀφικομένων " καὶ δη Kat νῦν ev old ὅτε οὐκ ἐμοὶ YaXeTral-

͵ . Ν , 7 2.9 8 Sf a 9
VELS, γιγνωσκεῖς Yap TOUS αἰτίους, αλλ, ἐκείνοις. γὺυν OUD,

9 . AD 3 a 0 ‘ a ¢ ea
οἶσθα yap ἃ ἦλθον ἀγγέλλων, χαίρέ TE καὶ πειρῶ ὡς ῥᾷστα

, 3 a \ Φ ΄
φέρειν τὰ αναγκαῖα. καὶ ἅμα δακρύσας μεταστρεφόμενος
> » Ν 4 3 , a x, 8 4
ἀπῇει. 22. Καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ἀναβλέψας προς avtov, Kat

\ ¥ A Ἀ “ ὔ x. of “
συ, ἔφη, χαῖρε, καὶ ἡμεῖς ταῦτα ποιήσομεν. καὶ ἅμα πρὸς
foa e 3 a Γ ΟΥ̓ Ὡ “ s
ἡμᾶς, Qs ἀστεῖος, edn, ὁ avOpwiros* καὶ παρὰ TuvTa pot
Ν 4 S Ν , > + . 9 ’ a
τὸν χρόνον προσῇει, καὶ διελέγετο evioTe, καὶ ἣν ἀνδρῶν
ee Sa ε , ’ 5 ΄ >>’ v δ)
@OTOS, καὶ νῦν ὡς γενναίως με αποδακρύει. αλλ, aye On,
4 ’ , 2. A \ » ’ ., 7
ὦ Κρίτων, πειθώμεθα αὐτῷ, Kat ἐνεγκάτω τις τὸ φάρμακον,
°° ps > as N 7 eo” Ne
a τέτριπται" εἰ δὲ wn, τρυψάτω ὁ avOpwiros. 38. καὶ ὁ

’ 3 3 Φ ” ¥ 9 , ¥ ef,
Κρίτων; ᾿Αλλ oipat, edn, ἔγωγε ὦ Σώκρατες, ἔτι ἥλιον
9 x, 8 σι “ Ν Ν ’ ὦ 9 A 9
εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς ὄρεσι, καὶ οὕπω δεδυκεναι. καὶ ἅμα ἐγὼ οἶδα

. ’ a: gS / ’ \ a ᾽
καὶ ἄλλους πανυ oe πίνοντας, ἐπειδὰν παραγγελθῇ αὐ-

a ’ὔ ’ ΙΝ τ φ , ’ ιν N
τοῖς, δειπνησαντας τε καὶ πίοντας εὖ μάλα. ---- ἀλλὰ μηδὲν
3 7ὔ ¥ A 3 A x ¢ 7 9 ’ 4
ἐπείγου" ἔτι yap ἐγχωρεῖ. καὶ ὁ Σωκρατης, Εἰκότως γ᾽,
Υ 4 ᾽ ? a s A a ἃ Ν 4
edn, ὦ Κρίτων, ἐκεῖνοι τε ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν, OVS συ λέγεις,
” Ν a a ’ὔ Ἂν a
οονταῦ yap κερδανεῖν ταῦτα ποιήσαντες, καὶ ἔγωγε ταῦτα
> 4 bf , Jar Ν 4 a, /
εἰκότως οὐ ποιήσω" οὐδὲν γὰρ οἶμαι κερδαίνειν ὀλίγον
d Ν 4 A 9 a 3 a
ὕστερον πιῶν, ἄλλο γε ἢ γέλωτα οφλησειν παρ᾽ ἐμαυτῳ,

’ “A a Ν ’ 3 “ ” > »
ἡλιχόμενος τοῦ ζῆν, Kat φειδόμενος οὐδενὸς ETL EVOVTOS.
zu > } Κ ¥ a “ Ν ν ’
ἀλλ ἐθι, edn, πιθοῦ καὶ μὴ ἄλλως ποίει.
᾿ 4 7 9 , ” a \ 4

24. Και ὁ Ἀρίτων ἀκουσᾶς ἔνευσε τῳ παιδι πλησιον
e a Ne A 3 “ Ν “ , 4
ἐστῶτι, καὶ ὁ παῖς εἐξέελθων, Kat συχνὸν χρόνον διατρίψας,
4 ¥ “ Λ , “ , 3 ΄
ἧκεν ἄγων τὸν μέλλοντα διδοναν τὸ φώρμακον, ἐν κύλικι

’ 4 Sark Ν ς , “ ”
φέροντα τετριμμένον" Lowy δὲ ὁ Σωκράτης τὸν ἄνθρωπον,

3 ¥ 9 Λ \ N , 3 , / ‘
Kiev, ἔφη, ὦ βέλτιστε, συ γὰρ τούτων ἐπιστήμων, TL χρὴ

a Ν Υ “A ’ Ψ ¥
ποιεῖν; Οὐδὲν ἄλλο, ἔφη, ἢ πιόντα περιιέναι, ἕως ἂν σον

110 The Death of Socrates. [Prato

, 9 a Λ ’ Μ a“ \
Bupos ev τοῖς σκέλεσι γένηται, ἔπειτα κατακεῖσθαι" καὶ
Ψ ἙΝ , \ Ψ x δ ΄ a
οὕτως αὐτὸ ποιήσει. καὶ ἅμα ὥρεξε THY κύλικα τῷ Σω-
, Loa N Ν h ef 9 » ,
κράτει. 25. καὶ ὃς AaBwv, Kat para ἵλεως, ὦ ἔχε-
earn a Ian ’ Η a ᾽
κρατες, οὐδὲν τρέσας, ovde διαφθείρας οὔτε τοῦ χρώματος
Υ̓͂ a ’ὕ 3 9 oe 2, “ e
οὔτε TOU προσώπου, αλλ ὥσπερ εἰωθει, ταυρηδὸν ὑπο-
’ὔ “ a ¥ , [4 4 ‘ aA a
βλέψας πρὸς tov ἄνθρωπον, Τί λέγεις, ἐφη, περὶ τοῦδε τοῦ
, ον . } a ’ »¥ dA ¥ a
πόματος πρὸς TO ἀποσπεῖσαί τινι ; ἕξεστιν, ἢ ov; Τοσοῦ-
¥ 9 , , [τ 2» “ 4
τον, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατες, τρίβομεν, ὅσον οἰόμεθα μέτριον εἶναι
i; ) Ψ » «9. Ὁ , / a
πιεῖν. Μανθάνω, 7 δ᾽ ὅς" ἀλλ᾽ εὔχεσθαί γέ που τοῖς
a ΥῃΥ ͵ 4 ‘ ‘ , ἐν Φ , 9 A
θεοῖς ἐξεστί Te καὶ χρὴ, THY μετοίκησιν τὴν ἐνθένδε εκεῖσε
9 a , a ‘ Noa SN x , 4 /
εὐτυχῆ γενέσθαι" ἃ δὴ Kat ἐγὼ εὔχομαι τε καὶ γένοιτο
᾽ὔ .o 5" a 3 , “ 4 9
ταύτῃ" καὶ ἅμα εἰπὼν ταῦτα, ἐπισχόμενος καὶ μᾶλα εὐχε-
Α 9 Λ 3 2
ρῶς Kat εὐκόλως ἐξεέπιε.
Leia ¢ ἌΝ, \ 2 a ev 4
26. Και ἡμῶν οἱ πολλοὶ τέως MEV ἐπιεικὼς OLOL τε ἦσαν
’ N 4 “΄ ε Noo” ’ ἢ N
κατέχειν τὸ μὴ δακρύειν" ws Se εἰδομεν πίνοντά τε καὶ
3 4 > > .23 [4] 4 “ 3 A 3 A
πεπωκότα, οὐκέτι, αλλ ἐμοῦ ye Bia καὶ αὐτοῦ ἀστακτὶ
> + Sas ῦΨ 3 , > » ’ ,
ἐχώρει ta Saxpva, ὥστε ἐγκαλυψάμενος ἀπέκλαιον ἐμαυτὸν"
2 ‘ δὴ 3 n 4 3 ἈΝ “ > a ’ eA ? ὃ Ν
νου yap δη ἐκεῖνον γε, adda τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ τύχην, οἵου ἀνδρὸς
e 7ὔ 3 ’ Ν e Ν K; ’ 4 ’
ἐταίρου ἐστερημένος εἰην. ὃ δὲ Δἄριτων ett πρότερος
> aw? . 9 4, >> ,ὕ A , 3 ,
ἐμοῦ, ἐπειδη οὐχ οἷος T ἦν κατέχειν τὰ δάκρνα, ἐξανέστη.
"A Ἃλ ὃ δὲ ..,, 9 ἮΝ θ ’ δὲ 3 4
πολλοδωρος δε καὶ Ev τῷ ἐμπροσθεν χρόνῳ οὐδεν επαυ-
’ NX “ “ é ? 7 4
ero δακρύων, καὶ δὴ καὶ tote ἀναβρυχησάμενος κλαίων
: 3 a 3 4 ee 93 4 a ’
καὶ ἀγανακτῶν οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε τῶν παρον-
’ 3 A , 3 A ‘N @ Υ͂
τῶν, πλὴν γε αὐτοῦ Σωκράτους. ἐκεῖνος δε, Οἷα, ἔφη,
4φ f 2 N ’ 2 ed 0
ποιεῖτε, ὦ θαυμάσιοι. ἐγὼ μέντοι οὐχ ἥκιστα τούτου
A Ν a 3 ’ Ψ Ν A
ἕνεκα TAS γυναίκας ἀπέπεμψα, ἵνα μὴ τοιαῦτα πλημμε-
λοῖε e Q 4 > ?- oe 3 9 4 Ἁ x a
ν" Kab γὰρ ἀκήκοα, ὅτι ἐν εὐφημίᾳ χρὴ τελευτᾶν.
3 > ¢ 7 ” ἐν a. a 3 4
αλλ ἡσυχίαν τε ἄγετε καὶ KapTeperte. καὶ ἡμεῖς axov-
9 4 A N 3 7 7
σαντες noyuvOnuev τε Kat ἐπέσχομεν τοῦ Saxpuel.
e Ν “ 3 4 e 4 ᾽
97. O δε περιέλθων, ἐπειδὴ οἱ βαρύνεσθαι ἔφη τὰ σκέ-
, Ψ Ψ N > 7 ¥
An, κατεκλίθη ὕπτιος " οὕτω yap ἐκέλευεν ὁ ἄνθρωπος"

PHAEDO.] The Death of Socrates. | 111

\ Κ᾽ 9 ’ 4 a φ φ ‘ “ ,
καὶ ἅμα ἐφαπτόμενος αὐτοῦ οὗτος ὁ δοὺς τὸ φάρμακον,
Ν , 3 ’ ‘ , ιν x
διαλιπὼν χρόνον ἐπεσκόπει τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰ σκέλη,
¥ 4 ? ” a ’ WV 9 9 ’
κἄπειτα σφόδρα πιέσας αὐτοῦ τὸν πόδα, ἤρετο εἰ αἰσθα-
e > * » N Ὗ A 9 N ,
voto’ ὃ ὃ οὐκ ἔφη. Kat peta τοῦτο αὖθις τὰς κνήμας "
. 2 ἐν rd Coan 9 a ’ [2 4 ’
καὶ ἐπανιὼν οὕτως ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἐπεδείκνυτο, ὅτε ψύυχοιτὸ Te
‘ ΄ N N oe . 4 ef s ‘
καὶ THyvuotTO. καὶ αὐτὸς ἥπτετο, καὶ εἶπεν ὅτι, ἐπειδὰν
\ a , > A ’ 9 , ¥ 9
πρὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ γένηται αὐτῷ, τότε οἰχήσεται. ἤδη οὖν
> κα ‘ . 8 9 ’ . 9
σχεδὸν TL αὐτοῦ ἦν τὰ περὶ TO ἦτρον ψυχόμενα, καὶ ἐκ-
’ 3 « 4 ἃ Ν a
καλυψάμενος, ἐνεκεκάλυπτο yap, εἶπεν, ---- Ὁ On τελευταῖον
2 , 4 ’ ” na 23 a 9?
ep0eyEato, —' 2 Κρίτων, ἔφη, τῷ ᾿Ασκληπιῷ ὀφείλομεν
> , 3 > 9 . 3 ’ ϑ x
ἀλεκτρυόνα " ἀλλ ἀπόδοτε καὶ μὴ ἀμελήσητες. 38. Adda
A ” ¥ ’ 9 3 σ᾽ Ν # 4
ταῦτα, ἔφη, ἔσται, ὁ Κρίτων" add Spa, εἰ Te ἄλλο λέγεις.
a 3 ’ 3 A Ia ” 3 ’ mu? 9D ἡ
ταυτα ἐρομένου αὑτοῦ οὐδὲν ETL ἀπεκρίνατο, GAN ολίγον
’ὔ ἊἋ 9 7 Q ¥ ,
χρόνον διαλιπὼν, ἐκινήθη τε καὶ ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐξεκάλυψεν
28 va . ¥ Υ IAN . ε , ’
αὑτὸν, καὶ ὃς Ta ὄμματα ἐστησεν" ἰδὼν δε ὁ Κρίτων ξυνε-
‘ ’ \ Ν 9 4
AaBe to στόμα τε Kat τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς.
σ HS ς ν, 495" E , a e , ca 9 »»
€ τέλευτη, ὦ χεκρατες, TOU ETALPOV ἡμῖν ἐγένετο,
3 ὃ Ν e e a a A a 4 Φ 3 ΄ > +f
avopos, ὡς ἡμεῖς φαῖμεν ἂν, τῶν τότε ὧν ἐπειράθημεν apt-
. ¥ , \ ἢ
στου, Kab ἄλλως φρονιμωτατου καὶ δικαιοτάτου.

HERODOTUS.

I. INVASION OF GREECE BY DARIUS.

he ON , e 3 , ,

I. Baciret δὲ Δαρείῳ ὡς ἐξηγγέλθη Σάρδις ἁλούσας
᾽ A e ’ 3 ’ ν} ’ a ‘
ἐμπεπρῆσθαι ὑπὸ te A@Onvatov καὶ Ιωνων, πρῶτα μεν

᾽ : «. e 3 4 a > ’ 2 ’ ’
λέγεται αὐτὸν, ὡς ἐπύθετο ταῦτα, ᾿Ιωνων οὐδένα λόγον

’ ¥ Ψ 4 ς 59» A \ ‘
ποιησάμενον, εἰρεσθαι oitives elev ot AOnvators peta δὲ
a 3 A “ , , ΝΣ Ἁ 3 4
πυθόμενον αἰτῆσαι τὸ τόξον, λαβόντα Se καὶ ἐπιθέντα
4... "ἡ ¥ 3 N 2 4 > oa ’ὔ ‘
οἵστον, ἄνω ἐς TOV οὐρανὸν ἀπεῖναι, καί μὲν ἐς τὸν ἠέρα

Λ 9 a 4 a 3 a 3
βώλλοντα εἰπεῖν, 2 Ζεῦ, ἐκγενέσθαι μοι ᾿Αθηναί-

͵ ¥ N a , e. Ἂ
ους τίσασθαι" εἰπαντα δὲ ταῦτα προστάξαι ἑνὶ τῶν
’ , , ? 3 ‘ ες,
θεραποντων, δείπνου προκειμένου αὐτῷ, ἐς τρίς ἑκάστοτε

9 nr é U a 3 4
εἰπεῖν, Δέσποτα, μέμνεο τῶν Αθηναίων.
‘N A 3 ς A e 4

2. Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο απεπειρᾶτο ὁ Δαρεῖος τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων,
[τά 3 ’ ” 7 4 e aK ’

6 τι ἐν νόῳ ἔχοιεν, κότερα πολεμέειν EWUT@ ἢ παραδιδοναι
/ > 2 , 4 , ¥ ¥ ͵
σφεας αὐτοὺς. διέπεμπε ὧν κήρυκας, ἄλλους αλλῃ τάξας
κα . ’ > 4 fe. A ‘
ava τὴν Ἑλλάδα, κελεύων αἰτέειν βασιλεῖ γῆν τε καὶ
ff ? ‘ Ν 9 Ν e , ¥ ¥. δ
ὕδωρ. τούτους μὲν δὴ εἰς τὴν Ελλαδα ἔπεμπε, ἄλλους δε
’ὔ 3 \ e a 4 ,. ~
κήρυκας διέπεμπε es tas ἑωυτοῦ Sacpodpopous πόλιας τὰς

’ 4 Ν \ e N
παραθαλασσίους, κελεύων νέας TE μακρᾶς Kal ἱππαγωγα

a ἢ ., δ , a
πλοία ποιέεσθαι. 8. Οὕτοι τε dn παρεσκεναζοντο ταῦτα,

δ a 3 Ne , ἣ N ‘
καὶ τοῖσι ἥκουσι ἐς τὴν EdAaSa κήρυξι πολλοὶ μεν ἤπει-

’᾽ ν A ; «ἢ 9 + e / 4 δὲ
ρωτέων ἔδοσαν τὰ προΐσχετο αἰτέεων ὁ Πέρσης, παντες ὃὲ
A 3 . 9 , 3 a ‘ Δ,
νησιῶται ἐς TOUS ἀπικοίατο αἰτήσοντες. οἱ Te δὴ ἄλλοι

A a A “ ed 4 XN ω -
νησιῶται διδοῦσι γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Δαρείῳ, καὶ Sn καὶ

> A 4 4 a 3 / 3 A 3
Aiyiwnrat. ποιήσασι δὲ σφι ταῦτα ἰθέως Αθηναῖοι ere-

’ U 2 N 4 ¥ , 9 4
κεατο, δοκέοντες ἐπὶ σφίσι ἔχοντας tous Aiywntas δεδω-

VI, 104.] Milttiades. 118.

, ς oe a Π ? > N , , Q
Kevat, ὡς ἅμα τῷ Iléepon ἐπὶ σῴφεας στρατενωνται. Kat
4 ’ 3 / / 4 3 ΙΝ
acpevot προφάσιος επεέλάβοντο, φοιτέοντες τε ἐς τὴν

-"᾿ 3 Q 4
Σπάρτην κατηγόρεον τῶν Αἰγινητέων Ta πεποιήκοιεν προ-
, Ν \ 4 a
δόντες τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα. ᾿Αθηναίοισι μὲν δὴ πύλεμος συνῆπτο
93
πρὸς Αἰγινήτας.
ς Ν 4 “ e a 3 ’ Φ 3 ’

4. Ὃ Se Πέρσης to εωυτοῦ ἐποίεε, ὥστε ἀναμιμνη»

4 a) 4 A ’ ἴω ϑ
σκοντός τε αἰεὶ τοῦ θεράποντος μεμνῆσθαί μὲν τῶν ᾿Αθη-
’ a 4 ld “
ναίων, καὶ Πεισιστρατιδέων προσκατημένων καὶ διαβαλ-
Ά , ἴω ’

λόντων ᾿Αθηναίους, ἅμα δὲ βουλόμενος ὁ Δαρεῖος ταύτης
A , A /

ἐχόμενος τῆς προφάσιος καταστρέφεσθαι τῆς ᾿Ελλάδος

Ν Ἁ ’ > A a “. α΄ .ὔ ὡ A
tous μὴ δόντας αὐτῷ γῆν Te καὶ ὕδωρ. Μαρδόνιον μεν &n

͵ , a , 4 a ’
φλαύρως mpntavra τῷ στόλῳ παραλύει τῆς στρατηγίης,
Ἁ 3 3 4 >?
ἄλλους δὲ στρατηγοὺς ἀποδέξας ἀπέστελλε ἐπί te Epe-
. ? a 3 A / x. 3
. tprav καὶ ᾿Αθήνας, Aativ τε ἐόντα Μῆδον γένος, καὶ Apta-
4 εν 4 4 ζω 3 U e a 3
φέρνεα τὸν Aptadepveos παίδα, ἀδελφιδέον ἑωυτοῦ" εν-
’ Ὡ- 3 4 3 / 3 , Ἀ
τείλάμενος δὲ ἀπέπεμπε, ἐξανδραποδίσαντας ᾿Αθήνας καὶ
Ἐ , 3 a e a 3 “ Ν 3 ὃ ’ δα
ρέτριαν, ἀγαγεῖν εωνυτῳ εἰς οψιν ta ἀνδραποδα.
7 Ν N 3 ’ Α 3 ,

5. Xetpwodpevor Se τὴν Eperpiav, καὶ ἐπισχόντες
%~ / ες ἡ » 3 \ 9 \ 4 /
ὀλίγας ἡμέρας, ἔπλωον ἐς τὴν Αττικὴν, κατέργοντες TE

a x 4 > A Ν 4 4 , Q
ToAAov, καὶ δοκέοντες Tavta τοὺς Αθηναίους ποιήσειν τὰ

Ν ‘9 ’ > " Νν 4 ‘ ε ὃ
kat τους Ἐρετριέας ἐποίησαν" καὶ, ἣν yap ὁ αραθων
) 4 4 A A 3 a
eTLTNOEWTATOV χωρίον τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ἐνιππεῦσαι, καὶ ἀγχο-

’ κ᾿ Ἔ / 9 " 4 ὦ 4 ε 4 e
tatw τῆς Epetpins, ἐς τοῦτο oft’ κατήγεετο Ϊἱππίης ὁ

’ 3 a , a
Πεισιστράτου. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ws ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα, ἐβοή-
νΝ > NX 9 Ν a ;
θεον καὶ avtot ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα. ἦγον δὲ σφεας στρατη-

Ν ’ a e ᾽ δα Q 4
you δέκα, τῶν ὁ δέκατος ἦν Μιλτιάδης, τοῦ tov πατέρα

’ὔ a tA σι
Κιμωνα τὸν Στησαγόρεω κατέλαβε φυγεῖν ἐξ ᾿Αθηνέων
Π ,ὔ “ ε , Φ \ 9 4 e

εἰσίστρατον τὸν ἱπποκράτεος. 6. οὗτος δὴ ὧν τότε ὁ

/ f 93 a >
Μιλτιάδης ἥκων ex τῆς Χερσονήσου, καὶ ἐκπεφευγὼς δι-
’ , ) , 2 , ¢ Ν Ν ε
πλοον θάνατον, ἐστρατήγεε Αθηναίων. ἅμα μεν yap οἱ
, ᾽ν ς , : , ¥ N
Φοινικες αὐτὸν οἱ ἐπιδιωξαντες μέχρι Ἴμβρου, περὶ πολ-
8

114 Invasion of Greece by Darius. [Herop.

»- 9 a a ΟΝ 3 a Y 4
λοῦ ἐποιεῦντο λαβεῖν τε καὶ ἀναγαγεῖν παρὰ βασιλέα ’
Ψ . 9 ͵ ΄ ’ ’
ἅμα δὲ ἐκφυγόντα τε τούτους, καὶ ἀπικόμενον ἐς THY ἑωυ-

A 2 , 9 b ] ’ ¥ x 93 ~ £f e
τοῦ, δοκέοντώ τε εἶναι ἐν σωτηρίῃ ἤδη, τὸ ἐνθεῦτέν μεν οἱ
3 a e s xs en 4 > A 3 ὔ
ἐχθροι ὑποδεξώμενοι, καὶ ὕπο δικαστήριον αὐτὸν ἀγαγόντες,
a7 / A 3 ’ 3 “ ‘N Ν
ἐδίωξαν τυραννίδος τῆς ev Χερσονήσῳ. ἀποφυγὼν δὲ καὶ

4 “ A 4 4 ? ? e oY
τούτους, στρατηγος οὕτω ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπεδέχθη, αἱρεθεὶς

“ A
ὑπο τοῦ δήμου.

Ὕ ΚΑ QA “ ‘ 49, 4 4 ΑΔ ΚΝ eo e

- Aat πρῶτα μεν, eovtes ett EV TH ἀστεΐ, οἱ στρατη-

“ 3 4 9 ld [4 A 3
you ἀποπέμπουσι ἐς Σπάρτην κήρυκα Φειδιππίδην, 4θη-

“ Q Mw ΝΜ ἈΝ ς Yd “ ΄-
ναῖον μὲν ἄνδρα, ἄλλως δὲ nuepodpopov τε καὶ τοῦτο με-

A A x 4, ¥ x

λετῶντα " τῷ δὴ (ws αὐτὸς τε ἔλεγε Φειδιππίδης καὶ

3 , > 4 i , 2 ἈΝ ‘

Αθηναίοισι ἀπήγγελλε) περὶ τὸ Παρθένιον οὖρος τὸ ὑπερ
Ν , Ἁ 9 a

Teyens ὁ Πὰν περιπίπτει. βώσαντα δὲ τοὔνομα τοῦ Φει-
4 a 3 , a ϑ

διππίδεω, τὸν Πᾶνα ᾿Αθηναίοισι κελεῦσαι ἀπαγγεῖλαι,

4 a 3 ’ a 97 > @
διότι ἑωυτοῦ οὐδεμίαν ἐπιμέλειαν ποιεῦνται, ἐόντος εὐνόου
9 / a ’ ¥
Αθηναίοισι, καὶ πολλαχῇ yevouevov ἤδη σῴφι χρησίμου,

Ν 2, . 3 ἤ “ a Ν 3 a
ta δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ ἐσομένου. καὶ ταῦτα μεν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, κατα-
a 4 4 9
στάντων σφίσι εὖ ἤδη τῶν πρηγμώτων, πιστεύσαντες εἶναι
3 , ε ΄ eon a % 4 “ en \ a, NS
ἄληθεα, ἱδρύσαντο ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει Πανος tpov, καὶ αὑτὸν
ΣΝ Ud a ’ , “ 3 4 Ν (δ
απὸ ταύτης τῆς ἀγγελίης θυσίῃσι ἐπετέῃσι Kat λαμπάδι
“ lA (4 . ‘ e a “ σι e
ἑλάσκονται. 85. Tore δὲ πεμφθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν στρατηγῶν o
φ ΄ c YF - “ A a
Φειδιππίδης οὗτος, ὅτε wep ot ἔφη και tov Πᾶνα φανῆναι,
ὃ a Ε] a? ’ 3 φ ? Σ ’ 3 ’ὔ
ευὐτεραῖος ἐκ τοῦ Αθηναίων ἄστεος ἣν ἐν “'΄πτάρτῃ, ATLKO-
. MM” δ Φ ’ 3
μενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἔλεγε" M2 “ακεδαιμόνιοι, Α4θη-

A e a Q Aq “
vaio. ὑμέων δέονται σφίσε βοηθῆσαι, Kat μη περιιδεῖν

, 3 3 a [2 A
πόλιν ἀρχαιοτάτην ἐν τοῖσι “Ελλησι δουλοσυνῃ περιπε-

a “ 3 a , ‘ “ a > E 4 ,
σοῦσαν πρὸς avdpav βαρβάρων" Kat yap vuv ρετρια τε

/ / Ν ’ 3
ἠνδραπόδισται, καὶ πόλει λογίμῳ ἡ ᾿Ελλας γέγονε ac Geve-

4 “ 9 ’ 3 4 ”
στέερη. Ὃὧ μεν δή σφι τὰ ἐντεταλμένα ἀπήγγελλε" τοίσι

δ “ / Φ ΝΣ
δὲ ϑαδε μὲν βοηθέειν ᾿Αθηναίοισι, ἀδύνατα δὲ ode ἦν τὸ
μὲν βοη n
’ 4 “a 2° 4 t “ ὔ
παραυτίκα ποίέξειν ταῦτα, οὐ βουλομένοισε λύειν τὸν νομον'"

VI, 108.] The Plataeans. 116

9 ‘ e , a “ > » ᾽ a δὲ ᾽ 3 A
ἦν Yap ἱσταμένου τοῦ μηνὸς εἰνάτη, εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ Efedrev-
Ν ἣν ἢ , 2 a ΄ Φ
σεσθαε ἔφασαν, μὴ οὐ πλήρεος ἐὄντος τοῦ κύκλου. οὕτοι
΄ Ν Λ wv
μὲν νυν THY πανσέληνον ἔμενον.
A 4 ὔ € ’ e
9. Τοῖσι δὲ βαρβάροισι κατηγέετο “Ἱππίης ὁ Πεισι-
᾽ 3 Q a nA 4 “ 4
στράτου ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα, τῆς παροιχομένης νυκτὸς ὄψιν
ΩΝ ’ a @ , 2. » ες / a \ a
ἰδὼν ev τῷ ὕπνῳ τοιήνδε" ἐδόκεε ὁ Ἱππίης τῇ μητρὶ τῇ
A A ’ 9 9 ™~ 3 4
ἑωυτοῦ συνευνηθῆναι. συνεβάλετο ὧν ἐκ TOU ὀνείρου, κα-
Ν 2 wae , . 29 7 ν. 9» N
τελθὼν es tas AOnvas καὶ ἀνασωσάμενος THY ἀρχήν, τέλευ-
a ry ’ ) Ν Ν a “
τήσειν ἐν τῇ ἑωυτοῦ γηραιός. ἐκ μὲν δὴ τῆς ὄψιος συνε-
?. A Ν 4 σ΄ “ ‘
βάλετο ταῦτα" 10. τότε δὲ κατηγεόμενος, τοῦτο μὲν τὰ
2 ’ “ 3 5 ΄, 5] , 3 “ a x
ἀνδράποδα ta εξ Eperpins ἀπέβησε ἐς τὴν νῆσον τὴν
a 4 ‘N > 4. a Ἁ ’
Στυρέων, καλεομένην δὲ Αἰγίλειαν, τοῦτο δὲ καταγομένας
᾽ δ Ρ' ᾿ , Ψ φ 3 , >
es tov Μαραθῶνα tras νέας ὥρμιξε οὗτος, exBayras τε ἐς
a N a ’ « a“ ,
γῆν τοὺς BapBapovs διέτασσε. καί ot ταῦτα διέποντι
2 a a a ’ A e¢ 3, @ 4 fe
ἐπῆλθε πταρεῖν τε καὶ βῆξαι μεζόνως ἢ ws ἐώθεε, ota δέ οἵ
ra Σ, A 3 4 e “ 3 ’ a
πρεσβυτέρῳ ἐόντι τῶν OOOVT@Y οἱ πλεῦνες ἐσείοντο. τού-
9 ΄ a 3 ’ 3 I. “ 4 a 3
τῶν ὧν ἕνα τῶν ὀδόντων ἐκβάλλει ὕπο Bins βήξας - ἐκπε-
J x. 3 Ν 4 3 A 3 ’ Ἃ N
σοντος δὲ ἐς THY Wappov αὑτοῦ, ἐποιέετο πολλὴν σπουδὴν
2 0 ‘N 9 2 , ’ 89. Ν ? / 9
ἐξευρεῖν. ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἐφαίνετό οἱ ὁ ὁδὼν, ἀναστενάξας εἶπε
Ν ‘ 1 4 ε ad 3 ς 4 2 4 Ia ἡ
προς τους παραστάτας" Ἢ γῆ ἧδε οὐκ ἡμετέρη ἐστὶ, ουδὲ
4 , ’ 4 ’
μιν δυνησόμεθα ὑποχειρίην ποιήσασθαι" ὁκόσον δέ τί μοι
΄ “a € IAs f e , N Ν ’ ‘
μέρος μετῆν, ὁ odwy μετέχει. Ἱππίης μὲν δὴ ταὐτῃ τὴν
¥ Λ 3 ’
ory συνεβάλετο εξεληλυθεναι.
3 / ‘N a 3 ρῥὄ .Ῥ...ἐ ’
11. ᾿Αθηναίοισι Se τεταγμένοισι ἐν τεμένει Ἡρακλέος
2. a , 7 XN
ἐπῆλθον βοηθέοντες Πλαταιέες πανδημεί" καὶ yap καὶ
2 / 3 " a / 4
ἐδεδώκεσαν σφέας αὐτοὺς τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι ot Πλαταιέες,
“ ’ φ “ 3 A e 3 lal Ἁ Υ 9
καὶ πόνους ὕπερ αὐτῶν ot Αθηναῖοι συχνοὺς ἤδη αἀναραι-
4 Ἁ φ / Ν /
ρέατο" ἔδοσαν δὲ ὧδε. πιεζόμενοι ὑπο Θηβαίων οἱ Πλα-
a a 4 a
ταιέες ἐδίδοσαν πρῶτα παρατυχοῦσι Κλεομένεί te τῷ
3 ͵ > ON eas?
Ἀναξανδρίδεω καὶ Δακεδαιμονίοισι σφέας avtous, οἱ δὲ ov
᾽ὔ a Ν e 4 > 7
δεκόμενοι ἔλεγόν σφι τάδε" “Hyeis μὲν ἑκαστέρω τε οἰκέο-

116 Invasion of Greece by Darius. (Heron.

Q eon 4 ’ 4 “A 3 ’ ’
μεν, καὶ ὑμῖν τοιήδε τις γίνοιτ᾽ ἂν ἐπικουρίη ψυχρη'
“ Ἅ /_.» 3 ΄ ¥
φθαίητε yap av modrakis ἐξανδραποδισθέντες ἤ τινα

΄ ε [4 ’ “ e “Ὁ “ φ ΄
πυθέσθαι ἡμέων. συμβουλεύομεν Se ὑμῖν δοῦναι ὑμέας
> 9 / / , 3 7 ΝΕ
αὐτοὺς Αθηναίοισι, πλησιοχωροισὶ τε ἀνδράσι καὶ τιμω-
, Ἂν 3 a a ya e
pee ἐοῦσι ov κακοῖσι. ταῦτα συνεβούλευον ot Aaxedat-
, 3 Ν v cd a 4 « /
μόνιοι, ov κατὰ εὔνοιαν οὕτω τῶν Πλαταίέων, ws βουλο-
Α ’᾽ ΗΝ , A a
μενοι tous ᾿Αθηναίους ἔχειν πόνους συνεστεῶτας Βοιωτοῖσι.
, ’ὔ A “a
12. Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν νυν Πλαταιεῦσι ταῦτα συνεβού-
“N b 3 >? 3 f \ 4
λευον" οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἠπίστησαν, ἀλλ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίων ipa ποιεύν-
a ’ » ¢ 0 tgl > AN “ Ν
τῶν τοῖσι Suwdexa θεοῖσι, ἱκέται ἱζόμενοι ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν
9 ’ ϑ 4 “ . 4 A
ἐδίδοσαν σφεας αὐτοὺς. Θηβαῖοι δὲ πυθόμενοι ταῦτα
ϑ Ἁ 4 “ 3
ἐστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ tous Πλαταιέας" ᾿Αθηναῖοι δέ σφι ἐβοή-
͵ , \ , ΄ , 3
θεον. μελλόντων δὲ συνάπτειν μάχην, Κορίνθιοι οὐ περι-
μ 9 ρ
a , ‘N 4, é 3 ᾽
εἶδον, παρατυχόντες δὲ καὶ καταλλαξαντες, ἐπιτρεψάντων
9 , ΝΜ N ’ ἽΝ 4 IA Ι
ἀμφοτέρων, οὔρισαν τὴν χωρην ἐπὶ τοισίδε, cav Θηβαί-
ry N “ [2 3 Ἁ ,’
ους Βοιωτῶν tous μὴ βουλομένους ἐς Βοιωτοὺς τελεέειν.
a ’ 3 ’᾽
18. Κορίνθιοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα γνόντες ἀπαλλάσσοντο " ’AOn-
4 Ν 2 A 3 4 Ν 9 ἤ Ἀ ς
ναίοισι δὲ ἀπιοῦσι ἐπεθήκαντο Βοιωτοι, ἐπιθεμενοι δὲ ἐσ-
A , ς / ‘ e 3 A \ e
σωθησαν τῇ μάχῃ. ὑπερβαντες δὲ οἱ «ΑΑθηναΐοι τοὺς οἱ
/ x» : a 9 ¥ 4 e
Κορίνθιοι ἔθηκαν Πλαταιεῦσι εἶναι ovpous, τούτους ὑπερ-
, “ 9 Ν > 3 ’ 4 ’
βαντες τὸν σωπον αὑτὸν ἐποίησαντο οὔρον Θηβαιοισι
4 ‘\ , » Ν Ν e
πρὸς Πλαταιέας εἶναι καὶ Ὕσιας. ἔδοσαν μὲν δὴ οἱ Πλα-
’ , 3 \* 9 , ’ a? @
Tatees σφεας avtovs AOnvatoict τρόπῳ τῷ εἰρημένῳ, ἧκον
a: ’
δὲ τότε ἐς Μαραθῶνα βοηθεοντες.
a 2 ’ ω > », /
14. Τοῖσι δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοῖσι ἐγίνοντο δίχα αἱ
A a Ν 3 9. ᾿ / 9. / ‘N
γνωμαι" τῶν μὲν οὐκ εὠντῶν συμβάλλειν, ὀλίγους yap
“Ὁ A a “A N \
elvas στρατιῇ τῇ Μήδων συμβαλεῖν, τῶν δε καὶ Μιλτιάδεω
Ν f 3 ’ ,»,
κελευόντων. ὡς δὲ δίχα τε ἐγίνοντο, καὶ ἐνίκα ἡ χείρων
a , " A 4 \ ς «7 ἣ ε
τῶν γνωμέων, ἐνθαῦτα (ἦν yap ἐνδέκατος ψηφιδοῴφορος ὁ
> κυώμῳ λαχὼν ᾿Αθηναίων πολεμαρχέειν, τὸ παλαιὸν γὰ
τῷ κυώμῳ λαχὼν 4θη μαρχεέειν, Lov γὰρ
9 “ φ / “ 4 3 a σι
A@nvatot ὁμόψηφον tov πολέμαρχον ἐποιεῦντο τοῖσι στρα»

VL, 111.] The Polemarch Callimachus. 117

e > , , 3 a
τηγοῖσι, ἦν τε τότε πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος ᾿Αφιδναῖος)
a 3 Ν ’ CoM ΄ 3 \
πρὸς τοῦτον ἐλθὼν Μιλτιαδηξ ἔλεγε trade: 15. Ev σοὶ
a 3 a n ’ ’ a? ,
νῦν, Καλλίμαχε, ἐστὶ ἢ καταδουλῶσαι ᾿Αθήνας, h ἐλευθε-
, 3 “ Φ 3 ’
pas ποιήσαντα, μνημόσυνα λιπέσθαι ἐς τὸν ἅπαντα ἀνθρω-
Φ dar Ὁ . ’ ,
mov βίον, οἷα οὐδὲ “Αρμοδιὸς τε καὶ Αριστογείτων λεί-
A ‘ Ν > @ > &- 3 θ a 3 J 8
πουσι. νῦν yap on, εξ ov ἐγένοντο Αθηναίοι, ες κίνδυνον
d / ν ἃ ’ e , a ,
ἥκουσι μέγιστον. καὶ ἢν μὲν γε ὑποκύψωσι τοῖσι Μηδοισι,
/ , ε , 4 \
δεδοκται τὰ πείσονται παραδεδομενοι ᾿Ϊππίη" ἣν Se περι-
, e e Λ a 4° / a ‘E ὃ
γενηταῦ αὕτη ἡ TOALS, OLN τε ἐστι πρωτὴ τῶν Βιλληνίδων
’ ,ὔ a 4 87 a φ, 4? 4 θ
πολίων γενέσθαι. κῶς ὧν On ταῦτα Olu τε ἐστι γενέσθαι,
‘ a , 4 ‘2 » A ld x a
καὶ κῶς ἐς OE TL τούτων ἀνήκει τῶν πρηγμάτων TO κῦρος
» a ν ’ ec 4 A a 3
ἔχειν, νῦν ἔρχομαι φράσων. ἡμέων τῶν στρατηγῶν, εὐντων
’ / 7 ς A A “ ,
δεκα, δίχα γίνονται αἱ γνῶμαι, TOV ue κελευόντων συμβα-
A n~ N 3 fA
Ae, τῶν δε ov συμβαλεῖν. Hv μὲν νυν wn συμβαλωμεν,
* / , ? nA , δ
ἑλπομαί τινα στάσιν μεγάλην ἐμπεσοῦσαν διασείσειν Ta
’ / ,ὕ σ / A \ 4
Αθηναίων φρονήματα ὧστε μηδίσαι" ἣν δὲ συμβαλωμεν
/ Ν Ν ϑ / 4 3 ,
πρίν Te καὶ σαθρὸν «Αθηναίων μετεξετεροίσι ἐγγενέσθαι,
A . ¥ , ς᾽,» » » ’ a
θεῶν Ta toa νεμόντων, οἷοί TE εἰμεν περιγενέσθαι τῇ συμ-
a A 93 4 Ν ΜΆ / “ ? é 3 4
βολῇ. ταῦτα ὧν πάντα ἐς σὲ νῦν τείνει καὶ ἐκ GEO" ἤρτη-
a Ν Ν ’ aA > A a 6” ’
ται" ἣν yap σὺ γνωμῇῃ τῇ ἐμῇ προσθῇ, ἐστι TOL πατρὶς TE
3 , Ν 4 4 a A ἐν Ν
ἐλευθέρη καὶ πόλις πρωτὴ τῶν ἐν τῇ Ελλάδι, Hv δὲ τὴν
τῶν ἀποσπευδόντων τὴ βολὴν ἕλη, ὑπάρξ τῶ
cap iano ὄντῶν THY oun ONY eh umap εἰ τοὶ ν
᾿ a ΩΝ A ς
ἐγω κατελεξα ἀγαθῶν τὰ ἐναντία. 16. Ταῦτα Neyo ὁ
΄ A “ ’ “
Μιλτιάδης προσκτᾶται τὸν Καλλίμαχον. προσγενομένης
> aA v4 A 7 93 2 ,
δὲ τοῦ πολεμάρχου τῆς γνώμης, ἐκεκύρωτο συμβαλλειν.
Ν δὲ e XN a e 4 ¥ , e
μετα O€ οἱ στρατηγοὶ τῶν ἡ yvaun ἔφερε συμβαλλειν, ὡς
ε΄ ἢ I a > « a ες »ν, ,
ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἐγίνετο πρυτανηΐη τῆς ἡμέρης, Μιλτιάδῃ
’ Ν ’ ¥ 4 Ν ’
παρεδίδοσαν" ὁ δὲ δεκόμενος ov τί κω συμβολὴν ἐποιέετο,
/ Ν ? A A 9 fF ;
πρίν ye Sn αὐτοῦ πρυτανηϊη ἐγένετο.
Ὡ 9 9 a a 3 . δῷ Ν 9 ,
17. ‘As Se ἐς ἐκεῖνον περιῆλθε, ἐνθαῦτα δὴ ἐτάσσοντο
φ ϑ “ e 4 “a Ἁ A [4
ὧδε ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡς συμβαλέοντεςς. τοῦ μὲν δεξιοῦ κερεος

118 Invasion of Greece by Darius. [Henop.

e e c ’ e “ ᾽ ᾽ Γ
nryeeTo ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος" Ο yap νόμος τότε εἶχε
A a 9 / Ν “ wv , Ν
οὕτω τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι, τὸν πολέμαρχον ἔχειν κέρας τὸ
’ , ‘ » ? lA e “
δεξιόν. ἠγεομένου δὲ τούτου, ἐξεδέκοντο ὡς ἠριθμέοντο αἱ
“ > f > 4 a . 9 , 4
φυλαί, ἐχόμεναι ἀλλήλων " τελευταῖοι SE ἐτάσσοντο, ἔχον-
“ 3.» , 4 7 8 7 ’
τες TO εὐωνυμον κερας, Πλαταιέες. ἀπὸ ταύτης yap σφι
3 ’ 3 A 7
τῆς μάχης, θυσίας ᾿Αθηναίων ἀναγόντων καὶ πανηγύριας
3 3 a ’ 4 a
TAS EV τῇσι πενταετηρίσι γινομένας, κατεύχεται ὁ κὴηρυξ ὁ
9 “ (4 ? ’ ’ a 2 \
AOnvaios, ἅμα te ᾿Αθηναίοισι λέγων γίνεσθαι τὰ ἀγαθὰ
s a ( Ν 4 Aa 9 ’ 3
καὶ Πλαταιεῦσι. τότε δε, τασσομένων τῶν Αθηναίων εν
a a 9 , ’ “ a 3 ͵
τῷ Μαραθῶνι, ἐγίνετο τοιόνδὲ τι" τὸ στρατόπεδον εξισού-
A a 4 “ Ν 3 a ’ 3
μενον τῷ Μηδικῷ στρατοπέδῳ, τὸ μὲν αὐτοῦ μέσον ἐγίνετο
2 8 , 7 ‘ ΄ 2 ? , N ,
emt τάξιας ὀλίγας, καὶ ταύτῃ ἣν ἀσθενέστατον τὸ στρατο-
“ “ 4 ς ‘A oe
medov, τὸ δὲ κέρας ἑκάτερον ἔρρωτο πλήθει. 18. “Qs δέ
/ \ Ν 4 > » . 9 aA e
σφι διετέτακτο, kat τὰ σφάγια ἐγίνετο Kana, ἐνθαῦτα ws
3 , ε 5 a , “ 3 \ 7
ὠπείθησαν οἱ A@nvaio, δρόμῳ ἵεντο ἐς τους βαρβάρους.
Ἢ ἢ ᾽ .. 7 \ , 2 oA a
ἦσαν Se στάδιοι οὐκ ἐλάσσονες τὸ μεταίχμιον αὐτῶν ἢ
9 ’ « Ν , e 7? a ? , ’
ὀκτώ. οἱ δὲ Πιερσαι ὀρέοντες δρόμῳ ἐπίοντας, παρεσκευα-
e 4 4 “" 3 ’ 3 ’
ζοντο ὡς δεξόμενοι" μανίην τε τοῖσι «Αθηναίοισε ἐπέφερον
’ 3 4 3 “ 9, 7 N 7
καὶ παγχυ ὀλεθρίην, ὄρεοντες QUTOUS ολίγους, Kat τουτους
s 3 ’ ¥ cs e ? »”
δρόμῳ ἐπειγομένους, οὔτε Lrmou ὑπαρχούσης σφι οὔτε To-
4 a / « ’ ’ 3
ξευμάτων. ταῦτα μέν νυν οἱ βάρβαροι κατείκαζον" 44θη-
a . 3 / 3 / ; - Ul
vaio. δε, ἐπεί te ἀθρόοι προσέμιξαν torot βαρβάροισι,
3 ’ / 4 a Ν Ν € , ,
ἐμάχοντο ἀξίως λόγον. πρῶτοι μὲν yap Ελληνων trav
A a f 3 4 3 , na
των TOV ἡμεῖς ἐὃμεν δρόμῳ ἐς πολεμίους ἐχρήσαντο, πρῶ-
bs > ἢ ? a ἢ Ν e 4 Ν ‘
tot δὲ ἀνέσχοντο ἐσθῆτα te Μηδικην opeovtes, καὶ τοὺς
¥ ’ ’ \ 9 “ἼῪ 0 \
ἄνδρας ταύτην ἐσθημένους " τέως Se ἦν τοῖσι Εἴλλησι και
% ¥ , 9 a 4 Χ
τὸ οὔνομα τὸ Μήδων φόβος ἀκοῦσαι. 19. Μαχομίνων δε
3 a a a > 7 4 \ Ν Ν ,ὔ
ev τῷ Μαραθῶνι χρόνος ἐγίνετο πολλὸς. καὶ TO μεν με-
A 4 > 7 e ’ a ,
σον τοῦ στρατοπέδου ἐνίκων ot βάρβαροι, Tn Περσαι τε
,. κ᾿ εν ’ 3 ’ Ν A \ ‘9 @ ¢
αὐτοὶ Kat Σάκαι ἐτετάχατο" Kata τοῦτο μὲν δὴ ἐνίκων ob
’ XN 4 2.) 4 Ν , ιν \
βάρβαροι, καὶ ῥήξαντες ἐδίωκον ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν, TO δε

VL, 117.] Battle of Marathon. 119

/ ’ > », 3 a @ a , a
κέρας ἑκάτερον ἐνίκων ᾿Αθηναῖοί τε καὶ Πλαταιέες. νικῶν-
Ν Ν Ἁ a a ’ 4 Ν
τες δὲ, τὸ μὲν τετραμμένον τῶν βαρβαρων φεύγειν εων,
“ a 4 tad é “ ὔ
τοῖσι δὲ τὸ μέσον ῥήξασι αὐτῶν, συναγαγόντες τὰ κέρεα
3 , > 4 . 9 4 3 a ,’ -
ἀμφότερᾳ, ἐμάχοντο καὶ ενίκων AOnvaio. φεύγουσι δε
a , a , 3 A 3_N ‘\ ’
tact Περσησι εἵποντο κόπτοντες, ἐς ὃ ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν
3 4 a Υ Ν 3 4 a a
ἀπικόμενοι πῦρ TE αἰτεον καὶ ἐπεέλαμβανοντο τῶν νεῶν.
" a x 9 ͵ a ’ ς é
20. Και τοῦτο μεν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλ»
, ’ὔ > A ; 3 Ν > ON 4 Κ
λίμαχος διαφθείρεται, ἀνὴρ γενόμενος ἀγαθος, ἀπὸ δ᾽ εἐθανε
A “ 7. a a“ Y
τῶν στρατηγῶν Στησέλεως ὁ Θρασύλεω" τοῦτο δὲ Kuve-
3 9 fe) 3 4 a 93 4
yespos ὃ Evdopiwvos, ἐνθαῦτα ἐπιλαβόμενος τῶν αφλάστων
Ν \ a 3 Ν .ὕ “ a XN Mm.
νεὸς THY χεῖρα αποκοπεὶς πελεκεὶ πίπτει, τοῦτο δὲ ἄλλοι
2 ’ € Ν Ν ‘
᾿Αθηναίων πολλοί τε καὶ οὐνομαστοί. 31. Ἑπτα μεν δὴ
a a 3 ’ ? 3 a a νΝ
τῶν νεῶν ἐπεκράτησαν τρόπῳ τοιούτῳ Αθηναίοι, τῇσι δε
a e 4 3 ὔ “ 3 ’
λοιπῆσι οἱ βαρβαροι ἐξανακρονσάμενοι, καὶ ἀναλαβόντες
3 a ’ 3 a Υ \o3 3 / 3
ἐκ τῆς νήσου, ἐν τῇ ἐλιπον, Ta ἐξ Ἐρετρίης ἀνδράποδα,
rd , s a ‘3% /
περιέπλωον Σούνιον, βουλόμενοι φθῆναι τους Αθηναίους
’ , 3 . > 2 ΝΟΥ͂ > 3 , 3
ἀπικόμενοι ἐς τὸ ἄστυ. αἰτίη δὲ ἐσχε ev Αθηναίοισι εξ
’ / A 3 Ν a 3 a ’
Αλκμαιωνιδεων μηχανῆς αὑτοὺς ταῦτα ἐπινοηθῆναι" τούὐ-
Ἁ a 4 9 , 2 /
τους yap, συνθεμένους τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι, ἀναδεξαι ἀσπίδα
. α ” 3 a ’ φ ‘ ‘ ,
ἐουσι ἤδη ἐν THO’ νηυσί. BB. οὗτοι μὲν δὴ περιεπτλωον
» b | A XN ς A y
Σούνιον, ᾿Αθηναῖοι Se ws ποδῶν εἶχον τάχιστα ἐβοήθεον
9 . \ mM” td 3 4 Ν A Ν ,
ἐς TO ἄστυ, Kat εφθησᾶν τε ἀπικόμενοι πρὶν ἢ τους BapBa-
Ψ V9 , 3 , Ie ,
ρους ἥκειν, καὶ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο ἀπιγμένοι εξ ᾿Ηρακλείου
a 2 a 3 ¥ e , a ? 4 ve
τοῦ εὖ Μαραθῶνι ev ἄλλῳ Ἡρακλείῳ ΤΟ Ἐν Kuvocapyet.
A X\ ¢€ ’ na
ot δε βάρβαροι τῇσε νηυσὶ ὑπεραιωρηθέντες Φαλήρου (Tov-
“ 93 2 ’ é A 9 Ud ?
70 γὰρ nv ἐπίνειον τότε τῶν Αθηναίων), ὑπὲρ τούτου ava-
, Ν ’ > ἡ 3 3 ‘N
κωχεύσαντες TAS νέας, ἀπέπλωον ὀπίσω ἐς τὴν Ασίην.
3 ’ a > a 4 ? , A
15: Ev ταὐτῃ τῇ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχη ἀπέθανον τῶν
Ν ε “ / ”
βαρβάρων κατὰ ἑξακισχιλίους καὶ τετρακοσίους ἄνδρας,
’ 40 ’ Ve \ 9 , δ ,ὕ ¥ ‘ 3
ἡναίων δὲ exaTov ἐνενήκοντα καὶ δύο. ἔπεσον μὲν ἀμ-
’ a v4 - 3 a (
φοτέερων τοσοῦτοι" συνήνεικε δὲ αὐτόθε θῶυμα yeverOae

120 March of Xerzes. [Herop.

4 9 x” 9 / “ 4 3
τοιόνδε" Αθηναῖον avdpa ᾿Ἐπίξηλον τὸν Κουφαγόρεω, ἐν
“ 4 ’ , \ eM” 4 Ν a
τῇ συστάσι μαχόμενον TE καὶ avdpa γινόμενον ἀγαθον, τῶν

3 4 A ΜΝ ΘΝ a ’
ομμάτων στερηθῆναι, οὔτε πληγεντα οὐδὲν τοῦ σώματος
x / “\ a ων wn 4 4 3 A 4
οὔτε βληθεντα, καὶ TO λοιπὸν τῆς Cons διατεέλέειν ὠπὸ τού-
κ΄“ a 3 / 4 Ἁ 7 A ¥
Tov τοῦ x“povov eovta τυφλὸν. λέγειν δὲ αὐτὸν ἤκουσα
Ν ω ( / Ν ’ ” ε ’ ς ͵
περὶ τοῦ παθεος τοιόνδε τινὰ λογον, ἄνδρα οἱ δοκέειν ὁπλί-
3 a 4 »“ a ’ Ἁ 3 a
την ἀντιστῆναι μέγαν, TOU TO γένειον THY ἀσπίδα πᾶσαν
’ δ A / a ς a Q a Ν
σκιάζειν" τὸ δὲ φάσμα τοῦτο ἐωυτὸν μὲν παρεξελθεῖν, Tov
νε a 4 a a ‘ 4 3 /
δὲ ἑωυτοῦ παραστάτην ἀποκτεῖναι. ταῦτα μεν δὴ ᾿Επίζη-
? / 4
λον ἐπυθόμην λέγειν.
/ Ἁ φ 3 Α 3 ld Λ
24. “Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ ἧκον es τὰς ᾿Αθήνας δισχίλιοι
Q ‘ , M” ‘ N a
ETA THY πανσέληνον, ἔχοντες σπουδην πολλην καταλαβεῖν
/ “ ” 3 ᾽ > fF 3 a a
οὕτω, ὥστε τριταῖοι Ex Σπάρτης eyevovto ev τῇ Αἰττικῇ.
ed Ἁ 3 ’ a A ς ’ re 4
ὕστεροι Se ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς, ἱμείροντο ὅμως θηη-
Ν / 3 ’ \ 93 Ν a 3 /
σασθαι τους Μηδους " edOovtes Se es τὸν Μαραθῶνα εθηη-
Ν \ > 2 3 , Ν \ oo” doa
σαντο. peta de, aweovtes Αθηναίους καὶ TO ἐργον αὑτῶν,
3 a 9 f
ἀπαλλάσσοντο ὀπίσω.

I MARCH OF XERXES.— PREPARATIONS OF THE
GREEKS.

9 Ἁ + e 9 / 9 ͵ Ν a rf a ?
1. Eves δὲ ἡ ἀγγελίη ἀπίκετο περὶ τῆς μάχης τῆς ἐν
A ‘A ὔ A Ν ς Ἷ
Μαραθῶνι γενομένης παρὰ βασιλέα Δαρεῖον τὸν Yora-
Ἁ Ν / ’ὔ’ὔ a 9 4
σπεος, καὶ πριν μεγάλως κεχαραγμενον τοῖσι Αθηναιοισι
Ν Ἁ 3 a 9 Ἁ Ν Ν s 4 a
δια τὴν ἐς Σάρδις ἐσβολὴν, καὶ dn καὶ τότε πολλῷ τε δει-
, 9 ͵ \ A ed ? 9 4 \
VOTEPG ἐποίεε, KAL μάλλον WPLNTO στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν
e ’ : 3 Ἁ 3 ’ ’ 3 ,
Ελλαδα. καὶ αὐτίκα μὲν ETNYYENAETO πεμπὼν ἀγγελοὺς
Ν / e ’ Ν A , ? ,
KATA TONS ετοιμάζειν στρατίην, πολλῷ πλέω ἐπιτάσσων
e @¢ A , a 4 ’ of
EXACTOLOL ἢ πρότερον παρείχον, καὶ νέας TE καὶ ἵππους
nN a \ - ᾽’ A ’ ¢€
καὶ σίτον καὶ πλοία. τούτων δὲ περιαγγελλομένων, ἢ

Vil, 22.] Eis vast Preparations. 121

9 t Ν é 9 A / ¥ ¢ “a 3 Of
Ασίη ἐδονέετο ἐπὶ τρία ETEA, καταλεγομένων Te τῶν apt-
e , AN Ν ς / ’ A
στων ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα στρατευσομενων, καὶ παρασκευα»
’ ’ Ν ¥ ., 3 ’ e ON 4
ζομένων. 2 τετάρτῳ Se ere Αιγύπτιοι vio Καμβύσεω
4 3 / x, AN 4 9 “ Ν Q
δουλωθέντες ἀπέστησαν ἀπὸ Περσέων. ἐνθαῦτα δη καὶ
A a 3 9 3 ΄ ᾽ὔ
μᾶλλον ὥρμητο Kat ἐπ᾿ ὠμφοτέρους στρατεύεσθαι. Στελ-
, > 93 y . 9 ld a 4
Aowevou δὲ Δαρείου ew Αιγνπτον καὶ AOnvas, τῶν παίδων
2 “- 3 4 4 Ν a e 4 e 4
αὐτοῦ στάσις ἐγένετο μεγώλη περὶ τῆς ἡγεμονίης, ws δέει
ϑ , 7 Q 4 lA 4 ed
μιν ἀποδέξαντα βασιλέα κατὰ τὸν Περσέων νομὸν οὕτω
/ , Ν ΄, , a
στρατεύεσθαι. ᾿Αποδεξας Se βασίλεα Πέρσῃσι Δαρεῖος
». 7 V4 7 3 Ν “ Ν a /
Fepfea, ὥρμητο στρατεύεσθαι. adda yup peta ταῦτά τε
δ 3 a ¢ “ Vv. 4
καὶ Αἰγύπτου ἀπόστασιν τῷ ὑστέρῳ ετεὶ TapacKevalope-
3 a / Ν 7, 4
νον συνήνεικε αὐτὸν Δαρεῖον, βασιλεύσαντα Ta ππαντα ἔτεα
σ. Ν , 3 a δ), e 2? , ¥ \
ἐξ τε καὶ τριήκοντα, ἀποθανεῖν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἐξεγένετο οὔτε TOUS
2 a 9 / » > / ’
ἀπεστεῶτας Αιγυπτίους οὔτε Αθηναίους τιμωρήσασθαι.
3 , δ ’ ς “ ’ , 2 N
ἀποθανόντος δὲ Δαρείου ἡ βασιληΐη ἀνεχωρησε ἐς τὸν
ra Ν 2 / / Ν ’ 23." Ν
παίδα τὸν ἐκείνου Ἐέερξεα. 8. Καὶ Ἐέρξης .. ἐπὶ μὲν
’ ΝΜ ’ vA ’ Ν A ’
τεσσερα ETEA πλήρεα TAPAPTEETO στρατιήν τε καὶ τὰ προσ-
a a ᾽ὔ \ » ee 2 tA > ,
dopa τῇ στρατιῇ. πέμπτῳ δε ἐτεὶ ἀνομένῷ ἐστρατηλάτεε
Ν Λ ΄ I Ν a ς ~ ΡΥ
χειρὶ μεγάλῃ πλήθεος. στόλων γὰρ τῶν ἡμεῖς ἰδμεν πολ-
a \ ’ φ 9. ͵ \ 3 Ν : 9
Aw 6 μέγιστος οὗτος ἐγένετο. τί γὰρ οὐκ ἤγαγε ἐκ τῆς
2 ,ὔ ¥ > ON ἈΝ ς / , a Ν 4 /
Aains εθνος ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα Ἐερξης ; κοῖον δὲ πινομενὸν
ff 2 3 ’ Ν a , A φ
μιν ὕδωρ ουκ ἐπέλιπε, πλὴν τῶν μεγάλων ποταμῶν ; οὐ
Ν “ 4 / ¢ Ν > Ν > s oe
μὲν yap νέας παρείχοντο, ot de ἐς πεζὸν ἐτετάχατο, τοισι
ν ao ’ A \ δ a /
δὲ ἵππος προσετέτακτο, τοῖσι δὲ ἱππαγωγὰ πλοῖα, ἅμα
a ~ Ν A 7 Ν ’ὔ
στρατευομένοισι, Toe δὲ ἐς Tas γεφύρας μακρᾶς νέας
4 a ‘N ~ ¢ “ ’ Ἁ a Ν
παρέχειν, τοῖσι δε σῖτά τε καὶ νέας. 4. Καὶ τοῦτο μεν,
¢ , A 4 ,ὔ Ν Ν
ὡς προσπταίσαντων τῶν πρώτων περιπλωόντων περὶ τὸν
"AO 7 / 9 ΄΄ 9 ἢ / 3 Ν
WY, προετοιμάζετο ἐκ τριῶν ἐτέων κου μάλιστα ἐς τὸν
¥ > Ν a ra) ’ 4 ,
ἄθων" ev yap ᾿Ελαιοῦντι τῆς Χερσονήσου ὡρμεον τριή-
93 “A Ν / oS e ON ’
pees, ἐνθεῦτεν δε ὁρμεόμενοι ὥρυσσον ὑπὸ μαστίγων παντο-
ὃ ‘ a a ὃ ὃ δ᾽ 9 ’ 7 ¥ δὲ Ν
ποι. τῆς στρατιῆς, διάδοχοι ὃ ἐφοίτων " ὥρυσσον OE Kas

122 March of Xerzes. [Herop.

4 , Ψ ε “ ¥ 3 Ν 9
οἱ περὶ τὸν Αθων κατοικημένοι. O yap Αθως ἐστὶ ovpos
ὔ 2 “ ὔ a 3 ,
μέγα τε καὶ οὐνομαστον, és θάλασσαν κατῆκον, οἰκημένον

e a 3 θ ’ a δὲ A 3 ‘ yw “ 4
ὕπο ἀνθρώπων. τῇ δὲ τελευτᾷ ES τὴν ἤπειρον TO οὔρος,
, , 9 \ 3 ἈΝ ε , ’
χερσονησοειδὲς TE ἐστε καὶ ἰσθμὸς ὡς δυωδεκα σταδίων,
ay na ‘ a 3 ᾽ ϑ ’ὔ’ὔ A
πεδίον δὲ τοῦτο καὶ KOAWVOL OV μεγάλοι ἐκ θαλάσσης τῆς
3 4 “ 9 ,ὔ , ¥
᾿Ακανθίων ἐπὶ θάλασσαν τὴν ἀντίον Τορωνης. ὅ. Mpuo-
φ 4 “ a e t ,. ¥
cov δὲ ὧδε: δασάμενοι tov χῶρον ot βάρβαροι κατὰ ἔθνεα,
’ Ρ Ν ; > ‘9 4
κατὰ Σάνην πόλιν σχοίνοτενες ποιησάμενοι, ἐπειδὴ ἐγένετο
’ σε ς Ν a € a y¥ d
βαθέα ἡ διῶρυξ, οἱ μὲν κατώτατα ἐστεῶτες ὦρυσσον, ἕτε-
Ν , a ἍΝ: 2 ’ a ¥
pot δὲ παρεδίδοσαν τὸν αἰεὶ ἐξορυσσόμενον χοῦν ἄλλοισι
’ὕ e ra 2 SN 4 e > ? , cr
κατύπερθε ἐστεῶσι ἐπὶ βάθρων, οἱ δ᾽ av ἐκδεκόμενοι ἐτέ-
φ 3 4 3 Ν 3 ’ @ ‘ 3 , 4
ροισι, ἕως ἀπίκοντο ἐς Tous ἀνωτάτω, οὕτοι δε εξεφορεὸν
39 ς». 9 a “ , 9 ef ? ?
τε καὶ ἐξεβαλλον. ἐνθαῦτα bn λειμων ἐστι, ἵνα opt ἀγορὴ
> ‘ , a δέ Ν > 4 3
τε ἐγίνετο καὶ πρητήριον" σῖτος δὲ ade πολλὸς ἐφοίτα εκ
> , 3 ’ e Ν > NS ;
τῆς ᾿Ασίης ἀληλεσμένοςς. 6. ὡς μὲν ἐμὲ συμβαλλόμενον
e fF 4 υ > \ poet 9. “
εὑρίσκειν, μεγαλοφροσύνης εἰνεκεν αὐτὸ Ἐέρξης ορύσσειν
΄ 3 / Ν /
ἐκέλενε, ἐθέλων τε δύναμιν ἀποδείκνυσθαι καὶ μνημόσυνα
4 ’ , Ν 9 ‘
λιπέσθαι" παρεὸν yap μηδένα πόνον AaBovtas Tov ἰσθμον
9 ’ 3 Λ ? “ ,
τὰς νέας διειρύσαι, ὀρύσσειν ἐκέλευε διωρυχα τῇ θαλάσση,
’ ’ e “~ 9. tA a
eUpos ws δύο τριήρεας πλώειν ὁμοῦ ἐλαστρευμένας. τοισι
Ν 3 ra) ᾽ὔ ~ ¢ \ \. /
δὲ αὐτοῖσι τούτοισι, τοῖσί περ καὶ TO OPYYLA, προσετετακτο
4 “ ’ a 4 A
καὶ τὸν Στρυμόνα ποταμὸν ζεύξαντας yepupwaat.
τη @ Ν φ A 7 Ul 9 ͵ 3
7. Ev ᾧ δὲ οὗτοι τὸν προκείμενον πόνον ἐργάξοντο, ἐν
, e rd ΄ ef want 7 9 /
τούτῳ ὁ πεζὸς ἅπας συλλελεγμένος ἅμα Ξέρξῃ ἐπορεύετο
3 / ¢ 4 a 3 “ :
ἐς > ἔρδις, ἐκ Κριτάλλων ὁρμηθεις τῶν ἐν Καππαδοκίῃ
3 a 4 7 a ον >»
ἐνθαῦτα yap εἴρητο συλλέγεσθαι TavTa τὸν κατ ἤπειρον
a A 4 ’, , 3 ’
μέλλοντα ἅμα auTw Ξέρξη πορεύεσθαι στρατον. απικο-
. 9 7 a N > ἡ , 3 \
μενος δὲ ἐς Σάρδις, πρῶτα μὲν ἀπέπεμπε κηρυκας ἐς τὴν
3 a Ν f Ν 4
‘EAduda αἰτήσοντας γῆν τε Kat ὕδωρ, καὶ προερέοντας
a he ’
δεῖπνα βασιλεῖ παρασκευάζειν.
Ν a 4 e 3. aA > ¥
8. Mera δὲ ταῦτα παρεσκευάζετο ws ἑλῶν es ABvdor.

VIL, 36.] Bridge across the Hellespont. 123

€ av 3 , “x e , 9 7 9 a 3 4
οἱ δε ἐν τούτῳ Tov Ελλησποντον εζεύγνυσαν εκ τῆς Ασίης
3 “ 3 ’ὔ Vv N *~ , ry 3 e
ἐς τὴν Evpwrnv. ἐστι δε τῆς Χερσονησον τῆς ev Ελλησ-
/ nw Λ Ν 4 4 3 “
πόντῳ, Σηστοῦ τε πόλιος μεταξυ καὶ Madvrov, ἀκτη
/ 3 4. ’ 93 ’ ’ >
τρηχέα ἐς θώλασσαν κατηκουσα Αβυδῳ καταντίον. ἐς
΄ 9 ‘ 3 Ν ’ 3 4 ¢e , 3 4
ταύτην ὧν τὴν axtny εξ ABvdov ὁρμεόμενοι eyepupouy
a , Ν “ ’ 4 Ν 9 ἐὲ »ν
τοῖσι προσεκέετο, τὴν μὲν λευκολίνου Φοίνικες, τὴν δ᾽ ετέ-
δ , ,.»ϑ»,.βἃ2 ν ee ν 7 ᾽
ρην τὴν βυβλίνην Αιυγύπτιοι. ἐστι δὲ ewta στάδιοι εξ
? 4 3 “ 3 4 s ‘N 3 4 “ a
Αβύδου ἐς τὴν ἁπαντίον. καὶ δὴ elevypevou τοῦ πόρου
2 ’ Ν , , 4 2 Ἂν / δ
ἐπιγενόμενος χειμὼν μέγας συνέκοψε τε εκείνα πᾶντα καὶ
e 3 4 4 A ’ a
διέλυσε. 9. ὡς δ᾽ ἐπύθετο Ἐέρξης, δεινὰ ποιεύμενος, τὸν
[4 ’ 3 ἢ ’ 3 ’ ’
Ελλησποντον ἐκελευσε τριηκοσίας ἐπικεσθαι μαστίιγύ πλη-
Ἁ A a > \ 4. 4 A “aN Ἁ
yas, καὶ κατεῖναι ἐς τὸ πέλαγος πεδέων ζεῦγος. ἤδη Se
¥ ς N ,ὕ Ψ 7 > » / “
ἤκουσα, ὡς καὶ στύγεας ἅμα τούτοισι ἀπέπεμψε στίξον-
Ν € , ) h \ 4 e /
tas tov Εἰλλήσποντον. ἐνετέλλετο δὴ ὧν ῥαπίζοντας
΄ ’ ͵ . }»» 9 δ / ’
λέγειν βαρβαρά τε καὶ ἀτάσθαλα - ‘2 πικρὸν ὕδωρ, δεσπο-
/ 3 e , ef 5. 7 x \
τῆς toe δίκην επιτιθεῖ τήνδε, OTL μιν ἠδίκησας οὐδὲν πρὸς
2 7] Υ̓ , Ν Ν Ν 4 ,
ἐκείνου ἄδικον παθον. Kat βασιλεὺς μεν Ἐέρξης διαβήσε-
» , , ¥ , N N N ,
ταὶ σε, ἥν τε σύ ye βούλῃ ἣν τε μή" σοὶ δὲ Kata δικην
¥ ? Ν 9 / ’ e 3, a N ¢ a
apa ovdes ἀνθρώπων θύει, ws ἐόντι δολερῷ TE καὶ ἀἁλμυρῷ
a ’ὔ Ν 4 3 rd ’
ποταμῷ. Try τε δὴ θαλασσαν ἐνετέλλετο τούτοισι ἕημιε-
a Ἁ a 3 , A a nae , 3
ou, KUL τῶν ἐπεστεωτῶν TH ζεύξι τοῦ Ελλησπόντου ἀπο-
a a ’ὔ Ν € Ἁ A 9 J ed
ταμειν τας Kehadus. 10. Kae οἱ μεν ταῦτα ἐποίεον, TOLL
/ ef eM” Ν LY , ¥ b 4
MPOTEKEETO αὕτη ἡ AXapLS τιμη, Tas δε ἄλλοι APYXLTEKTOVES
3 ,ὔ 9 4 \ @ , Α ’
ἐζξευγνυσαν. ἐξεύγνυσαν δὲ ὧδε" πεντηκοντέρους καὶ τριή-
, ΟΝ Ν ‘ Ν a) 2 4
peas συνθέντες, ---- ὑπο μὲν τὴν πρὸς τοῦ Εὐξείνου Πόντου
Mt oa / Ν / ςο ν" ν ν᾿ ec »
eEnxovTa τε καὶ τριηκοσίας, ὑπὸ δὲ τὴν ἑτέρην τεσσερεσ-᾿
I~ δ ὔ a N , F) ,ὔ a
καίδεκα Kat τριηκοσίας, Tov μὲν Ποντου ἐπικαρσίας, τοῦ
δὲ Ἕ 7 Ν φῇ od 3 id Ν ͵7 a
ε ὥλλησποντου KATA ῥόον, να ἀνακωχεύῃ TOV τόνον τῶν
ef 7 ‘ > ’ὔ a 4 ~
ὑπλῶν, ---- συνθέντες δε ayxupas κατῆκαν περιμήκεας, TAS
‘ AN a ,ὔ a ¢ @ a > ἡ Ψ a
μὲν πρὸς τοῦ Ποντου τῆς ἑτέρης τῶν ἀνέμων εἰνεκεν τῶν
¥ 2 ’ A νι ¢ 8 Ν ς ‘
ἔσωθεν ἐκπνεόντων, τῆς δὲ eTEpNs πρὸς ἑσπέρης TE καὶ

124 March of Xerxes. [Henop.

A >] , ¥ Ν ’ A ¢ Ν 6 4
τοῦ Auyatov εὑρου τε καὶ νότου εἵνεκεν " διέκπλοον δὲ ὑπο-
’ A 4 ἈΝ 4 a
φαυσιν κατελίπον τῶν πεντηκοντέρων καὶ τριηρέων τριχοῦ,
Γ . 2 Ν ὔ 3 { / /
wa καὶ es tov Πόντον ἔχη ὁ βουλόμενος πλωεῖιν πλοίοισι
a QA 3 A ’ 4 a ‘ ’
λεπτοίσι, καὶ ex τοῦ Ποντου ἐξω. UL. ταῦτα δὲ ποιή-
tA ϑ A A y / Q
σαντες, κατέτεινον Ex γῆς στρεβλοῦντες ὄνοισι ξυλίνοισι τα
oe ϑ ! XN ¢ / - 3 “ » Ν
ὅπλα, OUKETL χωρίς ExaTEepa τάξαντες, ἀλλα δύο μεν λευκο-
, , 3 e , ’ ‘ a ;
λίνου δασάμενοι ἐς ἐκατέρην, τέσσερα Se τῶν βυβλίνων.
, Ν Ά e > oN δ δ δ , . @
TAXUTNS μὲν ἣν ἢ αὐτὴ Kat καλλονὴ, κατὰ λογον δε ἦν
3 ’ Ν ’ “A 4 ¢ a @
εμβριθέστερα τὰ λίνεα, TOU τάλαντον ὁ πῆχυς εἷλκε.
3 ‘ . 3 ’ e , Ν vd /
ἐπειδὴ δε ἐγεφυρωθη ὁ πόρος, κορμους ξύλων καταπρίσαν-
N , Ν a , a YW i. /
TES, καὶ ποιήσαντες LaoUs τῆς σχεδίης τῷ εὑρεῖ, κόσμῳ
3 4 , ry (vd a , 4 ‘
ἐπετίθεσαν κατύπερθε τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου, θέντες SE
3 A 9 Aa 4 3 , J Ἁ A
ἐπεξῆς ἐνθαῦτα αὕτις ἐπεζευγνυον. ποιήσαντες δὲ ταῦτα
e ? ἢ ’ Ν N ‘ e? Ά
ὕλην ἐπεφόρησαν, κόσμῳ δὲ θέντες καὶ τὴν ὕλην, γὴν
3 ͵ὔ ’ὔ N a Ν a Ν
ἐπεφορησαν" καταναξαντες δὲ καὶ τὴν γῆν, φραγμὸν πα-
, Ν ΝΜ ¢/ Ν , A e 4
ρείρυσαν ἔνθεν καὶ evOev, wa μὴ φοβεηται τὰ ὑποζύγια
ἣν Λ ς a Ν e of
τὴν θάλασσαν ὑπερορῶντα Kat οἱ {πποι.
ω 7 a ’ ΄ Ν \
12. ‘Ns δὲ τά τε τῶν γεφυρέων κατεσκεύαστο καὶ τὰ
\ Ν ¥ vd “ Ν Ν ’ A ,
περὶ τὸν Ἄθων, οἱ τε χυτοῖ περι τὰ στόματα τῆς διωρυχος
ἃ a e / ω 3 ΄, Ω Ν , δ
(ot τῆς ῥηχίης εἰνεκεν ἐποιήθησαν, ἕνα μὴ πίμπληται τά
’ a 3 4 “ > N e a ͵
στόματα τοῦ ὀρύγματος), καὶ αὑτὴ ἡ διῶρυξ παντέλεως
’ 4 9 A , oS a Χ
πεποιημένη ἠγγέλλετο, ἐνθαῦτα χειμερίσας, ἅμα τῷ ἔαρι
’ ‘9 a t ς A nr
παρεσκενασμένος ὁ στρατὸς EX τῶν Σαρδίων ὡρμᾶτο ελῶν
Ν ͵ ,᾿΄ ες Ψ, 3 Ν Ν a
és Αβυδον. ὡρμημένῳ δὲ ot ὁ ἥλιος ἐκλιπὼν THY ἐκ TOU
᾽ “ὦ 3 4 ¥ 399 “ 7 2
ουρανοῦ ἕδρην ἀφανὴς nv, ovt ἐπινεφέλων εοντων, αἰθριης
ν , > NS ¢ ἡ Ν > « 90 7 Ν ν
τε τὰ μάλιστα, ἀντὶ ἡμέρης τε VUE ἐγένετο. ἰδόντι δὲ καὶ
, κι A po ἢ 3 Ν 4 4 \ ¥ \
μαθόντι τοῦτο τῷ Ἐέρξη ἐπιμελές ἐγένετο, καὶ εἰρετο Tous
3 Λ f Ν , e \ mM
Μάγους, τὸ ἐθέλοι προφαίνειν τὸ φώσμα. οἱ δε efpator,
4 4 Ν ¥ a ,
ὡς “Ελλησι προδεικνύει ὁ θεὸς ἔκλειψιν τῶν πολίων, λε-
f. ε ’ 4 ᾽ Ν
γοντες ἥλιον εἶναι ᾿Ελλήνων προδέκτορα, σελήνην δὲ
, , Ν a C pm 7 Ν ΧΝ
σφέων. πυθόμενος de ταῦτα ὁ Ἐέρξης περιχαρὴς ewv

VL, 41.) Order of March from Sardis. 125

$ , “ »*. e #- Ν a ‘ e
ἐποίεετο τὴν ἔλασιν. 13. ἡγέοντο Se πρῶτοι μεν οἱ σκευο-
/ a N e y “ Ν 4 “
φόροι Te καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια, μετὰ δὲ τούτους στρατὸς παν-
’ 3 4 3 δ 3 ld a Ν e ἢ
τοίων ἐθνέων ἀναμιξ, οὐ διακεκριμένοι" τῇ δὲ νπερημίσεες
4 9 na 4 ‘ 2 ’ φ
ἤσαν, ἐνθαῦτα διελέλευπτο, καὶ ov συνέμισγον οὗτοι βασι-
he ra N ‘ ¢ v Λ 2 4 ,
Net. προηγεῦντο μεν Sn ὑππόται χίλιοι ex Περσεων πων-
3 4 ay Ἀ 4 ’ [2 Α φ
των ἀπολελεγμένοι" μετὰ δὲ αἰχμοφόροι χίλιοι, καὶ οὗτοι
’ ͵ > , \ , , 7 ν ὡς
εκ πάντων ἀπολελεγμένοι, τὰς λογχας κάτω ἐς τὴν γὴν
/ Ἁ \N ¢ Ν δὰ 4 » ’
τρέψαντες " μετὰ δε ἱροὶ Νισαῖοι καλεύμενοι ἔπποι δέκα,
’ e }. ἴω Ν 4 “ἢ
κεκοσμημένος ὡς κάλλιστα. Νισαῖοι δὲ καλέονται ἵπποι
2." a ¥ , ’ a a a ¥ 4?
emt τοῦδε" ἔστι πεδίον μέγα τῆς Μηδικῆς, τῷ ovvopd ἐστι
Ni Ν 4 . a Ν 4 s ἈΝ
ἰσαιον. τοὺς wy dn ἵππους τοὺς μεγάλους Peper τὸ πε-
, a ¥ \ , ΝΥ , rd d Ν
δίον τοῦτο. ὄπισθε δὲ τούτων τῶν δέκα ἵππων ἅρμα Διὸς
en 9 7 . σ΄ ‘ @. \ 9 nN ¥
pov ἐπετέτακτο, TO ὑπποῖί μεν ELAKOY λευκοί OKTW, ὄπισθε
λ A “ φ, a e ,ὔ ᾽ ’ “" “
δε τῶν ἵππων εἴπετο πεζῇ ἡνίοχος ἐχόμενος τῶν χαλινῶν "
mn \ Ν . 9 N Ξ δ , 3 ’ 3 ’
ουδεὶς yap δὴ ἐπὶ τοῦτον τὸν θρόνον ἀνθρώπων ἀναβαίνει.
, \ os > N pm / > + of “
τοῦτον δὲ ὄπισθε αὐτὸς Ἐέρξης ἐπ ἅρματος immov Ne
ΜΝ , δΖ ee s a νΥ̓͂ 9 Π
σαίων" παραβεβῆηκεε δὲ οἱ ηνίοχος, τῷ οὔνομα ἣν Πατι-
“4 9 ’ -“ 3 Ν [4
ράμφης, Οτανεω παῖς ἀνδρὸς Πέρσεω.
’, Ν od 3 , ’ ’
14. ᾽Εξηλασε μεν οὕτω ex Σαρδίων Ἐερξης, werexBai-
Ν tf ’ ς 4 3 a eof 3 ,
νεσκε δε, ὅκως [LLY λόγος αἱρέοι, EX τοῦ ἅρματος ἐς ὧρμα-
3 a \ ¥ 3 / , ἐν ’ὔ
μαξαν. αὑτοῦ δε ὄπισθε αἰχμοφόροι Περσέων οἱ ἀριστοί
Ν , I. ‘ , ‘ / Ν
τε καὶ YEVVALOTATOL χίλιοι, KATA νομὸν τας λογχας ἔχοντες,
\ Ν “ ¥ ’ 9 / 3 4
μετὰ δὲ ἔππὸς ἄλλη χιλίη ex Περσέων ἀπολελεγμενῆη,
N “x Ν ivf 9 a a ’ 3 4
μετα de τὴν uTToy ex τῶν λοιπῶν Περσεων ἀπολελεγμένοι
΄ φΦ » 4 ‘ , Nooo Ns a
μύριοι. οὗτος πεζὸς ἦν" καὶ τούτων χίλιοι μὲν ἐπὶ τοῖσι
΄ > A a , 9 ’ Ν
δούρασι αντὶ τῶν σαυρωτήρων ῥοιὰς εἶχον χρυσέας, καὶ
, Poe \ ” e N ’ Λ > A
περιξ συνεκληϊον TOUS ἄλλους, οἱ SE εινακισχίλιοι ἐντὸς
/ 37 3 ἣν 3 4 Ν [4
τούτων EOVTES ἀργυρέας ῥοιὰς εἶχον. εἶχον δὲ χρυσέας
e ‘ a e 93 Ν ΄΄ ’ Α ld ἈΝ “A
potas καί οἱ εἰς THY γὴν τράποντες τὰς λόγχας, καὶ μῆλα
ἐν e ’ s “A ‘ / > ’
OL ἄγχιστα ἔπομενοι Ἐέρξῃ. τοῖσι δε μυρίοισι ἐπετέτακτο
a 4 ’ “ ἈΝ . of Λ
ἵππος Περσέων. μυρίη. μετὰ Se τὴν ἱππὸν διελέλειπτο

126 March of Xerxes. [Herop.

Ν ’ , ΙΝ “ ed ἊΝ
καὶ δύο σταδίους, καὶ ἔπειτεν ὁ λοιπὸς ὅμιλος ἤϊε ἀναμίξ.
3 4 N A a ’ Ν ’ a
15..amtxopevov δὲ τοῦ στρατοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Σκάμανδρον, ὃς
“a “A 3 ’ 2 ’ὔ A 3
πρῶτος ποταμῶν, ἐπεί TE ἐκ Σαρδίων ὁρμηθέντες ἐπεχείρη-
nm φῶ 3 Λ Ν / Ia 3 , vad
σαν TH ὁδῷ, ἐπέλιπε TO ῥέεθρον, οὐδ ἀπέχρησε TH στρατιῇ
“ a , 4 > AN na XN ΄ς a
τε καὶ τοῖσι κτήνεσι πινόμενος " ἐπὶ τοῦτον On τὸν ποταμὸν
e 3 4 / > “ , 4 > f ἢ
ὡς ἀπίκετο Ξερξης, ἐς τὸ Πριάμου Πέργαμον ἀνέβη, ἵμερον
¥” ? , ‘ N 7)
ἔχων θηήσασθαι. θηησάμενος δε, καὶ πυθόμενος ἐκείνων
σ a? ’ a > 4 ΑΥ̓͂ a / ἐν N
ἕκαστα, τῇ A@nvain τῇ Idtade ἔθυσε βοῦς χιλίας, χοὰς δὲ
e 4 a f 9 f. a A ,
ot Mayou τοῖσι ἥρωσι exeavto. ταῦτα δὲ ποιησαμενοισι
νυκτὸς φόβος ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐνέπεσε. ἅμα ἡμέρη δὲ
) 4 3 P ᾿ a ΊΜ Pa
emopeveto ενθεῦτεν.
3 ‘ 2 3 4 ? a Λ μ- / 9
16. Eve 5 ἐγένοντο ev ᾿Αβύδῳ, ἠθέλησε Ἐέρξης ιδέ-
’ “ , 4
σθαι πώντα τὸν στρατὸν. καὶ προεπεποίητο yap ἐπὶ
λωνοῦ ἐπίτηδες αὐτῷ ταύ οεξέδρη λίθου λευκοῦ
κολωνοῦ ἐπίτηδες αὑτῷ ταύτῃ προεξεδρηὴ λίθου λευκοῦ
3 ’ ν ν. 9 , ’ 4
(ἐποίησαν δὲ ᾿Αβυδηνοὶ ἐντειλαμένου πρότερον βασιλέος),
9 A € ed a“ > SN a ef 2 a Q Ν
ἐνθαῦτα ὡς tleTo, κατορῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ἤϊονος εθηεῖτο καὶ τον
Ἀ \ ᾿ς ᾧ 4 N ¢ 4 a a 4
πεζὸν καὶ τὰς νέας. θηεύμενος δὲ ἱμέρθη τῶν νεῶν ἅμιλ-
a, 3 4 3 XP. ᾽ 3 4 t “ > &
Aav γινομένην ἰδέσθαι. emer δ᾽ ἐγένετο TE καὶ ἐνίκων
’ ’ ) a Λ \ A a
Φοίνικες Σιδωνιοι, ἥσθη τε τῇ ἀμίλλῃ καὶ τῇ στρατιῇ.
€ Ν ὥ ’ Ν Ν € 4 e oN “ a
Ὥς δε wpa Tavta μὲν tov Ελλήσποντον ὑπὸ τῶν νεῶν
> , Ν \ > A ‘ \ 9 A
ἀποκεκρυμμένον, πάσας δὲ Tas ἀκτὰς καὶ τὰ Αβυδηνῶν
4 3 J 2 ’ > A wa / ¢ ἈΝ 3 4
media επίπλεα ἀνθρώπων, ἐνθαῦτα Ἐερξης εωυτὸν ἐμακα-
Ν a 3 4 Ν 4 3 ’
ρίσε, μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἐδάκρυσε. 17. μαθὼν δὲ μιν Αρτα-
ἃ Ν A , 3 , 3
Bavos ὁ watpws — ὃς τὸ πρῶτον γνωμὴν arredeEaTo ελευ-
’ 3 4 ’ 7 , N ‘
θερως, ov συμβουλεύων Ἐερξη στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ την ᾿Ἐλ-
, @ Ἀ Ν 4 vd Υ̓
λαδα ---- οὗτος ὡνὴρ φρασθεῖὶς Ἐερξεα δακρύσαντα, εἰρετο
, > A \ 3 , 4 3 }
τάδε" {2 βασιλεῦ, ws πολλὸν ἀλλήλων κεχωρισμένα ἐργά-
a 3. 7 / , Ν
Gao νῦν TE καὶ ὀλίγῳ πρότερον" μακαρίσας yap σεωυτὸν
‘ 9 3 a , /
δακρύεις. ὁ δε εἶπε' ᾿Εσῆλθε yup με λογισάμενον κατοι-
a e N ¥ e a 3 ΄ , > 4
κτεῖραι, ws Bpayus evn ὁ πᾶς avOpwirivos Bios, εἰ τούτων
ow) 7 Ins ’ e X ” ,
γε EovTwWY τοσούτων οὐδεὶς ἐς EXATOTTOV ETOS περίέσται.

VIL, 54.] Crossing the Hellespont. 127

‘3 4 4 a e 4 Ν ’

ὁ δε ἀμείβετο λέγων" “Ετερα τοῦτον παρὰ τὴν Cony tree
ἢ > ve ) Ν d fe. / In A
πόνθαμεν οἰκτρότερα. ἐν γὰρ οὕτω Bpaxet βίῳ ovdeis
of ¥ rN In ἢ / ¥ , ¥
οὕτω ἄνθρωπος ewv εὐδαίμων πέφυκε, οὔτε τούτων οὔτε

a an »? , ’ , rsx @&
τῶν ἄλλων, τῷ OV παραστήσεται WOAAUKLS, καὶ οὐκι ἅπαξ,
7 “a 4 Ν
τεθνάναι βούλεσθαι μᾶλλον ἣ ζώειν. αἴ τε γὰρ συμφοραὶ
’ A ΄ Ἁ ‘
προσπίπτουσαι, καὶ αἱ νοῦσοι συνταραάσσουσαι, καὶ Bpayuy
? a \ ; ¢ ε ‘
covta μακρὸν δοκέειν εἷναι ποιεῦσι τὸν βίον. οὕτω ὁ μεν
΄ a > 7 a , ‘ e ,
Guyatos, μοχθηρῆς εούσης τῆς Cons, καταφυγὴ atpetwTaTy
a 3 θ “ : e δὲ θ ον rx N 4 “ da
τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ γέγονε" ὁ δὲ Geos, yAUKUY γεύσας τὸν αἰῶνα,
“ 3 3 Aa e »ὕ, 3. ’᾽ “ > ’
φθονερὸς ἐν αὐτῷ εὑρίσκεται ἐὼν. Ἐξερξης Se ἀμείβετο
λέ , ἢ A 1 Se c 3 θ «Ἕ ’ ᾽ν, 7
ἐγων ρτάβανε, βιοτῆς μὲν νυν ἀνθρωπηϊης περι, εου-
4 a \ , ’ ΙΝ
σης τοιαύτης οἵην περ σὺ διαιρέεαι εἶναι, παυσώμεθα, unde
a [4 , 4 3 a
κακῶν μεμνεωμεθα, ypnoTa ἔχοντες πρήγματα ἐν χερσί.
9 3 μ > A Y
15. Καὶ ᾿Αρτώβανον ἀποστείλας ἐς Σοῦσα, δεύτερα με-
͵ - ἣ ‘ 7 > ν ’,
τεπέμψατο Ἐερξης Περσεων τοὺς δοκιμωτάτους " ἔπει δὲ
ε Γ΄. ἣ , 5 ͵ a > \ @€ 8
οἱ παρῆσαν, ἔλεγε σφι τάδε: ἾὯ Πέρσαι, τῶνδ᾽ ἐγὼ ὑμέων
«ἃ 4 ¥y ,ὔ 3 θ Ἁ 4 “
χρηΐζων συνελεξα, ἄνδρας te γίνεσθαι ἀγαθους, καὶ μὴ
ra s 4 3 ’ ᾽ 39 Λ
καταισχύνειν τὰ πρόσθε ἐργασμενα Πέρσῃσι, covra μεγαλα
ΠΝ a ” ᾿ς.) @ Ψ . ε ΄
τε καὶ πολλοῦ ἀξια, GAN εἰς τε ἕκαστος καὶ οἱ σύμπαντες
» “ A A ? Ν ?
προθυμίην ἔχωμεν" Evvov γὰρ τοῦτο πᾶσι ἀγαθὸν σπεύ-
a Ν oS , A φ
δεται. τῶνδε dé εἵνεκεν προαγορεύω ἀντέχεσθαι τοῦ πολέ-
2 , \ > Ss , >> Υ
μον ἐντεταμένως" ὡς yap ἐγὼ πυνθάνομαι, er ἄνδρας
͵ 2 ν a , 3 , e
στρατευόμεθα ayabous, τῶν ἣν κρατήσωμεν, οὐ μή TIS ἡμῖν
¥ Ν 3 a 3 , A Ν
ἄλλος στρατὸς ὠντιστῇ κοτε ἀνθρώπων. νῦν δε διαβαίνω-
3 ’ὔ a a 4 ’Ὅ
μεν, ἐπευξάμενοι τοῖσι θεοῖσι ot Περσίδα γῆν λελόγχασι.
7 “ “ e 4 ΄ 9 Ν ’
19. Ταυτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην παρεσκευάζοντο ἐς τὴν διω-
A ee / » 4 a eo. nF a7
βασιν, τῇ Se ὑστεραίῃ ἀνέμενον τὸν ἥλιον ἐθέλοντες ἰδέσθαι
᾽ a 3 a 4 .
ανίσχοντα, θυμιήματώ τε παντοῖα ἐπὶ τῶν γεφυρέων KaTa-
/ / 4 ‘ rd e 9 [2
γίζοντες καὶ μυρσίνησι στορνύντες τὴν ὁδόν. ὡς δ᾽ ἐπανέ-
ef. c > J ,ὔ s Ν
τέλλε ὁ ἥλιος, σπένδων εκ χρυσξης φιάλης Ἐερξης ἐς τὴν
’ e 0
θώλασσαν, εὔχετο πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον μηδεμίαν οἱ συντυχίην

128 March of Xerxes. {Herop.

΄’ ? rd ᾿΄ ’ N
τοιαύτην γενέσθαι, ἣ μιν παύσει καταστρέψασθαι τὴν
> Ὑ ἢ A > SN / a > ’
Ἐυρωπην, πρότερον ἢ emt τέρμασι τοῖσι ἐκείνης γενῆται.
, NV 3 ’ ‘ 4 3 Ν € [4
evEupevos δὲ ἐσεβαλε την φιάλην ἐς tov ᾿Ελλήησποντον καὶ
΄ ry Ν . / “ 3 ’ 4
χρύσεον κρητῆρα καὶ Περσικον ξίφος, tov axwaxnv καλε-
a > » 3 , a“ ¥ 3 a ¢ 4
ουσι. ταῦτα οὐκ ἔχω aTpexews διακρῖναι, οὔτε εἰ τῷ ἡλίῳ
, Q a 9 “ ’ ¥” 3 a , ς “
ἀνατιθεὶς κατῆκε ES TO πέλαγος, οὔτε EL μετεμέλησε οἱ TOV
ς 4 , Ss 3 Ν, 4 Ν Λ
Ελλήσποντον μαστυγωσαντι καὶ ἀντὶ τούτων τὴν θωλασ-
3 , ς Ν a » ε 3 “ ,
σαν ἐδωρεετο. 20. “2s δε ταῦτα οἱ ἐπεποίητο, διεβαινον
Ν Ν N e » a 4 Ν Ν A ’ e
κατὰ μεν τὴν ἐτερην τῶν γεφυρεων THY πρὸς τοῦ ITovTou ὁ
, . ed oe N Ν Ν N ‘ >. OA
πεζὸς τε καὶ ἢ ἵππος ἅπασα, κατὰ δὲ THY πρὸς TO Auryaiov
‘ ς ᾽ὔ Ν e oh e ἢ Ἁ “ Ν e
τὰ ὑποζύγια καὶ ἡ θεραπηΐη. nyeovto δὲ πρῶτα μεν οἱ
΄, ἢ ’ , \ gs ΄ ε
μύριοι Περσαι, ἐστεφανωμένοι πάντες, μετὰ δὲ τούτους ὁ
4 a , 3 4 ’ \ AY
σύμμικτος στρατὸς παντοίων ἐθνέων. ταύτην μεν THY
ς 4 φ “A ΩΝ eC , a Ν σ ¢ , Ν
ἡμέρην οὔτοι, τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίῃ πρῶτοι μεν OL τε ἱππόται καὶ
e N , , ͵ 4 ’ Ν . φ
οἱ τὰς λόγχας κάτω τράποντες " ἐστεφανωντο δε καὶ οὕτοι"
Ν Ν a “ e e ιν \ \ ef XC en 2 AN Ν
μετὰ δὲ οἱ τε ἵπποι οἱ ἱροὶ καὶ τὸ ἅρμα το ἱρὸν, emt δε
> + wm . εἰ} , \ ες t € t ;
αὐτὸς Te BepEns Kar οἱ αἰχμοφοροι καὶ οἱ ἡππόται οἱ χίλιοι,
> N Ν / ee 6” , Ν ε / ad > »,
ἐπι δὲ τούτοισι ὁ ἄλλος στρατὸς. καὶ αἱ νέες ἅμα ανη-
2 ν 2 , “AN \ » \ ao
yovro ἐς τὴν amevaytiov, ἤδη δὲ ἤκουσα καὶ ὕστατον
A , , »4 ν. 3 / ,
διαβῆναι Bacirea πάντων. 213. Ἐερξης de ἐπεὶ τε διεβη
3 Α 2 a 3 »“ ἈΝ ἈΝ ς N ’ὔ
ἐς τὴν Evpwrny, ἐθηεῖτο τὸν στρατὸν ὑπὸ μαστίγων δια-
,ὔ : , Ne ‘ 2 a > e \ ¢a \
Bawovra, διεβη δὲ ὁ στρατὸς αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐπτὰ ἡμέρησι και
ἐν ἑπτὰ εὐφρόνησι, ἐλινύσας οὐδένα χρόνον. ἐνθαῦτα λεέ-
εν ἐπτὰα ἐΥΦΡΌΡΗ b, € a : xP ‘ :
γεται, Ἐέρξεω ἤδη διαβεβηκότος tov ᾿Ελλήσποντον, avopa
’ a e / 3 a f \ 2 Ν γὼ “
εἰπεῖν ᾿Ελλησπόντιον" ( Ζεῦ, τὶ δὴ ἀνδρὲ εἰδόμενος
Tle + wv 3 ων 4 ων tot f θέ 3 ’
Epon καὶ οὔνομα ἀντὶ Avs Ξερξεα θέμενος, ἀνάστατον
A e 7 + ed a ¥ , 3 ’
τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα εθέλεις ποιῆσαι, ἄγων πάντας ἀνθρωπους ;
a Ἁ ΜΝ 4 3...» κι ’ A
καὶ yap ἄνευ τουτων ἐξὴν τοι ποίεειν ταῦτα.
x Ν “ Ν 4 ’ 4 N
22. Ὃ ὃε ναυτικὸς ἔξω τον Ελλήσποντον πλωων Tapa
κι 3 / Ν ¥ , a A rd ‘N
γῆν ἐκομίζετο, Ta ἔμπαλιν πρήησσων τοῦ πεζοῦ. Ὃ de
7 9 Ν a A 93 , ‘ ὔ “
Aopioxos ἐστὶ τῆς Opnixns αἰγιαλὸς τε καὶ πεδίον μέγα,

VIL, 100.] Numbering the Forces. 129

νον > a ὁ. Ν 4 τ ¥ 9 a
δια δε αὐτοῦ ῥέει ποταμὸς μέγας “EBpos. ἐδοξε ὧν τῷ
=| ‘of ς a 9 > 45 > 5 (ξ € “ of θ ΄Π)ὃ
Fepén ὁ χῶρος εἶναι ἐπιτήδεος ενδιαταξαε τε καὶ εξαριθμῆ-

εν . Ν . 2 4 a ‘ “ δ , ΜΝ
σαι τὸν στρατὸν, καὶ ἐποίεε ταῦτα. τὰς μὲν δὴ νέας τὰς

, 3 a 2 4 e 4 ΄
πασας ὠπικομένας ἐς Ζορίσκον οἱ ναύαρχοι κελεύσαντος
| > 3 “ 9 ‘ a , , 2 ’
Ἐέρξεω ἐς τὸν αἰγίαλον τὸν προσεχέεα Δορίσκῳ ἐκομίσαν.

δ 3 a / A a ,
28. ὁ de ev τῷ Δορίσκῳ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῆς στρατιῆς
’ “ 3 / “ , rd a ,
aptOwov ἐποιέετο. Ocov μὲν νυν ἕκαστοι παρεῖχον πλη-
θ 3 θ N ? ΝΜ > .ι« » ‘ 2 \ x ,

cos ἀριθμὸν, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι τὸ ἀτρεκὲς (οὐ yap λέγεται

Ν > = 3 , / δ a α
πρὸς οὐδαμῶν ἀνθρωπωνῚ, σύμπαντος δὲ τοῦ στρατοῦ τοῦ

A ἃ ζω 3 ¢ ’ “ « ‘ 4
πεζοῦ To πλῆθος εφάνη εβδομήκοντα καὶ ExaTov μυριάδες.
3 , N r “\ ͵ ’ ᾿ 9 Φ
ἐξηρίθμησαν δὲ tovde τὸν τρόπον" συναγαγοντες ἐς ἕνα

ry J 3 4 N ͵ ’ e ’

χῶρον μυριάδα ἀνθρώπων, καὶ συνναξαντες ταύτην ὡς μα-
3 ’ ¥ ’ὔ ’

λιστα εἶχον, περιέγραψαν ἔξωθεν κύκλον, περύγραψαντες

‘\ ω , e Ν 7 Ν Ν
δε καὶ ἀπέντες τοὺς μυρίους, αἱμασιὴν περιέβαλον κατὰ τὸν

(v4 2 , 3 Ν 3 “ 93 é ’
κύκλον, ὕψος ανήκουσαν avdpt ἐς Tov ομφαλον. ταύτην
δὲ ΝΥ. 9 ’ὔ 3 “ 4
ἐποιήσαντες, ἄλλους ἐσεβίβαζον ἐς TO περιοικοδομημένον,

’ φ , , a ἢ ᾿ / > ,
μέχρι ov πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐξηριθμησαν. αἀριθμή»-

Ν ΝΣ 4 lA
σαντες δὲ κατὰ ἐθνεα διέτασσον.
4 ‘ >] Ν ’ “N 4 e

24. Ξέρξης δε, ἐπεὶ ἠριθμήθη τε καὶ διετάχθη ὁ otpa-
Ν 2 4 3 ’ ’ ’ Ν
τὸς, ἐπεθύμησε αὐτὸς σφεας διεξελάσας θηησασθαι. μετὰ
ΝΟΣ , a ‘ , ᾽ / ν
δε ἐποίεε ταῦτα, καὶ διεξελαύνων ἐπὶ ἅρματος παρὰ ἔθνος
ἁ tA 3 ͵ N 3 , «
ἕν ἕκαστον ἐπυνθάνετο, καὶ ἀπέγραφον οἱ γραμματισταὶ,
Ὕ ) 3 ᾿. > > 4 Ν »οΡ. ὠί Ν A
ἕως εξ ἐσχατῶν ἐς ἔσχατα ἀπίκετο, καὶ τῆς ὕππου καὶ TOU

a e Ν A , « 3 “ a a
πεζοῦ. ὡς O€ ταῦτα οἱ ἐπεποίητο, τῶν νεῶν κατελκυσθει-

/ ) , 3 A / \ 293 ne
σέων ἐς θάλασσαν, ἐνθαῦτα ὁ Ἐέρξης, μετεκβὰς ἐκ τοῦ ἅρ-

ϑ ’ 7ὔ [4 ΟΝ A ’ δ 4
ματος ἐς νέα Σιδωνίην, ἵζετο ὑπὸ σκηνῇ χρυσέῃ Kal παρέ-

Α “ a a A 3 a) e 4

TWE παρὰ TAS πρῴρας τῶν νεῶν, ἐπειρωτῶν TE ἑκάστας
e ’ φ Ν N ἈΝ Q 3 a ιν ’,
ὁμοίως ὡς καὶ τὸν πεζὸν, καὶ ἀπογραφόμενος. τὰς δὲ νέας
e ͵ 9 , ov] , ’ >, 8 a
οἱ ναύαρχοι ἀναγαγόντες ὅσον Te τέσσερα πλέθρα ἀπὸ TOU

2 a 3 , Ν ’ 3 a ’ ,ὔ
αἰγιαλοῦ ἀνεκωώχευον, TAS πρῴρας ἐς γῆν τρέψαντες πάντες

Xs Ν 3 \ 9 ,ὔ ς 3 4
μετωπηδον, Kat ἐξοπλίσαντες Tous ἐπιβάτας ὡς ἐς πολε-
3 |

130 March of Xerxes. ᾿ [Herop.

e δ᾽ 9 “ a 4 a 3 A “ A
pov. ὃ ὃ ἐντὸς τῶν πρῳρέων TAWwY ἐθηεῖτο καὶ τοῦ
9 a ,
αὐγίιαλου.
jm ἢ Ν 93 ra , 9 tA >, A ‘ e
25. EepEns de ex τοῦ Δορίσκου ἐπορεύετο emt την Ed-
, Ἁ Ν Ν 4 9 “a 4
Auda, Tous δὲ αἰεὶ γινομένους ἐμποδὼν συστρατεύεσθαι
ΕΣ 4 ¢ \ ¢ ’ e 4 “ Ν ‘N
ἠνάγκαζε. οἱ δε ὑποδεκόμενοι Ελλήνων τὴν στρατιὴν καὶ
/ at / > a a ? 4 [2 <4 > 7
δειπνίζοντες Ἐέρξεα ἐς πᾶν κακοῦ ἀπίκατο, οὕτω ὥστε avu-
93 > 7 > 7 PY , εν A
στατοι EX τῶν οἰκίων ἐγίνοντο" ὅκου γε Θασίοισι ὑπερ τῶν
2 e 9 ’ ’ a , , . wee /
ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ πολίων τῶν σφετέρων δεξαμένοισι τὴν Ἐξερ-
Ν Ἁ ’ 3 4 ς 3 , 3
few στρατιὴν καὶ δειπνίσασι, Avtitratpos ὁ Οργέος ἀραι-
, a >] a > NS 7 e a / 3 ,
ρημένος, τῶν ἀστῶν ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὁμοῖα τῷ μάλιστα, απέ-
3 Ν a ΠΝ, f. 3 ’
δεξε ἐς τὸ δεῖπνον τετρακόσια τάλαντα ἀργυρίου τετελε-
wv Ν , 3 Ν ϑ ’
σμένα. 26. ἔνθα δὴ Μεγακρέοντος ἀνδρὸς Αβδηρίτεω
¥ 4 93 a 3 ’ ἃ or 7A ὃ ’
ἔπος εὖ εἰρημένον ἐγένετο, ὃς συνεβούλευσε Αβδηριτησι
ΟΝ ? \ δ a 3 ! 2 \ ’ εν
πανδημεὶ αὑτοὺς καὶ γυναῖκας ἐλθόντας ἐς Ta σφέτερα ipa
ied e 74 a a 4 \ x ὔ
ἰζεσθαι ἱκέτας τῶν θεῶν, παραιτεομένους Kat TO λοιπὸν
3 7 a 3 , A A ¢ ’ a)
σφι ATALUVELY τῶν ETLOVTMY κακῶν TA ἡμίσεα, τῶν TE πα-
, ¥ , ’ ad Ν μ- 7
ροιχομένων ἔχειν σφι μεγάλην χαριν, ort βασίλευς eps
2 δ ς » / > 7 a ς » 4
ou dus ExuoTns ἡμέρης ἐνόμισε σῖτον αἰἱρεεσθαι" παρέχειν
Ὰ Ἅ 3 / ? νιν ς a a
yap av ABSnpityot, εἰ καὶ ἄριστον προείρητο ὁμοία τῷ
, A ‘oe ’ wa | 2 Ul
δείπνῳ παρασκευάξειν, ἢ μὴ ὕπομενειν Ἐέρξεα ἐπιόντα,
aA ’ , ’ , a
ἢ καταμείναντας κάκιστα πάντων avOpwrov διατριβῆκαι.
e Ν x , rr 4 X 3 , 9 ,
27. Οἱ μὲν δὴ πιεζόμενοι ὅμως TO ἐπιτασσοόμενον eETreTE-
“ 3 “A 4 4 > ’ ἴω
λεον. Ἐέρξης Se ex τῆς AxavOov ἐντειλάμενος τοῖσι στρα-
a “ Ν Ν ς ’ 3 4 x A
τηγοῖσι TOV ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ὑπομένειν ἐν Θερμῃ, απῆκε
32. 9 e a “ 4 4 ’ Ν A 3 a
am’ ἑωυτοῦ τὰς νέας πορεύεσθαι, (Θέρμῃ δὲ τῇ ἐν τῷ
Θ ,ὕ ay 3 / > > φ Ν e Η͂ φ
Eppa κολπῳ οἰκημένῃ, ἀπ ἧς καὶ O κόλπος OUTOS
Ν 3 4 ¥ , Ν 9 ‘A ,
THY ἐπωνυμίην ἔχει") ταύτῃ yap ἐπυνθάνετο συντομώτατον
9
εἶναι.
€ ‘ N ‘ / ,. ς » ὯΝ (
28. Ὃ μεν δὴ περὶ Πιερίην διετριβε ἡμέρας συχνας. οι
Ν Ν 4 3 [2 3 Ν ς , ; AN a
δὲ δὴ κήρυκες οἱ ἀποπεμφθέντες es τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα ἐπὶ γῆς
¥ > 7 e Ν N e \ 4 δ
αἰτησιν ἀπίκατο, οἱ μὲν κειίνοὶ, οἱ Se φεροντες γῆν τε Kas

va, 139.] Demand of Earth and Water. 131

A Ἁ rd a s @ ad “
ὕδωρ. Τῶν δὲ δόντων ταῦτα ἐγένοντο ode, Θεσσαλοι,
2 N x , é
Δόλοπες, Αἰνιῆνες, Περραιβοὶ, Λοκροὶ, Μάγνητες, ἥηλιεες,
A “ Ν e X .
᾿Αχαιοὶ οἱ Φθιῆται, καὶ Θηβαίοι, καὶ ot ἄλλοι Βοιωτοι πλην
ὁ Ξ.Ν ΄ ed
θεσπιέων te καὶ Πλαταιεων. ἐπὶ τούτοισι ot Ελληνες
Υ ad e a , a 3 ’ ον δὲ
ἔταμον ὅρκιον οἱ τῷ βαρβάρῳ πόλεμον ἀειράμενοι. τὸ OE
σ Ψ “ 4 y¥ 4, ΕῚ ty
ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε" “Ooor τῷ Πέρσῃ ἔδοσαν odeas αὐτοὺς
q 27 x +) θέ , φ
ἔλληνες εοντες, μὴ ἀαναγκασθεντες, καταστάντων σφι εὖ
n 4 A ta] 3 a
τῶν πρηγμάτων, τούτους δεκατεῦσαι τῷ ἐν Δελφοῖσι θεῷ.
Ν ‘ SN e σι @ 3 ‘
τὸ μὲν δὴ ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε τοῖσι ᾿Ελλησι. 29. ες Se
3 θ ’ Q ? 9 Ῥ tf μ- ἢ» | ν" ~ w
AOnvas καὶ Σπάρτην ove ἀπέπεμψε BepEns ἐπι γῆς αἰτη-
4 a Vv ’ ,’ ’
σιν κήρυκας τῶνδε εἵνεκεν" πρότερον Δαρείου πεμψαντος
2.» > Ν a . I a \ > ἢ 2 N ,
ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτο, οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν τοὺς αἰτέοντας ἐς TO Bapa-
e 2 9 4 3 ’ > » a
Opov, οἱ δ᾽ ἐς φρέαρ ἐσβαλόντες, ἐκέλευον γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ
? v4 δ Q 0 ? Ἁ σ 2
ἐκ τούτων φέρειν παρὰ βασίλεα. τούτων μὲν εἴνεκεν οὐκ
“ “»- Ν ? , oe x an 3 ’
ἔπεμψε Ἐερξης τοὺς αἰτήσοντας. ὅ τι δε τοῖσι Αθηναῖ-
A , s ’ ¢ s 4
Olgt ταῦτα ποιήσασι TOUS κήρυκας συνήνεικε ανεθέλητον
,ὔ θ b wv +f Ν a 4 ° ’ x, @
γενεσθαι, ove ἔχω εἶπαι, πλὴν OTL σφέων ἡ χωρὴ καὶ ἡ
/ 3 Ae 4 3 Ν a > Ν , “ - 9
πόλις ἐδηϊωθη. adda τοῦτο ov δια ταύτην τὴν αἰτίην
4 4
δοκεω ryever Gas.
ς \ / e , ¥ Ν
©. Ἢ δε στρατηλασίη ἡ βασίλεος οὔνομα μὲν εἶχε ὡς
> »»ἢ ΄ ’ A Ν a
er A@nvas ἐλαύνει, κατίετο δὲ ἐς πᾶσαν τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα.
͵ Ay a ιν ω σ
πυνθανόμενοι δὲ ταῦτα πρὸ πολλοῦ, οἱ “Ελληνες οὐκ ἐν
e 7 ’ μὴ a ¢ “ a a
ὁμοίῳ πάντες ἐποιεῦντο" οἱ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν δόντες γῆν τε
καὶ “5 a Πέ 9 6 , e Oe ,
t ὕδωρ τῷ Πέρσῃ εἶχον θάρσος, ws οὐδὲν πεισόμενοι
Ν Ν a , ¢ Ν δ] , 9 4
ἄχαρι πρὸς τοῦ βαρβαρον" οἱ δε ov δοντες ἐν δείματι pe-
Ἃ 2 σ΄“ A a 3 U4 3 ae ,
γάλῳ κατέστασαν, ἅτε οὔτε νεῶν ἐουσέων ev τῇ Βλλάδι
3 Ν 3 , 4 “ 9 ’ ¥ ’
ἀριθμὸν ἀξιομάχων δέκεσθαι τὸν ἐπιόντα, οὔτε βουλομένων
a A 3 ’ A 4
TOV πολλῶν ἀντάπτεσθαι τοῦ πολέμου, μηδιζόντων δὲ προ-
’ 3 a 3 ᾽ 4 9 a
θύμως. 81. ἐνθαῦτα ἀναγκαιῇ ἐξέργομαι γνώμην ἀποδε-
ξασθαι ἐπίφθονον μὲν πρὺς τῶν πλεόνων ἀνθρώπων, ὅ ὅμως
δὲ, τῇ γ᾽ ἐμοὶ φαίνεται εἶναι ἀληθὲς, οὐκ ἐπισχήσω. εἰ

132 Preparations of the Greeks. [Hznop.

, a , “ 3 ’ ’ γᾳφ.ω}
Αθηναῖοι καταρρωδησαντες τὸν ἐπιόντα κίνδυνον ἐξέλιπον
Ν ’ “A “\ Ν 2 , 3 Ν ’ ¥
THY σφετέρην, ἢ καὶ μὴ ExALTTOVTES ἀλλα μείναντες ἔδοσαν
᾽ 3 ω A “ Ν Λ 3 ,
σφεας avtous Ἐερξη, κατὰ τὴν θάλασσαν οὐδαμοὶ ἂν eet
a 3 4 Le 9 / A Ν
ρῶντο αντιεύμενοι βασιλεῖ. εἰ τοίνυν κατὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
. 3 a bent? , Aa \ ΝΥ wn > 7
μηδεὶς ἠντιοῦτο Ἐερξῃ, kata ye ἂν την ἤπειρον τοιάδε ἐγί-
4 Ν Ν a 4 .] 8
r€eTO* εἰ Kat πολλοῖ τείχεων κιθῶνες ἦσαν ἐληλαμένοι διὰ
a?) Aa / , vA
tov Ic@pov Πελοποννησίοισι, προδοθεντες ἂν ΔΛακεδαιμό-
e oN a ’ > e 4 3 e666? >
LOL ὑπὸ τῶν συμμάχων οὐκ EXOVTWY, ἀλλ᾽ UT ἀναγκαίης,
Ν ,. , eon A a A a
κατὰ πόλις ἁλισκομένων ὕπο τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ TOU
, 4 , ’ ery . 9 ͵
βαρβάρου, ἐμουνώθησαν, μουνωθεντες δὲ ἂν καὶ ἀποδεξά-
» , > » ? A a“ A
μενοι ἔργα μεγαλα ἀπέθανον γενναίως. 82. ἢ ταῦτα ἂν
” A Ν a ’ “A N ‘ ¥ ef
ἔπαθον, ἢ προ τοῦ ὁρέοντες ἂν καὶ τους ἄλλους Εἰλληνας
/ e , A 3 4 Ν "»-“ \
μηδίζοντας, ὁμολογίῆ ἂν ἐχρήσαντο πρὸς Ἐέρξεα. καὶ
f > 9 2 ρε Ν > » e oN ’
εὕτω ἂν ἐπ᾿ ἀμφότερα ἡ “Eddas εγίνετο ὑπὸ Πέρσησι.
Ν ἣν 9 7 Ν A ¢ a Ν ~ 3 a
τὴν γὰρ ὠφελίην τὴν τῶν τειχέων τῶν δια τοῦ ᾿Ισθμοῦ
> , ? , , 4 A > μ
ἐληλαμένων οὐ δύναμαι πυθέσθαι ἥτις ἂν ἦν, βασιλέος
9 ἜΣ = ͵ a . > , ¥
(Tixpateovtos τῆς θαλάσσης. νῦν de ᾿Αθηναίους ἂν Tis
/ A , a ¢ ’ ᾽ A ¢ /
λέγων σωτῆρας γενέσθαι τῆς Ελλαδος οὐκ ἂν ἁμαρτάνοι
3 ,ὕ φ ‘ > 4 ’ a , 4 ,
τάληθεος " οὗτοι γὰρ ἐπὶ ὁκότερα τῶν πρηγμώτων ετρα-
A 4 ἐς ’ » Ν e ,
ποντο, ταῦτα ῥέψειν ἔμελλε. ἐλόμενοι Oe τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα
ω 9 4 a XN ¢ “ a - \ Ν
περιείναι ἐλευθερην, τοῦτο τὸ Ελληνικὸν πᾶν τὸ λοίπον,
od ἈΝ 9 7 3 N e 4 e 9 ’ὔ LY
ὅσον μὴ εἐμήδισε, αὐτοὶ OVTOL ἦσαν οἱ επεγείραντες, Kat
, , ‘ > / ϑ /
βασίλεα peta γε θεους ἀνωσάμενοι. οὐδὲ σφεας χρηστή-
3 , 2 A N ? “ ,
pia φοβερὰ edOovta ex Δελφῶν καὶ es δεῖμα βαλοντα
3 a Ν e / 3 Ν ᾽ > ,
ἔπεισε ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν Ελλάδα, αλλα καταμείναντες ave-
Ν 9 4 > ON Ν ’ ’
σχοντο τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν χωρην δεξασθαι.
’ὔ Ν φ a 3 ‘
88, Πεμψαντες yap ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι es Aerdhovs θευ-
4 ’ 9 ¢ a 4 ’
πρόπους χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἤσαν ἑτοῖμοι. καὶ ode ποιή"
. ON N Ἢ ; e 3 \ / ’
σασι περὶ TO ἱρὸν Ta νομιζόμενα, ὡς ἐς TO μέγαρον ἐσεὰλ-
, “ A e , a δή 4 9 ,
Oovres ἰξζοντο, χρᾷ ἡ IIvOin, τῇ οὔνομα ἣν «Αἀριστονικῆ,
τάδε"

VIL, 141.] Delphie Oracles. 133

*Q μέλεου, τί κάθησθε ; λιπὼν φεῦγ᾽ ἔσχατα γαίης
δώματα καὶ πόλιος τροχοειδέος ἄ ἄκρα κώρηνα.

Οὔτε γὰρ ἡ κεφαλὴ μένει ἔμπεδον, οὔτε τὸ σῶμα,

Οὔτε πόδες νέατοι, οὔτ᾽ ὧν χέρες, οὔτε τι μέσσης
Λείπεται, ἀλλ᾽ ἀΐδηλα πέλει. κατὰ γάρ μιν ἐρείπει ὅ
Πῦρ τε καὶ ὀξὺς "Apns, Σ υριηγενὲς ἅρμα διώκων.
Πολλὰ δὲ κἄλλ᾽ ἀπολεῖ πυργώματα, κοὺ τὸ σὸν οἷον"
Πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἀθανάτων νηοὺς μαλερῷ πυρὶ δώσει,

Οἵ που νῦν ἱδρῶτι ῥεούμενοι ἑστήκασι,

Acipare παλλόμενοι, κατὰ δ᾽ ἀκροτάτοις ὁρόφοισι 10
Αἷμα μέλαν κέχυται, προϊδὸν κακότητος ἀνάγκας.

"AXN ἔτον ἐξ ἀδύτοιο, κακοῖς δ᾽ ἐπικίδνατε θυμόν.

a 3 ’ e 9 ,
84, Ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες, οἱ τῶν Αθηναίων θεοπρόποι cup-
a a , 9 4 t “ 4, 3 x
φορῇ τῇ μεγίστῃ ἐχρέοντο. προβάλλουσι δε σφέας αὐτους
e oN a a J a ᾽ ᾿ , e 3 4
ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ τοῦ κεχρησμένου, Τίμων ὁ AvdpoBovdov,
a a x N 7 a A Λ , ’
τῶν Δελφῶν ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὁμοία τῷ μάλιστα, συνεβούλευε
¢ , A , 4 ἢ A
σφι ἱκετηρίας λαβοῦσι δεύτερα αὕτις ἐλθόντας χρᾶσθαι
a , e e fs 4 XN A a“
τῷ χρηστηρίῳ ws ἱκέτας. πειθομένοισι δὲ ταῦτα τοῖσι
᾽ , ν / 3 A ea ΑΥ̓͂ ’
Αθηναίοισι, καὶ λέγουσι" ᾿Ώναξ, χρῆσον ἡμῖν ἄμεινόν τι
N om ; ’ Ν \ U / 4
περι τῆς πατρίδος, αἰδεσθεὶς Tas ἱκετηρίας τάσδε Tus ToL
“ . A ¥ ¥ 3 aA 97 ἈΕῚ
ἥκομεν φεροντες" ἢ οὐ ToL ἄπιμεν εκ τοῦ αδύτου, αλλ,
, a a 4 ¥ >A N , “
αὐτοῦ τῇδε μενέομεν, ἐστ᾽ ἂν Kat τελευτήσωμεν" BS. ταῦτα
7 4 e / a ,
δε λέγουσι ἡ πρόμαντις χρᾷ δεύτερα τάδε

3 ΄ ’ 4
Ov δύναται Παλλὰς At’ ᾽Ολύμπιον ἐξιλάσασθαι,
/ a“ a
Λισσομένη πολλοῖσι λόγοις καὶ μήτιδι πυκνῇ.
Ν s 7.93 4 “ > », 3 ’ ’
Σοὶ Se tod αὖτις ἔπος ἐρέω, ἀδάμαντι πεέλασσας.
a ΝΜ ’
Τῶν ἄλλων γὰρ ἁλισκομένων, ὅσα Κέκροπος οὖρος
> ‘ ¥ , a 4
Evtos eyes κευθμων τε Κιθαιρῶνος ξαθέεοιο, ὄ
A "“" a ἈΝ
Τεῖχος Τριτογενεῖ ξύλινον διδοῖ εὐρύοπα Ζεὺς
ἴω > ’ ’ Ν Ν ’ 5 3 4
Movvov ἀπόρθητον τελεθειν, τὸ σε TEKVA τ᾽ ονήσει.
N 4 9
Μηδὲ σύ γ᾽ ἱπποσύνην τε μένειν καὶ πεΐὸν ἰόντα
3 9 A
Πολλὸν ἀπ᾿ ἠπείρου στρατὸν ἥσυχος, ἀλλ᾿ ὑποχωρεῖν

134 Preparations of the Greeks. “ [Herop.

Νῶτον ἐπιστρέψας . €TL τοί κοτε κἀντίος ἔσσῃ. 1
"QQ θείη Σαλαμὶς, ἀπολεῖς δὲ σὺ τέκνα γυναικῶν
"H που σκιδναμένης Δημήτερος ἣ συνιούσης.

a_ #4 3 , Ν a ’ ν 9 a
Ταῦτα σφι nriwtepa γὰρ τῶν προτέρων καὶ ἦν καὶ
8. 7 φ ’ 3 , 9 9
edoxee εἶναι, συγγραψαμενοι ἀπαλλάσσοντο ἐς τὰς AOnvas.
e . 9 ͵ ς ’ > » 4 ‘ "
ὡς Se ἀπέλθοντες οἱ θεοπρόποι ἀπήγγελλον ἐς τὸν δῆμον,
a \ vy Ν ’ 4 pe
γνῶμαι καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ ἐγίνοντο διξημένων τὸ μαντήϊον,
s es “ , a ’
καὶ aide συνεστηκυΐαι μάλιστα" τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἔλεγον
é ὔ “ a “ b ) a a
μετεξέτεροι Soxeeww ods τὸν θεὸν τὴν ἀκρόπολιν χρῆσαι
4 ¢ Ν 2 , Ν , A 4 /
περιέσεσθαι" ἢ γὰρ ἀκρόπολις τὸ πάλαι τῶν ᾿Αθηνέων
e a > #¢ ς ss Ν δ Ν Ν 4
PNX” ἐπεῴρακτο. οἱ μὲν bn κατὰ Tov φραγμὸν συνεβαλ-
a ιν ΄ a ΠῚ > ».
AovTo τοῦτο τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι" οἱ δ᾽ αὖ ἔλεγον τὰς
’ , “ Ν ‘ 4 4 3
veas σημαίνειν τὸν θεὸν, καὶ ταῦτας παραρτέεσθαι ἐκέλευον
\ »# 3 ’ x > “ Q ,ὕ ’ 9 LY
Ta ἄλλα ἀπέντας. τοὺς ὧν δὴ Tas νέας λέγοντας εἶναι TO
͵΄ a ¥ SY ’ Q a e ’ὔ e A
ξύλινον τεῖχος ἐσφαλλε τὰ δύο ta τελευταῖα ῥηθεντα ὑπο
A 4
τῆς Πυθίης,

4 af 9 nf Ν N ’ a
Ώ θείη Σαλαμὶς, ἀπολεῖς Se ov τέκνα γυναικῶν
"H που σκιδναμένης 4ημήτερος ἣ συνιούσης.

a , e a ζω ,
κατὰ ταῦτα τὰ ἔπεα συνέχέοντο al γνῶμαι τῶν φαμένων
Ν ’ a 9 e Ν
τὰς veas τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι. οἱ Yap χρησμολόγοι
4 A 3 ’ e 3 Ν a “ Y
τἄντῇ ταῦτα chap Βανον, ὡς appt Σ αλαμίνα δεῖ σφεας

ἐσσωθῆναι ναυμαχίην TapacKevacapevous.
4 Loca 3 > SN 3 , \
7. Ἣν δὲ τῶν τις ᾿Αθηναίων ἀνὴρ ἐς πρώτους νεωστὶ
a ¥ Q J a ‘ ͵ὔ
παριὼν, τῷ οὔνομα μὲν ἦν Θεμιστοκλέης, παῖς de Νεοκλέος
9 4 φ e oN ? ΕΙΣ A 9 a Ν ‘
ἐκαλέετο. OUTOS ὡνὴρ οὐκ ἔφη πᾶν ορθῶς τοὺς χρησμολύ-
’ > 9 9 4
yous συμβάλλεσθαι, λέγων τοιάδε" εἰ ἐς ᾿Αθηναίους εἶχε
, ,ὔ , a oe / /
TO ἔπος εἰρημένον EOVTWS, οὐκ ἂν οὕτω μιν δοκέειν ἠπίως
a εν φ 4 ’ SY 9 a
χρησθῆναι, ἀλλὰ ὧδε, Q σχετλίη Σαλαμὶς, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἢ
Ἢ Υ̓ ,ὔ Υ 4 9 > 9a
θείη Σαλαμὶς, εἰ πέρ ye ἔμελλον οἱ οἰκήτορες ἀμφ᾽ αὐτῇ
λε ’ Ἰλλὰ A 2 Ν λ / a θ a 9 A θαι
τελευτήσειν. ἀλλὰ Yap ἐς τοὺς πολεμίους τῷ Few εἰρῆσ

VIL, 145.] ~ Counsel of Themistocles. . 188

a , 4 Q a 9 3 9 3 >
τὸ χρηστήριον συλλαμβάνοντι κατὰ τὸ ὀρθὸν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐς
3 / / > 9 ‘\ e rd
Αθηναίους. παρασκευάζεσθαι ὧν avTovs ws vavpaxynoor
id ς ’ 3, a 4 4
τας συνεβούλευε, ὡς τούτου eEovTos τοῦ ξυλίνου τείχεος.
Φ 2 > a δι
ταύτῃ Θεμιόδτοκλέος ἀποφαινομένου, Αθηναίοι ταῦτα σφι
ν a, 4 a “a “ A 4
ἐγνωσαν αἱρετώτερα εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ τῶν χρησμολογων,
ἃ 3 ΕΣ , 9 4 a ‘ 7 7 Jas
δὲ οὐκ ἔων ναυμαχίην ἀρτέεσθαι, τὸ Se σύμπαν εἶναι οὐδε
σ΄ 3 ’ 9 A 3 , ’ ἃ 4 a
χείρας ἀανταείρεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ExALTTOVTAS χώρην τὴν Ἀττικὴν
¥ Ν 9 € ’ 4. ,
ἄλλην τινὰ οἰκίζειν. 88. ᾿Ετέρη τε Θεμιστοκλεῖ γνωμὴ
¥ ’ 3 “ 9 ’ oS 3 4
ἔμπροσθε ταύτης ἐς καιρὸν ἠρίστευσε, ὅτε Αθηναίοισι
, Λ 3 a A “ 3 A
γενομένων χρημάτων μεγάλων ἐν τῷ κοινῷ, τὰ ἐκ τῶν
a x, NN ¥ lA
μετώλλων σφι προσῆλθε τῶν ἀπὸ Λαυρείου, ἔμελλον λάξε-
9 .N (v4 ’ ’᾽ ’ 4 τ
σθαι ὀρχηδὸν ἕκαστος Sexa δραχμάς. τότε Θεμιστοκλέης
> 7 3 , A 4 4 a
ἀνέγνωσε Αθηναίους, τῆς διαιρέσιος ταύτης πανσαμένους,
4 4 a / , ’ 2 \
νέας τούτων τῶν χρημάτων ποιήσασθαι διηκοσίας ἐς τὸν
, “ x 9 ’ 7 φ Ἀ e 4
πόλεμον, τὸν πρὸς Avywntas λέγων. OUTOS Yap O πόλεμος
Ν " ’ “ ς ’ 3 4 ’
συστὰς ἔσωσε τότε τὴν λλάδα, ἀναγκασας θαλασσίους
/ 3 e - ) δ ‘N 3 ’ 3
γενέσθαι ᾿Αθηναίους. αἱ δὲ ἐς τὸ μὲν ἐποιήθησαν οὐκ
2 , 3 ‘ f A ’ 3 ’ @ 4
ἐχρήσθησαν, es δέον δὲ οὕτω τῇ Ελλώδι ἐγένοντο. αὕὑταί
Ν φ ’ A 9 / a e A
te On at νέες τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναιοισι προποιηθεῖσαι ὑπῆρχον,
er ¥ / ¥ ,᾿ » VAN
eTepas τε ἔδεε προσναυπηγέεσθαι. ἐδοξε τὲ σφι peta TO
, ’ 3 ’ὔ 3.ϑ αὶ δ e / Ν
χρηστήριον βουλευομένοισι, ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλαδα τὸν
, , “ “‘ N “ a 4
BupBapov δεκεσθαι τῇσι νηυσὶ πανδημεὶ, τῷ θεῷ πειθομέ-
7 1 7 σι
νους, ἅμα ᾿Ελλήνων τοῖσι βουλομένοισι.
N Ν Ν , A a 4 >
39. Ta μὲν δη χρηστήρια ταῦτα τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι εγε-
’ ’ὔ Ν 3 3 “ A ‘\ e ’
γόνεε" συλλεγομένων δὲ ἐς TwUTO τῶν περὶ THY Ελλάδα
Ἁ 9 ’ 4 Ν ’ 4 , Ἁ
τὰ ἀμείνω φρονεόντων, καὶ διδοντων σφίσι λόγον Kat
/ 3 A 3 4 b a “" .
πίστιν, ἐνθαῦτα ἐδόκεε βουλενομένοισι αὐτοῖσι πρῶτον μεν
/ / / ¥
χρημάτων πάντων καταλλάσσεσθαι tas τε ἔχθρας καὶ
Ν > 3 , 27 / 9 N ,

TOUS KAT ἀλλήλους ἐόντας πολέμους. ἦσαν δε προς τινας
, ey 9 ’ e \ 9 ’ 9 ’ ’
Kat ἄλλους EYKEKPNMEVOL, O δε wy μέγιστος Αθηναιοιῖσι τε

Ν 9 , Ν Ν , , Ν a
kat Αιγινήτησι. μετὰ Se, πυνθανόμενοι Repkea συν τῷ

136 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop.

a @ 9 , 9 s ? ’
στρατῷ εἶναι ev Σάρδισι, ἐβουλεύσαντο κατασκοποὺυς πέμ-
? Ν 9 ’ κι / 7 ΞΙΚ
mew es την ᾿Ασιην τῶν βασίλεος πρηγμάτων, ες Apyos τε
3 Λ ¢ 4 ᾽ ‘ “ ’
ἀγγέλους ὁμαιχμίην συνθησομένους πρὸς τὸν Πέρσην, καὶ
3 / ¥ 4 , Ν ,
es > LKEALHVY ANXOUS πεμπειν παρὰ Γέλωνα τον «“Δεινομένεος,
4 ’ 4 4 e
ἔς te Κέρκυραν, κελεύσοντας βοηθέειν τῇ ᾿Ελλάδι, καὶ ἐς
] ΝΥ ’ ¥ ’Ὅ “
Κρήτην ἄλλους, φρονήσαντες et κως ἕν τε yevotto τὸ “E)-
Ν Q 1 ’ 2 Ν , 4 ¢
ληνίκον, καὶ εἰ συγκύψαντες TWUTO πρησσοιεν “ταντες, WS
a 3 ’ ς A e
δεινῶν ἐπιόντων ὁμοίως πᾶσι Ελλησι.

ΠΙ|. THE PASS OF THERMOPYLAE.

e . a 3 , a ,ὕ N
1. Οἱ Se “EdAnves εβουλεύοντο τῇ τε στήσονται τὸν
, . 9 {4 , ¢ a Ν A 9 ‘
πόλεμον, καὶ EV OLOLTL χωροισι. ἢ νικῶσα SE γνωμὴ ἐγέε-
᾿ 2 ΄ ἢ ‘ , ἢ
vero τὴν ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι ἐσβολὴν φυλαξαι. στεινοτέρη
‘ 9 4 9. A A 9 , N / 3 A
yap ἐφαίνετο ἐοῦσα τῆς ἐς Θεσσαλίην, Kai μία, ἀγχοτέρη
a ¢ a Ν \ 3 Ν > A ef ¢ « ἢ
τε τῆς ἑωυτῶν. την δὲ atpatrov, di ἣν ἥλωσαν οἱ λοντες
€ , 9 / IadN 3. A 4
Ελλήνων ev Θερμοπύλῃσι, οὐδε ἤδεσαν ἐοῦσαν πρότερον
¥y ? , > 7 3 4 4
ἥπερ ἀπικόμενοι ἐς Θερμοπύλας. ἐπύθοντο Τρηχινίων.
’ 4 > , . 4 Ν 9 Ν AY
ταύτην ὧν εβουλεύσαντο φυλάσσοντες την ἐσβολὴν μὴ
4 9 , Ν ϑ x Ν “
παριέναι ἐς τὴν Ἑλλαδα τὸν βαρβαρον, tov δε ναυτικὸν
δ ’ A A e ’ » N 9 ’
στρατὸν πλέειν γῆς τῆς ἱστιαιήτιδος ἐπὶ Αρτεμισιον.
a Ν ) ΕΣ 3 , > N\N ὦ " .
ταῦτα yap ἀγχοῦ τε ἀλλήλων ἐστὶ, ὥστε πυνθάνεσθαι τα
> ¢ ’ 24, “ σὰ d “ a
κατ ἑκατέρους eovTa. 2 Οἱ τε χῶροι οὕτω ἔχουσι" τοῦτο
Ν \ 9 ’ 9 A ’ A oo & 9 ?
μεν, TO ᾿Αρτεμίσιον, Ex τοῦ πελάγεος τοῦ Opnixiou εξ ev-
’ , ? Ν 27 Ἀ Ν ‘
peos συνάγεται ἐς στεινὸν EovTa τὸν πόρον τὸν μεταξυ
“4 Ν 3 4 ’ 3 Ν a
νήσου te Σκιάθου καὶ ἠπείρου Μαγνησίης " ex Se τοῦ
a a 2 7 ΝΜ \ 9 4 tf 9 x
στεινοῦ τῆς EvBoins ἤδη τὸ Αρτεμίσιον Sexetat avytanos,
3 x 93 4 e f e Ν 4 Q r Mv
ev δὲ Apteutoos tpov. ἡ Se av δια Tpnyivos ἔσοδος ἐς
‘ e 4 3 Ν a , e , 3 ’
τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα εστι, τῇ στεινοτάτη, ἡμίπλεθρον. οὐ μεντοι
Q nan +b > 3 Ν “ 4 A , A Wy
κατὰ τοῦτο Y ἐστί TO στεινότατον Τῆς χωρὴς τῆς ἄλλης,

VIL, 179.] Description of the Pass. 137

3. 2} ΜΚ 4 4 \ ww ? 9
ahr eutrpoobe τε Θερμοπυλεων καὶ ὄπισθε, κατὰ τε Αλ-
νῸ»ν 32. a A e Ν ΄ .
πηνοὺς ὄπισθε eovtas εοῦσα ἁμαξιτὸς μούνη, καὶ ἐμπροσθε
Ν 7 Ν 2 a ? A , e “
kata Φοινικα ποταμὸν ἀγχοῦ Ανθηλῆς πόλιος ἁμαξιτὸς
¥ , ms ἣν ,ὕ N N ‘ e ͵
αλλῃ μούνη. 8. τῶν δε Θερμοπυλέων TO μὲν πρὸς ἐσπε-
9 ΨΚ ’ . 9 ; e Ν 3 a 9
pns ovpos ἀβατὸν τε Kat aTroxpnuvov, ὑψηλον, ανατεῖνον ες
Ν Ν'᾽ Q ‘ x “ 9A A e A , e a
τὴν Oirnv, τὸ δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἠῶ τῆς ὁδοῦ θαλασσα vIrobEKe-
Ν ’ ¥ \ 9 a ? ’ ’ ‘ AN
ται Kat τενάγεα. ἔστι δὲ ἐν TH ἐσόδῳ ταύτῃ θερμα λουτρὰ,
Ν ’ὔ 7 € 3 ’ Ἁ Ν a
ta Xutpovs καλέουσι οἱ ἐπιχώριοι, καὶ βωμος tdoputas
ς , > 9 PF « 5.7 ‘ a \ ,
Ἡρακλέος er αὐτοῖσι. ededunto δὲ τεῖχος κατὰ ταῦτας
Ν > Ν Ν 4 Ν , 4 a ¥
tas ἐσβολας, Kat TO γε παλαίὸν πύλαι ἐπῆσαν. ἐδειμαν
ω 7 A A 4 3 A . @ 3
de Φωκέες τὸ τεῖχος, δείσαντες, ἔπει Θεσσαλοὶ ἦλθον ἐκ
a , , A Α 4 ’ [4 A 3
Θεσπρωτῶν οἰκήσοντες γῆν τὴν Διολιδα, τὴν περ νῦν ἐκ-
’ὔ \ ’ὔ a a 4
τέαται. ἅτε δὴ πειρωμένων τῶν Θεσσαλῶν καταστρεφε-
, “ , ς ’ Ν \ oe
σθαί σφεας, τοῦτο προεφυλαξαντο οἱ Φωκεες " καὶ TO ὕδωρ
N N , 9. A >. NN ΨΚ e 4 ’
τὸ θερμὸν τότε ἐπῆκαν ἐπὶ τὴν ἔσοδον, ὡς ἂν χαραδρωθείη
e a Aa 4 of , 3 “4 ¢
0 χῶρος, πᾶν μηχανεόμενοί, ὅκως μὴ σφι εἐσβάλοιεν οἱ
Ν Ἁ , Ν 4 “ Ν 3 a
Θεσσαλοὶ ἐς THY χώρην. TO μὲν νυν τεῖχος TO ἀρχαῖον
b) aA Ia? ay “ tA 3 A Vv e nN ’ὔ
εκ παλαιοῦ τε εἐδεδμητο, καὶ τὸ πλέον αὐτοῦ ἤδη ὑπὸ χρό-
> ἢ a ν 9 > , ¥ , >
vou ἐκέετο. 4. τοῖσι δε αὖτις ορθωσασι ἐδοξε ταύτῃ ἀπα-
‘4 > SN a € /; \ 4 ’ 4 3
μυνειν ato τῆς Ελλαδος τὸν βάρβαρον. Kan δὲ ἐστι
3 ’ A e a ? ΙΝ ¥ 3 7 ν 9
ἀγχοτάτω τῆς ὁδοῦ, Αλπηνοι οὔνομα" ἐκ ταύτης δὲ ἐπισι-
ry 9 e ὦ e 4 A e
τιεισθαι ἐλογίζοντο ot “EXXnves. οἱ μέν νυν χῶροι OUTOL
a σ ? ? 7 f Ν
τοῖσι “Ελλησι εἶναι ἐφαίνοντο ἐπιτήδεοι. ἅπαντα γὰρ
4 \ 9, 4 [2 4 ᾽ὔ .. Οἱ
προσκέψαμενοι, καὶ ἐπιλογισθέντες ὅτι οὔτε πληθεὶ ἕξουσι
a ε ’ ΝΜ ff , 4 4
χρᾶσθαι ot βαρβαροι οὗτε ἵππῳ, ταύτη σφι ἐδοξε δέκεσθαι
‘9 / a ON Ν ͵ ς .» ῃ Ν ,
Tov ἐπίοντα ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿λλαδα. ὡς δὲ ἐπύθοντο τὸν Πέρ-
33 3 / 4 b a 3 a? ᾽ὔ
onv covta ἐν Πιερίῃ, διαλυθέντες ex τοῦ Ισθμοῦ ἐστρατεύ-
I κα N ΄ ~ ΥΥ δ \ ,
ovTo αὐτῶν οἱ μὲν ἐς Θερμοπύλας πεξῆ, ἄλλοι δὲ κατὰ θα-
> 3
λασσαν ἐπ Αρτεμίσιον.
Ν Ἁ ’ Ἁ , ,
5. Ὃ δὲ ναυτικὸς Heptew στρατὸς ὁρμεομενος ἐκ Θερ-
, ’ Ν a ¥ , δέ
ENS πόλιος παρεβαλε νηυσὶ τῇσι ἄριστα πλεούσησι EKa

138 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Henop.

oA , ν 2 ’ , a 6
θυ Σκιαθου, ἔνθα ἦσαν προφυλασσουσαι vees τρεῖς Ελλη-
/ 4 N 4 ͵ \ 9 , ..Ὁ 7
vides, Tposfnvin te καὶ Avywvain καὶ Αττικῆ. προΐδοντες
N 2 Ν , a / 9 ᾽ν [4
δὲ οὗτοι τὰς νέας τῶν βαρβάρων, ἐς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν.
a Ν ,, a A 4 a 9 ,
6. Τῶν δε δέκα νεῶν τῶν βαρβάρων τρεῖς ἐπήλασαν περὶ
\. o 4 \ 98 td ‘ ’ ,
τὸ ἕρμα τὸ μεταξὺ cov Σκιάθου τε καὶ Μαγνησίης, καλεο-
ἣν ’ 4 a e f 3 Ἁ
μενον δὲ Μύρμηκα. ενθαῦτα ot βάρβαροι, ἐπειδὴ στήλην
/ > 4 4 3.ϑΝ αὶ , ὦ e U 2 N
λίθου ἐπέθηκαν κομίσαντες ἐπὶ TO ἔρμα, ὁρμηθεντες αὐτοὶ
4 ’ Ω \ 3 Ν 4 ’ Ἁ 3 e
ἐκ Θέρμης, ws σφι TO ἐμποδὼν ἐγεγόνεε καθαρὸν, ἐπέπλεον
, A . @ c ν» , x ry
πάσῃσι τῇσι νηυσὶ, ἕνδεκα ἡμερας παρέντες μετὰ τὴν Ba-
4 3... ϑ ’ Ἁ ‘ @ ’
σίλεος ἐξελασιν ἐκ Θερμης. τὸ de ἕρμα σφι κατηγήσατο
oA 3 4 , , 4 8 ᾿
ἐὸν ἐν πόρῳ μάλιστα Παάμμων Σκύριος. πανημερον δε
’ e 4 > ΄ a / ’
mrwovtes ot βαρβαροι εξανύουσι τῆς Μαγνησίης χωρης
> A , ‘ 4 3 4 ‘ δ ͵
ἐπὶ Σηπιάδα τε καὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν τὸν μεταξυ Κασθαναίης
’ὔ 37 aw 4 9 A ᾽ ’ ’
τε πόλιος EovTA καὶ Σηπιαδος ακτῆς. Μέχρι pev νυν τού-
aA , Ν ’ 3 , δὰ φ
του τοῦ χώρου καὶ Θερμοπυλέων ἀπαθῆς τε κακῶν ἦν ὁ
/
στρατος.
e Ν Ν A a 4 N a Γ΄.
7. Αἱ μὲν δὴ πρῶται τῶν νεῶν ὧρμεον πρὸς γῇ, ἄλλαι
δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεί ἐπ᾿ ἀγκυρέων" ἅτε γὰρ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ ἐό
Ἐπ scenes ἐπὶ ἀγκυρεῶν". γὰρ ἷ Vane eovros
οὐ μεγάλου, πρόκροσσαι ὠρμέοντο ἐς πόντον καὶ ἐπὶ ὀκτῶ
4 4 \ Ἁ 3 ? ed σ δὲ ¥ )
yeas. ταύτην μὲν τὴν εὐφρόνην οὕτω" ἅμα oe opbpa, cE
? / Ν , a ’ ’ >» ,
αἰθρίης τε καὶ νηνεμίης τῆς θαλασσης ζεσάσης, ἐπέπεσε
4 ’ \ Ν 54 3 ’ A
σφι χειμὼν Te μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἄνεμος ἀπηλιωτῆς, TOV
λε ,ὔ 4 ε Ν a ν ?
$n Ελλησποντίην καλέουσι οἱ περὶ ταῦτα τὰ χωρία οἰκη-
4 4 > A 9g/ . 4 4 ΨΚ
μένοι. ὅσοι μὲν νυν αὐτῶν αὐξομενον ἔμαθον τὸν ἄνεμον,
Ν cae ed ad [4 δ ‘ a 4
καὶ τοῖσι οὕτω εἶχε ὅρμου, οἱ δ᾽ ἔφθησαν τὸν χειμῶνα ava-
’ \ tA Q 3 4 a” a € é ϑ
σπάσαντες TAS VEAS, καὶ AVTOL τε περιῆσαν καὶ αἱ νεες αὖ-
a σ Ν A a 4 ¥ Ν a) 9g?
τῶν" ὅσας δε τῶν νεῶν μεταρσίας ἐλαβε, Tas μὲν εξεφερε
᾿ 3 Α ’ Ν 2 , ‘N . 9 4
πρὸς ἷπνους καλεομένους tous ἐν ἡλίῳ, τὰς δὲ ἐς τὸν
3." 4 id Ν “ 3 + ‘\ é a ς
αἰγιαλόν. αἱ δὲ περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν Σηπιάδα περιέπιπτον, αἱ
3 { ee 9 ’
δὲ ἐς Μελίβοιαν πόλιν, αἱ δὲ ἐς Κασθαναίην ἐξεβράσσοντο.
Ν n a! “a 9 4 4 ‘
ἦν δὲ τοῦ χειμῶνος χρῆμα ἀφόρητον. 8. Aéyerar δὲ

VIL, 191.] The Help of Boreas. 139

; 3 a A , 9 ͵ 3 ;
λόγος, ws ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸν Βορέην ex θεοπροπίου ἐπεκαλε-
9 Fd ” / ‘ A 3 a
σαντο, ἔλθοντος σφι ἄλλου χρηστηρίου τον γαμβρον ἐπι»
’ ’ Ν Α A e , /
xoupov καλέσασθαι. Βορέης δὲ cata τὸν ξλληνων λόγον
¥ “σ΄ 9 N 9 4 A 9 ( a
ἔχει γυναῖκα ᾿Αττικὴν, NpeOuav τὴν EpeyGeos. κατὰ
δ᾽ 8 a5 a ¢ 7AG - ¢ U a
ἢ TO κῆδος τοῦτο οἱ nvaiot, ὡς φατις ὡρμηται, συμ-
, Ν A ‘ é
βαλλομενοΐ σφι τὸν Βορέην γαμβρον εἶναι, ναύυλοχεοντες
a Σ wv 3¢/ \ a
τῆς Ευβοίης ἐν Χαλκίδι, ws ἔμαθον αὐξόμενον τὸν χειμῶνα,
a ‘ ἐν ’ ’ ,
ἢ καὶ πρὸ τούτου, ἔθυόν τε καὶ ἐπεκαλέοντο τὸν Te Βορέην
A 4 Ν “ῳ aA
καὶ τὴν ᾿Ωρείθνιαν τιμωρῆσαΐ σφι καὶ διαφθεῖραι τῶν Bap-
, , ¥y 9 ’
Bupwv τὰς νέας, ὡς καὶ πρότερον trept Αθων. εἰ μέν νυν
Ν A aA 4 ’ 4 J
Sia ταῦτα τοῖσε βαρβώροισι ὁρμέουσι ὁ Βορέης ἐπέπεσε,
, δὰ ’
οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι" οἱ 8 ὧν ᾿Αθηναῖοί σφι λέγουσι βοηθή-
“ εν 2 a t
σαντα τὸν Βορέην πρότερον Kat τότε ἐκεῖνα κατεργάσασθαι,
ven 3 4 e ’ Ν “ 3
καί pov ὠπέλθοντες Bopew ἱδρύσαντο παρὰ ποταμὸν ᾿Ἶλισ-
, 2 , A ’ , ’ “
cov. Θ. ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ νέας Ov ἐλαχίστας λέγουσι
A ͵ 3 3 [4 Ψ >
διαφθαρῆναι, τετρακοσιέων οὐκ ἐλάσσονας, ἄνδρας τε ἀναριθ-
’ wv [4 0
μήτους, χρημάτων te πλῆθος ἄφθονον " ὥστε ’Apewoxnree
a ,ὔ 3 \ , ’ \ ’
τῷ Κρητίνεω avdpt Μαγνητι γηοχέοντι περὶ Σηπιάδα με-
μ ς Ul ef N 9 » ἃ ‘ . ,
γάλως ἡ νανηγίη αὕτη χρήστη ἐγένετο, ὃς πολλα μεν χρυ-
/ ΄ 3 3
σεα ποτήρια ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ἐκβρασσόμενα ἀνείλετο, πολλὰ
N 9 2 a ry / Φ Υ
δε ἀργύρεα, θησαυρούς τε τῶν Περσέων εὗρε, ἄλλα Te
’ »¥ 3 ‘N 4
[χρύσεα] ἄαφατα χρήματα περιεβάλετο. ἄλλ ὁ μὲν τᾶλλα
᾽ > 7 / , /
ουκ εὐτυχέων εὑρήμασι μέγα πλούσιος ἐγένετο " ἦν γάρ
Ἁ A Ww ry
τις καὶ τοῦτον ἄχαρις συμφορὴ λνυπεῦσα παιδοφονος.
A Ν / ἴω
10. σιταγωγῶν δὲ ὁλκάδων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πλοίων δια-
’ 9, > a 3 «
φθειρομένων οὐκ ἐπὴν ἀριθμὸς, ὥστε δείσαντες οἱ στρατη-
A a A 4
yor τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ, μή σφι κεκακωμένοισι ἐπιθέων-
Q Ν 3 “A 4
ται οἱ Θεσσαλοὶ, ἕρκος ὕψηλον ἐκ τῶν νανηγίων περιεβα-
¢ , \ “ 32 , “a Λ x Mv 4
λοντο. ἡμέρας yap δη ἐχείμαξε τρεῖς " τέλος δὲ ἐντομα
a 4 ° 4 4
τε ποιεῦντες Kal καταείδοντες yonot τῷ ἀνέμῳ οἱ Μάγοι,
ΝΥ ‘N 7 \ A 7 N ΄“ g
πρὸς δὲ τούτοισι καὶ τῇ Θέτι καὶ τῇσι Νηρηΐσι θυοντες,

140 The Pass of 7 hermopylae. [Herop.

ἃ ’ e 4 A ΨΚ. 78 In > 4
ἔπαυσαν τετάρτῃ ἡμέρῃ, ἢ ἄλλως κως αὐτὸς εθέλων Exo-
a Ν , ¥ / Ν “ 3 , ω
mace. τῇ δὲ Θέτι eOvoy πυθόμενοι παρὰ τῶν Iwvev τὸν
, e 3 A , ; {ἢ f e 6N ,
λογον, ὡς ἐκ τοῦ χώρου τοῦτον ἁρπασθείη ὑπο Πηλέος,
¥ ͵ϊ“ϊ ΞὩΦ44᾽ ς . ὁ \ > + ® Ν ¥
€ln τε ἅπασα ἡ ἀκτὴ ἡ Σηπιὰς ἐκείνης τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων
Νηρηΐδων. It. Ὃ μὲν δὴ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρῃ ἐπέπαυτο" τοῖσ
npn ; - Ὁ μὲν on τετάρτῃ ἡμερῃ ἐπέπαυτο" τοίσι
\ ἢ @ e tA “ ΄οὦ Ν A 3 oe (A
δε EdAnoe οἱ ἡμεροσκόποι, ἀπὸ τῶν ἄκρων τῶν Ευβοικῶν
7 4 e 4 > 9 @ e Ν ς a
καταδραμόντες δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ aT ἧς ὁ χειμὼν ὁ πρῶτος
3 4 3 ᾽ ’ Ν ’ Ἁ
ἐγένετο, ἐσήμαινον πάντα τὰ γενόμενα περὶ τὴν ναυηγίην.
eas ef > “ , a %e7 Q
οἱ δε ws ἐπύθοντο, Ποσειδέωνι σωτῆρι εὐξάμενοι, καὶ σπον-
Ν 4 “ 4 3 ? ’ > A Ν
Sas πρόοχέαντες τὴν ταχίστην, ὀπίσω ἠπείγοντο ἐπὶ τὸ
3 / 9. ’ 9 ’ ? > , 5
Αρτεμίσιον, ἐλπίσαντες ολίγας Twas ot ἀντιξοους ἐσε-
΄ εν Xs S ΄ ᾽ , KN N49
σθαι νέας. οἱ μὲν δη τὸ δεύτερον ἐλθόντες περὶ τὸ ᾿Αρτε-
/ 3 “2 [4 A 3 4 2"
μίσιον εἐναύλοχεον, Ποσειδέωνος σωτῆρος ἐπωνυμίην ἀπὸ
¥ ν 9 7 , e Ν ’
τοῦτου ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε νομίζοντες. 12. Οἱ de βάρβαροι,
e 9 ᾽’ 4 ¢ “ “ a Χ ,
ὡς ἐπαύσατο TE ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ TO κῦμα ETTPWTO, KaTaCTA-
Ν ’ ¥ a » ¥ ’ δὲ
σαντες Tas νέας ἔπλεον Tapa τὴν ἤπειρον, κάμψαντες δε
Ν Υ̓͂ A 4 4 4 Νν 3 Ν , ἈΝ
τὴν ἄκρην τῆς Μαγνησίης, ἰθέαν ἔπλεον ἐς τὸν κόλπον τον
2 Ν Π 4 7 Ὁ δὲ a“ 3 A or:
ἐπὶ Llayacewv φέροντα. ἔστι O€ χώρος ἐν τῷ κολπῳ
᾽’ a ν 4 “ e 4
τούτῳ τῆς Μαγνησίης, ἔνθα λέγεται τὸν Ἡρακλέα κατα-
a ον OF , ; δ a / ἢ a
λειφθῆναι ὑπὸ Inoovos te καὶ τῶν συνεταίρων εκ τῆς
a 5 2 , 4 > Ν δ a ¥ ’
"Apyovs er ὕδωρ πεμῴθεντα, evt’ ἐπὶ TO κῶας ἔπλεον ἐς
3 Ν 93 a ‘ ” e 4 ,
Aiav τὴν Κολχίδα" ἐνθεῦτεν γὰρ ἔμελλον ὑδρευσάμενοι ἐς
Ἁ ΔΛ 3 ’ 7 AN 4 - A [4 wv 4
TO πέλαγος ἀφήσειν, ἐπὶ τούτου δὲ τῷ χωρῷ οὔνομα γεὲ:
2 , 3 v4 4 Ψ C pm / 9 a
yove Adetat. ev τούτῳ ὧν ὅρμον οἱ Ξέρξεω εποιεῦντο.
Ν Ν, Ἁ Ν \ ’ “
18. Ἐέρξης δὲ καὶ ὁ πεζος, πορευθεὶς διὰ Θεσσαλίης καὶ
3 7, 3 Ν 9 Ν ἈΝ a 3 ’ )
Αχαιίης, ἐσβεβληκως ἣν καὶ dn τριταΐος es Μηλίεας" εν
’ Ν [4 4 4 a ς a
Θεσσαλίῃ μεν ἀμίλλαν ποιησαμενος ἡὑππὼν τῶν εωυτου,
93 , a / “ , e
ἀποπειρεόμενος καὶ τῆς Θεσσαλίης ἵππου, πυθόμενος ὡς
3 ’ὔ ¥ A / ¥ Ν e e A a
ἀρίστη εἴη τῶν ev ᾿ Ελλησι" ἔνθα δη αἱ ᾿Ελληνίδες ἵπποι
> ! , A ) 9 ’ a
ἐλείποντο πολλον. των μεν νυν εν Θεσσαλίῃ ποταμων
9 , A bd 3 ’ »“ a Ν ,
᾿Ονόχωνος μοῦνος οὐκ ἀπέχρησε TH στρατιῇ TO ῥέεθρον

VIL, 200.] ᾿ The Truchinian Plain. 141

4 a . 9 3 7 a ς @# 27a A
πινόμενος, τῶν de ἐν Ayalin ποταμῶν peovTwY οὐδὲ ὅστις
’ 7 Aa 3 \ 3 Ἁ Jar 2 b ’ ? A
μέγιστος αὑτῶν ἐστὶ Hridavos, οὐδὲ οὗτος ἀντέσχε εἰ μὴ
A Ν ‘ 9 ’ “ 3
φλαύρως. 14. Ταῦτα μὲν τὰ ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ καὶ τὰ ἐν
3 , > A ‘ / a “ ¥.. 3 Ν ‘i
Ayan: ἀπὸ δὲ τούτων τῶν χωρων nie es τὴν Μηλίδα
Ἁ Λ ’ 3 a ” 4 Ν e , 3"
παρὰ κόλπον θαλάσσης, ἐν τῷ ἀμπωτίς τε καὶ ρηχίη ava
a ᾽ J “ Ν “ ,Ἅ ΄ν 4 3
πᾶσαν ἡμέρην γίνεται. περὶ δὲ τὸν κόλπον τοῦτον ἐστι
a Ν, A “ 3 Ἁ A Ἀ N a ᾿ ’
χῶρος πεδινὸς, τῇ μὲν εὑρυς, τῇ δὲ καὶ κάρτα στὲέινος.
δ Ν a 2 A Ν 4 A
περὶ δὲ τὸν χῶρον οὔρεα ὑψηλὰ καὶ ἄβατα περικληΐει
a Ν / A ’ 4 ’
πᾶσαν τὴν ηλιίδα γὴν, Tpnyivtat πέτραι καλεομεναι.
’ , , > NOD A , ,} > 99 ,
TPWTN μὲν νυν πόλις ἐστὶ EV τῷ κόλπῳ LoYTL απ Αχαιίης
"A 4 > ἃ Ν Σ “ e7 2 "KE ᾽ὔ
ντικυρη, παρ ἣν ποταμὸς Σπερχειὸς pewv εξ ᾿Ενιήνων
? 1 2 a > \ as , . oo» ’
ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ. ἀπὸ δε τούτου δια εἰκοσίὶ κου στα-
, ¥ “ a ¥ 4 , SY
δίων ἄλλος ποταμὸς, τῷ οὔνομα κέεται Aupas, τὸν Bon-
, na ¢ Δ. 7 , 3 ν 2 a
Geovra τῷ ᾿Ηρακλέϊ καιομένῳ λόγος ἐστὶ ἀναφανῆναι.
ΣΝ ‘N , > Φ ¥ / ¥ 4
ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου δι ἄλλων εἴκοσι σταδίων ἄλλος ποταμὸς
δ ἃ / Λ ᾿ ‘ 5." a
ἐστι, ὃς καλέεται Μέλας. 15. Τρηχὶς δὲ πόλις ἀπὸ τοῦ
4 4 A ’ / 3 ͵ ΄ ‘
Μέλανος τούτου ποταμοῦ πέντε στάδια ἀπέχει. ταύτῃ δὲ
\ 94 , 2 ͵ a , , 3 a x 7
Kal €UPUTATOV ἐστι πάσης τῆς χωρῆς TAUTNS ἐκ τῶν ουρέων
3 ’ 9 ἃ Ν Λ ’ ‘
ἐς θάλασσαν, κατ ἃ Τρη χις πεπόλισται" δισχίλια τε yap
‘ 7 / A ) 3 a ‘ ” ‘
kat δισμύρια πλέθρα τοῦ πεδίου ἐστί, τοῦ δὲ οὔρεος, TO
A Ἀ aA N ͵ ¥ N N
Tepixrnies τὴν γὴν τὴν Tpnywinv, ἐστι διασφαξ πρὸς
’ -“ Ὥ A ’ 3 Ἀ
μεσαμβρίην Tpnyivos, διὰ δὲ τῆς διασφάγος Ασωπὸς πο-
Ν ee ‘ N ς , a ” xy ‘
ταμος peel παρα THY ὑπώρεαν τοῦ οὔρεος. 16. ἔστι δε
δ a a ? 7 Ν / »“
ἄλλος Φοινιξ ποταμὸς ov μέγας πρὸς μεσαμβρίην τοῦ
2 nia 3 a > »ν / . 2 Ν 3 Ν
Ἀσωποῦ, ὃς ἐκ τῶν ουὐρέων τούτων ῥέων ἐς τὸν Ασωπὸν
2 ὃ ὃ a ἐν Ν XN , “ , 4 >
exdldot. κατὰ δὲ τὸν Φοινικα ποταμὸν atEevoTaToV ἐστί"
ς ‘ δ ’ , / > Ss \ a ,
ἁμαξιτὸς yap μία μούνη δέδμηται. ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ Φοίνικος
“A ,ἷ J 3) 3 4 3 Ν
ποταμοῦ πεντεκαίδεκα σταδιὰ ἐστι ἐς Θερμοπύλας. ἐν δὲ
τῷ μεταξὺ Φοίνικος Το Ποὺ καὶ Θερμοπύχεων κώμη τέ
ἐστι, τῇ οὔνομα ᾿Ανθήλη κέεται, παρ᾽ ἣν δὴ παραρρέων ὁ
᾿Ασωπὺς ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ, καὶ χῶρος περὶ αὐτὴν εὐρὺς,

142 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Hzrop.

,9 a , ὔ εν 2 ͵ en Ν
ἐν τῷ Anuntpos τε ἱρὸν Αμφικτυονίδος ἵδρυται, καὶ ἕδραι
9 ND 7 Q 9 ΄΄ὰ a 9 7 € ,
εἰσε Αμφικτύοσι καὶ avtov τοῦ Ἀμφικτύονος tpov.
A a Ν 7 3 7 κ᾿
17. Βασιλεὺυς μὲν δη Ἐέρξης ἐστρατοπεδεύετο τῆς Μη-
7] 3 A 4 € Ν Ν ΤΖΩ͂ > A ,
λίδος ἐν τῇ Tpnywin, ot de δὴ ᾿Ελληνες ἐν τῇ διόδῳ.
/ XN @ κι e e a δὲ A 4 e ,
καλέεται δε 0 χῶρος οὗτος ὑπὸ μεν τῶν πλεόνων ᾿ Ελλήνων
,’ e oN Ἁ “ 3 ᾿ ff Ν 4 /
Θερμοπύλαι, ὑπο Se τῶν ἐπιχωρίων Kat περιοίκων ἢύλαι.
2 tJ 4 ¢ ’ 2 4 a
ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο μὲν VUY EKATEPOL EV τούτοισι τοῖσι Yor
,ὔ 2 , \ ¢ Ν a Ν ’ ¥ > »
ρίοισε" emexpurtee δε ὁ μεν τῶν πρὸς βορέην ἄνεμον ἐχόντων
’ 7 σι ς x a “ ’ A
πάντων μέχρι Τρηχῖνος, οἱ δὲ τῶν πρὸς νότον Kab μεσαμ-
, , ΝΟΣ Ν ᾽’ a 9 , a
Bpinv φεροντων to ἐπὶ ταύτης τῆς ἠπείρου. 18. Hoay
ν Ω ε , ἐε 4 “ / 9 4 A
de ode ᾿Ελλήνων οἱ ὑπομένοντες τὸν Πέρσην ev τούτῳ τῷ
’’᾽ , 4 a “N /
χώρῳ" Σπαρτιητεων τε τριηκόσιοι ὁπλῖται, καὶ Τεγεητέων
“ ΄ ἥ. φ JS ¢ 4 2 4 a
kat Μαντινέων χίλιοι, ἡμίσεες ἑκατέρων, εξ ᾿Ορχομενοῦ τε
~ 3 ’ δ λε N . 9 A a 4 /
τῆς Apxadins εἰκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν, Kat ἐκ τῆς λοιπῆς ’ApKadins
λ a . 93 , 9 N x ͵ ,
χίλιοι" τοσοῦτοι μὲν Ἀρκάδων, ἀπὸ δε Κορίνθου τετρακόσιοι
x. 9 SN a 4 Ἁ 4 9 ’ @
καὶ ἀπὸ Φλιοῦντος διηκόσιοι καὶ Μυκηναίων ογδωκοντα" ov-
‘ , SN ’ A , NN Ν ry
tot μὲν ἀπὸ “Πελοποννήσου παρῆσαν, avo δε Βοιωτῶν Be
’ e , Ν ,ὔ ’ Ν
σπιέων τε ἐπτακοσίοι καὶ Θηβαίων τετρακοσίοι. 19. προς
4 ? 3 ’ ’ e 3 4
τούτοισι ἐπίκλητοι ἐγένοντο Λοκροὶ τε οἱ Οπούντιοι παν-
a , > A ’ ea
στρατιῇ, καὶ Φωκέων χίλιοι. αὐτοὶ yap σφεας ob EAAnves
2 / , > 9 4 ς 3 \ Ν ed
ἐπεκαλέσαντο, λέγοντες St aryyéAwy ὡς αὐτοί μεν ἥκοιεν
’ a ¥ ς Ν Ν a v4 /
προδρομοι τῶν ἄλλων, οἱ SE λοιποὶ τῶν συμμαχὼων προσ-
, a 9 e ’ὔ e 4 / / ” 3
doxior πᾶσαν εἶεν ἡμέρην. ἡ θάλασσα TE ode εἰη ἐν
led > 3 4 ’ Ν. 3 / \
φυλακῇ, ur «Αθηναίων τε φρουρεομένη καὶ Διγινητέων καὶ
a 3 Ν \ 4 / W Ν
τῶν ἐς τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντων, καὶ σφι Eby δεινὸν.
2 \ 3 ’ 45 8 Ν ς , |
οὐδέν" ov yap θεὸν εἶναι τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλαδα,
3 3 “ 3 4 Iat ¥ i
ἀλλ᾽ ἄνθρωπον" εἶναι δὲ θνητὸν οὐδένα οὐδὲ ἐσεσθαι, τῳ
Ν 5ω. 2 a ͵ 2 , A aN /
κακὸν ἐξ ἀρχῆς γινομένῳ ov συνεμίχθη, τοῖσι δε μεγίστοισι
> A 4 9 Λ 9 . SN ? ΄ ¢ 27
αὑτῶν μεγιστα" οφείλειν ὧν Kal TOV ἐπέλαυνοντα, WS EOVTE
N N a , a 9 e N a !
θνητὸν, ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης πεσεῖν av. Οἱ δὲ ταῦτα πυνθανο-.
’ , ? ‘ a ΄ 9 ,
μενοι εβοηθεον es τὴν Τρηχίνα. 20. Τουτοισι ἤσαν po

VIL, 206] Leonidas and the Three Hundred. 143

, ιν , e Ν
νυν καὶ ἄλλοι στρατηγοὶ κατὰ πόλιας ἑκάστων" ὁ δε θωυ-
7 Λ \ “ A 4 φ ,
palomevos μάλιστα, Kat παντὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος ἡγεῦ-
, 4 9 , a
μενος, Aaxedarpovios ἦν Λεωνίδης ὁ ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω τοῦ
/ A 3 A A 3
Λέοντος τοῦ Evpuxpatisew τοῦ ᾿Αναξάνδρου τοῦ Eupvu-
,ὔ a 4 a 9 n ,
kpateos τοῦ Πολυδώρου τοῦ ᾿Αλκαμένεος tov Τηλέκλου
a 3 Λ “ € Λ ry rd n 4
τοῦ Αρχέλεω τοῦ Ἠγησίλεω τοῦ Δορύσσου tov AewBu-
4 ¢ ’ a ΠῚ ? ’ n
τεω τοῦ Eyeotpatov tov ‘Hytos tov Ευρυσθένεος τοῦ
3 a A / ad
Ἀριστοδήμου τοῦ ᾿Αριστομάχου tov Κλεοδαίου τοῦ “Υλλου
a v4 Ν A 3 4 3
τοῦ Ἡρακλέος, κτησώμενος τὴν βασιληΐην ev Σπάρτῃ εξ
2 ’ A / e 2, 4
ἀπροσδοκήτου. 2. διξῶν yap οἱ ἐόντων πρεσβυτέρων
᾿ nm 4 4 Ν , 3 [2 n
ἀδελφεῶν, Κλεομένεος τε καὶ Awpreos, ἀπελήλατο THs φρον-
ἢ : ‘ A A > / ‘ ’
τίδος περὶ τῆς βασιληΐης. ἀποθανόντος δὲ Κλεομένεος
¥ » ’ ’’ 2 ’ 79 3 Ν
ἀπαιδος ἐρσεένος ‘yovou, Ζωριέος τε οὐκέτι εοντος, αλλα
, ιν / 3 ’ ed . 9 /
τελευτήσαντος καὶ τούτου ἐν Σικελίῃ, οὕτω On ἐς Aewvidny
> / ε΄ A ry ͵ , 9 ’
ἀνέβαινε ἡ βασιληΐη, καὶ διότι πρότερος ἔγεγονεε Κλεομ-
,ὕ 2 “ 9 Ud > ,ὔ a Ν
βρότου (οὗτος γὰρ ἦν νεώτατος ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω παῖς), καὶ
Σ \ φ / / a , Me. ?
bn καὶ εἶχε Κλεομένεος θυγατέρα. ὃς τότε ἤϊε es Θερμο-
’ ? ΝΜ) “ A
πύλας, ἐπιλεξάμενος ἄνδρας τε τοὺς κατεστεῶτας τριῆκο-
/ N a > “ a 7 ἈΝ
σίους, Kab τοίσι ἐετυγχανον παῖδες EovTes. 22. παραλαβὼν
δὲ > 7 “ , ‘ > Ν 3 Ν ’
ε ἀπίκετο καὶ Θηβαίων τοὺς ἐς τὸν ἀριθμον λογισάμενος
2 ον 9 4 / e 3 ‘4 a
εἶπον, τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Acovtiadns ὁ Evpupayov. τοῦδε
Ν of ’ Ν 3 7 ’
δὲ εἰνεκεν τούτους σπουδὴν ἐποιήσατο Aewvidns μούνους
¢ a 4 4 / /
Ελλήνων παραλαβεῖν, ὅτι σφέων μεγάλως κατηγόρητο
/ ΠΛ = 3 Ν Λ 3.7 20/7
μηδίζειν. παρεκάλεε ὧν ἐς Tov πόλεμον, εθέλων εἰδέναι
¥ 4 ¥ \. 9 , > a 9 4 Ν
εἰτε συμπεμψουσι εἰ τῇ καὶ ἀπερέουσι EX τοὺ εὐφανεὸς τὴν
€ ᾽ὔ ε Ν 3
Ελληνων συμμαχίην" οἱ δὲ ἀλλοφρονέοντες ἔπεμπον.
vd ‘ Ν 9 , , > +
23. Τούτους μὲν tous ἀμφὶ Λεωνίδην πρώτους ἀπέπεμψαν
“ »“ ’ a ¢ mW. 7
Σπαρτιῆται, WA τούτους ὁρῶντες οἱ ἄλλοι σύμμαχοι στρα-
΄ δ φ A ᾽ \ /
TEVWVTAL, μηδὲ καὶ οὗτοι μηδίσωσι, ἢν αὐτοὺς πυνθάνωνται
ς . Af Ν Χ ’ 9 3 Ν
ὑπερβαλλομένους " μετὰ δε, Κάρνεια γάρ σφι ἦν ἐμποδων,
Υ ’ὔ Ν Ν 4 3 a ’
ἐμέλλον ὁρτάσαντες, Kat φυλακὰς λίποντες ἐν τῇ Σπαρτῇῃ;

144 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Henop.

“ , , 4 ἃ Ν Ν e a a
κατὰ ταχος βοηθήσειν πανδημεί, ὡς δε καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ τῶν
, > 4 Ν > \ of a 4
συμμάχων EVEVMVTO καὶ AUTOL ἕτερα τοιαῦτα ποιήσειν" ἦν
A ‘ 3 \ 3 Ν , a 7,
yap κατὰ τωυτὸ Ολυμπίιὰς τούτοισι τοῖσι πρήγμασι συμ-
a 5) 9 , s ’ ef
πεσοῦσα. οὐκ ὧν δοκέοντες κατὰ τάχος οὕτω διακριθὴ»
Ν 3 ’ὔ Λ ¥ Ν
σεσθαι τὸν ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι πόλεμον, ἔπεμπον τοὺς προ-
/
δρόμους.
e ~ Ν oe 4 , ¢ as
24. Οὗτοι μὲν δὴ οὕτω διενένωντο ποιήσειν" οἱ δὲ ἐν
4 ef > “ a > », A 9 a
Θερμοπύλῃσι Ελληνες, ἐπειδὴ πέλας ἐγένετο τῆς εσβολῆς
e 4 4 3 ’ \ 3 a
ὁ Ilepons, καταρρωδέοντες ἐβουλεύοντο περὶ ἀπαλλαγῆς.
. a ’ ¥ / Ia? 3 a )
Totat μὲν νυν ἄλλοισι Πελοποννησίοισι edoxee, ελθοῦσι ες
’ “ 3 Ν “,) 3 a ,ὔ \
Πελοποννησον, τὸν IcOpov ἔχειν ev φυλακῇ" Aewvidns δε,
’ \ A ’ δὰ , 7
Φωκεων καὶ Λοκρῶν περισπερχεόντων τῇ γνωμῇῃ ταυτῇ,
> a 4 9 ’ ’ 3 4 3 ‘\
αὐτοῦ Te μένειν ἐψηφίιζετο, πέμπειν τε ἀγγέλους ἐς τὰς
? 7 , 3 4 ¢ 3», > “ 7
πόλιας κελεύοντας σφι εἐπιβοηθέειν, ὡς ἐόντων αὐτῶν OAL
Ν Ν / x. 4 A
γων στρατὸν tov Mrdwv ἀλέξασθαι. 25. Ταῦτα βουλευυ-
4 v4 ¥ μ- ἢ ’ e 4 Ia/
μένων σφεων, ἔπεμπε Ἐερξης κατάσκοπον ὑππεα, ἰδεσθαι
ς + ’ 2 ννΨῦ ’ὔ 3 ’ “ 4 aN a
ὁκόσοι TE εἰσι καὶ ὃ TL ποιέοιεν. ἠκήκοεε δε, ETL εὡν EV
Θ λέ ς or / 5 4 Ν OAL Ν Ν
εσσαλίῃ, WS ἡλισμένη εἰη ταύτῃ στρατιὴ OLY, καὶ τοὺς
e 4 e ¥ [2 ’ Ν fi aN
ἡγεμόνας ὡς εἴησαν Aaxedaipovios te καὶ Λεωνίδης εὡν
’ e / e Ν ’ ς ε Ν Ν 3
γένος Ἡρακλείδης. . ὡς S€ προσήλασε o ἱππεὺς πρὸς τὸ
4 a 7 δ ͵ A “ 3 Ἁ
στρατόπεδον, ἐθηεῖτο τε καὶ κατωρα πᾶν μεν οὐ TO στρα-
’ Ν Ν ¥ / a 4 ν )?
τόπεδον" τοὺς γὰρ ἔσω τεταγμένους τοῦ τείχεος, TO ἀνορ-
, ) a 3 ev; 4 ’ ‘
θώσαντες εἶχον ev φυλακῇ, οὐκ ota τε ἦν κατιδεσθαι" ὁ δὲ
eZ . ἢ a ‘ a , ν Φ > 7
tous ἔξω ἐμάνθανε, τοῖσι πρὸ τοῦ τείχεος TA ὅπλα εκεέετο.
¥ Ν a ‘ ’ ό Ν 4
ἔτυχον δὲ τοῦτον tov χρόνον Πακεδαιμόνιοι ἔξω τεταγμένοι.
N Ν . ff 4 a b A Ν Ν Ν
tous μὲν δὴ ὥρα γυμναζομένους τῶν ἀνδρῶν, Tous δὲ Tas
/ . ’ A Ν Ine .\
κόμας κτενιζομένους. ταῦτα bn θηεύμενος εθωυμαΐζε, καὶ τὸ
a 7 Ν Ν ’ 3 ὔ > 4
πλῆθος ἐμάνθανε. μαθὼν δὲ παντα ἀτρεκέως, ὠπηλαυνε
> 7 > ¢ , ¥ ’ γκ 2 / ed
ὀπίσω KAT ἡσυχίην" οὔτε yap TLS ἐδίωκε, ἀλογίης TE EK
A 2 Ν Ν ¥. “ pe J 4
pnoe πολλῆς" ἀπεέλθων de ἔλεγε πρὸς Ξερξεα ta Teép
> ἡ , > 7 δ , ᾽ 4
ὁπώπεε πάντα. 26. ἀκούων δὲ Ἐερξης οὐκ εἶχε cuppa

Vil, 3101 First Attuck of the Medes. 145

ἢ SOON a ’, e 3 , , δ
λέσθαι τὸ ἐον, ὅτι παρασκενάζοιντο ὡς ἀπολεύμενοι TE καὶ
> / a 4 2 3 3 A a “ 3 ἕ
ἀπολέοντες κατα δύναμιν" αλλ αὑτῷ γελοία yap εφαίνοντο

᾿ ΄, (an “ > , 27 3
ποίέειν, μετεπέμψατο Δημάρητον τὸν Αρίστωνος, ἐόντα ev

“. 4 3 ’ , > yf Ψ
τῷ στρατοπέδῳ. ἀπίκομενον δέ μιν εἰρωτα Ἐερξης ἕκαστα

΄ 3 Z “A “ ’ “ a“
τούτων, ἐθέλων μαθεῖν τὸ ποιεύμενον πρὸς τῶν Λακεδαιμο-

, e ‘ 9 ¥ , Ν 4 9
viov. ὁ δὲ εἶπε' Hxovoas μὲν pev καὶ πρότερον, εὔτε

“ A 323." Ν ς , s ἴω 3 “ ΄
ὡρμῶμεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα, περὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων "
ὌΠ Σ δ 4 , ¥ , A Ψ 3
ἀκούσας δὲ γέλωτά pe ἔθευ λέγοντα τῇ περ ὥρων εκβη-

’ 7 a 3 \ Ν ‘N 3 ’ 3 ΄
σόμενα πρήγματα ταῦτα. ἐμοὶ γὰρ τὴν ἀληθείην ἀσκέειν
> 4 a 9 a 2 SN , ’ 93 ” ‘
ἀντία σεῦ, ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἀγὼν μέγιστος ἐστι. ἄκουσον δε

Ἁ A ce 9 φ 3 , ’ ὁ «a
καὶ νῦν. 2%. οἱ avdpes οὗτοι ἀπίκαται μαχεσόμενοι ἡμίν

Ν A > \ “ ΄ ’ ’
περὶ τῆς ἐσόδου, καὶ ταῦτα παρασκευάζονται. νόμος yup
ad » 3 4 3 Ν 4 ’ na a

σφι οὕτω ἔχων ἐστι" ἐπεὰν μέλλωσι κινδυνεύειν TH ψυχῇ.

, “ ‘ 4 > » Ν 9 4
TuTe τὰς κεφαλὰς κοσμέονται. ἐπίστασο δε, εἰ TOUTOUS TE

‘ “ e ’ 9 ’ ’ wv 3ak
καὶ τὸ ὑπομένον ἐν Σπάρτῃ καταστρέψεαι, ἐστι οὐδεν ἄλλο
," 3 ’ , A ¢ 4 ζω 3
εθνος ἀνθρώπων τὸ σε, βασιλεῦ, ὑπομενέει χείρας ἀνταει-

’ a ‘ δ A , a ’
powevov’ νῦν yup πρὸς βασιληΐην τε καλλίστην τῶν ἐν
6 A \. Ψ > 4 4 x
λλησι προσφέρεαι, καὶ ἄνδρας ἀρίστους. Kapra te δὴ
¥ ms 3 , δ , 4 N ,
ἀπιστα Ἐέρξη ἐφαίνετο τὰ λεγόμενα elvat, καὶ δεύτερα
᾽’ oS , A 2, a ς a
ἐπείρωτα, ὅντινα τρόπον τοσοῦτοι EOVTES TH ἑωυτοῦ στρα-

a t ¢ as ¢ 4 en a
τιῇ μαχέσονται. ὃ δε εἶπε" M2 βασιλεῦ, ἐμοὶ χρᾶσθαι
e , ὃ Ὡ ’ A Ν “ ’ ,’, 2 a a > N
ὡς ἀνδρὶ ψεύστῃ, ἢν μὴ ταῦτα ToL ταύτῃ ἐκβῇ, TH ἐγὼ

7 A , 3 y¥ “ hu /
λεγω. ταῦτα λέγων οὐκ ἔπειθε Tov Ἐξέρξεα.

f s Ν [ 4 _ 3, ’ > »
28. Τέσσερας μὲν δὴ παρεξῆκε ἡμέρας, ἐλπίζων αἰεί
᾽ , , . oe ’ 3 ἢ
σφεας ἁποδρήσεσθαι. πέμπτῃ δε, ὡς οὐκ ἀπαλλάσσοντο,

3 ’ ε 3 / 3 / \ 3 4 ’
ἀλλὰ ot ἐφαίνοντο αναιδείῃ τε καὶ ἀβουλίῃ διαχρεοόμενοι

, 4 > 9 2 Ν , Ν 4
μένειν, πέμπει ἐπ᾿ avtous Mnéous te καὶ Κισσίους θυμω-
| \ ) , , , ¥ 3 ΜΝ Ν
Geis, ἐντειλώμενός σφεας ζωγρήσαντας ἄγειν ἐς ὄψιν τὴν

£ a € 2 2 «4 ( 3 ν ὦ, ε
εωυτοῦ. ws δ᾽ ἐπέπεσον φερόμενοι ἐς tous Ελληνας οἱ
Μὴ ¥ / ¥ » 2 beg. \ 2 >»?

noot, ἐπίπτον πολλοί" ἄλλοι ὃ εἐπεσηΐῖσαν καὶ οὐκ ἀπη-

’ }. 4 a 32. 23 4
λαυνον, καίπερ μεγάλως προσπταίοντες. δῆλον δ᾽ ἐποίευν
10

146 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop.

, Ν 3 τ a A 4. Φ LY Ν
“παντὶ τεῳ καὶ οὐκ ἥκιστα αὐτῷ βασιλεΐ, OTL πολλοι μὲν
¥ 9 xs So» > 7 \ Ἔ
ἄνθρωποι elev, ολίγοι Se ἄνδρες. ἐγίνετο δὲ ἡ συμβολὴ

3 e 4 3 / Ν ε A 4 ,
δι ἡμέρης. 29. ἐπείτε δὲ of Μῆδοι τρηχέως περιείπον-
’ a @ ‘ e fh e ‘ , 5) ,
το, ἐνθαῦτα οὗτοι μεν ὑπεξηΐσαν, οἱ Se Πέρσαι exdefu-
> ». \ ) , > 2 \ a 9
μενοι ἐπηίσαν, τους ἀθανάτους exadee βασίλευς, τῶν ἦρχε
ς , e Ν φ / > 4 4
Ὑδάρνης, ws bn οὕτοί ye εὐπετέως κατεργασόμενοι. ὡς
δ ‘ φ ,ὕ a [2 Jas s 3 ,ὔ
δὲ καὶ οὕτοι συνέμισγον τοῖσι Ελλησι, οὐδεν πλέον ἐφέ-
A A A A 3 δ Ν 9." (iA 2
ροντο τῆς στρατιῆς τῆς Μηδικῆς, adda τὰ αὑτα, ἅτε ἐν
’ ’ ’ Q ? )
στεινοπόρῳ TE χωρῳ μαχόμενοι, Kat Sovpact βραχυτέροισι
, ¥ ed Ν 3 ¥ ’ τς ,
χρεόμενοι ἥπερ ot Ελληνες, καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες πληθεὶῖ χρη»
σασθαι.
’ sy 3 ae 3ς,͵7 A »”.
30. Aaxedaipovios δὲ ἐμάχοντο ἀξίως λόγου, ἄλλα τε
3 ’ 3 ᾽ 3 ’, ’ 3 ,
ἀποδεικνύμενοι ἐν οὐκ ἐπισταμένοισι μάχεσθαι ἐξεπιστα-
. of 3 , \ a e ’ὔ ᾽’ a
μενοι, καὶ ὅκως ἐντρέψειαν Ta νῶτα, ἄλέες φεύγεσκον δῆθεν"
e€ Ν ’ e ’ 4 a ον [4
οἱ δε βάρβαροι ὁρέοντες φεύγοντας βοῇ τε καὶ πατάγῳ
> +, ecw A , ες» ae
ἐπηΐῖσαν, οἱ δ᾽ ἂν καταλαμβανόμενοι ὑπέστρεφον ἀντίοι
} a ’ 4 Ν ’
εἶναι τοῖσι βαρβάροισι, μεταστρεφομενοι δὲ κατεβαλλον
, ee 2 , A 4 4 Ν Ν. > »
πληθεὶ ἀναριθμήτους τῶν Περσεων" ἔπιπτον δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν
a 4 3 a 3 4 ? Ν Ν eas 3 4
τῶν Σπαρτιητέων ἐνθαῦτα ὀλίγοι. ἐπεὶ Se οὐδὲν ἐδυνέατο
: a ς , A 2 ,ὔ ’ Ν Ν
παραλαβεῖν οἱ Πέρσαι τῆς ἐσόδου, πειρεόμενοι καὶ κατὰ
J , 4 2 ’ 9 ,
τέλεα καὶ παντοίως προσβαλλοντες, ἀπήλαυνον οπίσω.
81. Ἔν ταύ ἢ 00 ἧς μάχης λέ B
. Ἔν ταύτησι τῇσι προσόδοισι τῆς μάχης λέγεται Bact-
4 / ‘ 9 a 3 A a ͵
rea θηεύμενον τρὶς ἀναδραμεῖν ἐκ τοῦ θρόνου, δείσαντα
AY a a 4 Ν of / a 2 ¢
περὶ TH στρατιῇ. TOTE μὲν οὕτω ἠγωνίσαντο, TH ὃ VaTE-
͵ Ins ΚΚ 3 od Ν ,.. 7
pain οἱ βάρβαροι οὐδὲν ἄμεινον ἀεθλεον " ἅτε γὰρ ολέίγων
37 J a ’ Q b
ἐόντων, ἐλπίσαντες σφεας κατατετρωματίσθαι τε καὶ οὐκ
[4 ν Ψ a 3 / a €
otovs τε ἔσεσθαι ἔτι χεῖρας ἀνταείρασθαι, συνεβαλλον. οι
ν of , κ \ ¥ ,
Se “Ελληνες κατὰ τάξις τε καὶ κατὰ ἔθνεα κεκοσμημένοι
.) ΝΟΣ , oe 2 / > / @
ἧσαν, καὶ ἐν μέρεϊ ἕκαστοι ἐμάχοντο, TAnY Φωκεων " οὕτοι
\ 9 δ 9 > 7 , Ν 3 ’ ‘
δὲ ἐς τὸ οὖρος ἐτάχθησαν φυλάξοντες THY ἀτραπόν. ὡς δε
IAs od ) ’ ς , ΕἾ a , > »
οὐδὲν εὕρισκον ἀλλοιότερον οἱ Πέρσαι ἢ τῇ προτεραίῃ ἐνὼ-

VI, 215.] Treachery of Epliultes. 147

3 ’ 3 ’ Ν ’ @ ,
pov, ἀπήλαυνον. 82. Απορέοντος de βασιλέος ὅ τι χρη»
a 4 , 3 , ¢ ? ,
σηται τῷ παρεῦντι πρήγματι, Ἐπιώλτης ὁ Ευρυδημον
ὃν Ἁ 4 4 ς 2 ’ © ὔ Q
avnp Μηλιεὺς ἦλθε οἱ ἐς λόγους, ὡς μέγα TL παρὰ βασι-
’ 4 Ν » 4 . 2 “ SY ‘ a
λέος δοκέων οἴσεσθαι, ἔφρασε τε THY ἀτραπὸν τὴν Siu τοῦ
¥ ’ὔὕ 3 ’ Ν ’ “ 4
οὔρεος φέρουσαν ἐς Θερμοπύλας, καὶ διεφθειρε τους ταύτῃ
Ul ‘ 4
ὑπομείναντας Ελλήνων. ὕστερον δὲ δείσας Aaxedarpo-
2 4 e td ° “ a
vious ἔφνγε ἐς Θεσσαλίην, καὶ ot φυγοντι ὑπο τῶν Πυλα-
4 a 3 4 2 Ν ’ 4
γόρων, τῶν Apudixtvovay es την Πυλαίην συλλεγομένων,
’ ΄ 9 ΄ ’ ν ὦ; a Ν
ἀργύριον ἐπεκηρύχθη. χρόνῳ δὲ ὕστερον, κατῆλθε γὰρ
» 9 > + ον 2 J ἢ N 7
ἐς ᾿Αντικύρην, ἀπέθανε ὑπο Αθηνάδεω, ἀνδρὸς Τρηχινίου.
Ν φΦ > ἢ . 9 t > ¥
ὁ δὲ ᾿Αθηνάδης οὗτος ἀπέκτεινε μὲν Επιάλτην δι᾿ ἄλλην
, 7 N > NN 3 a ¥ 7 , 3 ,
αἰτίην, THY eyw ἐν τοίσι ὁπίσθε λόγοισι ONmavew, ἐτιμηθη
a ¢€ 4 Ian ed 3 ,ὔ \
pevros wa Δακεδαιμονίων οὐδὲν ἔσσον. ΕἘπιώλτης μεν
/ r 9 4 ¥ No 4
οὕτω ὕστερον τούτων ἀπέθανε. 88. ᾿Εστι δε ἕτερος λεγό-
’ φ 3 , e ’ >, N 4
μενος λόγος, ὡς Ονήητης τε ὁ Bavayopew ἀνὴρ Καρύστιος
“ 4 ’ e = “ 4
καὶ Κορυδαλος ᾿Αντικυρεὺς εἰσι οἱ εἰπταυτες πρὸς βασίλεα
΄ SY , Ν 4 “ 9 “
τούτους TOUS λόγους, καὶ περιηγησάμενοι τὸ οὖρος τοῖσι
’ 2 ἴω ¥ 4 wn Ν Q a
Περσησι, ουδαμῶς ἔμοιγε Mares. τοῦτο μὲν yap τῷδε
N ,ὔ f e a ς 4 / >
χρὴ σταθμωσασθᾶαι, ore οἱ τῶν Ελληνων Πυλαγόροι εἐπε-
2 > NX 9 ’ ΑΝ a 3 4 3 >
κήρυξαν οὐκ emt Ονήτῃ τε καὶ Κορυδαλῷ ἀργύριον, αλλ
γΝ Ἔ aN A T , 7 \ 9 ,
ἐπε Εἰπιαλτῃ τῷ Τρηχίνίῳ, πάντως κου τὸ ἀτρεκέστατον
, a \ ΄ ‘ 9 ’ , ν
πυθόμενοι, τοῦτο δε φεύγοντα τὸν Εἰπιώλτην ταύτην τὴν
> 7 ¥ > / - Ν KA ΝΥΝ ‘ x
αἰτίην οἰδαμεν. εἰδείη μὲν γὰρ av, καὶ ewv μὴ ηλιευς,
’ Ν 3 “ 3 ’ ᾿ A 7 “ e “
ταύτην την ἀτραπὸν Ονητῆς, εἰ τῇ χωρῃ πολλὰ ὠὡμιίληκως
¥ 3 3.2 / / ? e , , Ν 9
εἰη" “dX Ἐπιάλτης γάρ ἐστι ὁ περιηγησαμενος τὸ οὔρος
Ν 93 Ν a wy
κατὰ τὴν ἀτραπον, τοῦτον αἰτιον γράφω.
4 Ν 3 ’ ¢ ff ‘ é > a.
B4. Beptns δε, ἐπεί οἱ ἤρεσε ta ὑπέσχετο ὁ Επεώλτης
, > ἡ N , ,
κατεργάσεσθαι, αὐτίκα περιχαρὴς γενόμενος ἔπεμπε ‘TSup-
ἐν a , , ς s ς - Ν Ν -
yea καὶ τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Tdupvyns.. wppeato δε περι Av-
“ 3 a ’ . Ν 7 “ a
χνων ἄφας ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου. τὴν δε ατραπὸν ταύτην
3 A “ e 3 , 4 > ’ Ν
ἐξεῦρον μὲν οἱ ἐπιχώριοι ηλιεέες, ἐξευροντες de Θεσσα-

148 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Henop.

a , > A , ᾽ a e ’ ’
λοῖσι κατηγήσαντο ἔπι Pwxeas τοτε ὅτε οἱ Pwxees, φραξαν-
, és Ν 3 N 9 ? ’ a 4 »
τες τείχεϊ THY exBodnv, ἦσαν ἐν σκεπὴ τοῦ πολέμου" ἐκ
a é > ry Jar AY a
τε τοσοῦδε κατεδέδεκτο ἐοῦσα οὐδὲν χρηστὴ Μηλιεῦσι.
¥ \ ᾳφ e } δ a ¥ N 7 8 A
33. ἔχει de ὧδε 7 ATpATOS QUTN* APKXETAL μεν ἀπο TOU
3 a Aa A “ a 4 ef ΗΝ
Ασωποῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ dia τῆς διασφωγος ῥέοντος " οὔνομα
᾿ a ΕΣ ge ’ Q a 3 aA 9 Ἀ é 9
δὲ τῷ οὐρεῖ τούτῳ καὶ TH ἀτραπῷ TWUTO κέεται, Ανοπαια'
, ‘ ¢9? , ef NS eof a , \
τείνει δε ἡ Ανόπαια αὕτη κατὰ ῥαχιν τοῦ οὔρεος, λήγει δὲ
, 9 ον [4 9. a σι
κατώ te ᾿Αλπηνὸν πόλιν, πρώτην ἐοῦσαν τῶν Δοκρίδων
Ν A 4 “ Ν ’ ’ ᾽
προς τῶν ηλιεων, καὶ κατὰ Μελαμπυγὸν τε καλεόμενον
: . N > , cs a N N , ’
λιθον καὶ κατὰ Kepxwrwv ἕδρας, τῇ καὶ τὸ στεινοτατον
9 rN ΄ Ν ν 3 N \ @ ¥
ἐστι. 86. κατὰ ταύτην δὴ τὴν UTPATOV καὶ οὕτω ἐχουσαν
e ’ ν. 2 Ν ͵ > ΄ a ‘
ot Περσαι, τὸν ᾿ἄσωπον διαβαᾶντες, ἐπορεύοντο πᾶσαν THY
, 9 χω Ν ¥ ¥ A 9 , 9 3 a
νύκτα, ev δεξιῇ μεν ἔχοντες οὔρεα τὰ Οιταίων, ἐν ἀριστερῇ
Y \ , 4 7 ἣν ᾽ὔ Ay 9 ’ > 3
δὲ ta Τρηχινιων" nws τε δὴ διέφαινε, καὶ ἐγένοντο ἐπ
? , ~ ΚΨ \ gt a a ΨΚ 7,7
ἀκρωτηρίῳ τοῦ οὔρεος. κατα δε τοῦτο τοῦ οὔρεος εφύλασ-
e Ν ’ ΄ ’ Λ ¢ a
cov, ws καὶ mpotepov pot δεδήλωται, Φωκεων χίλιοι ὁπλί-
΄ ’ / Ν ὔ 4 Ν a Ν
TAL, ρυομενοί TE THY σφετέρην χωρὴν και φρουρεέοντες THY
3 ’ e N Α ’ὔ > ] Ν 3 lA ¢ 9 φ
ἀτραπὸν. ἢ μὲν γὰρ Katw ἐσβολὴ εφυλασσετο UT ὧν
MN Q . Q n ¥ ϑ a 3 “ /
εἰρηται, τὴν δὲ διὰ τοῦ οὔρεος ἀτραπον εθέλονται Φωκεες
ς , , >,7 ¥ ’
wrroseFapevos Λεωνίδῃ ἐφ λασδοῦ: 51: ἔμαθον δὲ σφεας
φ Ν ,
οἱ Φωκεες ὧδε ἀναβεβηκότας > ἀναβαίνοντες yup ἐλάνθανον
e , "44 a aN a > 2 > Ν ‘
ot Περσαι τὸ οὖρος πᾶν cov δρνῶν ἐπίπλεον. ἦν μεν dy
“ μ Ν / a ¢ ΙΝ 1 4.
νηνεμίη, ψόφου δὲ γινομένου πολλοῦ, ὡς οἰκὸς HY φύλλων
e 4 ἈΝ a Ἁ > / ” e 4
ὑποκεχυμένων ὑπο τοῖσι ποσί, ava τε ἔδραμον οἱ Φωκεες
ν}.» "» oo δ > 7 ε , A
καὶ eveduvov ta ὅπλα, καὶ αὐτίκα ot βάρβαροι παρῆσαν.
e \ 4 v 9 , σ 3 ’ > 3
ὡς δὲ εἶδον avdpas θνδυομένους ὅπλα, ἐν θωυματι ἐγένοντο"
4 ’ Ν Ia/ 4 9 / 3 7
ἐλπόμενοι yap οὐδὲν σφι φανήσεσθαι ἀντίξοον, ἐνεκύρησαν
.“ 3 “ e , , Ν ω
στρατῳ: 88. ἐνθαῦτα Ὕδαρνης, καταρρωδησας μη οι
μ ¥ , ¥ Ν ’

Φωκεες ewot Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἴρετο τὸν Ἐπιάλτην ὁποδα-
Ν ν e AN ’ ΙΝ 3 ’ ’ »
TOS εἰηὴ ὁ στρατὸς. πυθόμενος δε ἀτρεκεως, διέτασσε τοὺς
, e 3 , e ‘N 4 e 3 ’ a
Πέρσας ws ἐς μάχην. οἱ δὲ Φωκεες, ὡς ἐβάλλοντο τοῖσι

Vil, 220.] Some of the Greeks withdraw. 149

’ a ἢ a δι Ν 4
τοξεύμασι πολλοῖσί TE καὶ πυκνοῖσι, οἴχοντο φεύγοντες
9" “a v Ν a 3 Ud e >, A ’
ἐπὶ τοῦ οὔρεος Tov κορυμβον, ἐπίστώμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ σφεας
e , “ 4 / ΄ 2 4
ὡρμήθησαν ἄρχην, καὶ παρεσκευάδατο ὡς αἀπολεόμενοι.
φ Ἢ Ν = 3 , .- at 9 . 7 ’ 4
οὗτοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἐφροόνεον, οἱ de audit Επιάλτεα καὶ
ε , , ’ ‘ Inf 4 3 a e
Tdapvea Περσαι Φωκέων μὲν οὐδένα λόγον εποιεῦντο, οἱ
A , “ ΩΣ Ν 4
δε κατέβαινον τὸ οὖρος κατὰ τάχος.
a Χ 2 ,’ > a e 4 n
89. Τοῖσι Se ev Θερμοπύλῃσι εοῦσι Ελλήνων πρῶτον
Ὡ- e , iA 3 s 9 x e A ¥ SY a
μὲν ὁ μαντις Μεγιστίης, ἐσιδὼν ἐς Ta ipa, ἐφρασε Tov μελ-
ad 4 “Ὁ , >, A Ἁ “ > @
Aovta ἔσεσθαι ἅμα ἠοῖ σφι θάνατον. ἐπὶ δὲ Kat avTopo-
4 ς 3 Λ a ’ “ /
λοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐξαγγείλαντες τῶν Περσέων τὴν περίοδον.
@ “ ¥ Ν 9 ’ 4 \ e ee 4
οὗτοι μὲν ETL νυκτὸς ἐσήμηναν, τρίτοι δὲ OL ἡμεροσκόποι
/ > ON a ” ¥ ΄ ¢ 4
καταδραμόντες ato τῶν ἄκρων, ἤδη διαφαινούσης ἡμέρης.
’ a 2 v4 ed , 2 , e
ἐνθαῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο οἱ “Ελληνες, καὶ σφεων ἐσχίξοντο at
a e N ΙΝ > Ψ ω , 9 a e \ 9 4
γνῶμαι" ob μὲν yap οὐκ ἔων την τάξιν εκλιπεῖν, οἱ δὲ ἀντε-
" \ a / e \ 3
τεινον. μετὰ δε τοῦτο διακριθέντες, οἱ μὲν απαλλάσσοντο
ὴν ’ Ν ’ ed 3 ’, e
καὶ διασκεδασθέντες κατὰ TWodS ἕκαστοι ἐτρώποντο, οἱ δε
Ia ld , ’ 2 a , ’
αὐτῶν ἅμα ΔΛεωνίδη μένειν αὐτοῦ παρεσκευάδατο. 40. λε-
Ἁ “ e : 3 4 3 (4 4 .
yetas δὲ καὶ ws αὐτὸς σφεας ἀπέπεμψε Λεωνίδης, un
> tA 4 2 a N Ν ’ a
ἀπόλωνται κηδόμενος" αὐτῷ δὲ καὶ Σπαρτιητέων τοῖσι
ξ΄" 3 Y¥y 3 tA 3 al Ν 4 9 “
παρεοῦσι οὐκ EXEL εὐπρέπεως EXALTELY THY τάξιν, ἐς τὴν
9 ’ 9 ’ , “ a a ,
ἤλθον Φυλαξοντες ἀρχήν. Ταυτη; καὶ μᾶλλον τῇ youn
n 9 7
πλειστὸς εἰμι, Λεωνίδην, ἐπείτε αἰσθετο τους συμμάχους
3, > a “ 3 3. /
ἐόντας ἀπροθύμους, καὶ οὐκ εθέλοντας συνδιακινδυνευειν,
« / 4 ’ 9 wn ,. 9 (4 2 A
KEXEVT AL σφεας ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, αντῳ δὲ ἀπιέναι οὐ καλῶς
¥ 4 Ἁ 3 a 4 , ? ’ \ ¢ a
ἔχειν. μένοντι δὲ αὐτοῦ κλέος μέγα ἐλείπετο, καὶ ἡ Σπάρ-
> , 3 3 ’ > ἢ Ν e ON
της εὐδαιμονίη οὐκ ἐξηλείφετο. 48. ἐκέχρηστο yap ὕπο
“ 4 σι 4 ’ A 4
τῆς Πυθίης τοῖσι Σπαρτιήτῃσι χρεομενοισι περὶ τοῦ πολέ-
͵ 2. ἢ) > 2 Ν 3 ’ ΕἾ /
μου τούτον αὐτίκα κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς ἐγειρομένου, ἢ Aaxedaipova
2 ἡ eon aA 7 “A ον ,
ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ἢ τὸν βασιλέα
’ 9 A 4 3 Ψ { 4
σφέων ἀπολέσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ σφι ev erect εξαμετροισι

A ΨΚ ὃ
XP2, EXOVTA ὠδε"

150 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop.

Ὑμῖν δ᾽, ὦ Σπάρτης οἰκήτορες εὑρυχόροιο,

Ἢ μέγα ἄστυ ἐρικυδὲς U ὑπ᾽ ἀνδράσι Περσεΐδῃσι
Πέρθεται, ἢ τὸ μὲν οὐκὶ, ἀφ᾽ Ἢ ρακλέος δὲ γενέθλης
Πενθήσει βασιλῆ φθίμενον Λακεδαίμονος οὖρος.

Οὐ γὰρ τὸν ταύρων σχήσει μένος οὐδὲ λεόντων δ
᾿Αντιβίην" Ζηνὸς γὰρ ἔχει μένος " οὐδέ ὃ ἕ φημι
Σχήσεσθαι, πρὶν τῶνδ᾽ ἕτερον διὰ πώντα δάσηται.

a 7 ν 2 ,ὔ ἢ δ ’
Ταῦτά τε δη ἐπιλεγόμενον Πεωνίδην, καὶ βουλόμενον κλέος
7 4 4 3 ’ “ ,
καταθέσθαι μούνων Σπαρτιητέων, ἀποπέμψαι τοὺς cuppa-
a A , 5 θέ of! > 7 y
Nous, μαλλον ἢ γνωμῃ ὀιενείχθεντας οὕτω AKOT UWS οἴχε-
Ν 3 / 4 s “ ’
σθαι τοὺς οἰχομένους. 42. μαρτύριον δέ μοι καὶ τόδε
’ OF ΄ ὔ , 3 Α ἃς \
οὐκ ἐλάχιστον τούτου πέρι γέγονε" οὐ γὰρ μοῦνον τοὺς
Υ > N N δ / ἃ “ a ~ 7
ἄλλους, adda καὶ TOY μάντιν ὃς εἰπεέετο τῇ στρατιῃ ταυτῇ,
, N 3 A ’ . 9 . ’
Meytotinv tov Axapvnva, λεγόμενον εἶναι τὰ ἀνέκαθεν
> S 4 a Ν My 2 a ec oa Ν Λ
ato Μελάμποδος, τοῦτον τὸν εἰπαντα ἐκ τῶν ἱρῶν τὰ μελ-
’ 3 , , » ’ 3 /
λοντά σφι ἐκβαίνειν, φανερὸς ἐστι Acwvidyns ἀποπέμπων,
7 Ν , , € Ν 3 ’ ΣΝ ‘
iva μὴ συναποόληταί σφι. ὁ δὲ ἀποπεμπόμενος AUTOS [EV
> 3 / Ν Ν “ , 27 (
οὐκ ἀπελείπετο, τὸν δὲ παῖδα συστρατευόμενον, ἐόντα οἱ
’ ’ ’ e 4 7 e 3
μουνογενεα, ἀπέπεμψε. 48. Οἱ μὲν νυν συμμαχοι οἱ απο-
Υ , > » Lo τς
πεμπόμενοι οἴχοντο τε ἀἄπίοντες, καὶ ἐπείθοντο Λεωνιδη'
Ν Ἁ ἴω ° “
Θεσπιέες δὲ καὶ Θηβαῖοι κατέμειναν μοῦνοι Tapa Aaxebar
ω ρ
͵ ? N a ‘ 4) ¥” . 2
μονίοισι. τούτων δὲ Θηβαῖοι μὲν ἀεέκοντες ἔμενον, Kai ov
, a , , 3 e / “
βουλόμενοι (κατεῖχε γὰρ σφεας Λεωνίδης ἐν ὁμήρων λόγῳ
, , Nef , ἃ > ¥
ποιεύμενος)" Θεσπιέες δὲ ἑκόντες μάλιστα, dt οὐκ ἐφασαν
2 7 7 4 Ν 3 A 3 [4
ἀπολίποντες Πεωνίδην καὶ Tous μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀπαλλαξέεσθαι,
3 Ν ’ , ϑ ? δ > a
ἀλλὰ καταμείναντες, συναπέθανον. ἐστρατήγεε δὲ αὑτῶν
/ ’
Anpogiros Διαδρόμεω.
’ Ἀ 3 “ e 4 3 δ 9 ὔ
44. Ἐερξης δὲ ἐπεὶ ἡλίου ἀνατείλαντος σπονδὰς ἐποιῆ-
3 ‘ , 3 9 A , /
σατο, ἐπίσχων χρόνον ἐς ἀγορῆς Kou μάλιστα πληθωρῆν,
9 ,ὔ LS NS 9 2 9 ? Λ ef
πρόσοδον ἐποιέετο" καὶ yap ἐπέσταλτο εξ ᾿Επιάλτεω οὕτω.
8 A ‘ a Μ ς 7 a 4. 3 \
ἅπο yap τοῦ οὐρεος ἡ κατάβασις συντομωτερὴ TE ἐστι, καὶ

VIL, 2251 Death of the Three Hundred. 151

4 e a “ y e ’ . 9, »
βραχύτερος ὁ χῶρος πολλὸν ἥπερ ἡ περίοδος τε καὶ ava-
a ἃ ’ ε 2} ιν , 4.0
βασις. ot te δὴ BupBapor οἱ ἀμφὶ Ἐερξεα προσηϊΐϊσαν "
‘Ne 9 Ν / a ¢e Ν 2.» ( ΝΜ
καὶ ot aught Λεωνίδην “Ελληνες, ὡς την ἐπὶ θανάτῳ εξοδον
a My a) 9 4 > o.. 3
ποιεύμενοι, ἤδη πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἢ Kat ἀρχὰς ἐπεξηΐσαν ἐς
δ > #4 a > ¢ N N ‘ ¥ ᾿ a ,
TO εὑρύτερον τοῦ αὐχένος. TO μεν γὰρ ἐρυμα TOU τείχεος
’ , e ‘ 9 oN ΙΝ ’ ς @¢ e 4 ’
εφυλώσσετο, οἱ δὲ ava Tus προτέρας ἡμέρας ὑπεξιοντες ες
‘ , > ’ ‘ / ¥ a
τὰ στεινόπορα ἐμάχοντο. τότε δε συμμίσγοντες ἔξω τῶν
a ¥ TP) .- 4 ὮΝ ΄ 4
στεινῶν, ἐπίπτον πληθεῖὶ πολλοι τῶν βαρβαρων " ὄπισθε
Ν « ¢e td a 4 ΨΚ [2 3 a
yup ol ἤγεμονες τῶν τέλέων ἔχοντες μαστίγας ερραπιζον
, " > ΝΛ Ν ’ 2 ’ N
πάντα ἄνδρα, αἰεὶ ἐς TO πρόσω ἐποτρύνοντες. 45. πολλοί
‘N Nos 0 > A ᾽ Ν ’ νν 4
μεν 8n ἐσέπιπτον αὐτῶν ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ διεφθείροντο,
a w ¥ A ’ Ne ee 2) , 9
πολλῷ δ᾽ ἐτι πλεῦνες KaTETTATEOVTO CwoL ὑπ ἀλλήλων" ἦν
‘ ἤ 2 Α δὶ 4 ὔ ed “ 3 ῷ
δὲ λόγος οὐδεὶς τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου. ἅτε γὰρ ἐπιστάμενοι
- ᾽ ὔ ¥ ‘ 3 A “ “
Tov μέλλοντα σφι ἐσεσθαι Oavatov ἐκ τῶν περιιόντων TO
4 2 7] ᾽ Ψ ΓῚ 4 4
οὖρος, ἀπεδείκνυντο ῥωμῆς ὅσον εἶχον μέγιστον ἐς τους
’ / , 2 Ὁ , /
βαρβάρους, παραχρεόμενοί τε καὶ atéovtes, Sovpata μέν
a s > A “ > Ὁ“ f
νυν τοῖσι πλέοσι αὑτῶν τηνικαῦτα ετύγχανε KaTENYyOTA
» e N A 4 a “\ a “
non, οἱ Se τοῖσι ξίφεσι διεργάζοντο tous Πέρσας. 46. Καὶ
4 9 ΄ “ , f 3 Nf é 8
Aewvidns τε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ πίπτει, ἀνὴρ γενόμενος ἄρι-
v4 3 3 a 3 ὔ a
OTOS, καὶ ἕτεροι [LET αὐτοῦ οὐνομαστοὶ Σπαρτιητέων, TOV
393. ON e 9 0 9go/ 4 3 ’’ Ν > »
ἐγώ ὡς ἀνδρῶν ἀξίων γενομένων ἐπυθόμην τὰ οὐνόματα"
3 ’ - ἈΝ t “ tA, Q x Q
ἐπυθόμην δὲ καὶ ἅπαντων τῶν τριηκοσίων. καὶ δὴ καὶ
, ἢ > a ¥ N N >
Περσέων πίπτουσι ἐνθαῦτα ἄλλοι τε πολλοὶ καὶ οὐνομα-
ἐν 3 AY Ν ιν ͵ὔ ’ὔ’ A J “
ato, ev δε δη καὶ Δαρείου δύο παῖδες, ᾿Αβροκόμης τε καὶ
Ὑ ὔ θ 3 a "A f θ ἐν i 4
περανθης, ex τῆς Αρτάνεω θυγατρὸς Φραταγούνης γεγο-
4 / \ > 4 ’ Ν A a
vores Δαρείῳ. ὁ δὲ Aptavys Δαρείου μὲν τοῦ βασιλέος
9 3 Ν e ’ Ν a “ - ἁ
ἣν ἀδελφεος, Ὕστασπεος δε τοῦ ᾿Αρσάμεος παῖς, ὃς καὶ
3 ‘ ἮΝ , ’ ‘ 2 ’ \ oe a
ἐκδιδους την θυγατέρα Δαρείῳ τὸν οἶκον πάντα τὸν ἑωυτοῦ
9 ’ ἐ 4 e 3 4 4 / | ow Ah [4
ἐπέδωκε, ὡς μούνου οἱ ἐούσης ταύτης τέκνου. 47. Ἐερξεω
Ν 4 2 x 3 A 4 ’ e Ν A
te δὴ δύο ἀδελφεοὶ ἐνθαῦτα πίπτουσι μαχόμενοι ὑπερ TOU
a a / , Ν / 3
νεκροῦ τοῦ Λεωνίδεω" Περσέων τε καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων wht-

152 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Henop.

“ > » “ > A a ἦν 9 “ eg
σμος ἐγένετο TOAAOS, ES ὁ τοῦτον TE APETH οἱ Ελληνες
e 4 . 9 4 Ν 3 4 [2 a
ὑπεξείρυσαν, καὶ ἐτρέψαντο TOUS ἐναντίους TETPAKLS. τοῦτο
Ν ’ ’ φΦ e Ν 2 ’ , ¢
δε συνεστῆκεε μέχρι OV οἱ συν pany παρεγένοντο. ὡς
Ν ’ oe 9 4 e 5 a ¥ °
δὲ τούτους ἥκειν ἐπύθοντο οἱ ᾿Ελληνες, ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη ἐτε-
-' x A pA “ “ “ A ¢ nw
ροιοῦτο τὸ νεικος. 48. ἐς TE yap TO στεινὸν τῆς ὁδοῦ ave-
4 3 ν ἤ “ a ? 4
χώρεον ὑπίσω, Kal παραμειψάμενοι τὸ τεῖχος, ἐλθόντες
” > A δ γ ’ ἤ ey .
ἰζοντο emt τὸν κολωνὸν πάντες ἔλεες Ob ἄλλοι πλὴν On-
/ e Ν , 9 3 a ? a od a e ,
Baiwv. ὁ δε κολωνὸς ἐστι ἐν TH ἐσοόδῳ, ὅκου νῦν ὁ λίέθινος
λέων ἕστηκε ἐπὶ Aewvid é ) : D χώρῳ are-
στηκε emt Aewvidn. ἐν τούτῳ σφεας τῷ χωρῳ ade
a ’ ω > A > 7 ¥ A
ξομένους μαχαίρῃσι, τοῖσι αὐτῶν ἐτύγχανον ETL “περιεοῦσαι,
Ν Ν δ 9. ’ ε ’ ’
Kal χερσί καὶ στόμασι, κατέχωσαν οἱ βάρβαροι βαλλοντες,
e Ν > 3 ’ 3 ; 4 “ ” a ,
οἱ μεν ἐξ ἐναντίης ἐπισπόμενοι καὶ TO ἐρυμα TOU τείχεος
’ e ‘N 4 ’
συγχώσαντες, οἱ δὲ περιέλθοντες πάντοθεν περισταδον.
, Ν Ν 4 7 4
49. Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ καὶ Θεσπιέων τοιούτων ryevope-
Ψ ’ ¥ > 8 ’ ,
γων, ὅμως λέγεται ἄριστος ἀνὴρ γενέσθαι Σπαρτιητῆς
’ X 4 S 3 a Ν 4 Ν A 4 U
Aunvexns, tov Tobe φασὶ εἰπεῖν τὸ ἔπος πρὶν ἢ συμμιξαὶ
a , ‘ ’ a /
σφεας τοῖσι Μηδοισε" πυθόμενον πρὸς tev τῶν Τρηχινίων
e 9 4 ς ’ 4 , Ἀ 4 ον e eos
ὡς, eTeav οἱ βαρβαροι ἀπιεωσε τὰ τοξεύματα, Tov ἥλιον ὑπὸ
A ’ a 9.. A 9 4 a ¢ a
τοῦ πλήθεος τῶν οἰστῶν αποκρύπτουσι, ---- τοσοῦτο TL TIF
, A 9 δ , 9 9 ’ ΄ ΕΞ...
θος αὐτῶν εἶναι" τὸν δὲ οὐκ ἐκπλαγέντα τουτοισι εἰπεῖν, ἐν
aroyin ποιεύμενον τὸ τῶν Μήδων πλῆθος, ὡς πάντα σφι
ὀγαθὰ ὁ Tpnxivios ξεῖνος ἀγγέλλοι, εἰ ἀποκρυπτόντων τῶν
Μηδὼν τὸν ἥλιον, ὑπὸ σκιῇ ἔσοιτο πρὸς αὐτοὺς Ἶ μάχη, καὶ
οὐκ ἐν ἡλίῳ. 50. ταῦτα μὲν καὶ ἄλλα τοιουτότροπα ἔπεα
a “ 4 s (
φασι Διηνέκεα τὸν Aaxedatpovoy λίπεσθαι μνημόσυνα.
Ν N a 9 ’ ’
μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ἀριστεῦσαι λέγονται “Λακεδαιμονίοις δυο
9 Ν 3 , Ν ’ ? 4 e
abergeot, Ardeos te καὶ Mapwv Ορσιφαντου raises.
- 4 N ? ᾽ὔ / a ¥ > ΄
Θεσπιέων δε εὐδοκίμεε μάλιστα τῷ οὔνομα ἣν Διθύυραμβος
e /
Apparideo.
“ , 3 a 4 a ¥ \
54. Θαφθεῖσι δὲ σφι αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ τῇ περ ἔπεσον, Kab
a 4 ’ A e¢ N ᾽ὔ 9 4
τοῖσι πρότερον τελευτήσασι ἢ ὑπὸ Λεωνίδεω ἀποπεμφθεν-
¥ 3 ’ , a ἡ
τας οίχεσθαι, ἐπιγέγραπται γράμματα λέγοντα τάδε"

VIL, 229.] The Spartan Dead. 153

a ‘ a , 9 ἢ
Mupiacw ποτε τῇδε τριηκοσίαις ἐμάχοντο
9 ’ 4 f
Ex Πελοποννασου χιλιάδες τετορες.
ry “ Ν a a 3 a ἴω “
Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ τοῖσι πᾶσι ἐπιγέγραπται, τοῖσε δὲ Σπαρ-
9
τιήτησι ἰδίῃ"
4 ΄ 4 4 a “
Ὁ ξεῖν᾽, ἀγγέλλειν Λακεδαιμονίοις, ὅτι τῇδε
a /
Κείμεθα τοῖς κείνων ῥήμασι trecOopevor,
, \ Ν a “ Ν 4 ’
Λακεδαιμονίοισι μὲν δὴ τοῦτο, τῷ δὲ μάντι τόδε"

δι [2] / C4 a
Μνῆμα τόδε κλεινοῖο Μεγιστία, ὅν ποτε Μῆδοι
εν εν a 4
Σπερχειὸν ποταμὸν κτεῖναν ἀμειψάμενοι,
΄ A 4 A 9 , ’ Jar
Μαντιος, ὃς tore Κῆρας erepyopevas cada εἰδως
Οὐκ ἔτλη Σπάρτης ἡγεμόνας προλιπεῖν.

? ? , ‘ , ” a oN a ’
ἐπιγράμμασι μεν νυν καὶ στηλῃσι, ἔξω 7 τὸ TOV μαντιος
3 ,’ ἢ 9 lA e 3 ’
ἐπίγραμμα, ᾿Αμφικτύονές εἰσί σφεας οἱ ἐπικοσμήσαντες,
Ν Ν a 4 ’ , e a 4
τὸ δὲ τοῦ μάντιος Μεγιστίεω Σιμωνίδης ὁ Aewmperreos
3 Ν , e 23 /
ἐστι κατὰ ξεινίην ὁ ἐπιγραψας.
? Ν Δ a 4 4 ¥ ’
52. Δύο de τούτων τῶν τριηκοσίων λέγεται Evputov te
x 3 a “ 9 ζω 3 a a a
καὶ Αριστόδημον, παρεὸν αὐτοῖσι ἀμφοτεροισι κοινῷ λογῳ
4 a~ 9 a e a ? ’ e
χρησαμένοισι ἢ ἀποσωθῆναι ὁμοῦ ες Σπάρτην (ws μεμετι-
; 4 ’ A ͵ ‘ / δ
μένοι τε ἦσαν εκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου ὕπο Acwridew, καὶ κατε-
/ 3 3 a 9 A ἂν ¥
xeato ἐν Αλπηνοίσι οφθαλμιῶντες ἐς TO ἐσχατον)ὴ, ἢ εἰ γε
‘93 4 A 3 “ ad a ¥
μὴ εβουλοντο νοστῆσαι, atroCavely ἅμα τοῖσε ἄλλοισι, Ta-
7 , Ν ὧ , 3 ᾽ a e UA
peov σφι τουτων Ta ἕτερα ποίεειν, οὐκ εθελῆσαι ὁμοφρονεέειν"
3 . , ’ . ¥ Ἃ 4 . “A
ἄλλα γνωμῃ διενείχθεντας, Evputov μεν πυθόμενον την τῶν
7 , 4 , 4 “ (4 Ν 3 ’
Περσέων περίοδον, αἰτησαντὰ τε τὰ ὅπλα καὶ ἐνδύντα,
¥ 9 N A ‘ a ᾽ ‘\ ’ Ψ
ἄγειν αὑτον KENEVTAL TOV εἰλωτα ES TOUS μαχομένους " OKWS
δὲ 2." Υ͂ Ν Ν 3 ’ Υ ’ a
€ aUTOV ἤγαγε, TOV μεν ἀγαγόντα οίχεσθαι φεύγοντα, τὸν
we / ? x oe δι ? ’ὔ -
δε ἐσπεσόντα ἐς τὸν ὅμιλον διαφθαρῆναι" ᾿Αριστόδημον δὲ
/ a 3 / 9 An
λειποψυχεέοντα λειφθῆναι. S53. εἰ μὲν νυν ἦν μοῦνον
᾿ ’ 2 ’ 3 a ? , A Ν
Ἀριστόδημον ἀλγήσαντα ἀπονοστῆσαι ἐς Σπάρτην, ἢ καὶ
e a , 9 ’ Ν δ , ? Ν
ὁμοῦ σφεων ἀμφοτερων τὴν κομιδὴν γενέσθαι, δοκέειν ἐμοί,

154 The Pass of Thermopylae. (Heron.

3 wv” ’ ζω 4 ’ 4 Ἁ
οὐκ ἂν σφι Σπαρτιήτας μῆνιν οὐδεμίαν προσθέσθαι" νυνὶ
N a ἈΝ 2 a 3 ’ n Ν Xx > «a 3 “
δε, τοῦ μεν αὐτῶν ἀπολομένου, τοῦ δὲ τῆς μὲν αὐτῆς ἐχομέ.
’ ϑ 3 ’ Ν 9 [4 3 U
vou Tpoductos, ove ἐθελήσαντος δὲ ἀποθνήσκειν, ἀναγκαίως
Υ a ’ 3 , « 4 d
σφι ἔχειν μηνίσαι μεγάλως Αριστοδήμῳ. οἱ μὲν νυν οὕτω
aA / 3 “ 3 7 “ “\ /
σωθῆναι λέγουσι Αριστόδημον ἐς Σπάρτην, καὶ διὰ πρό-
4 e \ 4 3 a ,
φασιν τοιήνδε" οἱ δὲ ἀγγέλον πεμφθέντα ἐκ τοῦ στρατοτε-
3 Ν 2 a a Ὥ ᾽, 4 2 3
δου, ἐξεὸν αὐτῷ καταλαβεῖν τὴν μάχην γινομένην, οὐκ εθε-
rn rn ¢ , 3 a “ὃ a / 0 Ἀ δὲ
ῆσαι, a ὑπομείναντα ἐν τῇ οδῷ περιγενέσθαι, τὸν δε
’ 3 A 2 ’ > ‘“ 7 9 ἴω
συναγγελον αὐτοῦ ἀπικόμενον ἐς THY μάχην ἀποθανεῖν.
3 ‘ . 9 f b ¥ ’
54. atrovoatnaas δὲ ἐς Λακεδαίμονα ὁ ᾿Αριστόδημος ὄνειδος
9 a 9 , 7 Ν / > 7 ¥ ε
τε εἶχε καὶ ἀατιμίην. πάσχων δε τοιάδε ἠτίμωτο " οὔτε οἱ
“A > a wv 4 ¥ ’ V /
πῦρ οὐδεὶς evave Σπαρτιητεων οὔτε διελέγετο, ὄνειδός τε
9 / 3 ἤ ’ 3 . 2
εἶχε ὁτρέσας Ἀριστόδημος καλεόμενος. ἀλλ’ ὁ μὲν ἐν
a 3 a 7 > 4 a » ? a f ¢
τῇ ἐν Πλαταιῇσι μάχῃ ἀνέλαβε πᾶσαν τὴν ἐπενειχθεῖσαν ot
> 7 ,” N . oy» 3 , ¥ ἢ
αἰτίην. Λέγεται δε καὶ ἀλλον ἀποπεμῴθεντα ἀγγέλον ἐς
, ray , ’ 4 Aa ΝΥ
Θεσσαλίην τῶν τριηκοσίων τούτων περιγενέσθαι, τῷ οὔνομα
= ἢ , . a 2 ’ eo» 7
εἶναι Παντίτην " νοστήσαντα δε τοῦτον ἐς Σπαρτην, ὡς ἦτί-
3 ΄
μωτο, ἀπαγξασθαι.
Ν a a e , 3 4
ὅδ. Οἱ Se Θηβαῖοι, τῶν ὁ Δεοντιάδης ἐστρατήγεε,
NX Ν “ € ’ 3 >] ’ e 3 3
Tews μὲν peta τῶν Ελληνὼν ἐόντες ἐμάχοντο vr ἀναγ-
7 > , “ Ν Ul ’ e δὲ δ
καίης ἐχόμενοι πρὸς τὴν βασιλέος στρατιὴν" ws ὃε εἰδον
᾽ὔ a ’ ’ Ν , ed
κατυπέρτερα τῶν Περσέων γινόμενα Ta πρήγματα, οὕτω
Χ ζω ‘ , ¢ 4 3 ’ 32" Ν
δὴ τῶν σὺν Λεωνίδη Ελληνων ἐπευγομένων emt tov κο-
“ 3 J 7 a ᾽ a \
Awvov, ἀποσχισθέντες τούτων, χείρας TE προέτεινον καί
γ΄. a 7 / s > ΄
ἤισαν ἦσσον τῶν βαρβάρων, λέγοντες τὸν ἀληθέστατον
a 7 ς Ν ‘ A δ 35 3 :
τῶν λόγων, ὡς καὶ μηδιζουσι καὶ γὴν TE καὶ ὕδωρ ἐν πρω-
¥ 4, e@ XN @er 23 ! > » 9 Θ
τοισι ἔδοσαν βασιλέϊ, ὑπὸ δὲ ἀναγκαίης ἐχόμενοι ἐς Θερμο-
͵ 9 7 . 2 , 4 a ’ a
πύλας ATLKOLATO, καὶ AVALTLOL ELEY τοῦ TPWYATOS TOU γεγο"
ΔΛ. e/ a , , 9
νότος βασιλεῖ. ὥστε ταῦτα λέγοντες περιεγίνοντο" εἶχον
Ν Ὡ ‘ “ , ’ὔ’ ὔ 3
yap καὶ Θεσσαλους τῶν λόγων τούτων μαρτυρᾶς. FG. ov
’ / ,ὔ > ς ‘ 9 \ +. €
μέντοι τά γε πώντα εὐτύχησαν" ὡς yap avTous ἔλαβον οἱ

VIL, 238.] After the Battle. 155

yd 3 , Ἁ 4 . 93 4 ,
βάρβαροι ελθοντας, τους μὲν τινας καὶ ἀπέκτειναν προσιον-
ἃ Ν a > A 4 4 ¥
Tas, τους δὲ πλεῦνας αντῶν, κελεύσαντος Ξέρξεω, ἐστιζον
4 PO 3 ’ > NN A a
στίγματα βασιληΐα, upEupevot ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ Acov-
, A Ν a 9 4 ’ ’ὔ ϑ ’
τίάδεω, τοῦ τὸν παΐδα Ἐυρύμαχον χρόνῳ μετέπειτεν εφο-
4 y 4 3 A ,
vevoav ἤλαταιίέες, στρατηγήσαντα ἀνδρῶν Θηβαίων τε-
/ / Ν »” Ν ΄
τρακοσίων, καὶ σχόντα τὸ ἄστυ τὸ Πλαταιέων.
‘ ω δ rd ad a 4
57. Οἱ μὲν dn wept Θερμοπύλας EdAnves οὕτω ἠγωνί-
4 “ 7 tf 3 [2 9 ’
σαντο" Ἐξέρξης δὲ καλέσας Δημάρητον εἰρωτα ἀρξάμενος
3 7 ’ > NS ῳ δ , , \ a
ἐνθένδε" Δημάρητε, ἀνὴρ els ἀγαθὰς. τεκμαίρομαι δὲ τῇ
3 ’ [4 Ν 4 σ 3 4 af ΄“ ’
ἀληθείη" ὅσα yap εἶπας, ἅπαντα ἀπέβη οὕτω. νῦν δὲ
9 Ἁ ’ ’ 93 « Ν 4 Ἁ 4
μοι εἰπε, KOTOL τινὲς εἰσι Ob λοίποι Δακεδαιμοόνιοι, καὶ τού-
A A , 4 ‘ [2 e 2
TOV QKOTOL τοιοῦτοι τὰ πολέμια, εἴτε καὶ ἅπαντες. ὁ ὃ
Φ A Ἁ 3 ’
εἶπε" 20 βασιλεῦ. πλῆθος μὲν πάντων τῶν Δακεδαιμονίων
“ N 4 / « Ν 3 4. A 9 ,
πολλὸν, καὶ πόλιες πολλαὲ" τὸ δὲ εθέλεις ἐκμαθεῖν, εἰδη-
¥ 9 a , ’ ΝΜ» 9 A 9
σεις. ἔστι ev τῇ Λακεδαίμονι Σπάρτη, πόλις ἀνδρῶν oxta-
/ , ’ Ν φ , > NX @ A a
κισχιλίων μάλιστα KN, καὶ οὗτοι TUaYTES εἰσὶ ομοῖοι τοῖσι
i 7 , oo δ ¥ ,
ἐνθάδε μαχεσαμένοισι" οἱ γε μὲν ἄλλοι Δακεδαιμόνιοι
vd \ 3 ε a 3 “ 4 Ἁ a ’
τούτοισι μὲν οὐκ ὁμοῖοι. ἀγαθοὶ δέ. εἶπε πρὸς ταῦτα Ξέρξης"
7 ’ ͵ 3 ’ a 3 ray 7
Δημάρητε, τεῳ τρόπῳ απονητότατα τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων
? 4 ¥ 3 ρ ‘ Ν 5 4 2. A N
ἐπικρατήσομεν ; εθι eEnyeo. σὺν yup ἔχεις αὐτῶν τὰς δι-
4 A + Φ Ν ’
εξοδους τῶν βουλευμάτων, ota βασελευς γένομενος. . . so.
a ¥ 4 I. “ “ a
ὅδ. Ταῦτα eras Ἐερξης διεξηϊε διὰ τῶν νεκρῶν " καὶ Aew--
, 2 ‘ ov ΄ 9 4 4
νίδεω, ἀκηκοὼς ὅτι βασιλεύς τε ἦν καὶ στρατηγὸς Aaxe
,ὕ 93 2 3 ,ὕ ἐν nN 2 Ἂ
δαιμονίων, ἐκέλευσε ἀποταμόντας τὴν κεφαλὴν avactaupo-
ar » n \ . # ὔ 3
σαι. δῆλα μοι πολλοῖσι μεν καὶ ἄλλοισι τεκμηρίοϊαι, ἐν
Ν 4 a > φΦ , ζῇ \ ic
de καὶ τῷδε οὐκ ἥκιστα γέγονε, ὅτι βασιλεὺς Ἐέρξης πάν-
‘ , δ a 2 ’ ’ / >.
Tov δὴ μάλιστα ἀνδρῶν ἐθυμωθη Cwovte Λεωνίδῃ ". ov γὰρ,
Ψ 3 “ “ “ ἤ 3 Α. ; a
ἂν κοτε ἐς TOV νεκρὸν ταῦτα παρενόμῆσε, ἐπεὶ τιμᾶν μά-.
/ a x Ν 4 3 ’ , ¥
λιστα νομίζουσι τῶν eyw οἶδα ἀνθρώπων Πέρσαι ἄνδρας.
3 Ν \ ’ e Ν Ν a 9 , a 3
ἄἀγαθους τὰ πολέμια. οἱ μὲν On ταῦτα ἐποίευν, TOLOL ἔπει
’ 4
TETAKTO ποίεειν.

156 The Fleet at Avion: [HERop.

IV. ARTEMISIUM.—MARCH OF XERXES TO ATHENS.—
SALAMIS. — RETREAT OF XERXES TO ASIA.

ξ ν. e¢ ὔ 9 a Q \ ,
1. Οἱ δε ᾿Ελληνων es τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν taybevtes
2 or 3 . N / , ς N \ oo”
ἦσαν οἷδε" Αθηναίοι μὲν νέας παρεχόμενοι ἐπταὰ καὶ εἴκοσι
x e ’ ¢ NN Ν 3 “A ΝἬ ’ ’
καὶ ἕκατον" ὕπο δὲ ἀρετῆς τε καὶ προθυμίης Πλαταιέες,
ν a a 37 ’ “ > 4
UTELPOL τῆς ναυτικῆς EOVTES, συνεπλήρουν τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι
4 , 7 Ν ’᾽ ,
τὰς νέας" Κορίνθιοι δὲ τεσσεράκοντα νέας παρείχοντο,
Ἁ ¥ ἈΝ a 9 ’ Υ̓͂ 3
Μεγαρεες δε εἰκοσι. καὶ Χαλκιδέες ἐπλήρουν εἰκοσι, 4θη-
, 4 Ν ’ 2 a“ Ἁ 9 /
ναίων oft παρεχόντων τὰς νέας " Διγινῆταε Se οκτωκαι-
’ ‘ 7 ’ ‘ ’ 3
δεκα, Σικυώνιοι δὲ δυωδεκα, Δακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ δεκα, ᾿Ἐπι-
7 \ 3 “ 3 4 Ἁ e Ν ’ 4
δαύριοι δὲ oxtw, Epetpices δὲ ἑπτὰ, Τροιζήνιοι δὲ πέντε,
v ΄ δὲ δύ Ν a 4 ὔ x ’
Στυρέες Oe δύο, καὶ Ketou δύο τε νέας καὶ πεντηκοντέρους
n 74 Ν 4 e 3 ΄, 3 ,
δύο. Aoxpot δὲ σφι οἱ Οπούντιοε ἐπεβοήθεον πεντηκον-
, ¥ e / > ν 9 @ €
τέρους ἔχοντες ἑπτὰ. 2 ἦσαν μὲν ὧν OUTOL οἱ στρατευο-
299 , ¥ , . oe ~ μ᾿
μενοι ἐπ Αἀρτεμίσιον, εἰρηται δὲ μοι καὶ ὡς τὸ πλῆθος
cf a a , 3 Ν Ν a
ἕκαστοι τῶν νεῶν παρείχοντο. ἀριθμὸς δὲ τῶν συλλεχθει-
( a “ 93 7 9 s a 4
σέων νεῶν ἐπ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ἣν, παρεξ τῶν πεντηκοντέρων,
7 λε ’ Α ’ “ Ἁ Ν “
μία καὶ εβδομήκοντα καὶ διηκόσιαι. τὸν δὲ στρατηγὸν τὸν
Ν 4 ’ " κι ’
TO μέγιστον KpaTos ἔχοντα παρείχοντο Σπαρτιῆται, Evpv-
> 7 a > , ς \ a 9 ΕΣ ΕἾ
βιάδεα τὸν Ἐυρυκλείδεω. οἱ yap σύμμαχοι οὐκ efacay, ἣν
δα δ ’ e 4 > 4 4 e (
μὴ ὁ Aaxwv ἡγεμονεύη, Αθηναίοισι ἕψεσθαι ηἡγεομενοισι,
? Ν Ν ’ ¥ ΄ > 4
αλλὰ λύσειν TO μέλλον ἔσεσθαι στράτευμα. B. ἐγένετο
‘ > 9 LA ἢ . 4 \ 9 , ,
yup κατ ἀρχὰς λογος, πρὶν ἢ καὶ ες Σικελίην πέμπειν
rN / e “ ἈΝ 9 ’ Ν ¥ 3
ἐπὶ συμμαχίην, ὡς τὸ ναυτικὸν Αθηναίοισι χρεῶν εἴη ἐπι-
/ 9 , \ a ᾿ 4 a) a
τράπειν. avtTiBavtwv δὲ τῶν συμμάχων, εἶκον ob AOnvaior,
‘ 4 “ Ν ἐ / N ’ ?
μέγα πεποιημένοι περιεῖναι THY λλαδα, καὶ γνόντες, εἰ
4 Ν A e / e 3 3 ee SN
στασιάσουσι περί τῆς ἡγεμονίης, ὡς ἀπόλέεται ἡ Ελλας,
5 A a / ‘ “ ’ e ’
ἐρθὰ νοεῦντες" στάσις yap ἐμῴφυλος πολέμου ομοφρονεον-
7 4 7 3 @ , 4 , 3 ͵
τος τοσούτῳ κακίον ἐστι, ὅσῳ πόλεμος εἰρηνης. ἐπίστα-
9 > N a b 9 ’ 9 3 4 ᾽
μενον ὧν αὑτὸ τοῦτο, οὐκ ἀντέτεινον, αλλ, εἰκον μέχρι

VOL, 5.) Themistocles prevents a Retreat. 157

@ ’ 96 > a e 4 e “ \ 3 lA
ὅσου κάρτα ἐδέοντο αὐτῶν, ws διεδεξαν. ὡς yap δη ὡσᾶ-
Ν ΙΝ a 9 ͵7 Υ͂ Ν x aA 3
μενοι tov Πέρσεα, περὶ τῆς ἐκείνου ἤδη τὸν αγῶνα ETO
a 4 \ , rd oe ’ 3 4
evvto, πρόφασιν τὴν ]αυσανίεω ὕβριν προΐσχομενοι, ἄπει"
ἈΝ 6 / Ν 7 42 Ν a
Aovro τὴν ἡγεμονίην τους Aaxedaipovovs. adda ταῦτα
\ τ > 4
μὲν ὕστερον ἐγένετο.
XN φ e . 9 9 9 ’ e > 9
4. Tore δε οὗτοι ot καὶ ew Αρτεμίσιον Ελλήνων am-
, e 9 ’ A , 4 , 9
Ko“evol, ὡς εἶδον νέας τε πολλᾶς καταχθείσας ἐς τὰς Ade-
Ν a of 4 3 ον 3 a A ,
τὰς, καὶ στρατιῆς ἅπαντα πλέα, ἐπεὶ αὐτοῖσι Tapa δοξαν
Ν , a , > 4 a e¢ > AN
Ta πρήγματα τῶν BapBupwyv ἀπέβαινε ἢ ws αὐτοὶ κατε-
, ’ Ν 9 ’ὔ’ > 84 fo)
δόκεον, καταρρωδήσαντες δρησμὸν εβουλεύοντο ἀπὸ τοῦ
3 , y¥ 2 “ ’ ὔ / e
Αρτεμισίου ἔσω ἐς τὴν ‘Edduba. γνόντες δὲ σφεας οἱ
? , A In 3 3 4
EvBoees ταῦτα βουλενομένους, ἐδέοντο EvpuBiadew προσ-
τὰ ’ 3 ¥y 7 Ww ᾽ N , \ N
μεῖναι χρόνον ὀλίγον, ἔστ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὶ τέκνα τε καὶ τοὺς
5.» ς ’ e Ν 2 ” ΄ Ν
οἰκετας ὑπεκθέωνται. ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἔπειθον, μεταβαντες τον
3 ’ “ / 4 3 A a
Αθηναίων στρατηγὸν πείθουσι Θεμιστοκλέα ἐπὶ μισθῷ
, ’ > 9 φ , μ a
TPLNKOVTA ταλαντοίσι, ET ᾧ TE καταμείναντες πρὸ τῆς
) , ’ὔ Ν ,ὔ e Ν
EvBoins ποιήσονται τὴν ναυμαχίην. ὅ. ὁ δὲ Θεμιστο-
ὔ λω 3 a φ 4 3 , 4
κλέης τους EXAnvas ἐπισχεῖν ὧδε ποιέει" Ευρυβιαδῃ tov-
“ J “ ’ , ς 9
Tov τῶν χρημάτων μεταδιδοῖ πέντε τάλαντα, ὡς παρ
e a a 7 e ’ ς φ ? 4 9 4
εωυτοῦ δῆθεν διδούς. ὡς δε οἱ οὗτος ἀνεπέπειστο, ---- Αδεί-
Ν ς 3 4 , Ων Aa a
μαντος yap ὁ Lxvtov, Κορινθίων στρατηγὸς, τῶν λοιπῶν
¥ A , ἢ ’ , 5. Ν a?
ἤσπαιρε μοῦνος, φάμενος ἀποπλωσεσθαί τε ἀπὸ τοῦ Αρτε-
/ . 3 ͵ N ‘ a 9 ε
μισιου καὶ ov παραμενέειν, ---- πρὸς δὴ τοῦτον εἶπε ὁ Θεμι-
f > ’ > 4 e ’ 3 ’ 3 4
στοκλέης emopocas* Ou ov ye ἡμέας απολείψεις, ἔπει τοί
ΣΝ , A ’ a ‘ ¥ e , ΄
eyo μέζω δῶρα δωσω ἢ βασιλεὺς ἂν τοι ὁ Μήδων πέμψειε
3 Ἁ ’ a , of 4 “
ἀπολιπόντι TOUS συμμάχους. ταῦτα τε ἅμα ἤγορενε, Kat
4 > SN Ν , Ν ? , , 2 ὔ
πέμπει ἐπὶ τὴν νέα τὴν Αδειμάντου τάλαντα ἀργυρίου
, φ ͵ . 7 ; 3 ,
Tpia. οὗτοι τε δὴ πληγέντες δωροίσι ἀναπεπεισμεένοι
9 ἐν a 3 A 3 , > » e
ἤσαν, καὶ τοῖσι EvBoevou exeyuptoto* αὑτὸς τε ὁ Θεμι-
,ὕ > “ -.- » \ Ν νιν ΕΣ > 9
στοκλέης ἐκέρδηνε, ἐλάνθανε δε Ta λοιπὰ ἔχων" αλλ, ἡπι»
’ὔ 4 ᾽ὔ a ? 3 A
στέατο οἱ μεταλαβόντες τούτων τῶν χρημάτων, EK τῶν
"A0 , 2r6 a > N a χὰ ΄ a , ara
ηνέων ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ χρήματα.

158 The Flect at Artemisium. [Henop.

ed ‘ ’ , δ] a 3 , . 9 ,ὔ
6. Οὕτω dn κατέμειναν τε ἐν τῇ EvBotn καὶ ἐναυμαχη-
> + Ν @ ἢ , N 9 4 9 ΝὟ Ν
σαν. ἐγένετο δὲ ὧδε’ ἐπείτε On ἐς τὰς Αφετας περὶ
, Δ ἢ > 7 ε , ἢ
δείλην πρωΐην γινομένην ἀπίκατο ot βαρβαροι, πυθόμενοι
‘ ‘ 4 4 “ / ᾽ 7
μὲν ἔτι καὶ πρότερον περὶ τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ναυλοχεέειν νέας
ε .. 7 / Ν ΣΧ IAP ’
Ελληνίδας ὀλίγας, τότε δὲ αὐτοὶ ἰδόντες, πρόθυμοι ἦσαν
3 / ¥ e 3 , > “ Ν aA 3
ἐπιχειρέειν, EL KMS EAOLEY αὑτὰς. εκ μὲν On τῆς αντίης
; ’ ΑΥ̓͂ , 3. ἡ A Ψ , a7
προσπλώειν οὔ κω σφι ἐδόκεε, τῶνδε ELVEKEV, μή κως ἰδον-
ec ef 7 3 “ e 4 ’ὔ
τες οἱ EdAnves προσπλωοντας ἐς φυγὴν oppnoeay, φεὺ-
͵ ἢ , ,ὔ \ a 2 ᾿
γοντάς τε εὐφρονη καταλάβοι" καὶ ἔμελλον δῆθεν ἐκφευ-
θ 25 δὲ δὲ / a 9 / Xx / 3 ,
ξεσθαι, ἐδεε δε unde Tuphopor, τῷ ἐκείνων λόγῳ, ExpvyovTa
4 “ ~ 9 td 2 4 a
περιγενέσθαι. Ἴ. προς ταῦτα wy Tube ἐμηχανέοντο" τῶν
a 4 3 ’ / 7 ν
νεῶν ἁπασέων ἀποκρίναντες διηκοσίας, περιέπεμπον ἔξω-
’ e “A Ν 9 ΄ ΟΝ lal ’
θεν Σκιάθου (ὡς ἂν μὴ ὀφθέωσι ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων περι-
’ Ν ’ , Ν Ν Ν
πλωουσαι EvBoav ) κατα τε Καφηρεα καὶ περι Γεραιστον
9 x 97 ed ‘ , e “ 4 3 ’
es τὸν Εὐριπον, ἵνα δη περίλαβοιεν, οἱ μεν ταύτῃ ἀπικόμενοι
S , ϑ a Ν 3 / 4 eas a .
καὶ φρωξαντες αὐτῶν την οπίσω φέρουσαν ὁδὸν, σφεῖς Se
3 ’ 3 ? 4 “a , > ,
ἐπισπόμενοι εἕ EvavTins. ταῦτα βουλευσαμενοι, aTreTrEpTrOV
A a Ν ’ 9 Α 3 3 a » 4
τῶν νεῶν τὰς ταχθείσας. AUTOL οὐκ ἐν νόῳ ἔχοντες TaUTNS
A e / fe [2 3 ᾽’ὔ Jar , a
τῆς ἡμέρης τοῖσι ᾿ Ελλησι ἐπιθήσεσθαι, οὐδὲ πρότερον ἢ
Ν 4 s ¥ 4 “ a a
To σύνθημω σφι ἐμελλε φανήσεσθαι παρὰ τῶν περιπλωον-
e a “ ‘N 7 “ ‘
των, ὡς ἡκόντων. ταῦτας μὲν δὴ περιέπεμπον, τῶν δε
4 a 9 ζω 3 a 3 a 93 tA
λοιπέων νεῶν ev That Αφετήῆσι ἐποιεῦντο ἀριθμον.
3 Ν ’ a a 3 A @ 3 Ν 3 ry
8. Ev δε τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, ev τῷ οὕτοι ἀριθμὸν εποιεῦν-
6 6 a 4
A a 9 x δ] A A 7 ,
TO TOV VEwY,—TY yup ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ τούτῳ Σ᾽ κυλλίης
n id aA 4 3 ᾽ wv ἃ AY b ] a
Σκιωναῖος, δύτης τῶν τότε ἀνθρώπων apiotos, ὃς και Ev τῇ
4 a ‘ “ 4 w “ “ Ww
vaunyin τῇ κατὰ to Πηλιον γενομένῃ πολλῶ μὲν ἔσωσε
a : , A Π ΄ δὲ δ x, 8
τῶν χρημάτων τοῖσι Lleponot, πολλὰ OE καὶ αντος πέ-
/ e ς / 3 ’ Ν Υ̓͂ Ν
ριεβάλετο, ---- οὗτος ὁ Σκυλλίης ἐν νόῳ μεν εἶχε apa Kat
, 3 , 3 Χ e 3 3 3 ,
πρότερον αὐτομολήσειν ἐς tous ἔλληνας, ἀλλ ov yup
ς a e / σ Ν Ν 4 “ 9 σι
οἱ παρέσχε ὡς τότε. ὅτεῳ μὲν δὴ τρόπῳ τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν
» 3 7 ? Ν [ > ¥ 9 3 7
evs ὠπίκετο ἐς Tous λληνας, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι aT peKeEws’

VIL, 10.] The Greeks attack. 159

, x 9 ‘ ἢ ’ 3 9. a 4 “
θωυμάξω Se, εἰ Ta λεγόμενά ἐστι ἀληθέα. λέγεται yap,
Ἁ 3 Ν Λ 3 td 3 »
ὡς ἐξ ᾿Αφετέων Sus ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν, ov πρότερον ave-
“ a > ϑ» 323" . 3 : , / ,
aye πρὶν ἢ ἀπίκετο ἐπὶ τὸ Αρτεμίσιον, σταδίους pa-
, > 9 ? N ’
Mota κῃ τούτους ἐς oydwxovra dia τῆς θαλάσσης Sieker-
, , \, Υ͂ , Υ .
Gav. 9. λέγεται μέν νυν καὶ ἄλλα ψευδέσι ἱκέλα περὶ
a 23 “ ’ “ Ὡ- A ? 4 “ 4
_t0v ἀνδρὸς τούτου, Ta δὲ μετεξέτερα ἀληθεα. περὶ μέντοι
4 ’ 9 4 ὔ ϑ 4 > «8
τοῦτον γνώμη μοι ἀποδεδέεχθω, πλοίῳ μιν ἀπικεσθαι emt
ἢ .. 9 ἡ > > » a
τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον. ὡς δὲ ἀπίκετο, αὐτίκα ἐσήμηνε τοῖσι
a ἢ φ vA AY ‘
στρατηγοῖσι THY τε ναυηγίην ὡς γένοιτο, καὶ TAS περιπεμ-
n ἴω ¥ a ‘ 3 ’ 4
φθείσας τῶν νεῶν περὶ Εὔβοιαν. τοῦτο δε ἀκούσαντες οἱ
σ > “" Jas a ᾽ν»
Ελληνες, λόγον σφίσι αὐτοῖσι ἐδίδοσαν. πολλῶν Se λε-
’ Σ ,; Ν 4 3 ’ 3 ζω 4 ’ ‘
χθέντων, ἐνίκα THY ἡμέρην ἐκείνην αὐτοῦ μείναντάς τε καὶ
> 4 , ’ ’ ’
αὐλισθέντας, μετέπειτεν νύκτα μέσην παρέντας πορεύεσθαι
Α 3 A a ’ “ a Ν
καὶ ἀπαντᾶν τῇσι περιπλωούσῃσι τῶν νεῶν. 10. Mera
Ν a ς 3 ’ . > 4 3 ’ UA
δε τοῦτο, ὡς οὐδείς σφι ἐπέπλωε, δείλην οὀψίην γινομένην
a ef ᾽ > A’ 9 , 2 8 δ
τῆς ἡμέρης φυλάξαντες, avtot ἐπανέπλωον ἔπι τοὺς βαρ-
, > » 3. A 4 /
Bupous, ἀπόπειραν αὐτῶν ποιήσασθαι βουλόμενοι τῆς Te
, Ν a (4 e ἢ 4 Ψ ΑΥ̓͂
μάχης καὶ τοῦ διεκπλόου. ὁρέοντες δὲ σφεας οἵ τε ἄλλοι
A ’ “ e x. 9 [4 “
στρατιῶται οἱ Ἐερξεω καὶ οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐπιπλωώοντας νηυσὶ
J , , ’ 5. a Ν 3
ὀλίγῃσι, πάγχυ σφι μανίην ἐπενείκαντες, ἀνῆγον καὶ αὐτοὶ
Ἂ “4 3 / 4 ’ ’ ’ 3 », 4
τας veas, ἐλπίσαντες σφεας εὐπετέως αἱρήσειν, οἰκότα κἀρ-
3 , ιν 4 A e€ ’ ς ἢ 9, /
Ta ἐλπίσαντες" TAS μὲν YE τῶν Ελληνων ὁρέοντες ὀλίγας
“ Ν ᾿ς-ς vel I fy hk , ΑΥ̓͂
veas, τας δὲ ἑωυτῶν πληθεΐ τε πολλαπλησίας καὶ ἄμεινον
’ , a 3 ra) 3 Ν 3
πλωοῦσας, καταφρονήσαντες TaVTA, ἐκυκλοῦντο αὕτους ES
, a a a 9 ’ 9 y « ψ
μεσον. ὅσοι μὲν νυν τῶν Iwvwy ἤσαν evvoot τοῖσι Ελ-
37 ’ 3 ΄ ᾽ 3 ΄“
λησι, ἀέκοντες τε ἐστρατεύοντο, συμφορὴν τε ἐποιεῦντο
, ’ / 3 Ν +N ,
μεγάλην, OpeovTes περιεχομένους αὐτους, καὶ ἐπιστάμενοι
e InN 9 A 3 , Pd 3 , 3 ,
ὡς οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν απονοστήσει" οὕτω acbevea σφι ἐφαίνετο
4 N A ; , ed S A
εἶναι ta τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων πρηγματα. οσοισι δὲ καὶ ήἠδομε-
9 Ν , d 3 a ¢ 7S ef
γοίσε ἣν TO γινόμενον, ἅμιλλαν ἐποιεῦντο, ὅκως αὐτὸς ἕκα-
a 4.9 Ν «SN a ιν 4 4
oTos πρῶτος vea Artixny ehov δῶρα παρὰ βασίλεος Aap-

160 The Fleet at Artemisium. (Heron.

Π 4 4 > a ’ 9 x NON
wera. ᾿Αθηναίων yap αὐτοῖσι λόγος ἣν πλεῖστος ava τὰ
4
στρατόπεδα.
΄“ ΝΟ e 9 ὔ a x 3 ’
AL. Τοῖσι δε΄ Ελλησι ὡς ἐσήμηνε, πρῶτα μεν ἀντίπρῳ-
“ , ‘4 9 μ 4 A 7
pot τοῖσι βαρβάροισι γενόμενοι ἐς TO μέσον Tas πρύμνας
’ ’ Ν ’ 4 ¥ 3
συνηγαγον " δεύτερα δὲ σημήναντος, ἔργου εἴχοντο, ἐν
3 [4 9 ’ “ Ν ’ 9 “A ,
ολίγῳ περ ἀπολαμῴφθεντες καὶ Kata στόμα. ἐνθαῦτα τριη-
a nd A Ἀ Ν , a
κοντα νέας αἱρεουσι τῶν βαρβάρων, καὶ τὸν Γόργου τοῦ
’ ’ 3 “ ’ “ ’ 4
Σαλαμινίων βασίλεος aderApeov Piraova τὸν Χέρσιος, Aoyt-
3» 9 a 4 ¥ a ve 4
μον covta ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ἄνδρα. πρῶτος δε EAA vav
ὔ a ’ Φ. 93" 9 a
yea τῶν πολεμίων εἷλε ἀνὴρ ᾿Αθηναῖος Λυκομήδης Αἰσ-
,ὕ ee ee he ¥. 4 x 9 a
χραίου, Kat TO aptorniov ἔλαβε οὗτος. τοὺς δ᾽ ἐν τῇ vav-
’ 4 e / 9 ’ Ν 9 δι
μαχίῃ TavTn ετεραλκέως ἀγωνιζομένους νυξ ἐπελθοῦσα
’ ν Ν (6 \ 9 > ἢ
διέλυσε. οἱ μὲν δὴ ᾿Ελληνες ἐπὶ τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ἀπε-
« as ; 9 . 3 δ N ν a/
πλωον, οἱ Se βάρβαροι es tas Aderas, πολλὸν παρα δοξαν
3 ’ 3 ’ a ῆ 3 4 [4
ἀγωνισάμενοι. ἐν ταὕτῃ τῇ ναυμαχίῃ Αντιδωρος Λημνιος
δι a Ν ὔ.,. @ 4 90 ? ’ 3
μοῦνος τῶν σὺυν βασιλεῖ Ελλήνων ἐόντων αὐτομολεέει ἐς
ν ὦ ‘ 3 \ A .ν Υ
tous “Ελληνας, καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι διὰ τοῦτο τὸ ἔργον ἔδοσαν
2 Aa a 3 Ν 3 4 9 ’
αὐτῷ χῶρον ἐν Σαλαμῖνι. 13. ‘Ns δὲ εὐφρόνη ἐγεγόνεε,
4 Ν a of , ἢ > 7 . Φ ¥
ἣν μὲν τῆς ὥρης μέσον θερος, ἐγίνετο Se ὕδωρ τε ἄπλετον
δ ! A ιν Ν κ ΟΣ 8 a
δια πάσης τῆς νυκτὸς, Kat βρονταὶ σκληραί aro τοῦ IIr-
’ Ν Ν 4 ὔ 3 ’ 9 .
λίου" οἱ δὲ νεκροὶ καὶ Ta vaunyia ἐξεφορέοντο ἐς τὰς
ϑ ἈΝ N 4 Ν ’ὔ A a e, ἢ» Ν
Ageras, καὶ περὶ τε Tas πρῴρας τῶν νεῶν εἰλέοντο, καὶ
9 ἣ sy n ¢ € “ σι
ἑτάρασσον τοὺς ταρσοὺς τῶν κωπέων. οἱ δε στρατιῶται
e ’ 2 ΄ a 3 ’ ’ 3 ’ὔ
οἱ ταύτῃ ἀκούοντες ταῦτα ες φόβον κατιστεατο, ἐλπίξοντες
/ 2 , 9 @ \ @ ‘ ἐν “a
πάγχν ἀπολέεσθαι ἐς οἷα κακὰ ἧκον" πρὶν γὰρ ἢ καὶ
3 a ’ ¥v “A a A a A
ἀναπνεῦσαι σφεας ἔκ TE τῆς νανηγίης καὶ τοῦ χειμῶνος TOU
μ \ f. e ἢ / \ 9 ‘
γενομένου κατὰ Πήλιον, ὑπέλαβε ναυμαχίη xaptepn, ἐκ de
a , ¥ , Ν 3 Δ 3
τῆς ναυμαχίης ὄμβρος τε λάβρος, καὶ ῥεύματα toxupa ες
, , 4 ΄
θώλασσαν ὡρμημένα, βρονταί τε σκληραί. 18. καὶ Tov-
Ν , Ν > » a “ 2 a
τοισι μὲν τοιαύτη νυξ ἐγίνετο" τοῖσι δὲ ταχθεῖσι αὐτῶν
,. wv e 9 Sa Α
περιπλωεὶν Εὐβοιαν ἡ αὐτὴ περ ἐοῦσα νυξ πολλὸν Hy ἔτι

VIL, 16.] Wreck of the Pernan Flee. 161

᾽ , , Ψ 3 , ee , 4 »
ἀγριωτέρη, τοσούτῳ ὅσῳ EV πελαγεῖ φερομένοισι ἐπέπιπτε,
\ “ 0. 3 4 wv e “ Ν ’ >
καὶ TO τέλος σφι ἐγένετο ἄχαρι" ws yap δὴ πλωουσι av-
a ᾽ ον φΦ 3 ’ > a Q a
τοῖσι χειμὼν τε καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ ἐπεγίνετο ἐοῦσι κατὰ Ta
a 2 , a 2 . 9 δ. 3
Κοῖλα τῆς Ευβοίης, φερόμενοι τῷ πνεύματι, καὶ οὐκ εἰδό-
a 3 4 3 “ x 4 9 4 A
τες TH ἐφέροντο, ἐξέπιπτον πρὸς Tas πέτρας. ἐποιέετὸ TE
a Q ry ry oS A +) ’ »ο’ἵ᾽ε σὰ a
πᾶν ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅκως ἂν ἐξισωθείη τῷ ᾿Ελληνικῷ τὸ
Περσικὸν, μηδὲ πολλῷ πλέον εἴη. οὗτοι μέν νυν περὶ τὰ
ρ 9 βῆ @ Me μ ρ
a 3 , 4
Kotha τῆς EvBoins διεφθείροντο.
« δ 3 ϑ “- ’ Ψ 3 ΄
14. Οἱ de ἐν Adernot βάρβαροι, ὡς σφι αἀσμεένοισι
eo 2 9 ’ὔ Ἢ , , ?
ἡμέρη ἐπέλαμψε, ἀτρέμας τε εἶχον τὰς νέας, καί σφι arre-
A _* , e tA Η͂ 3 a 4
XpaTo κακῶς πρήσσουσι ἡσυχίην ἄγειν ἐν Tw παρεόντι.
ry . @ 9 ’ ’ a Ν 4
τοῖσι δε Ελλησι ἐπεβωθεον νέες τρεῖς Kal πεντήκοντα
? , e / , > “4 ? , Ν
Αττικαί. αὕταί τε δὴ σφεας ἐπέρρωσαν απίκομεναι, καὶ
σ 9 ’ a a 4 e ’
ἅμα ἀγγελίη ἐλθοῦσα ὡς τῶν βαρβώρων οἱ περιπλώοντες
\ ¥ , ¥ , εν a s
την Εὔβοιαν travres εἴησαν διεφθαρμένοι ὑπο τοῦ γενομέ-
a , δ N > N Φ ’
νου χειμῶνος. φυλαξαντες δὴ τὴν αὐτὴν ὥρην, πλώοντες
> 7 / ’ ν /
ἐπέπεσον νηυσὶ Κιλίσσησι, ταύτας δὲ διαφθείραντες, ὡς
3 4 3 4 3 ’ 3 4 > Q “ 3 ’ὔ
εὐφρόνη ἐγένετο, απέπλωον οπίσω επὶ to Αρτεμίσιον.
15 T yrs Se e 7 ὃ , , ε 7 \
- Tpitn de ἡμέρῃ, δεινὸν te ποιησάμενοι οἱ στρατηγοι
a ’ 4 {72 x, / ’ὔ Ν Ν
τῶν βαρβάρων νέας οὕτω σφι ολίγας λυμαίνεσθαι, καὶ TO
> N 4 4 P > + ww Ν ad
απο Ξέρξεω δειμαίνοντες, OUK ανεμειναν ETL TOUS Ἐλληνας
4 cA 3 Ν ’ x 4 e ,
μάχης ἄρξαι, ἀλλα παρακελευσαμενοι κατα μέσον ἡμέρης
I a a 4 \ oA A > a e 4
ἀνῆγον Tas νέας. συνέπυπτε δὲ ὥστε τῇσι αὐτῇσι ἡμέρησι
Χ ’ 4 /
Tas ναυμαχίας γίνεσθαι ταύτας, καὶ τὰς πεζομαχίας Tas
> / 2 ‘ a eos A δ ,
ἐν Θερμοπύλησι. ἣν de πᾶς ὁ ἀγὼν τοῖσι κατα θάλασσαν
Ny A 3 " Ψ a 3 δ , δ 3
περι τοῦ Evpitov, ὥσπερ τοῖσι ἀμφι Λεωνίδεα τὴν ἐσβο-
a , ς x Ἁ φ’ ad ἃ ,
Anv φυλάσσειν. οἱ μεν δὴ παρεκελεύοντο ὅκως μὴ παρή-
3 \ 4 ‘ / 2 ef Ν
σουσι ἐς τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα τοὺς βαρβάρους, οἱ 5 ὅκως τὸ ‘EA-
a 4
ληνικὸν στράτευμα διαφθείραντες τοῦ πόρου κρατήσουσι.
’, > » ἐσ
16. ὡς δὲ ταξάμενοι οἱ Ἐέρξεω ἐπέπλωον, οἱ ᾿ Ελληνες
> 4 9 . a? / € at ,
ἀτρέμας εἶχον πρὸς τῷ Αρτεμισίῳ. οἱ δὲ βαρβαροι μη-
11

162 The Fleet at Artemisium. [HERop.

a rd a a 3 a e 4
YOELOES ποιήσαντες τῶν νεῶν, ἐκυκλεῦντο ὡς περίλαβοιεν
> “ a, eg ? ΄ ’ δ ,
αὐτούς. ενθεῦτεν of λληνες ἐπανέπλωον τε καὶ συνε-
3 ’ a ’ tA 3 a.
μισγον. ἐν ταυτῃ TH ναυμαχίῃ παραπλησίοι ἀλληλοίσι
> 4 e Q μ« 7 ‘ e a ͵ 4 4
eyevovro. o yap Ἐερξεω στρατὸς ὑπὸ μεγάθεος τε καὶ
’ > N e ”¥ 4 a
πλήθεος αὐτὸς ὑπ᾽ ἐωντοῦ ἔπιπτε, ταρασσομένων τε τῶν
a ’ b 4 4 4
νεῶν καὶ περιπιπτουσέων περὶ ἀλλήλας" ὅμως μέντοι
ρ ρ μω
3 A δ ϑ “ “ A 3 rn eon
ἀντεῖχε καὶ οὐκ εἶκε" δεινὸν yap χρῆμα ἐποιεῦντο ὑπὸ
fa 9 ’ 3 Ay 7 ᾿ ᾿ A x. a
νεῶν ὀλίγων es φυγὴν τράπεσθαι. πολλαὶ μὲν dn τῶν
ε ’ ’ ’ \ Ν Mv ΄“
Ελλήνων νέες διεφθείροντο, πολλοὶ δὲ ἄνδρες, πολλῴ δ᾽
»¥ a ’ ra , N ΥΩ ν
ἔτι πλεῦνες νέες τε τῶν βαρβάρων καὶ ἄνδρες. οὕτω de
3 4 ’ Q ¢ 4
ἀγωνιζόμενοι διέστησαν χωρὶς ἑκάτεροι.
a 3 “ ’ aN
17. Παρῆν δὲ ὁ ἐκ Τρηχῖνος κατάσκοπος ---- ἦν μὲν
AQ > 99 4 , 7 4 3 Ν
-yap ἐπ Ἀρτεμισίῳ κατασκοπος Πολύας, γένος Αντικυρευς,
a / “ 4 n a e “ 3
τῷ προσετέτακτο, καὶ εἶχε πλοῖον κατῆρες ἑτοῖμον, εἰ πα-
’ e Ν Ν ’, > 7
λήσειε ὁ ναυτικὸς στρατὸς, σημαίνειν τοῖσι ἐν Θερμοπύ-
2a ἃ / 49 3» ΄ ε ,᾿ »
λῃσι ἐοῦσι" ὡς δ᾽ αὕτως ἦν ᾿Αβρώνιχος ὁ Λυσικλέος ᾿Αθη-
a \ / ς ° a > 99 , a A
vaios καὶ παρὰ Λεωνίδῃ ἑτοῖμος τοῖσι er Αρτεμισίῳ εοῦσι
3 Λ ’ ¥” ’ , N
ἀγγέλλειν τριηκοντερῷ, ἣν TL καταλαμβάνῃ ῬεΩ ΤΕΡΟΝ TOV
4 φ > / / ’ a
πεζόν " --- οὗτος ὧν ὁ ᾿Αβρωνιχος ἀπικόμενος σφι ἐσήμαινε
’ “ “ “ 3 A ¢ ‘
Ta γεγονότα περὶ Aewvidea καὶ τὸν στρατὸν αὑτοῦ. οἱ δε
3 ’ὔ’ A 3 4 3 3 A 3 a Ν 3
ὡς ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα, οὐκέτι ἐς ἀναβολᾶς ἐποιεῦντο τὴν ἀπο-
4 3 ’ Ἁ e oa 3 ’ ’
χώρησιν, ἐκομίξοντο δὲ ὡς ἕκαστοι ἐτάχθησαν, Κορίνθιοι
a x 9 n 3 ’ Ν 4 ‘
πρῶτοι, ὕστατοι δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. 18. ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ νέας τὰς
¥ ’ὔ’ 3 [4 ’᾽ 3 ΄
ἄριστα πλωούσας ἐπιλεξάμενος Θεμιστοκλέης ἐπορεύετο
\ 4 ef 2 / 3 a / ’
περὶ τὰ πότιμα ὕδατα, ἐντάμνων ἐν τοῖσι λίθοισε γραμ-
\ * » / ae , e », >. ON
ματα, ta Iwves ἐπέλθοντες τῇ ὑστεραίῃ ἡμέρῃ emt τὸ
9 , 3 / δ ᾿ , , ¥
Ἀρτεμίσιον ἐπεέλεξαντο. τὰ δὲ γράμματα rade ἐλεγε"
ΨΥ ” > ’ a, > A ‘ 4 ’
Ανδρες ᾿ἴωνες, οὐ ποιέετε δικαια ert Tous πατερᾶς σρατευο-
’ 3 x 4
μενοι καὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα καταδουλούμενοι. ἀλλὰ μάλιστα

“ “ ¢ 4 4 32 Ν @e “A 3 a Ν ἈΝ ‘
μὲν πρὸς ἡμέων γίνεσθε" εἰ Se ὑμῖν ἐστι τοῦτο μὴ δυνατὸν
a e a Ν ΝΜ “ a 9 a 4, ec a ef
ποιῆσαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ ETL καὶ νῦν ἐκ TOU μέσου ἡμῖν Elcobe

VIL, 34.] Ineursion into Phocis. 163

N 3 A ον a a 4 a 3 A eC A a
καὶ αὐτοὶ, καὶ τῶν Καρῶν δέεσθε τὰ αὐτὰ ὑμῖν ποιεειν"
3 N , 4 ee; / 3 863 98 4
εἰ δὲ μηδέτερον τούτων οἷον τε γίνεσθαι, αλλ UT avayKains
4 , A 4 > Ss ¢ a N 2 a
peCovos κατέζευχθε ἢ wore ἀπίστασθαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐν τῷ

’ > 4 ’ σ΄
ἔργῳ, ἐπεὰν συμμίσγωμεν, ἐθελοκακέετε, μεμνημένοι ὅτι
? ’ δ ᾽ a εν N N
aT’ ἡμέων γεγόνατε, καὶ ὅτι ἀρχῆθεν ἡ ἔχθρη πρὸς τὸν

/ > 9 ὁ ἢ ς a 4 4 Ν a
βάρβαρον ar ὕμέων ἡμῖν γέγονε. Θεμιστοκλέης δὲ ταῦτα
¥ ’ 3 ,. 9 3 92 4 , ad A 4
ἔγραψε, δοκέειν ἐμοὶ, eT ἀμφότερα νοέων, wa ἢ λαθόντα
ἣν , ow FO Χ ’ a ον od
Ta γράμματα βασίλεα Iwvas ποιήσῃ μεταβαλεῖν και yeve-
N € a aA 2 , 3 . N a ‘
σθαι πρὸς ἑωυτῶν, ἢ ἐπείτε aveveryOn καὶ διαβληθῇ προς
’ 4 , AY ¥ N A 4
Ἐερξεα, ἀπίστους ποιήσῃ τοὺς Iwvas καὶ τῶν ναυμαχιέων
5 Ἀ 9 4
αὑτοὺς ὡποσχη. . . .
Ν a ’ 9 “ , > ἢ
19. ᾽Εκ μὲν δὴ τῆς Τρηχινίης ἐς τὴν Δωρίδα ἐσέβαλον
e ’ A Ν ’ ’᾽ “ a
[οἱ βάρβαροι]. τῆς yap Δωρίδος χώρης ποδεὼν στεινὸς
, , € , , , >
ταύτῃ κατατείνει, WS TPLNKOVTA σταδίων μαλιστά KN εὖρος,
Ν A A “ a / ’
κείμενος μεταξυ τῆς τε Μηλίδος καὶ τῆς Φωκίδος ywpns,
Ψ 4 N N / ς as , ef > AN ,
| περ ἣν τὸ παλαιὸν Apvorris: ἡ de χωρη αὕτη ἐστὶ μητρό-
“ a > , ’ 9 ‘
πολις Δωριέων τῶν ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ. ταύτην ὧν τὴν
A 9 3 + 3 é e ’ 3
Δωρίδα γῆν οὐκ ἐσίναντο ἐσβαλόντες οἱ βάρβαροι" ἐμήδι-
’ > b “ x 9
Cov τε γὰρ καὶ οὐκ ἐδόκεε Θεσσαλοῖσι. 20. ‘As δὲ ex τῆς
7] 3 “ 32 ὔ 3 Ν N Α tA
Δωρίδος es τὴν Φωκίδα ἐσέβαλον, αὐτοὺς μὲν τους Φωκέας
3 a XN \ a J 3 N 4 n
οὐκ αἱρέουσι" οἱ μὲν yap τῶν Φωκέων ἐς τὰ ἄκρα τοῦ
ar? ¥ δ . 7 , Ψ
Παρνησσοῦ ἀνεβησαν (ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἐπιτηδέη δέξασθαι ὅμιλον
A na ¢ Ν Ν “ , 4 > 3
tov Παρνησσοῦ ἡ κορυφη, κατα Newva πόλιν κειμενὴ ἐπ
[2 A a 4 > A 9 Ν Ν 3 ’ Ν
εωυτῆς " Τιθορεα οὔνομα αὐτῇ, ἐς τὴν δὴ αἀνηνείκαντο καὶ
ϑ Q > 9 ε Ν [ι] » “a 3 Ν 3 ,
αὐτοί ἀνεβησαν)" οἱ δε πλεῦνες αὐτῶν es τοὺς Ooras
N ϑ ’ ? ΗΑ Λ Ν ον ral
Aoxpous εξεκομίσαντο, es Αμφισσαν πόλιν τὴν ὕπερ τοῦ
“ 7 9 4 Ν [4 Ν 4
Κρισαίου πεδίου οἰκεομένην. οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι τὴν χώρην
a > » Ν / Ν Ν [τά Φ
πᾶσαν ἐπέδραμον τὴν Φωκίδα" Θεσσαλοὶ yap οὕτω ἦγον
Ν , e » N 3 4 , > f “
Tov στρατὸν" ὁκόσα δὲ ἐπέσχον, πάντα εἐπεῴλεγον καὶ
» 3 Ν Λ 3 ’ δὰ 3 Ν e ,
ἔκειρον, καὶ ES τὰς πόλις ἐνίέντες πῦρ καὶ ES τὰ Lpa.
, Ν e / > /
24. Παραποταμίους δὲ παραμειβομενοι οἱ βάρβαροι απο

164 Advance of Xerxes. (Heron.

9 3 3 ~ . ’ ε
xovto ἐς Πανοπέας. ενθεῦτεν δε ἤδη διακρινομένη ἡ στρα-
N >a 9 NY Ny a ‘

Tin αὐτῶν ἐσχίζετο. τὸ μὲν πλεῖστον καὶ δυνατώτατον
A a ad 3 ~ pul ’ > 23} A 6 ὔ
τοῦ στρατοῦ ἅμα αὐτῷ Ἐερξη πορενομενον ἐπ nvas

> #7 » Ν ? ry ον 3 4
eceBare es Bowrtous, es γῆν τὴν Ορχομενίων. Βοιω-
δι Ν “A “ “a > 4, Ν Ν ὔ > «A
τῶν δὲ πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος ἐμήδιζε, ras δὲ πόλις αὐτῶν ἄνδρες
, ” \ 9 ,
Μακεδόνες διατεταγμένοι ἔσωζον, ὑπὸ ᾿Αλεξάνδρου ἀπο-
4 Γ “ a 4 a 4
πεμῴθεντες. ἔσωζον Se τῇδε, βουλόμενοι δῆλον ποιέειν
| = AA a Ν Ν s @ N
Ἐερξη ὅτι τὰ ἥηδων Bowrot φρονέοιεν. 22. Οὗτοι μεν
“ n ὔ a 3 ’ Ν. ‘ J a
δὴ τῶν βαρβάρων ταύτῃ ἐτράποντο, ἄλλοι δὲ αὐτῶν ἡγε-
’ὔ Α ¢ 4 > Ν “ en x > ad 3
μονας ἔχοντες ὠρμεέεατο emt τὸ ἱρὸν τὸ ev Δελφοῖσι, εν
a ον “ > ¢ od “ @ 93 ’
δεξιῇ τὸν Παρνησσὸν ἀπέργοντες. ὅσα δὲ καὶ οὗτοι ἐπέ-
a 4 , 3 ’ Ν \ a
σχον τῆς Φωκίδος, πάντα ἐσιναμωρεον " καὶ yap τῶν Πανο-
, Ν , 3 ἢ ‘ / Ν 3 ω
πέεων τὴν TokW ἐνεπρῆσαν καὶ Aavrtwv καὶ Αιολιδεων.
ἐπορεύ δὲ ταύτη a θέ ἧς ἄλλ
ἐπορεύοντο δὲ ταύτῃ ἀποσχισθέντες τῆς ης στρατιῆς
Led a oe ’ “ eon “ 3 A
τῶνδε εἵνεκεν, ὅκως συλήσαντες TO ἱρὸν τὸ ἐν Δελφοῖσι
ὔ.. mt I 3 ¢ 4 4 ’ 3 9 ͵
βασιλεῖ Ἐερξῃη αποδέξαιεν τὰ χρήματα. πάντα ὃ ἠπι-
\ 3 a ¢ an ef ’ 4 A | =o ἢ e >
στατο Ta ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ ὅσα λογου ἣν afta Fepéns, ws eyo
2 wv A . 93 nr > Ἕἁ , ΔΛ. “
πυνθάνομαι, ἄμεινον ἢ τὰ ἐν τοῖσι οἰκίοισι ἔλιπε, πολλῶν
oN ͵ a A 4 a 9 ͵
αἰεὶ λεγόντων, καὶ μάλιστα τὰ Κροίσου τοῦ Αλυάττεω
2 ’ Ἀ ΝΥ ’ A 9
ἀναθήματα. 23. Οἱ δὲ Δελῴφοιὶ πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα ες
a ᾽ , > s 9 , Ν ,
πᾶσαν ἀρρωδίην ἀπίκατο" ἐν δείματι δὲ μεγάλῳ κατε-
n ? 7 ‘ a ς oa a ¥ ’
OTEWTES, ἐμαντεύοντο περὶ τῶν ἱρῶν χρημάτων, εἰτε σφεα
Ν a 4 ¥ 3 4 3 ¥ 7
κατὰ γῆς κατορύξωσι, εἰτε ἐκκομίσωσι ἐς ἄλλην χωρῆν.
e gk , > κ , δ ὅν" ε δ 4 a
ὁ δε θεὸς σφεας οὐκ €a Kiveetv, has αὑτὸς ἱκανὸς εἶναι τῶν
ς nw a ΝΥ ‘N A 3 ’ 2
εωυτοῦ προκατῆσθαι. Δελφοὶ δε ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες σφέων
x A 4 3 ’ὔ a U Ν wn ’
αὐτῶν πέρι ἐφροντιζον. τέκνα μὲν νυν καὶ γυναίκας πέρην
3 Ν 3 4 ’ 3 ἴω) Ν e Ν ζω > ,
ἐς τὴν Αχαιίην διέπεμψαν, αὐτῶν δε οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι ave-
3 a A Ν A x. 9 Ν ’
βησαν es τοῦ Παρνησσοῦ ras κορυφας καὶ ἐς το Κωρύκιον
4 9 ’ ε ΙΝ Ν ’ e
ἄντρον ἀνηνείκαντο, ot δε es Αμφισσαν τὴν Λοκρίδα ὑπεξ-
ie , ν 4 φ \ ωλ nN λ δ
ἦλθον. πάντες δὲ ὧν οἵ Δελφοι ἐξελιπον τὴν πόλιν, πλην
9 “- \ a ¢ 3 Ν \ 3 a
ἑξήκοντα ἀνδρῶν καὶ τοῦ προφηήτεω. 34. Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀγχοῦ

VIL, 39.] Prodigies at Delpla. 165

9 ε ’ ’ , . 93 , x en 9
te ἦσαν ot βαρβαροι ἐπιόντες Kat ἀπώρεον τὸ tpov, ἐν
΄ e ’ a mM” 9 2»9 A , ea εν a
τούτῳ ὁ προφήτης, τῷ οὔνομα ἣν ᾿Ακηρατος, ὁρᾷ πρὸ τοῦ
a φΦ ¥” 3 , 3
νηοῦ ὅπλα προκείμενα ἔσωθεν ἐκ τοῦ μεγάρου ἐξενηνειγ-
’ ean a 3 a 4 4 b 4 3 ,ὔ
μένα ipa, τῶν οὐκ ὅσιον HY ἅπτεσθαι ἀνθρώπων ουδενί.
{ ‘ ‘2... a n A ’ “ ’

ὁ μὲν δὴ nie Δελφῶν τοῖσι παρεοῦσι σημανέων TO τέρας "
e Ν ’ὔ’ 9 Ἧ 3 4 > tA \ ἈΝ en
οἱ de βάρβαροι ἐπειδὴ ἐγίνοντο ἐπευγόμενοι κατὰ TO ἱρὸν

A Lo? , 2 / / , ¥ ,
τῆς Προνηΐης A@nvains, ἐπιγίνεταί σφι τέρεα ert peCova
a 4 fal Ν a A
τοῦ πρὶν γενομένου Tépeos. θῶυμα μὲν γὰρ καὶ τοῦτο
t > SS Ψ 2”, 2.» a ” ,
κάρτα ἐστι, ὅπλα ἀρηϊα αὐτοματα φανῆναι ἔξω προκείμενα
a N ἈΝ “ 3 ’ ’ 3 td
tov νηοῦ" ta δὲ δὴ ἐπὶ τούτῳ δεύτερα emiyevoueva καὶ
Q , 4 4 ¥ ’ Λ »
διὰ πάντων φασμάτων ἄξια θωυμάσαι μάλιστα. 25. επεὶ
\ ν 4 9 , e , . NeN a
yap δὴ ἦσαν ἐπιόντες οἱ βάρβαροι κατα το tpov τῆς II po-
“ 3 ͵ 3 ΄ ᾽ ‘ α 2
vnins AOnvains, ἐν τούτῳ ἐκ μὲν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κεραυνοὶ
2 aA 9 4 3 “ Ν 3 ad
αυὐτοῖσι ἐνέπιπτον, ἀπὸ Se tov Παρνησσοῦ απορραγεῖσαι
δύ N39, 2 a ’ 3 3 ‘ ιν ,
vo Kopupat ἐφέροντο πολλῳ πατάγῳ ες αὑτοὺς καὶ κατέ-
4 3 Ν na ε a a A
λαβον συχνούς σφεων, ex δε τοῦ ipod τῆς I povnins Bon
\ 3 “ > 7 4 ‘ ? ,
τε καὶ ἀλαλαγμὸς eyivero. Συμμιγέντων Se τούτων πάν-
’ a a, 3 [4 + Ν
των, φοβος τοῖσι βαρβάροισι ἐνεπεπτωκεε. μαθόντες δε
οἱ 4 x 4 ’ 7 3 B ’ 3 ,
t Aerpoe φεύγοντας adheas, emixataBuvtes ἀπέκτειναν
a , I a e Ν é InN n »¥
πλῆθος τι αὐτῶν. οἱ de περιεόντες LOV Βοιωτῶν edevyov.
Υ ee , φ a , ς > Ν
ἔλεγον δὲ οἱ ἀπονοστήσαντες οὗτοι τῶν βαρβάρων, ὡς ἐγὼ
tA 8 N ’ ᾿ ” Ψ Ὁ 7
πυνθάνομαι, ὡς πρὸς τούτοισι καὶ ἄλλα ὡρεον θεια" δύο
Ν e / 4 A Ν 3 4 ’ ¥
yap ὄὅπλίτας, μέξονας ἢ Kata ἀνθρώπων φύσιν [ἔχοντας],
vg , , Ν “4 ’ Ν
ἕπεσθαι σῴφι κτείνοντας καὶ διώκοντας. 26. τούτους dé
Ν δ , > / ft 9 ΄
tous δυο Δελφοὶ λέγουσι ἐπιχωρίους ἥρωας εἶναι, Φύλα-
Ν 3 »"ὝἭ 4 , > N “ Ν
κῶν τε καὶ Αὑτόνοον, τῶν τὰ τεμένεω ἐστι περὶ τὸ ἱρὸν,
’ “ > 32. Af “ east ’ ae “ A
Φυλάκου μὲν Tap αὑτὴν τὴν ὁδὸν κατύπερθε τοῦ ἱροῦ τῆς
oA ? ’ Ν Λ a 4 Ν A
IIpovnins, Αὐτονόου δὲ πέλας τῆς Κασταλίης ὑπὸ τῇ
‘Yaptrein κορυφῇ. οἱ δὲ πεσόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ Πα σοῦ
μπείῃ κορυφῇ. τες a ῦ pune
λίθ » .,Σ» e 4 9 , 3 A 4 oan a I
ios Ett καὶ ἐς ἡμέας ἧσαν cool, ἐν τῷ τεμένεϊ τῆς IIpo-
« 3 , , 3 . > 2 5 \ a
ynins A@Onvains κείμενοι, es τὸ eveoxmpayv διὰ τῶν Bap-

166 Advance of Xerxes. (Heron.

tA S 4 sf a 3 A oe , 8
βάρων φερόμενοι. τούτων μὲν νυν τῶν ἀνδρῶν αὕτη ἀπὸ
nan ee “A 3 “ ’ὔ
Tov bpov «παλλαγὴ γίνεται.
, ¢@ 4 “ “ , Af ~ 3
27. Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ελλήνων ναυτικὸς στρατὸς ἀπὸ τοῦ Αρτεμι-
7 3 ’ ’ 2 a ιν
σίου, Αθηναίων δεηθέντων, ἐς Σαλαμῖνα κατίσχει τὰς
7 a Ν 4 4 a A a x
νέας. τῶνδε de ewvexev προσεδεηθησαν αὐτῶν σχεῖν πρὸς
a 3 a of > ON Οὔ Q σι
Σαλαμῖνα Αθηναῖοι, wa avtot παιδας τε καὶ γυναῖκας
ς 7 3 mn ? A “ Ν ἈΝ ’
ὑπεξαγάγωνται ἐκ τῆς Αττικῆς, πρὸς Se καὶ βουλεύσωνται
Ν ’ , [ω] ¥ > AN ‘ ἴω
τὸ ποιητέον αὑτοῖσι ἔσται. ἐπὶ Yap τοῖσι κατήκουσι πρήγ-
“ wv , e 3 4
μασι βουλὴν ἐμελλον ποιήσεσθαι, ws ἐψευσμένοι γνώμης.
7 SY e 4 t a
δοκέοντες γὰρ εὑρήσειν Πελοποννησίους πανδημεὶ ev τῇ
‘ 4 e 4 Ν ὔ’ a ἈΝ e
Βοιωτίῃ ὑποκατημένους tov βάρβαρον, τῶν μὲν εὗρον
Jar nw e - 3 ΄ Ν 3 Ν 3 Α ΄
οὐδὲν ἐὸν ot δὲ ἐπυνθάνοντο τὸν ἴσθμον αὑτοὺς τειχε-
ἣν 4 Ν ; ΄
οντας, τὴν Πελοπόννησον wept πλείστου τε ποιευμένους
aA ’ ¥ 3 A ἈΝ Ν »
περιειναῖ, καὶ ταύτην ἔχοντας ev φυλακῇ, ta δὲ ἄλλα
2 a / Ul Ν v4 ,
ἀπιέναι. ταῦτα πυνθανόμενοι οὕτω δὴ προσεδεήθησαν
\ δ a ε δ . Κ᾿
σφεων σχεῖν πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα. 38. οἱ μὲν by ἄλλοι
4 2 ἈΝ a 9 a) δὲ 3 Ν ς A
κατέσχον ἐς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα, AOnvaios δὲ es THY εωντῶν.
Q Ν Ν ¥ 7 > [4 4 θ ’ a
peta Se τὴν ἄπιξιν κήρυγμα ἐποιήσαντο, ᾿Αθηναίων τῇ
’ ’ , Ν Ν > + 3 a
tis δύναται σώζειν τὰ τέκνα τε καὶ τοὺς οἰκέτας. ἐνθαῦτα
e ν a 3 A 3 ΄ e grt 3 ¥
οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι ἐς Τροιζῆνα ἀπέστειλαν, ot de ἐς Avyevay,
e av 92 a Υ . a e , .
οἱ δὲ ἐς Σαλαμῖνα. ἔσπευσαν δὲ ταῦτα ὑπεκθέσθαι, τῷ
’ / ς 4 Ν δὴ Ν 58
χρηστηρίῳ τε βουλόμενοι ὑπηρετέειν, καὶ ON καὶ τοῦδε
“ > φΦ / 3 a ¥ , ,
ELVEKEV οὐκ ἥκιστα. λέγουσι Αθηναίοι odw μέγαν puda-

A 3 ,. 3 a 3 aA cia / ’
Kov τῆς ἀκροπόλιος ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι ἐν TH ἰρῳ. λέγουσι τε͵

a Ν Ν ς 3, 3 4 3 ,
ταῦτα, καὶ δὴ καὶ ὡς ἐόντι ἐπιμήνια ἐπιτελέουσι προ-
΄ Ν > » , / 7.3 ef »
τιθέντες" ta δ᾽ ἐπιμήνια μελιτόεσσὰ ἐστι. αὕτη ὃ
e , ) A ͵ any ’ 3 ΄ Ι
ἢ μελιτοεσσα, ἐν τῷ πρόσθε αἰεὶ χρονῳ αναισιμουμενη,
/ 9 ¥ Ν a a ¢ , a
τότε ἣν ἄψαυστος. σημηνάσης δε ταῦτα τῆς ἱρείης, μάλ-
, } an Ν , Ign Λ “ ,
λον τί οἱ Αθηναῖοι καὶ προθυμότερον ἐξέλιπον τὴν πολιν,
e Noa a? ῃ \ ἢ , e ,
ὡς Kat τῆς θεοῦ «πολελοιπυίης THY ἀκρόπολιν. ὡς δὲ σφι
4 e ’ »ν » “ tA 3 Ν
πάντα υπεξεκέετο, ἔπλωον ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον. 29. Ene

VUL, 50.] The Muster at Salamis. 167

N ς 3 39 4 3 ral 4 Q ’
δὲ οἱ απ Ἀρτεμισίου ἐς Σαλαμῖνα κατέσχον Tas νέας, συν-
( Ne Ν ’, e a ε , Ν
ἐρρεε καὶ ὁ λοῖπος πυνθανόμενος ὁ τῶν ᾿Ελληνων ναυτικὸς
N 3 A 2 ν / N
στρατὸς ex Τροιζῆνος " es yap Πωγωνα tov Τροιζηνίων
/ , ΄ , ἢ .
λιμένα προείρητο συλλέγεσθαι. συνελέχθησαν τε dn
λ Ν x a , a999 A / ’ , .
πολλῷ πλεῦνες νέες ἢ ἐπ᾿ Αἀρτεμισίῳ εναυμάχεον, καὶ
> N 4 / 4 ’ > a e a (4
απὸ πολίων πλευνων. ναναρχος μὲν νὺυν ἐπὴν WUTOS ὁσ-
2 3 3 ’ὔ > , 3 4 > N
περ ἐπ Aptemoip, EvpuBiudns ὁ Ευρυκλείδεω avnp
, 2 , , a t a7 ,
Σπαρτιήτης, ov μέντοι γένεος ye τοῦ βασιληΐου ἐὼν. νέας
λ A 4 N ¥ 4 ’
δὲ πολλῷ πλείστας τε καὶ ἄριστα πλωούσας παρείχοντο
3 4 θ A 3 θ “ δὲ > ’ ς A a a 4
nvato. ἀριθμὸς de ἐγένετο ὁ πᾶς τῶν νεῶν, παρεξ
a ’ 9 Ν φ 4 “ ’
τῶν πεντηκοντέρων, ὀκτὼ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ τριηκό-
Cat. :
\ b Ν A e Ν
80. “Qs δὲ ἐς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα συνῆλθον οἱ στρατηγοὶ,
? ΄ / 3 ᾽ ’ 3 ,
ἐβουλεύοντο, προθέντος EupuBiadew γνωμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι
N ᾿ rd , 3 “ 9
tov BovAopevov, ὅκου δοκέοι ἐπιτηδεωτατον εἶναι ναυμα-
/ 4 A 3 Ν 4 3 ’ὔ 4 ’ e A
χίην ποιέεσθαι τῶν αὐτοὶ χωρέων eyKpaTEes εἰσὶ" ἢ yap
3 x 9 a ¥” a Ν ΄, , e
Ἀττικὴ ameito ἤδη, τῶν δὲ λοίπεων πέρι προετίθεε. αἱ
A Ν ΄- ’ A ’ “
γνῶμαι δὲ τῶν λεγόντων αἱ πλεῖσται συνεξέπιπτον πρὸς
Ν 3 “ tf 4 “ “A ’
tov Ισθμον πλωσαντας ναυμαχέειν πρὸ τῆς Πελοποννή-
3 ͵ Ν , , e oon ,
σου" ἐπίλεγοντες τὸν λόγον τόνδε, ws ἢν νικηθεωσι τῇ
, 3 “αν \ a7 ,
ναυμαχίῃ, ev Σαλαμῖνε μὲν ἐόντες πολιορκήσονται ev
7 ef 7 b ] ϑ , “ ‘N
νήσῳ, wa σφι τιμωρίη οὐδεμία ἐπιφανήσεται, προς δὲ τῷ
3 ΄“- 3 N n 3 ’ a a 7 8
ἰσθμῷ es τοὺς ἑωυτῶν ἐξοίσονται. 81. ταῦτα τῶν ἀπὸ
’ a 2 ὔ ϑ. a > "
Πελοποννήσον στρατηγῶν ἐπιλεγομένων, ἐληλύθεε ἀνὴρ
3 a 3 7 , δ , 3 ΝΣ Ν
Αθηναῖος ἀγγελλων ἥκειν τὸν βάρβαρον ἐς τὴν Artixny
Sa rN , Ν \ a
kal πᾶσαν αὑτὴν πυρπολεεσθαι. ὁ yap Sia Βοιωτῶν tpa-
/ Ν e/ μ- 2 , / N
πόμενος στρατὸς ἅμα Ἐξερξη, ἐμπρήσας Θεσπιέων τὴν
/ I A 3 4 9 ᾿ IN ‘
πολιν (αὐτῶν εκλελοιποότων ες Πελοπόννησον) καὶ τὴν
/ e ΄ 4 3 Ν 3 / Ν /
Πλαταιέων ὡσαύτως, ἧκε te ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας Kai πάντα
» A 3 32 7 Ν ᾽ / δ ,
ἐκεῖνα ἐδηΐου. ἐνέπρησε δὲ Θέσπειάν τε καὶ Πλάταιαν,
’ 4 df 3 3 /
πυθόμενος Θηβαίων ὅτε οὐκ ἐμήδιζον.

168 Advance of Xerzes. (Heron.

3 XN Ἀ aA ’ a ¢ 4 ¥
32. Amo Se τῆς διαβάσιος τοῦ ᾿ΕἙλλησπόντου, ἔνθεν
᾽ ¥ ε 4 σ΄“ 3 a 4
πορεύεσθαι ἡρξαντο οἱ βάρβαροι, ἕνα αὑτοῦ διατρίψαντες
nA 3 A ὔ 3 Ν 3 7 3 Ἁ ἕ
μῆνα, ἐν τῷ διεβαινον ἐς την Ευρώωώπην, ev τρισὶ ἑτέροισι
ν 9 ἢ 3 a a 4 ¥ 9
μησι ἐγένοντο ev τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ, Καλλιάδεω ἄρχοντος Αθη-
/ . eer 9. α .Υ ’ os
ναίοισι. καὶ αἱρέουσι ἐρῆμον TO ἄστυ, καὶ τινας OALYOUS
δ, a 3 ᾽ nae aw 3, ’ a
εὑρίσκουσι τῶν Αθηναίων εν τῷ ἱρῷ εοντας, ταμίας TE TOU
eo « N ’ δ ’ ΄, Ν 9 ἢ
ἱροῦ καὶ πένητας ἀνθρώπους, δὲ φραξάμενοι τὴν ἀκρόπολιν
’ ’ Ν , 9 Ν 3 ’ (od N
Oupnot τε καὶ ξύλοισι nuvvovto τοὺς ἐπιόντας " ἅμα μεν
e » 3 7 ’ 3 3 [4 3 “ A
ὑπ acOeveins βιον οὐκ ἐκχωρήσαντες ες Σαλαμῖνα, πρὸς
δ > A , 9 ’ “ Ine Xe ἢ
de αὐτοὶ δοκέοντες ἐξευρηκέναι τὸ μαντηϊον, τὸ ἡ Πυθίη
wv N 7 A 2 Λ » Ἀ
σφι ἔχρησε, τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος ἀνάλωτον ἔσεσθαι, καὶ
3" . A \ ’ Ἁ “ la \
αὐτὸ δὴ τοῦτο εἶναι τὸ κρησφύγετον κατὰ TO μαντήζον, καὶ
> \ , e δ , Cyl > VX ON
ov τῶ; veas. 88. Οἱ δε Περσαι ἐζομενοι emt Tov καταν-
/ a 8 , Υ ν a ’ 3 ie
τίον τῆς ἀκροπόλιος ὄχθον, Tov Ἀθηναῖοι καλέουσι Apriov
͵ 3 ’ ͵ , “ a Ἢ
πάγον, ἐπολιόρκεον τρόπον τοιόνδε" ὅκως στυπεῖον περὶ
ν" δὲς Ν ’ ee > ἡ 3 > /
Tous otaTtous περίθεντες ἅψειαν, erofevoy ἐς τὸ φράγμα.
3 A 3 ’ e 4 v4 3 4
ἐνθαῦτα ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ πολιορκεόμενοι ὅμως ἡμύνοντο, καί-
3 Q ΝΜ A 3 ’ὔ δ a ᾽
περ ἐς τὸ ἔσχατον κακοῦ ἀπίγμεένοι, καὶ τοῦ φράγματος
͵ IAs ᾽ὔ a 4
mpodedwxoTos. οὐδὲ λόγους τῶν Πεισιστρατιδέων προσ-
’ Ne , 3 ’ 3 ’ . s+
φερόντων περι ομολογίης ἐνεδέκοντο, ἀμυνόμενοι δὲ ἄλλα
3 JS Q Ν Ν 4. A
τε ἀντεμηχανέοντο, Kat δὴ καὶ προσιόντων τῶν βαρβάρων
Ν Ν 4 3 ’ > / Υ͂ bot 7 ὃν
πρὸς Tas πύλας ολοιτρόχους ἀπίεσαν, ὥστε Ξερξεα emt
Ν 3 , 2.» 3 ᾽ὔ /
χρόνον συχνὸν απορίησι ἐνέχεσθαι, ov δυνάμενον σῴεας
ςιὃἷ κε > s > 2 > + 9,7 / δ
ἐλεῖν, 84. χρόνῳ ὃ ἐκ τῶν ἀπόρων edavy δὴ τις ἔσοδος
a , 4 ἈΝ \ Ν 4 ra
τοῖσι βαρβάροισι" ἔδεε yap κατὰ τὸ θεοπρόπιον πᾶσαν
‘ 9 Ν Ν > a 9 ’ ’ ΟΝ 4
τὴν Αττικὴν τὴν ev TH ἠπείρῳ γενέσθαι ὑπὸ Πεέρσησι.
¥ 9 Na ? / ¥ NS a “
ἔμπροσθε ὧν πρὸ τῆς ἀκροπόλιος, ὄπισθε Se τῶν πυλέων
N a 7» a N x 947 YR »νΚ
καὶ τῆς ἀνόδου, τῇ bn οὔτε τις εφύλασσε OUT ἂν ἤλπισε
ες ἢ} ’ Ν a 3 “ 3 4 / > ἢ
μὴ κοτὲ τις κατὰ ταῦτα ἀναβαίη ἀνθρωπων, ταύτῃ ἀνεβη-
’ VY nen a / 9 t
σαν τινες Kata TO tpov τῆς Κεκροπος θυγατρος AyAaupov,
4 > é 3» A , e Ἁ
καΐτοι περ ἀποκρήμνου ἐόντος τοῦ χώρου. ὡς δὲ εἶδον

VILL, 56. The Acropolis taken. 169

> AN 3 4 e 9 a > A . 3 ’ e
autous avaBeBnxotas οἱ ΑΑθηναῖοι ert τὴν ἀκρόπολιν, οἱ
. } ,ὔ δ ‘ a ͵ i δ ,
μὲν ἐρρέίπτεον ἑωυτοὺς κατὰ τοῦ τείχεος κάτω καὶ διεφθεί-
e x 9 Ν ’ ΄ a ‘ 4
ροντο, ot δὲ ἐς TO μέγαρον κατεφευγον. τῶν δὲ Περσεων
ε 7 ,ὔ a ‘ 3 , N ry ,
οἱ ἀναβεβηκότες πρῶτον μὲν ἐτράποντο πρὸς Tas πζλας,
, \ 2 / Ν ef >,/ ? Ν ’
ταῦτας δὲ ἀνοίξαντες Tous tetas ἐφόνευον" ἐπεὶ δὲ σφι"
a Noes , 2.9
πάντες κατέστρωντο, τὸ ἱρὸν συλήσαντες ἐνέπρησαν πᾶσαν
ΡῚ Ν Ν ’ Ν 3 ’
τὴν ἀκρόπολιν. 8δ. Σχὼν δὲ παντελέως τὰς AOnvas,
’ / 3 Co) 4 e é 9 ,
Ξέρξης ἀπέπεμψε es Σοῦσα ἄγγελον ἔππεα AptaBave
? ὔ “ Aa ’ ϑ Ul 8" Ν δὰ
ἀγγελέοντα τὴν παρεοῦσαν σφι εὐπρηξίην. amo Se τῆς
Ἵ D KN δευτέρη ἡμέρη, συγκαλέσας ᾿Αθη-
πεμψίος TOU κηρύκος θεύτερὴ Ἣμ ρῃ» uy sae ς on
4 e a e
ναίων Tous φυγάδας, ἑωυτῷ δὲ ἑπομένους, ἐκέλενε τρόπῳ
a t ὰ sen 9 ͵ ᾽ . 3 ,
τῷ σφετέρῳ θῦσαι ta ipa, ἀαναβαντας ες THY ἀκρόπολιν, -----
Υ ΜΝ) Α4 IAs 3 ’ὔ > | 4 a ¥
εἶτε δὴ ὧν ὄψιν τινὰ ἰδὼν ἐνυπνίου ἐνετέλλετο ταῦτα, εἴτε
. 9 a a e 9 ’ὔ 3 ’ ~~ @¢@ ¢@ e Ν ’
καὶ ἐνθύμιόν οἱ ἐγένετο ἐμπτρήσαντε τὸ ἱρόν. οἱ δὲ φυγα-
ve 3 ’ὔ 3 ’ὔ A 3 ’ a
Ses τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐποίησαν Ta ἐντεταλμένα. 36. τοῦ
N “ 4 9 4 ? wv 3 “Ὁ ϑ
δὲ είνεκεν τούτων ἐπεμνήσθην, φράσω. ἔστι ἐν τῇ ἄκρο-
πόλε ταύτῃ ᾿Ἐρεχθέος τοῦ γηγενξος λεγομένου εἶναι νηὸς,
ἐν τῷ ἐλαίη τε καὶ θάλασσα ἔ νι, τὰ λόγος παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων
Hoaeisava τε καὶ A@nvainv ἐρίσαντας περὶ τῆς χώρης
΄ ͵ , 2 N 4 , a a
μαρτύρια θεσθαι. ταύτην ὧν τὴν ἐλαίην ἅμα τῷ ἄλλῳ
eon 4 3 A δ)» n , ’
ἰρῷ κατελαβε ἐμπρησθῆναι ὑπο τῶν βαρβάρων " δευτερῃ
δὲ e 4 3 ON a 3 σ᾽ "AO ναίων οἱ θύε e os B
ἡμέρῃ απὸ τῆς ἐμπρήσιος, Αθηναίων ot θυειν uo Bact
, ᾽ e > ἢ 3 ΔΝ ¢€ NS ef Ν
λεος κελευόμενοι ὡς ἀνεβησαν ἐς TO ἱρὸν, ὥρεον βλαστον
3 a , Ψ 2 4 @
ἐκ τοῦ στέλεχεος ὅσον τε πηχυαῖον ἀναδεδραμηκότα. οὕτοι
a ¥
μὲν νυν ταῦτα ἔφρασαν.
ἐ \ 93 σ Wd 3 ’ e
Οἱ δε ev Σαλαμῖνι Eddqves, ὡς σφι εξηγγελθη ὡς
» A SN Ν 3 4 3 ’ 3 “ ’
ἔσχε τὰ περὶ τὴν AOnvewy ἀκρόπολιν, ἐς τασοῦτον θορυ-
/ ef ¥ aA a Jas A
Bov ἀπίκοντο, ὥστε ἔνιοι τῶν στρατηγῶν οὐδὲ κυρωθῆναι
“ ’; aA 3 3. ΚΧ “ 4 3 ’
ἔμενον τὸ προκείμενον πρῆγμα, ANN ἐς TE τας νεᾶς ἐσε-
x ε ’ὔ > , ς 3 ’ “ἢ
πίπτον καὶ ἱστία ἀείροντο ὡς ἀποθευσόμενοι. τοῖσέ TE
7 > a 3 [4 “ ~ 3 A
ὑπολειπομένοισι αὐτῶν exupwOn πρὸ tov ἰσθμοῦ ναυμα-

170 The Battle of Salanus. (Heron.

vA ’ > », 4 3 ’
χέειν. νύξ τε ἐγίνετο, καὶ ob διαλυθέντες ἐκ τοῦ συνεδρίου
> » 3 Ν ’ ? XN a
ἐσεβαινον ἐς tus veas. 88. ενθαῦτα δὴ Θεμιστοκλεα
? ’ > A “ ’ ¥ / ὯΝ 9 a
ἀπικόμενον ἐπὶ THY Vea εἴρετο Μνησίφιλος avnp Αθηναῖιος,
ῷ ΨΥ (4 ’ Ἀ ον 3 a e
ὃ τι σφι evn βεβουλευμένον. πυθόμενος δὲ πρὸς αὑτοῦ ὡς
ΝΥ 4 > » N 4 Ν ιν 4 ἈΝ 4 Ν
ein δεδογμένον ἀνώγειν τὰς νέας πρὸς τὸν Ισθμον καὶ πρὸ
a , ’ 4 ¥ ¥ a ᾽
τῆς Πελοποννήσου ναυμαχεειν, eve Οὐ τοι apa, ἣν ἀπα-
4 Ν ’ >, A ° “ > [4 2 ͵
εἰρωσι τὰς veas ἀπὸ Σαλαμῖνος, wept οὐδεμιῆς Ete “τατρί-
’ x “ td [2 Υ Ἁ
δος ναυμαχήσεις. κατὰ yap πόλις ἕκαστοι τρέψονται, καὶ
ΝΜ 4 > , ’ ὔ ΨΥ 2
οὔτε σφεας Ἐυρυβιάδης κατέχειν δυνήσεται, οὔτε τις av-
, ΝΥ ad Ν 3 a . “
θρωπων ἄλλος, ὥστε μὴ ov διασκεδασθῆναι τὴν στρατιηὴν,
3 , / ς e ‘ 93 2.9 Υ
ἀπολεεταί Te ἢ Ελλας αβουλίῃσι. ὠλλ, εἰ τις ἐστι μη-
ΝΟ ΚΜ Ν n 4 Ν ( ΝΜ ΄
navn, ἐθι καὶ πειρῶ διαχεαι ta βεβουλευμένα, ἣν κως δύνη
Ἢ a ’ , ΄, Νὴ 2 «a
ἀναγνῶσαι EvpuBiadea μεταβουλεύσασθαι ὥστε αὐτοῦ
4 / ‘ a ἤ.. M
μενέειν. 89. κάρτα δὴ τῷ Θεμιστοκλεῖ ἤρεσε ἡ ὑποθήκη,
‘ Ia ιν “ 3 ,ὔ δ... 393. A δ ͵ δ
καὶ οὐδὲν πρὸς ταῦτα ἀμειψάμενος ἤϊε ἐπὶ τὴν νέα τὴν
? / : 3 ᾽ὔ \ 3Δ7 e 4
EvpuBiadew. ἀπικόμενος Se εφη εθελειν ot κοινὸν τι
a a e ? ἮΝ 4 Ν 4 > Ὁ 3 7
πρῆγμα συμμῖξαι. ὁ δ᾽ αὑτὸν ἐς την νεα ἐκέλευε ἐσβαντα
4 y 9 +) a ; / ’ ’
λέγειν, εἰ τί ἐθέλοι. ἐνθαῦτα ὁ Θεμιστοκλέης παριζόμενος
ε 4 ϑ “γ᾿, ’ Ν ¥ [4
οἱ καταλέγει εἐκείνα Te TavtTa τὰ ἤκουσε Μνησιφίλου,
e a ᾽ὔ ΙΧ Ν Ν > ἃ 2? Ff
εωυτοῦ ποιεύμενος, καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ προστιθεὶς, ES ὃ ἀνε-
hes ¥ a Ν 9 a 4 »
γνωσε χρηϊζων ex τε τῆς νεὸς ἐκβῆναι συλλέξαι τε τοὺς
Ν 2 Ν 4 € \ ΚΥ /
στρατηγους ἐς τὸ συνέδριον. 40. Qs δε apa συνελεχθη-
Ν A x 3 ? a “ f a
σαν, πρὶν ἢ Tov EvpuBiabea προθεῖναι tov λόγον τῶν
“ , \ \ \ 4 e
εἰνεκεν συνηγαγε τοὺς στρατηγους, πολλος ἣν ὁ Θεμίστο-
’ 3 a 4 @ , 4 a ‘
κλεης ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι ola κάρτα Seopevos. λέγοντος de
3 a ¢ 4 ‘9 4 e? 4 9
αὐτοῦ ὁ Κορίνθιος στρατηγὸς Αδείμαντος ὁ Mutou cite:
9 2 Θ , 3 a > A « /
ἐμιστόκλεες, EV τοῖσι αγῶσι ot προεξανιστάμενοι
€ 4 ς Ἀ 9 ’ 353 e 4 ,
ραπίξονται. ὁ δὲ ἀπολνομενος εφη" Ou δε γε ἐγκατα-
/ 3 : A ,ὔ ν > #7 Ν
λειπόμενοι οὐ στεφανεῦνται. 41. Tore μὲν ἠπίως προς
“ 4 3 4 “ X Q 3 ’ ¥.
tov Κορίνθιον ἀμείψατο, πρὸς δὲ tov EvpuBuadea ereye
3 4 Ν > ἢ IAN A ’ ’ e
ἐκείνων μὲν οὐκετι οὐδὲν τῶν πρότερον λεχθέντων, ὡς

\

VIL, 60.] Counsel of Themistocles. 171

a 4 ,
ἐπεὰν ἀπαείρωσι ἀπὸ Σαλαμῖνος διαδρήσονται" wapeov-
n 93 4 ’ὔ 4 , 2 ’
TOV γὰρ τῶν συμμάχων οὐκ ἔφερέ οἱ κόσμον οὐδένα κατη-
\ 4 ¥ 4 ’ 3 4
γορέειν- ὁ δὲ ἄλλον λόγου εἰχετο, λέγων rade: Ἐν σοι
a 3 \ An Ν e , 9 3 Ν 9 ,
νῦν ἐστὲ σῶσαι τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα, ἣν enor πείθῃ ναυμαχίην
a ΑΝ ν" / , .
αὐτοῦ μένων ποιέεσθαι, μηδε πειθόμενος τουτων Toit
“ a 4 “x a é 3 4
λέγουσι avatevEns πρὸς τὸν Ισθμον τὰς νέας. avrides
3 ’ Ν Ν e 3 a ,
γὰρ ἑκάτερον ἀκούσας. πρὸς μὲν τῷ Ισθμῳ συμβάλλων
. 93 4 ’ 3 Νν ΦΨ΄, δ.
ἐν πελάγεϊ ἀναπεπταμένῳ ναυμαχήσεις, ἐς τὸ ἥκιστα ημῖν
’ ’ 3 ’ Ν ’, XN 23 θ “ 9 ’
σύμφορον ἐστι νέας ἔχουσι βαρυτερας καὶ ἀριῦμον ἐλωσ-
σι Ν 3 ’ a + ‘ 4 ‘
σονας, τοῦτο δὲ ἀπολέεις Σαλαμῖνα te καὶ Μέγαρα καὶ
¥ ¥ \ \ 4 > ’ 4 εν a
Αἴγιναν, ἥν περ καὶ Ta ἄλλα εὐτυχήσωμεν. ἅμα yap τῷ
a > A “ se Po Ν ef
ναυτικῷ αὐτῶν ἕψεται καὶ ὁ πεζὸς στρατὸς" καὶ οὕτω
3 “ J ’
σφέας αὐτὸς ἄξεις ἐπὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον, κινδυνεύσεις τε
.; “.“Ἴε / ‘ S98 / ’
ἁπάσῃ τῇ Ἑλλάδι. 42. ἣν δὲ τὰ ἐγὼ λέγω ποιήσῃς,
9 ϑ “ Ν δ » a “ A
τοσάδε ἐν αὐτοῖσι χρηστὰ εὑρήσεις " πρώτα μὲν ἐν στεινῳ
, ν ὃς. ἡ . \ a N > +
συμβάλλοντες vnvot ολίγῃσι πρὸς πολλᾶς, ἣν Ta οἰκοτα
3 Ἂ ’ 3 ’ N ’ ‘ \ 9
εκ TOU πολέμου ἐκβαινῃ, πολλὸν κρατήσομεν, ---- TO yap ἐν
a , N e oF 9 . 2 2 r) δ \
στεινῷ ναυμαχέειν πρὸς ἡμέων ἐστί, ἐν ευρυχωρίῃ δὲ πρὸς
2 , 4 Ν Ν 4 3 ᾿ δ»
ἐκείνων, --- αὖτις δὲ Σαλαμὶς περιγίνεται, ἐς τὴν ἡμῖν
4 4 Ν a Ν Ν Ν ’ὔ 9
UITEKKEETAL τέκνα TE καὶ γυναῖκες. καὶ μὴν καὶ τόδε ἐν
> ] ~ wy A Ν ΄ Λ e >
αὑτοῖσι ἔνεστι, τοῦ καὶ περιέχεσθε μάλιστα" ὁμοίως av-
~ 4 ’ ’ A ἈΝ A
τοῦ τε μένων προναυμαχήσεις Πελοποννήσου Kat πρὸς τῷ
3 A Ins ” % ͵ ¥ 9 N \
IcOu@, οὐδὲ odpeas, εἰ περ εὖ φρονεέεις, ἄξεις ἐπὶ τὴν
4 , N > SN 3 ’ ’
Πελοπόννησον. 48. ἣν δὲ γε καὶ τὰ ἐγὼ ἐλπίζω γένηται
\ 4 a N ΑΥ̓͂ δ a 3 “ 93 Ν 4
καὶ νικήσωμεν τῇσι νηυσὶ, οὔτε ὑμῖν ἐς τὸν Ισθμον trape-
e ? ΝΜ 4 ¢ ’ A 3
σονται οἱ βάρβαροι, οὔτε προβήσονται ἑκαστέρω τῆς 4{π-
a > / / > Ν / / , ΄
τικῆς, απίασί τε οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ" Μεγαάροισι τε κερδανέομεν
a Ν At 4 “ Σ x “ 3 a ὁ Aa “ x 4 ’
περιεοῦσι καὶ Αιγίνη καὶ Σαλαμῖνι, ἐν τῇ ἡμῖν καὶ λόγιον
3 a 3 wf 4 4 9 ὔ ΄
ἐστε τῶν ἐχθρῶν κατύπερθε γενέσθαι. οἰκότα μὲν νυν
[4 3 , e x 3 ’ 3 Λ ’
βουλευομένοισι ἀνθρώποισι ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν εθέλει γίνεσθαι "
“ . 9 7 3 3/7 ft Ia ε \
μὴ δὲ οἰκότα βουλευομένοισι οὐκ ἐθέλει οὐδὲ ὁ θεος προσ-

172 The Battle of Salamis. [Herop.

, N N 3 J ’ a
χωρέειν πρὸς tas avOpwrnias γνωμας. 44. Ταῦτα re-
4 > ’ > . / .»
yovtos Θεμιστοκλέος, αὕτις ὁ Κορίνθιος ᾿Αδείμαντος
2 a ’ A ’,» 5 Ν
ἐπεφέρετο, σιγᾶν τε κελεύων τῷ μή ἐστι πατρὶς, καὶ Ev-
, ᾿ 3 3 κι 3 / 2 Λ 3 j
ρυβιάδεα οὐκ εῶν ἐπιψηφίζειν ἀπόλι ἀνδρί" πολιν γὰρ
“ ὔ av: 3 Λ΄
τὸν Θεμιστοκλέα παρέχομενον οὕτω ἐκελεῦυε γνώμας
λ a / e σ΄
συμβάλλεσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ οἱ προέφερε, ὅτε ἡλώκεσάν
“ 4 €e€ 9 aA 4, Ν e ͵
τε καὶ κατείχοντο αἱ ᾿Αθῆναι. rote δὴ ὁ Θεμιστοκλέης
3 ~ 86 aq Ν 7 Δ ᾿ ᾿
ἐκεῖνον τε καὶ τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλὰ τε καὶ κακὰ
e em § Ia Λ J e ” A ‘
ἔλεγε, ἑωυτοῖσι τε ἐδήλου λόγῳ ὡς εἰη καὶ TONS καὶ
a 4 ΝΥ 3 / 4 > ἃ 4 ,
yn μεζων ἥπερ εκείνοισι, ἐστ ἂν διηκόσιαι νέες σφι
Ν , 2 Ν “ e , ᾿ \
ἔωσι πεπληρωμέναι" οὐδαμους yap ᾿Ἐλληνων avtous
3 , > 7 4, x A a
ἐπιόντας αποκρούσεσθαι. 45. Σημαίνων δὲ ταῦτα τῷ
/ 4 > 3 4 , a 2
λογῳ διεβαινε ἐς Ἐυρυβιαδεα, λέγων μᾶλλον επε-
, \ . ’ > a Ν , . 9 N
στραμμένα" Σὺ εἰ μενέεις avTOV Kat pevwd ἔσεαι ἀνὴρ
3 , > as . 2 , \ ςε 7 N a ᾿
ἀγαθὸς - εἰ δὲ μη, ἀνατρέψεις την Ελλάδα. τὸ πᾶν yap
en A 4 ’ « 4 9 9 3 Ν 4
Nu τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσε at νέες. αλλ εμοὶ πείθεο.
9 NX aA δ tA [ἡ “ N e Α 3 4
εἰ δὲ ταῦτα μὴ ποιήσεις, ἡμεῖς μεν, WS ἔχομεν, avadaBov-
\ > ἡ , 9 A Ν > 9 ’ a
TES τοὺς οἰκέτας, κομιεύμεθα ἐς Σίριν τὴν ev Ιταλίῃ, ἢ
e ’ a) 3 a x ON ’ ͵
περ ἡμετερὴ TE ἐστι EX Wadatov ETL, καὶ TA λογία λέγει
A e σι “ ’ὔ
ὑπ᾽ ἡμέων αὐτὴν δέειν κτισθῆναι" ὑμεῖς δὲ συμμάχων Tor
a 4 , a 3 ζω ’ a
ὥνδε μουνωθέντες μεμνήσεσθε τῶν ἐμῶν λόγων. 46. Tav-
’ ’ 3 ’ 2 ,
ta δὲ Θεμιστοκλέος λέγοντος avediducxeto Ευρυβιαδης.
, ‘ > 4 3
δοκέειν δέ μοι, ἀρρωδήσας μάλιστα tous ᾿Αθηναίους ἀνεδι-
ὃ , , 3 ’ὔ A “ “ 9 Ι θ “ > ἢ
aoKeTo μὴ σφεας απολίπωσι, ἢν πρὸς τον ἰσῦμον avayy
‘ 9 \ 3 , > 4 > 7
Tas νέας. ἀπολιπόντων yap A@nvaiwy οὐκέτι εγίνοντο
> 4 ’ὔ 7 Ν ec » Ν ’
ἀξιόμαχοι οἱ λοιποί. ταύτην δὲ αἰρεεται τὴν γνωμῆν,
> ra ’ὔ , οὔ δ ς Ν
αὐτοῦ μένοντας διαναυμαχέειν. Οὕτω μὲν οἱ περὶ Σαλα-
a ¥ , 3 / 3 7 dh
μῖνα ἔπεσι ἀκροβολισώμενοι, ἐπείτε EvpuBiadn coke,
3 “ φ ’ ς ν >? 7
αὐτοῦ παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ναυμαχήσοντες. ἡμέρῆ TE εγι-
Led 3 ᾽ὔ Α > + 4 a
veTO, καὶ ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ GVLOVTL σείσμος εγενέτο EV TE τῇ
A δ a Ψ 4 ¥ ~ e
γῇ καὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ. ἔδοξε δὲ σφι εὔξασθαι τοῖσι θεοίσι

VIL, 65.] The Deities of Eleusis. 173

\ 3 ’ ν ’ e ’
καὶ ἐπικαλέσασθαι τοὺς Ataxidas συμμάχους. ὡς δὲ σφι
¥n ¢ \ 9 , a 5.7 N a a a
ἔδοξε, καὶ ἐποίευν ταῦτα " εὐξάμενοι yup πᾶσι τοῖσι θεοῖσι,
2. Ν 3 “ Υ͂ ’ “ rn 3
αὐτόθεν μεν ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος Atavta τε καὶ Τελαμῶνα erexa-
͵ 9 N 9 N 4 cy ΝΥ 9 ͵ , 9. ὁ
λέοντο, ἐπὶ δὲ Αἰακὸν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Αιακίδας νέα ἀπέ-
3 ¥
στελλον ἐς Διίγιναν.
4 ἈΝ ’ 4" 3 a ’,
a7. Edn δὲ Δίκαιος ὁ Θεοκύδεος, avnp Αθηναῖος, φυγάς
N , ’ a N ,
τε καὶ παρὰ Μήδοισι λόγιμος γενόμενος τοῦτον τὸν xpo-
3 2 ’ ς} Ν / e ss a “a
voy, ἐπείτε ἐκείρετο ἡ Αττικὴ χωρη ὑπο τοῦ πεζοῦ στρα-
σὰ σὰ" td 3 A 2. wa 9 4 “ an
Tov τοῦ Ἐερξεω εοῦσα ἐρῆμος Αθηναίων, τυχεῖν τότε EwV
d , a , 9 a 4 4
ἅμα Δημαρήτῳ τῷ ΔΜακεδαιμονίῳ ev τῷ Θριασίῳ πεδίῳ,
9 a Ν 4 rd > NS 9 ἴω ς ϑ σι
ἰδεῖν Se κονιορτὸν χωρέοντα ἀπὸ ᾿Ελευσῖνος ὡς ἀνδρῶν
Λ 7 / 3 ’ ’ ᾿
μάλιστά xy τρισμυρίων" ἀποθωυμάζειν τὲ σφεας τὸν κο-
4 Φ ’ ¥ ? , N , Ἂ
νίορτον ὅτεων κοτε ein ἀανθρωπων, καὶ πρόκατε φωνῆς
᾽ ᾽ a e ¢ Ν Ν 4 “ ἣν
ακούειν, καὶ ot φαίνεσθαι τὴν φωνὴν εἶναι τὸν μυστικὸν
¥ 9 3 ? 4 a ec oa a 9 ? °
taxyov. εἶναι δ᾽ adanuova τῶν ἱρῶν τῶν ev Ἐλευσῖνι
, N , ᾿ ΑΥ̓͂ , ΣΝ oe ιν
γινομένων tov ΖΔημαρητον, εἰρεσθαὶ τε autov, 6 τι To φθεγ-
4 ¥ Aa 3" 4 , ,
γόμενον εἴη τοῦτο" 48. αὐτὸς δὲ εἶπαι" Δημάρητε, οὐκ
¥ oe 3 ΄ ’ Ν a a
ἔστε ὅκως οὐ μέγα TL σίνος ἔσται τῇ βασίλεος στρατιῇ.
’ ιν > , 2 ’ 3. 9 aA 3 “ φ ζω \
ταδε yap ἀρίδηλα ἐρήμου ἐούσης τῆς Δττικῆς, OTL θεῖον τὸ
, > Nx 9 wn oN 3 , 3 , A
φθεγγόμενον, ἀπὸ Ἐλευσίνος wov es τιμωρίην A@nvaioct
nn ? . SA o>; 4 >
τε καὶ TOLTL συμμάχοισι. καὶ ἣν μέν γε κατασκήψη ἐς
Ν ’ ’ 3 a 4. Ν a
την Πελοπόννησον, κίνδυνος αὐτῷ τε βασιλεῖ καὶ τῇ oTpa-
a a 3 a d ¥ A . 93 AN Ν , ΄
τιῇ τῇ ἐν τῇ ἡπείρῳ ἔσται, ἢν δὲ επὶ Tas νεας τράπηται
Ν nr “ “ s ’

Tas ἐν Σαλαμῖνι, τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν κινδυνεύσει βασι-
‘ 9 a . Ν e “ , ¥ 3 A
Neus atroBarew, τὴν δὲ ὁρτὴν ταύτην ἄγουσι AOnvaros
> SN ’ὔ 4 Aa \ Ων a Cd ᾿ Σ a €
ava πάντα ἔτεα TH My tpi καὶ ty Κουρῃ, καὶ αὐτῶν τε ὁ

4 a a ¥. e 4 a N Ἀ
βουλόμενος καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Ελληνων μυεῖται, καὶ τὴν
᾿ κι vd 3 ’ a a ? ,
φωνὴν, τῆς ἀκούεις, ἐν ταύτῃ TH ὁρτῇ ἰακχάξζουσι.

“ A ? ἴω 4 4 x Ν
49. πρὸς ταῦτα εἰπεῖν Δημάρητον" Σίγα τε καὶ μηδενὶ
2 “ ὔ ἴω ¥ Y 3 ’
ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπης. ἢν γάρ τοι ἐς βασιλέα
3 A x. “ 3 A Ν Ν ’
ἀνενειχθῇ τὰ ἔπεα ταῦτα, ἀποβαλέεις τὴν κεφαλην, καὶ σε

174 The Battle of Salamis. [Herop.

ΝΜ 4 a ’ e7 - 7 9 3 4 eas
οὔτε ἐγὼ δυνήσομαι ῥύσασθαι, ovr ἄλλος ἀνθρώπων οὐδὲ
@ 3 > xy to \ ‘ A a va ’
εἰς. αλλ. Ex ἤσυχος, περί Se στρατιῆς τῆσδε θεοῖσι pert
Ἅ, Ν Ν a ’ 3 ‘x a a
oe. Tov μὲν δὴ ταῦτα παραίνέειν, ex δὲ τοῦ κονιορτοῦ
N a ,ὕ ͵ ‘ ‘ ͵
καὶ τῆς φωνῆς γενέσθαι νέφος, καὶ μεταρσιωθεν φέρεσθαι
39 « “A > AN “ ’ >. a ς 4
ἐπὶ Σαλαμῖνος ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον te τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων.
Pv \ > ‘ a oe δ Ν Ss 3 ͵
οὕτω δε avtous μαθεῖν ὅτι τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ Ξέρξεω ἀπολε-
“4 A “ 4 Υ͂
εσθαι μέλλοι. Ταῦτα μὲν Δίκαιος ὁ Θεοκύδεος ἔλεγε,
. y ’ ’
Δημαρήτου τε καὶ ἄλλων μαρτύρων καταπτομενος.
3 N , x “ ᾿
50. Οἱ δὲ ἐς τὸν Ξέρξεω ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντες,
9 “ 3 “ A “ δε ᾿ ἈΝ
ἐπειδὴ ἐκ Τρηχῖνος θηησάμενοι τὸ τρῶμα το. Μακωνικὸν
, ᾽ . Φ , 3 1 ΄ ~
διέβησαν ἐς τὴν ᾿Ϊστίαιαν, ἐπισχόντες ἡμέρας τρεῖς ἔπλωον
3 > 7 . 9 eo . εν ,».» ’
δὲ Ευρίπου, καὶ ev ἑτέρῃσι τρισὶ ἡμέρῃσι ἐγένοντο ἐν
, > “ Ν td a > iY
Φαλήρῳ. ἐπειδὴ δὲ παρηγγελλον αναπλώειν, ἀνῆγον
ἈΝ ’ > NUN a Ν ,ὕ 9 ’
τὰς νέας ἐπὶ THY Σαλαμινα, καὶ παρεκρίθησαν διαταχθέν-
> e f ’ 4 3 3 4 ’ ¢
τες κατ ἡσυχίην. τότε μὲν νυν οὐκ ἐξεχρησε σφι 7
ε,;, | , Ν ‘ ? , νι
ἡμέρη ναυμαχίην ποιήσασθαι, νυξ yap ἐπεγένετο, οἱ δὲ
, > Ne , \ \ of 2
παρεσκευάζοντο es τὴν ὑστεραίην. τοὺς de Ελληνας εἶχε
, \, 2 , y e AY Ν 4 N ,
δέος τε καὶ ἀρρωδίη, ove ἥκιστα δὲ tous απὸ Πελοποννή-
2 ’ ‘ Φ > δ “ 3 ἴω ’
σου. appwoeor δε, ὅτε αὐτοὶ μὲν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι κατήμενοι
e “ a A 3 4 4 Α ’
ὕπερ γῆς τῆς Αθηναίων ναυμαχέειν μέλλοιεν, νικηθέντες
2 , 2 / , ». ed Ν
τε ἐν νήσῳ αἀπολαμῴθεντες πολιορκήσονται, ἀπέντες τὴν
a 3 4. “ Ν tA ~ a
ἑωυτῶν αφύλακτον. 38. Τῶν δὲ βαρβάρων ὁ πεῖζος ὑπο
ἃ a a b 7 3." “
τὴν παρεοῦσαν νύκτα ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ την Πελοποννησον"
’ὔ Ν > 4 ed 3
καίτοι τὰ δυνατὰ πώντα ἐμεμηχάνητο, ὅκως κατ᾽ ἤπειρον
‘9 , ε ’ ε ‘ > 7 ,
μη ἐσβάλοιεν ot βαρβαροι. ws yap ἐπύθοντο τάχιστα
’᾽ ἈΝ ϑ Ν 4 3 7
Πελοποννήσιοι τοὺς appt Acwvidea ev Θερμοπύλῃσι τετε-
[4 ’ὔ 3 “ ὔ > “ 9 Ν
λευτηκέναι, συνδραμόντες εκ τῶν πολίων ἐς τὸν Ισθμον
4 , > a Ν , 3
ἕζοντο, καί σφι ἐπὴν στρατηγὸς Κλεόμβροτος ὁ ᾿Αναξαν-
Ν 9 e 4 ἃ a 9 a
Spidew, Λεωνίδεω Se ἀδελφεός. ἑξόμενοι Se ev τῷ Ισθμῷ
Ν 4 Ν / Cas 4 a oe
καὶ συγχώσαντες THY Σκιρωνίδα ὁδὸν, μετὰ τοῦτο ὥς σφι
» 7] 9 A ry n
ἐδοξε βουλενομένοισι, οἰκοδόμεον διὰ τοῦ ᾿Ισθμοῦ τεῖχος"

VUL, 75.] Craft of Themistocles. 175

a a
dre δὲ ἐουσέων μυριάδων πολλέων καὶ παντὸς ἀνδρὸς
3 4 > 4 . sy a A / a ,
ἐργαζομένον, ἦννετο TO ἔργον, καὶ yap λίθοι καὶ πλίνθοι
καὶ ξύλα καὶ φορμοὶ ψώμμου πλήρεες ἐσεφορέοντο, καὶ
x, », 3 ’ ὔ e c > ὔ wv
ἐλίνυον οὐδένα χρόνον οἱ βοηθήσαντες ἐργαζόμενοι, ovre
νυκτὸς οὔτε ἡμέρης.

52. Οἱ μὲν δὴ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισθμῷ τοιούτῳ πόνῳ συνέστασαν,
od 4 “~ “x wv 4 ’ ον a a
ἅτε περὶ τοῦ παντὸς ἤδη δρόμον θέοντες, Kat τῇσι νηυσι
οὐκ ἐλπίζοντες ἐλλάμψεσθαι" οἱ δὲ ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ὅμως
a ’ 3 , ? Ψ δ ’ > a
ταῦτα πυνθανόμενοι ἀρρώδεον, οὐκ οὕτω περὶ σφίσι αὑτοῖσει
δειμαίνοντες ὡς περὶ τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ. τέως μὲν δὴ av-
τῶν ἀνὴρ ἀνδρὶ παραστὰς συγῇ λόγον ἐποιέετο, θῶυμα
ποιείμενος τὴν Εὐρυβιάδεω ἀβουλίην, τέλος δὲ ἐξερράγη
3 “ 4 4 ’ . 2 ’ Q ν 9 o
ἐς TO μέσον. σύλλογος TE $7 ἐγίνετο, Kat πολλα ἐλέγετο
περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν οἱ μὲν, ὡς ἐς τὴν Πελοπόννησον χρεὼν
¥ Ν
ein ἀποπλώειν καὶ περὶ ἐκείνης κινδυνεύειν, μηδὲ πρὸ
“ ’ ’ ? 3 - Ν ᾿
χωρῆς δοριαλωτον μένοντας μάχεσθαι, Αθηναίοι δὲ καὶ
Αἰγινῆται καὶ ΜΜεγαρέες αὐτοῦ μένοντας ἀμύνεσθαι.
3 A : ’ e e “~ A 4 eos
53. Ενθαῦτα Θεμιστοκλέης, ws ἐσσοῦτο TH γνωμὴ ὑπὸ
τῶν Πελοποννησίων, λαθὼν ἐξέρχεται ἐκ τοῦ συνεδρίου,
ἐξελθὼν δὲ πέμπει ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον τὸ Μήδων ἄνδρα
πλοίῳ, ἐντειλάμενος τὰ λέγειν χρεὼν, τῷ οὔνομα μὲν ἦν
4 > id Ν “ Ν 4 a ’
Σίκιννος, οἰκέτης δὲ καὶ παιδαγωγὸς ἦν τῶν Θεμεστοκλέος
παίδων" τὸν δὴ ὕστερον τούτων τῶν πρηγμάτων Θεμίστο-
’ la 9 4 e 3 ’ [ 4
Krens Θεαπίεα Te ἐποίησε, ws ἐπεδέκοντο οἱ Θεσπίεες
eo Q , Υ͂. A 4 / 3 4
TOALNTAS, και χρημασιε oABtov. ὃς τότε TROL απέκομενος,
MW. a N “ n ’ ’ ι 2
ἔλεγε πρὸς Tous στρατηγους τῶν βαρβάρων rude ᾿Επεμ-
Ψψέ με στρατηγὸς ὁ Αθηναίων λάθρῃ τῶν ἄλλων ᾿Ελλήνων
(τυγχώνει γὰρ φρονέων τὰ βασιλέος καὶ βουλόμενος μᾶλ-
,..δ᾽ 2 ΄ , “a ‘ ae ,
λον τὰ ὑμέτερα κατύπερθε γίνεσθαι ἢ τα τῶν Ελλήνων
πρήγματα) φράσοντα ὅτι οἱ “Ελληνες δρησμὸν βουλεύονται
a ὔ
καταρρωδηκότες" καὶ νῦν παρέχει κάλλιστον ὑμέας ἔργον

176 The Battle of Salames. [Henrop,

’ 3 , Δ N , ’ ?
ἁπάντων ἐξεργάσασθαι, ἣν μὴ περιίδητε διαδράντας av-
’ w Y 3 , ς 4 ¥?> 2
TOUS. οὔτε yap ἀλλήλοισι ομοφρονεουσι, οὔτ ETE ἀντι-

’ cn Ν e 7 a wy
στήσονται ὑμῖν, πρὸς εωυτούς τε σφεας ὄψεσθε ναυμα-
΄ N Ἀ ς » ’ N e
χέοντας τοὺς τὰ ὑμέτερα PpoveovTas Kat Tous μή. 54. ὁ
N a? ᾽ 3 N 9 , a .
μὲν ταῦτα σφι σημήνας ἐκποδὼν ἀπαλλάσσετο" τοῖσι δε
φ a 9 4 a 9 ’ a Ν 9 “ o
ὡς πίστὰ eyiveTo Ta ἀγγέλθεντα, τοῦτο μεν Es THY νησῖδα
Ὡ δ J x nn #¢ tf XN a
τὴν Ψυττάλειαν, μεταξυ Σαλαμῖνος τε κειμένην καὶ τῆς
’ Ν a t 3 , a ‘
ἠπείρου, πολλους τῶν Περσέων ἀπεβίβασαν, τοῦτο Se,
9 Ἁ 4 tA ’ ’ 35. δὲ x Ων > 3 c
ETELON EYIVOVTO METAL νύκτες, ἀνῆγον μὲν TO aT ἑσπέρης
s 4 “ “ a Xa “ e 3 δ
κέρας κυκλούμενοι πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα, ἀνῆγον δὲ οἱ ἀμφὶ
Ν ’ a “ 4 ’ κι
τὴν Keov τε καὶ τὴν Κυνόσουραν τεταγμένοι, κατεῖχον τε
’ , ’ ν A a é an
μέχρι Μουνυχίης πάντα τὸν πορθμον τῆσι νηυσί. τῶνδε
Ν Cd x Aa \ γ a Ν ἴω a ᾿
δὲ εἴνεκεν ἀνῆγον τὰς νέας, wa δὴ τοῖσι “Ελλησι μηδὲ
a > oar) ϑ 3 ’ 9 ry σ΄ a
φυγεῖν εξῇ, adr’ ἀπολαμῴθεντες ev τῇ Σαλαμῖνι δοῖεν
a > 3} , 9 , 9 ἣν ἐν »
τίσιν τῶν ἐπ Αρτεμισίῳ ἀγωνισμάτων. ἐς δε τὴν νησίδα
4 “ ? ; A ,
τὴν Ψυττάλειαν καλεομένην ἀπεβίβαζον τῶν Περσέων
a 0 ᾿ ς 3 Ν ’ ’ > ] a /
τῶνδε εἵνεκεν, WS, ETEAY YyevnTaL ναυμαχίη, ἐνθαῦτα μάλι-
3 4 “ 3 a ‘N a 4 9 x
στα ἐξοισομένων τῶν τε ἀνδρῶν καὶ τῶν νανηγίων (εν γὰρ
δ , A 4 A ΄ ¥ > 4 ¢
δὴ πόρῳ τῆς ναυμαχίης τῆς μελλούσης ἐσεσθαι ExEETO ἡ
a “ δ Ν a Ν ;
νῆσος), Wa τοὺς μὲν περιποιῶσι, Tous de διαφθείρωσι.
a a Ν Ul e 3 ,
ἐποίευν δὲ σιγῇ ταῦτα, ὡς μὴ πυνθανοίατο οἱ ἐναντίοι.
4 Ἁ ry A a Ia 2 ’
Οἱ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδὲν αποκοιμήθεντες παραρ-
’
τέοντο.
a Ν n 3 » 3 Ν
δδ. Τῶν δὲ ἐν Σαλαμῖνι στρατηγῶν ἐγίνετο ὠθισμὸς
, ΚΝ Ν ¥ [4 4 4
λόγων πολλός. decay Se οὔκω ὅτι σφέας περιεκυκλέοντο
a Ν e ’ ϑ 2 [4 A e ’ Ω
τῇσι νηυσὶ ot βάρβαροι, αλλ ὥσπερ τῆς ἡμέρης ὡρεὸν
Ν 3 “ 4 @
αὐτοὺς τεταγμένους, ἐδόκεον KATA χωρὴν εἶναι. συνεστη-
Ἀ a A 3 > » , 3 7 φ
κότων δὲ τῶν στρατηγῶν, εξ Αιγίνης διέβη «Αριστείδης ὁ
, > SN 9 ζω ‘ 3 4 ω ς νΧ"Ν
Αυσιμάχου, avnp Αθηναῖος μεν, ἐξωστρακισμένος δὲ ὑπὸ
A 2 oN ’ tA > σ΄ “
τοῦ δήμου, τὸν ἐγὼ νενόμικα, πυνθανόμενος αὑτοῦ τὸν τρό-
w¥ A 4 3 3 ᾽ “ ’
πον, ἄριστον ἄνδρα γενέσθαι ἐν ᾿Αθηνῃσι καὶ δικαιότατον.

VIL, 81. Counsel of Aristides. 177

@ e NN : Ν ϑ.ν " A 3 4 é
οὗτος ὡνὴρ στᾶς ἐπὶ TO συνέδριον ἐξεκαλέετο Θεμιστοκλέα,
2, “ e a 5 9 a Ἁ “ Λ e oN .
ἐόντα μὲν EWUT@ οὐ φίλον, ἐχθρὸν δὲ Ta μάλιστα" ὑπὸ δὲ
4 -“ ’ a ’ 3 ’ a
μεγάθεος τῶν παρεόντων κακῶν ληθην ἐκείνων ποιεύμενος
? ΄ 3 3 A a ’ ‘ ΕΥ̓͂
ἐξεκαλέετο, ἐθέλων αὐτῷ συμμῖξαι. προακηκόεε δὲ ὅτι
, ern , > N , N N
σπεύδοιεν ot ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἀνάγειν Tas νέας προς τὸν
4 XY Iga ὔ 4 wf. 9
Ισθμόν. 56. ὡς δὲ ἐξῆλθε οἱ Θεμιστοκλέης, ἔλεγε ᾿Αρι-
' ͵ ε , , , 3 ¥ a
στείδης τάδε: Hyeas στασιαΐζειν χρεὼν ἐστι, ἐν τε τῷ
¥ a ον ον ΝΥ 9 a a ~ ¢ ’ ¢ ᾽
ἄλλῳ καιρῷ καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐν τῷδε, περὶ τοῦ OKOTEPOS ἡμέων
, > A Ν 4 9 , 4 ’ oe
πλέω ἀγαθὰ τὴν πατρίδα ἐργώσεται. λέγω δὲ ToL, ὅτι
¥ a \. 93 4 ὔ “ 9 ’ A
ἰσον ἐστὶ πολλά TE καὶ ολίγα λέγειν Tept ἀποπλοον τοῦ
3 A “ > ON “ > »" 4
ἐνθεῦτεν Πελοποννησίοισι. ἐγὼ yap αὐτοπτῆς Tor λέγω
’ oe A 0? A 327 , , . oN
γενόμενος, ὅτε νῦν, ovd ἣν εθελωσι KopivOt0t τε καὶ autos
Εὐρυβιαδ tot τε ἔσονται ἐκπλῶσαι" περιεγόμεθα ya
υρυβιαδης. οἷοι τε ἔσονται ἐκπλῶσαι" περιέεχομεθα yap
e oN A 4 ’ 9 3. » ’ a ’
ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων κύκλῳ. αλλ ἐσέλθων σφι ταῦτα ση-
.] 3 4 , ’ ἈΝ
μηνον. δῖ. Ὁ δ᾽ ἀμείβετο τοισίδε" Κώρτα τε χρηστὰ
, . oy \ . > ν mF ,
διακελεύεαι καὶ εὖ ἤγγειλας. τὰ γὰρ ἐγὼ ἐδεόμην γενέ-
ΣΝ > + , 4 Ν Ν ϑ > Ὁ
σθαι, autos αὐτόπτης γενόμενος ἥκεις. toe yap εξ ἐμέο
‘ , en , ¥ ‘ ¢ > ef Ν
τὰ ποιεύμενα ὑπο Μηδων. dee yup, ὅτε οὐκ exovtes ἤθε-
3 ’ ed 39
λον ἐς μάχην κατίστασθαι οἱ Ελληνες, ἀεκοντας παρα-
᾽ Q . 9 ’ od “ 9 ’
στήησασθαι. av δε ἐπεὶ περ ἥκεις χρήστα ἀπαγγελλων,
> 4 ww A > NSN > 4 , 4
autos σφι ἄγγειλον. ἣν yap ἐγὼ αὐτὰ λέγω, δόξω πλά-
4 Ν 3 ’ὔ 3 a a ’
σας λέγειν, καὶ οὐ πείσω ὡς οὐ ποιεύντων τῶν βαρβάρων
A 3 ͵ ’ 2 8 ‘ ε ¥
ταῦτα. αλλά σῴφι σήμηνον αὐτὸς παρέλθων ὡς exer.
ἐπεὰν δὲ 1 ἣν μὲν πείθωνται, ταῦτα δὴ τὰ κάλλι-
ὦ € σημήνῃς, ἢν μὲν = es ταῦτα, δὴ ἔδυ
A e A A
στα" ἣν δε αὐτοῖσι μὴ πιστὰ γένηται, ὁμοῖον ἡμὶν ἔσται:
3 ‘ ¥ , ¥ : 4
ov yap ἔτι διαδρήσονται, εἰ περ περιεχόμεθα πανταχόθεν,
e ΝῊ tf A A “ 93 4
ὡς ov λέγεις. 58. Ταῦτα ἔλεγε παρελθὼν ὁ Αριστείδης,
/ 3 > »,; d ‘ ΄ 93 a θὰ
φάμενος εξ Διγίνης τε ἥκειν καὶ μογις ἐκπλῶσαι λαθὼν
N 9 rd ’ 4 a ον 4
TOUS ἐπορμέοντας" περιέχεσθαι γὰρ πᾶν τὸ στρατόπεδον
νε “ eon aA a a joe / , θ ’
τὸ EXAnvixoy ὑπὸ τῶν νεῶν τῶν Ἐερξεω" παραρτεεσθαΐ
΄ ς 3 a \ e ἈΝ a
Te συνεβούλευε ὡς ἀαλεξησομενους. Kat ὁ μεν ταῦτα
12

178 Battle of Salamis. ' [Henop.

» a 9
εἴπας μετεστήκεε, τῶν δὲ αὗτις ἐγίνετο λόγων ἀμφισβασίη"
᾿ a a, a 4
οἱ γὰρ πλεῦνες τῶν στρατηγῶν οὐκ ἐπείθοντο τὰ ἐξαγγελ-
θέντα. 59. ἀπιστεόντων δὲ τούτων, ἧκε τριήρης ἀνδρῶν
Τηνίων αὐτομολέουσα, τῆς ἦρχε ἀνὴρ Παναέτιος ὁ Σωσι-
4 Ν δῷ a ΙΝ a
μένεος, 9 wep δὴ ἔφερε τὴν ἀληθείην πᾶσαν. διὰ Se τοῦτο
τὸ ἔργον ἐνεγράφησαν Τήνιοι ἐν Δελφοῖσε ἐς τὸν τρίποδα
4 a N ’ a ‘ . 4 , a
ἐν τοῖσι τὸν BupBapoy κατελοῦσι. συν δε wy ταύτη τῇ
a a b , > a ‘ a , ὶ > 9
ynt τῇ αὐτομολησασῃ ες Σαλαμῖνα, καὶ TH πρότερον eT
a 9 a n
᾿Αρτεμέσιον τῇ Anpvin, ἐξεπληροῦτο τὸ ναυτικὸν τοῖσι
“ Ε 9 . 9 ’ 4 , , “ \
λλησι ἐς Tas OYSwKOVTA Kat τριηκοσίας νέας. δύο yap
δὴ νεῶν τότε κατέδεε ἐς τὸν ἀριθμόν.
60. Τοῖσι δὲ Ελλησι ὡς πιστὰ δὴ τὰ λεγόμενα ἦν τῶν
Τηνίων ῥήματα, παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ναυμαχήσοντες. 70S
a
τε δὴ διέφαινε, καὶ δὲ σύλλογον τῶν ἐπιβατέων ποιησάμε-
vot, προηγόρενε εὖ ἔχοντα μὲν ἐκ πάντων Θεμιστοκλέης,
‘ a a ᾿ς
τὰ δὲ ἔπεα ἦν πάντα κρέσσω τοῖσι ἕσσοσι ἀντιτιθέμενα.
‘ ΄
ὅσα δὲ ἐν ἀνθρώπου φύσι καὶ καταστάσι ἐγγίνεται, παραι-
’ Ν ’’ ν 4 e ? Ν 4 Ν
νεσας δὴ τούτων Ta κρέσσω αἰἱρέεσθαι, καὶ καταπλεξας την
ea 2 , > 7 > ‘ , , e@ x \
ῥῆσιν, ἐσβαίνειν ἐκέλευε ἐς Tas veas. καὶ οὗτοι μεν δὴ
"9 9 Ν e 9% 9 > ἡ, 4 A ιν \
ἐσέβαινον, καὶ ἧκε ἡ aw Αἰγίνης τριήρης, ἣ κατὰ τοὺς
Αἰακίδας ἀπεδήμησε. ἐνθαῦτα ἀνῆγον τὰς νέας ἁπάσας οἱ
4 4 9
Ἕλληνες. ΘΙ. ἀναγομένοισε δὲ σφι αὐτίκα ἐπεκέατο οἱ
Υ͂
βάρβαροι. οἱ μὲν δὴ ἄλλοι “Ελληνες ἐπὶ πρύμνην ave
’ Ν Ἁ
κρούοντο καὶ ὥκελλον τὰς νέας, ᾿Αμεινίης δὲ Παλληνεὺς
ἀνὴρ ᾿Αθηναῖος ἐξαναχθεὶς νηξ ἐμβώλλει. συμπλακείσης
δὲ τῆς νεὸς, καὶ οὐ δυναμένων ἀπαλλαγῆναι, οὕτω δὴ οἱ
3 δι ‘
ἄλλοι “Apewvin βοηθέοντες συνέμισγον. ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν
’ A 4 a
οὕτω λέγουσι τῆς ναυμαχίης γενέσθαι τὴν ἀρχήν" Αἰγιιῆ-
N “ a Ἁ 4 9 , 3 ΝΜ
ται δε τὴν κατὰ τοὺς Αιακίδας ἀποδημήσασαν ες Αἰ γιναν,
΄ 9 Ν ¥ é ν ιν ’, e /
ταύτην εἶναι τὴν ἄἀρξασαν. λέγεται δε καὶ τάδε, ὡς φάσμα
“ 3 “ ‘x
σφι γυναικὸς ἐφάνη, φανεῖσαν Se διακελεύσασθαε, ὥστε καὶ

VIL, 87.] Exploit of Artemisia. 179

ἅπαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων στρατόπεδον, ὀνειδίσασαν
A ΄
πρότερον τάδε" ἾΏ δαιμάνιοι, μέχρε κόσου ἔτι πρύμνην
ἀνακρούεσθε; 62. Κατὰ μὲν δὴ ᾿Αθηναίους ἐτετάχατο
,ὕ φ ‘ 9 a Ν >] a 4 x ε ;
Φοίνικες (οὔτοι yap εἶχον τὸ πρὸς Ἐλευσῖνος re καὶ ἑσπέ-
s ‘ Ν ’ ¥ @ >
ρῆς κέρας), κατὰ δὲ Λακεδαιμονίους ‘Iaves: οὗτοι δ᾽ εἶχον
‘ ‘ a 3a .Y “ ὔ 3 ’ ὔ
τὸ πρὸς THY ἠῶ τε καὶ τὸν Πειραιεα. ἐθελοκάκεον μέντοι
a ᾽ Ν a
αὐτῶν κατὰ τὰς Θεμιστοκλέος ἐντολὰς Odéiyos, οἱ δὲ πλεῦνες
οὔ. ἔχω μέν νυν συχνῶν οὐνόματα τριηράρχων καταλέξαι
a ’ ς : , eC. ἢ 4 ‘ 3 a Jar
τῶν νέας ᾿Ελληνέδας ἔλοντων, χρήσομαε Se αὑτοίσει οὐδεν
πλὴν Θεομήστορός τε τοῦ ᾿Ανδροδώμαντος καὶ Φυλάκου
a a @
τοῦ ᾿Ιστιαίου, Σαμίων ἀμφοτέρων. τοῦδε Se εἵνεκεν μέ-
“ a
μνημαι τούτων μούνων, ὅτι Θεομήστωρ μὲν διὰ τοῦτο τὸ
a 4
ἔργον Σάμου ἐτυράννευσε καταστησάντων τῶν Περσέων,
Ν s 3 4 ?
Φύλακος Se εὐεργέτης βασιλέος ἀνεγράφη καὶ χώρη οἱ
3 , 4 ε 4 4 4 9 [2
ἐδωρήθη πολλή. οἱ δ᾽ εὐεργέται βασιλέος opocayyat κα»
,
Neovras Περσιστίί. 63. Περὶ μέν νυν τούτους οὕτω εἶχε,
Ν a a a a a
τὸ δὲ πλῆθος τῶν νεῶν ἐν TH Σαλαμῖνι ἐκεραΐζετο, ai μὲν
e399 x a
ut Αθηναίων διαφθειρόμεναι, at Se ὑπ᾽ Αἰγινητέων. ἅτε
\ a Ν 4
yap τῶν μὲν Ἑλλήνων σὺν κόσμῳ ναυμαχεόντων κατὰ
, ζω x tA 9 4 ” ” Ν f
τάξιν, τῶν δε βαρβάρων ov τεταγμένων ἔτι, οὔτε σὺν νόῳ
ὔ Jar ¥ -a 9 a L 24
ποιεόντων οὐδεν, ἐμέλλε τοιοῦτο σφι συνοίσεσθαι οἷον περ
> ἡ ’
ἀπέβη. καίτοι ἦσάν γε καὶ ἐγένοντο ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην
a 9 4 9 a a a
μακρῷ ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ἑωυτῶν ἢ πρὸς Εὐβοίῃ, πᾶς τις
, Ν ’ μ“- A ϑα 7 4 id
προθυμεόμενος καὶ δειμαίνων Ἐξερξεα, ἐδόκεε τε ἕκαστος
“ o Ν
ἑωυτὸν θηήσεσθαι βασιλέα. 64. κατὰ μὲν δὴ τοὺς ἄλλους
3 é a a
οὐκ ἔχω μετεξετέρους εἰπεῖν ἀτρεκέως ws ἕκαστοι τῶν
βαρβώρων ἢ τῶν ᾿Ἑλλήνων ἠγωνίζοντο, κατὰ δὲ ᾿Αρτεμι-
/ , 4 0 5.39 Φ ) , a ¥ ‘
σίην τάδε ἐγένετο, amt ὧν εὐδοκίμησε μᾶλλον ETL παρὰ
he ἢ \ ‘ 3 ’ δ > 7 δ
βασιλέϊ" ἐπειδὴ yap ἐς θόρυβον πολλὸν ἀπίκετο τὰ
4 a a a >
βασιλέος πρήγματα, ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἡ νηῦς ἡ Αρτεμι-
“ 2 7 e N Ν 3 a Ν 3 ¥
ons ἐδιώκετο ὑπὸ νεὸς ᾿Αττικῆς " καὶ ἣ οὐκ ἔχουσα δια-

180 Battle of Salamis. [Herop.

2 > A Α͂ ’ Λλ x.
φυγεῖν, ἔμπροσθε γὰρ αὐτῆς ἦσαν ἄλλαι νέες φίλιαι, ἡ δὲ
2 a ‘ a ’ f. > 4 , A ” 4
αὐτῆς προς τῶν πολεμίων μάλιστα ἐτύγχανε Eovaa, εδοξε
e ’ A a A , 7 ’
οἱ τὸδε ποιῆσαι, τὸ καὶ συνήνεικε ποιησασῃ " διωκομένη
Q en a 9 a“ 4 ϑ. 7 ἃ, é ϑ Aa
γὰρ ὑπὸ τῆς Artixns, φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε vyt Pirin avdpav
ὔ Ἁ > a 3 a A
te Καλυνδέων, καὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπιπλώοντος τοῦ Καλυνδέων
, 7 9 N r] “~ “
Bactheos Δαμασιθύμου. 65. εἰ μὲν καὶ TL νεῖκος πρὸς
7 N 3 ’ 4 x @ , 3, ᾽ ’
αὑτὸν eyeyovee ert περὶ Ελληήσποντον ἐόντων, οὐ μέντοι
» 9 a »” 9 > 4 > A 3 y¥
ἔγωγε ἔχω εἰπεῖν, οὔτε εἰ EX προνοίης αὐτὰ ἐποίησε, οὔτε
3 a A ’ N 4 a
εἰ συνεκύρησε ἡ τῶν Καλυνδέων κατὰ τύχην παραπεσοῦσα
a e N 9 ff ’ ον 4 3 lA ’
νηῦς, ὡς δε eveBadre τε καὶ κατέδυσε, εὐτυχίη χρησαμένη
Q 4 e “ 9 4 3 a, bY a 9 A
διπλόα ἑωυτὴν ἀγαθὰ epyacato: ὅ τε yap τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς
Ν , e ga? » Λ xX 23 a
veos τριήραρχος, ws εἶδε μιν ἐμβαλλουσαν νηΐ ἀνδρῶν
’ , “ ͵ ? ,ὔ A
βαρβάρων, νομίσας τὴν νέα τὴν ᾿Αρτεμισίης ἢ ᾿Ελληνίδα
2 “a > , 3 “εο3ο“ὄτ᾽ ’ Q ’ “ > »
εἶναι ἢ αντομολεειν ex τῶν βαρβάρων καὶ avroiot ἀμύνειν,
᾽ , ιν Ν 9 ὔ a \
«ποστρέψας πρὸς ἄλλας ἐτράπετο. 66. τοῦτο μεν τοι-
a 9 A ’ “ “\ Ν ?
ovTo αὐτῇ συνήνεικε γενέσθαι διαφυγεῖν τε Kat μὴ ἀπο-

Ν

/ a Ν 2 ad x“ 3 ’ ΙΝ
λέσθαι" τοῦτο δὲ συνεβὴ ὥστε κακὸν ἐργασαμένην απὸ
τούτων αὐτὴν μάλ "ὃ ἢ 1 Ἐέρξη. λέγεται

OUTWY αὑτὴν μαλιστα εὐδοκιμῆσαι Tapa Ξέρξη. rey

Ν 4 7 a “ ’ 3 A Ν
yap βασιλεα θηεύμενον μαθεῖν την νέα ἐμβαλοῦσαν, και

, A ’ ὔ ean 3 ’
dn τινα εἶπαι τῶν παρεόντων " Δέσποτα, ὁρᾷς Αρτεμισίην,
e > ? , , a , ’ Ν
ὡς εὖ ἀγωνίζεται καὶ νέα τῶν πολεμίων κατέδυσε; καὶ
* is / > 9 ’ > \ 2 / \. ¥ ‘
Tov εἐπείρεσθαι εἰ ἀληθέως ἐστὶ AptTeutoins TO ἔργον, και

Ν , a ω 3 ’
τοὺς φάναι, σαφέως τὸ ἐπίσημον τῆς νεὸς ἐπισταμένου"

Ν “ na 4 o 9 4 4
τὴν δὲ διαφθαρεῖσαν ἠπιστέατο εἶναι πολεμίην. τά τε

Ν Ξ e ” 5. A . 93 3 / ,
yap ἄλλα, ὡς εἰρηται, αὐτῃῇ συνήνεικε ἐς εὐτυχίην γενο»

ΝΥ “ a > a a é 9
μενα, καὶ τὸ τῶν ex τῆς Καλυνδικῆς νεὸς μηδενα atrocw-

, , , , .
Gevta κατήγορον γενέσθαι. Ἐέρξην Se εἶπαι λέγεται

“ “ ’ e ‘ ¥ 4 , mi
προς Ta φραζξομενα" Οἱ μεν ἄνδρες yeyovact poe yuvaixes,

ς δὲ a v a Ν μ- J νι 9
at ὃε γυναῖκες ἄνδρες. ταῦτα μὲν Ἐέρξην φασὶ εἶπαι.

3 Ν a , v4 > SN Ν Μ ε Ν

67. Ev δε τῷ πόνῳ τούτῳ ἀπὸ μὲν EBaveE ὁ στρατηγὸς
9 , e “ “ 2N 3 Ν 2. 8 ‘
AptaBiyyns ὁ Δαρείου, Ἐέρξεω ἐὼν ἀδελφεὸς, ἀπὸ δὲ

VIL, 90.] Xerxes views the Battle. 181

¥. . > ‘ e “ lh “
ἄλλοι πολλοί Te Kat ovvopacta Περσέων και ηδων καὶ
a Ε2 rd 9 , ὔ xe 4 Ψ
τῶν ἀλλων συμμάχων, ολίγοι δὲ τινες καὶ Ελληνων. ἅτα
ν" 4 3 ’ a e ὔ ’ὔ εν Ἀ
yap νέειν ἐπιστάμενοι, τοῖσε αἱ νέες διεφθείροντο, καὶ μὴ
2 a ’ 3 ’ 3 Ν a tf
ἐν χειρὼν νομῷ ἀπολλύμενοι, ES τὴν Σαλαμῖνα διένεον.
a ιν , ε \ 3 a , Δ’
τῶν δὲ βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθωρησαν,
ὔ 3 3 ’ N “ e “a 2 a >
νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ αἱ πρῶται ες φυγὴν ἐτρά-
ϑ A“ ς “A , « “ ¥
ποντο, ἐνθαῦτα at πλεῖσται διεφθείροντο. οἱ yap ὄπισθε
4 3 “ ’ Α ὔ ’
τεταγμένοι, ἐς τὸ πρόσθε τῇσι νηυσὶ παριέναι πειρώμενοι,
e 3 ’ , Ν ? ,. y Vue a 4
ws ἀποδεξόμενοι τε καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔργον βασιλεῖ, τῇσι σφετε-
«“« , ti 68 3 Ε tA δὲ
ρῃσε νηυσι φευγουσησι περιέπιπτον. . Byeveto ὃὲε
4 t 3 Aa a 4 a 4 A e
καὶ τόδε ἐν τῷ θορύβῳ τούτῳ τῶν τινες Φοινίκων, τῶν at
/ ’ 3 ’ ν 4 ΄ Ν
νέες διεφθάρατο, ελθόντες παρὰ βασιλέα διεβαλλον τοὺς
x e > » 4 ? ’ @ ’ e ;
Ιωνας, ὡς δὲ exeitvous ἀπολοίατο at νξες, ὡς προδοντων.
> of ef 1; Ν Ν ry
συνήνεικε ὧν οὕτω ὥστε ᾿Ιώνων τε Tous στρατηγοὺς μὴ
? , , Ν , a ’
ἀπολέσθαι, Φοινίκων τε τοὺς διαβάλλοντας λαβεῖν τοιόνδε
ἢ y¥ ᾽ὔ “ἅ ’ > 4 ἃ, 3 a
μισθόν" ἐτε τούτων ταῦτα λεγόντων eveBare νηὶ Αττικῇ
ay a oY 13 ‘ ΄ ν΄ 2
Σαμοθρηϊκίη νηῦς. ἥ τε δὴ ᾿Αττικὴ κατεδύετο, καὶ ent
4 >. 4 a a 4
φερομένη Διγιναίη νηῦς κατέδυσε τῶν Σαμοθρηΐκων τὴν
’ [4 Ἁ id 3 ε Ses Ν >
yea. ate δὴ ἐόντες ἀκοντισταὶ οἱ Σαμοθρήϊκες τοὺς ἐπὶ-
4 > AN A , “ ’ 3 ,
βάτας ato τῆς καταδυσάσης νεὸς βαλλοντες απὴήραξαν,
. 3 a 4 \. 3 “a ’
καὶ ἐπέβησαν τε καὶ ἔσχον αὐτήν. 69. ταῦτα γενόμενα
ΟΝ 2 ΄ e Ν 207 ΄ v
tous ἴωνας ἐρρύσατο" ws γὰρ εἶδε σφεας Ἐέρξης ἐργον
a > 4 9 , “ “ ’ 4φ
μέγα ἐργασαμένους, ἐτράπετο πρὸς τοὺς Φοίνικας, οἵα
e ’ ’ ιν 4 9 , , > +
UTEPAVTFEOMEVOS TE καὶ πάντας alTiwpEVvos, καὶ σφεων ExXE-
N \ 3 a δ > A N ,
λευσε Tas κεφαλᾶς αποταμεῖν, iva QUTOL κακοῦ γενο-
, wa μὴ
Ν 3 ’ὔ é cd 4 ¥
μενοι Tous ἀμείνονας διαβαλλωσι. ὅκως yap τινα ἐδοι
ed a“ e A Ἁ 9 7 4 a
Ξερξης τῶν ewutTov ἔργον tt ἀποδεικνύμενον ἐν τῇ ναυμα-
4 , ΝΑ a wv ἐς a 9 / »“" ΩΝ
Xin, κατήμενος ὕπο τῷ οὐρεὶ τῷ ἀντίον Σαλαμῖνος, τὸ
4 2 @ 3 , Ν ,ὔ Ν e
καλέεται Αιγάλεως, ἀνεπυνθάνετο τὸν ποιήσαντα, καὶ ot
“ 9 “4 ’ Ν ’ NX
γραμματισταὶ aveypahov πατρόθεν tov τριήραρχον Kat
Ν , . , N , Pn oN
τὴν πόλιν. πρὸς δὲ Te καὶ προσεβάλετο φίλος ἐὼν

182 Battle of Salamis. fHerop.

᾽ , > Ss ’ ‘ , a «
Αριαράμνης ἀνὴρ Πέρσης παρεὼν τούτου τοῦ Φοινικηΐου
’
πάθεος.
- “ ‘ , , A
70. Οἱ μὲν δὴ πρὸς τοὺς Φοίνικας ἐτράποντο" τῶν δὲ
, x 2 a
βαρβάρων ἐς φυγὴν τραπομένων καὶ ἐκπλωόντων πρὸς τὸ
@ ir, AG A e ὔ 9 “ θ »εἸΊ ᾿αὶ' 3 δὲ
ἄληρον, Διγινῆται ὑποστάντες ἐν τῷ πορθμῷ ἔργα ἀπεδε-
4 w¥ e Ν Ἀ ? a 9 a ra
Eavro λόγου afta. οἱ μὲν yup Αθηναίοι ev τῴ θορυβῳ
4 a 4 “A
ἐκεράϊζον Tus τε ἀντισταμένας καὶ Tas φευγούσας τῶν
φι, ΝῚ a“ Ν 9 4 ΄ 4
νεῶν, οἱ δὲ Αἰγινῆται τὰς ἐκπλωούῦσας" ὅκως δὲ τινες τοὺς
9 / ΄ , “9 + ’ Ν 3
Αθηναίους διαφύγοιεν, φερόμενοι ἐσεπίπτον ἐς τους Aryt-
? a 4 e ,
νήτας. ὙΠ. ᾿Ενθαῦτα συνεκύρεον νέες ἥ τε Θεμιστοκλέος
’ e x a 4 ΄
διώκουσα vea, καὶ ἡ Πολυκρέτου τοῦ Κρίου ἀνδρὸς «Αὐγινή-
σα 3 A , ζ Φ. Q ,
τεω νηΐ ἐμβαλοῦσα Σιδωνίῃ, ἢ περ εἰλε THY προφυλασ-
4 Ν 4 ͵ 9 @ Ν ’
σουσαν ἐπὶ Σκιάθῳ την Αἰγιναίην, ew ἧς ἔπλεε Πυθεης ὁ
3 “ 4 , 9 A
Ισχενόου, τὸν ot Περσαι κατακοπέντα ἀρετῆς εἵνεκεν εἶχον
9 a \ ’ LY ΤΣ
ἐν τῇ νηΐ ἐκπαγλεόμενοι. τὸν δὴ περιάγουσα ἅμα τοῖσι
’ a / Φ / ζὥ a
Πέρσῃσι ἥλω νηῦς ἡ Σιδωνίη, ὥστε Πυθέην οὕτω σωθῆναι
4 Ὗ ς . 9 ry Ν ’ Ν > Ἀ e ,
es Atywav. ὡς de εσεῖδε τὴν vea τὴν “Artixnv ὁ Πολύυ-
¥ δ ,, IAs A / ‘ ,
KpLTOS, ἔγνω τὸ σημῆϊον ἰδὼν τῆς στρατηγίδος, καὶ βωσας
Ν ͵ >. / 3 a 9 4 x
Tov Θεμιστοκλέα ἐπεκερτόμησε ἐς τῶν ΔΑιγινητέων Tov
“ aA 4 ἃ. ? δε
μηδισμὸν ὀνειδίζων. ταῦτα μέν νυν νηΐ ἐμβαλὼν ὁ Πολύ-
4 e Ν σι e
Kpttos ἀπέρριψε ἐς Θεμιστοκλέα" ot δὲ βάρβαροι, τῶν at
’ ? 3 , “
νέες περιεγένοντο, φεύγοντες ἀπίκοντο ἐς Φάληρον ὑπὸ τὸν
πεζὸν στρατόν. 72. Ev δὲ τῇ ναυμαχίη ταύτη ἤκουσαν
νον μὰ ae A pen nee Ae
7 A s Ta a Ν
Ελλήνων ἄριστα Αἰγινῆται, ἐπὶ Se Αθηναίοι, ἀνδρῶν δὲ
ἴω ’
Πολύκριτος τε ὁ Αἰγινήτης καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Εὐμένης τε ὁ
9 , Ὶ ν ἃ 3
Αναγυράσιος καὶ ᾿Αμεινίης Παλληνευς, ὃς καὶ ᾿Αρτεμισίην
9 ͵ , ¥ Ψ 9 ΄ ’ ἢ
ἐπεδίωξε. εἰ μὲν νυν ἔμαθε ὅτι ἐν ταύτῃ πλῶοι Αρτε-
’ 2. ϑ4 ᾽ 7 , ΕἾ φ. » ἥ A . aN
μισίη, οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσατο πρότερον ἢ εἷλε μιν ἢ και AUTOS
A 39 /
ἥλω. τοῖσι yap ᾿Αθηναίων τριηράρχοισε παρεκεκέλευστο,
Q ‘ . yw > 9 ? VY A wv “
πρὸς δε καὶ ἄεθλον εἐκέετο μύριαι δραχμαὶ, ὃς av piv Conv
oA. “ 4 9 “ “ > Ν A ? [4
ἕλῃ" δεινὸν yap Tt ἐποιεῦντο γυναῖκα ἔπὶ τὰς Αθήνας

VII, 95.) Story of the Corintiwans. 183

/ oe . N e ͵ ¥ ἢ
στρατεύεσθαι. αὕτη μὲν δη, ὡς πρότερον εἴρηται, διξ-
4 Ν .". ἐν a e 8 ’ >
φυγε, ἦσαν δε καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι, τῶν αἱ VvEES περιεγεγόνεσαν, EV
a ᾽ i
τῷ Φαληρῳ.
’ Ν “ , “ “
73. ᾿Αδείμαντον δὲ τὸν Κορίνθιον στρατηγὸν λέγουσι
5 A > > 3 Ν ς ὔ e a >
A@nvatot αὐτίκα κατ᾽ apyas, ὡς συνέμισγον αἱ νέες, ἐκ-
4 4 . e ’ 3 4 ΝΥ
πλαγέντα τε καὶ ὑπερδείσαντα, τὰ ἱστία ἀειράμενον οἴχε-
7 93 ’ Ν Ἁ a iA
θαι φεύγοντα, tovtas Se tous Κορινθίους τὴν στρατηγίδα
͵ , ¥ ε . oy» ΄
φεύγουσαν, ὡσαύτως οἴχεσθαι. ὡς δὲ ἄρα φεύγοντας
/ a ‘ νον , r)
γίνεσθαι τῆς Σαλαμινίης κατὰ τὸ tpov ’AOnvains Σκιράδος,
’ ’ 4 a “ ¥y é
περιπίπτειν σῴφι κέλητα θείη πομπῇ, Tov οὔτε πεμψαντα
al ¥ “ > N a Ia J
φανῆναι οὐδένα, οὔτε TL τῶν aro τῆς στρατιῆς εἰδοσι
4 A ’ ‘ ΄
προσφερεσθαι τοισι Κορινθίοισι. τῆδε δὲ συμβαλλονταε
2 a ἐν a ‘9 a 4 a a
εἶναι θεῖον TO πρῆγμα" ὡς γὰρ ἀγχοῦ γενέσθαι τῶν νεῶν,
‘ 9 oN a , / , 3 ’ »" ν
τοὺς ἀπο τοῦ κέλητος λέγειν ταδε' Αδείμαντε, σὺ μεν
’ , δ , 3 . @ ‘ ‘
ἀποστρέψας Tas νέας ἐς φυγὴν ὥρμησαι καταπροδοὺς τοὺς
"Rh e Ν Ν Ὡ a Φ 3 λ»ν A 3
λληνας" οἱ δὲ καὶ δη νικῶσι, ὅσον avTot ἠρῶντο ἐπικρα-
a a 3 a ; a , 3 4 Ν
τῆσαι τῶν εχθρῶν. "ἅ. Ταῦτα λεγόντων, ἀπιστέειν γὰρ
ν , 4 , , e > AS 2? 9
tov Αδείμαντον, αὕτις τάδε λέγειν, WS αὐτοὶ οἷοί TE εἶεν
3 Ψ 3 , a N a ,
ἀγόμενοι ὅμηροι ἀποθνήσκειν, ἣν μὴ νικῶντες φαίνωνται ot
"E ad δὴ 9 J Ν 4 >] a .
λληνες. οὕτω δὴ ἀποστρέψαντα THY νεα, αὑτὸν τε καὶ
‘ ” 9. » 9 4 3 “ 4 “ 4
Tous ἄλλους, ew ἐξεργασμένοισι ελθεῖν ες TO στρατόπεδον.
, \ ΄ , ν ον» , > 4
Τούτους μὲν τοιαύτη paris ἔχει ὑπο Αθηναίων, ov μέντοι
3 , 4 ε ’ 9. ’
αὐτοί γε Κορίνθιοι ὁμολογέουσι, αλλ ἐν πρώτοισι σφέας
auTous τῆς ναυμαχίης νομίζουσι γενέσθαι, μαρτυρέει δὲ σφι
XV ec» , \ ͵ ἌΝ
καὶ ἡ ἄλλη ᾿Ελλάς. 5δ.᾿Αριστείδης δὲ ὁ ΔΛυσιμᾶχον ἀνὴρ
μ a a \ 2 7 ’ ΄ ? ’
Αθηναῖος, τοῦ καὶ ολίγῳ τι πρότερον τούτων ἐπεμνήσθην
« 9 ὃ “ > φ 3 a θ ’ ‘ 4 a ‘N
ὡς avdpos ἀρίστου, οὗτος ev τῷ θορυβῳ τούτῳ Tw περὶ
- 4 4 ? , “ ν a
Σαλαμῖνα γενομένῳ τάδε ἐποίεε" παραλαβὼν πολλοὺς τῶν
e ’ Ν 9 Ν A
OTALTEWY, CL παρατετάχατο παρὰ τὴν ἀκτὴν τῆς Σαλαμι-
’ ’ 9 5.4 n 4 Ἁ 4
wins χώρης, γένος eovtes AOnvaior, es τὴν Ψυττάλειαν
a 9 ’ wv $ Ἁ ’ Q 9 a “δ
νῆσον ἀπέβησε ἄγων, δὲ tous Περσας τοὺς ev τῇ νησίδι
’ : ,
ταυτῃ κατεφόνευσαν TavTas.

184 Retreat of Xerxes. [Henop.

\ e / , 4 9 a.
76. ‘Qs Se ἡ ναυμαχίη διέλέλυτο, κατειρύσαντες ἐς THY
“ι ed a / 4 7 > +4
Σαλαμῖνα ot “Ελληνες τῶν νανηγιὼων οσὰα ταυτῃ ETUYYaVE
¥” vs ef oa 9 ] ΝΥ ’ 4 /
€TL ἐόντα, εἐτοίμοι ἧσαν ES ἄλλην ναυμαχίην, EXrTLCoVTES
a 4 4 4 a Ν
τῇσι περιεούσησι νηυσὶ ἔτι χρήσεσθαι βασιλέα. τῶν δὲ
δ “ ¥ 4 »¥ a
vaunyiwv πολλὰ ὑπολαβὼν ἄνεμος ζεφυρος ἔφερε τῆς
3 a 9s 6A Ἁ 9. Ἁ ‘ ’ df
Αττικῆς ert τὴν niova τὴν xadreopevny Kwrtaba* ὥστε
9 a Ν Ν 4 ¥ , Ν Ν
ἀποπλησαι TOY χρήσμον τὸν τε ἄλλον παντὰ Tov περῥ
a 3 ’ [2
τῆς ναυμαχίης ταύτης εἰρημένον Βακιδιὶ καὶ Μουσαίῳ,
‘ A LY N A tA “ a 9 ὔ 4 4
και δὴ καὶ κατὰ τὰ γανηγία τα Tovey ἐξενειχθεντα τὸ εἰ-
ρημενον πολλοῖσι ETETL πρότερον τούτων ἐν χρησμῷ Avot
4 3 ’ ᾽ \ ‘4 x. 9 ¢ ’
στράτῳ ΑΑθηναίῳ ἀνδρὶ χρησμολόγῳ, To ἐλέληθεε πάντας
ν ὦ ,
tous Ελληνας,

Κωλιάδες δὲ γυναῖκες ἐρετμοῖσι φρύξουσι "

a . 9 6 a Ν
τοῦτο δε ἐμέλλε ἀαπέλασαντος βασιλέος ἔσεσθαι.
’ » e ¥ “ Ν ’ ’ 2
77. Hepkns δε, ὡς ἐμαθε τὸ γεγονὸς πάθος, δείσας μὴ
.“. We ς a a o a > A ,
τις τῶν Ιωνων ὑποθῆται τοῖσι Ελλησι, ἢ αὐτοὶ νοησωσι
’ 3 Ν e 4 4 Ν , δ
mrwewv ἐς τὸν Ελλήσποντον λύσοντες τὰς γεφύρας, καὶ
3 “ 32 A ? ld 9 a 4
ἀπολαμφθεὶῖς ev τῇ Ευρωπῃ ἀπολεσθαι κινδυνεύσῃ, δρη-
. 9 ΄ we ‘ . ee 3 ’ a
opov ἐβούλευε" εθέλων δὲ μὴ ἐπίδηλος εἶναι μήτε τοῖσι
ω ’ σι 6 a 9 Ἁ a a 9
Ελλησι μητε τοῖσι éwutov, ἐς THY Σαλαμῖνα χῶμα ἐπει-
a . ΄ Ν᾽ »" > +
pato διαχοῦν, yavrous τε Φοινικηΐους συνεδεε, wa ἀντι τε
’ Υ̓ Ν ᾽ . lA 4 ? ’ e
σχεδίης ἐωσι καὶ τείχεος, APTEETO TE ES πόλεμον, ὡς ναν-
, ΝΥ 4 , , ’ e
μαχίην ἄλλην ποιησομενος. ὁρέοντες δε pty πάντες οἱ
@ a ’ 9 ) a
ἄλλοι ταῦτα πρήσσοντα, EV ἠπιστέατο WS EX παντὸς νόου
΄ 4 ’ , 9 Jas
παρεσκεύασται μένων πολεμήσειν" Μαρδόνιον δ᾽ οὐδεν
7 3 , ¢ 4 ¥ 3° a“ ° ,
τούτων ἐλάνθανε, ὡς μαλιστα εμπειρον EOVTA τῆς εκειίνου
, a ἢ cf my / 3 .
diavoins. 78. Ταῦτα τε ἅμα Ἐερξης ἐποίεε, καὶ ἔπεμπε
3 4 3 4 Ν A , ’
ἐς Πέρσας ἀγγέλέοντα τὴν παρεοῦσαν ode συμφορῆν.
4 Ἁ ~ 3 Ww Fas (4 ray
τούτων δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων ἔστι οὐδὲν ὅ τι θᾶσσον πα-
’ Ν 2.9 oe a ’ 9ω 7
ραγίνεται θνητὸν ἐὸν" οὕτω τοῖσι Πέρσησι ἐξεύρηται

VIL, 108.] Tidings brought to -Persia. 185

a 4 4 e Cd “a e , 9 e a ear
τοῦτος λέγουσι yap, ὡς ὅσων ἂν ἡμερέων ἢ ἡ πᾶσα ods,
Ω “\ 4 ΄“ ω ε
τοσοῦτοι ἵπποι τε καὶ ἄνδρες διεστᾶσι, κατα ἡμερησίην
a νι » ’ N Ν)
ὁδὸν ἑκάστην ἱππος τε καὶ ἀνὴρ τεταγμένος, τοὺς οὔτε
ον 3 v > a 3 Ἁ wv “ 2
νιφετὸς, οὐκ ὄμβρος, ov καῦμα, ov νυξ ἔργεε μὴ ov κατα-.
’ φ a J Ν ’ e Ν
νύσαι τὸν προκείμενον ἑωυτῷ δρόμον τὴν ταχίστην. ὁ μεν
\ a “ ‘N 2 4 “ 4
δὴ πρῶτος δραμὼν παραδιδοῖ τὰ ἐντεταλμένα τῷ δευτέρῳ,
e δ ? a 4 Q “ ϑ a“ ww > ¥.
ὁ δὲ δεύτερος τῷ τρίτῳ" τὸ δὲ ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη Kat ἄλλον
, ’ , “ e
διεξέρχεται παραδιδόμενα, κατάπερ Eddnot ἡ λαμπαδη-
/ Ν a ¢€ , 3 4 a “ ,
dopin, τὴν τῷ Ἡφαίστῳ ἐπιτελέουσι. τοῦτο τὸ δρώμημα
a of 4 3 Λ. e x x
τῶν ἵππων καλέουσι Πέρσαι ayyapyiov. 79. Ἢ μεν dn
’ 3 aA 3 4 3 7 ς ¥ 3 ’ 4
πρώτη ἐς Σοῦσα ἀγγελίη ἀπικομένη, ws ἔχοι AOnvas Hep-
od , ‘oe ἢ ε
Ens, ἔτερψε οὕτω δή τι Περσέων τοὺς ὑπολειφθεντας, ὡς
Ν fx , > . 2 ,
Tas Te ὁδοὺς μυρσίνῃ πάσας ἐστόρεσαν, καὶ ἐθυμίεον θυ-
, 4 > 4 9 ͵ ͵ . »ὔ ’, e
μιήματα, καὶ avtot ἦσαν ev θυσίησί τε καὶ εὐπαθείῃσι" 7
Ν ,ὕ ϑ 4 ? a 4 e [
δε δευτέρη σφι ayyeren ἐπεξελθοῦσα συνέχεε οὕτω, ὥστε
‘ a a [2 . Aa ἈΝ 4 A
tovs κιθῶνας κατερρήξαντο πάντες, Bon τε Kat οἰμωγῇ
3 4 9 ᾽ , 3 > + , 9 d
ἐχρέοντο ἀπλέτῳ, Μαρδόνιον ev αἰτίη τιθέντες. οὐκ οὕτω
\ . κ a 2 ’ A e , 3 t
δὲ περὶ τῶν νεῶν ἀχθόμενοι ταῦτα ot Πέρσαι ἐποίευν, ὡς
Ν 3 ~ pel 4
περὶ αὐτῷ Ἐξερξη δειμαίνοντες.
7 ἣν e NX A 3 ’ 3 ,
80. Ἐέρξης δὲ ws τοὺς maidas - Ἀρτεμισίη ἐπέτρεψε
3 ? > 4 ’ 2 ’ a
ἀπάγειν ἐς Ἔφεσον, καλέσας Μαρδόνιον ἐκέλευσέ μιν τῆς
A 4 x 4 Q a a ’
στρατιῆς διαλέγειν τοὺς βούλεται, καὶ ποίέειν τοῖσι λο-
,. , e “ AY .
γοισε τὰ ἔργα πειρεόμενον ὁμοῖα. ταύτην μὲν THY ἡμέρην
2 “ > # A Ν “ 4
ἐς τοσοῦτο ἐγίνετο" τῆς δε νυκτὸς, κελεύσαντος βασιλέος,
3 A 9 *~ 3 3
τὰς νέας οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐκ τοῦ Φαλήρου. ἀπῆγον oTicw ἐς
‘ ,. 9 [2 ,
tov ᾿Ελλήσποντον, ὡς τάχεος εἶχε ἕκαστος, διαφυλαξούσας
‘ [4 “- 4. 2 Ν Ν 3 a 9
tas σχεδίας πορευθῆναι Bacirer. eres δὲ αγχοῦ ἦσαν
n 7 e ’ 9 Q wv
Ζωστῆρος πλώοντες ot βάρβαροι, avareivovat yap ἄκραν
Ν a 3 / / ¥ , , 9 \ ¥
λεπταὶ τῆς ἠπείρου TauTys, Edokuy τε νέας εἶναι Kat ἔφευ-
4 4 Ν ’ 3 3 9
γον ἐπὶ πολλόν. χρόνῳ Se μαθόντες ὅτι οὐ νέες εἶεν ἀλλ
Υ̓͂ 4 3 / x ’ 3 4
ἄκραι, συλλεχθέντες ἐκομίξοντο. SE. ᾿ς δὲ ἡμέρη ἐγέ-

186 Retreat of Xerzes. [Hnop.

e 4 ed 4 , “
vero, opeovtes οἱ EdXAnves κατὰ χώρην μένοντα τὸν στρα-
N N ” \ \ ’ 9 δ ΔΛ
τὸν τὸν πεζὸν, ἤλπιζον καὶ τὰς νέας εἶναι περὶ Φάληρον,
3 ’ 4 4 4 lA 3
ἐδόκεόν τε ναυμαχήσειν opeas, παραρτέοντό τε ws ἀλεξη-
᾽ > A ee eer, N , ’ , 2
σόμενοι. ἐπεὶ de ἐπύθοντο tas νέας οἰχωκυίας, αὐτίκα
q a ns ἢ ΄ N ’ N
μετὰ ταῦτα ἐδόκεε ἐπιδιώκειν. TOV μὲν νυν ναυτικὸμ τὸν
, ν ᾽ > A ’ ”

Ἐέρξεω στρατὸν ove emevdov διωξαντες μέχρι" Avdpou, ἐς
᾿ Q ΕΣ 3 ’ 3 4 4
de τὴν Avdpov ἀπικόμενοι ἐβουλεύοντου Θεμιστοκλεῆης

΄ 3 , ‘ , x
μέν νυν γνώμην ἀπεδείκνυτο, δια νήσων τραπομένους καὶ
2 , “ , 4 3 ’ 3 “ 4
ἐπιδιωξἕαντας τας νέας, πλώειν ἰθέως ἐπὶ τὸν ᾿Ελλήσποντον

4 Ν ᾽’ 3 2 Ν “ 3 /
λύσοντας Tas γεφύρας. 83. EvpuBiadys δε τὴν ἐναντίην

4 , > *¢ 4 e > ] ’ Ν ’
ταύτῃ γνώμην ετίθετο, λέγων ws, εἰ λύσουσι τὰς σχεδίας,

AOR , , a N N , 2 ,
TOUT ἂν μέγιστον πάντων σφεῖς κακὸν THY ᾿Ελλάδα Epyu-

9 x 3 4 3 Ν. e 4 [4

σαιντο. εἰ γὰρ ἀναγκασθείη ἀπολαμφθεὶς ὁ Πέρσῆς pe-
3 A 3 ’ a Aa e 4 Ν Νν) ¢
νειν ev τῇ Ευρωπη, πειρῷτο ἂν ἡσυχίην py ἄγειν" ὡς
ΝΜ ’ Cd € , ¥ , φ, 5 4
ἄγοντι μὲν οἱ ἡσυχίην οὔτε TL προχωρέειν οἷον TE ἔσται
A 0 κ᾿ “ “ 9 4 ’ bed
TOV πρηγμάτων, οὔτε TLS κομιδὴ TO ὀπίσω φανήσεταε, λιμῷ
΄ ς ς - ,’ 3 ’ “ 3 a ‘
τέ οἱ ἡ στρατιὴ διαφθαρέεται" ἐπιχειρέοντι Se αὑτῷ και
" ᾽ , , N x Ν > » ῳφν, Υ
ἔργου ἐχομένῳ wavta τὰ κατὰ τὴν Ἐυρωπὴν ota τε εσται
a - , Ν > w¥
προσχωρῆσαι κατὰ πόλις τε καὶ Kat ἐθνεα, ἤτοι adt-
/ “ 4 a 4
σκομένων γε ἢ πρὸ τούτον ὁμολογεόντων. τροφὴν τε
σι 3 a e , , 2 ‘
ἕξειν σφέας τὸν ἐπέτεον αἰεὶ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καρπὸν. adda
/ A ᾽ὔ A é > , 3 a 2
δοκέειν γὰρ νεκήθεντα τῇ ναυμαχίῃ ον es ed Τῇ a
ρώπῃ tov Πέρσεα, eareov ὧν εἶναι φεύγειν, es ὃ ἐλθῃ φεὺ-
3 “ a δ 9 a 4 Ων A 3 ’ ΄
yov ἐς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ. τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ περὲ τῆς ἐκείνου ποιέ-
ἃ 4 > a > Λ ᾽ὔ’ λν a “
εσθαι ἤδη τὸν ἀγῶνα ἐκέλενε. ταύτης δὲ εἰχοντο τῆς γνω-
\ ’ a ν ς ἤ
μης καὶ Πελοποννησίων τῶν ἄλλων οἱ στρατηγοί.
e Ν a ‘ “
83. ὥς δε ἔμαθε ὅτι οὐ πείσει τοὺς ye πολλοὺς πλω-
? “ e , 4 “ Ν
ew ες τὸν Ελλήσποντον, ὁ Θεμιστοκλέης, μεταβαλὼν προς
‘ 9 ’ φ εν , 2 /
tous Αθηναίους (οὗτοι yap μάλιστα ἐκπεφευγοότων περιη-
4 e , , ) Δ ε , , . 7 8
μέκτεον, ὡρμεατὸ τε ἐς Tov EXXnoTovTOY TrAWELY καὶ ETL
’ > A ’ >» φ nN , Υ ᾿
σφέων αὐτῶν βαλλόμενοι, εἰ ὦλλον μὴ βουλοίατο) ἔλεγε

VUE, 110.] “Message of Themistocles to the King. 187

4 . + Ww a ον
σφι rade’ Καὶ αὑτὸς ἤδη πολλοῖσε παρεγενόμην, καὶ
AX ΄-“ x ’ 3 4 ὔ a θ ᾿ς y¥ ὃ 3 9 ’
πολλῷ πλεω ἀκήκοα ToLade γενέσθαε" ἄνδρας ἐς ἀναγκαίην

> , , 5) J » Ff s 3
ἀπειληθέντας νενικημένους ἀναμάχεσθαιί τε καὶ ἀναλαμ»
’ Ν / 4 e n ‘ [2 A
βώνειν τὴν προτέρην κακότητα. ἡμεῖς δὲ (εὕρημα yap
δ, e f 3 Ν Q x e ᾽ὔὕ ’ ἃς
εὑρήκαμεν ἡμέας τε αὐτοὺς καὶ THY ᾿Ελλαδα, νεφος τοσοῦτο
3 [4 3 , “ ’ ΝΥ ΄
ἀνθρώπων ἀνωσάμενοι) μὴ διωκωμεν ἄνδρας φεύγοντας.
a 6 9 + ,
84. τάδε yap οὐκ ἡμεῖς κατεργασάμεθα, ἀλλὰ θεοί τε καὶ
4 3 ¥ “ a 3 , Ν a 2
ἥρωες, ot ἐφθόνησαν ἄνδρα ἕνα τῆς te Aains καὶ τῆς Ev-
, ὶ a 7” > @ , . 9 & A “
ρώπης βασιλεῦσαι. ἐόντα ἀνόσιόν τε καὶ ἀτάσθαλον" ὃς τὰ
ey . ¥ 3 ’ 3 ’ 3 a, ᾿
ἱρὰ καὶ τὰ ἴδια ἐν ὁμοίῳ ἐποιέετο, ἐμπίπρως τε καὶ κατα-
, a a 9 Aa N δ ’
βώλλων τῶν θεῶν τὰ ἀγάλματα . ὃς καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν
2 , A A 2 > φ Ν ΓΙ ᾽ “
ἀπεμαστίγωσε πέδας TE κατῆκε. ἀλλ, εὖ γὰρ ἔχει ες TO
‘ eon a ‘ 3 ae , ¢ 8
παρεὸν ἡμῖν, νῦν μὲν ἐν τῇ Βλλάδι καταμείναντας ἡμέων
I a 3 a a 2 ’ > »,
τε αὐτῶν ἐπιμεληθῆναι καὶ τῶν οἰκετέων" καί τις οἰκίην TE
᾽ ’ Ν , 3 a > 4 / 2
ἀναπλασασθω καὶ σπόρον ανακῶς ἐχέτω, παντελέως ἀπε-
΄ Ν 7 ad ‘ a ἊΝ 4 > A
λάσας tov BapBapov: ἅμα Se τῷ capt καταπλεωμεν ἐπι
e ’ \ 9 ’ a Νν. 3 ,
Ἑλλησπόντου καὶ ᾿Ιωνίης. Tatra ἔλεγε ἀποθήκην μέλ-
’ 3 ἣν é a A »” ,
λων ποιήσεσθαι es τὸν Πέρσεα, iva, ἣν apa τί μιν KaTa-
’ὔ Α 3 ’ ’ Ν ϑ , 4
AauBavn πρὸς Αθηναίων πάθος, ἔχη ἀποστροφὴν" τὰ περ
4 . > “ , δ a ’ ,
ὧν καὶ ἐγένετο. 85. Θεμιστοκλέης μὲν ταῦτα λέγων διέ-
9 a Ν 3 ’ 9 N “ ,
βαλλε, ᾿Αθηναῖοι Se ἐπείθοντο" ἐπειδὴ yap, καὶ προτερον
, 9 N 3 aN ἢ ἢ \
δεδογμένος εἶναι σοφὸς, ἐφάνη ἐὼν ἀληθέως σοφὸς τε καὶ
Ν ’ὔ φ “A 4 4 e .
εὐβουλος, πάντως ἑτοῖμοι ἦσαν λέγοντι πείθεσθαι. ὡς δε
Φ ’ ςφ 23 ’ ᾽ a
οὗτοί οἱ ἀνεγνωσμένοι ἦσαν, αὐτίκα μετὰ ταῦτα ὁ Θεμιστο-
a y¥ 93 4 ¥ a wn 9
κλεης ἄνδρας ἀπέπεμπε ἔχοντας πλοῖον, τοῖσι ἐπίστευε
a > γι. , 3 ὔ ‘N as AN b
σιγᾶν, ἐς πᾶσαν βάσανον ἀπικνεομένοισι, τὰ αὐτὸς ἐνετεί-
to ? a >’ # 2
Nato βασιλεῖ φράσαι" τῶν καὶ Σίκιννος ὁ οἰκέτης αὖτις
> + 2 “ > 4 3 "
ἐγένετο. ob ἐπεί τε ὠπίκοντο πρὸς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν, οἱ μὲν
ὔ 2" a , 7 Ν 9 Ν . aul
κατέμενον ἐπὶ τῷ πλοίῳ, Σίκιννος δὲ ἀναβὰς παρὰ Ξερξεα
y¥. ’ ¥ 4 ἣ ,
ἔλεγε trade* ᾿ἔπεμψε με Θεμιστοκλέης ὁ Νεοκλέος, στρα-
a “ 3 ’ > A Ἂ A , ’ bd
τηγὸς μὲν Αθηναίων, avnp δε τῶν συμμάχων πάντων apt-

188 Retreat of Xerxes. ‘ [Herop.

“ [4 [4 td a 4 e
gros καὶ σοφωτατος, φρασοντά tot ὅτε Θεμιστοκλεὴης ὁ
3 a N ’ e ͵ Ν \ ὦ
᾿Αθηναῖος, σοὶ βουλόμενος ὑπουργεειν, ἐσχε τοὺς ᾿ Ελληνας

Α a g 4 \ . Ν ᾽ ς ’
tas veas βουλομένους διωκειν καὶ τὰς ev ᾿Ελλησπόντῳ
7 4 Ἀ a > e ’ “ 4
yepupas Avew. καὶ νὺν κατ ἡσυχίην πολλὴν Kopileo.

e ‘ A , > 9 3 ,
Ou se ταῦτα σημήναντες ATETAWOY ὀπίσω.

- Οἱ δ᾽ ἀμφὶ Ἐέρξεα, ἐ ἐπισχόντες ὀλίγας ἡμέρας μετὰ
τὴν ναυμαχίην, ἐξήλαυνον ἐς Βοιωτοὺς τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδόν.
ἔδοξε γὰρ Μαρδονίῳ ἅμα μὲν προπέμψαι βασιλέα, ἅμα

‘N 3 ’ 4 a ΝΡ ’
de ἀνωρίη εἶναι τοῦ ἔτεος πολεμέειν" χειμερίσαι δὲ ἄμει-
3 3 ’ , ¥ oS aw σι
vov εἶναι ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ, καὶ ἐπειτεν ἅμα τῷ cape πειρᾶσθαι
a“ ’ὔ e Ἁ 3 ’ 9 “
τῆς Πελοποννήσου. ws δὲ ἀπίκατο ἐς την Θεσσαλίην,
3 a ’ 9 ,ὕ ἤ Ν ’ ’
ἐνθαῦτα Μαρδόνιος ἐξελέγετο πρώτους μὲν Πέρσας πάών-

N 3 ’ὔ 4 Ν ¢ 4 “

τας τοὺς adavatous καλεομένους, πλην Tdapveos τοῦ στρα-
a Φ δ 2 ¥ , ’ ν as
THOU (οὗτος γὰρ οὐκ ἔφη λείψεσθαι βασιλέος), μετὰ δὲ
a Ἐς 4 Ν X “ Υ̓͂
τῶν ἄλλων Περσέων τοὺς θωρηκοφόρους καὶ τὴν ἵππον
Ν ,ὕ Ay , “ , Ν ,
τὴν χιλίην, καὶ Μήδους τε καὶ Σάκας καὶ Βακτρίους τε
3 . N 4 nN N N a A Ἢ
Ινδοὺς, καὶ τὸν wetov καὶ τὴν ἵππον. ταῦτα μεν
“ a Λ 9 XN a ¥ : ’ ? ’
ἐθνεα oda εἵλετο, ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων ἐξελέγετο
9 > 4 ’ ΄ ’ “
κατ᾽ ὀλίγους " ὥστε σύμπαντας τριήκοντα μυριάδας γενέ-

δ . a 4 Ν a 3
σθαι συν ἱππεῦσι. 8%. BepEns δε, Μαρδόνιον ev Θεσσα-

7 “ a, Nf ᾽ 4 Ν ,ὔ ϑ “ € ,
λίῃ καταλίπων, αὑτὸς ἐπορεύετο κατὰ TAYXOS ἐς TOV Ελλησ-
Ἅ 9 9 “ a “a 4 3
πόντον, καὶ ἀπικνέεται ἐς τὸν πόρον τῆς διαβάσιος ἐν
’ ᾿ , ne A 2 t a A
πέντε καὶ τεσσεράκοντα ἡμέρῃσι, ἀπάγων τῆς στράτα
Jar ’ 3 n
οὐδεν μέρος ὡς εἰπεῖν. ὅκου δὲ πορευόμενοι γινοίατο καὶ
κατ᾽ οὕστινας ἀνθρώπους, τὸν τούτων καρπὸν ἁρπάζοντες
ἐσιτέοντο'" εἰ δὲ καρπὸν μηδένα εὕροιεν, οἱ δὲ τὴν ποίην
‘ ? A aA 3 4 N A 4 x Ν
τὴν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἀναφνομένην καὶ τῶν δενδρέων Tov φλοίον
΄ N s + ’ 4

περιλέποντες καὶ τὰ φύλλα καταδρέποντες κατήσθιον͵
e 4 a , na >» Ὁ . ¥. a7
ὁμοίως τῶν TE ἡμέρων καὶ τῶν ἀγρίων, καὶ ἔλειπον οὐδέν"
a > 3 4 e oN A 3 Ν Ν ’ “
ταῦτα 5 ἐποίευν ὕπο λιμοῦ. επιλαβὼν δὲ λοιμὸς τε τὸν
Ν Ν ’ 2 τὸν 4 Ν ν» Ν
στρατὸν καὶ δυσεντερίη κατ ὁδὸν διέφθειρε. Tous δε καὶ

VIIL, 118.] Eis Passage to Asa. 189

4 > a_ 3 ὔ a , Ψ
νοσέοντας αὐτῶν κατέλιπε, ἐπιτάσσων τῇσι πόλισι, ἵνα
ο; ’ 3 , ͵ N , 3
ἑκάστοτε γίνοιτο ἐλαύνων, μελεδαέίνειν τε καὶ τρέφειν, ἐν

’ ’ “ 3 7 A , x 2
Θεσσαλίῃ Te τινας Kat ἐν Zips τῆς Παιονίης καὶ ev Maxe-

, ¥ NS ON εν Ψ ‘ a N oe
δονίη. ἔνθα καὶ τὸ ἱρὸν ἅρμα καταλιπὼν τοῦ Atos, ὅτε
2 “ e 4 WV. 3 “ ? 3 Λ 3 ‘ a
ert τὴν ᾿Ελλωδα ἤλαυνε, ἀπιὼν οὐκ ἀπέλαβε" αλλὰ δον-

ε ’ a | Pe 3 ’ὔ 4 ¥
τες ob Παίονες τοῖσι Θρήϊξι, ἀπαίτέοντος Ἐέρξεω, ehacav
4 eo UN ra wv «ἢ a : “
γεμομένας ἁρπασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν ἄνω Θρηΐκων τῶν περὶ
Ν N a , ? ’ e ‘ ,
Tas πηγᾶς τοῦ Στρυμόνος οἰκημένων. SBS. οἱ de Περσαι,
ε ΩΣ a «ἢ ’ > +4 2 SN Ν ’
ὡς ex τῆς Θρηΐκης TWopevopevoe ἀπίκοντο emt τὸν Topo»,
9 ’ Ν ς ’ “ ᾿ ' 4 3
ἐπείγόομενοι τὸν Εἰλλησποντον τῇσι νηυσι διέβησαν ες
¥ \ \ , ? 4 ¥ 3 ,
Αβυδον: tas γὰρ σχεδίας οὐκ εὕρον ere ἐντεταμεένας,
3 > e A ΄“ ’ 3 A Ν ’
αλλ, VITO χείμωνος διαλελυμένας. ἐνθαῦτα δε κατέχομενοι

’ , ΕἾ > eas .-. ἡ» 24. , ’
σιτία τε πλέω ἢ κατ ὁδὸν ἐλάγχανον, οὐδένα TE κοσμον
2 ’ὔ \ eo 4 ? ,ὔ a
ἐμπιπλάμενοι, καὶ ὕδατα μεταβάλλοντες, aTréOvnoKov τοῦ

a a 7, ’ € as \ of pot ἢ
στρατοῦ TOU περίιεοντος πολλοί. οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ἅμα Ξερξῃ
3 s > 7 Ν . \ A 4
ἀπικνέονται ἐς Σάρδις. 59. Hots δὲ καὶ ἄλλος δδὲ λόγος

, e 2 Ν ta / 3 t ϑ 9 , 3 ’
λεγόμενος, ws, ἐπειδὴ Ξέρξης ἀπελαύνων εξ Αθηνέων ἀπι-

> 9 ey 7 \ 2 48 ͵ 3 a > » e
xeto ἐπ Hiova τὴν ἐπὶ Στρυμόνι, ἐνθεῦτεν οὐκέτι ὁδοίπο-
, σι 3 q ν “ ὩΣ f oe 3 4
pine διεχρᾶτο, ἀλλὰ τὴν μεν στρατιὴν Tdapvet ἐπιτράπει
1 ’, 3 “ ς ’ > AN > 3 N “ 4
amuyew ἐς tov ᾿Ελλησποντον, αὑτὸς 6 emt νεὸς Powwic-
3 Ν ? / 2 Ν 4 , ; ’
σης ἐπιβὰς ἐκομίζετο ἐς τὴν Ασίην. πλώοντα δὲ μιν
” ’ e a , Ν ἐν
ἄνεμον Στρυμονίην ὑπολαβεῖν μέγαν καὶ κυματίην. καὶ
Ὡ - 4 , ΄’΄ a Ν σ
δη, μᾶλλον γὰρ τι χειμαίνεσθαι, γεμούσης τῆς νεὸς ὥστε
? QA nn ’ 3 Yr. 4 a
ἐπὶ τοῦ καταστρωματος ἐπεόντων συχνῶν Περσέων τῶν
\ bom - / , 3 a 3 a , Ν
συν έρξη κομιζομένων, ἐνθαῦτα es δεῖμα πεσοντα τον
’ ¥ ’ Ν ᾽ὔ ¥ 3 ,
βασίλέα εἰρεσθαι Bwoavta tov κυβερνήτην, εἰ τίς ἐστὶ
’ Ν Ν 4 s > Ν 3 ,
oft σωτηρίη. καὶ Tov εἶπαι" Δέσποτα, οὐκ ἐστι ‘ovdeuia,
ἉἍ ἃ a > , 2 a aA 3
ἣν μὴ τούτων ἁπαλλαγὴ TIS YyevnTaL τῶν πολλῶν ἐπιβα-
, .« pet 7 , 2 ΄ a 3
τέων. 90. καὶ Ἐερξεα λέγεται ἀκούσαντα ταῦτα εἶπαι"
Ὗ a , e , 4 ,
Avdpes Πέρσαι, viv τις διαδεξώτω ὑμέων βασιλέος κηδό-
3 a N 9 a > NV e , Ν δ
μενος" ἐν ὑμῖν yap olxe εἶναι ἐμοὶ ἡ σωτηρίη. Tov μεν

190 Retreat of Xerzes. . (Hxrop.

a ’ Ν Ν ͵ 3 a > Ν ’
ταῦτα λέγειν, Tous δὲ προσκυνέοντας ἐκπηδᾶν ἐς τὴν θα-
N N , ν᾽ a a . 9 am
λασσαν, Kat τὴν νέα ἐπικουφισθεῖσαν οὕτω δὴ ἀποσωθῆναι
3 Ν 3 , e N 3 a , 3 a “ βαφ »
es τὴν Ασίην. ὡς δε ἐκβῆναι τάχιστα ἐς ynv τὸν Ἐξερξεα,
“A 4 oS ‘x ¥ 4 Ν Ν
ποιῆσαι τοιόνδε" ὅτι μὲν ἔσωσε βασίλέος την Ψψύυχην,
, , ᾽ὔ . , o Ν
δωρήσασθαι χρυσέῃ στεφάνῃ τον κυβερνητεα, ὅτε Se Περ-
7 \ > ἢ 2 ΝΥ ‘ δ > ΜΕ
σέων πολλοὺυς ἀπώλεσε, ἀποταάμειν THY κεφαλὴν αὑτοῦ.
φΦ Ν wv é a “ a as
91. Outros δὲ ἄλλος λέγεται λογος περὶ τοῦ Ἐξερξεω
, ? a ιν Ν ¥ Ν ‘
νόστου, οὐδαμῶς ἐμοιγε TITTOS, οὔτε ἄλλως οὔτε TO Περ-
, a ͵ ’ \ N ΝΥ . > 2 9 a
σέων τοῦτο πάθος. εἰ yap δὴ ταῦτα οὕτω εἰρέθη Ex τοῦ
’ ΩΝ "" 4 ? ’ a, ’ 3 Mw
κυβερνήτεω προς Beptea, ev μυρίησι γνωμῇῃσι μίαν οὐκ ἔχω
> 4 Ν ? A a 8 x Ul , poe N “ 3 a
ἀντίξοον, μὴ ove ἂν ποιῆσαι βασίλέα τοιόνδε, TOUS μεν ἐκ TOU
, ᾽ὔ 2 ͵ , >? ,
καταστρώματος καταβιβάσαι es κοίλην νέα, eovras Πέρσας
Ν ’ Ν 4 a ι 2
καὶ Περσέων τοὺς πρώτους, τῶν δ᾽ ἐρετέων ἐόντων Φοινίκων
4 2 a Ν od a , 3ς. > ‘
ὅκως οὐκ ἂν ἰσον πλῆθος τοίσι Περσησι ἐξέβαλε es την
3 > ¢ Ν ς Q 4 ’ ¥ ena
θάλασσαν. add ὁ μεν, WS καὶ πρότερον μοι εἴρηται, ὁδῷ
’ rd a ar a ? ’ 3 ν 3 Α ͵ὕ
NPEOMEVOS ἅμα τῷ ἄλλῳ στρατῷ απενοστησε ἐς THY Acinv.
ς av a@ , 3 , SY ΝΥ
92. Οἱ δε΄ Ελληνες, τραπόμενοι ἐς Καρυστον καὶ δηϊω-
x a \ ’ 3 ͵ 3 a
σαντες αὐτῶν THY χώρην, ἀπαλλασσοντο ες Σαλαμῖνα.
a 4 nw a 9 a 3 , 2 ΙΝ
πρῶτα μὲν νυν τοῖσι θεοῖσι ἐξείλον ἀκροθινια ἄλλα τε καὶ
, a , ᾿ \ 9 9 δ ᾽ a a
τριήρεας τρεῖς Φοινίσσας, τὴν μεν es ἰσθμὸν uvabewwat, ἢ
¥ 5 9 9 VY @ ‘ S208 , Sas a 4
περ ἔτι Kat ἐς ἐμὲ ἦν, τὴν Se ἐπι Σούνιον, τὴν de τῷ At-
3 a 9 ~ Ν Ν “ 0 Ν
αντι αὐτοῦ ἐς Σαλαμινα. μετα δε τοῦτο διεδάσαντο τὴν
“ἍἝ δ . Σ , > ἢ 3 δ 3 Pa
Aninv καὶ τὰ ἀκροθίνια ἀπέπεμψαν es Aedrdous, ex τῶν
’ 2 “ 4 ϑ “ ΑΝ 9 ’ ν ΣΝ
ἐγένετο ἀνδριας ἔχων ἐν τῇ χειρὶ ἀκρωτήριον νεὸς, εὡν
“" , 4 4 Ν Ν 4 a
μέγαθος δυωδεκα πηχέων. 98. Mera δε τὴν διαίρεσιν τῆς
A ¥ / 3 4 93 LN 9 x ’
ληΐης ἔπλωον οἱ Ελληνες ἐς tov Ισθμὸν αριστήϊα δωσον-
a 3 ͵ 7ὔ ς , > s N Λ
τες τῷ ἀξιωτάτῳ γενομένῳ Ελλήνων ava τὸν πόλεμον
A e ‘ 3 4 @ 4 a SY
τοῦτον. ὡς δὲ ἀπικόμενοι οἱ στρατηγοὶ διενέμοντο τὰς
, ϑ ἈΝ a 4 A a + a ‘
ψήφους ἐπὶ tov Ποσειδεωνος τῷ βωμῷ, τὸν πρῶτον καὶ
“ ’᾽ 4 9 3 a a) a
τὸν δεύτερον κρίνοντες ἐκ πάντων, ἐνθαῦτα πᾶς τις αὐτῶν
e a? qf!) ἈΝ ΝΥ ἌΝ Ψ So , Υ͂
εωυτῷ ετίθετο την ψῆφον, αὑτὸς ἕκαστος δοκέων ἀριστος

VUL, 180.) Honors paid to Themistocles. 191

é ᾽ 4
γενέσθαι, δεύτερα δὲ οἱ πολλοὶ συνεξέπιπτον Θεμιστοκλέα
’ - 4 a UU ‘
κρίνοντες. οἱ μὲν δὴ ἐμουνοῦντο, Θεμιστοκλέης Se Seute-
3 ’ ᾿
ρείοισε ὑπερεβάλλετο πολλόν. 94. Ov βουλομένων δὲ
a A 3
ταῦτα κρίνειν τῶν Ελλήνων φθόνῳ, adn ἀποπλωόντων
3 “ > ,
ἑκάστων ἐς τὴν ἑωυτῶν ἀκρίτων, ὅμως Θεμιστοκλέης
3 2 ’ “a
ἐβώσθη τε καὶ ἐδοξώθη εἶναι ἀνὴρ πολλὸν ᾿Ελλήνων
“ - a: >
σοφώτατος ava πᾶσαν τὴν ‘Eddaba. ὅτι δὲ νικῶν οὐκ
’ , “ a 9 a ΄ > /
ἐτιμήθη πρὸς τῶν ev Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχησάντων, αὐτίκα
‘ a“ é A
peta ταῦτα ἐς Λακεδαίμονα ἀπίκετο ἐθέλων τιμηθῆναι.
ΠῚ ’ , Ν
καί μιν Λακεδαιμόνιος καλῶς μὲν ὑπεδέξαντο, μεγάλως Se
,). , 3 Soo o ες 3 ’ > 4
ἐτίμησαν. ἀριστήϊα μὲν νυν ἔδοσαν Ἐυρυβιάδη ἐλαίης
“ , ν ,-- Ν
στέφανον, σοφίης δὲ καὶ δεξιότητος Θεμιστοκλεῖ, καὶ τού-
υ OTE ἐλαί ἐδωρή δέ δ D €
τῷ στεῴφανον ἐλαίης. εδωρήσαντο δὲ pi ὄχῳ τῷ εν
, : > @ \
Σπάρτῃ καλλιστεύοντι. αἰνέσαντες δὲ πολλὰ, προέπεμψαν
b ) . @ 4
ἀπιόντα τριηκόσιοι Σπαρτιητέων λογάδες, οὗτοι οἵπερ
e 4 ’ A ¥ a a ζω ω
ἵππέες καλέονται, μέχρι οὔρων τῶν Τεγεητικῶν" μοῦνον δὴ
A ’ a a ᾽ν a
τοῦτον πάντων ἀνθρώπων τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν Σπαρτιῆται προ-
’ . 9 ry ’ 2 >
ἐπεμψαν. 95. ‘Ns Se ἐκ τῆς AaxedSaipovos ἀπίκετο ἐς
Ν 3 ’ 3 a “Ὁ a 9 A
τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, ἐνθαῦτα Τιμόδημος ᾿Αφιδναίος, τῶν ἐχθρῶν
Ν σὰ ’ > A 3 4
μεν τῶν Θεμιστοκλέος ἐὼν, ἄλλως δὲ οὐ τῶν ἐπιφανεων
3 A / 4 3 ’, Ν ’ Ν
ἀνδρῶν, φθόνῳ καταμαργεων ἐνείκεε Tov Θεμιστοκλέα, THY
3 ’ ¥ ’ e . XN ϑ ’ »
ες Aaxedaipova ἄπιξιν προφέρων, ὡς δια tas Αθηνας ἔχοι
ΑΝ [2 “ x S ? 9 3 9 e 4
Ta yepea τὰ παρὰ Aaxedapoviwv, αλλ ov δι᾽ εωντον.
e . 9 , 3 3 4 a / e 4 4
ὁ δε, ἐπείτε οὐκ ἐπαύετο ταῦτα λέγων ὁ Τιμόδημος, εἰπε"
et ¥ YR 2 NOON ἢ 2 , ¢d
Οὕτω ἔχει τοι" οὔτ ἂν ἐγὼ ewv Βελβινίτης ετιμηθην οὕτω
. e ¥OSN ‘ ΝΜ oN 3 a
ων peda ouT ἂν συ, ὦνθρωπε, ἐῶν Αθηναίος.
e Ν “ C mt i 4 e 4
Ὁ δε ναυτικὸς ὁ Ξερξεω περιγενόμενος, ὡς προσε-
abe τῇ ᾿Ασίῃ φεύγων ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος καὶ βασιλέα τε καὶ
τὴν στρατιὴν ἐκ Χερσονήσου διεπόρθμευσε ἐς "Αβυδον,

ἐχειμέρισε ἐν Κύμῃ.

THUCYDIDES.

PYLUS AND SPHACTERIA.

e N N 4 > AN , a ¢. 4 4
1. Ὕπο Se τοὺς αὑτοὺς χρόνους τοῦ ἦρος, πρὶν τὸν
a 3 3 a 44 , “ e 4 > 7
σῖτον ev ἀκμῇ εἶναι, Πελοποννησίοι καὶ ot ξυμμαχοι ece-
3 Ν 3 Ν e \ 9 ς« ? ,
Barov es τὴν Αττικὴν, ἡγεῖτο Se Αγις ὁ. ApytOupov,
, 4 N 3 , 36. 9 "
“Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλεὺς - καὶ ἐγκαθεξόμενοι ednovy τὴν
a 9 a Ν ᾽ 4 a 3 /
γῆν. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δε τάς τε τεσσαράκοντα ναῦς ες Σικελίαν
2 , f / AN Ν N
ἀπέστειλαν, ὥσπερ παρεσκευάξοντο, καὶ στρατηγους TOUS
e 4 3 UU Ν 4 4 ‘
ὑπολοίπους Evpupedovta καὶ Σοφοκλέα" Πυθόδωρος yup
e 4 3 aA ΜΜ a 3 ’ 3 N
ὁ τρίτος αὐτῶν ἤδη wpoadixto ἐς Σικελίαν. . εἶπον δε
΄ Ν / oS 4 A 9 a
τουτοις καὶ Κερκυραίων ἅμα παραπλέοντας τῶν ev τῇ
Xr 3 X: An ἃ ὅλ. ’ eon a > “ 4
πόλει ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ol ἐλῃστεύοντο ὑπὸ τῶν EV τῷ ορει
᾽ὔ ἈΝ “ > 4 A φ ’
φυγάδων" καὶ Πελοποννησίων αὐτόσε νῆες ἑξήκοντα παρε-
? “A 3 “A y¥ x, Ἀ A y¥
πεπλεύυκέεσαν τοῖς EV τῷ OPEL τίμωροι, καὶ λιμοῦ OVTOS
΄ 2 a 4 , ’ , δ
μεέγωαλου ἐν TH πόλει νομίζοντες κατασχήσειν ῥᾳδίως τὰ
, 4 5 Η͂ ? 4 “ Ν 3 ,
πράγματα. Δημοσθένει Se, ovte ἰδιωτῃ μετὰ τὴν ἀναχω-
Ν >] 93 3 A “΄ * A
pnow την εξ Axapvavias, αὐτῷ δεηθέντι εἶπον χρῆσθαι
a Ν rd A 7 Ν ΑΝ ’
ταῖς vavot ταύταις, ἣν βούληται, περὶ την Πελοποννησον.
ΝΑ e 3 [4 γ᾽ A Ν Ν “
3. καὶ ὡς ἐγένοντο πλέοντες κατὰ τὴν Aaxwrexny, Kai
3 6 cf e a 3 ΄ ¥ ᾽ν A
ἐπυνθάνοντο ὅτε at νῆες ev Κερκύρᾳ non εἰσι τῶν Πελο-
/ e Ν > 4 Ν A 9 / 7
ποννησίων, ὁ μὲν Ἐυρυμέδων καὶ Σοφοκλῆς ἠπείγοντο ες
Ν ΄ἷ Ν 4 > Ν vd A
tiv Κέρκυραν, ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης ἐς τὴν Πύλον πρῶτον
3 4 , Ὶ \ \ 7 ἃ “ Q a
ἐκέλευε σχοντας αὑτοὺς καὶ πράξαντας ἃ δεῖ τὸν πλοῦν
A ϑ , Ν A , Ν 3 ,
ποιείσθαι " ἀντίλεγοντων δε, κατὰ τύχην χειμὼν ETLYEVO-
, 4 a 3 ᾿ ͵΄ \ oe
μένος κατήνεγκε tas ναῦς es τὴν Πυλον. 4. καὶ ὁ 4η-
4 3 Ν 9 , / “ ’ 3. AN ’
μοσθένης εὐθὺυς ἠξίου τειχίξεσθαι τὸ χωρίον, ---- ἐπε τούτῳ

IV, 6.] Fortifying of Pylus. ° 193

Α ἤ 4 9 Υ̓͂ Ν » ,
yap ξυνεπλεύυσε, --- καὶ ἀπέφαινε πολλὴν εὐπορίαν ξύλων
‘ / N , Nee | . er > »
τε καὶ λίθων, Kat φύσει καρτερὸν ὃν καὶ ἐρῆμον αὐτὸ
rN N a , > » \ , ,
τε καὶ ἐπὶ πολυ τῆς χωρας" ἀπέχει yup σταδίους μά-
λ 6 Πύλο A > 4 4 ,. 2 b ] re
tata ἡ Πύλος τῆς Σπάρτης τετρακοσίους, Kat ἔστιν ἐν τῇ
, N ¥ a a . , 8 e
Μεσσηνίᾳ ποτε oven γῇ, καλοῦσι δε αὑτὴν οἱ Δακεδαιμό-
’ e Ν “ ¥ ¥
viol Kopudactov. οἱ δὲ πολλᾶς ἔφασαν εἶναι ἄκρας ἐρή-
a , , ’
μους τῆς Πελοποννήσου, ἣν βούληται καταλαμβάνων τὴν
f A e Ν 3 ¥ ¥ Ἃ
πόλιν δαπανᾶν. ὅ. ὡς δε οὐκ ἔπειθεν οὗτε τοὺς στρατη-
\ ¥ 4 , Φ N ’
yous οὔτε τοὺς στρατιωτας, ὕστερον καὶ τοῖς ταξιάρχοις
tA ¢ -3A e an ϑ , to 3 a a
Kowwoas, ἡσύχαζεν ὑπὸ ἀπλοίας, μέχρι αὑτοῖς τοῖς στρα-
4 / € Ν 3 ¢ A 3
τιωταις σχολάζουσιν ὁρμὴ ἐπέπεσε περιστᾶσιν ἐκτειχίσαι
QA a N 2 ’ > ] ’ ’
τὸ χωρίον. καὶ ἐγχειρήσαντες εἰργάξοντο, σιδήρια μὲν
᾿ 2 ¥ , ‘ ,
λιθουργὰ οὐκ ἔχοντες, λογάδην Se φέροντες λέθους, καὶ
’ e id ’ Vi “ΕΣ Q a ¥
ξυνετίθεσαν ws ἕκαστον te ξυμβαίνοι" καὶ τὸν πήλον, εἰ
πῇ 5 ’ a 6 3 ’ 3 ’ὔ 2 A a ; ¥
υ δέοι χρῆσθαι, ἀγγείων ἀπορίᾳ emt τοῦ vwTtov ἐφερον,
ὡς , e , 3 ,. N Ν a
ἐγκεκυφότες TE WS μάλιστα μέλλοι ἐπιμένειν, καὶ τὼ χεῖρε
3 3 ’ ’ὔ eg Ν 3 4 ,
ἐς τουπίσω ξυμπλεέκοντες, ὅπως μὴ αἀποπίπτοι. 6. παντί
’ ’. “ ‘ / . 9
Te τρόπῳ ἠπείγοντο φθῆναι τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους τα ἐπι-
’ 3 ͵ . » a N N 7
μαχωτατα ἐξεργασάμενοι πρὶν ἐπιβοηθῆσαι" τὸ γὰρ πλέον
A ἙΝ Ν e Q Fart Ww
TOU χωρίου αὐτὸ καρτερὸν ὑπῆρχε, καὶ οὐδεν ἔδει τείχους.
e wv A ννσ 4
οἱ δὲ ἑορτήν twa ἔτυχον ἄγοντες, καὶ ἅμα πυνθανόμενοι
> 9 , 5 a ε “ 29, ἢ a 3 ς
ἐν ὁλεγωρία ἐποιοῦντο, ὡς ὅταν ἐξέλθωσιν ἢ οὐχ ὑπομε-
νοῦντας σφᾶς ἢ ῥαδίως ληψόμενοι βίᾳ' καί τι καὶ αὐτοὺς
ας σφᾶς ἢ ῥᾳδίως ληψόμ 3
4 “ ¥ > a 3 ’ A 3 ’
ὁ στρατὸς ἔτι ἐν ταῖς Αθηναις ὧν ἐπέσχεν. τειχίσαντες
N 3 a A 4 “ “ 3 x ἁ Λ
δε οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοῦ χωρίου Ta πρὸς ἤπειρον καὶ ἃ μαλιστα
¥ 9 ς » a Ν N ΄ ‘ a ,
ede. ev ἡμέραις ξξ, τὸν μὲν Δημοσθένην μετὰ νεῶν πέντε
> on ; , a as / S939
αὐτοῦ φύλακα καταλείπουσιν, ταῖς δὲ πλείοσι ναυσὶ τὸν ἐς
Ν Aa a 4 ’ e > 9
τὴν Κέρκυραν πλοῦν καὶ Σικελίαν ἠπείγοντο. %. οἱ δ᾽ ἐν
a 9 a “ ’ € 3 4 “ 4
τῇ Αττικῇ ὄντες Πελοποννήσιοι, ws ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου
’ 3 ; \ ͵ >.> » ,
κατειλημμένης, ἀνεχώρουν KATA τάχος ET οἰκου, νομίζοντες
»- e ’ .9 ς ἃ 9 a / \
μεν ot AaxeSarpoviot καὶ Ayis ὁ βασιλεὺς οἰκειον σφίσι τὸ
19

194 ’ Pylus and Sphacteria. (Taocyp.

. 8 , Pa ‘ . 9 ’ 4 a of
περὶ τὴν Πύλον" ἅμα de πρῳ εσβαλοντες, Kat τοῦ σίτου
δ 4 nn ¥ 3 ’ n ζω a ,
ETL χλωροῦ ὄντος, ἐσπανίξζον τροφῆς τοῖς πολλοῖς, χείμων

3 4 / Ἁ * a /

Te ἐπιγενόμενος μείζων παρὰ τὴν καθεστηκυίαν wpav
3 / Ν 4 [2 , ’ 3
ἐπίεσε TO στράτευμα. ὥστε πολλαχοθεν ξυνεβη avayo-

a ’ a 3 Α A ’ 4 ἈΝ
ρῆσαί τε θᾶσσον αὑτοὺς καὶ βραχυτάτην γενέσθαι τὴν
3 Ν , eo” \ / ΙΝ ’ a
ἐσβολὴν ταύτην " ἡμέρας yap πεντεκαίδεκα ἐμειναν ἐν τῇ
9 a

Artixy.

9 ’ “ A 3 9 “

8. ᾿Αναχωρησάντων Se τῶν ex τῆς Ἀττικῆς Πελοπον-

a e a 3 N N 1 e > , κ΄
νησίων, οἱ Σπαρτιᾶται αὐτοὶ μὲν καὶ οἱ ἐγγύτατα τῶν

, 3 δ ? ’ > AN Ν ΄ : ‘ ¥
περιοίκων εὐθὺς ἐβοήθουν ἐπὶ τὴν Πύλον, trav δε ἄλλων
/ , > @ ev ¥ 3 ’
Λακεδαιμονίων Bpadurepa ἐγίγνετο ἡ ἔφοδος, ἄρτι ἀφιγμε-
3.) @¢ 4 “a ’ N Q a
νων up ἑτέρας στρατιᾶς. περιήγγελλον δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν
4 a ao / > A 4. xs 7 AN
Πελοπόννησον βοηθεῖν ὅτε τάχιστα ἐπὶ Πύλον, καὶ emi
“ 3 a 4 A A “ Cee ἢ» ¥ A
τὰς ev TH Κερκύρᾳ ναῦς σφῶν tas εξήκοντα ἔπεμψαν, at
e a Ν / 3 “ XN a ‘
ὑπερενεχθεισαι τὸν Δευκαδίων ἰσθμον, Kat λαθοῦσαι τας
>. ͵ 9 \ a 3 2 8 ΄ a
ev Ζωκύνθῳ Attixas ναῦς, adixvovvtar ent Πύλον" παρὴν
\ y¥ Ne Χ ες , \ ’
δὲ ἤδη καὶ ὁ welos στρατός. Δημοσθένης δε, προσπλεον-
¥ A 4 e 4 / 4 a
τῶν ἔτι tov Πελοποννησίων, ὑπεκπέμπει φθάσας δύο ναῦς
3 9 a Ἧ ΓΟ 3 a ‘a 9 »’
ἀγγεῖλαι Evpupedovte καὶ τοῖς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐν Ζακύνθῳ
3 s A e “a , »’

Αθηναίοις παρεῖναι, ὡς τοῦ χωρίου κινδυνεύοντος. καὶ αἱ
N a . ’ ¥ δ ι 29 Ν
μὲν νῆες κατὰ ταχος ἔπλεον κατὰ τὰ ἐπεσταλμένα ὑπο
4 e Ν 4 ’
Δημοσθένους" 9. οἱ δε Λακεδαιμόνιοι παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς
a a a a a Ν Ν ’
τῷ τειχίσματι προσβαλοῦντες κατά τε γῆν και κατα θα-

λα ν a 14 e δί ες »ν,ἴ 2 ὃ ( ὃ Ν ΄
σσαν, ἐλπίξοντες ῥᾳδίως αἱρήσειν οἰκοδόμημα διὰ ταχέων
? ΜΝ Ν 3 ’ 9 4 > ρΡ,ὁ
εἰργασμένον, καὶ ἀνθρώπων ολίγων ἐνόντων. προσδεχο-
δὲ Ν ᾿ν > N , a 9 a a 4
μενος ὃε καὶ τὴν απὸ Ζακύνθου τῶν Αττικῶν νεῶν Bor-
> a * a,’ Ν ‘ ’ ef. ‘
θειαν, ev νῷ εἶχον, ἣν ἄρα μὴ πρότερον Ewart, καὶ τους
ν A 7 2 ’ 4 . 4 a ?
ἔσπλους TOU λιμένος ἐμφράξαι, ὅπως μὴ ἢ τοῖς AOnvaioss
9 4, 3 3 ’ \ A
εφορμίσασθαι ες αὐτόν. 10. ἡ yap νῆσος ἡ Σφακτηρία
, ’ , ῇ .} . 9
καλουμένη, TOV TE λιμένα, παρατείνουσα καὶ εἐγγὺυς ἐπικει-
4 3 .Ν “A N Ν Υ̓ “ “ -
μένη, ἐχύρον ποιεῖ καὶ TOUS ἐσπλους στενοῦυς, TH μὲν δυοῖν

IV., 11. Preparations by Demosthenes. 195

a ? Ἀ + ’ ΠῚ 9 ὔ ,, “
veo διάπλουν κατὰ τὸ τείχίσμα τῶν Αθηναίων Kai τὴν
, a eas N . oy ¥ 9 . 4 9} ’ ---»
Πύλον, τῇ δὲ πρὸς THY ἄλλην ἤπειρον ὀκτώ ἢ EVVEA* VAW-
. 3 Ν a ς 3 3 ’ Φ ‘N , δ
δης τε καὶ ἀτριβης πᾶσα ὑπ᾽ ἐρημίας nv, καὶ μέγεθος περὶ
, 4 7 4 ‘ Ν 9 y
πεντεκαίδεκα σταδίους μάλιστα. TOUS μὲν οὖν ἔσπλους
δ 4 9 ᾽ὔ 4 ͵ ¥ “ CY
ταὶς ναυσὶν ἀντιπρῴροις βύζην κλῇσειν ἔμελλον" τὴν δὲ
a ΄ ΄ ‘ ? , «a 4 4 a
νῆσον ταύτην φοβούμενοι μὴ εξ αυτὴς Tov πόλεμον odict
a e , / 3 > A ἐν A cy
ποιῶνται, ὁπλίτας διεβίβασαν ἐς αὐτὴν καὶ Tapa τὴν
¥ ¥ ΑΥ̓͂
ἥπειρον ἄλλους εταξαν.
ὔ bY en ‘ ͵ὔ
11. Δημοσθένης δὲ, ὁρῶν τοὺς Aaxedaipoviovs μέλ-
[2 tJ oe a a
λοντας προσβάλλειν ναυσὶ τε ἅμα καὶ wel, παρεσκευ-
’ rN x A N ‘ , Ψ Φ x a FA
uleTo καὶ AUTOS, καὶ τας TpLNpELS αἵπερ ἦσαν. αὐτῷ ἀπὸ
a a 3 ’ e AN S 4
Tov καταλειφθεισῶν ἀνασπάσας ὑπὸ τὸ τείχισμα προσ-
’ὔ Ἁ “ rd 3 > aA (4 3 ὔ
ἐσταύρωσεν, καὶ τοὺς vauTas εξ αὐτῶν ὥπλισεν ἀσπίσι τε
“ Ὁ 9 g “ a 3 δ 49 @
φαυλαις καὶ οἱσυΐναις ταῖς πολλαῖς" ov yup ἣν ὅπλα εν
/ > » ld 3 Ν “ a 3 “a
χωρίῳ ἐρήμῳ πορίσασθαι, adda καὶ ταῦτα εκ λῃστρικῆς
; s Ν I ¥. ¥
Μεσσηνίων τριακοντόρου Kat κέλητος ἔλαβον, ot ἔτυχον
4 a ͵ ?
παραγενόμενοι. U2 ὁπλίταί τε τῶν Μεσσηνίων τούτων
e ’ὅ > »ν» @ 2 “ “ a A
ὡς TETTAPUKOVTA EYEVOVTO, OLS ἐχρῆτο μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων.
‘ δ 3 ‘ A 7 se , > ON
TOUS μεν οὖν TTOAAOUS τῶν TE ἀοπλων καὶ WILT LEVWY ἔπιε
\ / , ν 29 ‘ a / Ν Ν
τὰ τετειχισμένα μάλιστα καὶ ἐχυρὰ τοῦ χωρίου πρὸς τὴν
¥ 4 Ν > @ “ SS a
ἤπειρον ἔταξε, προειπὼν ἀμύνασθαι. tov πεζον, ἣν προσ-
Λ > NN “ 3 a, ? ’ e ’ 4 ,ὕ
BudrAn* autos δε, ἀπολεξάμενος ex πάντων ἐξήκοντα οπλί-
ἧς ἢ 2 ’ » A ’ aN »
τας καὶ τοξότας ολίγους, ἐχώρει ἐξω τοῦ τείχους ETL τὴν
’, e Λ 3 ’ 4 /
θάλασσαν, ἢ μάλιστα ἐκείνους προσεδέχετο πειράσειν
3 ,
ἀποβαίνειν.
e ‘ ’ # a Ν ΩΣ
18. Οἱ δε Λακεδαιμονιοι, ἄραντες, τῷ τε KATA γὴν στρα-
a 4 a ’ Ss a Ν a wv
τῷ προσέβαλλον τῷ τειχίσματε καὶ ταῖς vaVOLY ἅμα, οὐ-
, , ‘ x A ϑ /
dais τεσσαρώκοντα καὶ τρισίν" vavapyxos δὲ αὐτῶν επέ-
4 e 4 - ’ὔ F
πλει Θρασυμηλίδας ὁ Κρατησικλέους, Σπαρτιώτης
, . @ , ͵ ν. ε
προσέβαλλε δὲ ἥπερ ὁ Δημοσθένης προσεδέχετο. καὶ οἱ
ἐς ὉΝ > a 9 4 x A x 3 ?
μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀμφοτέρωθεν, ἐκ τε γῆς καὶ Ex Garacons,

196 Pylus and Sphacteria. (Tuucyp.

? e ΝΑ > 9 4 a ᾽ ? 9
ἠμύνοντο" οἱ δὲ κατ᾿ ολίγας ναῦς διέλομενοι, διοτε οὐκ ἦν
“ “ Ν 9 4 3 a ’ δ.
πλείοσι προσσχεῖν, καὶ ἀναπαύοντες ἐν τῷ μέρει, TOUS
4 4 4 a 4 , id ‘
ἐπίπλους ἐποιοῦντο, προθυμίᾳ τε πάσῃ χρώμενοι Kas
A »y 3 ὔ Λ x ὔ
παρακελευσμῷ, εἴ πως Woupevot ἕλοιεν TO τείχισμα.
4 Ἁ [4 4 > 4
14. πάντων δε φανερώτατος Ῥρασιθας ey ere: τριηραρ-
χῶν γὰρ, καὶ ὁρῶν τοῦ χωρίου χαλεποῦ ὄντος τοὺς ape
npapxous καὶ κυβερνήτας, εἴ πῃ καὶ δοκοίη δυνατὸν εἶναι
"“" ϑ A Ν, ’ a a x
σχεῖν, αποκνοῦντας καὶ φυλασσομένους τῶν νεῶν μη Evr
’ In? , e ’ 98 ¥” , ,
τρίψωσιν, eBoa λέγων ws οὐκ εἰκὸς evn, ξύλων φειδομένους,
᾿ ’ 4 a ’ “ κι i
TOUS πολεμίους ἐν TH χωρᾳ περιιδεῖν τεῖχος πεποιημένους,
ϑ bY ᾽’ ’ὕ a ’ Ν 9 ’
ἀλλὰ tus te σφετερας ναῦς βιαζομένους τὴν ἀποβασιν
, 4 Ν ‘ 7 Ν 3 ry
καταγνύναι ἐκέλενεν, καὶ Tous ξυμμάχους μὴ αἀποκνῆσαι
3 ‘ Λ 3 a “ a “ s- 3
αντὶ μεγάλων εὐεργεσιῶν τὰς ναῦς τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐν
σὰ 9 σι 4 4 ἈΝ Ἁ ἈΝ 4
τῷ παρόντι ἐπιδοῦναι, οκείλαντας δὲ καὶ παντὶ τρόπῳ
3 ’ n 3 a Ἁ A ’ ry
atoBavtas, τῶν τε ἀνδρῶν καὶ τοῦ χωρίου κρατῆσαι.
νι φ ‘ 4 ” a 3 , VN
15. Kat ὁ μεν τοὺς TE ἄλλους τοίαυτα ἐπέσπερχεν,. καὶ TOV
_e a , 3 , > A ‘ a > + 2."
εαυτοῦ κυβερνητην ἀναγκωσας οκειλαι THY ναῦν, ἐχώρει ἐπὶ
Ν 3 ’ Ν , ? / 3 ΟΝ
τὴν ἀποβαθραν" καὶ πειρώμενος ἀποβαίνειν, ανεκοόπη ὑπὸ
“ > 4 “ s Ν > 7 ‘
τῶν Αθηναίων, καὶ τραυματισθεὶς πολλὰ ἐλευποψύχησε
4 , 3 a? ‘ / e 9? Ἢ
τε καὶ TETOVTOS αὑτοῦ ες τὴν παρεξειρεσίαν ἡ ἀσπὶς περι
4 3 Ν , Α 9 4 3 ry 9 Ν a
eppun es τὴν Guracaay, kat εξενεχθείσης αὑτῆς ἐς THY γῆν,
6 a 2 ’ f “ 4 a 4 ἤ
ot Αθηναίοι ἀνελόμενοι ὕστερον πρὸς τὸ τροπαῖον ἐχρη-
ἃ » A A ΄΄ e >
σαντο Ὁ ἐστησαν τῆς προσβολῆς ταύτης. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι
? a Ν In 7 2.4 ? a a
προυθυμοῦντο μεν, ἀδύνατοι ὃ ἦσαν ἀποβῆναι, τῶν τε χω-
’ ’ Ν a ? ’ . as
ρίων χαλεπότητι καὶ τῶν Αθηναίων μενόντων καὶ οὐδεν
e , 3 a + 4 4 od
ὑποχωρούντων. 1G. ἐς τοῦτο TE περιέστη ἡ τύχη, ὥστε
Ἵ , Ν 2 “a Ν ’ a 3 ’
“Αθηναίους μὲν ἐκ γῆς τε καὶ ταύτης Πακωνικῆς ἀμύνεσθαι
3 ’ > , 4 Ν 3 a 3
ἐκείνους ἐπίπλεοντας, Aaxedatpovious δὲ ex νεῶν TE καὶ ἐς
Ν e a , 9 > > 9 ’ ? f
την εαυτῶν πολεμίαν οὖσαν ἐπ Αθηναίους ἀποβαίνειν"
> 8 \ δ 3 , a ’ 3 a , a δ >
ἐπὶ πολυ γὰρ ἐποίει τῆς δόξης ἐν τῷ Το τ τοίς μεν ἤπει-
ρώταις μάλιστα εἶναι καὶ τὰ πεζὰ κρατίστοις, τοῖς, δὲ
θαλασσίοις τε καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶ πλεῖστον προέχειν.

Iv.,14] Aftack on the Spartan Fleet. 197

? ἣν 4 N © »ν ey e ’
17. Ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν ἡμέραν Kab τῆς υστεραιας
, ‘ , > N ,
μέρος TL προσβολὰς ποιησάμενοι ἐπέπαυντο" καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ
7 N ΄ 3 4 ’ A a 9
ἐπί ξύλα ἐς μηήχανας παρέπεμψαν τῶν νεῶν τίνας ες
3 , 3 ’ N N N ΄ a Ψ N
Ασινην, ἐλπίζοντες TO κατὰ Tov λιμένα TELYOS ὕψος μεν
ν 3 [4 Ν Λ tA ¢. a“ a 3
ἔχειν, atroBucews Se μάλιστα οὔσης ἐλεῖν μηχαναῖς. ἐν
’ Ν e 3 δὰ a nn a 3 /
τούτῳ δε αἱ ex τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων παρα-
4 , ’ “
γίγνονται πεντήκοντα " προσεβοηθησαν yap τῶν τε φρου-
U Ν 3 σι A 3 ’ Q ’
ρίδων tives αὑτοῖς τῶν ἐκ Νδαινπάκτου καὶ Χίαι τέσσαρες.
¢ S 4 , ” e a , /
ὡς δὲ εἶδον τὴν τε ἤπειρον ὁπλιτῶν περίπλεων THY TE
a "ν a ‘4 ¥ Ἀ a Q 3 3 rd
νησον, ἐν TE τῷ λιμένι οὔσας τᾶς ναὺς καὶ οὐκ ἐκπλεοῦ-
2 , .4 ’ , ‘ ’
σας, ἀπορήσαντες ὅπῃ καθορμίσωνται, Tote μεν ες Πρω-
νὴ . a A δὴ \ 9 4 2. a 9 ¥
THY τὴν νῆσον, ἢ OV πολυ ἀπέχει, ἐρῆμος οὔσα, ἔπλευσαν
a 3 ’; a ? @¢ 4 td 9
καὶ ηὐυλίσαντο, TH ὃ ὑστεραίᾳ παρασκευασώμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ
’ ».» a ‘ 3 a 3 ,
ναυμαχίαν ἀνήγοντο, ἣν μὲν ἀντεκπλεῖν ἐθέλωσι σφίσιν
ἢ ." > , 9 Ν . ε > A 9 ,
ἐς τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν, εἰ Se μη, WS αὐτοὶ ἐπεσπλευσούμενοι.
. ὁ N ¥ 3 , ¥ ἃ , /
καὶ οἱ μὲν οὔτε ἀντανήγοντο, οὔτε ἃ διενοήθησαν, dpatas
. oy. ἊΝ ’ e , » » a
TOUS ἔσπλους, ἔτυχον ποιήσαντες, ἡσυχάζοντες ὃ εν τῇ
a ͵’ὕ a 3 , Ν / A 3
γῇ Tas τε ναῦς ἐπλήρουν καὶ παρεσκενυάξοντο, Hv ἐσπλέη
ϑ a 4 Υ̓ 2 A 7]
τις, ὡς ἐν τῷ ALEVE ὄντι οὐ σμικρῷ ναυμαχήσοντες.
> 9 a“ ’ >? ¢ 8° x "
15. οἱ 5 ᾿Αθηναῖοι γνόντες καθ ἑκάτερον Tov ἐσπλουν
ad > 3 3 Ν Ν Ν Ν 4 δ ,
ὥρμησαν ἐπ᾿ aVTOUS, καὶ TAS μὲν πλείους καὶ μετεωρους
¥ A A X 9 ’ 3 \
ἤδη τῶν νεῶν καὶ ἀντιπρῴρους προσπέσοντες ἐς φυγὴν
, . 97 ’ ε δ ’ ”
κατέστησαν, καὶ εἐπιδιώκοντες ws δια βραχέος ἔτρωσαν
Ν Ν ’ > » ‘ ’ ΄ δ a 9
μὲν πολλᾶς, πέντε δ᾽ ἔλαβον καὶ μίαν TOUTwWY αὑτοῖς ὧν-
’ a ἣν ἴω 3 A a 4 > 7
δράσιν" ταῖς δὲ λοιπαῖς ev τῇ γῇ καταπεφευγυίαις eveBar-
e ‘N ΝΥ 4 ΑΝ Q 3 , ϑ,
λον. at δὲ καὶ πληρούμεναι ἔτι πρὶν ἀνάγεσθαι ἐκόπτοντο.
’ . » , . @. a 3 a ?
Kal τινας καὶ ἀναδούμενοι κενὰς εἵλκον, τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐς φυ-
‘ e 4 A c oA e 4 Ν
ynv ὡρμημένων. 19. ἃ ὁρῶντες οἱ Δακεδαιμόνιον καὶ
a a ’ σ 3 a ¢-y ϑ
περιαλγοῦντες τῷ πάθει, ὅτι περ αὐτῶν οἱ ἄνδρες ἀπελαμ-
7 3 4 c N 3 ’ 3
Bavovto ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, παρεβοήθουν, καὶ ἐπεσβαίνοντες ἐς
“ Ἁ a“ "4 3 ϑ 4
τὴν θάλασσαν ξυν τοῖς ὅπλοις ανθεΐλκον ἐπιλαμβανοόμενοε

198 Pylus and Sphacterna. [Tuucyp.

A a , 3. v4 a Ty ἢ φ ᾽
“σῶν νεῶν" καὶ ἐν τούτῳ κεκωλῦσθαι ἐδόκει ἕκαστος ᾧ μή
Ν > A ¥ A 3 a , ,
τινι καὶ αὐτὸς ἔργῳ παρῆν. ἐγένετο τε ὁ θόρυβος μέγας,
Q b ’ “a e 4 ’ \ Ν a
Kal ἀντηλλαγμένος τοῦ ἑκατέρων τρόπου, περὶ τὰς ναῦς.
@ \ ’ eo UN , \. 3 ’
οἵ τε γὰρ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑπὸ προθυμίας καὶ ἐκπλήξεως,
e 9 a Χ Ia® 3 “ 2 ’ ΝΥ .- 9
ὡς εἰπεῖν, ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἢ ἐκ γῆς ἐναυμάχουν " οἵ Te ᾿Αθη-
” A ον ’ “a 2 4 φ ΣΝ
vaiot κρατοῦντες, καὶ βουλόμενοι τῇ παρούση τυχῇ ὡς επι
a 9 a > A “A ϑ ’ ’
πλεῖστον ἐπεξελθεῖν, ἀπὸ νεῶν ἐπεξομάχουν. “ππτολὺν τε
’ ’ 3 ’ +. ’ ,
πόνον παρασχόντες ἀλλήλοις καὶ τραυματίσαντες, διεκρι-
,. e , ‘ N a N a N
θησαν, καὶ οἱ Δακεδαιμόνιοι τὰς κενὰς ναῦς πλὴν τῶν τὸ
a a , “ ‘ ἢ
πρῶτον ληφθεισῶν διέσωσαν. καταστάντες δὲ ἑκάτεροι
3 “ N ~7 Υ̓ N
ἐς TO στρατόπεδον, οἱ μὲν τροπαῖον τε ἔστησαν καὶ νεκροὺς
3 4 A 4 bY ᾽ὔ Ν σι IAN
ἀπέδοσαν Kai ναυαγίων ἐκράτησαν, καὶ THY νῆσον εὐθὺς
? a > “ 9 e A 3 a 3
περιέπλεον, καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ εἶχον ὡς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀπειλημ-
, ear? a 9 , , Noo 8 ,
μένων " οἱ δ᾽ ev τῇ ἠπείρῳ Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων
” / ¥ N , > \ a ΄
ἤδη βεβοηθηκότες ἔμενον κατα χωραν ent τῇ Πύλῳ.
4 Ν Ν ’ e 4 X é
20. Es: Se τὴν Σπάρτην ὡς ἠγγέλθη τὰ γεγενημένα
Ν 4 Ν δ a e 7 AN a , \
περι Πύλον, edofev αὐτοῖς, ws ἐπὶ ξυμφορᾷ μεγάλη, τὰ
? 3 “ 4 ? a
τέλη καταβάντας ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον βουλεύειν, παραχρῆ-
eon Ψ A A ue 4 35. 2 A.
μα ὁρῶντας, ὃ τι ἂν δοκῇ. καὶ ws εἶδον ἀδύνατον ὃν τιμω-
a a ? , \ ΄ ? 3 , az © 8
ρεῖν τοῖς avdpact, καὶ κινδυνεύειν οὐκ ἐβούλοντο ἢ ὑπὸ
a a > N\ gen , ,
λιμοῦ τι παθεῖν αὐτους ἢ ὕπο πλήθους βιασθέντας κρατη-
θῃ ἔδο > a Ν S ‘ a 3 Α θ f
nvat, ἐδοξεν αὑτοῖς, πρὸς τους στρατηγοὺς τῶν ηναίων,
a 3. \ , \ N 7, 3
ἣν ἐθελωσι, σπονδὰς ποιησαμένους τὰ περὶ Πύλον, απο-
A 3 A 3 a ‘
στεῖλαι es tas Αθηνας πρέσβεις περὶ ξυμβάσεως, καὶ
ay Mv ¢ , A 4
tous ἄνδρας ws τάχιστα πειρᾶσθαι κομίσασθαι. 1. δε-
᾽ “ “a “x ’ 3 , Ν
ξαμένων δὲ τῶν στρατηγῶν τὸν λόγον, ἐγίγνοντο σπονδαι
/ Ν σε 3 φ >
rovaide. Λακεδαιμονίους μὲν τὰς vais ἐν als ἐναυμάχησαν
“ μ 3 A a ’
καὶ τὰς ἐν τῇ Δακωνικῇ πάσας, ὅσαι ἦσαν μακραὶ, παρα-
A 4 9 ΄ 9 Ν, 3
δοῦναι κομίσαντας ἐς Πύλον ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ ὅπλα μὴ ἐπι-
’ a ’ / S δὰ ον
φέρειν τῷ τειχίσματε μήτε κατὰ γῆν μήτε κατὰ θάλασσαν,
> ’ “ “ 4 “ ὔ ϑ ’ a Ia δ. 3
Αθηναίους δὲ τοῖς ev τῇ νήσῳ ἀνδράσι σῖτον ἐᾶν τοὺς ἐν

IV., 21.] Spartan Embassy to Athens. 199

a ’ ’ 3 4 & A ͵
τῇ ἠπείρῳ Δακεδαιμονίους ἐκπέμπειν τακτὸν καὶ μεμαγμε-
4 4 φ , ? “ 3 4 x , a
νον, δυο χοίνικας ἑκάστῳ Αττικας ἀλφίτων καὶ δύο KoTU-
¥ a eo o Ἁ ΄φ e ’ a
Aas olvou Kat κρέας, θεράποντι δὲ τούτων ἡμίσεα, ταῦτα
s ? ΩΣ 3 4 3 ’ “ “ Ν
δε ὁρώντων τῶν Αθηναίων, ἐσπέμπειν, καὶ πλοῖον μηδὲν
3 a ’ , Ν \ Ν a 3
ἐσπλεῖν λαθρᾳ" φυλάσσειν δὲ καὶ τὴν νῆσον ᾿Αθηναίους
ἐν Φ 4 Ν 3 , ., @ ν 3 ,
μηδεν ἤσσον, ὅσα μὴ αποβαίνοντας, καὶ ὅπλα μὴ ἐπιφέε-
A s ”~ 4 A δῷ ’
ρειν τῷ Πελοποννησίων στρατῷ μήτε κατὰ γῆν μήτε κατὰ
[2 7A ’ὔ’
θάλασσαν. 22. 6 τι δ᾽ ἂν τούτων παραβαίΐνωσιν ἐἑκάτε-
x ¢ a ’ ’ “ 4 3 a -
pot καὶ ὁτιοῦν, τότε λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδὰς. εσπεῖσθαι δε
> A , φ ? ¢ 3 A 9 a
αὐτὰς μέχρι ov ἐπανέλθωσιν οἱ ex τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν Λακεδαι-
’ ,ὔ 9 a 4 3 A ’ 3 4
μονίων πρέσβεις" atrooteiAas δὲ αὐτοὺς τριήρει Αθηναί-
. 4 4 ’ Ν ’ Ν
ους καὶ παλιν κομίσαι. ἐλθόντων δὲ, τὰς τε σπονδὰς
a 4 ; Q \ a > A 9 ’ e ,
λελυσθαι ταῦτας, Kat Tas ναῦς ἀποδοῦναι ᾿Αθηναίους ὁμοίας
ef “A Ν 9 ΄
οἱασπερ ἂν παραλάβωσιν. αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις
> » N e a , ῷ ν" “τω
ἐγένοντο, καὶ αἱ νῆες παρεδοθησαν οὖσαι περι εξήκοντα,
“ e ’ 3 4
Kat ot πρέσβεις απεσταλησαν.....
‘ φ , a ,
23. Οἱ μὲν οὖν Μακεδαιμόνιοι τοσαῦτα εἶπον, νομίζοντες
Q 9 a Q é δὰ Ν 3 a
tous ᾿Αθηναίους ev τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ σπονδῶν μεν ἐπιθυμεῖν,
a . 9 ’ ’ὔ ͵ὕ . > 2
σφῶν δε ἐναντιουμένων κωλύεσθαι, διδομένης Se εἰρήνης
2 ’ ’ ’ Ν ‘ ¥ 9 a e ,
ἀσμένως δεξεσθαί τε καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποδωσειν. οἱ δε
“ ν Ν » “ wy ? [ω] tA y¥
Tus μὲν σπονδας, ἔχοντες τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν TH νήσῳ, ἤδη
, > 2 e 4 eon “ ΡΞ
σφίσιν ἐνόμιζον ἑτοίμους εἴναι, ὁπόταν βούλωνται, Trote-
“ 3 “ A “ 4 9 } ,
σθαι πρὸς avtous, τοῦ δὲ πλέονος ὠρέγοντο. 34. μαλιστα
3 ‘ a A 4 4 2 N Das
δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐνῆγε Κλέων ὁ Κλεαινέτου, ἀνὴρ δημαγωγος
49. 9 a 4 A a 4 4
κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ὧν καὶ τῷ πλήθει πιθανωτατος "
\ »¥ 3 ’ e ‘ ‘ . ὦ N a
Kat ἔπεισεν ἀποκρίνασθαι ὡς χρὴ Ta μὲν ὅπλα καὶ σφας
5 ] A Ἁ 4 a s tA “A A
αὐτοὺς Tous ἐν TH νήσῳ παραδόντας πρῶτον κομισθῆναι
3 4 “ 9 A 4 4
AOnvate, ἐλθόντων δε, ἀποδόντας Λακεδαιμονίους Νίσαιαν
ἐγ 8 ‘ a 3 oh ἃ if
καὶ Πηγὰς καὶ Τροιζῆνα καὶ Αχαΐαν, --- ἃ ov πολέμῳ
x .9 9 8 a , , , /
ἔλαβον ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ. τῆς προτέρας ξυμβάσεως, ᾿Αθηναίων
4 Ν . ? a , ,
ξυγχωρησάντων κατὰ ξυμφορὰς καὶ ἐν τῷ τότε δεομένων

200 P. 'y lus and Sphacet eri. (Tavcyp.

a δῶ ᾽ὔ Ἁ # ν᾿
Tt μᾶλλον σπονδῶν, ---- κομίσασθαι Tous ἄνδρας, καὶ σπον-
Ν , e ’ A A , 3 4
Sas ποιήσασθαι ὁπόσον av δοκῇ χρόνον ἀμφοτέροις.
ς a “ ‘\ Ν 3 tv 27a 3 ad A
25. οἱ δὲ πρὸς μὲν τὴν ἀπόκρισιν οὐδὲν ἀντεῖπον, ξυνέ-
Ἀ ΄ 2 Λ {. ’ of 4
Spovs Se σφίσιν ἐκέλευον ἔλέεσθαι, oitives λέγοντες καὶ
9 ’ x ¢ . ’ \ e¢ ’ Cd A
ἄκονυοντες περὶ exadatou ξυμβήσονται Kata ἡσυχίαν 6 τι ἂν
, 3 4 4 \ 9 ζω Ν » > »,
πείθωσιν αλλήλους. Κλέων δε ἐνταῦθα δὴ πολὺς ἐνέκειτο,
’ [4 Ν Ν ’ Fast ? Vv
λέγων γιγνώσκειν μὲν καὶ πρότερον οὐδεν ἐν νῷ ἔχοντας
ΣΝ ‘ > 4 N a “ A Ἢ
δίκαιον αὐτοὺς, aades δ᾽ εἶναι καὶ νῦν, oitwes τῷ μὲν
Jar 9 Λ 4 vw 9 4 Ν 3 ’ ’
πλήθει οὐδὲν ἐθέλουσιν εἰπεῖν, ὀλίγοις δὲ ἀνδράσι ξύνεδροι
id 4 3 Ν Ν e ‘N a 4
βούλονται γίγνεσθαι" adda εἰ τι ὕγιες διανοοῦνται, λέγειν
> λ id eon Ν e ’ Υ̓
ἐκέλευσεν ἅπασιν. ὁρῶντες δὲ οἱ “Δακεδαιμόνιοι οὔτε
’ 2: aA? , > «a ¥ “‘~ oe 8 a
σφισιν ovov τε ὃν ev πλήθει εἰπειν, εἰ TL καὶ ὕπο τῆς ξυμ-
ζω Ian 3 3 a “ x. 9 a ?
φορᾶς εδόκει αὐτοῖς Evyxwpew, μὴ es Tous ξυμμάχους δια-
= > » N 3 , x Ng ’
βληθῶσιν εἰπόντες καὶ οὐ τυχόντες, οὔτε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους
2 A , ’ a a ᾽ ’ 3
ἔπι μετρίοις ποιήσοντας ἃ προυκαλοῦντο, ἀνεχωρησαν ἐκ
a 3 A 4 3 4 Ν > A ,
τῶν Αθηνῶν ἄπρακτοι. 36. ἀφικομένων Se αὑτῶν, διελύ-
ns e . e “ 4 N A a e
ovto evOus at σπονδαὶ at περὶ Πύλον, καὶ τὰς ναῦς ot
4 3 4 / 4 e > 9
“ακεδαιμόνιοι ἀπήτουν, καθάπερ ξυνέκειτο" οἱ & ᾿Αθη-
a 2 , ¥ 2 , a /
ναῖον ἐγκλήματα exovTes — ἐπιδρομὴν τε τῷ τειχίσματι
’ Ne 2 2 % 7 a 9 ὃ
παράσπονδον καὶ ἄλλα οὐκ ἀξιόλογα δοκοῦντα εἶναι ---- οὐκ
’ , 9 , ῦΨ Ν ¥ oN \ 6 a
ἀπεδίδοσαν, ἰσχυριζόμενοι ὅτι δὴ εἰρητο, ἐὰν καὶ ὁτιοῦν
a 7 , tA e Ν ’
παραβαθῃ, λελύσθαι tas σπονδὰς. οἱ δὲ Aaxedaiporior
? , Ν 2a? 3 ’ Ων a a
ἀντέλεγόν TE καὶ, ἀδίκημα ἐπικαλέσαντες TO τῶν νεῶν,
) ’ 3 , , Ν ν Ν
ἀπέλθοντες ἐς πόλεμον καθίσταντους 2%. καὶ τὰ περὶ
4 e¢ =6|9° > ’ “ , 3 wn 9 a
Πῦυλον ὑπ ἀμφοτέρων κατὰ κράτος ἐπολεμεῖτο, Αθηναῖοι
Ν a “ 3 4 oN Ν A , a
μεν δυοῖν νεοῖν ἐναντίαιν ἀεὶ THY νῆσον TrepiTTACOVTES τῆς
ΝΥ, a \ δ .@ , \ ‘
ἡμέρας, ----- τῆς δε νυκτὸς καὶ ἅπασαι περιώρμουν, πλὴν τὰ
Ν “ Λ e 4 ¥ ” δ 3 a > a
πρὸς TO πέλαγος, ὅποτε ἄνεμος εἰη" καὶ ἐκ τῶν AOnvav
3 a ¥ a >, / 3 Ν Ν a ε a
αὑτοῖς ELKOTL νῆες ἀφίκοντο ες THY φυλαάκην, ὥστε αἱ πάσαι
ε / > 7 ’ \ 2 a 9» ἢ
εἐβδομήκοντα ἐγένοντο, ---- Πελοποννήσιοι δὲ ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ
’ δ \ ΄ a ’
στρατοπεδενομενος καὶ προσβολᾶς ποιούμενοι τῷ τείχει,

IV, 26.] Blockade of Sphacteri. 201

a “ ΝΥ 4 @ a 5 A
σκοποῦντες KaLpOY εἰ TLS παραπέσοι ὥστε τοὺς ἄνδρας
σῶσαι.

3 Ν . Ψ 3 ’ “ 3 4

28. Ἔν Se τῇ Πύλῳ ἔτι ἐπολιόρκουν τοὺς ev τῇ νήσῳ
4 4} a Q x 232 ra 4
Λακεδαιμονίους οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, καὶ TO ἐν TH ἠπείρῳ στρατό-
A “ t ¥ 3
πεδον τῶν Πελοποννησίων κατὰ χώραν ἔμενεν, ἐπίπονος
> 9 “a 3% ’ ς Ν 4 3 , ν ¢@
δ᾽ ἦν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἡ φυλακὴ σίτου τε ἀπορίᾳ καὶ ὕδα-
3 Ἁ 4 {2 Ἀ 4 > 7 oA “9 ,
τος" οὐ Yap ἣν κρηνὴ OTL μὴ pia ἐν αὑτῇ TH ἀκροπόλει
a , Q ed ᾽ , 9 ᾿ , ,
τῆς Πύλου, καὶ αὕτη οὐ μεγάλη, αλλα διαμωώμενοι tov
, e “ 3 a , ¥ @ 9s
καχλήηκα Ol πλείστοι ἐπὶ τῇ θαλασσῃ ἔπινον OLOV ELKOS
a ’ 3 93 / ld 9
ὕδωρ. στενοχωρία TE ἐν ολέγῳ στρατοπεδενομένοις ἐγί-
Q σι “ 2 9 a [2 4 ‘ a b “
YVETO* καὶ τῶν νεῶν οὐκ ἐχουσῶν ὅρμον, αἱ μὲν σιτον EV TH
na e a Ν 4 e Ν 4 Ψ ?
γῇ ἡροῦντο Kata μέρος, at δὲ μετέωροι ὥρμουν. 29. abu-
, a Ν ’ 3
μίαν τε πλείστην ὁ χρόνος παρεῖχε παρὰ λόγον ἐπιγιγνό-
ἃ 2 e a 7 9 , 9 4
μενος, OUS WOVTO ἡμερὼν ολίγων εἐκπολιορκήσειν, EV νήσῳ
τε ἐρήμῃ καὶ ὕδατι ἁλμυρῷ χρωμένους. αἴτιον δὲ ἦν οἱ
ἐρήμῃ | μυρῷ χρωμένους, αν Ἶ
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, προείποντες ἐς τὴν νῆσον ἐσάγειν σῖτον τε
Ἁ , b ΄ A 9 Ν 4 Ν
τὸν βουλόμενον αληλεσμένον καὶ οἷνον καὶ εἰ TL αλλϑθ
a @ A 4 ’ , ’ 2 /
βρῶμα, οἷον av ἐς πολιορκίαν ξυμφέρῃ, τάξαντες ἀργυρίου
‘ A ΟΝ a e ’ “4,2 ’ 9 , e
πολλοῦ, καὶ τῶν Εἰλωτων τῷ ecayayorts ἐλευθερίαν ὑπι-
> «a ¥. ?
σχνούμενοι. καὶ ἐσῆγον ἄλλοι τε παρακινδυνεύοντες Kat
, φ ef. 9 ’ > A a ,
purtota ot Ethwrtes, ἀπαίροντες ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοποννήσου
4 Q 4 ¥v “ 3 Ν
ὁπόθεν τύχοιεν, καὶ καταπλέοντες ETL νυκτὸς ἐς τὰ πρὸς
ὃ πέλ ἧς νή 80. par δὲ ἐτή ve;
TO πέλαγος τῆς νήσου. .« μαλιστα O€ ἐτήρουν ἀνέμῳ
’ ca \ “ Ν a ’ 2 ᾽
καταφέρεσθαι" ῥᾷον γὰρ τὴν φυλακὴν τῶν τριήρων ελαν-
e ’ A 3 ’ 4 ¥ Ν > »,
θανον, ὁπότε πνεῦμα εκ πόντου εἴη" ἄπορον Yap ἐγίγνετο
δι σι XN 3 Ν e 4 ’
περιορμεῖν, τοῖς δὲ αφειδὴς ὁ κατάπλους καθεστήκει "
3 , “ “ Ud td Α e
ἐπωκελλον γὰρ τὰ WAOLA τετιμημενα χρηματων, καὶ ob
e a N δ ’ a , 9,7 od
omALTaL περί τὰς καταρσεῖὶς τῆς νῆσον εφυύλασσον. ὅσοι
ν- , e, / 4 ,ὔ Ν ιν Ν
δὲ γαλήνῃ κινδυνεύσειαν ἡλίσκοντο. ἐσένεον δὲ καὶ κατὰ
ἐν ͵ ΙΝ, Ἴ ’ 3 3 a 9 Λ
Tov λιμένα κολυμβηται ὕφυδροι, καλωδίῳ ἐν ἀασκοῖς ἐφελ-
, a 4 4
κοντες μήκωνα μεμελιτωμένην καὶ λίνου σπέρμα κεκομ-

202 Pylus and Sphacterta. [Tuucyp.

4 @ “ * , ‘ . of 9 4
μένον’ ὧν τὸ πρῶτον λανθανόντων, φυλακαὶ ὕστερον ἐγέ-
4 4 e¢ » 3 n e - 9 f
VOVTO* παντί TE τρόπῳ ἑκάτεροι ETEXV@VTO, OL LEV ἔσπὲμ-
A , e N “ ’ yA :
mew τὰ σιτία, οἱ dé μὴ AavOavey σφᾶς.
> ) “ ~ » , ’ “ ᾿ .
31. Ev δε ταῖς AOnvats πυνθανόμενοι περὶ τῆς oTpa-
nn red a ΝΥ σι ~ > 4 a
τιᾶς, OTL ταλαιπωρεῖται καὶ σῖτος τοῖς ἐν TH νήσῳ ὅτι
9 a 9 , x 3 , x a Ν bY
ἐσπλεῖ, ἠπόρουν καὶ ἐδεδοίκεσαν pn σφῶν χειμὼν THY φυ-
er | e , . 9 a Υ. ‘
λακὴν ἐπίλαβοι. wavrwv Se εφοβοῦντο μάλιστα Tovs
’ a ¥ , 3 ‘ > A > ».
AaxeSatpovious, ὅτε ἔχοντας TL ἰσχυρὸν αὑτοὺς ενομιζον
> ἡ ’ > v4 Q ΔΛ ‘
οὐκέτι σφίσιν ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι " καὶ μετεμάλοντο Tas
‘ 3 ͵ ’ ‘ “ON > a Ν
σπονδὰς οὐ δεξάμενοι. 83. Κλέων δε, yvous αὐτῶν την
[ es e , Q a ? a , ?
ες αὑτον ὑποψίαν περὶ τῆς κωλύμης τῆς ξυμβάσεως, ou
2 na ΜΝ 7, Ν 4 Λ ΄
ταληθὴ edn λέγειν τους ἐξαγγάλλοντας. παραινούντων
Ν a 3 4 1] Ν 4 7 4
de τῶν αφιγμένων, εἰ μὴ σφίσι πιστεύουσι, κατασκόπους
Ν 4 ς ’ , 7 A ᾿ : 4
τινὰς πέμψαι, ἠρέθη κατάσκοπος αὑτὸς peta Θεογένους
ον 9 , Ν Ν oe 3 , ? ὰ
ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηναίων " καὶ γνοὺς ὅτι ἀναγκασθήσεται ἢ ταῦτ
’ 4 ’ a 3 , > A Ν ’
λέγειν ols διέβαλλεν ἢ TuvavTia εἰπὼν ψευδης φανησε-
’ “39 a 3 ἃ ΙΝ ’
σθαι, παρήνει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, ὁρῶν αὐτοὺς καὶ ὡρμημε-
“ tA n s a Ν ’
yous τί τὸ πλέον τῇ γνωμῃ στρατεύειν, ὡς χρὴ κατασκο-
Ν “x “ Ν 3 “x ,
Tous μὲν μὴ πέμπειν μηδὲ διαμέλλειν καιρὸν παριέντας,
4 ‘ A > aw 9 a 9 ν 9 t a 9 A
εἰ δὲ δοκεῖ αὑτοῖς αληθὴ εἶναι τὰ ἀγγέλλομενα, Ire ἐπι
Ἁ pA N 9 4 Ἁ 4 ἈΝ
tous ἄνδρας. καὶ ἐς Νικίαν τὸν Νικηράτου otpartnyov
ν 2 , 3 N K . 9 a ’ 9
ὄντα ὠπεσήμαινεν, ἐχθρος ὧν Kat ἐπιτιμῶν, ῥᾷδιον εἰναι
a > » 4 ε ‘ ,
παρασκευῇ, εἰ ἄνδρες elev οἱ στρατηγοι, πλεύσαντας λα-
a Ν 3 a ’ \ > , 7A 9 a
βεῖν tous ev τῇ νήσῳ, καὶ αὑτός γ᾽ ἂν, εἰ ἦρχεν, ποιῆσαι
τοῦτο.
e N 4 3 . 4 “
88. Ὁ δε Νικίας, τῶν τε ᾿Αθηναίων τι ὑποθορυβησαν-
ἢ N ’ : ) ἀρ τὰ I] 2. eins
τῶν ἐς τὸν Κλεωνα, 8 τι ov καὶ viv πλέει εἰ ῥαδιὸν γε
> A 4 δ ed eon > N 3 a > ἢ
αὐτῷ φαίνεται, καὶ ἅμα ὁρῶν avTov ἐπιτιμῶντα, ἐκέλευεν
oe 4 4 t “ 9 A ?
ἥντινα βούλεται δύναμιν λαβόντα τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι ἐπι-
ἴω ς Ν ον Ν , 2, 253." /
χειρεῖν. ὁ δε TO μὲν πρῶτον, οἰόμενος αὐτὸν Χόγῳ μόνον
>, ἢ) ες "κε 9 \ N ay , ἢ
ἀφιέναι, ἑτοῖμος ἣν" yvous δὲ τῷ ὄντι παραδωσείοντα, ave-

IV., 29.] Cleon appointed Commander. 203

, “ b + , A 3 > 2 * * “
χώρει, καὶ ove ἔφη αὐτὸς ard ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν, δεδιὼς
Ψ . » A ᾽ ͵ > 8 a a
ἤδη, καὶ οὐ κἂν οἰόμενός οἱ αὐτὸν τολμῆσαι ὑποχωρῆσαι.

> Ν 353. ἢ 2 δὰ 3 ,
αὖθις δὲ ὁ Νικίας ἐκέλευε, καὶ ἐξίστατο τῆς ἐπὶ Πύλῳ
> a.) x. 2 x 4 ’ 3 “ e \
ἀρχῆς, καὶ μάρτυρᾶς τους Αθηναίους ἐποιεῖτο. 84. οἱ δε,
φ ¥ τὸν a a a , /
οἷον ὄχλος direst ποιεῖν, ὅσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Κλέων ὑπέφευγε
“ a . 9 ’ ᾽ 4 id 3
TOV πλοῦν καὶ εἐξανεχώρει τὰ εἰρημένα, τόσῳ ἐπεκελεύοντο
Ϊ΄ a N 4 ὃ ὃ , ‘ 3 Ν Α 3 , ? B ’

@ Νεκίᾷ παραδιδοναε τὴν apynv, καὶ ἐκείνῳ ἐπεβόων
a oe 2 » a a 9 4 ¥ ?
πλειν. ὥστε οὐκ ἔχων ὅπως τὼν εἰρημένων ETL εξαπαλ-
᾿ a Q A N ¥ a
ayn, ὑφίσταται τὸν πλοῦν, καὶ παρελθὼν οὔτε φοβεῖσθαι
¥ , , \ 9 a
ἐφη Δακεδαιμονίους, π-λεύσεσθαί τε λαβὼν ἐκ μὲν τῆς πό-
λε yoeva, Δημνίους δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιμβρί ν Ὶ

ὡς οὐδένα, Δημνίους de και ἴμβριους τοὺς παρόντας,

νΝ Υ̓͂
καὶ πελταστὰς ob ἦσαν ἔκ τε Αἴνου βεβοηθηκότες, καὶ
Ψ , a ¥
ἄλλοθεν τοξότας τετρακοσίους " ταῦτα δὲ ἔχων, ἔφη, πρὸς

a ’, ’ 9. A e a ¥ A ν
τοῖς ev Πνλῳ otpatiwtars, ἐντὸς ἡμερῶν εἰκοσιν ἢ ἄξειν

΄ A > ~ 9 a “a . 3
Aaxedaipovious ζῶντας ἢ αὐτοῦ ἀποκτενεῖν. τοῖς δὲ ᾿Αθη-

4 > ἢ ’ “ éx a λο 3 a ᾿
ναίοις EVETTETE μὲν TL καὶ γέλωτος τῇ KOUdO γιᾳ αὐτοῦ
3 4 ? ’ a 4 a ,
ἀσμένοις δ᾽ ὅμως ἐγίγνετο τοῖς. σώφροσι τῶν ἀνθρώπων,

, . a 3 a ,οσ:Ἢἄ ¢ 4 A ’
λογιζομένοις δυοῖν ἀγαθοῖν tov ἐτερου τεύξεσθαι, ἢ Κλεω-
3 ᾿ a ¥. A al
vOS ἀπαλλαγήσεσθαι (ὃ μαλλον ἤλπιζον), ἢ σφαλεισιε

7 ’
γνώμης Λακεδαιμονίους σφίσι χειρώσασθαι.

“ , ’ 2 a ? Ν

35. Καὶ πᾶντα διαπραξάμενος ev τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Kat

4 aA 5 A Aa 3 a
ψηφισαμένων ᾿Αθηναίων αὐτῷ τὸν πλοῦν, τῶν Te ev Πύλῳ
a A , Ν > Ν
στρατηγῶν ἕνα προσελόμενος, Anpoobevnv, τὴν ἀναγωγὴν

Ν ’ 2 ad “ Ν ’ “

δια τάχους ἐποιεῖτο. τὸν δὲ Δημοσθενην προσέλαβε πυν-
δ] 9 Ν A ΄σ
θανόμενος τὴν ἀπόβασιν αὐτὸν ἐς τὴν νῆσον διανοεῖσθαι.
a a a 4 ~ 9% /
οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται, κακοπαθοῦντες τοῦ χωρίον τῇ ἀπορίᾳ,

A ry 4 a [4 ὃ
καὶ μᾶλλον πολιορκούμενοι ἢ πολιορκοῦντες, ὥρμηντο δια-

κι ὔ , ¢€ a“ 3 A
κινδυνεῦσαι. Kal αὐτῷ ἔτι ῥώμην καὶ ἡ νῆσος ἐμπρησθεῖσα
f Ν > A» y¥ e, 7 > ON
παρέσχεν. πρότερον μὲν γὰρ αὐτῆς ovens ὑλωδους ἐπι
\ Ν XN 3 a Ν Ν ,9N 9 / . 3 a Ν
τὸ πολὺ καὶ ἀτριβοῦς δια THY ἄει ἐρημίαν, ἐφοβεῖτο, Kat
a a 9 a 9 Da
πρὸς των πολεμίων τοῦτο ἐνόμιζε μᾶλλον εἶναι" πολλῷ

204 Pylus and Sphacteria. (Taucyp.

\ A 4 9 , 3 3 a ,
yap ἂν στρατοπέδῳ ἀποβάντι εξ ἀφανοῦς χωρίου προσ-
Λ 9 Ν , a N a”
βάλλοντας αὐτοὺς βλάπτειν. 86. τῶν de στρατιωτῶν
4 , ‘ N ’ , - 9 ’
αναγκασθεντων δια τὴν στενοχωρίαν τῆς νῆσον τοῖς ἐσχα-
7) 4 a “ A δ
τοις προσίσχοντας ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι διὰ προφυλακῆς, καὶ
3 ’ , \ N a e ” \
ἐμπρήσαντός τινος κατὰ μικρὸν τῆς ὕλης ἄκοντος, [καὶ}
, 8 7 ’ 3 ’ a Q x a ».
QTO τούτου πνεύματος ἐπιγενομένου TO πολὺ αὑτῆς erable
ed .Y ΄ ’ διε
κατακαυθέν. οὕτω δὴ τούς τε Aaxedatpoviovs μᾶλλον
“ 4 wv φ a ’ > ’ x
κατιδὼν πλείους ὄντας (ὑπονοῶν πρότερον ἐλάσσοσι τὸν
σ΄ » ‘A 9 Ἷ 4 a 2 ’ 4
σῖτον auTous ἐσπέμπειν) THY τε νῆσον εὐαποβατωτέραν οὔ-
, e > > 9 , Ν 3 / χω]
σαν, τότε --- ὡς ἐπ᾿ ἀξιόχρεων τοὺς Αθηναίους μᾶλλον
Ἀ a ‘ ? 4 4
σπουδὴν ποιεῖσθαι ---- τὴν ἐπιχείρησιν παρεσκευάξετο,
ὔ , 4 a 9 N , N N
στρατιών τε μεταπέμπων ἐκ τῶν Eyyus ξυμμάχων, Kal Ta
[4 4 ,
ἀλλα ετοιμαζων.
37 Κλέ δὲ 3 Uj ’ ¥ Xo e 4
: ἐων δε, ἐκείνῳ τε προπέμψας ἄγγελον ws ἥξων,
\¥ . ἃ » » ’ a 3 , ‘
καὶ ἔχων στρατιὰν ἣν ἤτησατο, αφικνεῖται ες Πύλον. καὶ
, ’ a 9 . 9 re ‘
ἅμα γενόμενοι πέμπουσι πρῶτον ἐς TO EV TH ἡπείρῳ στρα-
/ , UA 9 4 ¥ ᾿ ’
τόπεδον κήρυκα, προκαλούμενοι εἰ βούλοιντο ἄνευ κινδύνου
ν. 5» a ’ ” / , e ν a ’
Tous ἐν TH νήσῳ ἄνδρας σφίσι τὰ τε ὅπλα Kat σφᾶς av-
SY x 4 ὃ a 9 φ᾽ φ x a a ’ 7)
Tous κελεύειν παραδοῦναι, ep w φυλακῇ τῇ μετρίᾳ THPT-
v4 y¥ “ ~ ’ a ϑ
σονται, ἕως ἂν τι περὶ τοῦ πλέονος ξυμβαθῆ. ov προσδε-
ξαμένων δὲ αὐτῶν. μίαν μὲν ἡμέραν ἐπέ ἢ δ᾽ vc f
ξαμὲ τῶν, μίαν μεν ἡμέραν ἐπέσχον, τῇ ὃ ὑστεραίᾳ
͵ ’ a e 4 ’
ανηγάγοντο μὲν νυκτὸς ET Ολίγας ναῦς, τους ὁπλίτας πάν-
9 , ἐν Ν ray Cd δ. / > Ὁ a
Tas ἐπιβιβασαντες, προ Se τῆς ἕω ολίγον ἀπέβαινον τῆς
’ e t 4 a“ + Y a ὔ
νήσου ἑκατέρωθεν, ἐκ τε τοῦ πελάγους καὶ πρὸς τοῦ λιμέ-
9 4 4. ¥ a . 3 ,
νος, ὀκτακόσιοι μάλιστα ὄντες ὁπλῖται, καὶ ἐχώρουν δρόμῳ
“ΟΝ Ν a , a 4 @ ‘
ἐπὶ TO πρῶτον φυλακτήριον τῆς νήσου. 88. woe yup διε-
’ 3 ’’ὔ Ὡ- a ’ a e ’
τετάχατο" ἐν ταύτῃ μὲν τῇ πρωτῃ φυλακῇ ὡς τριάκοντα
9 e a 4 ‘ \ oe , ’ Ν ‘ ἐν
ἦσαν ὁπλίται, μέσον δὲ καὶ ὁμαλωτατὸν τε καὶ περὶ τὸ
“ € mn > a . 9 4 c ν᾽ 9
ὕδωρ οἱ πλειστοι αὑτῶν καὶ Επιτάδας ὁ ἄρχων εἶχεν,
“ , 3 ‘\ > NS ¥ 29 7 a 4
μερος δε TL οὐ πολυ αὑτὸ τοὔσχατον εφύλασσε τῆς νήσου
Ν Ν ἣν Π ΄ A 9 ¥ Ul 9 , A
to πρὸς τὴν Πύλον, 0 ἣν ἐκ τε θαλάσσης ἀπόκρημνον καὶ

IV., 83.] Attack on the Island. 205

ἢ a a @ 2 » . 2 .» > 7
EX τῆς γῆς ἥκιστα ἐπίμαχον" καὶ yap Tt Kat ἔρυμα autos
Py Ν , : , , ὰν»» ’
ἦν παλαιὸν λιθων λογαδην πεποιημένον, ὃ εἐνομιζον σφισιν
>a? a 9 r) [ ’
ὠφέλιμον ἂν εἶναι, εἰ καταλαμιβᾶνοι ἀναχωρησις βιαιο-
’
τέρα.
ef ‘ , 4 € at 3 a δ
89. Οὕτω μὲν τεταγμένοι ἦσαν. ot δὲ AOnvaios τοὺς
N , ,’ Φ 9 a 3δλ ,
μεν πρώτους φύλακας, οἷς ἐπέδραμον, evOus διαφθείρουσιν
Υ a b a ¥ 3 4 . @ N
ἐν τε ταῖς εὐναῖς ἔτι, αναλαμβανοντας Ta ὅπλα, Kat λα-
“ 9 4 9 ͵ a> a “ a
θόντες τὴν ἀπόβασιν, οἰομένων αὐτῶν τὰς ναῦς κατὰ TO
3
ἔθος ἐς & ἧς νυκτὸς πλεῖν. ἅμα δὲ & :
eVos ες Ehoppov τῆς νυκτὸς πλειν. ἅμα @ γιγνομενῇῃ
Ne fm Ν > », 3 Ν a e ,
Kat ὁ ἄλλος στρατος ἀπέβαινον, ἐκ μὲν νεῶν εβδομήκοντα
νι 3. 3 ’ ’ Ν 4 e od
καὶ ολίγῳ πλειόνων πᾶντες πλὴν θαλαμίων, ws ἕκαστοι
3 ’ ’ id “ “ 9
ἐσκευασμένοι, τοξοται τε ὀκτακόσιοι καὶ πελτασταὶ οὐκ
3 ὔ ? 4 e 4 A
ἐλάσσους τούτων, Μεσσηνίων τε ot BeBonOnxotes, καὶ
¥ oa ‘ », ” 4 Ν a > NS a“
ἄλλοι ὅσοι περι Πύλον κατεῖχον πάντες πλὴν τῶν ἐπὶ TOU
s , ’ N 4 ,
τείχους φυλάκων. 40. 4ημοσθενοὺυς δε ταξαντος διεστη-
Ν ’ Ν / 4 > @ wn /
σαν κατὰ διακοσίους τε καὶ πλείους, ἐστι δ᾽ ἢ ἐλάσσους,
a v AN ἢ ’ : 4 Ψ /
τῶν χωρίων τὰ μετεωροτατα λαβόντες, ὅπως ὅτι πλείστη
᾽ 4 ’ ’ Ν
ἀπορία ἢ τοῖς πολεμίοις πανταχόθεν κεκυκλωμένοις, καὶ
δ . @ 9 ’ 2 > 23 ’ ,
pn ἔχωσι πρὸς ὃ τι ἀντιτάξωνται, αλλ ἀμφίβολοι γίγνων-
a 4 , a , 9 4 e “ A
Tat τῷ πλήθει, εἰ μὲν τοῖς πρόσθεν εἐπίοιεν, ὕπο τῶν κατό-
4 ? Ν ζω ’ eos a e /
mw βαλλόμενοι, εἰ Se τοῖς πλαγίοις, ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκατερωθὲεν
4 ΄ 8 , e 4
παρατεταγμένων. 48. τοιαύτῃ μὲν γνωμῃ ὁ 4ημοσθε-
a “ 3 , » a 3 ~a ww
νῆς TO τε πρῶτον τὴν ἀπόβασιν ἐπενόει καὶ EV τῷ ἔργῳ
¥ e€ as AN ‘9 , \ @& 9 y
ἔταξεν" ot δὲ περὶ tov Ἐπιταδαν, καὶ ὅπερ ἦν πλείστον
aA 3 A 14 e 7 ’ ἴω } ὃ
τῶν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, ὡς εἶδον τὸ τε πρῶτον φυλακτήριον διε-
“ “ ’ > , , “
φθαρμένον, καὶ στρατὸν σφίσιν ἔπιοντα, ξυνεταξαντο Kat.
a e t a 3 ’ 3 ,’ 3 ΄“
τοῖς ὁπλίταις τῶν Αθηναίων emnecav, βουλομενοι ἐς χεί-
2 a %e 23 , Ny @ , 3 -
ρας ἐλθεῖν" ἐξ ἐναντίας γὰρ οὗτοι καθεστήκεσαν, ἐκ πλα-
, Q e SY x . ᾽ὔ a “ 9 e 4
you δὲ οἱ ψιλοὶ καὶ κατα vwTov. τοῖς μεν οὖν OTALTALS.
3 9 , “- Fan a 4 3 ’ ,
οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν προσμίξαι οὐδὲ TH σφετέρᾳ ἐμπειρίᾳ KPT
e , / ; Ν
σασθαι" οἱ γὰρ ψιλοὶ ἑκατέρωθεν βάλλοντες εἶργον, καὶ

206 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuvcyp.

ῦΨ 4. κι ᾽ 9 , ..ν ὁ. 2 4 ‘
Gua εκεῖνος οὐκ ἀντεπήεσαν ἀλλ ἡσύχαζον" tous de
Α e 9 a ’ 4 »
‘pious, ἢ μάλιστα αὐτοῖς προσθέοντες προσκέοιντο, ἔτρε-
ἃ φ , > 9 ” 4
πον" καὶ ot ὑποστρέφοντες ἠμύνοντο, ἄνθρωποι κούφως
3 4 “ ͵ φ ’ A a
τε εἐσκενασμένοι Kat προλαμβάνοντες ῥᾳδίως τῆς φυγῆς,
’ ( “ ζω ’
χωρίων τε χαλεπότητι καὶ ὑπο τῆς πρὶν ἐρημίας τρα-
, ΨΜ 3 @ € ’ ? 207 ,
χέων ὄντων, ev οἷς οἱ ἀακεδαιμόνιοε ove ἠδύναντο διώκειν
ce
ora ἔχοντες.
,ὕ ‘ 9 x, ἡ d “ 3 ,
42. Χρονον μὲν οὖν τινα ολίγον οὕτω προς ἀλλήλους
3 ’ a ᾽ν» , > »ν 8» “ Σ
ἠκροβολίσαντο" τῶν δὲ Δακεδαιμονίων οὐκέτι ὀξέως ἐπεκ-
a φ ? ‘ e “
θεῖν ἢ προσπίπτοιεν δυναμένων, γνόντες αὐτοὺς οἱ Ψίλοι
4 3 wv a > » tA
βραδυτέρους ἤδη ὄντας τῷ ἀμύνασθαι, . . . καταφρονη-
3 4 > oe > 9 9 “ ‘
σαντες καὶ ἐμβοήσαντες ἀθρόοι ὥρμησαν er αὑτους, καὶ
Ὑ ’ “ 7 \ ? 4 e 4 4
ἐβαλλον λίθοις τε Kat τοξεύμασι Kal ἀκοντίοις, WS ἕκαστος
’ a a Γ a 3
τὸ πρόχειρον εἶχεν. γενομένης δὲ τῆς βοῆς ἅμα τῇ ewe
~ Ἂχ / 3. , 3 , 9.) 4
δρομῇ, ἔκπληξίς τε ἐνέπεσεν ἀνθρώποις αήθεσι τοιαύτης
, δ N eo , ,.»
μάχης, καὶ ὁ κονιορτὸς τῆς ὕλης νεωστὶ κεκαυμένης ἐχώρει
Ν ¥ ¥ , mA εν x, a es a
“πολὺς ἄνω, ἄπορον τε ἦν ἰδεῖν τὸ. πρὸ αὑτοῦ ὕπο τῶν
, “ 4 > AN A 3 , Ἀ a
τοξευμάτων καὶ λίθων ἀπὸ πολλῶν avOpwrwv μετὰ TOU
na of , 2 a
κονιορτοῦ ἅμα φερομένων. 48. τό τε ἔργον ἐνταῦθα xa-
. a , , ¥ . ε
λεπὸν tos Δακεδαιμονίοις καθίστατο" οὗτε γὰρ οἱ πίλοι
¥” ‘ ΄,. J
ἔστεγον τὰ τοξεύματα, Soputia τε ἐναποκέκλαστο βαλλο-
4 Jas a 3
μένων, εἶχον τε οὐδὲν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς χρήσασθαι, ἀποκεκλῃ-
, “ a ΚΧ a “ e ow “ A 4 a
μένοι μὲν τῇ ὄψει τοῦ προορᾶν, ὑπὸ Se τῆς μείζονος βοῆς
a 4 3 “ 3 3 rd
τῶν πολεμίων τὰ ἐν αὑτοῖς παραγγελλόμενα OUK εσακου-
7 a “ 3 4
οντες, κινδύνου τε πανταχόθεν περιεστῶτος, καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες
3 , 5 ὦ . 9? , a
ἐλπίδα καθ ὃ τι χρὴ ἀμυνομένους σωθῆναι.
Λ δ ἢ ¥ a © NON
44. Τέλος Se, τραυματιζομένων ἤδη πολλῶν δια τῷ ἀει
3 a > a 9 4 6 4 > » ’ ὃ
ev τῷ αυτῷ αναστρέφεσθαι.: ξυγκλῇσαντες εχωρησαν ες 7
a a ᾽ S 9 aA δ
ἔσχατον ἔρυμα τῆς νήσου, ὃ οὐ πολὺ ἀπεῖχεν, καὶ τοὺς
a ᾽ . 2 9 a ¥ a ¥
ἑαυτῶν φύλακας. ὡς δὲ ἐνέδοσαν, ἐνταῦθα ἤδη πολλῷ ET
, a 3 a
πλέονι Bon τεθαρσηκότες οἱ ψιλοὶ ἐπέκειντο" καὶ τῶν

IV.,87.] The Spartans taken in the Rear. 207

r “ “ a 4 [4
Δακεδαιμονίων ὅσοι μὲν ὑποχωροῦντες εγκατελαμβάνοντο
42 ΄ rd XN 4 ’ 3 Ν 4 Ων
απεθνησκον, ob δὲ πολλοί, διαφυγόντες ἐς TO ἔρυμα, μετὰ

a ’ ᾿ , 9 7 a a ° ? a
Tov Tavtn φυλάκων ετάξαντο Tapa παν, ὡς ἀμυνούμενοι
e 9 > » N e » A 3 ᾽
ἥπερ ἣν ἐπίμαχον. 48.. καὶ ot Αθηναίοι ἐπισπόμενοι
΄, N > «a 4 , ͵ 9 1.»
περίοδον μὲν αὐτῶν καὶ κύκλωσιν χωρίου ἰσχύϊ οὐκ εἶχον,
Ν 3 3 y 3 a N
προσιόντες δὲ εξ ἐναντίας ὥσασθαι ἐπειρῶντο. καὶ ypo-
᾿ x “a e 4 “ “ 4
Pov μὲν πολὺν καὶ τῆς ἡμεέερᾶς TO πλείστον ταλαιπωροὺυ-
3 4 e ’ A , “ 4 . 6 ,
βενοι ἀμφότεροι ὕπο τε τῆς μάχης καὶ δίψους καὶ ἡλίου
9 σ΄ ΄ Ἁ > / 3 a ,
ἀντεῖχον, πειρώμενοι οἱ μὲν ἐξελάσασθαι ἐκ τοῦ μετεώρου,
e δὲ ν, Σ» ὃ a . 22 δ᾽ ε A 5 ’ 4.9 9 a?
ot de μὴ ἐνδοῦναι" ῥᾷον δ᾽ ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἠμύναντο ἢ ev
a N 9 rv) a , } δ ͵
τῷ πρίν, οὐκ οὕσης σφῶν τῆς κυκλωώσεως ἐς τὰ πλάγια.
ϑ N ‘\ 9 ὔ . . σι
46. ᾿Επειδὴ δὲ ἀπέραντον ἦν, προσελθὼν ὁ τῶν Μεσ-
, ἣν , δ , ¥ ¥
σηνίων aotparnyos Κλέωνι καὶ Δημοσθένει, ἄλλως edn
ἴω A > - , e a a a a
πονεῖν σφᾶς" εἰ δὲ βούλονται ἑαυτῷ δοῦναι τῶν τοξοτῶν
a N a o~ Ν [4 3 a a
μέρος τι καὶ τῶν ψιλῶν, περιιέναι κατὰ VWTOY αὑτοῖς ὁδῷ
ea 2" d a a 4 Ν ¥ “ ‘
ἢ ἂν autos εὕρῃ, δοκεῖν βιάσασθαι την ἐφοδον. λαβὼν de
aA 9 ’ 2 Aa 3 “a e ᾽ ad . 9 a b] 4
ἃ ητήσατο, ἐκ TOV αφανοῦς ὁρμήσας, ὥστε wy ἰδεῖν ἐκεί-
AN a oA “ “ , “a ,
VOUS, KATA TO GEL παρεῖκον τοῦ κρημνωδους τῆς νήσου προ-
Φ , / 4 Po /
βαίνων, καὶ ἢ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι χωρίου ἰσχύϊ πιστεύσαντες
9 3 4. “ Ν , Ν ®.
οὐκ ἐφύλασσον, χαλεπῶς τε καὶ μολις περιελθὼν ἔλαθεν"
a 3 4 3 - ἈΝ , ?
καὶ ἐπὶ TOU μετεώρου «ἐξαπίνης ἀναφανεῖὶς κατὰ vwTOV av-
fas Q ‘ a? , %/ ᾿ ν ἃ ’
τῶν, τοὺς μὲν τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ ἐξέπληξεν, τοὺς δε ἃ προσεδε-
ΕΥ̓) a > - δ e
NovTo ἰδόντας πολλῷ μᾶλλον εἐπέρρωσεν. AT. καὶ οἱ
’ ’ [ > 4 y Ν ’
“ακεδαιμόνιοι, βαλλόμενοι τε ἀμφοτέρωθεν ἤδη, καὶ yuyvo-
3 a > A 4 e Ἁ , 4 ,
μενοι ev τῷ αὐτῷ ξυμπτωματι (ὡς μικρὸν μεγάλῳ etxucat)
a 3 4. 3 a , “ a 3 a
τῷ ev Θερμοπύλαις, — ἐκεῖνοι TE Yap TH ατραπῷ περιελ-
a “ , φ / > ,
θόντων τῶν Περσῶν διεφθάρησαν, ovrot te ἀμφίβολοι
‘4 . Σ᾿» 3 a > - A 9 , ’
ἤδη ὄντες οὐκέτι ἀντεῖχον, AANA πολλοῖς τε ολίγοι μαχό-
. 9 / / Ν Ν ’ ς ,
μενοι καὶ ἀσθενείᾳ σωμάτων δια την σιτοδείαν ὑπεχώρουν,
Q ¢ 9 a > , Ὑ A 2 ,
καὶ ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκράτουν ἤδη τῶν ἐφοδων.
Ἁ Ν φ Ul \ 4 @ ? 4
48. Γνους δὲ ὁ Κλεων καὶ ὁ 4ημοσθένης ὅτι, εἰ καὶ

208 Pylus and Sphacteria. (Tavcy.

4 a a 3 ὔ ’ 9 \
ὁποσονοῦν μᾶλλον ενδωσουσι, διαφθαρησομένους avrous
εν ms ΄ α ¥ ‘ ͵ δ \
ὕπο τῆς σφετέρας στρατιᾶς, ἔπαυσαν THY μάχην καὶ TOUS
e “ > a ’ 3 a 2 Α 3 ’
ἑαυτῶν ἀαπείρξαν, βουλόμενοι ἀγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς Αθηναίιοις
a Ν “ 4 3 4 > a a
ζῶντας, εἰ πὼς TOU κηρύγματος ἀκούσαντες επικλασθεῖεν τῇ
4 \. of a x, ¢ “ a /
γνώμῃ [τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι] καὶ ἡσσηθεῖεν τοῦ παρόντος
a 2? , 9 , . @& a N
δεινοῦ. exnpvEuv τε εἰ βούλοιντο τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι Kas
a x NSN 9 / ef a 4 A 3. ἢ
σφᾶς avtous Αθηναίοις, ὥστε βουλεῦσαι ὃ τι ἂν εκείνοις
a e “ 3 ’ ζω “ 3 4 e -
δοκῇ" οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες παρῆκαν tas ὠσπίδας οἱ πλεῖστοι
N \ a > ἡ a , 4
καὶ τὰς χεῖρας ἀνέσεισαν, δηλοῦντες προσίεσθαι τα κεκη-
’ Ν ‘“ a 4 “A 3 a
ρυγμένα. 49. pera δε ταῦτα, γενομένης τῆς ἀνακωχῆς,
δι 2 4 (<4 / A ς 7 Q
ξυνῆλθον es λόγους ὃ τε Κλέων καὶ ὁ AnyooOevns, καὶ
2 ’ ’ e ᾽ a 4 > 4 a
ἐκείνων Στύφων ὁ Φάρακος, τῶν πρότερον ἀρχόντων τοῦ
Ν ’ ’ 3 , Aa Χ 3 a, AN ἐ
μὲν πρώτου τεθνηκότος, Επιτάδου, τοῦ δὲ μετ᾽ αὑτὸν Ϊπ-
4 3 4 3 “Ὁ ΄ι wv a 4
παγρέτου ἐφῃρημένου Y: Tots VEE OS εἴ ζῶντος κει μεν
ὡς τεθνεῶτος, αὑτὸς τρίτος εφῃρημένος ἄρχειν κατα νόμον,
¥ 3 a ‘4 Ἁγ. Ν ς ’ ‘ e
εἰ TL ἐκεῖνοι πάσχοιεν. 50. ἔλεγε δὲ ὁ Στυφων καὶ οἱ
Ὁ») ae y , . s >
μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὅτι βούλονται διακηρυκεύσασθαι πρὸς τοὺς ἐν
a , , a δ A a δ
τῇ ἠπείρῳ Δακεδαιμονίους ὃ τε χρὴ σφᾶς ποιεῖν. καὶ
3 , Χ 3 , 3 4 3 A Ν a 9 4
εκείνων μὲν οὐδένα αφέντων, αὐτῶν δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
a > a [4 ᾽ - 4 3
καλούντων EK τῆς ἠπείρου κηρυκας καὶ γενομένων ἐπερω-
’ Ν A Ν e a , 3 a > ON
τήσεων δὶς ἢ τρίς, ὁ τελευταῖος διαπλεύσας αὑτοῖς απὸ
a 2 a 9 , ’ > ν > » [2 €
τῶν ex τῆς ἠπείρου Aaxedatpoviwy ἀνὴρ ἀπηγγείλεν ὅτι οἱ
4 4 e a 2 ‘ N
Λακεδαιμόνιοι κελεύουσιν ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς περι
e a 3 A ; 4 ‘ 3 Ν
υμῶν αὐτῶν βουλεύεσθαι, μηδὲν αἰσχρον ποι-.
“-“ e “ > ὁ Ν [4 \@
ουντας. δὅ!. ot de καθ᾽ eavrous βουλευσαμενοι, Ta ὅπλα
΄ Ν “ 3 ’ ‘ , Ν ἈΝ e 74
παρέδοσαν καὶ σφᾶς αὐτούς. καὶ ταύτην μὲν THY ἡμέραν
x ON 3 A , ? a 4 9 ‘ ς}
καὶ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν νύκτα ἐν φυλακῇ εἶχον αὐτοὺς οἱ AOr-
» a a? , e νΝ 3 Ν a ’
ναΐοι" τῇ 8 ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μεν Αθηναῖοι τροπαιον στησαν-
3 a , Υ͂ ͵ὔ e 3 a ‘ ‘
τες ἐν TH νήσῳ τᾶλλα διεσκευάξοντο WS ες πλοῦν, καὶ TOUS
4 a [4 4 3 Ν ς “
ἄνδρας τοῖς τριηράρχοις διεδίδοσαν ἐς φυλακὴν, ot δε Aa-
, , ’ Ἀ ‘ ,
κεδαιμόνιοι κήρυκα πέμψαντες Tous νεκροὺς διεκομέσαντο.

IV, 44.] Victory of the Athemans. 209

9 ’ 9 a 4 a a o
52. ᾿Απέθανον δ᾽ ev τῇ νήσῳ καὶ ζῶντες ἐλήφθησαν
, Μ Ν e a 4 “ [4 e
τοσοίδε" εἰκοσι μὲν ὁπλῖται διέβησαν καὶ τετρακόσιοι οἱ
, ͵ ΝΥ 3 , 9 N 3 ,
πάντες" τούτων ζῶντες ἐκομίσθησαν ὀκτὼ ἀποδέοντες
, ς . Ψ 9 ᾿ Q a s
τριακόσιοι, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ἀπέθανον. καὶ Σπαρτιᾶται TOU~
4 a ’ ν Κ᾿ ν. “ ’ ᾽ '
Tov ἦσαν τῶν ζωντων περὶ εἰκοσι καὶ exatov. Αθηναίων
‘ 9 N , e A [4 3 ΄
δὲ οὐ πολλοὶ διεφθάρησαν "ἢ γάρ μαχὴ ov σταδια ἦν.
’ὔ ν ς 4 3 4 oe ew e "» a rd
χρόνος Se ὁ ξυμπας ἐγένετο ὅσον οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ
᾽ ’ > a) a 4 ? a 3 a a
ἐπολιορκήηθησαν, απὸ τῆς ναυμαχίας μέχρι τῆς EV TH νήσῳ
, ς ’ εο» , , , . ΚΓ
μάχης, ἑβδομήκοντα ἡμέραι καὶ δύο. τούτων περὶ εἴκοσιν
¢ 67 9 φ φ ’ “ a a 3 4
ἡμέρας, ἐν ais οἱ πρέσβεις περὶ τῶν σπονδῶν ἀπῆεσαν,
3 a “ . ad > ’ é 4
ἐσιτοδοτοῦντο, Tas δε ἄλλας τοῖς ἐσπλέουσι λαθρᾳ διετρέ-
. 9 a 3 a , \, ὟΥ ,
φοντο. καὶ ἣν σίτὸος ἐν TH νήσῳ καὶ ἄλλα βρωματα
5) , εν ν᾿ 9 ’ 3 , e 8
ἐγκατεληφθη" ὁ yap ἄρχων ᾿πιταδας ἐνδεεστέρως ἑκάστῳ
a A 4 εν 9 4
παρείχεν ἢ προς την ἐξουσίαν.
e ‘ ᾿ “ e 4 3 4
53. Οἱ μεν δη ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι ἀνεχω-
a a 3 a , eos >> ν᾿ N
pncav τῷ στρατῷ ex τῆς Πύλου εκάτεροι em οἰκου, Kat
a ’ ’ , 4 ee 48 > »
τοῦ Κλέωνος, καίπερ μανιωδης οὖσα, ἡ ὑπόσχεσις ἀπεβη"
7 8 4 ” e a Μ Ν ¥ ee e 7
ἐντὸς γὰρ ELKooLY ἡμερῶν ἤγαγε TOUS avdpas, ὥσπερ ὑπέ-
4 γ᾽ “ Λ ζω] A a 0.
στη. παρα γνωμὴν τε dn μάλιστα τῶν κατὰ TOV πόλεμον
a ζω ad 3 ’ x “ /
τοῦτο tows EdAnow ἐγένετο" τοὺς γὰρ Aaxedatpovious
¥ x a ¥ 3 > ff 5 a ϑ8φῳ , Φ, x
οὔτε λιμῷ OUT avayKn οὐδεμιᾳ ἠξίουν Ta ὅπλα παρα-
ra 3 “ 4 Ν 4 e Ia? >
δοῦναι, adda EYOVTAS καὶ μαχομένους ὡς εδυναντο utro-
, 3 nw 4 “ Ἁ 4
θνήσκειν. 54. ἀπιστοῦντές τε μὴ εἶναι TOUS παραδόντας
aA a e a ’ 3 ’ Ν
τοῖς τεθνεῶσιν ομοίους, καὶ τινος ἐρομένου ποτε ὕστερον
a 3 4 4 9 > ‘ A a“ ? a
τῶν Αθηναίων ξυμμάχων δι ἀχθηδονα ἕνα τῶν εκ τῆς
9 ’ 3 ς a > A AN 9 Q
νήσου αἰχμαλώτων εἰ ot τεθνεῶτες αὐτῶν καλοι καγαθοὶ,
? 4 2 a a ἃ ¥ 4 Ν ¥
ἀπεκρίνατο αὑτῷ, πολλοῦ av akiov εἶναι τὸν ἄτρακτον
. 3 A 9 “ 9 Ἁ 3 θ ἃ ὃ , ὃ ’
(λέγων τὸν οἰστὸν) εἰ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς διεγίγνωσκε, δηλωσιν..
4 oe 4 , ΝΥ , N 4
ποιούμενος OTL ὁ ἐντυγχάνων τοῖς τε λίθοις Kat τοξεύμασι
’
διεφθείρετο.

δδ. Κομισθέντων δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβού-
it

210 Pylus and Sphacteria. (Tuucyo.

a ‘ 2 AN ’ , 4
λευσαν δεσμοῖς μεν αὐτοὺς φυλάσσειν μέχρι ov τε ξυμ-
a 4a 4 e 4 “ 4 3 . A
βῶσιν, ἣν δ᾽ οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι πρὸ τούτου es τὴν γῆν
» , 9 4 3 “ a Ν
ἐσβώλλωσιν, efayayovtes αποκτεῖναι. τῆς δὲ Πύλου
ΝἬ 4 X e 3 a 4
φυλακὴν κατεστήσαντο, καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς Ναυπάκτου Meo-
’ e 3 ’ ΝΜ Ν ς ’ a
σήνιοι ws ἐς πατρίδα ταύτην (ἔστι yap ἡ Πύλος τῆς Meo-
ὕ a ΕΣ ΩῚ 4 an > ar) 4
σηνίδος ποτὲ οὔσης γῆς) πέμψαντες σφῶν αὐτῶν τοὺς
9 , 9 7. οἴ “ i a “ a
ἐπιτηδειοτάτους, ἐληϊζον te τὴν Δακωνικὴν Kat πλεῖστα
» ΄ cd e Ν ’ i
εἐβλαπτον, ὁμόφωνον ὄντες. 56. οἱ δὲ “Μακεδαιμονιοι,
3 ry ¥ 9 a . ’ 4 4
ἀμαθεῖς ὄντες ἐν τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ ληστείας καὶ τοιούτου
,ὔ ξ΄“ Ρ , 4 ’ ον (
πολέμου, τῶν τε EtAwtwy avtoporovvteyv, καὶ φοβου-
Ν ᾿ “ ’ ΄ a a
μενοι μὴ καὶ ἐπὶ μακρότερον σφίσι τε νεωτερισθῇ τῶν
Ν \ , ϑ 4 ” 3. Ν ’ >
κατὰ τὴν χώραν, ov ῥᾳδιως ἔφερον, adda, καίπερ ov
, ΝΝ > - » ἢ ? /
Bovropevoe ἐνδηλοι εἶναε tors Αθηναίοις, ἐπρεσβεύοντο
4 32 Α . 3 a ’ td Q “ #
Tap avtous, Kat ἐπειρῶντο τὴν τε Πύλον καὶ τοὺς avdpas
ἢ e Ν ’ > », Ν /
κομίζεσθαι. οἱ δὲ μειζονων Te wpeyovTo, καὶ πολλάκις
’ 9 ‘ > / > » a " \
φοιτωντων AVTOUS ἀπράκτους ἀπέπεμπον. ταῦτα μεν TA
δ ’ ’ ᾿
περι Πύλον γενόμενα.

NOTES.

xmconfpee—

XENOPHON: ANABASIS,

THE expedition of Cyrus the Younger against his brother Arta-
xerxes — the ANaBasis — was in the year 401 Β. c. The march from
Sardis to the neighborhood of Babylon began in March or April; and
about six months later, in September or October, the battle of Cunaxa
was fought, in which Cyrus was killed, in a hand-to-hand encounter
with his brother, and the Greeks, though victorious in their part of
the battle, were left without a chief, at the King’s mercy. They were
more than a thousand miles from home; and their choice lay between
returning through the hostile country of the Persians, and a retreat
towards the Greek colonies on the Black Sea, through the mountainous
region and the barbarous tribes that lay between. While negotiating
for permission to return, and safe-conduct by land or sea, five of their
officers were treacherously seized and put to death. It is in the dis-
tress, perplexity, and terror of this catastrophe that the ensuing nar-
rative begins.

The famous “retreat of the ten thousand Greeks,” along the upper
waters of the Tigris, and through the highlands of Armenia, brought
them to the shore of the Black Sea, at Trapezus (Trebisonde), about
the middle of February, 8. o. 400. This winter march, occupying
nearly three months of actual travel, and extending over about fifteen
hundred miles, is the subject of the two books here given. The nar-
rative was written out by Xenophon, some years later, from notes
taken at the time; and is referred to by himself (apparently) in the
“ Hellenica” as the work of Themistogenes. It contains by far the
most vivid picture that has ever been given of the temper, discipline,
and endurance of those citizen-soldiers who made up the Grecian
forces ; and along with it, an authentic and most curious account of
those tribes of mountaineers who lived just outside the circle of the
then civilized world.

About three years before the Anabasis, the Peloponnesian War had
ended (Β. c. 404) in the downfall of Athens and the complete over-
throw of her supremacy, — as told in the extract from Xenophon’s
“Hellenica” given in this volume. The Greeks who joined Cyrus in

a XENOPHON.

his enterprise were mostly soldiers of fortune from those disbanded
armies which had filled Greece with adventurers and ruined men,
ready to take service under any military chief who could promise
them work and pay. ‘Most of them,” says Xenophon, “had not
gone out to this service for lack of subsistence, but because they
heard of the worth of Cyrus; some brought armed followers with
them, others invested money; of these some forsook their parents,
others left children behind, so as to earn money for them, and bring
it to them on their return.” Some, like Xenophon, were men of a
superior grade, disheartened by the political condition of things that
followed the war, and drawn into this expedition by personal admira-
tion of the prince, or personal attachment to some of his officers.
Cyrus, at the time of his death, was about twenty-four years old:
a man of great ability, ambition, and force, who had been an active
ally of the Lacedaemonians in their war of conquest against Athens.
Xenophon seems in the narrative to have been about thirty: he was
a pupil and friend of Socrates, a thoroughbred Greek gentleman and
soldier; but greatly disaffected towards the new democracy of Athens,
and of strong sympathy with the Spartans.

ΝΟΤΕ. — The references are to the sections of Goodwin’s Elementary Greek Grammar.

Book $3.—Cuap. I. 1. ὅσα ... ἔπραξαν .. . δεδήλωται, what the
Greeks did, d:c. has been told. —rq ... τῇ (see G. 141, N. 3; 142, 2, ΝΣ. 4).
— ἠξναβάσει, i. 6. the march upward (dva-Balve), from the coast towards
Babylon. — ἐτελεύτησε : the aor. following a leading verb in ἃ past
tense has often (like the Latin perf. after postquam) the sense of the
plup., had perished. — ἀπιόντων ... ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, while they were
retreating (pres. part. G. 204) during the armistice. — ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν
λόγῳ (6. 141, N. 3), in the preceding narrative, i. 6. in the two previous
books.

2. οἱ στρατηγοί, i. 6. the five (see above). — συνειλημμένοι ἦσαν peri-
phrastic plup. (G. 98) from συλλαμβάνω, had been seized. — λοχαγών, ke.
part. gen. (G. 168) with of συνεπόμενοι. ---ἀπωλώλεσαν (6. 104, N. ), v. ἀπόλ-
Lupa. — él... θύραις ; their distance was about 350 miles from Babylon.
— ἧσαν (6. 248, N. 2). — κύκλφ, like the English a-round. — ἔμελλεν, with
fut. inf. (6. 98,3; 202, 3, N.), was likely. — ἀπεῖχον, were distant. —'EMd-
δος, from Greece (G. 177). — τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ (G. 141, N. 3). — προὐδ- for
apoed- (6. 9, 2; 105, 1, N. 1), v. προδίδωμι --- ol... βάρβαροι (6. 276, 1),
the Persians of Cyrus’s army; these were more than 100,000 under the
command of Ariaeus. — μόνοι (pred. nom.), left alone. — καταλελειμμένοι,
γι καταλείπο. --- οὐδὲ... οὐδένα (G. 283, 8). — νικῶντες, if they should be
victorious (G. 226, 1). — κατακάνοιεν : the form -καίνω for -κτείνω is com-
mon in Xen. — ἡττηθέντων, (ἡττάομαι, used for pass. of vixdw), gen. abs.
with αὐτῶν, or partitive gen. after οὐδείς. --- λειφθείη, v. λείπω.

ANABASIS 3, 1. 3

8. ἐννοούμενοι, having in mind. — ἀθύμως ἔχοντες, being disheartened :
with ἔχω the adverb has the meaning of the adjective with εἰμί, --- eds, at
or towards, — σΐτον (G. 171, 2). —dvéxavoav, v. ἀνακαίω. --- τὰ ὅπλα,
i. 6. the place where their arms were stacked. —wv«ra (G. 161). —dverav-
ovro... ἕκαστος, they would lie down where each chanced to be (sc. ὦν,
G. 279, 2): observe the force of the imperfect. — πατρίδων, &c. objective
gen. after πόθον (G. 167, 3). — οὕποτ᾽ is translated as if it qualified
ὄψεσθαι (G. 203).

Page 2. — 4. Ἐξενοφῶν : ‘‘the inspiration now fell, happily for the army,
on one in whom a full measure of soldierly strength and courage was com-
bined with the education of an Athenian, a democrat, and a philosopher.
It is in the true Homeric vein, and in something like Homeric language, that
Xenophon describes his dream, or the intervention of Oneiros, sent by Zeus,
from which this renovating impulse took its rise.” Grote. — μετεπέμψατο
(aor.), had sent for him. — ξένος, guest-friend: by a curious transition, this
word signifies at once stranger, foreigner, mercenary soldier, guest, and
friend ; here, a stranger, or foreigner, who has been brought into the rela-
tion of guest, and so, by a sort of freemasonry, becomes a private friend,
though he might be a public enemy. — εἰ ἔλθοι... ποιήσειν (G. 246, 247):
the direct discourse would be ἐὰν ἔλθῃς, ποιήσω, and ἐὰν ἔλθῃ might have
been used here, like éradav λήξῃ in § 9 (below). — dv... πατρίδος, whom
he (Proxenus) himself (G. 145, 1) said he considered a better friend to him
than his country (G. 175, 1). Proxenus was one of the generals slain by
the treachery of the Persians.

5. ὁ Elevohev (G. 141, N. 15). — Σωκράτει : Socrates the philosopher,
Xenophon’s master and friend. — ph... εἴη, lest it might be matter of
accusation by the state (G. 218): the subject of εἴη is γενέσθαι (G. 259). —
τοῖς Aax.: dat. governed by σύν in συμπολεμῆσαι (G. 187): for the aor.
infin., see G. 203. — ἐλθόντα, agreeing with αὐτόν understood.

6. ἐπτήρετο : the aor. ἠρόμην (from ἔρομαι) is common ; but ἐρωτάω is
almost always used for the forms from the present stem. — tlw (interrog. )

. «εὐχόμενος, by sacrifice and prayer to which of the gods: ἄν qualifies
ἔλθοι and σωθείη (G. 212, 4). — ὁδόν, cognate acc. (G. 159). — καλῶς πρά-
tas, like the English doing well. — ἀνεῖλεν, v. dvatpéw. — θεοῖς : dat. for
acc. by inverse attraction, a rare construction (G. 153, N. 4).

7. ἡτιᾶτο, v. alridopar. — ἠρώτα, v. ἐρωτάο. --- τοῦτο, in appos. with
the clause πότερον . . . μένειν. --- πότερον εἴη (G. 243). — ἱτέον εἶναι, that
he was bound to go (G. 281, 2). — ὅπως Gv... πορευθείη, indirect question
(G. 245): the direct form would be πῶς Gv πορευθείην ; how could I go?

8. ols (G. 153, N. 1): the antecedent is ἐκείνοις rots θεοῖς understood.
— ἐξέπλει, v. ἐκπλέω (G. 123, N. 1). — μέλλοντας (G. 138, N. 2a). —
ὁδόν (G. 159). — συνεσταθη (συνίστημι, G. 126, 1, N.), was introduced.

9. συμπροὐθυμεῖτο (imperf.), joined in urging. — tradav... λήξῃ . . .
ἀποπέμψει (G. 247): after εἶπε, ἐπειδὴ λήξειεν would be more common. —
.«ἀποπέμψει, will (for would) dismiss him (G. 243 ; 202, 4).

4 XENOPHON.

10. ἐστρατεύετο (imperf.), continued on the expedition. — πλήν (G. 182,
Ν.). — εἴη (G. 203, 243). — ἐπὶ βασιλέα : the word βασιλεύς is used with-
out the article (as a title) in speaking of the king of Persia.

Page 8. — φοβούμενος . . . ὅμως, though fearing, dc. and reluctant,
yet... — ἀλλήλων, Κύρου, obj. gen. after αἰσχύνην (G. 167, 3).

11. λαχών, v. λαγχάνω : for its government, see G. 170, 2, and nN. —
ἔδοξεν, ν. δοκέω : the subj. is σκηπτός. -- πεσεῖν, v. πίπτω (G. 203). —
πᾶσαν, sc. οἰκίαν : subj. οὗ λάμπεσθαι, as if governed by the impersonal
ἔδοξεν. :

12. ἀνηγέρθη, v. dveyelpw, was roused, woke. —wy... wy, partly...
partly.— Weiv: the aor. εἶδον is connected with the tenses of dpde. — μὴ
οὐ δύναιτο, lest he might not be able, following ἐφοβεῖτο.

13. ὁποῖον... ἐστί, but what it is. —& τῶν συμβάντων, from what
happened (G. 139). — πρῶτον μέν, see the corresponding ἐκ τούτου, ὃ 15.
— εἰκός, i is likely. — el δὲ γενησόμεθα (G. 223, N. 1). — ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ,
in the King’s power. — ἔπιδόντας, v. ἐπεῖδον, having livid to see. — τί ἐμ-
ποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ... ἀποθανεῖν; (G. 263, 1, N.; 283, 7. — παθόντας, v. wd-
oxo. — ἀποθανεῖν, v. ἀποθνήσκω.

14. ἀμννούμεθα (fut. mid.), how we may defend ourselves (G. 217). —
ἐξόν, ν. ἔξεστι, just as if it were possible (G. 278, 2). — ob... Err, never.

15. ἐκ τούτον, upon this: we should expect ἐκ δὲ τούτου, see § 13. —
ἔτι, any longer. — ἐν οἵοις, in what straits (G. 139).

16. δῆλον ὅτι = evidently. — ob mporepov... πρίν, not until (G. 240).

Page &. — ἐξέφηναν, v. ἐκφαίνω, opened war upon us. — wapernevdcba
(perf. infin. pass., see G. 118, N. 4), had been got ready (G. 246). — ἀγω-
ψιούμεθα (fut. mid., G. 120, 3), of ἀγωνίζω (G. 217).

17. ὑφησόμεθϑα, v. ὑφίημι, yield ourselves. — πείσεσθαι, v. πάσχω. --
ὅς, causal rel. (G. 238), since he. — ds... ποιήσοντες, intending to make
him a subject [slave] instead of king. — ἄν qualifies παθεῖν (G. 211). — καί
... καί, emphatic. — nal... ἤδη, even when already dead. — ἡμᾶς, sub).
of παθεῖν. --- κηδεμὼν οὐδείς, no relative (as Cyrus had his mother). — The
subj. of ἐστρατεύσαμεν is of, understood from the preceding οἷς (G. 156, n.).

18. dp’ οὐκ... ἔλθοι, would he not make every effort 3 --- τὰ ἔσχατα,
cognate acc. (G. 159, N. 4). --- αἰκισάμενος, implying both ignominy and
torture. — τοῦ στρατεῦσαι (G. 262, 2), objective genitive after φόβον. —
ποιητέον, governing πάντα (G. 281, 2).

19. οἰκτείρων, μακαρίζων (G. 279, 1). --- αὐτῶν, limiting the phrase
Sony... ἔχοιεν, &c. it need not be translated. — ἐσθῆτα, clothing, in gen-
eral.

20. ὁπότε ἐνθνυμοίμην, whenever I considered (G. 233). — The passage
from ὅτι to λογιζόμενος is a sort of parenthesis, disconnected from the
grammatical structure of the sentence (‘‘anacoluthon”): in direet con-
struction, we should have, otSévos μέτεστι, and ἐὰν μὴ πριώμεθα (G. 225,
247). — ἀγαθών, good things, gen. after οὐδενός. --- μετείη (impera with

ANABASIS 3, 1. 5

gen. and dat. (G. 184, 2, Ν. 1; 243). — Srov δ᾽ ὠνησόμεθα, wherewith to
buy (gen. of price, G. 178); the antecedent (ἀργύριον understood) follows
ἔχοντας, 7 know that few had, dc. (G. 280). — ἄλλως... evoupevous, to
get supplies in any other way than by purchase, following κατέχοντας, our
oaths withheld us.

21. ἄθλα, pred. in appos. with ἀγαθά, as prizes. — ὁπότεροι, whichever
party, with antecedent omitted: the comparative form is used in reference
to the two sides, Persian and Greek. — ὦσιν (G. 232, 3).

22. αὐτούς, i. 6. the Gods, whom the Persians have mocked by perjury
(ἐπιωρκήκασιν), G. 158, N. 2. — θεῶν, object. gen. after ὅρκους. — ἐξεῖναι,
following δοκεῖ, J think we may. — πολύ, adverbial, qualifying μείζονι. ---
τούτοις, dat., agreeing with ἡμῖν understood after ἐξεῖναι.

Page $. — 23. ἕτι, besides. — τούτων, genitive of comparison (G. 175, 1),
than they. — σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς, by the Gods’ help. — οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες, i. 6. the en-
emy. — ἐὰν διδώσιν (G. 223), if the Gods should grant us, de. The future
apodosis is implied in rperol, &c., more liable to be wounded and killed ;
in consequence of the superior armor of the Greeks.

24. GAN ἴσως γάρ, but [enough,| for perhaps: an ellipsis of this kind
is very frequent with ἀλλὰ yap. — ἀναμένωμεν (G. 253). — παρακαλοῦντας
(G. 120, 2) future part. (G. 277, 3). — τοῦ ἐξορμῆσαι, gen. after ἄρξωμεν
(ἃ. 171; 262, 2). — φάνητε, v. halve, show yourselves,

25. κἀγώ = καὶ ἐγώ (G. 11). — ἡλικίαν : Xenophon appears to speak as
a youth ; but if, as other testimonies show, he was a man of forty, he may
refer to his inexperience as commander.

26. πλήν, except that. — hv... εἶπεν, for the simpler βοιωτιάζων τῇ
φωνῇ εἶπεν, said with a Boeotian accent. — Srv... λέγοι (G. 247) = φλναρεῖ
ὅστις λέγει. — ὅστις λέγοι, who said ; not who should suy. — σωτηρίας av
τυχεῖν, would find safety (G. 171, 1), --α τυχεῖν ἄν = τύχοιμι ἄν, 7 should
πὰ (if I should try). ἄλλως ... ἢ πείσας, otherwise than by persuading.

27. μεταξὺ ὑπολαβών, interrupting in the midst. — ἐν ταὐτῷ τούτοις, in
the same place with these (ἃ. 186, N. 2). —éwel... ἀπέθανε, i.e. after
Cyrus was killed: ἔπει = postquam. — ἐπὶ τούτῳ, at this, the death of
Cyrus.

28. τί οὐκ ἐποίησε (see § 18), what did he leave undone ?

29. σπονδαῖς (G. 184, 2). —od viv... of88... δύνανται ; (the οὐ is
interrog.) are they not unable, wretched men / even to die ? — τούτον, gov-
erned by ἐρῶντες (G. 171, 2). — rods... κελεύοντας, those bidding us defend
ourselves, subj. of φλναρεῖν after φής.

Page 6. — πάλιν, qualifying κελεύεις : it appears from this ‘that Apol-
Jonides had been one of those who had held faint-hearted language (An. IT.
1. 14) shortly after the death of Cyrus. This helps to explain the contempt
and rigor with which Xenophon here treats him. Nothing indeed could
be more deplorable, under present circumstances, than for a man to show
his acutencss by summing up the perils around.” Grote.

6 XENOPHON.

30. ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, 7 think it right. — ἀφελομένονς, ἀναθέντας, agree with
ἡμᾶς understood, subj. of χρῆσθαι : deprive him of his command, lay our
packs upon him, and treat him as such (i. e. as a pack-bearer).

31. dra (6. 197, 1, N. 2), wrth both his ears bored ; ὦτα, &c. presupposes
an active construction τρνπᾶν τὰ ὦτα αὐτῷ, lo bore his ears for him.

82. ἀπήλασαν, v. ἀπελαύνω. --- οἴχοιτο, was gonc. — Sov... dy...
οἴχοιτο... εἴη (G. 233 ; see also 200, N. 3).

88. «lg... ὅπλων, at the front of the encampment (v. § 8, G. 191, N. 6).
— ἐγένοντο, amounted to (in number), not were. — μεσαὶ γύκτες, plural,
referring to the divisions of the night.

34. ἤρχετο (v. ἄρχω) began. — ὦδε, as follows. — ὁρῶσι, dat. of the parti-
ciple agreeing with qpiv, which follows ἔδοξε; αὐτοῖς intensive (G. 145, 1),
reterring to ἡμῖν : i seemed best to us, when we saw, . . . ourselves to med,
dc. — βονλευσαίμεθα (G. 216, 1). --- εὀἰ δυναίμεθα (G. 248, N.). — πρὸς
ἡμᾶς, understand ἔλεξας, what you said to us.

35. τάδε, as follows (G. 148, N. 1). --- συναλήφασιν, v. συλλαμβάνω. --
ἡμῶν, partitive gen. after ovs.— δῆλον ὅτι, see § 16. — ἀπολέσωσιν,
v. ἀπόλλυμι (G. 216, 1). — ἡμῖν, by us, following ποιητέα (G. 188, 3;
281, 1). — The two clauses of this section are ταῦτα pév... ἡμῖν δέ. —
δυνώμεθα (G. 223).

36. συνεληλύθατε, ν. συνέρχομαι. --- μέγιστον καιρόν, the grandest
opportunity.

Page 7. — ἀθύμους, pred. after ὑμᾶς, — iv... ἦτε, if you shall be man
festly preparing. — ὑμεῖς is subject of the two clauses, αὐτοί te... ἦτε
(G. 280, N. 1; 145, 1), καὶ παρακαλῆτε (G. 223).

37. τούτων, gen. of comparison after διαφέρειν (G. 175, 2). — tt, some-
what, qualifying διαφέρειν (G. 160, 2). — χρήμασι, pay. — ἀξιοῦν δεῖ ὑμᾶς
αὐτούς, we have a right to expect that you, dc.

88. ὀνῆσαι ἄν, would help, v. ὀνίνημι (G. 226, 585). --- εὀἰ ἀντικαταστα-
θῶσιν, ν. -καθίστημι, if you would provide that for (ἀντί) the perished...
be substituted (G. 224; 217; 201, N. 2). —as... εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly
(G. 184, 5 ; 268). — συνελόντι, v. συναιρέω. --- οὐδαμοῦ (G. 283, 8) ; con-
trasted with παντάπασιν, chief of all.

39. ἐπειδὰν... ἣν καί, when you have... if then, ke. (see G. 232, 5).
— ποιῆσαι ἄν (G. 211 ; 226, 3). — πάνν ἐν καιρῷ, quite seasonably.

40. ὡς ἀθύμως, how spiritless. —otra γ᾽ ἐχόντων, at least while they are
so: gen. abs. with αὐτῶν understood. —8 τι, for what service (G. 188, 1,
N. 2). — νυκτός (G. 179, 1).

41. ds... ποιήσουσι, so that they may think not only of this, what they
are to suffer, but also of what they are to do.

42. ἴωσιν (G. 233). — ἐρρωμενέστεροι (compar. of the perf. part. pass.
of ῥώννυμι), more vigorous. — τούτους is antecedent of ὁπότεροι : such men
their foes do not abide. — ὧς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, generally (for the most part).

ANABASIS 3, τι. 7

᾿ e

Page 8. — 48. ζῆν, v. [dw. — ἐκ παντὸς τρόπον, any way they can. —
ἐγνώκασι, perf. of γιγνώσκω. --- robrovs, antecedent of ὁπόσοι. --- ἀφικνον-
μένους (G. 280). --- διάγοντας, passing their life. — ως ἂν ζῶσιν (G. 233).

44. αὐτούς, ourselves (emphatic). — nal... παρακαλεῖν, and call on the
rest (to be so too).

45. τοσοῦτον... ὅσον, 7 knew only so much of you, as that... — ἐφ᾽
ols, for what (G. 153, N. 1). — βουλοίμην ἄν (G. 226, 2). — ὅτι πλείστους
(like the Latin quam plurimos), as many as possible, i. 6. the more the
better. See note on Chap. 2, § 6.

46. αἱρεῖσθε, &c. imperat. — of δέομενοι, you who need them.

47. ἅμα εἰπών (G. 277, N. 1). — τὰ δέοντα, the needful business, subj.
of μέλλοιτο. --- Δαρδανεύς : Dardanos was a town of Troas.

11. 1. ἥρηντο, had been elected (plup. pass. of alpéw). — ὑπέφαινε, was
barely glimmering : a common force of ὑπό in comp. is slightly. — πρῶτον
μέν answers to ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὃ 4.

2. ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, fellow-soldiers. — ὁπότε, since. — ἀνδρῶν follow-
ing στερόμεθα (G. 174).

Page 9. — πρὸς δ᾽ En, and besides. — ol ἀμφὶ 'Αρ., Ariacus and his men
(ἃ. 141, N. 3). — ol... ὄντες (G. 276, 2), who were our allies before.

3. ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, from these straits. — ἄνδρας, pred. acc. referring to
ἡμᾶς understood : we must come out bravely. — ἀλλά γε, yet at least. —
πολεμίοις, dat. after ὑποχείριοι (G. 185). — οἷα τοὺς ἔχθρους, double ace.
after ποιήσειαν (G. 165). — ποιήσειαν (G. 251, 1); i. 6. such things as I
wish they may do to our enemies.

4. ἐπί, directly after. — ὅστις, i. 6. (such a man) who. — εἴη (G. 243).
— πφὶ.. . . ἂν ποιήσαιτο, would hold it of the utmost consequence (G. 245).
— ἐπὶ τούτοις, to that effect. — ὁμόσας, ν. ὄμνυμι. --- οὐδέ, not even. —
αὐτοῖς τούτοις, by that very means: i. 6. being on intimate terms (ὁμο-
τράπεζος) with Clearchus.

5. ὄν... ἐλάβομεν (G. 156, N.). — προδώσειν, infin. following πιστά
(ἃ. 260, 2). — καὶ οὗτος, even he too. — Kipov (G. 158, N. 2). — τοὺς
ἐκείνον ἐχθίστους, his worst enemics. — hpas, indir. obj. after ποιεῖν
(G. 165, N. 1).

6. ἀποτίσαιντο, requite (G. 251): ἀπο- implies the rendering what is
due. — ἔτι, any longer. — ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα κράτιστα, as vigorously as we
shall be able: by an ellipsis of δύναμαι we have the common expressions ὡς
κράτιστα, &c. as vigorously as possible, dc. — δυνώμεθα, δοκῇ (G. 232, 3).

7. ἐσταλμένος, equipped, v. στέλλω. --- νομίζων . . . ὀρθῶς ἔχειν, think-
ing it right. — κόσμον, ornament, refers to his equipment. — καλλίστων
(G. 178, N.). — ἐν τούτοις, in such [equipment]. — τελευτῆς (G. 171, 1).
— λόγου, ibid.

Page 10.—8. αὐτοῖς διὰ φιλίας ἱέναι, to enter into friendship with
them, like διὰ δίκης ἐλθεῖν τιγι, (0 go to law with one; and below, διὰ παν-

8 , XENOPHON.

τὸς πολέμον αὐτοῖς ἰέναι, to go to war with them in every way : for αὑτοῖς,
see G. 186, N. 1. — dpavrag... πεπόνθασιν, seeing the generals what they
have suffered, a common form of expression for seeing what the generals, de.
— ὧν (G. 153, N. 1); its antecedent would be gen. after δίκην (G. 167, 3),
punishment for what they have done: the antecedent in such cases is (as in
the English what) implied in the relative. — τὸ λοιπόν, adverbial, for the
Suture (G. 160, 2; 161).

9. ἐπεὶ... λεγόντων, since while we spoke, dc. — οἰωνός, omen: 50
sneezing is still regarded by the vulgar in some countries. — εὔξασθαι, to
vow, depending on δοκεῖ : when δοκεῖ (as here) means i seems good to me,
it pleases me, the infin. after it belongs under G. 202 ; whereas, generally,
it belongs under 203. — ὅπου ἂν ... ἀφικώμεθα (G. 232, 3). — dvaravara,
an appeal to the citizen-soldiers : decisive measures must be taken by their
vote and consent.

10. ἐμπεδοῦμεν, we stand by. — ἐπιωρκήκασι.. .. λελύκασιν, i. 6. have
sworn falsely to the treaty, and then have broken it. — οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων, gen.
abs.: things being so. — κἄν, even if.—xadv ... ὦσι, ὅταν βούλωνται
(G. 225 and 233).

11. ἀναμνήσω ὑμᾶς... .. κινδύνους : ἀναμιμνήσκω here takes two accus.
like the verbs included in G. 164 ; for its regular construction, see G. 17],
2, N. 3. — GyaGois, pred. after εἶναι (G. 138, N. 8). — ὡς ἀφανιούντων
(fut. of ἀφανίζω), &c. to blot Athens (again) out of existence (G. 277, 3,
and N. 2). — ὑποστῆναι, v. ὑφίστημι, to withstand. — ἐνίκησαν : i. 6. at
Marathon.

Page ΕΠ. -- 12. ὁπόσους κατακάνοιεν (kara-xalvw), representing ὅπό-
σους ἂν κατακάνωμεν of the direct ἔοστῃ. --- ἀποθύουσιν, they are still (after
ninety years) fulfilling that sacrifice. According to Herodotus, the num-
ber of Persians slain at Marathon was 6,400; by Xenophon’s reckoning,
those who perished in that invasion were at least 45,000.

13. τήν, that: i. 6. the famous expedition. — καὶ τότε, then too. —ton
ὁρᾶν (G. 259): ἔστι = tt is possible. — ἀλλά, but only.

14. ἐρῶ (v. G. under εἶπον) will say. — ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since. — ἐκείνων, i. 6. the
Persians of Xerxes’s army. — ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, gen. after πολλαπλασίους
(G. 175, N. 1).

15. πολύ (adverb) belongs to ἀμείνονας, &c.

16. αὐτών, obj. gen. after ἄπειροι (G. 180, N. 1). — ἄμετρον, predicate;
supply Sv (G. 280). — els, against. — ὅτι θέλουσι depends on the idea of
knowing implied in πεῖραν ἔχετε. ---- wal... ὄντες (G. 277, 5, and Ν. 1).—
δέχεσθαι, i. 6. to abide our attack.

17. μηδέ... εἰ, nor suppose that you are the worse for this, that, dc.
(G. 254). — Κύρειοι, the barbarian troops of Cyrus. — ἡττωμένων, gen. of
comparison (G. 175, 1); see Ch. I, § 2. — ἐκείνους, referring to ἡττω-
pévov. — ταττομένους (G. 280).

18. ἡμῖν (6. 184, 4).

ANABASIS 3, 1. 9

Page 12. — βηχθείς, v. δάκνω. --- ὅ τι ἂν γίγνηται (6. 238).

19. ἱππέων, gen. of compar. after πολὺ ἀσφαλεστέρον. — ol μὲν...
ἡμεῖς SE (G. 143, 1). — ἦν τις προσίῃ (G. 223). — ὅπον ἂν βονλώμεθα
(G. 232, 3). — τευξόμεθα, v. τυγχάνω. --- ἑνί, in one thing. — βεβηκότες,
v. βαίνω. --- ἡμᾶς : προέχειν usually takes the gen. (ἃ. 175, 2); here
the acc.

20. μάχας (G. 158, N. 2).— Sn... παρέξει, in appos. with τοῦτο,
which follows. — πότερον ... 4, whether. . . or. — κρεῖττον, sc. ἐστίν. —
φανερός, evidently (G. 138, N. 7; 280, N. 1). — obs... ἄνδρας for τοὺς
ἄνδρας ots (G. 164). --- ἔσονται, will know, v. εἶδον. --- σώματα : with
nouns of different genders the article is usually repeated ; here omitted in
rapid address.

21. πότερον κρεῖττον (sc. ἐστί) is part of the indirect question depend-
ing on σκέψασθε in § 20. — ἧς, by assimilation for ἣν (G. 153). — dpyuplov,
gen. of price (G. 178). — μηδὲ... ἔχοντας, no longer having even this
(i. 6. ἀργύριον). --- αὐτούς, ourselves (G. 145, 1, end). — ἥνπερ κρατώμεν
(G. 223). — ὁπόσῳ ἂν βούληται (G. 232, 3).

22. εἰ δὲ introduces three verbs. — ἄπορον (G. 138, N. 2c). — μεγάλως
. - διαβάντες, suppose yourselves to have been greatly deceived in having
crossed (G. 203 ; 277, 2). — σκέψασθε el, we should say, whether they have
NOT, &c. — πηγῶν (G. 182, 2). — Av... ὦσι (G. 225). — προϊοῦσι, fo those
advancing. — οὐδέ, not even.

23. διήσουσιν, v. διίημι, let ws pass (G. 223, nw. 1). — οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even
80, i. 6. not even under these circumstances. —Mvarots, the Mysians, of
N. W. Asia Minor, rebellious subjects of the King, and only half subdued.
— The Pisidians and Lycaonians inhabited the rugged southerly part of
Asia Minor. — βασιλέως ἄκοντος, gen. abs.

Page 13. — καρποῦνται (middle vaice), reap for themselves : the nouns
which would naturally be the subjects of this verb are attracted into the
preceding clauses, and made the objects of ἐπιστάμεθα and εἴδομεν. --- τού-
«τῶν, meaning the Persians, whose king has just been spoken of.

24. ἡμᾶς, emphatic. — ἂν ἔφην, 7 might say (unless, d&c. see next section :
G. 226, 2). — ὡρμημένους, after φανερούς (G. 280, N. 1): i. 6. we ought
not yet to let it be seen that we have set out for home. — ds... οἰκήσον-
vas, as intending to settle hereabouts. — ἄν before ὁμήρους belongs to δοίη
understood (G. 212, 3). —ro0... ἐκπέμψειν, gen. depending on ὁμήρους,
hostages for sending, &c.: for the fut. infin. see G. 202, 3. — καὶ el, even 77.
—€v... ἐποίει, he would be thrice-glad to do this (G. 222). — μένειν
παρασκενυαζομένους, preparing (not prepared) to remain.

25. ἀλλὰ γάρ, but [we will not do this] for, dc. — δέδοικα, v. δείδω
(perf. with pres. signification), Z am afraid. —dpyol (G. 138, N. 8). —
τῆν, v. ζάω (G. 123, N. 3). --᾿ καλαῖς καὶ μεγάλαις, fair and tall, the
Greek notion of female beauty. — γυναιξί, dat. after ὁμιλεῖν (G. 186). —
μή before ὥσπερ is a repetition of ph after δέδοικα. --- Awropdyor, lotus-

10 XENOPHON.

eaters, see Odyss. IX, 94, sqq.: having tasted of this sweet tropical plant,
the companions of Odysseus lost all care for home.

26. ἐπιδεῖξαι, v. ἐπιδείκνυμι, show. — ἐξόν, while it is in their power
(G. 278, 2). — rods... πολιτεύοντας, those who live poor at home : obj. of
᾿ δρᾶν. --- κομισαμένους (refers to the Greeks), if they shall bring them (τοὺς
ἀκλήρους) hither (G. 226, 1): it would regularly take the case of αὐτοῖς,
— ἀλλὰ γάρ, but [enough :] for, dc. ; often simply but. — τῶν κρατούντων
tori, belongs to the strongest (G. 169, 1).

27. πῶς ἄν belongs to both πορενοίμεθα and μαχοίμεθα. --- See note on
δοκεῖ in ὃ 9. — ἡμών, following orparnyg (G. 171, 3), that our campaign
may not be directed by the cattle — ἔπειτα, besides. — εἰς τὸ μάχεσθαι, &c.
(G. 262, 1).

28. ἀπαλλάξωμεν, let us abandon (G. 253). — κρατουμένων, gen. of
possess. after πάντα. --- ἀλλότρια, forseit, or lost.

Page 14. — νομίζειν, consider as, followed by two accus. (G. 166).

29. λοιπόν (λείπω), tt remains (sc. ἐστίν). --- ἐξενεγκεῖν, v. ἐκφέρω. --- οὐ
πρόσθεν. .. πρίν, not... wntil (G. 240). --- ὄντων ... ἀρχόντων, i 6.
while we had our officers. — ἀπολέσθαι ἄν, that we should be ruined
(= ἀπολοίμεθα ἄν, G. 211).

30. τῶν πρόσθεν (gen. of compar.), than those before. — rods... τούς
νῦν, see G. 142, 2, Ν. 4; observe the emphasis given by the position of
τούς and τῶν.

81. Av... ἦν, in case... if (the latter should be translated first). —
ὑμῶν (part. gen. with τὸν ἐντυγχάνοντα, acc. subj. of κολάζειν), whoever
of you may be at hand. — ἀεί, at any time. — dpevopévor, v. ψεύδω. — οὐ-
Sevl ἐπιτρέψοντας, who will suffer no man to be a coward. For the case of
κακῷ, see G. 138, N. 8.

82. ὃ ἰδιώτης, just our phrase, the private.

33. οἷς (G. 153). — αὐτίκα, presently. — εἴρηκε, v. εἶπον.

34. προσδεῖν, is needed besides. — ὅπον, [to a place] where.

35. εἰ οἱ πολέμιοι : the εἰ is repeated after the parenthetical clause ;
el... ἔπακολουθοῖεν is the protasis to οὐκ ἂν θαυμάζοιμι (G 224).

Page 15. — ἡμῖν, after ἐπακολουθοῖεν, follow close upon us (G. 187).

36. πλαίσιον, probably, a hollow square, with a front (τὰ πρόσθεν),
two sides or flanks (πλευραί), and a rear (τὰ ὄπισθεν) : within this the
baggage and the camp-followers (ὄχλος) were to be placed. — ὅπλων, 1. 6.
the ὁπλῖται, or heavy infantry. — ed... πλαισίον, if then ἐξ should be
settled at once who is to lead the square: ἀποδειχθείη, ν. ἀποδείκνυμι, ὦ
show forth or manifest, hence to appoint. — ὁπότε ἔλθοιεν (G. 232, 4). —
τεταγμένοις (ν. τάσσω), already assigned.

87. ἐχέτω, let it be. — ἡγοῖτο and the two other optatives express an ex-
hortation in the form of a wish (G. 251, 1). — Δακεδαιμόνιος : as the
Lacedaemonians were now the first power in Greece. — τὸ γῦν εἶναι, for the
present (G. 268, N.).

ANABASIS 3, ΠῚ. 11

838. τὸ λοιπόν, for the future (G. 160, 2). — τάξεως (G. 171, 1). — Boke
ταῦτα, they voted this: ‘‘ this seemed [good to them”).

39. τὰ δεδογμένα, what has been voted. — Borg... ἐπιθυμεῖ (like εἴ τις,
&c.), G. 232, 1. — μεμνήσθω εἶναι, be mindful that he be: ὧν would mean
that he is. — τῶν νικώντων ἐστί, it belongs to the victors. — τὰ τῶν ἡττωμέ-
vey, the possessions of the vanquished. — καὶ εἴ ταᾳ δέ, and even if any are:
when καί and δέ are thus used together, δέ is always the connective, and
καί is merely intensive.

III. 1. τούτων, these things. — λεχθέντων, v. λέγω. --- ἀνέστησαν, rose
up (the assembly being seated). — Srov, v. Sons, governed by δέοιτο
(G. 172, 1) and limited by περιττῶν, whatever of the spare articles: its
antecedent is the obj. of μετεδίδοσαν. --- os, about (before numerals). —
els ἔπήκοον, within hearing (ἀκούω).

Page 16.— 2. διάγων (sc. χρόνον), carrying. — φίλον, referring to μέ.

3. ἔλεγε (imperf.), was spokesman. —ed... ἐᾷ (G. 221). — ds ἀσινέ-
στατα, doing as little harm as.[shall be] possible. — ἣν δέ τις, but if any
one (Tissaphernes for instance) shall hinder (G. 223).

4. ὑπόπεμπτος (observe the force of ὑπο-), sent in an underhand way.
— εἴη (G. 243). — οἰκείων, kinsmen. — πίστεως Evexa, to secure good aa
i. e. on the part of Mithridates.

5. τὸν πόλεμον ἀκήρυκτον εἶναι, that the war should be truceless (lit. one
in which no heralds were allowed, i. 6. implacable). —tor’ . .. elev, so long
as they should be in the enemy's country (G. 248, 1): the direct form of the
resolution (δόγμα) being ἔστ᾽ ἂν ὦμεν. --- διέφθειρον ... στρατιώτας, they
(the Persians) kept trying to bribe the soldiers (G. 200, N. 2). — ἀπιών
(G. 279, 2, N.). — γυκτός (G. 179, 1).

6. προεληλυθότων, v. προέρχομαι.

7. προσήει, v. mpdcap. — ὡς φίλος dy (G. 277, N. 2). — ψιλοί,

Page 17%.— 4 os = quam ut (G. 266, 2, ν. 1). — σφενδονητῶν, after
ἐξικνεῖσθαι (G. 171, 1), they shot too short to reach the slingers.

8. διωκτέον εἶναι (G. 281, 2). — ἐδίωκον has for subj. the antecedent of
of, those who.

9. ἐκ πολλοῦ, with a long start. — οὐχ οἷόν τε, not possible (lit. no [such
thing] as): here τέ has no apparent force.

10. τοὔπισθεν (= τὸ ὄπισθεν), the rear, construed with τοξεύοντες. ---

διώξειαν (G. 233).

11. δείλης, i. 6. late in the afternoon. — ἀφίκοντο, v. ἀφικνέομαι. --
οὐδέν (G. 160, 2).

12. μαρτυροίη (G. 243): he said, τὸ ἔργον paprupet. — ἑώρων, v. ὁράω.

13. ἀληθῆ λέγετε, i. 6. it was, in fact, as you say.

14, χάρις, sc. ἔστω. --- βλάψαι (G. 266, 1).

15. ὅσον, sc. τοσοῦτον, from such a distance that (lit. through so great

12 . XENOPHON.

α distance 18, G. 161). —- of βάλλοντες, i. e. hurlers of the javelin. — πολὺ
xeplov, a long space. — ix τόξον ῥύματος͵ if he had a bow-shot the start of
him ; as in ἐκ πολλοῦ, 8 9.

Page 18.— 16. ἡμεῖς with μέλλομεν, instead of ἡμῖν following δεῖ. —
τὴν ταχίστην, as soon as possible (G. 160, 2). — ἱππέων (G. 172, N. 2). —
σφενδονῶν, after διπλάσιον (G. 175, 1, Ν. 1).

17. διὰ τὸ σφενδονᾶν, through their hurling (G. 262, 1). — μολνβδίσιν,
leaden slugs (dat. following χρῆσθαι, (G. 188, N. 2).

18. αὐτῶν, part. gen. after tives. — πέπανται, v. πάομαι. — τούτῳ (cor-
responding to tives), to such. —atrev, for them (i. 6. the slings ; gen. of
value, G. 178). — rp... ἐθέλοντι, to whoever is willing to rank as slinger.
, — ἀτέλειαν, exemption from the severer camp duties.

19. oxevoddpa, i. 6. mules, &c. in place of (ἀντί) the horses. — εἰς ix-
πέας, for cavalry service. — τοὺς φεύγοντας, i. 6. those mentioned above,
in § 9.

20. ἐδοκιμάσθησαν, were accepted. — ἐπεστάθη, v. ἐφίστημι.

IV. 1. τῇ ἄλλῃ, Me next day, an unusual expression for ὑστεραίᾳ.

2. διαβεβηκόσι, having crossed, agreeing with αὐτοῖς. --- ὑποσχόμενος,
v. ὑπισχνέομαι. --- dv... λάβῃ (G. 247): after the past tense εἰ λάβοι
would be the more common form. — παραδώσειν (G. 203, N. 2).

Page 19.— 3. ὅσον (like ὡς with numerals), about: lit. [as much] as.
--- παρήγγελτο, v. παραγγέλλω, orders had been given. — οὕς, subj. of διώ-
kev. — εἴρητο, v. εἶπον. — θαρροῦσι. .. δυνάμεως, to pursue boldly, as a
sufficient force was to follow ; for ds, see G. 277, N. 2.

4. κατειλήφει, plup. of καταλαμβάνω ; understand αὐτούς. --- ἐξικνοῦντο,
were within shooting distance. — ols, those to whom. — οἱ δέ (G. 148,1, ν. 2).

5. τοῖς βαρβάροις, on the side of the Persians (G. 184, 3). — ὅτι φοβε-
ρώτατον ὁρᾶν (G. 261, 2): as frightful as possible to behold,

6. οὕτω πράξαντες, having fared thus, see G.165, N. 2.

7. Λάρισσα, an old name found in many Grecian cities: the site is now
called Nimroud (a few miles below Nineveh), whence some of the most
interesting relics were brought by Mr. Layard. —1d παλαιόν, anciently. —
δύο παρασάγγαι, i. 6. about seven miles: the parasang was a Persian
measure.

8. βασιλεύς, i. 6. Cyrus the Great. — ἑλεῖν, v. αἱρέω. --- νεφέλη, 8 cloud
hiding the sun: i. 6. an eclipse. — ἐξέλιπον, v. ἐκλείπω : understand τὴν
πόλιν ; the eclipse being considered an evil omen. — ἑάλω, v. ἁλίσκομαι.

9, παρά would regularly here take the dative (G. 191, N. 1). — πλέ-
Opov, about 100 feet.

Page 40. - 10. Méomda: these are the ruins of Nineveh, opposite
Mosul; Mespila means, probably, the district, or is a general name for
ruins. Many monuments and sculptures have been brought from these
ruins to the British Museum, and some to this country.

ANABASIS 3, Iv. 13

11. ἕξ παρασάγγαι, i. 6. more than 20 miles. — καταφυγεῖν (G. 208;
compare ἑλεῖν, below, G. 202). --- ἀπώλεσαν . .. ὑπὸ Πῳσών, they lost
their power (i. 6. were deprived of it) by the Persians.

12. χρόνῳ, by length of siege. — ἑάλω, v. ἁλίσκομαι.

13. εἰς refers to the coming of T. wpon the course of their day’s march.
— οὖς re, &c. understand ἔχων. --- ἔχοντος, who Aad (in marriage), agree-
ing with ’Opévra (G. 39). — ots ... βαρβάρους, the barbarians whom
Cyrus had in his expedition. — πρός, in addition to. — ἔδωκεν (aor.), had
given.

14. τὰς μὲν... τὰς δὲ (G. 143, 1). — εἶχεν καταστήσας, stationed and
kept in the rear of the Greeks. — παραγαγών, aor. part. of παράγω.

15. Σκύθαι τοξόται : the name Scythian was given to all archers of a
certain class, whether they were native Scythians or not. At Athens
the policemen were called τοξόται or Σκύθαι, because the state sometimes
imported Scythian slaves (who were archers) to serve as a city police. —
ἀνδρός (G. 171, 1). — οὐδὲ . . . ῥάδιον ἦν, i. 6. could not well miss if he
tried.

16. εἵποντο, v. ἕπομαι : continued to follow. — τῇ τότε (G 141, ν. 3).

17. καί, also: i. 6. there was this further advantage. — ἁλίσκοιτο
(G. 233).

Page 21.— Κρησί, construed with χρήσιμα. --- χρώμενοι (G.279, 2, N.).
τοξεύειν (G. 260, 1). — ἄνω ἱέντες, shooting upwards, so as to recover the
arrows more easily ; μακράν, sc. ὁδόν (G. 161).

18. μεῖον ἔχοντες, having the worst of τί.

19. ἔγνωσαν, v. γιγνώσκω : found out (G. 200, n. 5). — κέρατα, wings.
— 5506... γεφύρας : these genitives absolute contain the reason of fv...
συγκύπτῃ (6. 272, 2): in case of a narrow way, &c.; which they would be
likely to find in the hilly and broken country they were nearing. — ἐκθλί-
βεσθαι τοὺς ὁπλίτας (G. 261, 1, N.): this clause is subj. of ἀνάγκη ἐστίν :
the hoplites wore heavy armor, and depended for their effectiveness on the
steadiness of the ranks. — mefopévovs, crowded together.

20. διάσχῃ, v. δίεχω. --- τὸ μέσον, the space between. — εὐεπίθετον, &c.,
easy for the enemy to attack, — πολεμίους (G. 185).

21. ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, of a hundred men each: ἀνά, means at the rate
of. — ἄλλους : the λόχος had its divisions of fifty and twenty-five, each
with its special officer. — ἔξωθεν, apart from, i. 6. behind.

22. ἀνεξεπίμπλασαν, they filled the space left open. —vd διέχον, the
interval. — κατὰ λόχους, by companies in single file, i. 6. six abreast in all,
there being six Ad you. — κατὰ πεντηκοστῦς and κατ᾽ ἐνωμοτίας, i. 6. twelve
abreast and twenty-four abreast ; as there were twelve divisions of fifty and
twenty-four divisions of twenty-five.

Page 22. — 23. ἐν τῷ μέρει, cach in turn. — φάλαγγος, dep. on tov:
if there was need at any part of the column. — τέτταρας, i. 6. four days’
marches without adventure. _

14 XENOPHON.

24. βασίλειόν τι, α royal building or estate on the distant slope. —
- ἄσμενοι, gladly.

25. ὡς... ἀναβαίνειν, so as to ascend the next (G. 266, N. 1). --- ὁκὸ
μαστίγων, under the lash, i. 6. scourged to it as slaves.

26. “Ελλήνων ; construe as adj. — γυμνήτων (G. 175, 2). — ὄχλῳ, the
crowd, as distinct from the men in the ranks.

27. σχόλῃ, slowly. — ὄντες, because they were (G. 277, 2).

28. ταὐτὰ = τὰ αὐτά, the same. —amplv ἀνήγαγον, until they brought
up. — τὸ ὄρος, i. 6. the higher hill (8 24), from which the smaller hills
descended (καθῆκον).

29. ὑπέρ, above. — πολεμίων : the first πολέμιοι refer to the Persians,
-the second πολέμιοι to the Greeks. — δεδοικότες, v. δείδω. --- ἀποτμηθεί-
σαν, v. ἀποτέμνω : the ending -εἶεν is more common.

30. τῇ ὁδῷ... γηλόφους, i. e. by the road which led over the hillocks,
as opposed to the course of the πελτασταί along the slope of the higher
hill (κατὰ τὸ ὄρος).

Page 28. — ἔπιπαριόντες, passing along, over against them. — τὰς κό-
pas, v. ὃ 24. — ἰατρούς, nurses, — rerpwpévar, V. τιτρώσκω.

31. καὶ dpa, and at the same time, sc. beeause, — συμβεβλημένας,
Υ. συμβάλλο. --- συνενηνεγμένα, ν. συμφέρο. --- τῷ σατραπεύοντι, by the
acting satrap, or royal governor (G. 188, 3).

33. πολὺ διέφερον, i. 6. they found it quite different. — χώρας, position.
— πολεμίοις (G. 184, 2).

34. “Ελληνικοῦ, from the Greek foree (following ἀπ-, G. 193). — στα-
Stwv, gen. of compar. after μεῖον.

35. αὐτοῖς (G. 184, 8, N. 4). — πεποδισμένοι͵ hobbled, their feet being
tied together by a short cord. — τοῦ μὴ φεύγειν ἕνεκα (G 262, 2). — θορύ-
βου ὄντος, temporal, like νύκτωρ (G. 277, 1).

36. SvayyeAAopévous, passing the word of command. — ἐκήρνξε, sc. the
herald. — ἀκονόντων, i. 6. within hearing of the enemy.

Page 24. — λύειν is used in a rare (chiefly poetic) sense = Avovreddy,
ta profit, to be expedient : as in English, they thought if would not pay. —
αὐτούς and νυκτός belong to both of the following infinitives.

37. καὶ αὐτοί, themselves too (G. 145, 1). — dxpavuxlav, spur. — ὑφ᾽
ἥν, along the base of which.

39. προσελάσας, v. προσελαύνα. --- ὃ δέ (G. 143, N. 2). — ἡμῖν
(G. 184, 3). — οὐκ ἔστι παρελθεῖν, there is no getting by.

40. ἔρημα, exposed. —ra ὄπισθεν, the rear. — ἀπελᾷ, fut. of ἀπελαύνω
(G. 120, 2). — πῶς rig... ἀπελᾷ, how we (lit. one) shall drive the men
from the hill.

41, ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ, close above. —éavrew, their own, i. e. the Greeks. —
ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐθέλω, 7 volunteer: the ἔγώ is more emphatic, as the imperatives
μένε and tropevw have no pronoun.

ANABASIS 3, v. 15

42. ἑλέσθαι, v. αἰἱρέω. --- δέ of: the of is here dat. of the personal pro-
noun (G. 79, 1; 144, 2), following συμ-πέμψαι (6. 193); distinguish be-
tween ol, the, proclitic ; of (of), to him, enclitic ; of, who, oxytone.

Page 25. — ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος, from the front. — μακρόν, too far.

43. τοὺς τριακοσίους : i. 6. half of the six companies of § 21. — ἐπιλέ-
κτων, picked men.

44. ἁμιλλᾶσθαι, to race, or vie in speed.

45.. διακελευομένων, agreeing with the plural implied in στρατεύματος
(G. 138, N. 3). — τῶν ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, Tissaphernes and his men.

46. ἐπί and πρός with the accus. both mean towards. — τὴν λοιπήν,
sc. ὁδόν.

47. ἐξ ἴσον, on equal footing.

48. καὶ ὅς, and he (G. 151, N. 3). — ἔχων, ἔχων, holding, wearing. —
θώρακα ἱππικόν : the horsemen carried no shield, and accordingly wore a
heavier breastplate. — ὑπάγειν, to lead on slowly. — παριέναι, to come up.

49. ἀναβάς, mounting his horse again. —Bdowa... ἄβατα, passable
. .. tmpassable (i. e. for a horseman): the plural is analogous to ἀδύνατά
ἐστιν, it is impossible, for ἀδύνατόν ἐστιν. --- φθάνουσι, anticipate ; here
governing the acc. πολεμίους. --- γενόμενοι (G. 279, 2).

V. 1. στραφέντες, v. στρέφω.

Page 326. — ἀγαθών, i. 6. supplies.

2. ἐσκεδασμένων, v. σκεδάννυμι. --- γάρ explains why they were scat-
tered. — διαβιβαζόμεναι, i. 6. while they are passing over. — κατελήφθη-
σαν, Vv. καταλαμβάνω.

3. ἐννοούμενοι ph, apprehending lest. — εἰ κάοιεν, sc. the enemy (G. 248,
N.). — λαμβάνοιεν (G. 244) governs ἐπιτήδεια.

4. ἐκ τῆς βοηθείας, from helping them: that they had gone to help is
taken for granted.

5. ὁρᾶτε. .. εἶναι; don't you see that they admit the country to be ours ?
— ὑφιέντας (G. 280). — pi... χώραν, in app. with 4. — viv... κάουσιν,
they are now (doing, by) burning. — ὄψονται, used as fut. of dpde.

6. ἐπί, against. — ὑπέρ, in defence of. — οὕκουν, not then: observe the
difference between this and οὐκοῦν, therefore.

7. σκηνάς, encampment (in the village). — ἔνθεν pay... ἔνθεν δέ, on the
one hand ... om the other hand. — ὃ wérapos, i. e. the Tigris. — βάθος,
acc. of specification (G. 160, 1). — ὡς μηδέ... βάθους, so that not even the
spears projected of those who tried the depth, i. e. their spears found no bot-
tom (G. 184, 3; 266, N. 1).

Page 27. - 8. κατὰ τετρακισχιλίους, four thousand at once. — dv
δέομαι, what I require (G. 172).

9. ἀσκῶν : bags of inflated hide are still used in crossing these rivers. —
ἀποδαρέντα, v. ἀποδέρω. ---- φυσηθέντα refers to the hides implied in ἃ ἀπο-
δαρέντα. — παρέχοι dv (G. 226, 2).

16 XENOPHON.

10. ϑεσμῶν, girths. — dppleas, mooring. — ἀφείς, v. ἀφίημι : letting
them down. — ἀμφοτέρωθεν Shoras, fastening to the two banks, as pontoons,
or supports to a floating bridge.

11. εἴσεσθε, ν. οἶδα, you shall know. — fa τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, will keep
Srom sinking (G. 263, 1): for the use of ph, see G. 283, 6.

12. of κωλύσοντες (fut.), men ready to prevent it.

13. ἐπανεχώρουν εἰς τοὔμπαλιν, &c., i. 6. they made a day’s march back-
ward to some villages which had not been burnt by the enemy (see § 3).
— ἢ πρὸς Βαβυλῶνα, or towards Babylon: these words seem to have
been originally a marginal note explaining εἰς τοὔμπαλιν : τοὔμπαλιν ἢ
πρὸς Βαβυλῶνα would mean, in a direction opposite to that of Babylon,
which is hardly possible under the circumstances described in § 15. —
κατακαύσαντες ἔνθεν, for they had burned [those] from which, dc. — ὅμοιοι
ἦσαν θαυμάζειν, were like to wonder, i. 6. seemed amazed.

14, ἑαλωκότας, v. ἁλίσκομαι..--- ἤλεγχον... χώραν, they examined them
as to the whole region on every side (G. 160, 1). :

15. τῆς ἐπὶ Βαβυλώνα εἴη, was on the way towards B. — hove (G. 247).
— θερίζειν, ἑαρίζειν, in reverse order: the King spent the spring at Susa,
and the summer at Ecbatana. — διαβάντι, after crossing (sc. τινί,
G. 184, 5). — Καρδούχους, the people called Kurds, Armenian Kordukh ;
the termination -yot (acc. to Kiepert, quoted by Hertlein) corresponding
with the plural ending -uKH: the region is Kurdistan.

16. βασιλέως (G. 171, 2).

Page 28. - ἀκούειν, Listen to or obey. —GAAA... ἀπονοστῆσαι, i. 6.
once a royal army invaded them, but none of them returned (G. 203). —
σπείσαιντο, v. σπένδομαι. --- σφῶν, ἐκείνων, part. gen. (G. 168, N. 2).

17. ἑκασταχόσε εἰδέναι, that they knew the way in every direction. —
τούτους, governed by διελθόντας. --- ἔφασαν, they (the captives) said. —
ἥξειν, they (the Greeks) would come. — εὔπορον . . . πορεύεσθαι : the direct
discourse would be, εὔπορόν ἐστιν ὅποι ἄν τις ἐθέλῃ πορεύεσθαι, if is casy
to go whithersoever we shall wish (G. 223), the apodosis being future in
sense.

18. ὥρας, gen. after ἡνίκα, at whatever hour. — τὴν ὑπερβολήν, the pase:
this is called the acc. of anticipation ; regularly it would be, they feared
lest the mountain-pass should be seized beforehand. — ἡνίκ᾽ av... wapay-
yAAy might have been changed to the optative (omitting ἄν), as ἐπειδὴ
δειπνήσαιεν is changed from ἐπειδὰν δειπνήσητε.

Book 4 --- (παρ. I. 1. ὅσα ἐπολεμήθη ...°EAAnvas represents the
active constr. ὅσα ἔπολέμησαν (G. 159, N. 2); it means to what extent war
was made upon the Greeks.

2. ἔνθα, understand ἐκεῖσε, thither. — πάροδος, way along the river. —
ἐκρέματο, v. κρεμάννυμι. --- πορευτέον (G. 281, 2). This section is a
recapitulation of what has been stated in the last chapter.

ANABASIS 4, 1. 17

Page 29 — 3. δλισκομένων (6. 171, 2, Ν. 1), the captives taken along the
way. — εἰ διέλθοιεν has for its apodosis the whole sentence ἐν τῇ ᾿Αρμενίᾳ
-.. περιίασι ; including two subordinate protases : it represents ἐὰν διέλ-
θωμεν of the direct discourse ; and the four following verba might, like it,
have been changed to the opt. (G. 247). — weptlacn, will pass: the pres.
of εἶμι often has a fut. meaning (G. 200, N. 3). — ἐλέγετο : the subject is
τὰς πηγὰς εἶναι. — ἔστιν οὕτως ἔχον, i 8 just 80.

δ. τὴν τελευταίαν φυλάκην : the Greeks divided the night into three
watches. — Scov ... διελθεῖν, enough to cross in the dark ; ὅσον (sc. τοσοῦ-
tov) takes the infinitive from the idea of sufficiency which it implies. —
παραγγέλσεως, the word of command passed round, not by signal of
trumpet.

6. μή, lest, after xlvSvvos. — πορευομένων, as they went, gen. abs. —
ἐπίσποιτο, v. ἐφέπομαι.

7. αἰσθέσθαι, ν. αἰσθάνομαι : infin. after πρίν (G. 274) ; its subj. is
φινά. — ἀεί qualifies ἐφείπετο. --- τὸ ὑπερβάλλον : i. 6. each detachment
followed, as it crossed the height.

8. εἴ eos, in case the K. should be willing, dc. (G. 226, N.; 248, 2). —
διιέναι, v. διίημι. --- Sud... χώρας, through the region as a friendly one
(G. 142, 3).

9. ὅτῳ, v. ὅστις : whatever. — καλούντων (G. 171, 2), when they
ealled.

Page 80. --- 10. διὰ rd... εἶναι (G. 262, 1). — ἡμέραν (G. 161). —
κατέτρωσαν, v. κατατιτρώσκω. --- ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτον, like the Latin ex im-
proviso. — ἐπέπεσε, v. ἐπιπίπτω.

11. πλείους is nom. (G. 72, 2). — ἐκινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφθαρῆναι, would
have risked perishing. — cvvedpav (v. cuvopdw), watched each other's
signals.

12. ἀφεῖναι, let go: v. ἀφίημι.

13. ἐποίουν : the subj. is ὑποζύγια, &c. — ἐπί, in charge of. — δόξαν,
having resolved, acc. abs. (G. 278, 2), is governed by ποιεῖν understood.

14. ὑποστάντες, v. ὑφίστημι ; halting. —d τι, translate whatever. —
τῶν εἰρημένων, of the things ordered [to be abandoned], or simply, of the
things above mentioned (see ὃ 12). — of δέ, and they (the soldiers). — πλὴν
oo + ἔκλεψεν, unless one smuggled anything. — οἷον, such as. —tav εὖπρε-
“πῶν is partitive genitive. — τὰ pév... τὰ δέ, sometimes . . . sometimes.

16. ἀναχάζοντες and θαμινά are both poetic words.

Page 31. — παρήγγελλεν ὑπομένειν, would send word [for those in front]
lo wait.

17. ὅτε παρεγγνῷτο, whenever the word was passed. — πρᾶγμα, τι, some
trouble ahead. — παρελθόντι, i. 6. to Xenophon.

19. ὥσπερ εἶχεν, just as he was (in haste). — révarov, are dead;
v. θνήσκο. --- ἀνελέσθαι, v. ἀναιρέω : to take up for burial, a most sacred
duty with the Greeks. The last sentence is in the direct discourse.

2

---

18 XENOPHON.

20. pla αὕτη ὁδός is subj., and ὀρθία pred.: this one way which you see
ts steep, &c. — ἔκβασιν, way out. — ὄχλον of (G. 151, N. 2).

21. ταῦτ᾽ ἔσπευδον (G. 158, N. 2). — εἴ πως δυναίμην, in case I should be
able (G. 226, N.; 248, 2). --- οὔ ... ὁδόν, say there is no other way: οὔ
φημι is used like the Latin nego.

22. ὅπερ, i. 6. the ambush. — αὐτοῦ τούτον ἕνεκα, for this a Ee
— εἰδόσι, acquainted with: v. oBa.

23. εἰς εἰδεῖεν, whether they knew (the direct question was ἴστε, G. 243).
--- οὐκ ἔφη, see note on § 21. --- φόβων, threats.

Page 32. — κατεσφάγη, v. κατασφάττω.

24. ἐτύγχανε . . . ἐκδεδομένη, i. 6. he happened to have a married
daughter there. —- αὐτός emphasizes the subj. of ἠγήσεσθαι : he said he
would himself lead (G. 138, N. 2). — 686v, acc. of extent (G. 161).

25. &, obj. of προκαταλήψοιτο : and unless they (rv) should occupy this
(G. 202, 4; 223, nN. 1; 247).

26. πελταστάς is in app. with, and ὁπλιτῶν limits, A\oyayots. — ὕπο-
στὰς ἐθελοντής, standing forth as a volunteer.

28. ἐρωτῶσιν εἴ rig... ἐθέλοι (G. 200, N. 1; 201). --- πολλοῦ, gen. of
value.

II. 1. of δέ, i. 6. Xenophon and Chirisophus. —épdaydwras (Vv. ἐσθίω),
when they had eaten. — συντίθενται, agree with them. — τὸ ἄκρον, see Ch. 1.
ἃ 21. — rods μὲν, αὐτοὶ δέ, i. 6. the volunteers and the officers. — ἄνω Sy-
τας, when they are above.

2. ὕδωρ, &c. rain. — bras... τὸν γοῦν, that the enemy might have their
attention turned to that road, — @ μάλιστα λάθοιεν, might be, as far as
possible, unseen.

Page 33. — 3. ἣν ἔδει... ἐκβαίνειν, which they must cross before getting
to the ascent. — καὶ pelfovs, &c. as we say, more or less. — διεσ φενδονῶντο,
bounded off (as if hurled from slings).

4. εἰ μὴ δύναιντο, if they could not get by (G. 225). — κυλινδοῦντες
(G. 279, 1).

5. ds... κατέχοντες, supposing they held the summit.

6. of δ᾽ οὐ κατεῖχον, i. 6. they were wrong in thinking that they were
on the summit: of δέ 15 irregular, referring to the subj. of the preceding
verb (see also G. 143, 1, N. 2). — μάστος, a round hill. — αὕτη, inserted
iis antecedent to q (G. 142, 4, end). — αὐτόθεν, from that spot (where they
were).

7. ὀλίγοι, but few. — προσελθόντες (G. 279, 2).

Page 34.— 9. fwep... ἔχοντες, the same way with those who had the
guide.

10. A διεζεῦχθαι (v. διαζεύγνυμι), or else be separated. — twopebOnoay
dy, i. e. they would have gone, had it not been for what is stated in the next

ANABASIS 4, τι. 19

clause (G. 226, 1). — ὑποζύγια, subj. of ἐκβῆναι, theve was no other way
Jor the beasts to get through.

11. ὀρθίοις τοῖς λόχοις, with the companies in file, or column; ‘the
whole array covering a great length of ground, since the road was very
narrow.” — εἰ βούλοιντο (G. 226, N.).

12. τέως μέν, for some time. — ἐδύναντο (G. 135, 3). — προσίεντο, ad-
mit: i. 6. they did not let the Greeks get near them, but fled. — παρελη-
λύϑεσαν, v. παρέρχομαι.

18. ἐννοήσας μή, taking counsel lest. — ἔρημον, exposed. — ἡλωκότα,
v. ἁλίσκομαι. --- καὶ πάλιν... παριοῦσιν, the enemy would yet again take
it and attack the teams as they passed. — ἐπιθοῖντο for ἐπιθεῖντο (v. ἐπιτί-
θημι). Such forms of the 2 aor. opt. mid. sometimes occur in Attic Greek,
following the analogy of verbs in w. For similar forms of προίημι, see
G. 129, III. — ἐπὶ πολὺ ... wopevdpeva, the cattle stretched out a good way,
as they were travelling in a narrow road: &re with part. is like quippe in
Latin with relative.

14. 6 ὑπέρ ... ἐθελοντῶν, the one above the guard that-had been sur-
prised at the fire in the night by the volunteers.

15. δείσαντας μὴ πολιορκοῖντο, for fear of being surrownded. — αὐτούς,
the barbarians. — ἀπολιπεῖν (G. 203). — Apa, i. 6. as it proved.

Page 33.— 16. ὑπάγειν, advance slowly. — θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, lit. ground
their arms, i. e. halt or take up 8 position.

17. GAAdpevor, by leaping.

18. ἀπύτει, claimed back, see Ch. I. § 19.

19. ἐφ᾽ @, on condition that (G. 267). — ἐν ᾧ, while. — συνερρύησαν,
v. συρρέω (ῥέω).

20. ἤρξαντο : i. 6. the Greeks. —&vOa... ἔκειτο, where the armed force
was stationed ; see § 16. — κατέαξαν, v. κατάγνυμι : broke. — ἔχων, hold-
ing, or carrying ; 1. 6. he disappeared with it.

21. Aovovevs, from Lusi in Arcadia. — προσέδραμεν, v. προστρέχω.
— προβεβλημένος, v. προβάλλω : holding out [his shield] in front of both
(G. 199, 3).

22. αὐτοῦ, there. — ἐν λάκκοις κονιατοῖς, in plastered (or cemented) cis-
terns. Such reservoirs, cisterns, or ‘‘ cellars, with a circular mouth like a
large well, increasing in size to the bottom (i. 6. in shape a truncated
cone), are still seen in great numbers in Piraeus.” Boise, from Sturz.
A scholiast on Aristophanes says, ‘‘The Athenians and other Greeks make
large excavations underground, round or square, cement them, and keep
wine and oil in them: these they call Adx«xot.”

23. διεπράξαντο, managed, or bargained. —hyepdva, see Ch. 1. § 24. —
νομίζεται : the word νόμος ‘‘includes all that is enjoined by law, custom,
or the general sentiment, and all that is voluntarily accepted in reliance on
these.” J. 5. Mill, Diss. Vol. IV. p. 302, Nn.

20 XENOPHON.

Page 36. — 24. duddvov, tried to hinder the passage (G. 200, n. 2).

25. τοῖς πρώτοις (G. 184, 3). — ἀνωτέρω, construed with γίγνεσθαι :
trying to get above those hindering.

27. ἣν ὁπότε, there were [times] when (G. 152, N. 2). — πράγματα,
dificulty. — φεύγοντες, ficcing ; ἀποφεύγειν, to escape.

28. τόξα, probably long-bows, which were drawn by bringing one end to
(or near) the ground and advancing the left foot (wmpoBalvowres) towards that
end (πρὸς τὸ κάτω τοῦ τόξον). Strabo (p. 772) tells of Aethiopian elephant-
hunts, in which three men used one bow, τῶν μὲν κατεχόντων τὸ τόξον καὶ
προβεβηκότων τοῖς ποσὶ, τοῦ 8’ ἕλκοντος τὴν veupdy, two of them holding
the baw, with their feet advanced (i. e. each with one foot advanced to steady
himself), and the third drawing the string. Arrian (Ind. 16) speaks of
bows which the Indians drew by bringing them to the ground and bracing
themselves (ἀντιβάντε) with the left foot. In the passage of the Anabasis,
there is very slight MS. authority for the common reading προσβαίνοντες.
— ἀκοντίοις, in appos. with αὐτοῖς (G. 137, N. 4): the arrows, a yard long,
were picked up and used as darts, being fitted with an dyxvAn, a loop or
strap, fastened at the middle, as a guide in grasping and help in hurling.

111. 1. ηὐλίσθησαν, v. αὐλίζομαι : the word originally means to pass
the night (or live) in an open court (atd\4). — ἄσμενοι, gladly. — τῶν Kap-
Sov ov belongs to ὀρέων, as adjective or limiting genitive.

2. πολλά, used as an adv. qualifying μνημονεύοντες, talking over, re-
counting. — ἔπαθον, v. πάσχω.

Page 37. — xaxd ... σύμπαντα, evils [so many] as they did not [suf-
“fer], even all put together, dc. — ὡς (G. 277, N. 2). — ἀπηλλαγμένοι,
v. ἀπαλλάττω.

3. που, somewhere (indefinite). — ἱππέων, following ἄνω (G. 182, 2). —
ὄχθαις, bluffs.

5. ὥσπερ χειροποίητος (sc. οὖσα), [appearing] as if i had been built.

6. ὑπὲρ τῶν μαστῶν, above their breasts. — οὔτ᾽ corresponds with τέ
after ἐπί. -- εἰ δὲ μή : the μή seems superfluous ; but the phrase (as usual)
means simply otherwise, i. e. if any of them did attempt to carry their
arms through the river. — γυμνοί, exposed: plur. since tts is collective.

7. ἔνθα, where. — συνειλεγμένους, v. συλλέγω. --- λλησιν (G. 184, 4).

8. περιρρνῆναι, v. περιρρέω : to fall away: for αὐτῷ, see G. 184, ὃ.

Page 38.— 9. ὡς τάχιστα, as soon as. — ἕως, dawn. — ἐπὶ τοῦ πρό-
tov, with the first [victim].

10. ἤδεσαν, v. οἶδα, knew. The direct discourse of the following sen-
tence would be: ἔξεστιν... προσελθεῖν, καὶ ἐὰν καθεύδῃ ... εἰπεῖν, ἐὰν

«ἔχῃ (6. 225). ered following προσελθεῖν (G. 187). — ἐπεγείραντα
εἰπεῖν, to wake him and tell. — ἔχοι, sc. εἰπεῖν.

11. καὶ τότε, and this time. — συλλέγοντες (G. 279, 2). — ἔπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν

ANABASIS 4, τις. 91

«οταμόν͵ close to the river (G. 142, 4, N. 2).— ὥσπφ, &c., apparently put-
fing away bags of clothes.

12. ὡς νευσόμενοι (G. 277, N. 2). --- διαβαίνειν (G. 203, Ν. 1). — πρόσθεν
eee πρίν, they crossed before wetting their middle.

13. kal... ἐκέλενε, gave orders to pour out [wine] for the young men.
— φήνασι, v. φαίνω (G. 97). — ὀνείρατα (see § 8): the plural seems to
indicate the several points of the dream. — ἐπιτελέσαι, depending on
εὔχεσθαι : pray them to fulfil. —owedoas, v. σπένδω. --- ταὐτά, the same
story.

14. σπονδάς, libations. — ὅπως ἂν StaBatey, indirect question, represent-
ing πῶς ἂν διαβαῖμεν; (G. 245).

Page 39. -- 16. στάδιοι, in appos. with ὁδός, instead of genitive.

17. ἀντιπκαρήεσαν, v. -εἶμι : went along over against them, i. 6. on the
other bank. — ἔθεντο. . . παρήγγελλε: ‘‘I conceive the matter thus : first,
the order is given to ground arms, so that the shield is let down and drops
upon the ground, sustained by the left hand of the soldier upon its upper
rim ; while the spear, also resting on the ground, is sustained by the shield
and by the same left hand. The right hand of the soldier being thus free,
he is ordered, first, to wreath himself (the costume usual in offering sacri-
fice) ; next, to take off his wreath ; lastly, to resume his arms. Probably
the operations of wreathing and unwreathing must here have been per-
formed by the soldiers symbolically, or by gesture, raising the hand to the
head, as if to crown it. . . . Cheirisophus himself, however, had doubtless
a real wreath, which he put on and took off; so probably had the prophets
and certain select officiating persons.’ Grote. ἀποδύς may, however, be
rendered like ἐκδύντες (§ 12), stripping off the upper garment. To wear
the wreath, on solemn occasions, was a Spartan custom. — ὀρθίους, in
[double] file (see Ch. 11. § 11).

18. els τὸν ποταμόν, i. 6. so that the blood ran into the river.

19. ἀνηλάλαζον, shouted ALALA: the ὀλολυγή was a cry or chant, of
higher pitch, uttered by women on glad occasions.

20. ἀνὰ κράτος, at speed. — προσποιούμενος, feigning: he ‘‘made a
feint of hastening back to the original ford, as if he were about to
attempt a passage there. This distracted the attention of the enemy's
horse [on the opposite bank], who became afraid of being attacked on both
sides, galloped off to guard the passage at the other point, and opposed no
serious resistance to Cheirisophus.” Grote.

21. ἔτεινον, pushed on.

22. ἐβόων μὴ ἀπολείπεσθαι, they called to them [exhorting them] not to
be left behind. — συνεκβαίνειν, σύν governs rots πολεμίοις understood.

23. xara... ποταμόν, along the bluffs which reached to the river.
Page 40. — σφίσιν (G. 144, 2).
24. καταβαίνοντες (G. 280, N. 1).

22 XENOPHON.

26. ἀκμὴν διέβαινε, were just crossing. — wap domlBae, to the left. ~—
ἐπὶ φάλαγγος, so as to form a phalanz, or close column. — οὐραγούς, rear-
guard.

27. τοῦ ὄχλον Wroupévous (CG. 174): left by the crowd [of camp-
followers, &c.].

28. Wav... διαβαίνοντας, when X. saw them [on the point of] crossing
[to come to aid him]. — αὐτοί, i. e. Xenophon and his men. — ἔνθεν καὶ
ἔνθεν σφῶν, on both sides of them. — διηγκυλωμένους, ἐπιβεβλημένους, hand
on the thong (ἀγκύλη), arrow on the string. — πρόσω τοῦ ποταμοῦ, far into
the river (G. 168).

29. ψοφῇ, ring with the thump of the stone.

Page 4}. --- σημήνῃ τὸ πολεμικόν, signal the charge. — ἐπὶ Sépv, to the
right (see καὶ 26). — ὧς, so as (G. 266, N. 1). --- ἔσοιτο. .. γένηται (G. 247,
N. 1).

80. ὑποζνγίων, dep. on ἐπιμελησόμενοι (G. 171, 2). — ἤρχοντο, began.

31. ds... ἱκανῶς, well enough, considering it was among the mountains.

82. θᾶττον, v. τάχους. --- τἀναντία (adv. acc.), the opposite way.

33. αἰσθόμενοι, perceiving [that the Greeks were crossing]. — ἔδραμον,
v. tpéxo. — ἔτρωσαν, v. τιτρώσκο. --- Kal... Ἑλλήνων, even when the
Greeks had got across.

34. οἱ ὑπαντήσαντες, those who had come to the relief: see §§ 27, 28. —
προσωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ, further than was safe.

IV. πεδίον, γηλόφονς, acc. of extent, dep. on ἐπορεύθησαν.

2. ἣν κώμην, for ἡ κώμη els ἣν, &c. (G. 154, N.).

3. ὑπερῆλθον τὰς πηγάς, &c.: here they crossed the mountain-range of
the Taurus ; the Teleboas (generally supposed to be the present Kara-du)
flows into the Euphrates. ‘‘ After the river Teleboas, there seems no one
point in the march which can be identified with anything approaching to
certainty. Nor have we any means even of determining the general line

of route, apart from specific places, which they followed from the river |

Teleboas to Trebizond.” Grote.
Page 42.— 4. ἀνέβαλλεν = ἀνεβίβαζεν, lifted, or helped up.

5. τοῖς ἄρχουσι, with the officers (G. 187). — εἰς ἐπήκοον, withis
hearing.
6. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (G. 267). — αὐτός (G. 138, Ν. 8).

8. χιὼν πολλή : this was in lat. 39°, and at an elevation of four thou- |

sand feet ; it was now near the end of November. — ἔωθεν, in the morning.
— τὰς τάξεις, subj. of διασκηνῆσαι, quarter here and there.

9. ἱερεῖα, cattle for slaughter. — τῶν ἀποσκεδαννυμένων τινές, certain of
the stragglers. — κατίδοιεν ... φαίνοιτο, the direct discourse would be
κατείδομεν . . . καὶ φαίνεται.

10. ἐδόκει διαιθριάζειν, 12 seemed to be clearing up.

ANABASIS 4, τ. 23

Page 43.— 11. ἀλεεινόν (G. 138, ν. 2, c). — Srp μὴ παραρρνείη
v. παραρρέω (G. 233) ; i. 6. the snow kept all warm from whom it did not

drift off.

12. ἐτόλμησε, undertook. — γυμνός, i. 6. without his mantle. — ἀφελό-
μενος, taking away |the axe].

13. πικρών, i. 6. almonds. — μύρον, perfume.

14. εἰς στέγας, under shelter. — δίκην ἐδίδοσαν, paid the penalty. —
κακῶς σκηνοῦντες (G. 277, 2): by camping til, i. 6. in the open air.

15.. Typvlrny, of Temnos (in Aeolis). — πυρά, see ὃ 9. — ἀληθεῦσαι, to
have told truly. — μὴ ὄντα, οὐκ ὄντα (G. 283, 4).

16. οὐκ ἔφη : render οὐκ as qualifying ἰδεῖν (G. 208). --- σάγαριν, a two-
edged battle-axe. —’Apaféves: i. 6. in pictures or statues, with which the
Greeks were familiar.

17. τό (in appos. with ποδαπὸς εἴη), the question. — τὸ στράτευμα, acc.
(G. 160, 1), attracted from its natural position as subj. of en. — ἐπὶ rim,
jor what.

18. ὧς ἐπιθησόμενον (G. 277, N. 2). — ἧπερ povayy, where only.

Page 44.—19. ἡγεμόνα (G. 137, N. 4), as guide. —GAdvra, v. adl-
oKopar.

20. τὸ στρατόπεδον, the [enemy’s] camp.

V. 1. ὅπη... τάχιστα, as quickly as possible.

2. ᾿Ἐϊνφράτην, ‘‘ that is, the eastern branch, now called Murad.”

3. τρίτος, sc. σταθμός. --- ἀποκάων, blasting (here of cold).

4, εἶπε σφαγιάσασθαι, told them to sacrifice: the infin. after εἶπον fol-
lows the principle of G. 202, εἶπον having the force of a verb of command-
ing. On the other hand, ἔφη σφαγ- would mean he said that he had
sacrificed (G. 202; 260, 2, N. 1). --- σφαγιάζεται, sc. ὁ μάντις. --- λῆξαι
stands in indir. discourse after ἔδοξε (G. 203).

Page 45. — 5. διεγένοντο κάοντες, continued burning. — ξύλα πολλά :
the woods have since been quite stripped from these highlands, so that
dried cattle-dung is the ordinary fuel. — οὐ προσίεσαν, did not admit. —
μεταδοῖεν (G. 225). — ἄλλο τι εἴ τι, whatever else.

6. ἔστε ἐπί, clear down to. — οὗ παρῆν, where it was handy.

7. ἐβουλιμίασαν (G. 106): bulimy (‘‘ox-famine”) was a disease in
which the patient suffered from ravenous hunger, hunger-faintness.

8. φάγωσιν, v. ἐσθίω. --- διεδίδου, distributed. — δίδοντας, as givers ;
the fut. part. would be more usual.

9. ἐκ τῆς κώμης, connect with γυναῖκας, women from the village. — ἐρύ-
ματος: i. 6. the village fountain was outside the wall.

10. πορεύονται .. .. ety... ἀπέχει : these might all be opt. or all indic.
(G. 243), and there is good MS. authority here for both πορεύοιντο and

ἀπέχοι.

24 XENOPHON.

11. διατελέσαι τὴν ὁδόν͵ continue the march [so far as the village].

Page 46.— 12. διεφθαρμένοι. . . τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, with their eyes
blinded by the snow: the acc. is retained from the (possible) active constr.
διαφθείρειν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῖς, (0 blind their eyes for them (G. 197, 1,
N. 2) ; τοὺς δακτύλους is in the same constr. after ἀποσεσηπότες, which is
passive in sense.

13. τῆς xidvos, against the snow (obj. gen.). — éropebero (G. 225, n. 1);
there is good authority here for the more regular πορεύοιτο. --- εἰς τὴν γύκτα
ὑπολύοιτο, took off his shoes for the night ; opposed to ὑποδεδεμένοι, with
their shocs on: δέω, bind, and λύω, loose, refer to the sandal-thongs.

14. πόδας, understand τούτων, as anteced. of Sco. — καρβάτιναι.
brogues, or moccasons. — βοῶν ; the mention of the animal instead of his
hide is by the usage called metonymy.

15. τετήκει (ἃ. 101, 2, N. 2). — ἀτμίζουσα ἐν νάπῃ, steaming in a dell:
& warm spring was discovered hereabouts in 1843. — ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐκτραπόμενοι,
turning aside hither. — οὐκ ἔφασαν, refused.

16. ὀπισθοφύλακας (without the art.), some of the rear-guard. — redev-
τῶν ἐχαλέπαινεν, finally got angry. ‘‘So greatly was the army dis-
organized by wretchedness, that we hear of one case in which a soldier,
ordered to carry a disabled comrade, disobeyed the order, and was about to
bury him alive.” Grote. This story came out afterwards, when the
charge was made against Xenophon that he had flogged his men (Book 5,
vill, 8-11), which he did in this one instance. — δύνασθαι dv, sc. ἔφασαν
(G. 211).

17. φοβῆσαι, to frighten. —Gpol ... διαφερόμενοι, quarrelling about
what they had, i. e. their booty (G. 153, N. 1).

18. dre ὑγιαίνοντες, as they were in good condition. — ἀνακραγόντες,
V. ἀνακράζω. -- μέγιστον (G. 159, N. 2). — ἧκαν αὑτούς, threw themselres,
i. 6. they rushed down into the dell over the snow-banks.

Page 4Y.—19. én’ αὐτούς, to their relief. — ἐγκεκαλυμμένοις, wrapped
up. —Kkabaorhxe, had been set. — ἀνίστασαν (G. 200, N. 2).

20. ὅλον, i. 6. of the main body : Chirisophus had gone on in advance
(see above, § 9).

21. ἀναστήσαντας. .. προϊέναι, he ordered them (i. 6. τοὺς vewrérovs)
to rouse [the disabled] and compel them to advance.

22. τῶν (G. 170, 1); σκεψομένουφ agrees with the acc. (some) supposed
to be limited by τῶν : sends some of those, dc. to see. — ot δέ, i. ha those
who had the sick in charge. — κομίζειν (G. 161, 2, N.), to carry: in Latin
it would be portandos, — διεληλυθέναι (G. 202, 2).

23. διαλαχόντες, assigning by lot.

24. εἰλήχει, v. λαγχάνω. --- ἑπτακαίδεκα : the number was apparently
much greater (see ἃ 35) ; possibly, says Kriiger, the number written was
=’ (200), afterwards altered to IZ’ (17). — ἐνάτην, i. 6. eight days
(G. 161, N.). |

ANABASIS 4, VI. 25

25. κατάγειοι, underground; the description is said to correspond with
the dwellings found in the Armenian highlands at the present day. ‘‘ The
descent by wells is now rare, but is still to be met with ; but in exposed
and elevated situations, the houses are uniformly semi-subterraneous, and
entered by as small an aperture as possible, to prevent the cold getting
in.” Ainsworth, quoted by Watson. — στόμα (G. 160, 1).

Page 48. - ὄρνιθες, poultry. — τούτων, of (all) these creatures.

26. οἶνος κρίθινος, deer. — κρατῆρσιν, vats, or tubs. — κάλαμοι, reeds,
or straws (without joints, γόνατα), which, as they drank, would keep off
the floating grains or hulls (κριθαί).

27. ἄκρατος, strong: applied to wine unmixed (ἀ-κεράνννμι). --- συμ-
μαθόντι, to one used fo it (G. 184, δ).

28. οὔτε orephooito... ἀπίασιν, the direct discourse would be οὔτε
orepfhoy..... Thy τε οἰκίαν ἀντεμπλήσαντεξ. . .. ἄπιμεν : the form στε-
ρήσοιτο is middle, with passive meaning. — ἀντεμπλήσαντες, ν. ἀντεμ-
πίπλημι : filling in recompense. —Gmlagw, v. ἄπειμι : the present of εἶμι
has the force of a future, as in English, J am going. — ἀγαθόν τι, acc. gov-
erned by ἐξηγησάμενος, which follows φαίνηται, if he shall appear to have
given them σου directions (G. 280). — ἔστ᾽, until (G. 239, 2).

29. κατορωρνγμένοςξ, v. κατορύσσω (see Ch. 11. § 22). — ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς,
in sight.

30. ἀφίεσαν, i. 6. the people of the villages did not let them depart,
until, &c. — παραθεῖεν (G. 240, 1).

31. οὐκ. .. οὐ, everywhere (G. 283, 8).

32. τῳ (τινι), fo any one, — εἷλκεν, v. Axo, he would draw. — Whe...
βοῦν, whence he had to stoop and drink, sucking like an ox (for ὥσπερ Bots
poder).

Page 49. — 33. κατελάμβανον κἀκείνους, they found them too, i. 6.
Chirisophus and his men. — σκηνοῦντας, banqueting. — ὥσπερ ἐνεοῖς, as
af deaf and dumb; i. 6. by signs, as they could not understand Greek.

34. οἱ ἵπποι, the breed of horses in this region is still celebrated. — ἧ
εἴη, indirect question for πῇ ἐστιν ἡ ὁδός ;

35. wpds... οἰκέτας, to his family. — εἰλήφει, had taken (see Book 3,
111, 19). — wadalrepoy, too old for service. — ἀναθρέψαντι, v. ἀνατρέφω. ---
καταθῦσαι (G. 265). — αὐτόν, i. 6. the horse. — τῶν πώλων (G. 170, 1).

VI. 1. τῷ κωμάρχῃ, the chief, who served as guide (see next section).
— ἡγήσοιτο, sc. the boy’s father ; the thought of Xen. was: ὅπως ed...
hyfhoera,... ἀπίῃ (G. 248, nN). — ἀπίοι, return.

2. λελυμένος, unbound. — ἣν, it was.

Page 30. — οὐκ elev, there were none.

3. ἀποδρὰς gxero (ν. ἀποδιδράσκω, οἴχομαι), ran of (G. 279, 2, N.).
— διάφορον, cause of difference. —éxphro, found him.

26 XENOPHON.

4. ἀνά, at the rate of. —Pacw: the true Phasis flows into the Black
Sea, some distance farther north; this (according to Grote ‘‘ not veri-
fiable”) was probably the upper part of the Araxes, flowing into the
Caspian. It seems to have taken the Greeks out of their course, towards
the northeast.

5. ty... ὑπερβολῇ, the pass leading to the plain.

6. els, about (like os), lit. to the number of. — κατὰ κέρας, in column. —
ἐπὶ φάλαγγοε, in close order for attack.

7. ὅπως ἀγωγιούμεθα, an object. clause (G. 217): compare ὅπως γένοιτο
(8 6), which is a final clause (G. 216, 1).

9. προσγενέσθαι (following εἰκός), will join them (G. 203, N. 2). |

10. ὅπως μαχούμεθα is in appos. with τοῦτο (G. 215, Rem.), and is the
regular form of the object. clause ; but ὅπως AdBopev .. . ἀποβάλωμεν (in
appos. with τοῦτο below) is the less common form (G. 217, N. 1).

Page 8. — τοῦτο. .. εἶναι, 7 think we must look to this. — ἀποβάλω-
pev, sacrifice.

11. ἐφ᾽: ἐπί has here the sense of in extent. — οὐδαμοῦ. .. ἀλλ᾽ 4, πο-
where else than: ἀλλ᾽ 4 for ἄλλο 4, other than, except, seems to have had
but one accent, so that ἀλλ᾽ has the appearance of the elided form of ἀλλά.
— ὄρους τι, some part of the mountain. — κλέψαι, to surprise: the same
idea is expressed by λαθόντας. --- μᾶλλον, rather, repeats the comparison
already given in κρεῖττον.

12. ὄρθιον ἱέναι, to march up-hill (G. 159). — ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on both
sides of us. — τραχεῖα, sc. ὁδός. --- κεφαλάς (G. 197, 1, N. 2).

13. αἴσθησιν παρέχειν, i. 6. betray ourselves. — δοκοῦμεν δ᾽ av... ἂν
oo + χρῆσθαι, it seems to me that we should find, dc.: ἄν belongs to χρῆσθαι
(= χρῴμεϑα ἄν), and is repeated because the sentence is long (G. .212, 2).
We translate δοκοῦμεν impersonally merely that we may render the infin.
by a finite verb, and so give the force of ἄν. The protasis is in προσποιού-
μενοι (= el προσποιοίμεθα), if we should make a feint (G. 226, 1). —
ἐρημοτέρῳ, with fewer defenders, — μένοιεν : dv is understood from the pre-
ceding sentence, although this case hardly comes under the general rule
(G. 212, 4).

14. κλοπῆς, surprise, lit. theft. — συμβάλλομαι, sc. λόγους, i. 6. make
more talk. — τῶν ὁμοίων, equal citizens, or peers. — ἐκ παίδων, as we say
Jrom a child.

15. ληφθῆτε, v. AapBdve. — μάλα qualifies the idea of καιρός ἐστιν:
a very fit time. — κλέπτοντες τοῦ ὄρους (G. 170, 1); cf. ὄρους κλέψαι τι
(δ 11).

16. ἀλλὰ μέντοι (more emphatic than ἀλλὰ), but now: καὶ μέντοι, and
indeed. — δεινοὺς κλέπτειν, i. 6. formidable stealers. — δεινοῦ τοῦ κινδύ-

vov: the penalty of embezzlement might be death. — ὑμῖν, among you
(G. 184, 3).

ANABASIS 4, VII. 27

Page 8..-- 17. τούτων πυνθάνομαι, I learn from them (G. 171, 2,
N. 1). — νέμεται, is pastured. — αἰξί (G. 188, 1). — Bard, places passable
(G. 139, 1).

18. ἐλπίζω μενεῖν (G. 208, N. 2). — dv τῷ ὁμοίῳ, on a Level with them.
— ἡμῖν... ἴσον (G. 186).

19. καί, ἀλλά, observe the emphasis and spirit of these abrupt connec-
tives.

20. ἐκ τούτου, upon this. — κάειν (G. 203, N. 2). — ὁπότε ἔχοιεν
(G. 248).

21. ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου, after breakfast.

22. ἔἐγρηγόρεσαν, v. ἐγείρω. --- διὰ νυκτός, all night long.

24. τὸ πολύ, the main part. — τοὺς πολλούς, the two main bodies. —
ἀλλήλων, following ὁμοῦ (G. 182, 2).

Page 53. — 26. τὸ ἄνω, their men above.

27. ornodpevor (G. 199, x. 1).

VII. 1. Τάοχοι, a tribe of Georgian mountaineers, still known among
their kindred as Tao: for the ending -yot, see Book 8, v., 15. — ἐν ols...
ἀνακεκομισμένοι, where they carried and kept all their provisions.

2. αὐτόσε (to avoid εἰς 8), into which (G. 156).

3. els καλόν, in the nick of time. — αἱρετέον (G. 281, 1).

4. οὕτω διατίθεται, is served thus. — σκέλη, acc. after the passive συν-
τετριμμένους (ἃ. 197, 1, N. 2).

δ. ἀναλώσωσιν (v. ἀναλίσκω), wse up. — ἄλλο τι fH... waprévan, is there
(i. 6. will there be) anything to prevent us from pussing by? ἄλλο τι
#4 (= nonne) is an interrogative implying an affirmative answer (see
G. 282, 3); so that this question means, literally, Is anything else [the
case] than [this, that] nothing prevents, &c.?

Page $4.— 6. τρία ἡμίπλεθρα, i. 6. 150 feet. — διαλειπούσαις, scat-
tered. — ἀνθ᾽ ὦν, behind which. — φερομένων, flying through the air. —
ὅταν λωφήσωσιν (G. 232, 3).

7. πολλοί (pred.), in great numbers. — αὐτό, that very thing. — pe-
κρόν τι, α little way, i. 6. fifty feet.

8. καθ᾽ ἕνα, one by one.

9. καὶ ἄλλοι δέ, and others besides : in such expressions δέ is always the
connective.

Page 55.—12. τῆς trvos, the rim of his shield (G. 171, 1, N.).

15. εἰς χεῖρας, to close quarters. — πτερύγων, fringes. — ἐστραμμένα,
v. στρέφω.

16. ὅσον EvfAny, about as long as a Spartan dagger (see G. 153, Ν. 5).
— μίαν λόγχην, i. 6. only at one end: the Greek spears were sharpened

28 XENOPHON.

at the butt, so as to stick in the ground. — ἀποτέμνοντες ἂν . . . ἐπορεύ-
οντο (G. 206): the ἄν belongs grammatically to ἐπορεύοντο, but it gives a
frequentative meaning‘to the whole sentence.

17. ἐν τούτοις refers to the provisions being deposited in the strong
places, rather than to carrying them into these.

Page 36.— 19. Bad... χώρας, through their own enemies’ country. —
πέμπει (G. 200, N. 1).

20. πέντε ἡμερών, within five days (G. 179, 1). — ἐπηγγείλατο, agreed.
— Φ Λλήνων, obj. gen. after εὐνοίας, good will for the Greeks.

22. δασειών.. . ὠμοβόεια, made of raw hides of shaggy oxen.

23-27. ‘* But every moment the shout became louder, as fresh men
came to the summit and gave vent to their feelings ; so that Xenophon
grew anxious, and galloped up to the van with his handful of cavalry to
see what had happened. As he approached, the voice of the overjoyed
crowd was heard distinctly crying out, Thalatia, Thalatia/ (The Sea, the
Sea /) and congratulating each other in ecstasy. The main body, the
rear guard, the baggage soldiers driving up their horses and cattle before
them, became all excited by the sound, and hurried up breathless to the
summit. The whole army, officers and soldiers, were thus assembled,
manifesting their joyous emotions by tears, embraces, and outpourings of
enthusiastic sympathy. With spontaneous impulse they heaped up stones
to decorate the spot by a monument and commemorative trophy ; putting
on the stones such homely offerings as their means afforded, — sticks, hides,
and a few of the wicker shields just taken from the natives. To the guide,
who had performed his engagement of bringing them in five days within
sight of the sea, their gratitude was unbounded. They presented him with
a horse, a silver bowl, a Persian costume, and ten darics in money ; be-
sides several of the soldiers’ rings, which he especially asked for. Thus
loaded with presents he left them, having first shown them a village
wherein they could find quarters, as well as the road which they were to
take through the territory of the Makrones.” Grote.

23. οἱ ἀεὶ ἐπιόντες, those who successively came up ; 80 τοὺς ἀεὶ βοῶντας,
those who successively raised a shout.

Page 57. — 25. Srov δὴ παρεγγνήσαντος, some one [whoever he may
have been] giving the word ; ὅστις seldom has this indefinite sense except
when it is joined with -ovv. In Anab. 5, 11. 24 we find ὅτου δὴ ἐνάψαντος,
some one or other setting rt on fire.

26. κατέτεμνε, i. 6. he made them useless, that the natives might not
destroy the monument to get the shields.

27. δακτυλίους : ‘‘The free Greek, if not of the very poorest class, wore
a ring, not only as an ornament, but as a signet to attest his signature, or
for making secure his property.” Becker’s Charicles. The Darte stater or
Dare was a Persian gold coin, equivalent (by weight) to ebout-$-5:80.

ANABASIS 4, VIII. 29

VIII. 1. ὥριζε: the imperf. is usual in descriptions, instead of the
present, when connected with past tenses of narration. — τήν, sc. χώραν.

2. οἷον (used with the superl. like ὡς or ὅτι), excessively. — δι’ ov refers’
to ὁ ὁρίζων, the frontier stream. —xotrrov, cut down, to make floats or
bridges.

3. ἔρριπτον : i. 6. to get within shot of the Greeks.

Page 58.—5. ἐρωτήσαντος, when he asked (gen. abs.). — dynrerd-
yaras, Ionic 3 per. plur. (see G. 122, 2).

6. ἀπερχόμεθα, we are returning.

7. εἰ δοῖεν ἄν, indir. question (G. 245). --- ἔφασαν, said yes: οὐκ ἔφασαν
is said no.
8. ὡς διαβιβάσοντες, so a3 to get them across. — lv μέσοις (G. 142, 4,
N. 4).

9. ὅπως ἀγωνιοῦνται (G. 217).

10. watoayras... ποιῆσαι, that they should give up the phalanx, and
should form the companies in columns. — τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, here, there.

11. ἐπὶ πολλούς, many in depth (the idea of extending to a great depth
being prominent): ἔπ᾽ ὀλίγων (below) is simply sero in depth, with no such
accessory idea. — περιττεύσουσιν fpev, will outflank us (G. 175, 2). —
τοῖς περιττοῖς refers to that part of the enemy’s line by which they would
outflank the Greeks. — ἀθρόων, coming in a mass.

Page 39.— 12. τοσοῦτον ... ὅσον ... γενέσθαι, to occupy 80 much
ground, by leaving spaces between the columns, that the outer columns will be
beyond, &c. — ἐσόμεθα... of ἔσχατοι λόχοι, i. 6. our outer columns will
be, &c. — ἡ dv, wherever.

13. ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on both sides. — ὄρθιον προσίοντα, advancing in a
dine. — οὐδεὶς μηκέτι μείνῃ : no one will stand his ground (G. 257): the
compounds of οὐ and μή (as here) may be used in these expressions, which
contain an emphatic future.

14, τὸ μὴ εἶναι (G. 263, 2). — ὠμοὺς καταφαγεῖν, fo devour raw ; see
Iliad IV. 35, ὠμὸν βεβώθοις Πρίαμον.

Page 60. — 20. τὰ ἄλλα (G. 160, 1). — ἐθαύμασαν, found strange. —
σμήνη : ‘Most modern travellers attest the existence, in these regions, of
honey intoxicating and poisonous, such as Xenophon describes. Professor
Koch, however, states that after careful inquiries he could find no trace of
such ; he thinks that the honey which the Greeks ate must have been stale
or tainted.” Grote. — τῶν κηρίων (G. 170, 1; cf. 171, 2). — κάτω διεχώ-
pa αὐτοῖς, they had a di:rrhoea: Svexope being an impersonal verb. —
ἐδηδοκότες, v. do Ola. — ἐῴκεσαν, v. elxw. — ἀποθνήσκουσιν, dat. pl. fol-
lowing ἐῴκεσαν.

21. τροπῆς, defeat.

30 XENOPHON.

22. Trapezus is now Trebizond. — ἐληίζοντο, foraged.

24. συνδιεπράττοντο, joined them (the Greeks) in making terms. —
ὑπέρ, in behalf of. — ξένια (pred.), as friendly gifts.

25. ἣν εὔξαντο, see Book 3, 11, 9

Page ΘΕ. — ἔφνγε, was banished. — ἄκων κατακανών, having killed acci-
dentally. The Greeks looked upon any one who had caused the death of
another, even by accident, as a polluted person, and he was obliged to leave
the country. Even ‘‘ any inanimate object, a piece of wood or stone, &c.,
which had caused death to any one without the proved intervention of a
human hand, when the fact was verified, was [after solemn trial] formally
cast beyond the border by the old Athenian law.” Grote. — ἐπιμεληθῆναι,
to take charge: infin. of purpose after d\ovro (G. 265).

26. τὰ δέρματα, the hides of the slain animals, offered as prizes. — ὅπου
πεποιηκὼς εἴη (G. 248, 4). — τρέχειν (G. 261, 2). — ἀνιάσεται, v. ἀνιάω :
will hurt himself.

27. στάδιον, cognate accus. like δόλιχον, πάλην, &c. —- αἰχμαλώτων,
captives in place of the free-born boys who ran in the Greek games. — στά-
Sov... δόλιχον : the Olympic stadium, or distance between the starting-
point and the goal of the Olympic race-course, was a little less than a fur-
long (606% English feet). The δόλιχον was a longer race, in which the
runner ran several times round the whole race-course ; it must have been
variable, as different accounts give from six to twenty-four séadia as its
length. — κατέβησαν, entered (the contest). — dre... ἑταίρων, since their
comrades were looking on.

28. βωμόν, the barrier, where the course began. — ἄγειν, with ἐλάσαν-
vas and dvacrpéyavras, refers to the drivers of the horses.

After a short delay at Trapezus, the Greeks continued their retreat,
partly by land marches, partly by voyaging along the coast, — enlist-
ing for atime under Seuthes, king of Thrace, — till, about a year
later, they joined a Spartan army acting under Agesilaus in Western
Asia Minor. Having thus entered service with the Lacedaemonians,
Xenophon took part (B. c. 394) against Athens in the disastrous
battle of Coronea, — the most desperate engagement that had yet
taken place in Greece, in which, for the first time, the Theban pha-
lanx appears to have been a full match for the valor of the Spartans.
For this act of hostility against his native city sentence of exile was
pronounced against him; and most of the latter part of his life was
spent in the territory and under the protection of the Lacedaemonians
His two sons tvok part, and one of them was killed in the battle of
Mantinea (8. c. 362), where Sparta and Athens fought against the
predominance of Thebes. He died, apparently at Corinth, a few
years later.

HELLENIOA 2, 11. $1

HELLENICA.
[Book I1.}

Tae Peloponnesian War lasted twenty-seven years, from B. c. 431
to 404, of which the first twenty are included in the narrative of Thu-
cydides, and the remainder in the Hellenica of Xenophon. It arose
from the fear and jealousy felt by Sparta and other Greek states at
the power and glory of the Athenian Empire, aided by the uneasi-
ness of the subject allies of Athens herself under what they believed
to be an oppressive rule. Since the formation of the confederacy of
Delos in 477 8. c. — which was a defensive union of voluntary allies
under Athens as presiding city, made to secure the Aegean against
the possibility of another Persian invasion, — the maritime power of
Athens had steadily increased, and the smaller states had gradually
been changed from independent allies to subjects of an imperial city.
This change is well explained in Chapters XLIV. and XLV. of Grote’s
History of Greece. The splendor of Athens reached its height under
Pericles, the most illustrious of her statesmen (who died in 429 B. c.);
and her Dorian neighbors in Sparta, Corinth, Megara, and Thebes
were now ready to combine for her destruction. In 432 Β. o. the dis-
putes between Corinth and Athens about the Corinthian colonies of
Corcyra and Potidaea gave a plausible pretext for war, and war was
at once declared. But, as Thucydides tells us, the war arose chiefly
from the alarm felt by Sparta at the extent of the Athenian power,
and her dread of its further increase. The war began in the spring
of 431 B.c.; and it ended in the spring of 404 B. c. with the surrender
of Athens, which is described in the first extract from the Hellenica.
The power of Athens had been seriously crippled by the disastrous
expedition to Syracuse (Β. σ. 415-413); it was finally broken by the
destruction of the Athenian fleet at Aegospotami, as related in the
chapter immediately preceding the narrative here given.

Aegospotami, or Goat’s River, was a station on the European side
of the Hellespont, opposite the Asiatic town of Lampsacus, which
had just been captured by Lysander, the Spartan commander.
It was “an open beach, without harbor, without good anchorage,
without either houses or inhabitants or supplies”; and was chosen
by the Athenian commander, merely to compel Lysander to an
engagement. Each morning the fleet would cross the strait in line
of battle, but the Spartan forces kept close under shelter of their port.
Each day it withdrew to its anchorage, followed only by a few scout-
boats to watch the disembarking; and then the men would stray on

32 XENOPHON.

shore for provisions, as far as Sestos, a few miles below. For five
days the same scene was repeated. In vain Alcibiades, then living in
exile near by, warned the generals of the exposed condition of their
fleet, and urged that they should at least fall back to the safe and
friendly harbor of Sestos; he was dismissed with the taunt that they
were now in command, not he. ‘At length, on the fifth day, Lysan-
der ordered the scout-ships, which he sent forth to watch the Athe-
nians on their return, to hoist a bright shield as a signal as soon as
they should see the ships at their anchorage, and the crews ashore in
quest of their meal.” The moment he beheld this welcome signal,
he gave orders to his entire fleet to row across the strait as swiftly
as possible, while the land forces marched along the strand in case
of need. The fleet was taken by complete surprise. A squadron of
twelve vessels under Conon, with the sacred ship called Paralas,
escaped. All the remainder, nearly one hundred and seventy in
number, were captured on the shore, defenceless, and seemingly with-
out the least attempt on the part of any one to resist. This sweeping
victory was won without the loss of a ship, almost without the loss
ofa man. Of more than thirty thousand prisoners, all the Athenians,
some three or four thousand, were put to death. It had been charged
against them that they had resolved, if victorious, to cut off the right
hands of all their prisoners; and one of their generals, Philocles, had
put to death the captured crews of two ships, allies of the Lacedae-
monians, by hurling them headlong from a precipice. Charges like
these, at the end of a long and obstinate war, account for the vindic-
tive and bitter temper of the conquerors. (See Grote, Ch. LXV.)

The battle at Aegospotami was fought in September, Β. c. 405.
Byzantium surrendered directly-after; Lysander permitting its garm-
gon, with other Athenians found there or elsewhere, to sail to Athens,
“but nowhere else,” says Xenophon, “for he knew that the more
there were gathered in the city and Piraeus, the sooner they would
be brought to straits by famine.”

II. 3. Παράλου : the Paralos (‘‘ Seaboard”) and the Salamtinia were
two sacred vessels maintained by Athens, and used in the service of the
government. They carried deputations to the sacred festivals, and em-
bassies ; and were sometimes used to bring state criminals to Athens, as in
the case of Alcibiades in 415 8. c. —vunrds (G. 179, 1). — ἡ ξνυμφορά
(= συμφορά), the disaster to the fleet at Aegospotami: ξύν is often used
for σύν in the older Attic. — Πειραιῶς, the Piraeus was the principal port
of Athens ; it was fortified and connected with the city (ἄστυ), which was
four and a half miles distant by the two long walls of Pericles. (See the
plan at the end of the volume.) — ὁ ἕτερος ... παραγγέλλων : we should
expect the gen. absol., but the nominative is in apposition with the

.-

HELLENICA 2, 1. 33

nominative implied in the verbal noun οἰμωγή (as if ᾧμωζον had been
used).

Page G2. — πενθοῦντες, agreeing with the subject implied in οὐδείς, as
if it had been, all were sleepless. —weoerOar, that they were to suffer
(G. 246). — οἷα ἐποίησαν : see G. 247 (last example) and N. 2. — My-
Alovs: Melos, a Spartan colony, had been subjugated by Athens in 416 B. c.;
the men of military age were put to death, and the women and children
were enslaved.

4. ἔδοξε, they voted, lit. i pleased them: the expression is the same which
was used in the Athenian decrees, ἔδοξε τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ. — ἀποχώσαι
(v. ἀποχώννυμι), to block the channel. — περὶ ταῦτα, thus employed.

5. ναυσίν (G. 188, 5). — κατεσκενάσατο, established, i. e. in the form of
“ΔῊ oligarchy of ten native citizens, chosen from among his most daring
and unscrupulous partisans, to govern in conjunction with the Lacedaemo-
nian harmost.” — τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης, often without χωρία, a common expres-
sion for the coast of Thrace.

6. ἀφειστήκει, had (already) revolted. —’A@nvalev (gen. governed by
ἀπο- in ἀφειστήκει, G. 193), from the Athenians. — σφαγὰς ... ποιή-
σαντες, having made a massacre of the aristocrats: this massacre took place
eight years before, but was recent enough to forbid the Samians to hope
for mercy.

7. Δεκέλειαν : a post in Attica, whence Agis, the Spartan king, was now
threatening the city. — ὅτι : understand λέγοντάς τινας, or ἀγγέλλοντας
after ἔπεμψε. --- προσπλεῖ (G. 243). — τοῦ érépov, the other of the two kings,
Agis being one.

8. ἐν τῇ ᾿Ακαδημίᾳ τῷ καλουμένῳ γυμνασίῳ, the common reading, would

be an unusual expression for in the gymnasium called the Academy. Per-
haps we may insert a comma after ᾿Ακαδημίᾳ, and take the following words
in apposition with ’AxaSnplq, in the Academy, viz. in the gymnasium thus
named. Many scholars consider the Jast three words as an interpolation.
The Academy (i. e. the grove of the hero Academus) was northwest of the
city, on the Sacred Way leading to Eleusis. It was afterwards made
famous by Plato, who used it as his place of instruction ; and its name is
thus a familiar word in all modern languages.

9. Αἴγιναν : in the first year of the Peloponnesian war (431 8. c.), the
Athenians expelled the Aeginetans with their families from their island,
and the Spartans allowed them to settle in Thyrea. — ἀπέδωκε implies that
Lysander restored Aegina to its former inhabitants. — ὅσους ἐδύνατο πλεί-
στους, the greatest number which he was able (to collect), like ὡς πλείστους
or ὅτι πλείστους. — ὡς αὕτως, likewise, alv. of ὃ αὐτός, the same. — My-
Moss: see note on ἃ 3 above. — τῆς αὑτῶν, sc. χώρας (G. 141, N. 4). —
πρὸς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, he came ἕο the Piraeus and anchored there.

10. τί χρὴ ποιεῖν (G. 243).
8

94 XENOPHON.

Page 68. — ὄντων (G. 277, 2.) --- σωτηρίαν τοῦ μὴ παθεῖν, security
against suffering, the ph strengthening the negative idea (of prevention)
implied in σωτηρίαν (G. 263, 1). —@... μικροπολίτας, what they had not
done for punishment, but had done unjustly (ἠδίκουν) through insolence to
men of the small states: & is direct object of ἐποίησαν and cognate object
of ἠδίκουν. --- οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ μιᾷ, more emphatic than ἐπ᾿ οὐδεμιᾷ, — ἐκείνοις, the
Lacedaemonians.

11. ἀτίμονς ἐπιτίμους ποιήσαντες : they passed a vote of amnesty,
restoring to full civie rights all who had forfeited any of those rights
(i. e. who had become ἄτιμοι) either as public debtors or by sentence of the
law. After this vote, the citizens met in the acropolis and pledged them-
selves to harmony. — ἀποθνησκόντων (G. 277, 5.) — ἔχοντες, keeping. —
ἐπὶ τούτοις, on these conditions.

12. εἶναι, sc. ἔφη. --- κύριος αὐτός (G. 138, N. 8): αὐτός is adjective
pronoun, himself (145, 1).

13. πλησίον τῆς Λακωνικῆς : as Sellasia is generally said to be in La-

conia, πλησίον should perhaps be omitted here. — ola, sc. τοιαῦτα. --- αὐ-
τόθεν, instantly. — εἰ δέονται (G. 247). — τι, at all. — κάλλιον (G. 75).

14. ἧκον (G. 200, ν. 3). — ἐνέπεσε, v. ἐμπίπτο. — ἕως ἂν πέμπωσιν,
while they should be sending (G. 247 ; 202, 1) : ἕως πέμποιεν might have
been used.

15. Λακεδαιμονίοις, dat. with εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι (G. 186, Ν. 1). — ἐφ᾽
ols προεκαλοῦντο, on the terms which they offered (ἃ. 153, N. 1). — ἑκάτε-
pov, i. 6. cach of the two long walls leading to the Piraeus ; see note on
§ 20, below. — μὴ ἐξεῖναι depends on the verbal force of ψήφισμα
(G. 261, 1, N.).

16. εἰ βούλονται, if they wished (G. 247): the direct form of the sen-
tence following ὅτι would be, εἰ βούλεσθέ pe πέμψαι, ἥξω εἰδὼς πότερον
ἀντέχουσι, &c. — Λακεδαιμονίους is by anticipation object of εἰδώς, in-
stead of being subj. nominative of ἀντέχουσι. --- 4 connects βουλόμενοι
(G. 277, 2) to πίστεως ἕνεκα (in order to secure good faith).

Page G4. — & τι τις λέγοι, whatever any one might propose (G. 248). —
ὁμολογήσειν (G. 202, 3, N.).

17. τέως, for some time. — κατέχοι and κελεύοι are instances of the rare
imperfect optative, representing κατεῖχε and ἐκέλευε of the direct discourse,
which would regularly be retained in such cases (G. 243, N. 1). — elvan,
sc. ἔφη. --- κύριος (G. 138, n. 8). — ὧν ἐρωτῷτο, of what he (Lysander)
was asked (G. 158, N. 1), the direct form being ὧν ἐρωτῶμαι (indic.). —
δέκατος αὐτός, a common expression for one of ten, generally applied to the
principal person in the number mentioned.

18. ἀγγελοῦντα (G. 277, 3) ὅτι ἀπεκρίναιτο, to inform them that he had
replied, dc, (the message was ἀπεκρίνατο Αὐύσανδρος, &c. ).
19, ἐπὶ τίνι λόγῳ, in what capacity. — καλεῖν ἐκέλευον, gave orders to

HELLENICA 2, 111. 35

summon them. — ph σπένδεσθαι, [urging] to make no terms. — ἐξαιρεῖν,
sc. τὴν πόλιν.

20. οὐκ ἔφασαν... ἀνδραποδιεῖν, refused to [said they would not] en-
slave, &c. It is said that, when a Theban delegate advocated the destruc-
tion of Athens, a Spartan replied, that he would not put out one of the
eyes of Greece, and leave her ἑτερόφθαλμον. The same argument was used
at Athens in favor of helping Sparta, after the battle of Leuctra, in
371 B. c. For ἀνδραποδιεῖν, see G. 120, 3. — ἐποιοῦντο, offered to make
(G. 200, N. 2). — ἐφ᾽ @.. . ἕπεσθαι (G. 267). — τὰ μακρὰ τείχη : probably
only the two long walls leading to the Piraeus are meant ; as the third or
Phaleric wall, leading to the old port of Phalerum, was now of less account,
since the Piraeus had been strongly fortified and connected with the city
by two walls. —Kxa@évras (v. καθίημι), restoring. — τὸν αὐτόν, &c., lit.
regarding as foe and friend the same with the Lacedaemonians.

21. μὴ ἥκοιεν, lest they might have come (G. 200, N. 3; 202, 2). — οὐ
γὰρ ἔτι ἐνεχώρει μένειν, for there was no longer room (χώρα) for delay.

22. ἐφ᾽ ols... ποιοῖντο, the terms on which (they said) the L. offered to
make peace ; ποιοῖντο representing ποιοῦνται of the direct form (G. 248, 4):
see ἐποιοῦντο in καὶ 20, above.

Page 63. — ὑπ᾽ αὐλητρίδων, to the music of flute-girls.

III. 1. τῷ ἐπιόντι tra, the year beginning at midsummer 404 B. ©.,
the first year of the ninety-fourth Olympiad. —8v . . . οὐκ ὀνομάζουσι, whom
the Athenians do not name, i. e. among the ἄρχοντες ἐπώνυμοι : the first of
the nine Archons gave his name to the year, whence he was called the
Eponymus. — ἀναρχίαν : the word ἀναρχία was entered in the public
records for this year instead of the name of Pythodorus. — There are
strong reasons for believing all of § 1, except τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι bra, to be an
interpolation ; it will be seen that the other words break the construction
of the sentence, which becomes grammatical only by taking tw... tra
with ἔδοξε in § 2.

2. Boke τῷ δήμῳ, the people voted: see note on II. 4, above. —ot...
ξυγγράψονσι (G. 236, N. 3), who were to compile, dc.: see note on § 11,
below.

The omitted sections (4-10) refer to matters in Thessaly and Syracuse
(under the tyrant Dionysius), to the surrender of Samos to Lysander, and
to Lysander’s return to Sparta.

11. ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψαι (G. 267), equivalent to οὗ Evyypdypover in § 2. —
πολιτεύσοιντο is an indirect statement (G. 248, 4) of the idea of the Athe-
nians in choosing the Thirty : in § 2 the indicative of the direct form is
retained. For the middle voice, see G. 199, N. 1. — ἀεὶ ἔμελλον, they con-
tinually delayed.

12. ξῶντας and ὄντας (G. 246 ; 280). — βαρεῖς, odious. — ὑπῆγον θα-
vérou, arraigned capitally (G. 178, last example). — αὐτῶν (G. 173, 2, N.}.

36 XENOPHON.

Page 66. — ὅσοι ξυνήδεσαν ... ὄντες (G. 280, N. 2).

13. ὅπως dv ἐξείη... ὅπως βούλοιντο, how they might get the power to treat
the city as they pleascd ; indirect question, representing πώς ἂν ἐξείη ἡμῖν τῇ
πόλει χρῆσθαι ὅπως βουλοίμεθα (G. 245; 247, N. 3). The first ὅπως is
an indirect interrog itive (like πῶς) ; the second is relative (G. 232, 4). —
φρουροὺς σφίσι ξνμπράξαι ἐλθεῖν, to help bring it about that guards should
come to them, i. e. to aid in having guards sent them: σφίσι refers to the
Thirty (G. 144, 2). —tes ... καταστήσαιντο (G. 239, 2; 248, 3). —
θρέψειν (G. 17, 2, N.; 208, N. 2).—Compare αὐτοῖς πεμφθῆναι with
σφίσιν ἐλθεῖν above: as Λύσανδρος is subject of ξυνέπραξεν, σφίσιν would
have been incorrect here.

14, ds... πράττοιεν (G. 248, N.): the idea of the Thirty was ὡς πάντα
ἐπαινῇ ἃ ἂν πράττωμεν (or ἃ πράττομεν), that he may praise everything
which we may do (or cverything which we do). — τῶν φροτρῶν, depending
on the omitted antecedent of ovs. — ἥκιστα... ἀνέχεσθαι, representing
ἥκιστα... ἀνέχονται, they [are men who] least endure being thrust out
(unless ἄν is omitted by accident before ἀν-έχεσθαι, or unless ἄν in the
next clause affects ἀνέχεσθαι also). — πλείστους av... λαμβάνειν, would
get most adherents (G. 211): the protasis is expressed in ἐπιχειροῦντας,
= εἰ ἐπιχειροῖεν (G. 226, 1).

15. ἐπὶ rd... ἀποκτείνειν (G. 262, 1). — Gre... φυγών, inasmuch as
he had been exiled (G. 277, N. 2): φεύγειν often means fo be exiled ; hence
ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου follows, as if the verb were passive (G. 197, 1).— εἴ τιᾳ
ἐτιμᾶτο ... εἰργάζετο, in case one was honored, dc. depends as protasis on
ἀντέκοπτε λέγων, and not on εἴη : if it belonged to the indirect discourse
after ὅτι, we should expect τιμῷτο or τιμᾶται, &c.

16. οἰκείως ἐχρῆτο, treated as a friend. — ὅτι οὐκ ἐγχωροίη, that tt was
not possible (lit. there was no room). — pi) οὐκ ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι, not to put
out of the way (G. 283, 7): when we should have (affirmatively) ἐγχωρεῖ
μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, we may have (negatively) οὐκ ἐγχωρεῖ μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποι-
εἶν. --- ἧττόν τι belongs to ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. --- ὥσπερ τυραννίδος, as a tyranny :
the meaning is, tf you think that our large number prevents our government
Srom being in spirit a tyranny (properly a rule of one), and from requiring
the same vigilance as a tyranny, you are ὦ fool.

17. δῆλοι, evidently (G. 138, N. 1; 280, N. 1). --- ξυνιστάμενοι, banding
together (in a threatening way).

Page 67. — el μή... Aftpotro, .. . ἔσοιτο, representing εἰ ph... A4-
erat (G. 223, nN. 1), ἀδύνατον ἔσται (G. 202, 4). --- τις, they (by the
English idiom) ; for we should say unless we take for εἰ μή τις λήψεται in
the direct form.

18. συρρνείησαν, v. συρρέω. --- καταλέγουσι, regisier them in the list
(κατάλογος, catalogue) mentioned in § 20. — τοὺς μεθέξοντας δή, who (as
they said) were to take part in the administration (G. 277, 3): we might
have had of μεθέξουσι (see ὃ 2, above).

HELLENICA 2, 111. 37

19. κοινωνοὺς ποιήσασθαι belongs at once with βουλομένονε and with
τρισχιλίους, that, wishing to make the best of the citizens partners, they made
three thousand of them partners. —+é before πρῶτον belongs to ποιήσασθαι,
which is the subject of δοκοίη : we should expect another infinitive after
ἔπειτα δέ, but after the new verb ὁρῶ the construction changes to that of
the participle (G. 280). — ὥσπερ. .- εἶναι, as if this number (three thou-
sand) must needs be honorable men: ἔχειν ἀνάγκην τινὰ ποιεῖν τι is fo be
ander some necessity of doing something (G. 261, 1, N.). For the accusa-
tive absolute see G. 278, 2, N; for ὥσπε, G. 277, N. 3. — οἷόν τε εἴη is
irregularly added, by an entire change in the form of the sentence, as if εἰ
ἔχοι had been used after ὥσπερ in the preceding clause, instead of the con-
ditional participle ἔχοντα (G. 277, 4). Here οἷόν τε dv would have been
the regular form after ὥσπερ (without el), as tf t were possible ; εἴη rep-
resenting &... ἐστίν in the words of Theramenes, as δοκοίη (above)
represents δοκεῖ, — γενέσθαι has τινάς understood as its subject, and is fol-
lowed by σπουδαίους and πονηρούς in the predicate. — κατασκεναζομένου
is added, by a sort of apposition, to explain πράττοντας. — ἥττονα τῶν
ἀρχομένων, weaker than its sulyects.

20. of δ᾽ ἐξέτασιν, &c. The meaning of this obscure description seems
to be as follows. The Thirty held a general review of all the citizens
capable of bearing arms; but while the Three Thousand were reviewed
together in the market-place, the other citizens were scattered over the city
in small detachments (ςἄλλων ἀλλαχοῦ). Then, while the ordinary citizens
were dismissed for dinner or some other purpose (ἀπεληλύθεσαν), leaving
their arms stacked at the places of review, a general call to arms was sud-
denly sounded (κελεύσαντες ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα) ; on which the Spartan garrison
(φρουροί) and those citizens who understood the plot rushed and seized the
arms of the unsuspecting citizens before the latter could return and secure
them. — ἐκεῖνοι, those who were ἔξω τοῦ καταλόγον. --- ἐν τῷ vag, tn ths
temple, i. 6. the Parthenon.

21. ὧς ἐξόν, since (as they thought) it was in their power (G. 277, N. 2).
— ὅ τι βούλοιντο (G. 248). — τῶν μετοίκων, resident forcigners, living at
Athens chiefly for purposes of trade, without political rights ; as many of
them were rich, they were selected as victims. Lysias (in Eratosth. § 2)
says that the Thirty seized fen μέτοικοι in this way, including two poor
men in the number lest the purity of their motives should be suspected. —
ἀποσημήνασθαι, to confiscate (properly to put a seal upon).

During this reign of terror, the orator Lysias was arrested by order of the
Thirty while he was entertaining friends at dinner; but he escaped from
custody and fled to Megara. His brother Polemarchus, however, was
arrested in the street by Eratosthenes, one of the tyrants, and was put to
death without trial, and without so much as hearing the offence with which
he was charged. The house of Polemarchus was plundered, even the
golden ear-rings were torn from the ears of his wife, and his family were
dependent on the charity of friends for the means of giving him a decent

38 XENOPHON.

barial. Lysies describes these terrible scenes in his oration against Erates-
thenes, whom he afterwards prosecuted for the murder of Polemarchus.

22. Svrwa βούλοιτο (α΄. 248, 1): this use of the optative must not be
confounded with that seen in wap’ ὧν λαμβάνοιεν, below (G. 233). — φά-
oxovras, while we declare.

Page 68. — μηδέν (G. 283, 4). — τῷ παντί, in every way.

23. ἐμποδὼν τῷ ποιεῖν (G. 262, 2; 185). — ἰδίᾳ... ἄλλος πρὸς ἄλλον,
privately ; one to this man, one to that.

24. πλέονας τοῦ καιροῦ, more than is fitting (lit. seasonable). — pedl-
στανται͵ are changing. — rots... μεθιστᾶσι, those who are changing (the
government). — διὰ rd... εἶναι, because the city is; Sd td... τετράφθαι,
because the people have been reared (G. 202, 2).

25. τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν, to such as we (G. 153, κ. δ). ---- οἱ βέλτιστοι, the
aristocracy (the better class), opposed to the δῆμος, the mass of the people.

26. ἐὰν αἰσθανώμεθα (G. 225). — ἐκποδὼν ποιούμεθα, we put him out of
our way (G. 199, 2).

27. οἷς δύναται, by whatever means he can. — ἣν xaravofyre (G. 223) ;
but ὅταν βουλώμεθα (6. 233). — εἰ ἐγίγνωσκε, if he had this opinion
(G. 221), has for its first apodosis the simple indicative πολέμιοφ ἦν. The
second apodosis ἐνομίζετο ἄν has a further protasis implied in δικαίως, if he
were rightly estimated (which would belong under G. 222); and to this it
conforms. See G. 227, 1, and Greek Moods and Tenses, § 54, 3 (a).

Page 69. — 28. τοῦ Shpov, of the democracy. — ois... els ἡμᾶς, on
those who were first brought before us (for judgment), follows ἐπιτιθέναι
(G. 187). — ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ, in safety (G. 139, 2).

29. Sow... φανεροῦ, by as much as what is secret is harder to guard
against than what is open. — ἔχθιον (v. tx @pés), more hostile. — οὔτε towel-
σατο οὔτ᾽ ἐπίστευσε, gnomic aorists (α΄. 205, 2; see N. 1): the subjunc-
tive λαμβάνωσι (G. 233) depends on these aorists, as they are primary
tenses (G. 201, end). — τοῦ λοιποῦ, for the future (G. 179, 1).

30. ἀναμνήσω (v. ἀναμιμνήσκω) here takes two accusatives ; this verb
regularly takes the accusative and the genitive (G. 171, 2, N. 8 and Rem. ).
κατὰ τὸν πατέρα, i.e. as his father had been. — τοὺς terpaxoctovs, the
oligarchy of the Four Hundred was established in Athens in 411 B. c. ; it
lasted only four months. See Grote, Chap. LXII. — ἀντίπαλόν τι τῇ
ὀλιγαρχίᾳ, a party hostile to the oligarchy.

31. κόθορνος, a high buskin, worn by tragic actors: see the cut m
Smith’s Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Cothurnus. — ἀποβλέπει, ἐξ is adapted to both
feet, as the man who is said to resemble it has an eye to both sides. —
ἄνδρα τὸν ἄξιον ζῆν, the man (who is) jit to live (G. 142, 2). --- od... ξύν-
οντας : οὐ belongs to εἶναι, and προάγειν depends on δεινόν. --- ἕως ἂν εἰς
οὖρον καταστῶσιν, wntil they get into fair sailing (G. 239, 2; 233). —
ἐπειδάν τι ἀντικόψῃ : we should expect the optative, by assimilation to

HELLENIOA 2, 1τ|. - 39

πλέοιεν (G. 235), and we must translate it like one. See Greek Moods and
Tenses, ὃ 34, 1 (δ).

32. δήπου, no doubt, —ahelorows... ἀπολωλέναι, you are in part to
blame that very many who were on the side of oligarchy have perished at the
hands of the people: αἴτιός τινί τινος means the cause of something to some
one ; and αἴτιος may take the simple infinitive (G. 261, 1) as here, or the
infinitive with τοῦ (G. 262, 2).

Page 50. .-.-- ἀνελέσθαι (v. ἀναιρέω), to take up or recover. — vavpayta,
the sea-fight at Arginusae, B. c. 406, in which the Athenian fleet was vic-
torious, but sailed away leaving, besides the slain, more than a thousand
perishing upon the wrecks: the commanders were afterwards brought to
trial before the people, and six of them sentenced to death, for this neglect ;
but the trial was hasty and informal, and their execution was regarded by
many as 8. public crime. — ἀπέκτεινεν αὐτούς, caused their death: Thera-
menes, who was one of the commanders, joined in the accusation of the
others.

83. τοῦ πλεονεκτεῖν, gain; τοῦ καλοῦ, honor. — τούτον, gen. after del-
σασθαι, v. φείδομαι (G. 171, 2). — ἡμᾶς ταὐτό, the same to us (G. 165).

34. καλλίστη : Critias, who was a very able man, a kinsman of Plato
and a friend of Socrates, wrote a treatise on the excellence of the Spartan
constitution. — ἀντὶ... πείθεσθαι, instead of yielding to the majority. —
τοῖς πραττομένοις, the acts of the government. — ἄν before οἴεσθε belongs
to ἀξιωθῆναι (G. 211). — πολλοὺς. .. ὑμῖν, would make many of those who
hold views (γιγνωσκόντων) hostile to you haughty. — τῶν ἔξω, the political
exiles, those who afterwards restored the democracy.

35. ἀποκτεῖναι (G. 203). — οὐκ ἦρχον κατ᾽ ἐκείνων λόγου, i. 6. my
charge against them did not begin the controversy. — προσταχθέν, when it
was ordered (G. 278, 2). — ἀπολογούμενος, alleging in defence. — οὐδέ, not
even. — μὴ ὅτι, not to say, much less. — Boga... λέγειν, was acknowledged
to have spoken (seemed to speak) reasonably.

Page 7A. — προέμενοι, v. προίημι. --- ἀπολέσθαι (G. 265). — ἀποπλέ-
οντες ᾧχοντο, sailed away (G. 279, 2, N.).

36. παρανενομηκέναι, has acted unlawfully (i. 6. in accusing me) ; for
which some editors suggest the milder wapavevonkévar, has erred in judg-
ment. — trevéorras, serfs (like the Laconian Helots) : the charge of exciting
a democratic revolt would be particularly galling to a proud aristocrat like
Critias.

37. av, sc. ἐκείνων, depending on μηδέν. --- μηδὲν... γένοιτο, may noth-
ing of the kind be done here. — ὑμᾶς, obj. of παῦσαι, depose you (see ὃ 43,
below). — δίκαιον εἶναι explains τάδε, the obj. of ὁμολογώ. --- εἰ κατανοή-
δ ν see last note on ὃ 31.

μέχρι... καταστῆναι, until you were established in the magistracy
sey. μέχρι τοῦ belongs also to ἀποδειχθῆναι and ὑπάγεσθαι; but
with ὑπάγεσθαι, μέχρι must be translated while.

40 XENOPHON. —

40. ὑπόπτως Korey, would be suspicious (G. 202, 4). --- ἕκαστον, see
§ 21. — τούτων ἀπολομένων (G. 226, 1) represents the protasis to ἔσοιντο :
in the direct form, ἐὰν οὗτοι ἀπόλωνται, πολέμιοι ἔσονται.

Page 72. — 41. παρῃροῦντο, took away (see § 20, above). — Sag...
ἀφελεῖν, in appos. with τούτου ἕνεκα (G. 215, Rem.). — μηδέν, in nothing.
— ἐξῆν γάρ, &c., for if they had wanted that, they might have left no one
(ἃ. 222, N. 2) by distressing [the city] with famine a little longer (tr) :
πιέσαντας agrees with the understood subj. of λιπεῖν (G. 138, Nn. 8, end).

42. οὐκ ad ἐδόκει μοι, again, 7 did not approve. — τὸ ἀντίπαλον, the op-
position, of which the head-quarters were with the exiles. — οὕτως, in this
way, referring to the following protasis. — el... προσγενήσοιντο. . . da-
γήσοιντο : μέν and δέ show that εἰ belongs to both verbs. In the direct
form the protasis would have the fut. indic. (G. 228, n. 1).

44. ἃ ἐγὼ λέγω and ἃ οὗτοι πράττουσιν are subj. of γίγνεσθαι. --- ἄν
belongs to βούλεσθαι (G. 211). — οὗτοι, i. 6. the Thirty, represented by
Critias. — αὐτούς, i. 6. the exiles. — χαλεπὸν ... χώρας, that they think it
would be hard to get even a footing anywhere in the country: ἡγεῖσθαι, like
γομίζειν, depends on οἶμαι (αὐτούς) ; and χαλεπὸν ἂν εἶναι (= χαλεπὸν ἂν
ἣν) depends on ἡγεῖσθαι.

45. οἷος, [such a one] as, with infin. (6. 261).

Page 78. — τετρακοσίων, see § 80, above. — πάσῃ πολιτείᾳ, any form
of government (G. 184, 2).

46. ἐκεῖνοι οὐδὲν ἀνίεσαν, they (the Spartans) relaxed nothing of their
hostility. —of ἀμφὶ, &c. the party of the oligarchy (G. 141, Ν. 3). —
ἔρυμα: this was a fort on the mole (χῶμα) which commanded the entrance
of the harbor of Piraeus, built under pretence of defending the city from a
hostile fleet, but really to introduce a Lacedaemonian force to uphold the
tyranny of the Four Hundred. —t¢' αὐτοῖς ποιήσασθαι, make subject to
themselves.

47. ἀποκαλεῖ, nicknames. — ds πειρώμενον, because (as he says) I try.
— τί wore, what in the world f

48. od πρόσθεν... πρίν, not... until. — καὶ οἱ δοῦλοι... . μετέχοιεν,
until even the slaves, and those who for poverty would sell the state fora
drachma, should receive a drachma, i. e. have a seat in the Senate, the pay
of a senator being a drachma (17 cts.) a day. Or the passage may mean
simply, until all who would sell the state for a drachma should have an
opportunity to do so, i. 6. should have a drachma offered them. — εἶναι ἄν
represents εἴη dv, and πρὶν . .. μετέχοιεν stands like a conditional relative
sentence (G. 240, 1, third example). — of ... ἂν ἀποδόμενοι (G. 211) is
equivalent to ἐκεῖνοι of... ἂν ἀπόδοιντο. --- ἐγγενέσθαι ἄν (= ἐγγένοιτο
ἄν), cowld arise or be formed. — εἰς rd... τυραννεῖσθαι, lit. into the {con-
dition of] being wnder the tyranny of a few. — τὸ μέντοι . .. πολιτείαν,
but with the help of the powerful, both by horses and by shields, to aid the
government (I say) by these means; all this is the subject of εἶναι, if the

HELLENICA 2, 111. 41

text is correct. But διὰ τούτων is thus a mere repetition of what precedes,
and the words have probably been corrupted in copying.

49. div... ἐλεγχθῶ.... πράττων. . . πεποιηκώς, ὑ 7 am (shall be) con-
wicted of doing... ΟΥ̓ of having done (G. 280): the apodosis δικαίως ἂν
ἀποθνήσκειν, that I should justly die, has another protasis implied in
παθών (= εἰ πάθοιμι) ; see note on § 27, above. —dryxardrara (double
superlative), extremest.

50. δήλη. ... ἐπιθορυβήσασα, let it be seen that tt applauded with favor
(G. 280, n. 1).

Page 74. — el ἐπιτρέψαι : some MSS. have ἔπιτρέψοι, corresponding to
ἀποφεύξοιτο (see G. 247, N. 1). — οὐ βιωτόν, intolerable. — rots... tyov-
tas, the young men mentioned in § 23. — φανερῶς τῇ βουλῇ (G. 185). —
Spuddxrors, the railing, which separated the Senate from the spectators.

51. xpoordrov... otov Set, that it is the duty of a leader who is what he
ought to be (for γοϊούτου οἷον εἶναι Set). — 8s Av... μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ, noi to per-
mit: irregular for rd... μὴ ἐπιτρέπαν. — οἵδε, the young men above
mentioned. —tav ὄντων, dep. on μηδένα. --- xvplovs θανατοῦν, competent to
put to death. — ξννδοκοῦν, since it ts agreed on (G. 278, 2).

52. ‘“Eorlav: the altar of Hestia (Vesta), the Goddess of the Household,
“4 186 senatorial hearth, the altar and sanctuary in the midst of the Senate
house.” — ἐπὶ Κριτίᾳ, in the power of Critias.

58. ὑμῶν, obj. of θαυμάζω (G. 171, 2).— καὶ ταῦτα seyvbexoores and
that too, when you know. — οὐδέν (G. 160, 2). —+d ὑμῶν ἑκάστου, that of
any one of you.

54. τοὺς ἕνδεκα, the Eleven, who had charge of prisons and executions.
— ἐπὶ τὸν Θηραμένην, to seize Theramenes. — ἐκεῖνοι, nom. without verb.

Page 7. — οὗ Set, to the proper place, with ἀπαγαγόντες. --- τὰ ἐκ τού-
των, what foliows from this, i. 6, execution.

55. τὸ ἔμπροσθεν, the space tn front.

56. δηλοῦντα ola ἔπασχε, proclaiming aloud the treaiment he was suffer-
ing. — οὐκ... . οἰμώξομαι, shall I not suffer? The word, as used by Saty-
rus, meant that he would suffer for it if he did not keep quiet. — τὸ λειπό-
μενον, i. 6. the last few drops of hemlock. — ἀποκοτταβίσαντα, jerking out:
the xérraBos was a sort of toast, in which the guest flung out a few drops
of wine, at the same time calling the name of his beloved ; the sound of
the wine, as it struck the mark aimed at, was accepted as an omen, or sign
of favor. — ἐκεῖνο τοῦ ἀνδρόφ, this quality of the man. — τό belongs to ἀπο-
λιπεῖν, in appos. with ἐκεῖνο.

“‘The scene just described,” says Mr. Grote, ‘is one of the most strik-
ing and tragical in ancient history. The atrocious injustice by which
Theramenes perished, as well as the courage and self-possession which he
displayed in the moment of danger, and his cheerfulness even in the prison,
not inferior to that of Socrates three years afterwards, naturally enlist the
warmest sympathies in his favor. But... he was a selfish, cunning,

430° XENOPHON.

and faithless nian ; ready to enter into conspiracies, yet never foreseeing
their consequences ; and breaking faith to the ruin of colleagues whom he
had first encouraged, when he found them more consistent and thorough-
going in crime than himself.”

IV. 1. προεῖπον μὴ εἰσιέναι, forbade to enter the city (i. 6. expelled
From the city) ; ἦγον, dragged to execution : it was said that in these execu-
tions as many as fifteen hundred perished. Among the banished were the
most eminent intellectual teachers, native or foreign, Socrates being hardly
spared. — φευγόντων, gen. abs. irregularly for φεύγοντες. — ἐνέπλησαν,
v. ἐμπίπλημι. — τῶν ὑποχορούντων, the fugitives.

2. as σύν, with about. —PuvdrAhyv, Phyle, a frontier fortress among the
hills, on the road to Thebes, about fifteen miles from Athens.

Page 76. — 3. τῆς ννκτὸς καὶ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, during the night (G. 179, 1}
and on the next day (G. 189). — ὑπό, [taken] by.

4. λεηλατήσοιεν, would forage (i. 6. those in Phyle). — φυλάς : the
Attic army was mustered according to the ten tribes.

5, συνειλεγμένων (v. συλλέγω), as there were gathered, in appos. with
περὶ ἑπτακοσίους.

6. ἀνίσταντο, i. 6. the forces of the Thirty. — ὅποι, to [the post] where
(after ἀνίσταντο, which implies motion), i. 6. each to his own work. —
ὕπλων, encampment. — ἔστι μὲν οὕς, some (G. 152, N. 2).

Page 7'7.— 8. ἐν τοῖς ἱππεῦσι, under guard of the cavalry. — πόσοι
εἶεν, i. 6. the people of Eleusis. — προσδεήσοιντο (G. 243), how much ad-
Jitional garrison they would need (i. 6. in consequence of the seizure of
Phyle). — τὸν ἀεὶ ἐξιόντα, every one as he went out. — ξυνειλημμένοι
(v. συλλαμβάνω), seized. A similar visit and seizure of prisoners was
made at Salamis. — τοῖς ἕνδεκα, i. 6. for execution.

9. ᾿Ωιδεῖον : not the Odeum of Pericles, but the older building near the
Jlissus, once used as a theatre. — ταὐτὰ ἡμῖν, the same with us (G. 159,
N. 23 186, N. 2).

10. ὅσοις... ἔμελεν, to such as cared only for gain. The number thus
put to death, says Lysias, was about three hundred. — ἐβοήθουν αὐτοῖς,
went to their relief (i. 6. of their party in Piraeus). — dvadépoveay, leading
up, i. e. to the high ground of the Piraeus.

11. μὴ ἀνιέναι αὐτούς, not to let them come up, i. 6. upon any of the high
Jand of the peninsula. — κύκλος, the whole cirewit of the fortifications which
surrounded the Piraeus. The name Piraeus was given to the whole penin-
sula with its three harbors ; this included Munychia, which was the high
]:ill on the east side of the peninsula, directly overlooking the smallest of
the three harbors, the little bay of Munychia. The town of Piraeus occu-
vied part of the larger lower hill south of the great harbor (the har
bor called Piraeus), and extended across the isthmus along the shore, and
over the low land west and northwest of Munychia, to the place at which
the two long walls from Athens joined the fortifications of the Piraeus. In

HELLENICA @, rv. 43.

this northern part of the town of Piraeus was the market-place named for
Hippodamus of Miletus, who was employed by Pericles to lay out the new
town of Piraeus. Hippodamus astonished the Athenians by his broad
straight streets, crossing each other at right angles. One of these was the
street here mentioned, leading from the great square (the ἀγορά) up the
hill of Munychia; on which hill stood the temple of Artemis Munychia
and that of the Thracian Artemis (Bendis). [On many maps the relative
positions of Munychia and Piraeus are reversed, and Phalerum is wrongly
made one of the three harbors of the peninsula of Piraeus. ]

Page '78. — ἐγένοντο... ἀσπίδων, they formed [a body] not less than
Sifty shields in depth. — ἄνω, upwards, to Munychia.

12. ἀντανέπλησαν, i. 6. Thrasybulus and his men jilied the upper part
of the same street to oppose them. — ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς, behind them. — αὐτόθεν,
from that quarter. — ἐν ᾧ, while. — θέσθαι, to rest the shield on the ground.
— στάᾳ, taking his stand (not standing) : see G. 200, N. 5.

18. εἰσὶ τῶν προσιόντων, &c., there are among those who are advancing
against us (G. 169, 1), first, those on the right, whom, ἄς. — ἡμέραν wip-
πτην, five days ago (G. 161, N.). See Anab. 4, V. 24. — ἀπεσημαίνοντο,
marked for death: this word usually means fo put a seal on property taken
for confiscation (see above, II. 21, with note). — ov, where, explained in
the next section.

14. ἔχοντες ... καθέσταμεν, we stand in front of them, with arms in our
hands. — ὅτι . .. ξυνελαμβανόμεθα, because we were seized while dining, ὥς.
— ot δὲ καί, some of us also. — οὐχ ὅπως ἀδικοῦντες, not only when we were
guilty of no wrong : lit. not to speak of our being guilty of any wrong: in
full οὐ λέξω ὅπως (= ὡς) ἀδικοῦντες ἐφυγαδενόμεθα. --- χειμῶνα, &c., see
88 3 and 6 (above).

Page 79.— 15. ἐξιξόμεθα, v. ἐξικνέομαι : it governs the gen. by G.
171, 1.

16. ᾧετο ἄν tis, one might suppose (G. 226, 2). --- ἁμαρτήσεται, will
miss: the object αὐτῶν (antecedent of ὧν) is understood. — δραπετεύ-
covey, will skulk, a word used in contempt of fugitive slaves. — ἐναλλο-
μένους, leaping or rushing upon them, agrees with ἡμᾶς, the omitted sub-
ject of ἀνατρέπειν, instead of agreeing with ἡμῖν understood after ἐξέσται
(G. 138, Nn. 8).

17. ἕκαστός τις... dv, cach man shall be conscious to himself of being
the main cause of victory (G. 217). --- αὕτη, she, viz. vlan. — οἷς εἰσί, to
those who have them (G. 153, N. 1). — ἡμῶν, gen. part. after of. — ἐπίδωσι
(G. 232, 3), v. ἐφοράω. ---- μνημείον . . . τεύξεται, for none so rich, who shall
win so fair a sepulchre: the construction is idiomatic ; understand οὕτω
before καλοῦ. — ᾿Ἐννάλιον, the God of battles, a name of Ares (or Mars). —
ἀνθ’ ὧν ὑβρίσθημεν, in requital of the insults we have borne: the active
construction would be, ταῦτα ἡμᾶς ὑβρίζειν (G. 159, nN. 4; 158, N. 1).

44 XENOPHON.

18. ὁ μάντις : the article is used because the prophet or diviner had his
Official place in the host. — ἐπειδὰν. . . δοκεῖ, the words of the diviner.

19. τέθαπται, lies buried. — τῶν δέκα, chiefs of the force established by
the Thirty. — Χαρμίδης : he was an uncle of Plato, from whom one of
Plato's dialogues is named. — πολλοί, many (of both parties].

Page 80. --- 20. ὁ τῶν μυστῶν κῆρνξ, the herald of the [Eleusinian]
mysteries, belonging to one of the ancient priestly families. (See Eumol-
pidae in Smith's Dict. of Antiquities). — κατασιωπησάμενος, having pro-
claimed silence. — {vyxopevral, companions in the choral dance.

21. πρός, in the name of. — ὀλίγον δεῖν, almost (G. 268). — ἀπεκτόνα-
ow, v. ἀποκτείνω. --- μησίν͵ v. μήν. --- δέκα ἔτη, the last ten years of the
Peloponnesian war, the Decelean war.

22. τῶν ἀποθανόντων, part. gen. after ἔστιν οὔς. --- ἀλλὰ καὶ... κατε-
δακρύσαμεν, some of them we too greatly lamented. — οἱ λουποί, the survivors
of the Thirty.

23. ξννεκάθηντο, v. συγκάθημαι. --- διεφέροντο, disputed, wrangled. —
βιαιότερον (sc. τοῦ προσήκοντος), unusually or unduly violent.

Page 81. — τοῖς τριάκοντα, dat. after πείθεσθαι. --- τὸ τελευταῖον, final-
ly (ἃ. 160, 2). — ἐκείνους καταπαῦσαι, to depose them (the Thirty).

24. ᾿Ελευσῖνάδε (G. 61), see ὃ 8, above. — τῶν ἐν ἄστει, things in the
city (gen. following ἐπεμέλοντο). — ἐφωδεύοντο, patrolled. — τὸ μὲν ἀφ᾽
ἑσπέρας (G. 161), after dark. — τὸ δὲ πρὸς ὄρθρον, but towards morning,
an exception to the preceding statement.

25. οὕτινες, [to] whoever: understand an anteced. dat. after ἔσεσθαι,
depending on μεταδόντες, pledging their faith, that all who, dc. should
have equal rights. The direct discourse would be [πᾶσιν] οἵτινες ἂν ξυμ-
πολεμήσωσι, καὶ ἐὰν ξένοι ὦσιν, ἰσοτέλεια ἔσεται.

Many exiles came to their aid, others sent money or arms, — the orator
Lysias sending two hundred shields and two thousand drachmas in money,
and hiring, besides, 800 fresh soldiers ; there was one loan of five talents
in money ($5,000), afterwards repaid by the people.

26. ἔστιν ὅτε, at times. — λῃστὰς txapotvro, roughly handled foragers.
— Αἰξωνέων, men from Aexone, a town (or deme) on the coast of Attica.
— πολλῶν ἱππέων, i. 6. many of the men under Lysimachus.

27. τῶν ἱππέων, possessive gen. (sc. ὄντα) after Καλλίστρατον.

Page 82. — εἰ δὲ... δεῖ εἰπεῖν, if 7 may be permitted to speak: the
apodosis (ἐρῶ, 7 will speak) is omitted. — τοῦ μηχανοποιοῦ depends on
τοῦτο. --- κατὰ τὸν ἐκ Δυκείον δρόμον, over the race-course leading from the
Lyceum. The Lyceum was a gymnasium just outside of the city walls on
the east ; and it was used in the next century by Aristotle as his place of
instruction, as the Academy was used by Plato (see note on II. 8, above).

HELLENICA 2, rv. 45

For this reason the word is a familiar one in modern languages, though in
a somewhat different meaning. — ὅπον βούλοιτο (G. 248). — τοῦ δρόμον,
partitive gen. after Sxov. — πράγματα, trouble.

28. Sn... εἴη, that if was possible (not would be): the direct discourse
was οἷόν τέ ἐστιν... ἐὰν ἀποκλεισθώσιν (α΄. 223). — αὐτοῖς, the oligarch
at Athens.

29. μέγα ἐφρόνουν ἐπὶ τῷ Δυσάνδρῳ, were highly elated with hopes of
Lysander. — προχωρούντων (sc. τῶν πραγμάτων), when matters were thus
going on. — ed... ebSoxiphoo ... ποιήσοιτο (G. 248, 2; 226, N.). —
ἐξάγει, withdraws the Spartan garrison from Athens (see III. 13, above).

Lysander's selfish policy had already disgusted the general feeling of the
Greeks ; and a party in Sparta, jealous of his authority, were resolved that
he should not plant his own creatures a second time as rulers of Athens.
On his arrival at Athens, Pausanias was beset with prayers for protection
and redress by those who had suffered from the tyranny of the oligarchs,
which strongly inclined him to make terms with the patriot party.

30. ὅτι ἐγίγνωσκον, because they were of opinion: they suspected that
Pausanias meant to make Attica a separate province of Sparta (οἰκείαν καὶ
κιστήν). --- Αλιπέδῳ, the low land near Piraeus.

Page 88. — 31. ἐπὶ τὰ ἑανυτών, to their homes. — ὅσον ἀπὸ βοῆς ἕνεκεν,
only for appearance’ sake (lit. as far as shouting went, implying with no real
purpose). One preposition is superfluous, and the simpler ὅσον ἀπὸ βοῆς
is found in later Greek. — δῆλος . .. ov (G. 280, N. 1). — κωφὸν λιμένα,
the still harbor, probably the small cove west of the principal harbor of
Piraeus. — wh εὐαποτείχιστος, i. 6. where was the best line for blockading
the Piraeus (i. e. on the side towards Athens).

32. évévras (v. ἐνίημι), αὐ full speed, used intransitively. — τοὺς. ..
ἤβης, i. 6. those who had been ten years of the military age ; referring to
the civic ἐφηβία, which began in the eighteenth year.

33. ἐπὶ πόδα, backward (without turning). — of τεθαμμένοι (v. θάπτω)
ἐν Κεραμεικῷ, i. 6. whose graves are in the Ceramicus. The outer Cerami-
cus is described by Thucydides as ‘‘ the most beautiful suburb” of Athens.
It was northwest of the city, and the road to the Academy (see note on
11. § 8, above) passed through it. On this road (as on the Roman Via
Appia) were many monuments of illustrious men, especially of such as had
fallen in battle.

34. ἐπὶ ὀκτώ, cight deep. — ἐξεόσθησαν, v. ἐξωθέω. --- ἐν ταῖς ᾿Αλαῖς :
this must refer to the marshy district at the junction of Piraeus with the
mainland, not to either of the Attic demes called ᾿Αλαί.

Page 4. --- 35. οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even under these circumstances: & for
οὕτως is rare in Attic prose (G. 29, n.). — ola is object of λέγοντας, which
belongs to πρέσβεις. --- διίστη, divided (by making discord). ‘‘ It seems
plain that this is not a correct account. Pausanias did not create this dis-

46 XENOPHON.

cord, but found it already existing, and had to choose which of the parties
he would adopt. The peace-party was already uppermost in Athens, and
it was both easiest, and most for the Lacedaemonian interest, to follow the
course he did.” Grote.

36. νομίζεται, it is according to [Spartan] custom. — τῆφ γνώμης ὄντες,
being of the opinion.

37. ἀπὸ τοῦ κοινοῦ, i. 6. those representing the government, the Ten
(88 23, 24), the first embassy being sent by Pausanias. — χρῆσθαι ὅ τι
βούλονται, to deal with as they pleased (G. 248). — ἀξιοῦν, thought Jit.

38. ἔχειν (G. 267). — ἀπιέναι, &c., i. 6. no man should be molested for
past acts, except the Thirty, &c.

39. διῆκε (v. διίημι), disbanded.

Page 85.— 40. ἐκ τοῦ ἄστεος ἄνδρες, i. 6. those who had fought against
Thrasybulus. — γνῶναι ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, 0 come to know yourselves. — ἐπὶ τίνι
. «φρονητέον... ὥστε, on what ground you have a right to be (s0) pre-
suming, as, dc. — δικαιοσύνης οὐδὲν ὑμῖν προσήκει, i.e. you have no claim
on the score of justice.

41. 4 ds, than the manner in which. — of ye would naturally be the sub-
ject of οἴχονται, but it is disregarded after the clause ὥσπερ. .. wapa-
διδόασιν, and κἀκεῖνοι is introduced (by anacoluthon) after οὕτω. The sub-
ject of παραδιδόασιν is τινές understood. — ἀπιόντες (G. 279, 2, N.).

42. ὦ ἄνδρες : here he addresses his own followers, who had just taken
the oath in the Acropolis. — οὐ... ἀξιώ. .. παραβῆναι οὐδέν, 7 adjure you
not to violate any part of the oath which you have taken (ὧν οὐδέν = οὐδὲν
ἐκείνων &). Οὐκ ἀξιῶ sometimes means J ask some one not to do something
(like οὔ φημι, 1 deny): here οὐδέν (not μηδέν) merely repeats the negative
idea expressed in ob... ἀξιώ. --- ἐπιδεῖξαι depends on ἀξιῶ (without ot).

48. ἀρχάς, magistrates (authorities) : the chief Archon then chosen, the
Eponymus of the year 403 — 402, was Euclides, whose year is a famous era
in Athenian history. — τοὺς ἐν ᾿Εἰλευσῖνι : see § 24, above. — ἦ μήν, a
formula often prefixed to an oath. — μὴ μνησικακήσειν, not to remember
evil, i. 6. they declared an amnesty (a- and μνῆστιθ). A part of the oath
was as follows: καὶ od μνησικακήσω τῶν πόλιτῶν οὐδενὶ, πλὴν τῶν τριά-
κοντα καὶ τῶν ἕνδεκα. --- ὅμον πολιτεύονται, they conduct the government in
harmony, i. 6. the oligarchical party and the democracy.

After these events, Athens was still left comparatively weak, dis-
abled by the loss of her fortifications and of the long walls connect-
ing the city with the port, until the great naval victory of Conon at
Cnidus (Β. c. 394) enabled him to rebuild the walls, and restore to the
city something of its ancient glory and strength.

HELLENICA 7, v. 47

[Book VII.]

Tae peace of Antalcidas (s. ο. 387) had left Sparta still supreme
in Greece. But a few years later (B. 0. 379) the patriot party in
Thebes, by a fortunate surprise, expelled the Spartan garrison, and
made the city independent. Under Epaminondas, her one great gen-
eral and statesman, Thebes rapidly rose to power; and for nearly ten
years after the great victory of Leuctra (Β. o. 371) she held the first
rank among the Grecian states. In 369 B. o. Epaminondas invaded
the Peloponnesus, and established Arcadia as an independent power,
with a strong military frontier against Sparta. It was to secure this
that the second invasion was made, resulting in the battle of Manti-
nea, which closed the long period of the domestic wars of indepen-
dent Greece. The battle of Mantinea was fought in 362 Β. o.

Mantinea was a town about forty miles north of Sparta, and the
head-quarters of the Peloponnesian army. Tegea was about ten miles
farther south. Epaminondas had made a rapid march upon Sparta,
and had actually entered the outskirts of the city, which was without
walls; and, says Xenophon, “had not a Cretan providentially (βείᾳ
Twi μοίρᾳ) come and told Agesilaus that the army was at hand, he
would have taken the city, all defenceless, like a nest of young birds.
But Agesilaus was warned, and beforehand in the city; and the Spar-
tans, though very few, held their ground in good order.” At this
point the narrative begins.

V. 11. Page 86. — ἐπὲ ἐγένετο, after he had entered, 4c. — ταύτῃ,
antecedent of ὅπου. --- βληθήσεσθαι, to be hit with missiles. — οὐδ᾽ ὅπον...
πολλοὶ ὄντες, nor where they (the Thebans) being many would have no ad-
vantage in batile over the small number (of the enemy). — τοῦτο λαβὼν...
κατέβαινε, &c., i. 6. he took possession of this place (and held it until he was
driven from it, as is described in § 12), and descended to the low land, with-
out going up (farther) into the city. Sparta was built on a line of hills
along the right bank of the Eurotas. Epaminondas must have ascended
these hills to enter even the outskirts of the city ; and he was obliged to
descend to the bank of the river to take the road to Tegea and Mantinea.

12. τὸ ἐντεῦθεν γενόμενον, what ensued, accusative (G. 160, 1) for the
regular genitive (G. 173, 2): ἐντεῦθεν refers to χωρίον λαβών, not to κατέ-
Bae. - ἔξεστι, we may. — τοῖς ἀπονενοημένοις (G. 187), the desperate
(lit. those who have lost all thought, i. e. for life).— ᾿Αρχίδαμος, son of the
great king Agesilaus. —éwep . . . κώλυμα, i.e. dificult ground. — πῦρ
πνέοντες refers to the excitement of the Thebans on actually entering
Sparta.

13. περιεγέγραπτο, a Limit had been set (lit. a line had been drawn). —
αὐτοῖς, the Spartans (see beginning of § 12).

48 XENOPHON.

14. of ᾿Αρκάδες, i. 6. the Peloponnesian army at Mantinea. — ἄλλως τε
καί, especially. — εὐτυχηκόσι, victorious, in the conflict just narrated. —
τῶν δέ, &c., while they (the Thebans) had failed (G. 143, 1, N. 9). ---- δεηθεὶς.
αὐτῶν, urging them.

Page 82. — εἰκός, sc. εἴη or ἐστίν. --- ἔξω, abroad, exposed.

15. ἐξ ᾿Ελευσῖνος : they had accordingly marched between fifty and
sixty miles the first day ; and after passing the night at the Isthmus, they
had come nearly forty miles without food that day (ἀνάριστοι). --- ἐτύγ-
Xavoy προσιόντες, i. 6. they happened to arrive just as the Thebans were
coming up from Sparta.

16. ad, as well, i. 6. as that of the Spartans. — δυστυχήματος : the
Corinthians were at peace with Thebes, and probably inflicted some annoy-
ance on this hostile troop. — ὡς εἶδον : the Thebans were within a mile of
the town. — ovvéppafay (v. συρρήγνυμι), intransitive. — ἐρῶντες, eager.

17. αἴτιοι... σωθῆναι, ἐξ was through them that the Mantineans saved
all their out-door possessions. — ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί : among them was Gryllus,
son of Xenophon, who was represented in a picture made at the time in the
act of killing the Theban commander ; hence the story that in the battle
which followed he slew Epaminondas with his own hand. — δῆλον ὅτι
(sc. ἀπέκτειναν), manifestly, is parenthetical, as usual. — οὐ προήκαντο
(v. προίημι, G. 121, N. 2), i. 6; did not leave unburied. — ἣν οὕς (G. 152,
N. 2), some, imperfect of ἔστιν οἵ.

18. ᾿Επαμεινώνδας would naturally be subject of some verb meaning
thought : but after the long participial sentence, the construction changes
to core οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ. — εἰ δὲ καταλείψοι ols ἦλθε... . πολιορκήσοιντο :
the direct discourse would be εἰ καταλείψω οἷς ἦλθον (G. 247 with x. 2)
2+. πολιορκήσογται. — ἔσοιτο λυλυμασμένος represents ἔσομαι λελυμασμέ-
γος, I shall have been ruined, periphrastic fut. perf. of λυμαίνω (G. 98, 2, Ν.;
113, N. 2): the fut. perf. act. is generally formed in this way.

Page 88. — τοῦ συνεστάναι, of the alliance (between those mentioned).
— οὐκ... δυνατόν : as if he hud come with any other object than fighting.
-- ἀὀναλύσοιτο, would make good (properly, undo, cancel, hence, restore to the
Sormer condition) : see G. 199, 2. — πειρωμένῳ (sc. davrp), after καλήν.

19. dg... ἀποκάμναιν, so as to shrink from no labor (G. 266, N. 1).

20. os... ἐσομένης, because, as he said, there was to be a battle (G. 277,
N. 2; 278). — breypddovro... ῥόπαλα, probably, painted the figure of a
club (as the arms of Thebes, in memory of Hercules as a Theban hero) on
their shields, thus identifying themselves with the Thebans (ds Θηβαῖοι
ὄντες). There is equally good authority for reading ῥόπαλα ἔχοντες, which
would imply a sneer at the Arcadian ‘‘ heavy-infantry,” armed only with
clubs (see Grote’s note), and éreypddovro would then seem to mean, they
inscribed their shields (1) as if they were Thebans, i. 6. with the letter Θ,

HELLENICA 7, V. 49

21. τὴν συντομωτάτην (sc. ὁδόν), the directest way. — τὰ πρὸς lowlpay
ὄρη, the hills on the west are that part of the range of Maenalus which faces
Tegea. The great eastern plain of Arcadia, which is two thousand feet
above the sea and surrounded. by high mountains, may be compared in its
shape to an hour-glass, its two parts — the plain of Mantinea and the plain
of Tegea — being separated by a narrow passage about a mile wide. When
Epaminondas marched with the greater part of his army from Tegea (see
§ 14), instead of taking the direct road to Mantinea (ten miles distant), he
turned to the left, approaching the hills which enclose the plain of Tegea
on the northwest.

22. πρὸς τῷ Spa... ὑπὸ τοῖς ὑψηλοῖς refer to the part of Maenalus
which was near the narrow pass leading into the valley of Mantinea.

Page 89. — ἐπὶ κέρως, in column. — τὸ ἔμβολον, the attacking column:
ἔμβολον commonly means the pointed beak with which a ship makes an
attack (see § 23). This attack was made from the Theban left wing. —
πεισομένοις (sc. τισίν), men likely to suffer.

23. ἀντίπρῳρον, ‘buws on.” — τῷ ἰσχυροτάτω, i.e. the Thebans and
other Boeotians, under Epaminondas himself. — τὸ ἀσθενέστατον, i. e. the
Argives. — ὥσπερ ... βάθος, i. 6. ‘‘only with the ordinary depth of a
phalanx of hoplites (four, six, or perhaps eight deep).” Grote. — πεζῶν
ἁμίππων, infantry mixed with the cavalry, light-armed, and running beside
the horses.

24. γενικηκὼς ἔσεσθαι, fut. perf. (see note on § 18, above, and G. 98,
2, N.). — ἐπειδὰν... ὁρῶσι (G. 232, 3) refers to the fut. ἐθελήσοντας as
its apodosis: it might have been opt. (G. 248). — τὸ ἐχόμενον, the next
adjacent part of the army. — ds... ἐπικείσοιντο (G. 202, 4) depends as
indirect discourse on φόβον ; fear that these would attack them, for the
common construction, fear lest they might attack, φόβον μὴ ἐπικέοιντο.
See Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 46, N. 6 (a). —e βοηθήσαιεν represents
ἐὰν βοηθήσωσιν of the direct discourse (G. 247). — συμβολήν, the attack.

Page 90. — 25. φυγόντων αὐτοῖς, having taken fight for them -
(G. 184, 3), i. 6. when they had put them to flight. — διέπεσον, &c., they
slipped through the retreating enemy in their terror. — ἔπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου,
i. e. of the enemy.

‘‘The calculations of Epaminondas were completely realized. The
irresistible charge, both of infantry and cavalry, made by himself with his
left wing, not only defeated the troops immediately opposed, but caused
the enemy’s whole army to take flight. It was under these victorious
circumstances, and while he was pressing on the retiring enemy at the head
of his Theban column of infantry, that he received a mortal wound with a
spear in the breast.” Grote.

26. τοὐναντίον ov, the opposite of what (G. 158, N. 2).

27. οὐδὲν πλέον : the campaign of Mantinea, however, secured the
4

50 XENOPHON.

independence of the Arcadian allies of Thebes, and of the anti-Spartan
frontier, including Messene.

The death of Epaminondas — one of the purest of patriots, and the
most eminent military genius of Greece — was soon followed (361-360
B. 6.) by that of Agesilaus, the last of the kings who maintained the
ancient glory of Sparta. In the next year (860-359 B. c.) Philip of
Macedon ascended the throne, and the whole course of Greek history
was suddenly changed. The struggles for supremacy among the
Greek states gave way to a long and hopeless struggle for indepen-
dence, which ended in the fatal battle of Chaeronea (338 B. c.) and
the subjugation of Greece to Macedonia.

MEMORABILIA.

Tue trial and death of Socrates took place in the year Β. α. 399.
At this time Xenophon was still absent, on the expedition recorded
in the “ Anabasis.” Soon after his return to Athens, while his grief
and indignation were still fresh, he wrote that interesting defence of
his master’s reputation, and illustration of his manner of teaching,
given in the “ Memorabilia” (Afemorials). In this work he begins
with a full and distinct denial of the charges made at the trial, fol-
lowed by personal anecdotes of Socrates and specimens of his con-
versation. Xenophon is chiefly anxious to prove that he was a good
citizen, in religious belief as well as in way of life; while the later
accounts given by Plato in his dialogues show him much more clearly
as an original and independent thinker. Both agree in testifying the
highest veneration and the warmest personal regard.

Socrates was about seventy years old when brought to trial. He
had served the state as a soldier in several campaigns in the Pelo-
ponnesian war; and he once saved the life of Alcibiades— one ac-
count says, of Xenophon also—in battle. He also served as pre-
siding officer in the public assembly when the generals who had been
victorious at Arginusae (406 B. c.) were put on trial on the charge of
neglecting the shipwrecked and the dead after the battle; and the
cool determination of the old philosopher was never better shown
than by his stern refusal to put the question of condemnation to the
people in an illegal form. (See note on § 18, below.) He had also
incurred the hate and distrust of the Thirty Tyrants by resisting theit
tyranny; and the revolution under Thrasybulus saved his life from
their resentment,

MEMORABILIA 1, 1. 51

The general feeling against Socrates was part of the conservative
reaction after the democracy was restored. Twenty years before this
time Aristophanes had ridiculed him in the “Clouds,” as one of the
contemptible but dangerous innovators in morals and belief; and the
prejudice then so pointedly expressed seems to have been felt at the
time of his trial. For at least a quarter of a century he had been in
the habit of discussing with all sorts and conditions of men, in streets
and public walks or at private entertainments, in a manner very
pointed and free, on any question of opinion or practice that might come
up. In particular, he was unsparing in forcing his antagonists to
push their conclusions to absurd lengths, and driving them into a cor-
ner by his sharp questions. In this way he made some jealous and
bitter enemies. Besides, he had been intimate with several men after-
wards declared to be public enemies, — particularly Alcibiades, the
most dangerous of politicians, and Critias, chief of the Thirty Tyrants,
The formal charge against him was, that he did not acknowledge or
worship the Gods whom the city worshipped, but introduced new
divinities of his own; and that he corrupted the youth of Athens.
Each of these counts is distinctly met and replied to in this defence,
which gives us the most clear and interesting portrait that has been
left us of any of the remarkable men of antiquity. The portion here
given is the first chapter of the first book, with the closing paragraph
of the work.

I. 1. τίσι λόγοις, by what reasonings (G. 149, 2). — ol γραψάμενοι,
those who made the charge. The middle γράφεσθαι in Attic commonly
means to indict. The accusers of Socrates were Meletus, a poet of poor
reputation ; Anytus, a wealthy tradesman, who resented the influence of
Socrates to draw his son from his own trade of tanner ; and Lycon, a pop-
ular orator and demagogue. Meletus is said to have been put to death,
_ and the others banished, a few years later, when the people repented of
their judgment. — ἡ γραφή, the bill of indictment. — τῇ πόλει (G. 184, 3).

Page 91. — οὕς... νομίζει, not regarding as Gods those whom the city so
regards. See note on Anab. 4, II. 28.

2. ὡς ἐνόμιζεν depends on the verbal noun τεκμηρίῳ. --- μαντικῇ, divina-
tion. — διετεθρύλητο, it was notorious. — τὸ δαιμόνιον, the divinity: the
daemon of Socrates, as he believed, manifested itself by signs or indica-
tions, never urging him to any act, but constantly warning him against
things wrong or dangerous. — ὅθεν δή, on which very ground, indeed.

3. τῶν ἄλλων, than others [do]. — φήμαις, omens from words ; συμβό-
λοις, from signs or accidents ; θυσίαις, from sacrifices.

4. ξυνόντων, associates. — ὡς, on the ground that (G. 277, n. 2). — rots
... συνέφερε, to those persuaded by him, it was an aac _ (α. 288,
4). --- μετέμελε, repented (G. 184, 2, Ν. 1). ΝΣ

52 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ.

5. ἐδόκει dv, he would have seemed, supply εἶναι, The imperfects here
and in the next sentence refer to past time (G. 222). — εἶτα, then, after all
this. — ταῦτα, i. 6. as to the future.

6. ἀλλὰ μήν, but moreover. — τάδε, the following (see G. 148, n. 1). —
τὰ ἀναγκαῖα, things which must be done, opposed to τὰ ἄδηλα in the next
clause. — καὶ πράττειν : the force of καί would: be plainer here if otras
preceded, as he believed, d:c., so also to do them.

Page 92. -- ἄριστ᾽ ἂν πραχθῆναι = ἄριστ᾽ ἂν πραχθείη (G. 211). ---
ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο, indirect question for πῶς ἀποβήσεται ; — εἰ ποιητέα
(sc. ἐστίν or εἴη), whether they (i. 6. τὰ ἄδηλα) were to be done (G. 281, 1).

7. προσδεῖσθαι, needed besides. — rextovixdy, &c. (pred. after γενέσθαι),
capable of building, dc. — ἀνθρώπων, gen. after ἀρχικόν, able to govern men
(G. 180, 1).—wavra... μαθήματα repeats the preceding idea, τεκτονικὸν
. oo γενέσθαι. --- καὶ ἀνθρώπον γνώμῃ αἱρετέα εἶναι, could be grasped even by
the mind of man, i. e. by man’s mind without divine help. The clause
τεκτονικὸν μέν, &c. refers to the mere acquisition of these arts, as opposed
to τὰ δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν τούτοις, which follows..

8, καταλείπεσθαι, reserved. — ὧν οὐδὲν εἶναι (for εἴη or ἐστί), by assimi-
lation to καταλείπεσθαι (G. 260, 2, Ν. 2). --τῷ.... λαβόντι, to him who
has gained powerful connections by marriage in the state. — εἰ. » στερήσε-
rot, i. 6. whether he will not be banished for being thus connected, in
case of political troubles.

9. δαιμονᾶν : notice the play upon this word and δαιμόνιον. --- pavrevo-
μένους. .. διακρίνειν, who seck by divination [to know] what the Gods have
granted to men to understand by learning. — οἷον, for example.— ἔπί ζεῦγος,
i.e. for taking charge of a team. — τὴν ναῦν, his ship. —@ ἔξεστιν... εἰδέ-
vat, what may be known by counting, dc. — ols (G. 152). — ὦσιν (G. 247
and 233). — Crew, propitious (G. 64).

Page 98. - 10. περιπάτους, porches or public walks. — πληθούσης dyo-
pas, at the time of full market, towards noon (G. 179, 1). — ἔλεγε ὡς τὸ
πολύ, he was generally talking.

11. Σωκράτους, gen. after both εἶδεν and ἤκουσεν, by zeugma, taking the
case required by ἤκουσεν. --- τῆς τῶν πάντων φύσεως, aboul the nature of
the universe, — Sag... ἔχει, how what sophists call the World (lit. Order)
ὦ constituted. The sophists were professional teachers of rhetoric, philos-
ophy, &c., whom it was the special delight of Socrates to convict of igno-
rance in what they assumed to teach. — ἀνάγκαις, necessary laws. — μωραί-
vevras (G. 280).

12. πρῶτον μέν : this corresponds to ἐσκόπει δέ in § 15. — αὐτῶν ἐσκό-

"wer, he used to inquire, in regard to them, d-c.: αὐτῶν is a possessive gen.
(G. 167, 1), depending on the following clause as on a substantive ;
cf. σκοπεῖν αὐτῶν τόδε, to examine this in (or about) them. In § 15 we
have ἐσκόπει περὶ αὐτῶν. --- πότερα... 4 (G. 282, 5). — παρέντες (v. πα-
ρίημι), neglecting.

MEMORABILIA 1, I. 53

13. ἐθαύμαζε εἰ, he wondered that (G. 228), not he wondered whether.
On the principle of indirect discourse we might have had εἰ εἴη here
(Ὁ. 248, examples under 2). — τοὺς μέγιστα φρονοῦντας ἐπί, those who take
most pride in. — δοξάζειν depends on ἔφη implied in ἐθαύμαζε : see, how-
ever, § 8, above. — rots porvopévors... διακεῖσθαι, i. 6. their relation to
each other is like that of madmen (G. 186).

14. τῶν... μαινομένων τοὺς μέν, for of madmen, some, dc. (G. 143, 1).
— οὐδ᾽. .. εἶναι, not to seem disgraceful, &c., even in public, — ὁτιοῦν,
anything whatever: a relative becomes an indefinite by the addition of -ody.
— ἐξιτητέον εἶναι (= ἐξιέναι δεῖν), that they ought to cume out (G. 281, 2).
— τὰ τυχόντα, which they may chance to find, i. e. accidental. — τῶν te...
μεριμνώντων, part. gen. (corresponding to τῶν τε μαινομένων, above)
depending on rots μέν and rots δέ, which is twice repeated. — ἕν μόνον τὸ
ὄν εἶναι, that all Being (τὸ ὄν) ts but one. — ἄπειρα, pred. after εἶναι,
referring to τὸ ὄν, i. ὁ. that Being has countless forms. — οὐδὲν ἄν ποτε
κινηθῆναι, that nothing could under any circumstances (word) be moved (or
move): the direct form would be οὐδὲν ἄν ποτε κινηθείη (G. 211). This
refers to the paradox of Zeno the Eleatic (460 B. c.), which attempted to
show the impossibility of motion. — γίγνεσθαί re καὶ ἀπόλλυσθαι, referring
to the doctrine that all things are generated (or created) and are (in time)
destroyed, as opposed to the doctrine that there can be neither generation
nor decay in the universe. — ot’... ἀπολέσθαι, = οὔτ᾽ ἂν γένοιτο. ..
οὔτ᾽ (av) ἀπόλοιτο (G. 212, 4). Socrates compares these opposing doc-
trines of the physical philosophers with the different opinions held by dif-
ferent madmen on the matters mentioned in the beginning of the section.

Page 94. — 15. dpa introduces a direct question (G. 282, 2): a second
part of the same question is introduced by 4. In the former part, the lead-
ing clause is οἱ. . . νομίζουσιν. --- ποιήσειν ὅ τι ἂν μάθωσιν, that they ure
to practise (do) whatever they have learnt ; but ποιήσειν ἀνέμους, &c., that
they are to create winds, dc. — ἦ, how (as indir. interrogative).

16. τοιαῦτα, i. e. as above. — & is object of both εἰδότας and ἀγνοοῦντας,
as is shown by the position of μέν and 84. — δικαίως ἂν κεκλῆσθαι (= Ke-
κλημένοι ἂν elev), would justly be called (G. 211, and 200, N. 6).

17. εἰ μὴ τούτων ἐνεθυμήθησαν, that they paid no regard to these
(G. 171, 2). See § 18 above.

18. βουλεύσας, chosen senator (G. 200, N. 5), equivalent to βουλευτὴς
γενόμενος. The Senate (βουλή) of Five Hundred was chosen annually by
lot, and contained fifty members from each of the ten Attic tribes. Each
set of fifty were called Prytanes (πρντάνεις) during a tenth part of the year
(called πρντανεία) ; and it was then their duty to remain through the
whole day in the Tholos (or Rotunda, near the Senate House), where their
meals were provided them at the public expense. Every morning they
chose one of their own number to be the Epistates, or President of the day,
who (besides other duties) presided at any meeting of either the Senate or

54 PLATO.

the Assembly of the people which was held on that day. The Assembly
met regularly on four days in each prytany,; on other days, except holi-
days, the Senate met.* It thus appears how Socrates, by being chosen
senator for the year, happened to be the presiding officer in the Assembly
(ἐπιστάτης ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γενόμενος) on the day in question. It was the
memorable day (in 406 B. c.) when the generals who had gained the naval
battle of Arginusae were tried and condemned by the Athenian Assembly
acting as a court. (See Grote, Chap. LXIV. ; and note on Hell. 2, III.
32, above.) — ἦν... βουλεύσειν : one of the clauses in the senatorial oath
was κατὰ τοὺς νόμους βουλεύσω, J will act as a senator in accordance with
the laws. — μιᾷ ψήφῳ, by a single vote: the illegality against which Socra-
tes protested was chiefly (if not wholly) that of condemning several per-
sons by one decree. When Socrates refused to bring the illegal proposi-
tion (which had already passed the Senate) before the Assembly (ἐπέψη-
φίσαι), it seems that the other Prytanes interfered and appointed some
less scrupulous member of their body to act as president. — περὶ πλείονος,
of greater account.

19. οὐχ ὃν τρόπον, not, however, as (G. 160, 2, and 154).

Page 93. — 20. rovatra...ola τις av... εἴη, such, thal any one say-
ing and doing them would be, &c.: ἄν belongs to both εἴη and νομίζοιτο
(6. 212, 4), and λέγων καὶ πράττων contains the protasis, = εἰ λέγοι καὶ
πράττοι (G. 226, 1).

IV. Cuap. VIII. —11. Σωκράτην... οἷος ἦν, accus. of anticipation :
ef. Mark i. 24, οἶδά σε τίς εἶ, ‘“‘I know thee who thou art.” — ol ἀρετῆς
ἐφιέμενοι is limited by τῶν γιγνωσκόντων. --- ποθοῦντες (G. 279, 2, N.). —
ὡς ὄντα (G. 277, N. 2). — ἐμοί, dat. after ἐδόκει (in the tenth line below).
—ovres is understood with δίκαιος, ἐγκρατής, &c. — παραβάλλων ...
κρινέτω, let him compare the character of some other man with these (i. 6. the
qualities just mentioned) and then (otras) judge.

PLATO.—1. Apowoey.

The “ Apology” of Plato probably contains very nearly the actual
defence spoken by Socrates before his judges. It is not a formal re-
ply to the indictment, but a protest against the falsehood of the charge

* In the following century, in the time of Demosthenes, we find a different
system, by which the Epistates chose by lot nine senators daily, one from each
of the tribes except his own, who were called eres and presided (as a board)
in both Senate and Assembly. .

APOLOGY. 55

in general.* Socrates claims that, so far from being a disbeliever in
the Gods, he was fulfilling an express divine commission in instructing
his fellow-citizens; nay, if his life should be spared on condition of
refraining, he could not so disobey the command of the divinity. The
Delphie oracle had pronounced that there was no wiser man than he.
Astonished at this, he had tried to satisfy himself what it meant;
until he learned that his wisdom consisted in knowing his own igno-
rance, and in the wish to learn. He had never professed to be a
teacher; he had no part in the opinion of such natural philosophers
as Anaxagoras; he had never received pay for his teaching, like the
“Sophists’; he had done the duties of a good soldier and citizen, in
the face of danger and public prejudice; he could have had no motive
—as he shows in a brief dialogue with his principal accuser, Meletus
—to mislead or injure any of the young men who came under his in-
fluence. These are the main points of this celebrated Defence, which
he closes by distinctly, even haughtily, refusing any appeal to the
compassion of his judges to violate their oath requiring an honest
verdict, for this would be practical atheism; and by “leaving it to
them and to God to judge concerning him, as should be best both for
him and them.” :

The Defence, thus far, occupies about three fourths of the “Apol-
ogy.” When it was closed, Socrates was declared guilty by a ma-
jority of about 60 out of 501 votes. The penalty proposed by his
prosecutors was death. But, in the class of trials to which this be-
longed, the defendant was called on to propose a penalty for himself,
the court appearing to be bound by custom, if not by law, to choose
between the penalties thus proposed. If Socrates had now proposed
8 sentence which the court had been likely to accept, his life would
doubtless have been spared. Instead of this, he first proposed a pub-
lic maintenance in the Prytaneum, —the city hall, where the hospi-
talities of the state were given to foreign ambassadors and other pub-
lic guests, and where certain private citizens, as a reward for special
services, were allowed to take their meals at the public table, —the
highest civil honor which could be paid. He next declared that a
life spent in exile, or under restraint of free speech, would be more
intolerable than death; and finally proposed, as a money fine, one ©
mina (about seventeen dollars), which, at his friends’ suggestion, he
increased to thirty minae. Upon this, the vote of the court was again
taken, and the death penalty was decreed by a majority which (ac-

_* The genuine indictment is given by Xenophon in the first section of the
Memorabilia. See page 91.

56 PLATO.

cording to one account) was larger by eighty votes than that by
which he was found guilty at first.

The portion of the Apology here given contains the last words of
Socrates before his judges, spoken after the sentence of death had
been pronounced.

Page 96.— 1. od... χρόνον, for the sake of no long time, since Socra-
tes was now an old man. — 6s... ἀπεκτόνατε, indirect discourse after the
idea of saying implied in ὄνομα ἕξετε καὶ αἰτίαν. --- ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, of
itself. — πόρρω τοῦ βίον, advanced in life (G. 168) : his age is said to be
advanced, and near death. — ἐμοῦ... θάνατον (G. 173, 2, N.).

2. ἀπορίᾳ.... τοιούτων, have been condemned through lack of such words,
dc. — π᾿οολλοῦ ye δεῖ, not at all. — τοῦ ἐθέλειν, one of the genitives depend-
ing on ἀπορίᾳ. --- ἀκούειν (G. 261, 2). --- θρηνοῦντος, &c. (G. 277, 6):
these words explain λέγειν, &c.

3. τότε, then, in making my defence. — ἀνελεύθερον, slavish (unworthy
of a freeman). — ἀπολογησαμένῳ (G. 277, 2; 184, 2, N. 1). — ἐκείνως, 80,
i. 6. by an unworthy defence. — ὅπως ἀποφεύξεται (G. 217). — πᾶν ποιών,
by any and every means. — ἀφείς (G. 277, 2).

Page 97. — 4. μὴ od F (G. 218, ν. 3). --- πονηρίαν, sc. ἐκ ._—
Oarrov... θεῖ, baseness runs faster than death. — ἅτε ὦν, as being (G. 277,
N. 2). — ὑπὸ rod Bpaburépou ἑάλων, 7 have been (was) overtaken by the
slower (Death). — ὀφλών, convicted (v. ὀφλισκάνω) : lit. failing in a suit,
and so condemned to pay the debt or penalty ; here, death (Gavdrov). We
find ὀφλεῖν ζημίαν, to incur a penalty; ὀφλεῖν χρήματα, to incur a fine
(as ὦφλε χιλίας δραχμάς, in the former part of the defence) ; ὀφλεῖν κλο-
ais δίκην (also ὀφλεῖν κλοπῆς), fo be convicted on a charge of theft; ὀφλεῖν
γέλωτα, αἰσχύνην, to incur laughter, disgrace; ὀφλεῖν μωρίαν, tu incur the
charge of folly: so ὠφληκότος μοχθηρίαν, below. — τῷ τιμήματι, the sen-
tence (the result of τίμησις, which is the act of settling the amount or kind
of penalty). — οὕτω σχεῖν, to come out thus, — μετρίως, well enough.

5. χρησμῳδῆσαι, fo utter my oracle. — ὅταν μέλλωσιν ἀποθανεῖσθαι
(G. 202, 8, N.), depending on χρησμωδοῦσιν, where we should expect
a phrase meaning simply at the point of death, explaining ἐνταῦθα. --- οἵαν
(sc. τιμωρίαν) is cognate accus. after dwexrévare, such punishment as you
have inflicted in condemning me to death. — τοῦ διδόναι (G. 262, 2). — τὸ
δέ, but the fact (G. 143, 1, N. 2).

6. ἀποκτείνοντες (G. 138, Ν. 8). --- τοῦ ὀνειδίζειν (G. 263, 1). — ὑμῖν
(G. 184, 2). --- ob... οὔτε... οὔτε (G. 283, 8). — ὅπως ἔσται (G. 217).

Page 98.—7. ἐν ᾧ.... ἄγουσι, while the officers are busy. — ol, whither,
i. 6. to the prison. — διαμνθολογῆσαι, to have a talk ; opposed to the formal
judicial arguments which had preceded. — τί wore νοεῖ, what ἐξ means.

8. δικασταί : his address before had been “ Athenians”; to those who
voted justly he now speaks as ‘‘ Judges.” — elwOvta (v. ἔθω), accustomed. —
τοῦ δαιμονίον : Socrates believed that there was a divine voice within him

APOLOGY. 57

(δαιμόνιόν τι), which often warned him noéf to do certain things, but never
urged him to any positive act. — πάνυ ἐπὶ σμικροῖς, in very little things.
— ε τι μέλλοιμι (G. 225). — οἰηθεέη ἄν rie, one might think. — καὶ vopl-
ζεται, and (what) is generally thought, & (as nom.) being understood.

9. λέγοντα μεταξύ (G. 277, N. 1).

10. κινδυνεύει... γεγονέναι, seems likely to be (lit. runs a risk of being).
Plato uses κινδυνεύω nearly in the sense of δοκέω, so that the infin. after it
stands in indirect discourse (G. 203), as here. — οὐις ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, 2 is not
( possible) that, dc.

11. δνοῖν θάτερον, one of two things. — οἷον μηδὲν εἶναι, (such) as to be
nothing (i. 6. like annihilation). — τὰ λεγόμενα, the common saying.

Page 99. — 12. μηδ᾽ ὄναρ μηδέν, not even any dream. — ἐπειδὰν...
ὁρᾷ depends on ἐστί understood with ὕπνος (G. 233). For the whole sen-
tence, see G. 227, 1. — ἐγὼ yap ἂν οἶμαι : the force of ἄν falls upon εὑρεῖν,
several lines below, where it is twice repeated (G. 212, 2): οἶμαι is also
repeated after the long protasis, and δέοι is repeated before σκεψάμενον. ---
The sentence reads, 7 think, tf one were obliged to select that night in which
he sicpt so soundly as to have no dream at all, and, comparing with that
night the other nights and days of his life, were obliged to examine and say
how many days and nights in his life he had lived better than that night,
(7 think) not only any private person, but the great King would himself find
these easy to count (i. 6. very few), compared with his other days and nights.
The eonditional sentence (without οἶμαι) would be: εἰ δέοι iva... εἰπεῖν,
εὕροι ἅν. μὴ ὅτι is elliptical for μὴ λέγωμεν ὅτι (let us not say that, &c.),
not to speak of, i. 6. not merely ; it is often used, as here, where ὅτι forms
no part of the construction of the sentence, and where the origin of the
expression was probably not thought of.

13. οὐδὲν πλείων, no longer. — εἰ δ᾽ αὖ, but if, on the other hand. — οἷον
ἀποδημῆσαι, like a migration,

14. “Αἰδου (sc. δῶμα), the (realm) of Death, or Hades. For the proper
names which follow, see a classical dictionary ; Triptolemus was not usually
counted one of the judges in Hades, and Socrates probably follows some
local Attic myth. — ἐγένοντο, proved themselves. — ἐπὶ πόσῳ, at what
price ἢ

15. ἔμοιγε καὶ αὐτῷ, fo myself also. — ὁπότε évrbyoun, when I should
meet (G. 232, 4), like εἴ wore εὐτύχοιμι. --- διὰ κρίσιν ἄδικον, in consequence
of an unjust judgment : referring to the contest for the armor of Achilles
between Odysseus and Ajax, after which the defeated Ajax killed himself ;
this is the subject of the Ajax of Sophocles. — ἐξετάζοντα : Socrates de-
lights in the thought that he can go on examining and cross-questioning
and exposing false pretensions to wisdom in Hades, as he had done in
Athens.

Page 100.— 16. rdw... ἀγαγόντα, i.e. Agamemnon. --- ἢ Σίσυφον,
4 == ἄλλονς μυρίους (as the sentence might be written): instead of con-

58 PLATO.

tinuing the question by adding other names, he changes the form of the
sentence, and adds, one might mention ten thousand others, dc. — ols is the
object of ἐξετάζειν only by zeugma. — ἀμήχανον εὐδαιμονίας, a vast amount
of joy. — ot ἐκεῖ, i. 6. those who dwell below. — τούτου ἕνεκα, i. 6. especially
τοῦ ἐξετάζειν, for which Socrates implies that he is to suffer death.

17. οὔτε... τελευτήσαντι, either during life (pres.) or after death
(aor.). — ἀπὸ τοῦ atropdrov, of its own accord, i.e. by chance. — aarndAdy bar
πραγμάτων, to be free (lit. to have been freed, G. 202, 2) from troubles. —
τὸ σημεῖον, the divine sign, the same as τὸ δαιμόνιον. --- rots κατηγόροις
(G. 184, 2). — οἰόμενοι βλάπτειν, thinking that they were doing me an in-
jury (G. 203). — τοῦτο αὐτοῖς μέμφεσθαι : τοῦτο is cognate acc.; for at-
τοῖς, see G. 184, 2. μέμφομαι sometimes takes the simple object-accusative.

18. δέομαι (G.172, n.1). — τιμωρήσασθε, take your vengeance on. — ταὐτὰ
ταῦτα λυποῦντες; vexing them in this same way (G. 159, N. 4). --- ἐὰν... ὄντα,
tf they think themselves to be something when they are nothing. — ὀνειδίζετε
αὐτοῖς (G. 184, 2). — ὧν Set, sc. ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. --- οὐδενός : compare this use
of οὐδέν in a causal sentence with μηδὲν ὄντες in the conditional sentence
above (see G. 288, 1 and 2). — δίκαια πεπονθὼς ἔσομαι, 7 shall have been
justly treated (G. 98, 2, N.). — αὐτός τε καὶ of υἱεῖς, both myself and my
sons ; apposition, as if the latter were included in éyé. — dpa ἀπιέναι, time
to depart (G. 261, 1, N.).

The circumstances of the imprisonment of Socrates, and the occa-
sion of the long delay in the execution of his sentence, are given in
the extract from the “ Phaedo” which follows.

2. PHAeEpDO.

Durine his thirty days’ confinement, Socrates was freely visited by
his friends in prison. As the time of his execution drew near, they
were anxious for his escape; and one of them, Crito, a man of wealth,
and near his own age, had prepared a plan of rescue, with the con-
nivance of the friendly jailer. Socrates, however, refused to avoid
his fate, on the ground that the highest duty of a citizen, especially
in a free state, is absolute obedience to the laws, accepting his sen-
tence as the voice of the State itself,— which he sets forth in the
brief dialogue called ‘“Crito.” On the morning of the day of execu-
tion, several of his friends gathered in his prison, — among them
Phaedo, who afterwards tells his friend Echecrates and others the oc-
currences of the day in the Dialogue bearing his name. Much the
largest part of it is taken up with discussing the views of Socrates
- On the nature and immortality of the soul. The. portion here given

PHAEDO. 59

is the introductory narrative, and the conclusion, containing that story
of his last hours, “‘ which,” says Cicero, “I often read with tears.” *

The dialogue between Phaedo and Echecrates is supposed to take
place at Phlius in Peloponnesus, the home of Echecrates.

Page ROH.—1. ἢ... ἤκουσας ; or did you hear it from some one
else ?— αὐτός : Phaedo was a citizen of Elis, a disciple of Socrates, and
afterwards the head of a philosophical school in his native place. — τῶν
πολιτῶν Φλιασίων οὐδείς, no one of the citizens — Phliasians: the posi-
tion of Φλιασίων shows that it is not a mere adjective. — ἐπιχωριάζει
᾿Αθήναζε, ever goes to Athens to live at all (wavv τι).

2. ἐστεμμένη, v. στέφω, wreathed with laurel, which was sacred to
Apollo. — πέμπουσι, send in state, i. 6. every year. — θεωρία, a sacred
embassy.

3. τοὺς δὶς Sra ἐκείνους, the well-known fourteen, i. e. the seven virgins
and seven youths whom the Athenians were obliged to send once in nine
years to Minos of Crete, to be devoured bythe Minotaur in the Labyrinth.
The sacred trireme, the Delias, which carried the deputation to Delos, was
believed to be the same vessel which carried Theseus to Crete. For the
account of the voyage of Theseus, the death of the Minotaur, and the
escape of Theseus with the victims by the help of Ariadne, see a classical
dictionary under Theseus, and Plutarch’s Life of Theseus, § 15. — εἰ σω-
Octey... ἀπάξειν (G. 247). — καὶ νῦν ἔτι : “the custom was continued,”
says Plutarch, ‘‘to the time of Demetrius Phalereus,” i. 6. till about
B. 0. 300. — ἐπειδὰν ἄρξωνται (G. 233). — μηδένα... πρὶν ἄν (G. 240).

Page 102. — τύχωσιν ἀπολαβόντες, happen to hinder them (G. 279, 2):
compare ἔτυχεν... γεγονός (below), happened to have been done (perf.).

4. τὸ μεμνῆσθαι, to commemorate, i. 6. in conversation, as he explains it
in αὐτὸν (sc. ἐμὲ) λέγοντα καὶ ἄλλον ἀκούοντα. ---- ὡς ἂν δύνῃ (G. 232, 3)
ἀκριβέστατα, as accurately as you can: by omitting ἂν δύνῃ, we have the
usual form ὡς ἀκριβέστατα (see ὡς σαφέστατα, above).

5. θαυμάσια ἔπαθον, 7 was marvelously affected. — ἔλεος εἰσήει, did pity
enter [my mind]. — τοῦ τρόπου καὶ τῶν λόγων, causal gen. after εὐδαίμων
(6. 173, 1). — ds (= ὅτι οὕτως), i. 6. he did so fearlessly, dc. (G. 238). —
ὥστε. .. παρίστασθαι, 80 that it came into my mind, that he, dc. — ἰέναι
and πράξειν are both futures after παρίστασθαι (G. 203). — ἄνευ θείας μοί-
pas, 1. 6. wuared for by the Gods. — εἰκὸς παρόντι πένθει, natural to one
present at suffering. — ἡδονή, sc. εἰσήει. --- ὡς . . . ὄντων, i.e. from the
thought that we were engaged in philosophical discussion (G. 277, N. 2). —
τοιοῦτοί tives, on some such subject (i. e. as philosophy). — ἀτεχνῶς, abso-
lutely or simply.

- * Cuius morti illacrimari soleo, Platonem legens. Nat. Deor. III. 83

60 PLATO.

Page 103. — ἐνθυμουμένῳ, agreeing with μοι, when I reflected. <— δτὰ
μὲν... ἐνίοτε δέ, at one time, and at another : notice the accent of ὁτέ (not
ὅτε) when it has this sense. —’AwodNdSwpos : he was a man of melancholy
and excitable temper, sometimes called the fanatic. Among those men-
tioned as present at the death of Socrates are Antisthenes, the founder of
the Cynics; Aristippus, the founder of the Cyrenaic school ; and Euclides,
the founder of the Megaric school of philosophy.

6. Αἰγίνῃ, in Aegina (G. 190, N.). — σχέδον τι... παρᾳγενέσθαι, J am
very sure that these made up the company.

7. Gos ἀνοιχθείη (G. 239, 2): see ἐπειδὴ ἀνοιχθείη, below.

Page 804. — 8. εἶπε περιμένειν (G. 260, 2, N. 1), he bade us wait (ἔφη
περιμένειν would mean he said he was waiting). —tws dv... κελεύσῃ, until
he should himself give us orders : ἕως... κελεύσειε might have been used.
after the past tense (G. 248). — λύουσι : from this it appears that Socrates
had been kept chained. — παραγγέλλουσιν, they are giving him directions. .
-— ὅπως ἄν (G. 216, 1, N. 2). — εἰσιόντες, as we entered. — Ἐᾳνθίππη, the
well-known termagant wife of Socrates. — dvevpfpnoe, uitered cries of
lamentation, such as were held to be of bad omen: the word is taken, as
similar words often were, in the opposite of its proper sense. Thus the deft,
which was ill-omened, was called φὐώννμον, good-omened. — ὅτι before a
direct quotation (G. 241, 1). — τῶν τοῦ Κρίτωνος, of Crito’s attendanis.

9. ds... εἶναι, how curiously it és related to what seeme its opposite. —
τῷ... . παραγίγνεσθαι, that they will not come to a man together: te be-
longs also to ἀναγκάζεσθαι (G. 262, 2). — συνημμένω (v. συνάπτω), i. 6.
atiached to one head. — δύ᾽ ὄντε, while they. are two. — μᾶθον av συγνθεῖνμᾳ,
(= μῦθον ἂν συνέθη), he would have composed a fable (G. 211).

Page 105. — ᾧ ἂν παραγένηται (G. 233). — ὥσπερ... ἔοικεν, as then
7 too believe (i. 6. 1, as Aesop would have done). — ὑπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ, on
account of the chain. — ἥκειν φαίνεται, appears to have come: φαίνομαι
generally takes the participle.

10. ἀναμνήσας : for the peculiar use of the aorist partic., see G. 204, N. 2.
— ἐντείνας (τόνος), versifying. —7d... προοίμιον, the proemtum (or hymn
used at the beginning of a festival) in honor of Apolio: the Homeric Hymn
to Apollo is an example of such a poem. —xal ἄλλοι... ηνός, not only
had certain others previously asked me, but also Euenus, dc. — 5 τι διανοη-
θείς, with what intention. —cvo μέλει τοῦ ἔχειν (G. 184, 2, N. 1). — ἐμέ is
subject of ἔχειν.

11. ἀντίτεχνος, rival. — τί λέγει, (to see) what they meant. — ἄφοσιού-
μενος. .. ποιεῖν, clearing my conscience in case they (the dreams) should per-
chance command me to compose music of this kind (G. 248, 2). — ἄλλοτ᾽ ἐν
ἄλλῃ Spa, at different times in different shapes.

12. αὐτό, it, i. 6. the vision, subject of ταρακελεύεσθαι (to urge one to
the act) and ἐπικελεύειν (to cheer one in-the act). — vote θέονσι, runners in
& race. ~~ καὶ ἐμοὶ... ἐπικελεύειν : supply ὑπελάμβανον from the preceding

PHAEDO. 61

clause : ἐμοί follows ἐπικελεύειν. --- ὡς... οὔσης (GC. 277, Ν. 2): this con-
tains the ground on which the vision urged Socrates. — μεγίστης μονσικῆς,
the highest form of music, i. e. music in its wide Greek sense, including all
literature and accomplishments. — τοῦτο πράττοντος, making this (philos-
ophy) my business: cf. Lat. hoc agere and aliud agere. — τρὶν ἀφοσιώσα-
σθαι, before performing my pious duty, = ὅσια ποιῆσαι : πρίν here takes
the infinitive, when it might have taken the subjunctive or optative as de-
pending on a negative sentence (G. 240, 2).

Page 106. — ποιήσαντα and πειθόμενον denote the means.

13. μύθους ἀλλ᾽ οὐ λόγους, fables, but not [mere] narratives: here μῦθος
has its special sense of fables, and λόγοι its wider sense of narratives, while
above (8 10) Aesap’s fables are called by Cebes by the more general name
of λόγοι. ---- οὐκ 4 (sc. ἐγώ) represents the same in the direct discourse
(α. 243, N. 1). — τούτους ἐποίησα, J put these into verse. — οἷς πρώτοις ἐνέ-
_ teyov, the first which I came upon (for τοὺς πρώτους ols évérvyov), added
as further explanation of τούτους, to which the principal relative clause οὖς
..«. Αἰσώπου also belongs. — ταῦτα φράζε καὶ ἐρρῶσθαι, fell him this, and
also (bid him) farewell.

14. οἷον is exclamatory (6. 155). — ἑκὼν εἶναι, a peculiar phrase in
which εἶναι seems superfluous, meaning willingly (G. 268, N.). —8rw...
μέτεστιν, who worthily shares in this thing (philosophy). — βιάσεται αὗτόν,
i. e. by committing suicide: the first part of the following discussion (here
omitted) refers to suicide, against which the authority of Philolaus (a cele-
brated Pythagorean) is quoted.

15. ἅμα λέγων (G. 277, Ν. 1). — τὸ μὴ θεμιτὸν εἶναι (G. 262, 2) differs
very slightly in meaning from od θεμιτὸν εἶναι in indirect discourse : it
means iis not being right. In the following clause, ἐθέλειν dv (= ἐθέλοι
ἄν) depends directly on Aéyas: that the philosopher should be willing
(G. 226, 2) to follow, dc. — μυθολογεῖν, to talk (familiarly) : see Apology,
§ 7.

Here follows the celebrated dialogue on Immortality, ending with
a striking parable, or myth, which sets forth the Greek imagery of
the judgments of the future world, where “ they who are sufficiently
purified by philosophy live without the body forevermore, and come
into dwellings fairer than these, which it were not not easy to de-
scribe, nor is there time enough at present.”

Page 107.—16. τούτων, &c. referring to the discourse just ended. —
καλὸν γὰρ τὸ ἄθλον, for noble is the reward. — φαίη ἂν ἀνὴρ τραγικός,
i. 6. asa tragedian would express it. — λουσάμενον, after bathing. — λού-
ev depends on the verbal idea in πράγματα, as we often say, 0 take the
trouble to do a thing.

17. dev, well then (lit. let this be as it is, G. 251, 1). — ἔπειστέλλεις is
appropriately used of the last commands of one about to die. — ὅ τι ἂν 0.

62 PLATO.

ποιοῖμεν, i. 6. which we should especially gratify you by doing: ἄν belongs
to ποιοῖμεν. --- οὐδὲν καινότερον, in English, simply = nothing new. —
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιμελούμενοι = dav... drupedfjode, corresponding to ἐὰν δὲ
ὑμῶν piv αὐτῶν ἀμελῆτε, below (G. 226, 1): in the latter clause μέν is
irregular, and is omitted in many MSS. — οὐδ᾽ ἐὰν ὁμολογήσητε, not even
if you assent, dc. — πλέον ποιεῖν = to profit.

18. ὅπως ἂν βούλησθε, as you please (G. 232, 8). --- ἐρωτᾷ... θάπτῃ,
he asks how he shall bury ME: the subjunctive here represents the interroga-
tive subjunctive was θάπτω; (G. 256) of the direct question, as it is seen
above in θάπτωμεν, &c. (G. 244). — ἄλλως λέγειν : ἄλλως is here equiva-
lent to parny, idly, or without meaning.

Page 108.—19. ἐγγύην (6. 159, Ν. 4). --- οὗτος ... παραμενεῖν, for
he [gave surety in court] that I would remain, i. 6. would not escape: ἧ
μήν is especially used in oaths and other solemn statements. — οἰχῆσε-
σθαι ἀπιόντα (G. 203, N. 2) represents οἰχήσομαι ἀπιών of the direct dis-
course (G. 279, 2, N.). — ds... Σωκράτη, that it is SocRaTEs that he lays
out for burial. —% δ᾽ ὅς (G. 151, N. 3). — τὸ... λέγειν, Χο. to speak
wrongly is. not merely a mistake as regards the act itself. — καὶ θάπτειν
(sc. χρὴ) οὕτως, &c. and [you must] bury i in such a way as shall be, &c.
(G. 232, 8).

20. dvloeraro\es οἴκημά τι, arose [and went] into a room. — ὅση (sc. 4
ξυμφορὰ). .. εἴη, i. 6. how heavy [a calamity] had befallen us: indirect
question. — ἀτεχνῶς... στερηθέντες, exactly as [we should have done] tf
we had been bereft of a father {G. 277, N. 3: 226, 1). — οἰκεῖαι, of the
Samily.

21. ὅπερ ἄλλων καταγιγνώσκω, (the fault) which I find with others
(G. 173, 2, N.).— ἐπειδὰν παραγγέλλω (G. 233), referring to different cases.

Page 109. — ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνοις, sc. rots αἰτίοις,

22. εἰ τέτριπται, if it is mixed. The hemlock was first bruised in a
mortar ; hence the use of τρίβω. --- ὁ ἄνθρωπος (at end), i. 6. a servant.

23. πίνοντας, sc. τὸ φάρμακον (G. 280). — ἐπειδὰν παραγγελθῇ, after the
order has been given them, depends directly on the following participles,
δειπνήσαντας, &c., but indirectly on πίνοντας, which is frequentative. —
οὐδὲν... ὀφλήσειν, that I gain nothing except [this] that I shall make my-
self ridiculous in my own estimation : see note on Apol. § 4. — φειδόμενος
. «. ἐνόντος, sparing when nothing is left. Hesiod (Works and Days, 367)
says, δειλὴ δ᾽ ἐνὶ πυθμένι φείδω, which Seneca thus translates: Scra parsi-
monia in fundo est ; 't is a sorry thrift at the bottom of the cup, i. 6. when
only the dregs are left.

Page 110. — 24. ἕως dv... γένηται, until a heaviness shall be felt (G.
239, 2). — καὶ οὕτως αὐτὸ ποιήσει, and then it [the poison] will du us own
work: αὐτό is nominative (G. 145, 1).

25. καὶ ὅς (G. 151, N. 8). --- τοῦ χρώματος (G. 170, 1). — ταυρηδόν,
Jjixedly. — pds τὸ ἀποσπεῖσαι, as regards pouring a libation from ἰδ. —

HERODOTUS. 63

γενέσθαι, after εὔχεσθαι (G. 203, N. 2). --- γένοιτο (G. 251, 1). — ἐπισχό-
μενος (v. ἐπέχω), holding it (to his lips).

26. τὸ μὴ δακρύειν (G. 263, 2). — ἐμοῦ ye βιᾷ καὶ αὐτοῦ, even in spite of
myself. — olov = ὅτι τοιούτον (α΄. 238). — ἐστερημένος εἴην (G. 248 ; cf.
250, Note). — dvaBpvynodpevos, sobbing aloud. — οὐδένα Svriva οὐ (G. 153,
N. 4), every οΉ6. ---- κατέκλασε, pierced to the heart (lit. broke). — ἐν εὐφη-
μίᾳ, here in a negative sense, when no sounds of evil omen are heard: a
common proclamation of silence before a religious ceremony was εὐφημία
ἔστω. The saying ἐν εὐφημίᾳ χρὴ τελεντᾶν is called Pythagorean. — τοῦ
δακρύειν : after ἐπέσχομεν we might have had τοῦ μὴ δακρύειν without
change of meaning (G. 263, 1).

Page EN 1.— 27. οὗτος ὁ Sots, this man [of whom I spoke] who had given,
(το. ---- διαλιπὼν χρόνον, from time to time: see note on the same expres-
sion in § 28. — ἐπαγιών, going upwards. —8n ψύχοιτο, that he was becom-
ing cold, — αὐτὸς ἥπτετο, he felt of himself. — τότε οἰχήσεται, then he should
be gone (in direct discourse οἰχήσομαι), one of the phrases used by the
Greeks to avoid the mention of death. —’AcxAnme@ ἀλεκτρνόνα : those
who recovered from sickness often sacrificed @ cock to Aesculapius; 80
Socrates proposes this sacrilice in gratitude for his release from life. —

μὴ ἀμελήσητε (G. 254).

28. ὀλίγον διαλιπών, after a little while: the same phrase is general
(= at intervals) as used above, because there it is joined with the imper-
fect διεσκόπει. -- καὶ &s,i. 6. ϑοοσγαίε8. --- ἔστησεν is active, and the meaning
is, his eyes became fixed. — ξυνέλαβε, closed. — τῶν τότε. .. ἀρίστου, the
best of his time whom we knew.

HERODOTUS.

Tux chief events of the great Persian Wars are the capture of Eu-
boea and the battle of Marathon, s. c. 490; the defence of Thermo-
pylae and the sea-fights at Artemisium and Salamis, s.c. 480; and the
battles of Plataea and Mycale in the following year. The narrative
of these events makes the most interesting and important part of the
History composed by Herodotus in the generation immediately fol-
lowing.

Herodotus was born at Halicarnassus, one of the Doric cities on
the western coast of Asia Minor, about the year 484 8.0. In his
manhood he travelled extensively in Asia, Egypt, and Greece, a keen,
intelligent, and accurate observer. His history is one of the earliest,
and is much the most curious and interesting, of our sources of knowl-

.edge as to the countries, people, customs, history, local politics, am
family traditions of the century before his own day. It is in nine
. Books, named for the nine Muses. It is full of illustrations of the re-
ligious beliefs, omens, oracles, customa, and feelings of the time. The
conflict between Asia and Europe appears in Herodotus as part of a
.great drama, in which the Argonautic expedition .and the Trojan war
had been successive acts, which was watched :at every point and
guided by the manifest direction of the Gods; while in the earlier
parts of his History he is constantly tracing proofs of that divine

judgment, which humbles the pride and punishes the crimes of men. ©

Asia Minor, with the Greek colonies on its western coast, had been
added to the Persian dominions by Cyrus the Great, who conquered
Croesus, king of Lydia, Β. 6. 546. About the year B. ο. 500, the Ionic
cities, with Miletus at their head, revolted against the Persian rule;
and, with the help of allies from Greece, especially the Athenians,
captured and burned the Lydian capital, Sardis. The war continued
about six years, and ended in a complete Persian victory. The Ionic
city of Miletus was captured and reduced to slavery, to the pas-
sionate grief of its generous allies in Athens. But. the attention of
tle Persians had been drawn to the free states and islands towards
the west, and these hostilities led the way to their two formidable in-
vasions. Meanwhile the tyrant Hippias, son of Pisistratus, had been
driven from Athens (8.6. 510), and had taken refuge at the Persian
court. He was now a feeble old man; but his hate of the Athe-
nians and desire of revenge made him eager to serve the invader,
whom he accompanied himself to the plain of Marathon.

Although Herodotus was a Dorian by birth, he wrote his History
in Ionic Greek. His intercourse with the Ionic cities in his imme-
diate neighborhood must have made him familiar with their speech,
even if we reject the account given by Suidas of his long residence
as an exile in the Ionic island of Samos. But he probably chose the
Ionic dialect chiefly because it had been used by the historians or an-
nalists who preceded him. The dialect of Herodotus is known as the
New Ionic, which, where it differs from the Attic, is very similar to the
Old Ionic of Homer. Its general peculiarities should be learnt by the
beginner from the grammar.* Others will be seen in the Lexicon;
as the use of « for w in κῶς, ὅκως, κότε, &c., for was, ὅπως, were, ὅτ.
and the interchange of aspirates in ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦτεν, κιθών, for ἐν-
ταῦθα, ἐντεῦθεν, χιτών. The chief peculiarity in syntax is the use of

* See G. p. xix; §§ 30; 89; 44; 59; 67, Note 1; 70; Notes to 76-86; 122,
124; 128; Notes to 129 and 180; 140, Note 4; 148, Note 4. Much of the detail
in the notes can be learnt by practice while reading.

HERODOTUS. G5

the forms of the article beginning with r as relative pronouns (G. 140,
x. 4), which must be kept constantly in mind.

The story of the Persian Wars is begun in the sixth book of He-
rodotus, and is continued in the three following books. The extracts
here given include the battle of Marathon and the battles of Ther-
mopylae, Artemisium, and Salamis, and end with the retreat of Xerxes
to Asia after his defeat at Salamis. They begin with VL. 48, to which
V. 105 is prefixed by way of introduction.

I.

Page 122.—1. βασιλέϊ, uncontracted form for βασιλεῖ (G. 53, 3). —
ὡς, when. — Σάρδις = Σάρδεις (G. 59, 2), accusative plural. —’Idévey...
ποιησάμενον, making no account of the Iontans. — μετὰ, δέ, but afierwards
(6. 191, N. 2). — πυθόμενον, like ὡς ἐπύθετο above. — εἴρεσθαι, used to ask,
imperfect infinitive (G. 208, Ν. 1). — ἀπεῖναι for ἀφεῖναι (v. ἀφίημι:
G. 17, 1, N.), let fly. — ply for αὐτόν (G. 79, 1, N. 2), i. 6. the arrow. —
βάλλοντα, as he let it fly (G. 204). — ἐκγενέσθαι, infinitive for optative in
a wish (G. 270), be it granted. — προστάξαι depends on λέγεται (third line).
— ts τρίς, thrice. — ἑκάστοτε, i. 6. every day at supper. — μέμνεο (for pép-
γησο), as if from a present μέμνομαι : the form μέμνῃ is found in Homer.

2. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο : Darius had sent an army and a fleet in 492 B. c., un-
der his son-in-law Mardonias, to subdue Eretria and Athens, reducing the
Greek populations on the way. Some, including the Macedonians, were
subdued by the army ; but as the fleet beat about Mount Athos, ‘‘ there
fell on them a north wind, great and ungovernable, which treated them
very roughly, dashing many of the ships against Athos ; three hundred of
them are said to have perished, and more than twenty thousand men.
And as this sea about Athos is most full of monsters, many were seized and
devoured by them, and some were crushed against the rocks ; and some
could not swim and so were lost ; and some perished with cold. So then
fared that fleet.” (Hdt. VI. 44.) After some successes in the south of
Thrace, Mardonius returned to Asia. — 8 τι ἔχοιεν, indirect question. —
κότερα = πότερον. — ἑωντῷ = ἑαυτῷ, — σφέας αὐτούς = davrots. — ὧν
= οὖν, therefore. —@ddovs ἄλλῃ τάξας, i. 6. ordering them to different
places. —wédas = πόλεις (G. 59, 2). — νέας μακράς, ships of war, naves
longas.

8. τὰ προΐσχετο αἰτέων, what he put forward as his demand. — ὃς τοὺς
ἀπικοίατο = εἰς obs ἀφίκοιντο (G. 233). — καὶ δὴ καί, lit. and moreover
also, an emphatic formula very common in Hdt. Here it stands for the
usual καί in the expression ἄλλοι re... καί. --- σφί = σφίσι (G. 79, 1,
N. 2), used like αὐτοῖς in Attic (G. 144, 2.) — ἐπεκέατο (G. 129, V. N.).
ἐπὶ σφίσι ἔχοντας, aiming a blow at them (as English, ‘‘ have at them").

Page 113. — ds... στρατεύωνται, so as to join the Persians in march-
ing upon them. The jealousy thus roused threatened a war which would
5

66 HERODOTUS.

have divided and weakened Greece : it was composed in season, and the
men of Aegina fought bravely against the Persians at Salamis and Plataea.
— τὰ πεποιήκοιεν, what [as the Athenians said] they had done (G. 248, 4,
last ex.). — συνῆπτο : the active form συνάπτειν πόλεμον (cf. συνάπτειν
μάχην in § 12, to join battle), means, to engage in war. The hostility be-
tween Aegina and Athens is traced by Herodotus to the following circum-
stance: In time of famine, the Epidaurians had brought two statues of
sacred olive-wood from Athens, paying therefor a yearly service at the
shrine of Erechtheus. After these had for many years been effectual to
avert the barrenness of the land, they were stolen by Aeginetans, colo-
nists of Epidaurus, and the tribute ceased. The Athenians then sent to
demand it at Aegina; but, while they were attempting to drag away the
sacred statues, a violent storm burst forth, with an earthquake, so that
their whole expedition, struck with frenzy, fell upon one another and
perished, except one man who fied to tell the tale.

4. ὥστε is used with the participle by Hdt. in the same sense as Gre in
Attic (G. 277, N. 2,); not in the sense of ὡς. --- Πεισιστρατιδέων, i. e. Hip-
pias and his household. Pisistratus, the father of Hippias, became tyrant
at Athens B. Ὁ. 560. Hippias was expelled and the democracy restored
B. C. 510, twenty years before the battle of Marathon. — προσκατημένων
= προσκαθημένων. --- ταύτης. . . προφάσιος, adhering to this purpose. —
“Ἑλλάδος, partitive genitive with τοὺς μὴ δόντας. --- φλαύρως πρήξαντα,
cf. κακῶς πράττειν (G. 165, N. 2).— παραλύει, ““ relieves.” --- ἀποδέξας
= ἀποδείξας, having appointed. — Δᾶτιν, ᾿Αρταφέρνεα, in apposition with
στρατηγούς.

Here follows the expedition of the fleet against the Grecian islands, and
the capture of Eretria, in Euboea, the inhabitants of which were colonized
by Darius eastward of the Persian Gulf.

5. ἃς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν : Eretria was opposite the northern point of Attica,
across the strait, which is here about five miles wide. — κατέργοντες = καθ-
epyovres, hemming in the Athenians greatly: the word is doubtful. —
δοκέοντες ... τά, expecting to do the same by the Athenians, as, dc. (G. 165).
—ral... γάρ : here the separate force of these particles can be seen, and
...for. Generally, however, καὶ γάρ means simply for surely (more em-
phatic than γάρ alone), the original ellipsis of a clause with καί being for-
gotten. —é Μαραθών : ‘‘the plain of Marathon is about six miles from
north to south, and of varying width, having the eastern declivities of
Pentelicus on the west, and the sea on the east.” Felton. It is about
twenty miles northeast from Athens, and fifteen southeast from Eretria. —
ἐνιππεῦσαι, i.e. for cavalry movements, — κατηγέετο = καθηγεῖτο. --- σφί
(G. 171, 3, N.). — δέκα, i. 6. one from each Attic tribe. — δέκατος, one of
ten (not tenth). — τοῦ, τοΐοϑο. --- κατέλαβε, it befell: its subject is φυγεῖν,
which means properly fo get banished (aorist), while φεύγειν is to be in exile:
Φεύγω is of course transitive, lit. to flee from, hence Πεισίστρατον.

HERODOTUS. 67

6. ἥκων ἐκ τῆς Χερσονήσου : this refers to the Thracian Chersonesus
(on the west side of the Hellespont), where Miltiades had been several
years governor or ‘‘despot.” Hence Byron’s familiar lines,

‘‘ The tyrant of the Chersonese,’’ &c.

His uncle, Miltiades, the so-called οἰκιστής (or founder of the Chersonese),
had led the first Athenian colony to this region during the reign of Pisis-
tratus. Miltiades the younger, according to Herodotus, had advised
breaking down the bridge on the Danube, and leaving Darius to perish in
his campaign against the Scythians (about 516 B.c.): hence the king's
enmity against him, and attempt to seize him, described below.

Page R14. — περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιεῦντο, made great efforts. — τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν,
thereupon. — ὑποδεξάμενοι, watching for his return: the simple ἐδεξάμην in
Tonic Greek, as in Attic, belongs to δέχομαι : but in compounds care must
be taken to avoid confusion with this and similar lonic forms (as ἐδέχθην)
belonging to δείκνυμι. --- ἀπεδέχθη, was appointed.

7. τοῦτο μελετῶντα, i. 6. this was his profession. — τῷ = @, dative after
περιπίπτει, falls in with (G. 187). ---- βώσαντα (v. Bodo), calling. — Πᾶνα,
subject of κελεῦσαι, which depends on ἔλεγε understood : Pan was the Pe-
lasgic (i. e. aboriginal) deity, whose chief seat of worship was the Pelasgic
district of Arcadia. — ἀπαγγεῖλαι, to carry this message (implying to ask).
— διότι (= διὰ τί)... ποιεῦνται, why they paid no reverence to him. — τὰ,
δέ is used before ἔτι as if τὰ μέν stood before πολλαχῇ. --- καταστάντων
oo πρηγμάτων, when their affuirs were now restored to good condition. —
εἶναι : the subject is ταῦτα after πιστεύσαντες. --- ἱρόν, shrine: this was a
grotto below the Acropolis, with a descent of 47 steps. — ἀπό, in conse-
quence of. — λαμπάδι, a torch-race. :

8. Sevrepaios, within two days: the distance is about 140 miles. —arepue-
σοῦσαν (like περιπεσεῖν), aorist participle without time (G. 279, 3). —
πρός, at the hands of. —wéM, dative of difference (G. 188, 2): Greece is
become poorer, by one notable city. — ἕαδε, v. ἀνδάνω. --- ἀδύνατα ἦν, if was
tmpossible, ἃ common expression for ἀδύνατον ἦν (G. 135, 2).

Page ἘΞ. — ἱσταμένον rod μηνός : the lunar month was divided into
three parts, called ἱστάμενος, μεσῶν, φθίνων. --- εἰνάτη = ἐνάτη, ninth. It
is supposed that in this particular month occurred the Carneia, the great
Dorian festival in honor of Apollo, lasting from the seventh to the fifteenth
(i. e. till the full moon), during which no Dorian might bear arms. It
occurred generally in August, but this year early in September. — μὴ οὐ
(G. 288, 7, end)... τοῦ κύκλου, while the moon's disk was not yet full.

9. συνευνηθῆναι τῇ μητρί : this he understood to mean, that he should
sleep in the grave in his native land. — γηραιός, in his old age. — κατελ-
θών (G. 138, N. 8).

10. τοῦτο piv... τοῦτο δέ (G. 148, ν. 4). --- ἀπέβησε, put ashore. —
xarayopévas, brought to land: the corresponding ἀνάγεσθαι is to put to sea.
—ol, to him, dative following ἐπῆλθε. — ἐώθεε for εἰώθει, v. ἔθω. --- ola

68 HERODOTUS.

(G. 277, x. 2) with ἐόντι, since he was. — πρεσβυτέρῳ, rather old. — &e-
ληλυθέναι, had come to pass (lit. had come out).

11. ἐν τεμένει Ηρακλέος, i. 6. in Marathon. — Πλαταιέες, the city of
Plataea was about twenty-five miles northwest from Athens, in the terri-
tory of Boeotia. — dvapaipéaro, for ἀνήρηντο, v. ἀναιρέω, had undertaken
(G. 122, 2). — ἑκαστέρω, too far off (to be of any use to you).

Page 116. — τοιήδε. .. ψυχρή, such a service would prove to be cold,
i. 6. too weak to be of use. — φθαίητε.. . . ἡμέων, for you might be enslaved
nuany times before any of us would hear (G. 279, 2): av@éoOas here follows
φθαίητε ἤ from the force of πρίν implied in the verb (G. 274, N.); 8 rare
construction. — τιμωρέειν οὐ κακοῖσι, no cowards to help. — συνεστεῶτας,
v. συνίστημι, coming tn collision. — Βοιωτοῖσι : especially Thebans, who
would object to the proposed union of Plataea and Athens.

12. οὐκ ἠπίστησαν, i. 6. they followed their advice. — ποιεύντων is
temporal. — ἔπιγρεψάντων ἀμφοτέρων, both sides choosing them umpires. —
οὔρισαν for ὥρισαν, v. ὁρίζω. --- dav... τελέειν, that the Thebans should
leave at liberty (ἐᾶν) those of the Boeotians who were unwilling to belong to
the Boeotian league, which was under the exclusive control of Thebes.

13. ἐπεθήκαντο (G. 121, 2), αἰαεζεά. --- ἑσσώθησαν (for joo-, v. ἡσ-
σάομαι), were defeated. — tors... οὔρους, the boundaries which, dc.: rove
is relative.

14. ἐγίνοντο δίχα, were divided. — τῶν μέν, &c., one part voting not to
engage. — ὀλίγονς, too few. — τῶν δέ, &c., the other, including Miltiades,
urging tt. — ἐνίκα ἡ χείρων, the more timid was likely to prevail (imper-
fect). — κνάμῳ λαχών, elected by lot (lit. by the bean). The polemarch was
the third in rank of the nine archons, and he was originally (as his nam*
denotes) a military commander. Soon after the Persian Wars, however,
his duties were confined to the management of the affairs of foreigners resi-
dent at Athens, and military matters were left to the board of ten generals

(στρατηγοί).

Page 54}. --- 16. οὐδέ, &c., not even Harmodius and Aristogiton, who
delivered Athens by slaying Hipparchus, the son of Pisistratus and brother
of Hippias, who was then tyrant : they were from the same deme with (al-
limachus (Aphidnae). — δέδοκται τὰ πείσονται, it is already determined
what they shall suffer: i. e. the tyranny of the Pisistratidae will be restored
and the democracy abolished. — περιγένηται, shall get the victory. — οἵη τέ
ἐστι (G. 151, N. 4). — ἀνήκει ἐς σέ, has come up to you [for decision]. —
ἕλπομαι, 7 anticipate. — στάσιν, commotion or civil conflict. — ὥστε py-
δίσαι, so that they will favor the Persians, i. e. prove traitors to the na-
tional cause: in this verb μηδίζω, and often elsewhere, the Persians are
incorrectly called Medes by the Greek writers. —wply τι... ἐγγενέσθαι,
before there came anything rotten (cowardly or corrupt) ixto one and another
of the Athenians. — θεῶν . .. νεμόντων, if the Gods judge justly. — ἣν Ay,
ὕ you prefer (v. alpéw). — Trav... ἀγαθῶν (for dv... ἀγαθῶν), by attrac-
tion and assimilation (G. 154, n.) for τῶν ἀγαθῶν (G. 181, N.) ἃ κατέλεξα.

HERODOTUS. 69

16. μετὰ δέ (G. 191, ν. 2). — πρντανηΐη τῆς ἡμέρης, command for the
day, which passed in rotation through the whole board of ten generals: as
one general belonged to each tribe, it is likely that the same order was fol-
lowed here as in the ordinary succeasion of the tribes in the wpvravela,
which was determined annually by lot (see note on § 17, below, and on
Xen. Mem. § 18). — δεκόμενος = δεχόμενος. --- od... κω = οὐ... πω,
not yct. — πρίν, until (G. 240, 1).

Page ΒΕ. - 17. τότε, &c.: the right wing was the post of honor, as
being most perilous, that side being unprotected by the shield ; it was
anciently assigned to the king. — ὧς ἠριθμέοντο, in order, as they were
numbered ; see note on § 16, above. — ἀπὸ ταύτης . . . σφι μάχης, from
their fighting in this battle: for σφί (the Plataeans) see G. 184, 8, N. 4. —
θυσίας. .. γινομένας, when the Athenians celebrate the sacrifices and festi-
vals which take place every four years: this refers especially to the greater
Panathenaic festival. — λέγων is parenthetical, and γίνεσθαι depends on
κατεύχεται (G. 203, N. 2). — ἐξισούμενον, extended to equal length. — ἐπὶ
τάξιας ὀλίγας, but a few ranks deep.

18. .ds δέ σφι διετέτακτο, impersonal (see G. 188, 8, second ex.) — ἀπεί-
θησαν (v. ἀφίημι), were allowed to advance (lit. let go or sent forth) ‘like
racers in the course” (Stein). — μανίην . . . ἐπέφερον, they imputed mad-
ness : in faet, only the admirable training of the Athenians saved them.
from being thrown into disorder, by which they must have perished. —
ἵππου (fem.), cavalry. — ἀνέσχοντο ὁρέοντες, endured to behold. — ταύτην
ἐσθημένους, wearing it (a peculiar word: G. 164; 197, 1, N. 2). — τέως,
till then. — φόβος ἀκοῦσαι (G. 261, 2, N.).

19. μαχομένων, genitive absolute denoting time, while they fought. —
τὸ μέσον (G. 160, 1), at the centre, like κατὰ τοῦτο ἐνίκων just below. —
τῇ, where. — Σάκαι: these were Scythian bowmen, serving probably as
mariners in the fleet, and efficient in land service. — ἐτετάχατο = tera-
Ὑμένοι ἧσαν. --- ῥήξαντες, breaking through.

Page 819. — - ἴων, they suffered, for εἴων. ---- τοῖς. . . ῥήξασι, dative
after ἐμάχοντο. --- φεύγουσι, in their flight. — Πέρσῃσι (6. 186, κ. 1).

20. ἀπὸ δ᾽ Wave, the verb is ἀπέθανε, the prepositions being separated
by tmesis (G. 191, N. 3). — γενόμενος, having proved himself. — Kuvéye-
ρος, a brother of the poet Aeschylus: he was attempting to climb into the
ship by the stern-works (ἀφλάστων). — τὴν χεῖρα (G. 197, 1, N. 2).

21. ἐξανακρονσάμενοι, backing water. — ἀπικόμενοι (G. 279, 2).— αἰτίη,
.&c., an accusation became current (ἔσχε) that they planned this by con-
triwance of the Alcemaeonidae: this was a powerful family in Athens, at
feud with Miltiades, — the same to which, in the next generation, Pericles
belonged. — ἀναδέξαι ἀσπίδα, displayed a shield (G. 203): this depends
on the idea of saying in αἰτίη. This shield, ‘‘ discernible from its polished
surface afar off, was seen held aloft upon some high point of Attica, — per-
haps on the summit of Mount Pentelicus. ... A little less quickness on

70 HERODOTUS.

the part of Miltiades in deciphering the treasonable signal and giving the
instant order of march, — a little less energy on the part of the Athenian
citizens in superadding a fatiguing march to a no less fatiguing combat, —
and the Persians, with the partisans of Hippias, might have been found in
possession of Athens. . . . Nothing could have rescued her, except that
decisive and instantaneous attack which Miltiades so emphatically urged.”
Grote.

22. ποδῶν (G. 168, N. 3), genitive following τάχιστα, i. 6. at the top of
their ϑρεεά. --- ἔφθησαν ἀπικόμενοι (G. 279, 2). — πρὶν 4 ἥκαν (G. 274, n.).
— Kvwvocdpyet, a grove and gymnasium, eastward of the city, like the Acad-
emy (see note on Xen. Hellen. p. 33). — ὑπεραιωρηθέντες, lying off (lit.
above) : in the same way the Greeks spoke of a vessel leaving the shore by
ἀνάγεσθαι, and of one approaching the shore by κατάγεσθαι, Compare the
active expression νέας ἀνακωχεύσαντες, keeping the ships at anchor, just be-
low. — Φαλήρου, the old port of Athens (see map, and note on Xen. Hell.
p- 42): at this time the Piraeus had not been fortified.

23. συνήνεικε, v. συμφέρω, tf befell.

Page 120. — πληγέντα, struck with sword or pike ; βληθέντα, hit with
arrow or javelin. — σκιάζειν (G. 260, 2, N. 2).

24. ἔχοντες . . . οὕτω, making such haste to reach Athens in time for the
battle. — τρνταῖοι, on the third day from Sparta (i. 6. two days after leav-
ing Sparta). Plato says that they arrived the day after the battle. —
θηήσασθαι (Vv. θεάομαι).

After the victory at Marathon, Miltiades procured an armament of sev-
enty ships under his own command, for secret service, — which proved to
be an attack on Paros, to revenge, says Herodotus, a private quarrel. He
returned unsuccessful, and was impeached of treason by Xanthippus, father
of Pericles. The penalty of death was commuted for a fine of fifty talents ;
and before this was paid, he died of a wound or bruise received in his
escape from Paros. Meanwhile, the Greeks were left in security and peace,
and the next invasion, under Xerxes, was delayed for a period of ten
years.

The date of the battle of Marathon, according to the most satisfac-
tory calculations, is September 12, Β. c. 490. The account of the battle
in Herodotus, although it is the best that we have, is very far from satis-
factory. We have no detailed description of the movements, no ac-
count of the feeling in Athens either before or after the victory, no
statement (even on conjecture) of the numbers engaged on either
side. This silence on some points probably arose from the fact that
the invasion of Xerxes was the chief object of interest in his history,
and the invasion of Darius was looked upon chiefly as introductory
to this. But on other points, especially as to the numbers, we may
safely presume that he is silent simply because he had no authentic

HELODOTUS. TL

information, He is very minute in giving the numbers of the slain,
one of which at least (that of the one hundred and ninety-two Athe-
nians) he could have known from inscriptions. As to the numbers
of the Persians, hardly a guess can be made: they are variously stated
by later historians from 600,000 to 210,000, which last is the esti-
mate of Cornelins Nepos. The same historian gives the number of
Greeks as 10,000, including 9,000 Athenians and 1,000 Plataeans.
Others give 10,000 Athenians and 1,000 Plataeans. If this estimate
included only the heavy armed, and the usual addition is made for
light armed, we shall make the whole Greek force consist of 20,000
or 22,000 men. (See Rawlinson, Appendix to Book VI.)

Herodotus does not mention cavalry in the battle, although he states
that the field of Marathon was selected by the Persians because it
was excellent for cavalry movements (ἐνιππεῦσαι). We may suppose
the cavalry to have been absent foraging on the day of the battle,
which the Persians were not expecting (as Rawlinson suggests) ; or it
may not yet have been landed, for some reason not given. At all
events, no account is given of its re-embarkation, which would have
been difficult after the defeat.

By the view given in Blakesley’s “ Excursus,” the landing at Mara-
thon was meant only for alodgement. The region near held many par- -
tisans of Hippias, who were also formidable in the city; and if their
expected movement had taken place, the Persians might have landed
their cavalry, destroyed the little army of the Greeks, and occupied
the country at their leisure. This plan was foiled by the generalship
of Miltiades, who, after the two armies had held each other several
days in check, suddenly extended his wings, and struck his blow so
promptly that the Persians were beaten by sheer surprise. They
could not, however, have been driven in rout, as Herodotus says, into
the interior (μεσόγαιαν) ; the wings, alone, had fled in “ panic’ flight,
and perished in the marshes on the flanks, — the service rendered, at
this crisis, by the god Pan. On the whole, the main force must have
come off with small loss and in good order, the greatness of the vic-
tory being exaggerated by the patriotic pride of the Greeks. Their
ships lay moored, stern to the shore, and were easily got off, only
seven of the whole fleet being taken or sunk. The battle was won,
not by the mere superior valor of the Greeks, but by the skill and
energy of their commander, who for five days kept his little army
safe from attack, in a well-chosen position, and fought when a longer
delay might have been fatal; for the Persians were expecting a dem-
onstration from the disloyal faction in Athens, which was prevented
only by the promptness and completeness of his victory.

72 HERODOTUS.

IT:
Page 120. —1. κεχαραγμένον, exasperated, lit. sharply cut: the same

verb (χαράσσω) from which our own word character is derived. — Savé-
τερα ἐποίεε, comparative of Sava ποιεῖν, fo take (a thing) dl, aegre ferre.

Page U2. — Boviero, was Kept in commotion (‘‘ din”). — ds... στρα-
«ευσομένων, since they were to attack Greece: this phrase gives the reason
of ἀρίστων.

2. τετάρτῳ ἔτεϊ, i. 6. probably in the summer of B. c. 487. — KapBi-
σέω : Cambyses, son and successor of Cyrus the Great, had made Egypt
e Persian province in 525 B. c. — μᾶλλον ὥρμητο, was the more eager (lit.
had been the more impelled). — στελλομένου, about proceeding, i. 6. getting
ready his στόλος. --- παίδων : the dispute was between Xerxes and Arta-
bazanes. Xerxes, though the younger, was son of Atossa, daughter of Cy-
rus the Great, the queen of Darius. Through her he inherited his own
claim of sovereignty, and she was now all-powerful at the Persian court.
He had, besides, the claim of having been ‘‘ born in the purple,” after Da-
rius came to the throne, — Artabazanes being son of a former wife. — ἦγε-
μονίης, precedence as to the succession. — ὡς δέει depends on the idea of
demanding vaguely implied in στάσις ἐγένετο. --- οὕτω refers back to éro-
δέξαντα : the meaning is, that after nominating a successor he should so set
forth, i 6. he should noé set forth wntil he had done this. — παρασκευαζό-
μενον agrees with Δαρεῖον, which is subject of ἀποθανεῖν. --- συνήγεικε, ὦ
happened.

8. καὶ Ἐξέρξης : Herodotus represents that Xerxes was at first indifferent
to the expedition against Greece, but was urged to it by Mardonius (after-
wards slain at Plataea), who hoped to become satrap of Greece. In a royal
council held after Egypt was subdued, Xerxes declared his intention to
make the invasion by way of the Hellespont, and was supported by Mar-
donius, but dissuaded by his uncle Artabanus, his wisest counsellor, —
who, however, yielded to the terror of a vision, which ‘‘ threatened to burn
out his eyes with hot irons” for his opposition to the will of destiny. He
now ‘‘openly favored the expedition ; and so Xerxes gathered together his
host, ransacking every corner of the continent.” — ἐπὶ τέσσερα ἕτεα, four
full years, counting from the reduction of Egypt in B. c. 485. — ἀνομένῳ
(v. ἄνω), advancing, i. e. tn the course of the year. — χειρὶ μεγάλῃ πλήθεος,
with a mighty (hand of) force: with this use of yelp cf. Latin manus. —
στόλων : this refers to the expedition of Darius against the Scythians, the
great Scythian invasion of Media, the war of Troy, and the conquest of
Thrace and Northern Greece, still earlier, by the Mysians and Teucrians ;
** yet not all these,” says Herodotus, ‘‘ nor all others which have ever been,
were worthy to be compared with this single one.” — οἱ μέν, &c., i. 6. the
several nations and districts subject to Xerxes. — ἐξ πεζὸν ἐτετάχατο, had
orders for foot soldiers: τὸ πεῖόν means foot soldiers when opposed to

HERODOTUS. 73

cavalry, but Zand force (in general). when opposed to a naval armament. —
ἵππος (fem.), cavalry, ‘‘ horse.” --- ἅμα (G. 277, N. 1). — γεφύρας, see be-
low § 10.

4. τοῦτο μέν (G. 148, ν. 4), here with no correlative τοῦτο δέ, — és im-
plies that προσπταισάντων gives the reason of Xerxes for digging the canal
through Athos (G. 277, N. 2): for προσπταισάντων, see note on I. § 2, —
προετοιμάζετο (impersonal), preparations were made in advance. — ἂις τριῶν
ἐτέων, from a time three years back. —’EAawtwn, Elacus, at the extreme
southwest point of the Chersoneus, was the base of the naval operations at
Athos ; the military head-quarters were at Sestos, about eighteen miles
above. — ὥρμεον is from ὁρμέω, while Sppedpevor is an Ionic form (= ὁρμώ-
μενοι) from ὁρμάω. --- ὑπὸ μαστίγων, i.e. driven to their work by scourges.
See below, § 21; and III. § 44, where Hdt. describes the Persians at
Thermopylae as driven into the battle by scourges. — παντοδαποί, various
detachments. — διάδοχοι, in relays.

Page 122. — 5. cyoworevés, ὦ straight line (as if by ἃ stretched cord).
— βαθέα (for βαθεῖα) : at the greatest depth, the canal would be about sixty
feet below the surface. — βάθρων, stagings: the Phoenicians, according to
Herodotus, were the only ones skilful enough in engineering to avoid the
caving in of the banks by beginning the excavation with double the width
required at the bottom. — πρητήριον, Ion. for πρατήριον, a market, a place
Sor selling, from wpa- (stem of πιπράσκω). --- ἀληλεσμένος (v. ἀλέω), ready
ground,

6. as... εὑρίσκειν, 80 far as I can find out (G. 268): in fact, it was not
a very difficult work, and was highly politic, especially in case Greece
should be subjugated. The canal, which has been traced, ‘‘is about a mile
and a quarter long, and twenty-five yards across ; it has been much filled
up with mud and rushes.” — παρεόν (G. 278, 2), when tt was in his power.
— διειρύσαι, to haul across, an operation easily performed with the light
veasels of the ancients. — εὖρος ὡς... πλῴώειν, of [such] width that two tri-
remes could pass through (G. 266, N. 1). — Aacrpevpévas (for ἐλαυγομέ-
vas), driven by oars. — [εύξανταβ γεφυρῶσαι, simply fo bridge the river:
the Greeks said ποταμὸν ζεῦξαι (ὃ 8) and ποταμὸν γεφυρῶσαι, and Hat.
has even γεφύρας ζενγνύων. :

7. ἸΚριτάλλων, the frontier town of Cappadocia. — γῆν re καὶ ὕδωρ, see
below, 8 28. — δεῖπνα, see below, § 25.

Page 123. - 8. of δέ: those who had charge of the work (see τοῖσι
προσεκέετο below). — ἐξεύγνυσαν, were (in the mean time) building. — τὴν
piv... τὴν δέ: understand γέφυραν from ἐγεφύρουν above. — βυβλίνην,
of papyrus: this plant was used by the Egyptians for ropes as well as for
paper.

9. ἐπικέσθαι (the subject is wAnyds), that three hundred blows should be
laid on with a lash. — κατεῖναι (v. καθίημι), supply τινάς as subject. —
ποταμῷ: the current, about three miles an hour, gives the Hellespont the
aspect of a river.

74 HERODOTUS.

10. τὰς δέ, the bridges. — ὑπό, under, as a support. — ἑξήκοντά re καὶ
τριηκοσίας : the upper bridge may have been made stronger (of three hun-
dred and sixty vessels) to resist the greater force of the stream ; or it may
have been at a broader part of the channel, which is here about a mile
wide. (See Grote’s note.) — τοῦ piv... κατὰ ῥόον, at right angles with
the Pontus, and in the line of the current of the Hellespont (to diminish
the resistance). — ἵνα dvaxwyebp, that i [this arrangement of vessels]
miyht ease (i. 6. by lifting) the strain on the tackle: ἀναχωκεύω (kindred to
ἀνέχω) means to hold up, with the idea of relieving or keeping quiet (see
ἀναχωκεύσαντες τὰς vias, keeping the ships off the coast, in I. ὃ 24): so
ἀναχωκή means a truce. It is hard to see why (according to the common
interpretation, that the force of the stream might keep up the tension of the
cables, i. e. keep them taut) there should be any anxiety to provide for the
tension of cables which were stretched over a strait a mile wide, and rested
on vessels in a stream running three miles an hour ! — συνθέντες is re-
peated after the long parenthesis. — τὰς μὲν... τῆς ἑτέρης, [they cast] those
(ἀγκύρας) of [the ships forming] one bridge towards the Pontus. — εἴνεκεν,
to guard against. — ἔσωθεν, i. 6. from the Euxine. — τῆς δὲ ἑτέρης, i. 6. the
anchors of the other bridge. — πρὸς ἑσπέρης, sc. κατῆκαν.--- εὔρον, νότον :
these were southeast and south winds, both blowing more or less up &tream.

Page 124. — διέκπλοον : the small craft (πλοῖα λεπτά) would pass in
and out underneath the cables.

11. χωρὶς ἑκάτερα, i. 6. the flaxen cables and those of papyrus. — εἷλκε,
weighed: if the talent here meant is the Euboean, or old Attic, a cubit
(eighteen inches) weighed nearly eighty pounds. — τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου,
the stretching of the cables, i. e. the cables, as they were stretched across the
strait. — ἐπεζεύγννον, joined them above, either by ropes or by strips of wood.

12. χντοί, breakwaters. — pny ns, surf: the tide in this sea being very
slight. — ὁ ἥλιος : no eclipse of the sun, visible at Sardis, took place in
B. Ο. 480, if the latest astronomical calculations can be trusted ; the story
here told may belong to the departure from Susa in the preceding year,
when there was such an eclipse. The date of the invasion of Xerxes
(B. ο. 480) is too well established to admit of doubt. — ἐπινεφέλων ἐόντων,
genitive absolute : the indicative would be ἔπινέφελά ἐστιν, ἐξ is cloudy
(G. 135, 2). — αἰθρίης (noun), in fair weather, is genitive of time
(G. 179, 1). — τὸ ἐθέλοι (= τί ἐθέλοι), τό being relative used interroga-
tively (G. 282, 1). — προδέκτορα, verbal of προδείκνυμι, that which desig-
nates or foreshows.

Page 325. - 13. ἀναμίξ, i. 6. not divided into separate bodies, as they
marched according to cities or provinces. — διελέλειπτο, impersonal. —
οὗτοι, these, who marched in advance. — προηγεῦντο, i. 6. led the part of
the army which accompanied the king ; opposed to οὗτοι. — κάτω τρέψαντες,
this was a mark of respect to the king, who followed them. — ἅρμα Διός :
by Zeus Hdt. means the chief God of the Persians, Auramazda or Ormuzd.

~

HERODOTUS. 76

14 λόγος, choice or fancy. — κατὰ vépev,i. 6. with point upward. —
otros, the ten thousand just mentioned. — poids, pomegranates, probably
as sacred emblems. — ἀντὶ σανρωτήρων, in the place of points at the lower
end. — oi... τράποντες (lon. for τρέποντες, present), those who preceded
the Nisaean horses (§ 13).

Page 126.— 15. Σκάμανδρον, the Scamander of the Iliad: here a
shallow brook, in a bed about two hundred feet broad ; in the dry season
only three feet deep. — ῥέεθρον (G. 160, 1). — οὐδ᾽ ἀπέχρησε... .. πινό-
μενος, and did not have water sufficient for the army to drink (lit. did not
suffice when drunk, &c.). — ὧς ἀπίκετο repeats the genitive absolute ἀπικο-
μένον after the long relative clause.

16. ‘‘On this transit from Asia into Europe, Herodotus dwells with
peculiar emphasis ; and well he might do so, since when we consider the
bridges, the invading number, the unmeasured hopes succeeded by no less
unmeasured calamity, it will appear not only to have been the most im-
posing event of his century, but to rank among the most imposing events
of all history.” Grote.-— «al... γάρ are here to be separated, and —as
(for) a seat had been erected for him here, dc. (See note on I. § 5, above.)
— ἐθηεῖτο = ἐθεᾶτο. --- ὥρα = ἑώρα, imperfect of ὁράω.

17. dvhp = ὁ ἀνήρ. --- φρασθείς, perceiving (see Lexicon). —dés...e
περιέσται, the direct exclamation would be, ras... ἐστὶν, εἰ περιέσται ;
how short is the whole of man’s life, if no one... t8 to be alive, de.
(G. 221, N.).

Page 4592. --- the second οὕτω qualifies εὐδαίμων. --- τῷ (G. 238). —
γλυκὺν γεύσας τὸν αἰῶνα, after giving [man] a taste of the sweetness of life,
lit. a taste of life as (being) sweet. — φθονερός, jealous, i. 6. lest man should
vie with him in blessedness.

18. τῶνδ᾽ ἐγὼ ὑμέων χρηΐζων, wanting this (G. 148, n. 1) of you: 80
δέομαι occasionally takes two genitives, instead of the common construc-
tion (G. 172, Ν. 1). — ξυνὸν... σπεύδεται, for this which we are seeking ts
Sor the good of all in common: the construction being τοῦτο γὰρ owebSerat
(passive) [bv] ἀγαθὸν πᾶσι ξυνόν : the adjective ξυνός = κοινός. --- évrera-
μένως, vigorously (adverb formed from participle of ἐντείνω). --- τῶν (= ὧν)
for καὶ τούτων. --- οὗ μή τις... ἀντιστῇ (2 aorist), an emphatic future ex-
pression (G. 257). — λελόγχασι (v. λαγχάνω), have in charge (as if as-
signed by lot): cf. Latin sortiti sunt.

19. τὸν ἥλιον, the Sun, under the name of Mithra, was one of the chief
objects of worship in the Persian religion.

Page 128. — ἤ μιν παύσει (α. 236). — πρότερον 4... γένηται, = πρὶν
dv... γένηται (G. 240, N.). — ἀκινάκην, a short, straight-pointed sword,
or dirk. — μαστιγώσαντι (G. 277, 2).

20. ἐπὶ δὲ αὐτὸς Ἐξέρξης, i. 6. after the chariot. — ἀνήγοντο, put off
form the shore.

76 HERODOTUS.

21. ABdpevos, likening thyself; θέμενος, taking to thyself. — iv...
«ποιέειν (G. 222, Ν. 2).

22. τὸν “Ἑλλήσποντον, accusative governed by the phrase ἔξω wide, as
if it were a compound verb like ἐκχείπειν, which takes the accusative. —
πρήσσων τὰ ἔμπαλιν τοῦ πεζοῦ, taking the opposite direction from the land
Jorce (lit. doing the opposite), i. 6. sailing ‘southwest towards the Aegean,
while the army marched northeast into Thrace. — Δορίσκον : this was a
strong Persian fortress, which had been held since the invasion of Scythia
by Darius. (See note on I. § 6.)

Page 829. — 23. πλήθεος ἀριθμόν, number of people. — rod πεζοῦ, of
the foot-soldiers (as we know from Hdt. VII. 184, where the cavalry are
estimated at 80,000 in addition to this number. — τὸ wA§8os: by this
reckoning, 1,700,000 men, a very uncertain estimate, as the numbers
might easily be exaggerated in the loose way of counting. Ctesias makes
800,000, and Aelian 700,000; but ‘‘we may well believe,” says Mr. Grote,
‘‘that the numbers of Xerxes were greater than were ever assembled in
ancient times, or perhaps at any known epoch of history.” — συννάξαν-
Tes ταύτην, i. 6. τὴν μυριάδα. Compare κατανάξαντες τὴν γῆν in § 11,
above. — ὕψος (G. 160, 1).

24. διεξελάσας (G. 138, N. 8) θηήσασθαι, fo see them in review (G. 204,
N. 2). — μετά, afterwards. — ἀτέγραφον of γραμματισταί : these lists, it
has been thought, may have fallen into the hands of the Greeks, and been
the authority for the account of Hat. (see Rawlinson). — ὅσον te τέσσαρα,
about four ; τέ being used by Hat. after ὅσο, as it is even in Attic Greek
‘after οἷος, able (G. 151, N. 4).

Page 130. — ἐντός, between, governs both πρφρέων and αἰγιαλοῦ.

25. τοὺς... ἐμποδών, whoever came in his way. — ts wav κακοῦ, into all
sorts of distress, — ἀνάστατοι ἐγένοντο, lost house and home. — Θασίοισι,
dative after ἀραιρημένος (v. aipéw), appointed by the Thasians. — ὅκον
(= Sov), when. — ἀπέδεξε, reckoned in his accounts. — τετρακόσια τά-
Aavra ἀργυρίου, i. 6. about 400,000 dollars.

Herodotus adds: ‘‘As soon as the herald’s message came, the people
would distribute their stores of grain, and proceed to grind wheat and
barley-flour for many months’ supply ; then buy up and fatten the finest
cattle ; feed poultry and waterfowl in pens and coops for the service of the
army ; and provide gold and silver drinking-cups and bowls. These things
for the king’s table only; for the others, food alone. When the army
arrived, a tent stood ready spread, in which Xerxes took his rest, while the
troops remained in the open air. When dinner-time came, great was the
toil of the entertainers ; and after spending the night well fed, the army
next day tore down the tent, and carried off all it held, leaving nething.”

26. ἔπο εὖ εἰρημένον, a saying well expressed, a bon mot. — καὶ τὸ λοὶ-
wév, also for the future (as they had done in the present case). — ταρέχειν
dy, = παρεῖχεν ἄν (G. 211); depends on the idea of saying implied m

HERODOTUS. 17

συνεβούλευσε : for it would have subjected them to the alternative, dc. —
- κάκιστα, &c., by the worst fate that ever befell men. (G. 168.)

27. spopévay, to wait (for him). — ἀπῆκε (v. ἀφίημι), sent of. — Θέρμῃ
δέ rq. . . οἰκημένῃ, and [I mean} Therma which is situated, cc.

The account of the march of Xerxes from Doriscus (8 25) to Acanthus
(3 27), which is chiefly descriptive, is here omitted. Acanthus is just
northwest of the Isthmus of Mount Athos, through which the canal (ὃ 4)
had been dug by order of Xerxes. Here therefore, as is stated in § 27, the
king separated from his fleet, sending it through the canal and round the
two western capes of Chalcidice to the head of the Gulf of Therma. The
only account given by Herodotus of the passage of the fleet through the
canal is in the words (VII. 122), διεξξέπλωσε τὴν διώρυχα τὴν ἐν τῴ “Abyw
γενομένην. The fleet remained at Therma until its departure for the coast
of Thessaly (p. 137, § 5).

Meanwhile Xerxes marched with his army across Chalcidice, from Acan-
thus to Therma. On the way (according to Hdt. VII. 125) the camels
which carried the provisions were attacked by lions (f). On reaching
Therma, they encamped on the shore of the Gulf, the camp extending
from Therma to the mouth of the Haliacmon on the western coast. South
of this river and north of Mount Olympus was Pieria, celebrated as the
birthplace and the home of the nine Muses. In this region Xerxes
remained (§ 28), until he began his march of eleven or twelve days to
Thermopylae (p. 140, § 13).

28. κήρνκες : see p. 122, 8 7. — κεινοί (= κενοί), empty-handed.

Page 131. — trapov ὅρκιον : cf. Latin ferire foedus. — καταστάντων
et, having come into (i. 6. being in) a good condition. — σφί (G. 184, 3,
N. 4). — δεκατεῦσαι (causal) depends on ὅρκιον εἶχε, as if it were they took
an oath to, ἄς. (G. 271).

29. Aapelov πέμψαντος : see p. 112, § 2. — of μέν, the Athenians. —
τὸ βάραθρον, the pit: this was a deep hole at Athens, like a well, into
which criminals were cast, iron hooks in the sides tearing the body to
pieces as it fell. Miltiades is said to have counselled this act, wishing to
commit the city to inexpiable hostility against Persia. — συνήνεικε (v. συμ-
φέρω) γενέσθαι, chanced to befall. — ἀνεθέλητον, lit. unwelcome, belongs
to ὅ τι. —In later times it was believed that the misfortunes of Miltiades
were the retribution of this impiety. In Sparta, the wrath of the hero
Talthybius, herald of Agamemnon, fell upon the state, and would not be
appeased until two noble Spartans had offered themselves in expiation, and
surrendered themselves to the Persians; Xerxes, however, generously
spared their lives. But their sons, when proceeding as Spartan envoys to
Persia, during the Peloponnesian War, were captured by the Athenians
and put to death. Then at length, sixty years after it was committed,
the crime against the ambassadors of Darius was atoned.

80. xarlero, was sent forth. — οὐδὲν πεισόμενοι ἄχαρι, likely to suffer
no harm,

78 HERODOTUS.

81. ἐξέργομαι, 7 am constrained. Herodotus is writing some fifty years
after the Persian wars, when Athens was unpopular in consequence of the
extent of her empire. (See notes, p. 31.)

Page 442. — ἐπειρῶντο ἀντιεύμενοι, would have attempted opposition :
in Hdt. πειράομαι takes the participle like the verbs mentioned in G. 279,
2, N. — ἡντιοῦτο and ἐγίγνετο both refer to past time, like ἐπειρῶντο ἄν
above (G. 222). --- wal πολλαί, i. 6. no matter how many. — κιθῶνες
(Ionic for xvreves), an unusual expression for walls: Hdt. once calls a
wall a θώρηξ (I. 181), and Demades the orator uses ἐσθῆτα τῆς πόλοως in
the same sense. (Kriiger.) Compare the English curtain of a fortress. —
ἐληλαμένοι Sid, extended across. — προδοθέντες Gv... ἐμοννώθησαν : ἄν
belongs to the verb (not to the participle). So below, in μουνωθέντες ἂν
«+ ἀπέθανον : in ὃ 32, ὁρέοντες Gv... ἂν ἐχρήσαντο, we find ἄν repeated
on account of the length of the sentence, as it might have been in the
two other cases. (See G. 212, 2; and also Greek Moods and Tenses, § 42,
8, Note 1).

82. πρὸ rod, beforehand (G. 143, 2). — βασιλέος ἐπικρατέοντος, prot-
asis to ἣν dv, = εἰ βασιλεὺς ἐπεκράτεε (CG. 226, 1). — ἄν τις λέγων : ἂν
belongs to ἁμαρτάνοι : see last note on § 31, above. — τοῦτο τὸ ᾿Βλληνικόν
(accusative after éyelpavres) = τούτους τοὺς "EAAnvas.

Page 133. — 33. The oracles are in hexameter verse (G. 295, 4), and
the language is generally an imitation of the Homeric; the constructions
are often confused, as would be expected from the fact that the verses
were (or purported to be) spoken under the inspiration of the moment.
(1.) φεῦγ᾽ is addressed to the whole people represented by the messengers,
as if it were but one person. — ἔσχατα γαίης, to the ends of the earth
(G. 162). (2.) δώματα and κάρηνα are governed by λιπών. --- τροχοεῖ-
δέος refers to the walls of Athens, which made an irregular circuit around
the Acropolis or citadel. (3.) ἔμπεδον (as adverb), jfirm, in its place.
(4.) μέσσης (for péons), sc. πόλεως. (5.) κατά belongs to ἐρείτεει (G. 191,
Ν. 8). (6.) Zupenyevés, i.e. Assyrian: the Persians, who were high-
landers, having learned the use of chariots from the Assyrians of the plain.
— διώκων, driving: in the Persians of Aeschylus (vs. 83), Xerxes is said
to come Σύριον ἅρμα διώκων. (7.) ἀπολεῖ, 5.6. Ἄρης. (8.) ἱδρῶτι ῥεού-
μενοι, dripping with sweat, in their terror. (9.) κατά belongs to κέχνται:
the meaning seems to be that blood falls in showers from the temple roofs,
in which case the dative ὀρόφοισι must be explained as in certain Homeric
constructions (G. 184, 8, N. 1-4). But καταχέω generally takes the da-
tive in Homer (as the genitive in Attic) in the sense shower down upon,
which does not suit the present passage as well, but perhaps is correct. —
(10.) wpotSdv, foreboding, as if the blood were itself terrified. (11.) trov,
apparently addressed to éwo messengers; but the plural follows immedi-
ately. — ἐπικίδνατε, &c., deluge your souls with woes (perfundite animum
malis, Stein); or (as Liddell and Scott translate), spread a brave spirit

HERODOTUS. 79

over your ills: the former suits the context better: κίδνημι is kindred to
σκεδάνγνυμι, scatter.

34. ἐχρέοντο, felt themselves in. — προβάλλονσι σφέας αὐτούς, abandon-
ing themselves to despair (dat. after συνεβούλενε). --- ἱκετηρίας (ῥάβδον:),
the suppliant olive-branches. — λθόντας agrees with the omitted subject of
χρᾶσθαι, instead of taking the case of σφί (G. 138, N. 8). — ὦναξ (= ὦ
ἄναξ) : for the special sense of the title ἄναξ in Homer, see Gladstone's
Juventus Mundi, p. 152, according to whom it corresponds nearest with
the partly religious and partly feudal term Lord. — ἔστ᾽ ἂν τελεντήσωμεν
(G. 239, 2).

35. λέγουσι (dative), as they spoke. (2.) λισσομένη (G. 277, 5). (3.)
ἀδάμαντι πελάσσας (sc. αὐτό), making tt like (i. e. firm as) adamant.
(4.) οὖρος may be either for Spos, mount, hill, or for ὅρος, boundary : it
may mean, therefore, either the Acropolis of Athens or the bounds of At-
tica. Cecrops is one of the early (mythical) kings of Athens, in whose
reign (says Hdt.) the people were called KexpowlSar. (5.) Κιθαιρῶνος,
the boundary of Attica towards Delphi (see map). (6.) tetyos ξύλινον,
this is the celebrated ewovuden well of the oracle. (8.) μέναν, infinitive for
imperative.

Page 134. — (10.) ἔτι... ἔσσῃ, yet α day shall come (word) when thou
shalt meet him. (12.) Rawlinson translates

‘* When men scatter the seed, or when they gather the harvest.’’

36. συνεστηκυνῖαι, opposed, like wrestlers who stand together in the ring.
— ῥηχῷ, palisade: there were a few who clung to this interpretation, and
perished on the sacred hill (see IV. § 34). — κατὰ τὸν φραγμὸν... εἶναι,
was (used) with reference to, ἄς. --- τοῦτο͵ this expression. — συνεχέοντο,
were confounded (con-fusi).

37. Θεμιστοκλέης, a Greek of the Greeks, able, keen-witted, patriotic,
and unscrupulous : the man who by his single counsel proved the deliverer
of Greece. — el... ἐόντως, if the saying had really been uttered with refer-
ence to the Athenians (dye... εἰρημένον = εἴρητο : Stein). — οὐκ av...
Xeno Ova: = οὐκ ἂν ἐχρήσθη (6. 211). — μὶν δοκέειν, (he said) that he
believed. — τῷ θεῷ, by the God (G. 188, 3).

Page 135. — συλλαμβάνοντι κατὰ τὸ ὀρθόν, to one judging rightly
(G. 184, 5): Themistocles may probably have devised the oracle, as well
as the interpretation, wishing to impress the deepest terror at the real dan-
ger, so as to overcome the timid clinging to the city, and persuade the
people to accept the only chance of safety. — τούτον, this, refers to wapa-
σκενάζεσθαι. .. νγαυμαχήσοντας : i. 6. the ships (here implied) were the
wooden wall of the oracle. — ἔγνωσαν, decided (G. 200, N. 5): ol belongs
to αἱρετώτερα. --- τὸ σύμπαν εἶναι (G. 268, N.), in short.

38. ἐς καιρὸν ἠρίστευσε, prevailed (proved to be best) seasonably. — τῶν
ἀπὸ Aavpeov (G. 191, N. 6) belongs to μετάλλων. --- ὀρχηδόν, apiece, i. 6.
for each male citizen. If Hdt. is right (V. 97) in estimating the Athenian

80 HERODOTUS..

citizens at thirty thousand, the sum must have been fifty talents (about
fifty thousand dollars). — δέκα δραχμάς, about two dollars. — χρημάτων,
genitive of price. — διηκοσίας : as Athens had only two hundred ships at
Salamis, and must have had a fleet before this resolution of Themistocles
(Miltiades sailed to Paros just after the battle of Marathon with seventy
ships), and as fifty talents are an incredibly small sum for building two
hundred ships of war, we must understand Hdt. to mean that this money
was used (with other sums from the treasury) in building the fleet of two
hundred ships which fought at Salamis. Plutarch (Them. IV.) says the
money from the mines was used in building one hundred ships. — τὸν πρὸς
Αἰγινήτας : see above, 1. § 3. The Aeginetans at this time had the finest
navy in Greece, and they were called θαλασσοκράτορες, rulers of the sec,
during the ten years from 490 to 480 Β. c. Plutarch says of them at this
time, κατεῖχον of Αἰγινῆται πλήθει νεῶν τὴν θάλασσαν. — ἐς τό, for what
(for the purpose for which). —és δέον, nearly equivalent to ds καρῦν,
seasonably. — τοῖσι βονλομένοισι (G. 186).

39. ἐς τὠντό, into one place, probably the Isthmus of Corinth, after-
wards the place of meeting of various councils of war (see below, ITT. § 1).
— σφίσιν, to each other, as reflexive in sense of reciprocal (G. 146, x. 3;
144, 2). — πρῶτον... πάντων, first of all things: according to Plutarch,
Themistocles proposed this general reconciliation. — ἐγκεκρημένοι (which
is an emendation for ἐγκεχρημένοι), from ἐγκεράννυμι : the wars are said to
have been mixed up or concocted. See πόλεμος συνῆπτο above, I. ὃ 3.

Page 136. — πρηγμάτων, objective genitive. — φρονήσαντο εἴ κως ἕν
τε γένοιτο, &c.: the sense is, they resolved to send these spies and mes-
sengers, having formed a wise plan (φρονήσαντε!) in case the Greek race
should. in any way become united, ὥς. The apodosis to dd... γένοιτο...
πρήσσοιεν is suppressed (G. 226, N.), being implied in the context: i. e.
their plan would succeed (or the like) in case of union. See Hdt. VI. 52:
βουλομένην εἴ κως ἀμφότεροι γενοίατο βασιλέες, wishing that both might in
some way become kings, lit. having a wish (which would be realized) tn case
both should in some way become kings. (See Greek Moods and Tenses, § 53,

. 2).— ὡς . .. ἐπιόντων gives the ground on which the Greeks acted
(G. 277, N. 2).

In the narrative which follows, the spies sent to Persia are taken and
brought before Xerxes, who ‘‘ gave orders to his guard to take them round
the camp, and show them all the footmen and all the horse, letting them
gaze at everything to their heart’s content ; then, when they were satisfied,
to send them away unharmed to whatever country they desired,” — think-
ing he was thus surest to terrify the Greeks from all thought of resistance.
Argos jealously refused the alliance, unless she should have equal command
with Sparta, claiming that the supreme authority was justly hers, by right
of descent from Agamemnon. She was even charged with having invited |
the Persians to the invasion of Greece. Gelo (whose exploits in Sicily are
told at length) refused his aid, unless he should be put in supreme com-

HERODOTUS. 81

mand, — to which the Greeks retorted that they came ‘‘to ask for an army,
and not a general”; so Gelo stood ready to submit if the Persians were
victorious. He afterwards claimed, however, that he would have helped
the Greeks but for the embarrassment of a war with Hamilcar of Carthage.
Corcyra promised help, but kept back her fleet (under pretence of head
winds) till the crisis was past. The Cretans refused to assist, having
once suffered calamity from Minos (who had perished in his pursuit of Dae-
. dalus) for the aid given by Idomeneus in the Trojan war. And the Thes-
salians submitted, reluctantly, to overwhelming force.

IIT.

Page 136.—1. τῇ (= 9), where (in what region). — ἐν οἴοισι χώροι-
σι, on what sort of στγοιιπά. --- ἐσβολήν, i. 6. from Thessaly into Central
Greece. — τῆς ἐς Θεσσαλίαν, i. 6. the pass of Tempe, at the mouth of the
Peneius. Herodotus gives three reasons why the pass of Thermopyiae was
preferred : the second (καὶ pla), that it was single, refers to the Persians
having entered Thessaly by another route, and not by Tempe as was ex-
pected ; and to justify the choice on this ground, he mentions the igno-
rance of the Greeks as to the mountain pass, τὴν ἄτραπον, by which
Thermopylae was finally turned. —‘IoriarfriS0s, the territory of Histiaca
(afterwards Oreus) in the north of Euboea. (For the bearing of these
places, see a map of Greece.) This position was chosen to prevent the Per-
sian fleet from taking the flank or rear of their force at Thermopylae.

2. τοῦτο μὲν, τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον, first, as to Artemisium : τοῦτο μέν cor-
responds to ἡ δὲ ad ... ἔσοδος (i. 6. the pass of Thermopylae) below. —
ἐκ. . . Opnixlov, after (coming from) the Thracian sea. — σννάγεται (sc. τὸ
πέλαγος) ἐς... τὸν πόρον, τέ (the sea) contracts into the strait, dc. — ἐκ τοῦ
στεινοῦ Séxerm, i. 6. aftcr passing the strait, the shore (of) Artemisium in
Euboea (possessive genitive) comes next : Séxerar is used like ἐκδέχεται and
ὑποδέχεται (ὃ 3), excipit. — ἡμίπλεθρον, about 50 feet. The line of the
coast is now much farther from the hill, owing to the deposits made by the
river. Rawlinson says: ‘‘The pass is now separated from the sea through-
out its entire extent by a tract of marshy ground, a mile or two in width.”
— τὸ στεινότατον τῆς χώρης τῆς ἄλλης, the narrowest part of the whole
pass; τῆς ἄλλης is used as Thucydides speaks of the Peloponnesian war as
ἀξιολογώτατον τῶν προγεγενημένων, lit. the most notable of those which had
preceded it ; and as we often hear a thing called ‘‘the most perfect of all
others.” See map of Thermopylae at the end of the volume.

Page 137. - 3. τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρης (G. 160, 2), towards the west: in
fact, more nearly towards the south ; Hdt. thought of the coast as lying
from north to south. — χύτρους, caldrons: of these there are two, en-
closed in magonry. The hot springs of Thermopylae are salt, and of the

6

82 HERODOTUS

temperature of 100° Fahr. —“Hpaxdéos: it was said that these springs
were created miraculously that Hercules might have a warm bath after one
of his labors. — τὴν Αἰολίδα, the Acolian land, the more ancient name of
Thessaly. This irruption of Thessalians from Epirus is one of the earliest
movements mentioned in the traditions of the race afterwards called Hel-
lenic. Thucydides (I. 12) speaks of the migration of Boeotians from Arne
in Thessaly into the land afterwards called Boeotia, a result of this Thes-
sulian migration ; and he assigns the sixtieth year after the capture of Troy
as its date. — ἑπῆκαν, conducted (by trenches). — ὡς ἄν : Homer and Hdt.
sometimes used ὡς ἄν and ὅπως ἄν with the optative, as all writers do with
the subjunctive, without affecting the sense (G. 216, 1, N. 2). Here the ἄν
belongs to the particle, not to the verb (6. 207, 2) ; in Attic Greek, such
an ἄν would belong to the verb and form an apodosis.

4. ἐν Πιερίῃ : see note on II. § 27, above. — διαλνθέντες ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Ισθμοῦ,
breaking up [at, and departing] from the Isthmus.

Page 888. --- 5. ἰθὺ Σκιάθον (G. 182, 2). — Τροιζηνίη : this ship was
captured by the Persians, who (as Hdt. adds) ‘‘ took the handsomest man
on board, and sacrificed him at the ship’s prow,” reckoning it a good omen,
—— the more so as the man’s name was Leon. The two other triremes were
taken ; but the crew of the Athenian ship escaped. On hearing of this ad-
vance of the Persian fivet, the Greeks left their anchorage at Artemisium,
and retreated to Chalcis on the western coast of Euboea.

6. περὶ τὸ ἕρμα, upon the reef: this still lies in the mid-channel. —
κομίσαντες, having brought ἐξ (the column) for this purpose. — καθαρόν,
removed, i. 6. by being made harmless. — ἕνδεκα ἡμέρα : see note on
II. § 27, above. — πανημερὸν wAdovres: the distance is about 100 miles.
— τῆς Μαγνησίης χώρης, possessive genitive with the following accusa-
tives. — στρατός, the whole armament (army and navy).

In the estimate which follows (VII. 184-187, here omitted), Herodotus
makes the whole Persian armament, including army and navy, before the
battle of Thermopylae and before the storm, to consist of 2,641,610 men.
To the number of 1,700,000 foot-soldiers counted in the review at Doriscus
(see above, II. § 23), he now adds 80,000 for the cavalry, 517,610 for the
crews and marines of the fleet, 20,000 for Arabs with camels and Libyans
with chariots, and lastly 324,000 for the land and sea forces furnished by
the Thracians, Macedonians, and Thessalians, whom Xerxes had pressed
into his service since he entered Europe (see II. ὃ 25). This immense
total of 2,641,610 Herodotus proposes to double, to include all the non-
combatants (attendants, crews of corn-vessels, and camp-followers). giving
a grand total for the entire host of 5,283,220! Rawlinson, on various
grounds, reduces the estimates for the military force to about 1,500,000,
taking no account of the still greater exaggerations in the number of non-
combatants. ‘‘Of all these myriads,” says Herodotus, ‘‘there was not
one who for beauty and stature better deserved to hold this vast power
than Xerxes himself.”’

HERODOTUS. 83

7. πρόκροσσαι ... véas, they lay at anchor, arranged alternately (or
in @ quincinz), heading seaward, and etyht rows deep. The scholia on
Il. XIV. 35 explain προκρόσσας (sc. vies) ἔρνσαν as follows: ἄλλην πρὸ
ἄλλης παραλλήλως ἀνείλκυσαν κλιμακηδόν, i.e. they drew them up in
parallel rows like steps; Aristarchus adds, that this would give the appear-
ance of a theatre, κρόσσαι γὰρ al κλίμακες. This means the seats of the
Greek theatre, which were steps like those of a modern circus ; and we may
refer κλιμακηδόν (= πρόκροσσαι) to
the general appearance of the ships
from the sea, which, if they were ar-
ranged (for example) as in the figure,
might suggest the idea of a cuneus
in the theatre, especially if the shore
were curved, and if the inner rows
of ships were drawn up (as here) on a sloping beach. In II. 125, Hat.
says that the steps on the outside of the pyramids of Egypt were sometimes
called κρόσσαι. We may, however, refer κλιμακηδόν to the irreg-
ular lines in which the ships were arranged from front to rear (as in 9
the second figure). For another explanation, opposed to that of 2
Aristarchus, see Liddell and Scott, 8. v. πρόκροσσοι. --- οὕτω (sc. ὁ
appeov). —feodons, having become seething (i. 6. before the storm
burst). — ἀπηλιώτης (ἀπό-ἤλιος), properly an east wind, here (east- ©

ο
°

0 0 0 © 0 0 0 0 Oo
© © 0 © 0 0 0 o
© © © 0 © 0 Oo
© 00000
00000
© 000

northeast, referring to the “EAAnowwovrlas. — rotor... ὅρμου, who
were so anchored (as it allow it) : for οὕτω εἶχε ὅρμον (impersonal),
see G. 168, N. 3. — of δέ (G. 234; 227, 2), these. — ἀνασπάσαγ-
ves (G. 279, 2). — μεταρσίας, at sea. — ἔλαβε (sc. ὁ χειμών). --- Invods,
Ovens: see below. — τοῦ χειμῶνος χρῆμα, the matter of the storm, a com-
mon expression for the storm: cf. δὸς χρῆμα μέγα, a huge wild boar
(Hat. I. 36).

Most writers place Sepias, the rocky headland on which the Persian fleet
was wrecked, near the southeastern point of Magnesia, or even (as Grote)
beyond that point upon the southern coast. For the following account of
the topography we are indebted to Professor Sophocles, who was born on
the coast of Magnesia, and who has known the whole shore as a boy and
studied it as a scholar --

The east-northeast wind, the λλησποντίας of the ancients, is still the
terror of navigators on the ‘‘ harborless coast of Pelion” (Eurip. Alcest. 595).
But it is dreaded chiefly north of Cape Nekhori ; a vessel overtaken by the
wind south of this point can easily enter the channel between Thessaly and
Euboea. The rocky headland directly east of the highest point of Pelion
agrees best with the accounts of Sepias. Between this and the probable
site of Casthanaia (four miles below) are two beaches, separated by a point
of rocks. North of Sepias is another small beach, beyond which are several
caves in the steep cliffs (ἐν I[nAle), which are probably the ’Imvol or
Ovens. On these three beaches the fleet must have been drawn up, and
here the disaster must have occurred.

84 HERODOTUS,

Page 139.—8. ᾿Ωρείθνιαν : Orithyia, daughter of the Attic king
Erechtheus, was said to have been carried off by Boreas (the northeast
wind), as she was picking flowers on the banks of the Ilissus. The story
is pleasantly told in the beginning of Plato’s Phaedrus. — ὥρμηται, has gone
Sorth or spread. — περὶ AOwy : see above, I. ὃ 4, and note on I. ὃ 2.

9. λέγονσι διαφθαρῆναι is understood with οὐκ ἐλάσσονας. ---- γηοχέ-
οντι, being a landholder (γήοχος or yarfoyos). — καὶ τοῦτον, him too (as
well as other men), object of λνπεῦσα. — συμφορὴ .. . παιδοφόνος, a ca-
lamity afflicting him by the death of a child (or children): this seems to
imply that he was accidentally the cause of his child’s (or children’s)
death.

10. οὐκ ἐπῆν ἄριθμος, there was no reckoning. — καταείδοντες γόησι,
singing incantations by enchanters : γόησι is suspected by many recent edi-
tors. — ἀνέμῳ belongs to both participles. — Θέτι, Thetis, the sea-goddess,
mother of Achilles. It was said that the place at which Thetis was seized
by Peleus was called Sepias, because she there changed herself into a cuttle-
fish (σηπία) to escape her lover.

Page 140.— 11. ὀπίσω ἠπείγοντο : see note on ὃ 5, above. — ἔπωνυ-
μίην.... νομίζοντες, keeping up the name, i. 6. continuing to invoke Posei-
don with this title of Saviour.

12. τὴν ἄκρην : the southeast cape of Thessaly, often mistaken for Se-
pias itself. — Wéay (sc. ὁδόν), straight. — φέροντα, leading (Pagasae being
at the head of the bay, the Gulf of Volo). — εὖτ᾽... ἔπλεον, i. 6. on the
Argonautic expedition, rd κῶας being the famous Golden Fleece. —’Ade-
ταί, Aphetae, or place of departure, from ἀφίημι (through ἄφετος) in its

neuter sense seen in ἀφήσειν, (0 set sail.

"18. πορευθείς : see note on II. § 27, above. — ἐς Μηλιέας, i. 6. into the
land of the Malians, at the head of the Gulf of Malis, in whose territory:
was the outer end of the pass of Thermopylae. — rd ῥέεθρον (G. 160, 1)
belongs to ἀπέχρησε : see-note on II. ὃ 15, above.

Page 14. — - οὗτος is not antecedent to ὅστις, but repeats the idea of
the relative clause for emphasis.

14. ἄμπωτίς τε καὶ ῥηχίη, ebb and flow of the tide, which is seldom suf-
ficient to be noticed in the Mediterranean. — ἰόντι (G. 184, 5). — βοηθέ-
ovra, as an aid: the future is more common in this sense (G. 277, 3). —
καιομένῳ, when he burnt himself on Mount Oeta. — ἀποφανῆναι (6. 203).

15. κατ᾽ ἅ, at which = where, referring to ταύτῃ (where τ would have
been more regular). — δισχίλια ... πλέθρα, 22,000 plethra, i. 6. in sur-
face: the πλέθρον is a long measure of 100 (Greek) feet in length, or a
square measure of 10,000 square feet; the Trachinian plain, therefore,
must have contained nearly 8 square miles. ;

16. ᾿Ασωποῦ, not to be confounded with the Boeotian Asopus (see above,
I. § 18).

HERODOTUS. 85

Page 142. —’Apoucréom, i. 6. for the Amphictyonic Council, which
met twice in each year, once at Thermopylae and once at Delphi. The
word ᾿Αμφικτύονες (tlie same as ἀμφικτίονεξ) originally meant neighbors,
and shows the origin of this and other similar assemblies. The hero
Amphictyon, whose temple is here mentioned, was probably invented to
connect the foundation of this famous council with the Greek mythology.

17. Θερμο-πύλαι, from the hot springs. — φερόντων (like ἐχόντων just
before it), extending: see note on ἃ 12, above.— τὸ dnl... ἠπείρον
(G. 160), as regards what was on this continent (Greece): see above, § 3.

18. τοσοῦτοι μέν, i. 6. the 2120 just mentioned.

19. ἥκοιεν represents ἥκομεν of the direct discourse (G. 200, n. 3). —
οὐ γὰρ θεὸν εἶναι : the indirect discourse changes here from the optative to
the infinitive (G. 340). --- τῷ (= ᾧ) . . . συνεμίχθη : this aorist, being in
a dependent clause, conld not be changed to the optative (G. 247, N. 2).
— ὀφείλειν. .. πεσεῖν ἄν, ought to fall: ἄν may belong to ὀφείλειν
(= ὀφείλοι ἄν), ἐξ would be his due to fall; or it may belong to πεσεῖν
(πέσοι ἄν), it is his due that he should fali (if he should test his fortune).
In the former case it is very irregular in its position ; in the latter, in its
construction. (See Greek Moods and Tenses, § 42, 2, N.; ὃ 41, N. 4.)

Page 143.— 20. Hdt. honors Leonidas, the king of Sparta who be-
longed to the elder branch of the royal family, by giving his genealogy
through the line of Spartan kings up to Aristodemus, the great-great-
grandson of Hercules, one of the semi-fabulous Heraclidae who led the Do-
rian invasion of Peloponnesus. The twin sons of Aristodemus — Eurys-
thenes and Procles — founded the two lines of Spartan kings. (See
Smith’s larger History of Greece, Chap. 1V.)

21. ἔρσενος γόνου (G. 180, N. 1): Leonidas became king in 491 B. c. —
εἶχε, i. 6. in marriage. — τοὺς κατεστεῶτας, the established number of 300,
this being the regular body-guard of a Spartah king ; Leonidas, however,
knowing the desperate nature of the present undertaking, instead of taking
youths, as usual, now took only those who had sons living, that no family
might become extinct.

22. κατηγόρητο, impersonal (G. 134, N. 2), it had been charged against
them, μηδίζειν being the subject. — εἴτε συμπέμψουσι : the fature optative
might be used (G. 243). — ἀλλοφρονέοντες, reluctantly, or leaning to the
other side.

23. ἵνα... στρατεύωνται (G. 216, 2); subj. on the principle of indi-
rect discourse. — μηδέ, and not, sc. ἵνα : and that these two might not join
the Persians in case they should learn, dc. (G. 248). — ὑπερβαλλομένονς,
backward, putting off. — Kdpveu, the same festival which kept the Spar-
tans from Marathon: see note on I. § 8. — ὁρτάσαντες, after keeping the
festival.

86 HERODOTUS.

Page 144. — ἐνένωντο (v. νοέω). --- ds δὲ wal... καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕτερα τοι-
atra, pleonastic. — συμπεσοῦσα (like an adjective with ἦν), coincident :
the Olympic festival occurred every fourth year on the first full moon
after the summer solstice, about a month before the Spartan Carneia.

24. ἐλθοῦσι (G. 138, ν. 8). — περισπερχεόντων, being much incensed :
the word is very doubtful, and most probably 4 mistake for περισπερχθέν-
τῶν (see Liddell and Scott). — ἀλέξασθαι depends on ὀλίγων, too fer.

25. ὁκόσοι... ποιέοιεν (α. 243): the direct questions would be πόσοι
εἰσίν ; and τί ποιοῦσιν; — τοὺς ἡγεμόνας (6. 160, 1), by anticipation, in-
stead of being subject of εἴησαν. --- Ηρακλείδηφ : see above, ὃ 20. — wav
μὲν οὐ, not the whole, in antithesis to 6 δὲ τοὺς ἕξω. --- ἀλογίης . . . πολλῆς,
i. 6. very little notice was taken of him. — ὀπώπεε (v. ὁράω).

Page 145. — 26. ἀλλὰ... γάρ, but... since. — Δημάρητον : Dema-
ratus was king of Sparta in the younger or Proclid line, but was declared
illegitimate and succeeded on the throne (491 B. c.) by the next heir, Leo-
tychides ; soon after which he left his country to join the Persians. He
proved the most sagacious counsellor of Xerxes, but was almost always
overruled by the jealousy of the Persian court-officers. — γέλωτά με ἔθεν͵
you made fun of me. — ἀγὼν μέγιστός tons, ἐξ is my utmost endeavor.

27. vépos, (here) custom. — οὕτω ἔχων, of this παζωγε. --- τοσοῦτοι, so
Sew. — χρᾶσθαι (G. 269).
| 28. παρεξῆκε (v. παρεξίημι), Tet pass. — φερόμενοι, impetucusly. —
ἐπεσήϊσαν, came up to succeed them (erv-). — καίπερ (G. 277, N. 1).

Page 146. — πολλοὶ μὲν ἄνθρωποι, ὀλίγοι δ᾽ ἄνδρες, snany people, but
Jew men.

29. τρηχέως περιείποντο, were roughly handled: περιέπειν = to follow
round, to tend, to treat, dc. — ἐκδεξάμενοι, succeeding: see note on ἃ 2,
above. — ἀθανάτους, Zmmortals: this body of 10,000 picked Persians were
so called because the vacancies in their ranks were immediately filled, so
that the number always remained the same (Hdt. VII. 83). — κατεργασό-
μενοι, sc. τοὺς “Ελληνας. — οὐδὲν πλέον ἐφέροντο, gained no more: see be-
low, § 32, μέγα τι οἴσεσθαι.

30. ἄλλα te... καί, showing, both in other ways, and especially [in
this]. — ἐξεπιστάμενοι, used (like an infinitive) with ἀποδεικνύμενοι, show-
ing that they thoroughly (&-) understood how to fight, dc. (G. 280). — ὅκως
ἐντρέψειαν (G. 233). — φεύγεσκον (G. 122, 2). — δῆθεν implies that the
flight was a pretence. — ἄν belongs to ὑπέστρεφον in the iterative con-
struction (G. 206), not in apodosis. — καταλαμβανόμενοι, when they were
overtaken (in their pretended flight). — εἶναι (G. 265). — ἐδυνέατο (G. 122,
2; 128, 1), imperfect for ἐδύναντο.

31. ἀναδραμεῖν, leapt. ‘‘ With the grave Orientals, nothing could so
completely indicate an all-engrossing feeling of fear or horror as a gesture
of this kind.” Blakesley. — κατατετρωματίσθαι, indirect discourse with

HERODOTUS. 87

ἔσεσθαι after ἑλπίσαντοε. --- τὴν ἀτραπόν, the secret path mentioned above
in § 1. — ἐνώρων (v. ἐνοράω).

Page 847. --- 832. ὅ τι... πρήγματι (G. 244; 188, 1, nw. 2). — διέ.
φθειρε, brought destruction upon. — ΠΙνλαγόρων, a portion of the delegates
to the Amphictyonic council were so called. The meeting of the council
was called Πνλαία from Πύλαι (see note on § 16, above), even when it
met at Delphi.

33. Ἰπυλαγόροι : there is also a form Πυλαγόραι. — πάντως cov...
awvOdpevor, having certainly gained the most accurate knowledge. Many
names were current of persons said to have betrayed the pass to Xerxes ;
probably it may have been made known by more than one, in a region where
many favored the invasion, and many more were in terror of the invader.
— τοῦτο δέ, and secondly. — ec... ὡμιληκὼς εἴη, if he should have had
much to do with the region, i. e. as a consequence of having had much to do
with it (G. 202, 2): for the force of the rare perfect optative, see Greek
Moods and Tenses, § 18, 1, with Note.

84. ἤρεσε (v. ἀρέσκω). --- τῶν ἐστρατήγεε (see note on § 29). — dppéare
(G. 122, 2), for ὥρμηντο. --- περὶ λύχνων adds, about lamplight.

Page 148. — τότε (see note on § 8, above). — ἐν σκέπῃ τοῦ πολέμον,
sheltered from the war (G. 167, 3). —éx... χρηστή, at 80 remote a period
(see G. 191, N. 6) had it (the path) been shown by the Malians (G. 188, 3)
to be a pernicious thing: οὐδὲν χρηστή (commonly οὐδὲν χρήσιμος), of 20
good, is a euphemism for bad: these words are sometimes understood to refer
to the pass of Thermopylae itself (ἐσβολήν), and to mean that the Malians
had so long ago shown the pass to be useless.

35. Μελάμπυγον : this was an epithet of Hercules, implying manli-
ness and strength. — Κερκώπων : these Cercopes were droll, mischievous
dwarfs, who appear often in the stories of Hercules, sometimes amusing and
sometimes tormenting the hero. In the local legend of Thermopylae, they
appear as footpads lurking about the pass (hence their seats, Spas, at the
narrowest place), where they steal the arms of Hercules while he is sleep-
ing. Hercules seizes two of them and ties them to a pole, which he throws
over his shoulders and walks away with them. They have been warned by:
their mother to beware of the Μελάμπυγος ; and on seeing this character-
istic of Hercules as they are swinging behind him, they make such sport
of him that finally he too begins to laugh at their jokes and releases them.
A bas-relief taken from a temple at Selinus in Sicily represents Hercules
carrying the two Cercopes on his shoulders. The stone called MeXdprvyos
probably had some imaginary resemblance to the sleeping Hercules.

36. τὰ Οἰταίων : the mountain (usually called Callidromus) over which
the path led forms a part of the Thessalian range of Oeta: the words ἐν
δεξιῇ refer to the march southward and eastward after crossing the Asopus.
— ῥνόμενοι, keeping guard (as protectors). — dpovptovres, guarding (as
sentinels). — 4 κάτω ἐσβολή (G. 141, N. 3), i. e. Thermopylae itself. —
ὑποδεξάμενοι, having pledged themselves (or given a promise) to Leonidas.

88 HERODOTUS.

87. ἀναβεβηκότας (6. 280). — ὧδε, as follows, belongs to ἔμαθον. ---
ἐνέδυνον ... ἐνδνομένους (G. 199, N. 1): as they were putting on ¢thetr
own armor, the middle is more exact. — οἱ βάρβαροι is subject of ἐγένοντο.
— φανήσεσθαι (G. 203, ν. 2).

38. μὴ... loon, lest they might prove to be (G. 218 ; 216, 2).

Page 149. — φεύγοντες (G. 279, 2, κ.). --- ἐρχήν, originally, i. e. on
purpose to attack them. — παρεσκευάδατο (G. 108, 4, I.).— of δέ refers to
Πέρσαι͵, the subject of the preceding clause: this is not an Attic usage
(G. 143, 1).

cee ἠοῖ (G. 55, N. 1). — οὗτοι, the diviner and the deserters. — οὐκ

lev, forbade.

40. οὐκ ἔχειν (G. 203, n. 1), depends on λέγεται, by a change of con-
struction (G. 260, 2, N. 1). --- ἀρχήν : see ὃ 38, above ; ἀρχήν may often
be translated at all, like Latin omnino. — τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἶμι, 7 am
most strongly inclined to the opinion: so wots εἶμι (see Liddell and Scott).
— κελεῦσαι (G. 203) depends on the phrase τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἶμι. ---
αὐτῷ, intensive. — ἔχειν (G. 203, Ν. 1). — ἐλείπετο, awarted. — οὐκ ἐξηλεί-
φετο, remained undiminished.

41° γενέσθαι... ἀπολέσθαι : we should expect these to be in the future,
on the principle of indirect discourse (G. 203) ; but verbs signifying to give
an oracle are exceptional, probably because they imply a command. (See
Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 23, 1, N. 2). — “‘ The notion which gave rise to
this oracle seems to be the one, that in a dire extremity the anger of the
deity was only to be propitiated by a most costly offering.” Blakesley.
It was related that Leonidas, before he left Sparta, gave instructions to his
wife Gorgo for her conduct in widowhood ; and that waumeral games were
performed, as over him, in his presence.”

Page 150. — (2.) Πῳφσεΐδῃσι, descendants of Perseus: Herod. (VII. 61)
says that the Persians received their name from Perses, son of the Greek
hero Perseus ; a mere device to unite the two similar names. — (3.) τὸ μὲν
οὐκὶ... δέ, not this, but, dc. — (4.) οὖρος (= ὅρος, boundary), Sparta’s
bounds. — (5.) τόν (G. 140), Aim, i. 6. the invading Persian. — (7.) ἔτε-
pov, one or the other. — δια-δάσηται (v. δατέομαι or Salopas). — ἀποπέμψαι
and οἴχεσθαι depend on τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι in § 40, being partly ἃ
repetition of κελεῦσαι, &c. in that passage. All from μένοντι δέ (§ 40)
through the oracle is a sort of parenthesis.

42. τὰ ἀνέκαθεν, by descent. — οὐκ ἀπελείπετο, remained not behind,
i. e. did not separate himself from the army. Kriiger.

43. Θηβαῖοι déxovres: as unwilling hostages, they could have been of
little service ; it is probable that this is the representation made afterwards
by the Thebans, to reconcile themselves with the Persian conqueror. (See
8 55.) Their politics were at this time ‘‘ essentially double-faced and
equivocal.” Grote. A later orator, confounding Thespians and Plataeans,
says of the latter, that one half the adult citizens perished in the pass,

HERODOTUS. 89

and the remainder fought in the Athenian fleet at Artemisium and Salamis.
— οὐκ ἔφασαν, said that they would not, dc. —dwolvwdvres (G. 138, N. 8).

44, ἐς ἀγορῆς... . πληθώρην, until about full-market time, i. 6. the last
part of the forenoon, before μεσημβρία.

Page B32. — χώρος, here = space to be passed over. — τὸ μὲν γὰρ...
ἐφυλάσσετο refers to the fight of the two preceding days.

45. πολλοί refers to the Persians: but the subject changes suddenly at
ἅτε γάρ. --- τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, the dying. — ῥώμης ὅσον εἶχον μέγιστον,
their utmost strength; like ὡς μέγιστον expanded into os (or ὅσον) ἐδύ-
ψαντοὸ μέγιστον. — παραχρεύμενοι (sc. τοῖς σώμασιν), making their lives
of no value. — aréovres, reckless. —nkatrenyéta (Vv. Kat-dyvup.). — ol δέ,
referring to rots πλέοσι, not Attic (see note on § 38, above).

46. - γενόμενος, having proved himself (not having been). — τὰ οὐνόματα :
the names of the 300 could still be read on a column in Sparta in the time
of Pausanias, 600 years afterwards. — οἶκον, his estate. — ὧς ἐούσης gives
the reason of Artanes himself.

Page 152. -- τοῦτον ὑπεξείρυσαν, rescued his body. The bones of
Leonjdas were carried to Sparta forty years later, according to Pausanias ;
when the column just mentioned was erected. — τοῦτο συνεστήκεε, this
kind of battle continued.

48. πλὴν Θηβαίων : see below, § δ. --- λέων, with reference to the
name AcwvlSns. — τοῖσι... περιεοῦσαι, such of them as happened still to
have them (μάχαιραι) left. — καὶ xepol καὶ στόμασι, as we say ‘tooth and
nail,” but of course with no comic idea. — ἐξ ἐναντίης, in front. — περι-
σταδόν (adv. from stem of περιίστημι), 80 as tu surround them.

49. πρὶν 4 (G. 274, N.). — τοσοῦτο ... εἶναι depends on ἔφη implied
in what precedes. — τὸν δέ, but he, irregularly inserted, as if the sentence
‘had not been introduced by the relative τόν, to which πυθόμενον belongs.
— ὡς ἀγγέλλοι depends on the past tense εἰπεῖν (G. 203 ; 201, N. 2). — εἰ
. «. ἔσοιτο represents εἰ ἔσται in the direct form (G. 221, N.), of 1ξ was to
be (not if it should be).

51. αὐτοῦ ταντῇ τῇ wep ἔπεσον, there (i. 6. at Thermopylae), on the spot
where they fell. — σφί refers to the Spartans and Thespians. — πρότερον
HR... οἴχεσθαι, like πρὶν 4 in ὃ 49: the subject of οἴχεσθαι is τοὺς συμ-
payovs understood, which is also implied (in the genitive) after rots πρό-
-Tepov τελευτήσασι, — ἐπιγέγραπται : this verb applies especially to in-
scriptions, properly called ἐπιγράμματα (see below, after the inscriptions).

Page 153. — Πελοποννάσου : the Doric form, with a for ἡ (G. 30, 1).
‘In the preceding verse, τᾷδε and τριακοσίαις are sometimes substituted (on
conjecture) for the Ionic forms of the MSS., which can hardly be correct. —
χιλιάδες τέτορες : the number who fought (ἐμάχοντο), although Herodotus
‘elsewhere speaks as if 4,000 με (VIII. 25). The inscription refers only to
those from Peloponnesus, who (according to § 18) amounted to 3,100. But

90 HERODOTUS.

later writers speak of 700 or 1,000 Lacedaemonians besides the 300 Spartans ;
and these must be included, although Herodotus makes no mention of
them. The whole question of the numbers at Thermopylae is much dis-
puted. The stern simplicity of the second inscription has made- it
especially famous. — ἀγγέλλειν is used for the imperative (G. 269). — In
the third inscription, Meytorla is Doric genitive (G. 39); and οὐκ ἔτλη
= scorned (Rawlinson). — ἕξω 4%, except. — Σιμωνίδης : Simonides, the great
lyric poet of Ceos, was often considered the author of all three epigrams.
His still more famous ode on the heroes of Thermopylae (or perhaps only a
fragment) is preserved by Diodorus : —

Τῶν ἐν Θερμοπύλαις θανόντων

εὐκλεὴς μὲν ἁ τύχα, καλὸς δ΄ ὁ πότμος,

βωμὸς δ᾽ ὁ τάφος, πρὸ γόων δὲ μνᾶστις, ὁ δ᾽ οἶκτος ἔπαινος.
᾿Εντάφιον δὲ τοιοῦτον οὔτ᾽ εὐρὼς

οὔθ᾽ ὁ πανδαμάτωρ ἀμαυρώσει χρόνος, ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν.

Ὁ δὲ σακὸς οἰκέταν εὐδοξίαν

Ἑλλάδος εἵλετο " μαρτυρεῖ δὲ Λεωνίδας

ὁ Σπάρτας βασιλεὺς, ἀρετᾶς μέγαν λελοιπὼφ

κόσμον ἀέναόν τε κλέος.

** Of those who at Thermopylae were slain,
Glorious the doom, and beautiful the lot ;
Their tomb an altar: men from tears refrain,
To honor them ; and praise, but mourn them nof.
Such sepulchre nor drear decay
Nor all-destroying time shall waste ; this right have they.
Within their grave the home-bred glory
Of Greece was laid ; this witness gives ὦ
Leonidas the Spartan, in whose story
A wreath of famous virtue ever lives.”
Translated by STERLING.

52. παρεόν = παρόν (6. 278, 2). — μεμετιμένοι (sce μεθύημι in Cat. of
Verbs). — οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι depends on λέγεται in the first line. — τὸν Ara,
his Helot servant : each Spartan soldier was entitled to be accompanied by
seven Helots, and probably many of these fell in the first battles at Ther-
mopylae, unmentioned by the historian (see, however, VIII. 25). — λαπο-
Woxéovra, (here) faint-hearted.

53. εἰ... ἣν, if tt had been the case. — κομιδήν, return: see κομῖ-
ζεσθαι,

_ Page 154. — προσθέσθαι ἄν (= προσέθετο ἄν) depends on λέγεγαρ
in § 52. — προφάσιος (G. 171, 1).

HERODOTUS. 91

54. ἡτίμωτο, he was disgraced, as the perfect ἡτέμωται means he is dis-
graced. — ἣν Πλαταιῇσι, i. 6. at Plataea, in the following year (479 B. c.).
— dvédaBe, he made up for. — ἐπενειχθεῖσαν (v. ἐπιφέρω).

55. ὧς... pyBlfover... ἀπικοίατο (G. 243).

Page 155.— 56. πλεῦναφ = πλέοναε. — cxévra... Πλαταιέων : this
attack of the Thebans on Plataea was the first hostile act committed in the
Peloponnesian War (431 B. ο.).

57. τῇ ἀληθείῃ, truthfulness. — τὰς διεξόδους, ‘‘ the ins and outs.” —
οἷα βασιλεὺς γενόμενος, since you were once their king. (See note on § 26,
above.) The counsel of Demaratus (here omitted) was that Xerxes should
occupy with part of his fleet the island of Cythera, off the south coast of
Laconia, which would draw off the Spartans from the defence of the Isth-
mus, and put all Greece in his power. This wise counsel was overruled by
the Persian Achaemenes. It was followed afterwards by the Athenians,
in the Peloponnesian War.

58. dworapdvras, sc. τινάς. --- δῆλα... γέγονε (G. 185, 2). — τῶν
(= ev)... ἀνθρώπων (G. 154, Note).

IV.

Page 156. — 1. vavrudv στρατόν : the return of the Greek fleet from
the Euripus to its position at Artemisium has been mentioned in IIT. § 11.
After describing the battle of Thermopylae in the Seventh Book, Herodotus
begins the Eighth Book with the sea-fight at Artemisium, which took place
on the same three days with the battles at Thermopylae (see below, αὶ 15).
— Πλαταιέες : see I. 88 11-13. — πεντηκοντέρους : these were vessels of
the older style with fifty oats, all in one row ; while the triremes, the more
modern ships of war with three banks of oars, were specially called νῆες,
sometimes νῆες paxpat.

2. ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον (G. 191, N. 6). — ἠἡγεμονεύῃ, be commander-in-chief.

3. ἐς Σικελίην : see 11. § 89. --- εἰ στασιάσουσι, ὡς ἀπολέεται (G. 223,
N. 1; 247). --- τοσούτῳ... ὅσῳ (Ο. 188, 2).

Page 157. — μέχρι... ἐδέοντο, s0 long as they (the Athenians) were in
extreme need of them (the Peloponnesian allies): μέχρι ὅσον here = ὅσον
χρόνον. The desertion of these allies, all of whom acknowledged the head-
ship of Sparta, would have withdrawn 113 ships. — περὶ τῆς ἐκείνου, i. 6.
to liberate the Greeks in Asia Minor and the islands; this refers to the be-
ginning of the Confederacy of Delos (about 477 B. c.). See notes, p. 31.

4. ᾿Αφετάς: see III. § 12, above. — παρὰ δόξαν... 4 ds κατεδόκεον,
pleonastic for otherwise than as they expected, παρὰ δόξαν being more em-
phatic than the simple ἑτέρως. — δρησμόν, a retreat, which would have
betrayed the force at Thermopylae to destruction, besides leaving Euboea

92 HERODOTUS.

unprotected against the Persian fleet. — mpoo-petvar ... χρόνον, to wart a
little longer. — Θεμιστοκλέα : Herodotus is writing after Themistocles had
died in exile, when even his disinterested acts were liable to be suspected
of corruption. But whatever we may think of his personal motives, we
Iriay easily believe that he used money furnished by the richer Euboeans in
the way described in § 5. — én’ @... ποιήσονται (G. 236, N. 2 and 3).

5. ἐπισχεῖν (G. 265). — ἤσπαιρε, struggled, i. 6. resisted. — ἀπολυιπόντι
represents εἰ dwoA(wots, as protasis to πέμψειε ἄν (G. 226, 1). --- ἠπιστέατο,
imperfect, supposed (G. 122, 2; 128, 1): οἵ. &vvéaro above, II. 8 30.

Page 558. — 6. εἴ κως ἕλοιεν (G. 226, N.), in case they should capture
them, i. 6. to capture them if they could. — καταλάβοι, should close in about
them (and save them), — an unusual meaning. — καὶ ἔμελλον δῆθεν ...
περιγενέσθαι, und they were likely (as the Persians thought, δῆθεν) to make their
escupe {i.e. if their flight was not hindered) ; whereas (δέ), according to their
(the Persians’) talk, not even a torch-bearer was to come off alive. The torch-
bearer in an army or fleet kept alive the sacred fire which was brought
from home, and his person was held sacred. His fall, therefore, implied
the utter annihilation of the whole army. It was a common saying that
“ποῦ even a torch-bearer escaped” (οὐδὲ πυρφόρος ἐλείφθη), implying
utter destruction. :

7. πρὸς ταῦτα ὧν : this corresponds to ἐκ μὲν τῆς ἀντίης in ὃ 6, taking’
the place of ἃ clause with δέ. --- ὡς ἄν (α. 216, 1, N. 2). —ol μέν, i. 6.
those who sailed round Euboea ; σφεῖς δέ, and they, i. e. the main force ;
both in apposition with the subject of περιλάβοιεν. --- ἐξ ἐναντίης, in front,
like ἐκ τῆς ἀντίης in 8 6. — τὰς ταχθείσας, i. 6. the two hundred.

8. αὐτὸς περιεβάλετο, got for himself. — ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γάρ of παρέσχε ὧς τότε,
but [had not done so], for he had never had [such] an opportunity as then. —
tr, at length.

Page 159. - ἐς ὀγδώκοντα: a swim of about nine miles! This is
matched by another later story, that, during the storm at Sepias, the same
man with the help of his daughter {also a diver) destroyed many Persian
ships by diving down and loosening their anchors. .

9. ἀποδεδέχθω, v. ἀποδείκνυμι (G. 202, 2, N. 1).— ὧς γένοιτο, that ἐξ
had taken place (G. 248).

10. ἐπενείκαντες, ascribing or imputing. — καταφρονήσαντες ταῦτα,
resolved on this ; καταφρονεῖν has this rare sense only in Ionic Greek. — és
μέσον implies that they hoped to get the Greeks into the circle which they
were about to make. — ἐπιστάμενοι, feeling sure. — ἀπονοστήσει, would re-
turn safe. — ἡδομένοισι ἣν (G. 184, 3, N. 6). — Seog... λάμψεται depends
on the idea of striving in ἄμιλλαν ἐποιεῦντο (G. 217).

_ Page 160.— 11. ὡς ἐσήμηνε, when the signal was given (G. 134, N. 1, @).
— és τὸ μέσον : the sterns were brought together as the prows were turned
toward the enemy on every side, — ἔργον εἴχοντο, held to the work. — κατὰ

HERODOTUS. 93

στόμα, beak to δοαξ. --- Σαλαμινίων : the Salamis in Cyprus is meant ; but
ἐν Σαλαμῖνι below refers to the island near Athens.

12. μέσον θέρος, inidsummer : τῆς épys is partitive genitive. The hattles
of Thermopylae and Artemisium took place in July, 480 Β. c. — κατιστέα-
το, imperfect, = καθίσταντο. --- ἐλπίζοντες, apprehending. — és ola = ὅτι
és τοιαῦτα, causal relative (G. 238). — ῥεύματα ἰσχνρά, swollen torrents.

Pace 161.—13. ὅκως ἄν (G. 216, 1, N. 2). — τὰ Κοῖλα, the Hollows
of Euboea are probably on the southwest side, opposite Attica.

14. ἐπεβώθεον, came as reinforcement: these 53 ships, added to those
mentioned in § 1, raised the Athenian fieet to the full number of 200. —
τὴν αὐτὴν ὥρην, the same time of day (see ὃ 9, above).

15. σφι λυμαίνεσθαι, should harass them (G. 184, 2). — τὸ ἀπὸ Ἐβέρξεω,
what Xerzes might do. — ot μέν refers to the Greeks both at Thermopylae
and at Artemisium ; οἱ δέ to the Persians at both places: πόρον refers to
the passage by sea and that by land. — Saws κρατήσουσι (G. 217, N. 2).

Page 162. — 16. παραπλήσιοι, equally matched, not in numbers, but
as is explained in the next sentence. — αὐτὸς ὑπ᾽ ἑωντοῦ ἔπιπτε: a Corin-
thian speaker in Thucyd. I. 69 speaks of the armament of Xerxes as αὐτὸν
περὶ αὑτῷ σφαλέντα. --- τράπεσθαι (lonic present passive), in apposition
with χρῆμα.

17. παλήσειε, should suffer: cf. ἥν τι καταλαμβάνῃ (G. 248). — ση-
μαίνειν depends on προσετέτακτο and also on érotpov. — és ἀναβολάς, with
delay. The fleet had suffered so severely in the engagements, — half of
the Athenian ships being disabled, — that it had already determined to
withdraw ; and, by advice of Themistocles, the Greeks were slaughtering ©
the cattle of the Euboeans for their own supplies.

18. περὶ τὰ πότιμα ὕδατα, i. 6. on the northern shore of Euboea, where
the Persians would land for drinking-water. — ἐπὶ τοὺς πατέρας : Attica
was called the parent city of the Ionians in Asia Minor. — μάλιστα μέν,
best of all. — ἐκ τοῦ μέσον ἡμῖν ἔζεσθε (G. 184, 3, N. 5), i. 6. be neutral.

Page 163. — καὶ αὐτοί, opposed to τῶν Καρῶν. --- ἡ ἔχθρη . . . γέγονε:
i. 6. in the assistance given by Athens in the Ionic revolt. — βασιλέα, ob-
ject of λαθόντα. --- ἐπείτε ἀνενειχθῇ : Herodotus occasionally omits ἄν in
this construction, contrary to the usage in Attic prose (G. 234; 228, Ν. 2).
— διαβληθῇ (sc. τὰ γράμματα), should be misrepresented (G. 248, N.).

In the interval which follows, Xerxes is said to have brought the soldiers
of his fleet to Thermopylae, that they might view the Grecian dead, — con-
cealing the trenches where 20,000 of his own dead lay buried, — “‘truly a
laughable device,” says Herodotus, ‘‘ which deceived nobody ; on one side
a thousand men lying about the field {as if these were all the Persians had
lost}, and on the other four thousand crowded together into one spot.” He
is also related to have asked of some Arcadian deserters what the Greeks
were doing. ‘‘ Holding the Olympic games,” was the reply, and ‘‘ seeing

94 HERODOTUS.

wrestling and chariot-races,” ‘‘And for what prize?” he asked. ‘* An
olive-wreath to the winner.” Upon which a Persian officer exclaimed,
‘* What men are these against whom we are brought out to fight ?— men
who contend with one another for honor, and not for gain!” At this time,
too, the Thessalians (who had an old border-feud with the Phocians) sent
a messenger into Phocis, offering, for a ransom of fifty talents, to save the
district from being ravaged by the Persians: to which the Phocians replied,
that they were free as the Thessalians to make friends with the Medes, if
they chose ; but they would never of their own will be traitors to the lib-
erties of Greece. This heroic answer greatly endeared them in later times
to the Athenians; but the opinion of Herodotus was, that their ancient
hate would have led them to choose the side opposite to the Thessalians,
whichever that had been.

19. ἐς τὴν Δωρίδα : it is strange that Herodotus represents the whole
army of Xerxes as marching into Boeotia by the road which leads through
Doris and Central Phocis by the valley of the Cephissus, — a road which,
by crossing a mountain ridge, avoided the pass of Thermopylae altogether.
Stein remarks, that probably a part of the army at least passed through
Thermopylae and took the upper road, which appears from the names of
towns on that route which were burned by the Persians. This road also
would be the only one practicable for the cavalry. — , footlet or spur
(see Lexicon). — 4 wep refers to Doris. — μητρόπολις, i. 6. the starting-
place of the Dorian emigration : the earlier home of the race was in Thes-
saly. — οὐκ ἐδόκεε, i. 6. the Thessalians advised against it.

20. ἡ κορνφή, the name Tithorea was given to one of the summits in the
mass of mountains called Parnassus: the place here mentioned was proba-
bly a natural fortress described by Plutarch (Sull. 15), below the highest
peak of Tithorea ; the present Velitza. — κατὰ Néwva, at (or above) Neon.
— κειμένη ἐπ᾽ ἑωυτῆς, lying by itself, i. 6. a solitary peak. — ἀνηνείκαντο,
understand thezr possessions.

21. Παραποταμίονς, “ Riverside,” a town and people of the same name
on the Cephissus.

Page 164. — τὰς δὲ πόλις... ἔσωζον, were protecting their cities, i. 6.
when the Persians entered Boeotia.

23. re... κατδρύξωσι, (G. 244): the direct question being κατορύξω-
μὲν ; shall we bury them? (G. 256). — αὐτός before εἶναι is adjective (G. 138,
N. 8). — πέρι (G. 191, N. 4). — πέρην, i. 6. across the Gulf of Corinth. —
Kwptxcoy ἄντρον, the Corycian cave, sacred to Pan and the nymphs, was
high above Delphi, in the side of one of the heights of Parnassus. It is
described as about 300 feet deep, 40 feet high, and abounding in stalac-
tites,

Page 165. — 24. ἀπώρεον, were in sight of. — IIpovntys, a title of the
Delphian Athena (Attic Προναία), who was so called because her temple
stood on the way leading to the great temple of Apollo, being thus before

HERODOTUS. 95

the temple (xpd ναοῦ). --- διὰ πάντων, above all: διά, has occasionally (in
Herodotus as in the poets, not in Attic writers) a meaning of pre-eminence,
of going through or beyond.

25. δύο κορυφαί (G. 138, N. 6), great masses of rock detached from the
mountain and thrown down, probably, by the defenders : many such frag-
ments are now to be seen in the pass. — ἰθὺ Βοιωτών (6. 182, 2). — μέζο-
vas 4 κατὰ ἀνθρώπων φύσιν, of more than human stature: ἔχοντας cannot be
correct here unless there is some error in the preceding words.

26. τούτους τούς belong to fipeas. — τῆς Κασταλίης, the famous foun-
tain of Castalia, which flows from the cleft between the two lofty peaks,
the Φαιδριάδες, which overhang Delphi. One of these peaks was called
Hyampeia. These two peaks above Delphi have caused the idea that the
chief peak of Parnassus, Lycoreia, has a double crest.

Page 166.— 27. τὸ ποιητέον = ὃ ποιητέον, as indirect question. —
ἐπὶ τοῖσι κατήκουσι (v. καθ-ἤκω) πρήγμασι, on the circumstances that had
arisen (or come in), like the Attic τὰ καθεστῶτα. --- rey . . οὐδέν͵ nothing of
the kind. — ot 8é the Athenians: see note on III. § 38, above. — ἀπιέναι
(v. ἀφίημι) depends irregularly on ἔπυνθάνοντο, which takes the participle
τειχέοντας regularly (G. 280).

28. ᾿Αθηναίων τῇ τις δύναται odfew, for ᾿Αθηναίων τινὰ τῇ (= ἡ) δύ-
γαται σάζειν. --- ἐς Τροιζῆνα : Troezen, on the Argolic coast, was ἃ sea-
faring place, sacred to Poseidon, and inhabited by an Ionic people kindred
to the Athenians. It deserves to be remembered to the honor of the Troe-
zenians, that they received the Athenian exiles ‘‘ with eager good-will,”
and ‘‘ passed a vote that they should be maintained at the public charge
by a daily payment of two obols to every one, and leave be given to the
children to gather fruit where they pleased, and schoolmasters paid to in-
struct them.” (Plutarch, Them. 10.) --- τῷ χρηστηρίῳ, that with reference
to the ‘‘ wooden walls.” — ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ, in the temple of Athena Polias, which
formed part of the Erechtheum on the Acropolis of Athens. Here was pre-
served the olive-wood statue of the Goddess, which was believed to have
fallen from heaven, and which was decorated with the costly peplus at the
great Panathenaic festival. — ὡς ἐόντι, i. 6. to the serpent as actually exist-
ing, implying some doubt of his reality on the historian’s part. — ἐπιμήνια,
monthly food-offerings. — as... ἀπολελοιπυίης : it was a common ancient
belief, that a city could not be taken or destroyed unless first forsaken by
its divinity. Thus the Romans had a. formula for summoning forth the
Gods of the cities they were about to attack ; while the true name of Rome
and that of its tutelar divinity were said to be kept as a mystery, lest they
should become known to an enemy who might thus disarm the city of its
protector. (See Macrobius, Sat. III. 9.)

Page 16%. — 30. προθέντος (for the more common λόγον προθέντος),
having given notice, the usual formula for opening a debate. — τῶν (= ὧν)
xwpéov, by attraction for ὅκον χωρέων τῶν ἐγκρατέες εἰσί, in which of the
places they were themsetves masters of. — ἐπιλέγοντες, as if ἔλεγον or ἔγνωσαν

96 HERODOTUS.

had preceded. — twa, where. — πρὸς δὲ τῷ ᾿Ισθμῷ, supply ἐόντες from the
clause with μέν.
31. ἥκειν, had (already) come (G. 200, N. 3); but πυρπολέεσθαι egal

present), was burning: so with ἧκε and ἐδηΐον below.

Page 168. — 32. τρισὶ prot: it was now September, B. c. 480, on the
20th « of which the battle of Salamis was fought. — ἄρχοντος, being Archon,
i. 6. Eponymus for the year : see note on Xen. Hell. 2, III. 1. — τὸ ἄστυ,
the city proper, all within the circuit of the walls. — ema stewards, having
με of the temple-treasures.

᾿Αρήϊον πάγον, the ἜΤΕΙ or Mars’ Hill. — ὅκως ... dpaay
Ἢ ἫΝ — ἐνεδέκοντο, did they entertain them, i. 6. the proposals of the
exiled family of Pisistratus.

34. ἐκ τῶν ἀπόρων : ἄπορα is used like ἀπορίαι. --- ἔμπροσθε : the north
side of the Acropolis is still sometimes called the front; the gateway and
the only entrance are on the west side. — ἤλπισε has here so much force
of apprehension that it takes ph and the optative like ἐφοβήθη (G. 218) :
for ἤλπισε dv, see G. 226, 2. — ἱρὸν. . . ᾿Αγλαύρου : the Aglaurium,
a sanctuary which commemorated the place where Aglaurus, daughter of
Cecrops, was said to have thrown herself from the Acropolis.

Page 169. — πρὸς τὰς πύλας, the gates of the temple, in the precincts
of which they had ascended.

35. ᾿Αρταβάνῳ : an uncle of Xerxes, who had been left in chief authority
at the Persian capital, although he had attempted to dissuade Xerxes from
his expedition against Greece.

36. ynyevéos, born of the Earth: see 1]. 11. 548, τέκε δὲ ζείδωρος ἄρουρα.
The temple of Erechtheus was one of the three temples united in the build-
ing commonly called the Erechtheum ; a second was the temple of Athena
Polias (see note on § 28, above); the third was the Pandroseum, which
contained the sacred olive-tree planted by Athena, and the salt spring
(θάλασσα) made by the stroke of Poseidon’s trident. These were proofs
(μαρτύρια) offered by the rival deities in their famous contest for the pos-
session of Athens, which was represented by Phidias in the group of statues
on the western pediment of the Parthenon. — ὅσον re, about, like ὡς with
words denoting number or size: the τέ is a poetic addition (not Attic)
allowed by Herodotus (G. 151, N. 4).

37. κυρωθῆναι depends on ἔμενον, which sometimes takes the infinitive
in the sense of waiting for something to be done. — πρῆγμα, subject of dis-
cussion (see § 30, above).

Page 170. — καὶ of (G. 151, N. 3).

38. περὶ οὐδεμιῆς... vavpaxfoes, i. 6. you will no longer have any coun-
try to fight for (for ob... οὐδεμιῆς, see G. 283, 8). — μὴ οὐ (G. 283, 7). —

dvayvacat, to prevail tpon : this meaning of ἀναγιγνώσκω is not found i in
Attic.

HERODOTUS. 97

39. συμμῖξαι, communicare. — ἑωντοῦ ποιεύμενος, making (or represent-
ing) them as his own.

40. τῶν εἵνεκεν (relative), = τούτων dv, &c.: τούτων depending on
λόγον. --- πολλός, frequent or urgent ; i. 6. he had much to say. — ἀπολνό-
pevos, in his defence, sese purgans. — ol ἐγκαταλειπόμενοι, they who do not —
enter the lists.

Page ΕΖ}. --- 41. ἀναζεύξῃς, break up, move off; lit. yoke up, used prop-
erly of moving by land. — dvawerrapévy, open (as a bird with its wings
spread), in contrast with the narrow waters at Salamis. — és τό (relative),
supply ἀνάγειν or some similar verb. — Bapvrépas (if correct) must mean
heavier in movement, not larger. — σφέας, the Persians. — κινδυνεύσεις....
᾿Βλλάδι : compare κινδυνεύειν τῇ ψνχῇ, in 111. 27.

42. τοσάδε, the following (G. 148, N. 1). --- πρὸς ἡμέων, for our advantage.
-- ἐς τήν (G. 191, N. 6). --- ἐν αὐτοῖσι (as above), i. 6. in what I propose.
— μένων = ἣν μένῃς (G. 226, 1).

43. περιεοῦσι : cf. περιγίνεται in § 42. --- λόγιον refers to the oracle,
II. 8 8ὅ. --- οἰκότα is object of βουλευομένοισι, and is also understood as
-subject of ἐθέλει, which here is used like φιλεῖ = solet. — βονλενομένοισι
before οὐκ ἐθέλει is dat. commodi.

Page 1'72.— πρός, according to, in obedience to.

44, τῷ μή ἐστι (G. 238) : ph shows that there is a conditional as well
as a causal force in the relative clause. — ἐπιψηφίζειν ἀπόλι ἀνδρί, fo put a
question to vote for (i. 6. on the motion of) a man without a country. — οὕτω
συμβάλλεσθαι, then (i. 6. after declaring his country) to join in proposing
opinions. — éwvroton, to himself and his fellow-citizens. — ἔστ᾽ ἄν, 80 long as:
the subjunctive in the direct discourse depends on ἐστί (here changed to
εἴη), which has a future (as well as present) sense ; the idea being, we can
certainly be said to have a country, so long as we have 200 ships to show.

45. ἐπεστραμμένα (v. ἐπιστρέφω), pressing, emphatic. — εἰ μενέεις καὶ
ἔσεαι : the apodosis is suppressed, ἐξ will be well.— τὸ wav... φέρουσι,
i. 6. with them rests the whole fortune of war. — οἰκέτας, (here) our households.
— Zipw, a town near Sybaris in Southern Italy. — Kal... αὐτήν, and
which (G. 156): a relative is seldom repeated in a new case, but a personal
or demonstrative takes its place.

46. δοκέειν, used absolutely (G. 268). — μὴ... ἀπολίπωσι (G. 218;
216, 2). — οὐκέτι belongs to ἀξιόμαχοι. --- ol περὶ Σαλαμῖνα (G. 141, N. 3):
ἀκροβολισάμενοι, after skirmishing.

Page 1'73. — Alax(Sas: among the descendants of Aeacus were Peleus
and his son Achilles. It is not to be supposed that the ship was sent for
images of these heroes ; but it was believed that they would come in per-
son, though unseen, to help the Greeks.

47. Δημαρήτῳ : see note on III. § δ7. --- Θριασίῳ πεδίῳ, between Parnes

_and Eleusis. — ὅτεών κοτε εἴη, indirect question, like ὅ τι εἴη (below). —

πρόκατε (= πρόκα re), suddenly, all at once. —taxyov, the song sung by
7

98 HERODOTUS.

the procession of the initiated (μύσται or μεμνημένοι) as they marched
along the Sacred Way from Athens to the temple at Eleusis at the annual
festival of Demeter: the name comes from the frequent recurrence of the
verse Ἴακχ᾽, ὦ Ἴακχε, in which Dionysus (or Bacchus) was invoked un-
der the name of Iacchus.

48. αὐτός belongs to the omitted subject of εἶπαι (see G. 138, Nn. 8):
ἔφη is still understood. — ἐρήμον ἐούσης, causal. — Μητρὶ καὶ τῇ Κούρῃ,
to Demeter (the Earth-mother or Ceres) and Core (the Daughter, Proserpine or
Persephone ; Κόρη, Ionic Kotpy). — pvetras, ts initiated: the term proba-
bly refers to the candidates for initiation having their eyes ee or cov-
ered. — τὴν φωνήν (G. 159).

Page 174. — 49. οὐδὲ εἷς, ne unus quidem, more emphatic than the
simple οὐδείς. --- ἐκ τοῦ κονιορτοῦ, after the dust. — ἔπὶ Σαλαμῖνος, towards
Salamis ; but ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, ἱπίο the camp. --- καταπτόμενος, calling to
witness ; properly used of clinging to the image of a God who is invoked.

50. Onnodpevor: see note after § 18, above. — Padrfipe, the old port of
Athens ; see map, and note on Xen. Hell., top of p. 43.

Herodotus now describes a discussion (here omitted), in which an im-
mediate attack on the Greek fleet at Salamis was urged by all the Persian
commanders except Artemisia, the queen of Halicarnassus. She advised
distracting the Greeks by threatening various parts of their coast with
attack. But her counsel seemed timid and slow, and was overruled by the
majority, whom Xerxes followed. Herodotus also remarks, that the army
and navy of Xerxes, when they reached Attica, were as numerous as they
had been before the storm at Sepias and the battles at Artemisium and
Thermopylae, the losses being made up by accessions from the Greeks.
This, however, may well be questioned.

The movement mentioned in the words ἀνῆγον ras νέας ἐπὶ τὴν Σαλα-
ptva, seems to have consisted in sailing across to some position southeast
of Salamis, from which an attack could be made the next day on the Athe-
nian fleet, which was lying in the Bay of Salamis (on the east side of the
island). — Srv... μέλλοιεν (G. 250, N.).

51. ἐπορεύετο, began its march. — συγχώσαντερ, having destroyed (dug
away): the road along the shore from Megara to Corinth is here artificially
made on the steep side of the Scironian cliff (Σκιρωνίδες), and it is still
rendered impassable by an ordinary rain-storm. This is the place at which
the robber Sciron kicked travellers into the sea, until he was himself served
in the same way by Theseus. (He has resumed his old business in later
years, and a new Theseus is sadly needed there. )

Page 173. — φορμοὶ ψάμμου wrfpecs, gabions.

52. "περὶ τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον Céovres, running a race for the whole, i. ὁ.
having everything at stake. — ἀνὴρ ἀνδρὶ παραστάς, cach man with his neigh-
bor. — τέλος (G. 160, 2 --- ἐξερράγη, the excitement broke out (like a
storm). — of μέν, as if πολλοὶ ἔλεγον preceded ; to this corresponds 'Aéy-

HERODOTUS. 99

γαῖοι δέ, Κα. --- ἀμύνεσθαι depends on some word like κελεύοντεβ under-
stood with ᾿Αθηναῖοι, &c.

53. λαθών, secretly. — ἐπεδέκοντο πολιήτας : after the great losses sus-
tained at Thermopylae‘and later at Plataea, Thespiae was obliged to admit
new citizens. This Sicinnus was an Asiatic by birth, and probably spoke
Persian. — λάθρῃ = λάθρᾳ (G. 182, 2). — φρονέων τὰ βασιλέος, heals
the King’s cause. — παρέχει, affords you an opportunity.

Page 1'76. — περιίδητε διαδράντας, allow to escape : notice the tense of
the participle (G. 279, 3). — πρὸς ἑαυτούς, against each other (G. 146, Ν. 3).

The first object of Themistocles was certainly to make a retreat of the
Greek fleet impossible, as he believed that thus only could the progress of
Xerxes be checked. He also wished to divert the attention of the Persian
commanders from their original plan of attack to an entirely new one of
cutting off a retreat, thus making them careless at the critical moment,
and perhaps inducing them to divide their fleet. It can hardly be doubted,
however, that here —as in his later stratagem (8 85) — he had a crafty
scheme for ‘‘laying up treasure” (ἀποθήκην μέλλων ποιήσεσθαι, § 84)
with the King, in case the Greek cause should fail or he himself (as actual-
ly happened) should be driven to seek the protection of Persia.

54. τοῦτο δέ, secondly. — ἀνῆγον... Σαλαμῖνα, they brought their west
wing up to Salamis, sailing round the island (or surrounding the island, i. e.
with ships stationed at important points). This refers to the ships which
formed the west wing as they were stationed the evening before the battle
(see note on § 50). — ol ἀμφὶ... Κυνόσουραν τεταγμένοι, those who had
been stationed about Ceos and Cynosura: it is now generally agreed that this
Cynosura must be some point of Salamis, and not the Cynosura of the bay
of Marathon. The word (lit. doy’s tat!) means simply a long point of land,
and the eastern point of Salamis suits the description better than any other.
Ceos must be some place or point in the immediate neighborhood. — κατεῖ-
χον .. . πορθμόν : the ships just mentioned, which were lying off Cynosura
at nightfall, now advanced and blockaded the channel between Salamis
and the peninsula of Piraeus (in which is Munychia). — ἀπεβίβαζον ~~
Περσέων (cf. πολλοὺς τῶν Περσέων, above), sc. τινάς (G. 170, 1). —

. ἐξοισομένων, because (they thought) both the men and the wrecks would re
especially likely to be brought ashore here. — ἕν πόρῳ, &c., i. 6. in the passuge
where the battle was to be fought.

The description of Herodotus, thus interpreted, agrees in all essential
points with that of Aeschylus. The great tragedian, who had fought in the
Athenian ranks of Marathon, was also in the battle of Salamis. It is to be
assumed that no account of the position of the Persian fleet on that event-
ful morning can be correct, which does not agree with his description in
the ‘‘ Persians.” This tragedy, exhibited in Athens in 472 B. c., contains
a graphic account of the battle, which a messenger, just arrived at the
Persian court from Salamis, narrates to Queen Atossa, the mother of

100 HERODOTUS.

Xerxes. The three principal points mentioned by Herodotus in § 54 are
prominent in Aeschylus. The landing of Persian troops on Psyttaleia, and
their slaughter, are made a most important part of the story (see note
on § 75). The stratagem of Themistovles is mentioned as the chief cause
of the Persian defeat. In consequence of this, Xerxes first orders a triple
line of ships ‘‘to guard the passage out and the roaring straits” (i. e. the
southern entrance of the straits of Salamis); then ‘‘others (‘‘to guard,” or
“ὁ [ο gail") in a circle round the isle of Ajax” (i 6. Salamis). The former
are the ships described by Herodotus as holding ‘‘all the channel as far as
Munychia”; the latter must be ‘‘the west wing,” which the Persians
bring round to Salamis (κυκλούμενοι). This last is made clearer by the state-
ment of Diodorus, that Xerxes sent round the Egyptian ships to blockade
the passage between the northwest point of Salamis and the mainland of
Megara. This is the movement to which Aristides refers in § 58. We
may suppose that other ships were placed at other points around Salamis,
where they would be of service if the Greeks made their expected attempt
to escape by night. Aeschylus then describes the disappointment of the
Persians when no signs of flight appeared; and their consternation, at
break of day, when, as the sun rose, they heard the solemn paean — the
war-cry of the Greeks — and the blast of the trumpet echo from the hills
of Salamis. He represents the attack as begun by a Greek ship. The bat-
tle seems to have been fought chiefly within the straits, so that the Persian
right extended towards Eleusis, and their left towards Piraeus (ἃ 62). The
Persians probably advanced in line from the open sea into the narrows,
where they were soon thrown into confusion from want of room. Aeschy-
lus speaks of the stream (ῥεῦμα) of the Persian fleet, which probably refers to
their mode of entering the straits. The Persians were so soon thrown into
confusion, that the fight must have rapidly lost its regularity, and probably
no systematic plan of the Greek commander was carried out. This explains
the confused accounts which we have of the progress of the battle, as to
which Herodotus (8 64) confesses himself unable to give details.

The battle of Salamis was fought on the 20th of September, 480 B. c.

55. συνεστηκότων, in conflict (see note on II. ὃ 36, above). —’Apto-rel-
δης : Aristides, who had been one of the generals at Marathon, was ban-
ished from Athens by ostracism (see Dict. of Antiquities) in 482 B. c.; but
his sentence had been revoked since the invasion of Xerxes had begun, on
the motion of Themistocles, his bitter enemy and rival. Recalled too late
to return to Athens, he thus joined the Athenians in their camp at Salamis
the night before the eventful battle, bringing news of the movement of the
Persians which was most welcome to Themistocles.

Page 87%. —56. περὶ rod, &c., on the question, gc --- ἴσον ἐστί, it is all
one. — Πελοποννησίοισι is to be joined with ἀποπλόον,.

57. ἐξ ἐμέο, at my instigation. — παραστήσασθαι, to bring them over, i. e.
to my opinion. — ds οὐ ποιεύντων... ταῦτα, because (as they will say) the
barbarians are not really doing this (G. 277, N. 2).

HERODOTUS. 101

- 58. ἥκειν καὶ ἐκπλῶσαι, indirect discourse for ἥκω καὶ ἐξέπλωσα. ---
τοὺς ἐπορμέοντας shows that the sea between Salamis and Aegina was
occupied during the night by part of the Persian fleet (see note on § 54).

Page 178. — ἐπείθοντο here takes the accusative, as in IT. § 34.

59. ἐς τὸν τρίποδα : this tripod was erected after the battle of Plataea.
A portion of the pedestal, 16 feet high, is now in Constantinople ; and the
names of the states which ‘‘ overthrew the Barbarian ” (including the Teni-
ans) are still to be read in the Doric inscription. (See Rawlinson’s Herod-
otus, IV. p. 395.) — τῇ Δημνίῃ : see ὃ 11, above. — κατέδεε, supply rd
γαυτικόν.

60. τῶν ΤῬηνίων is adnominal genitive with ῥήματα where we should ex-
pect ὑπό and the genitive with λεγόμενα. --- καὶ of (G. 151, N. 3)... ποιη-
σάμενοι, used irregularly for the genitive absolute, as if other speakers be-
sides Themistocles were to be mentioned in apposition. — ἐπιβατέων,
marines, fighting men on a ship, as opposed to sailors and rowers: émBarns
originally means any one who embarks (ἐπιβαίνει) ; see below, § 89. —
προηγόρενε εὖ ἔχοντα ἐκ πάντων, i. 6. made the best speech of all. — τὰ δὲ
brea... ἀντιτιθέμενα, and his words throughout contrasted things nobler with
things baser. — ὅσα refers to τούτων. --- καταστάσι, constitution. — κατα-
πλέξας, having brought to an end. — τριήρης : see ὃ 46, above. — ἀνῆγον, «ut
under way, i. 6. began to advance: in the next line, the middle is used in the
same way, without véag.

61. ἐπεκέατο, were close upon them. —éw\ πρύμνην dvaxpoter Bar (also
without ἐπί) is to back water: the statement is, that most of the ships at
first backed water and were on the point of running ashore on the island
behind them. — ἐξαναχθείς, advancing from the line. Ameinias is said to
have been a brother of Aeschylus ; another brother, Cynegeirus, fell at
Marathon (I. § 20). — φανεῖσαν agrees with = implied in the pre-
ceding accusative.

Page 179. — ἀνακρούεσθε (G. 200, Ν. 7).

62. κατά, opposed to. — πρὸς ἑσπέρης and πρὸς τὴν ἠῶ here are north-
west and southeast ; Eleusis and the Piraeus giving the general direction
of the Persian line. — Θεμιστοκλέος ἐντολάς ; see § 18, above. — χρήσο-
por... οὐδέν (G. 188, 1, N. 2). — εὐεργέτης ἀνεγράφη : “ Recording the
name is repeatedly spoken of in the inscriptions of Assyria and Babylonia
as the highest object of man’s ambition. See Esther vi. 1.” (Rawlinson. )

63. τῶν veov, i.e. Persian, as τούτους refers to certain Persians. —
ἔμελλε... συνοίσεσθαι, the result was bound to be such, §-c. — ἦσαν καὶ éyé-
vovto, were and proved themselves. — αὐτοὶ ἑαυτῶν, compared with themselves
(i. 6. at other times): the comparative here takes two constructions, a
genitive and a clause with #, the former being inserted merely for
emphasis.

64. pereferépovs, individuals. —"’Apreprolynv: as Artemisia was queen

102 HERODOTUS.

of Halicarnassus, the birthplace of Herodotus, he makes more special men-
tion of her. (See also note on § 50, above.) — καὶ 4: see below.

Page 180. — ἔμπροσθε γάρ : the clause introduced by γάρ ends with
ἐοῦσα, after which ἔδοξέ οἷ, it pleased her, irregularly takes the place of a
personal verb belonging to καὶ 4. — mpds... μάλιστα, close upon. — τὸ καὶ
συνήνεικε, which succeeded too: see ὃ 66, below. — φέρουσα, bearing down.
— ἀνδρῶν re... καί : this implies that the ship was not only (τέ) manned
by Calyndians, but also (καί) bore the king (1) of Calynda (a Carian town):
ἐπιπλώοντος is genitive absolute.

65. εἰ μὲν καί τι... ἐγεγόνεε, even 1f we admit that she had had some
quarrel with him, stil, §c. — μέντοι is used like δέ in apodosis (G. 227, 2).
— παραπεσοῦσα : Herodotus used συγκνρέω (as well as συμπίπτω) with
the participle, like τυγχάνω in Attic (G. 279, 2).

66. ἀπὸ τούτων, by what she had done (not especially κακόν). --- καὶ τόν
(G. 143, 2): 80 καὶ τούς. — φάναι, assented (imperfect). — ἐπισταμένους,
recognizing; but ἠπιστέατο, believed (wrongly). —atry συνήνεικε, proved
JSortunate for her (Kriiger), as in § 64, above; γενόμενα being causal: but
συνήνεικε may perhaps be taken with γενόμενα, happened to result fortunate-
ly, like συνεκύρησε in § 65 (we have, however, συνήνεικε γενέσθαι in § 66).
—Kal rd... γενέσθαι, and especially the circumstance, that, §c., referring to
τά te ἄλλα. — γεγόνασί μοι (G. 184, 3, N. 5).

67. ἀπὸ δέ (sc. ἔθανον) = ἀπέθανον.

Page ISL. - ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ, in the hand-to-hand conflict. — ἀποδεξόμενοι
here belongs to ἀποδείκνυμι, as ἀποδεξάμενοι in II. § 17: see note on
I. § 6 (p. 114).

68. ὡς... ἀπολοίατο (G. 122, 2), i. 6. that the collision was not acci-
dental. — ds προδόντων, sc. τῶν ᾿Ιώνων, became (as the Phoenicians charged,
ὡς) they had been traitors; the genitive absolute is more emphatic than the
simpler ὡς προδόντας would have been. — τοιόνδε, as follows. — κατεδύετο
. .«.. κατέδυσε: notice the difference in the voice and the tense. — τῆς
καταϑυσάσης νεός, the ship which had sunk them. — ἔσχον, took possession
(not had or held).

69. ἐκέλευσε, sc. τινάς as subject of dworapety. — αὐτοί refers to the
Phoenicians generally, who were to be taught a lesson. — ὅκως... ἴδοι,
whenever he saw (G. 233). — ὑπό, at the foot of: the eminence on which
Xerxes sat during the battle is low compared with the higher mountain of
which it is a projection. — πατρόθεν, i. 6. adding his father’s name to his
own, in the Athenian style. — mpooeBddero . . . πάθεος, i. 6. he contributed
somewhat (τι) to this disaster of the Phoenicians (G. 170). --- φίλος ἐών,
sc. τοῖς Ἴωσι, ᾿

Page ἘΞ52. --- 70. ἐν τῷ πορθμῷ, between Psyttaleia and the Piraeus.
The battle was fought between Salamis and the mainland, so that this
remote position of the Aeginetans could still be called sn the channel: hence
ἐκπλωόντων and ἐκπλωούσας.

HERODOTUS, 103

71. διώκουσα wa, (sc. πολεμίην). --- τὴν προφυλάσσονσαν ἐπὶ Σκιάθῳ :
see note on III. § 5. — κατακοπέντα, badly mangled, cut up. — τῆς στρατη-
yiSos, the flag-ship (of Themistocles). —és τὸν μηδισμόν refers to the
charges made against the Aeginetans before the battle of Marathon: see
1. § 3. — ὑπό, to the protection of.

72. ἤκουσαν ἄριστα, gained the greatest glory: εὖ (or κακῶς) ἀκούειν
= bene (or male) audire. —’Aprepolny : see § 65, and note on § 64. —
πρότερον ἣ elke = πρὶν εἶλε, before he had captured, priusquam cepisset
(G. 240, 1; 232, 2). --- ἥ after μὲν = or.— ὃς ἂν Hy, [to anybody] who
should take her alive (G. 248). — γυναῖκα: 50 Demosthenes afterwards
resented the Athenians’ fear of the later queen Artemisia of Caria (the
builder of the Mausoleum), calling her βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον, καὶ ταῦτα γυ-
vaixa, a barbarian, and a woman at that.

Page 183.— ἦσαν δὲ... Φαλήρῳ repeats the statement of the last
sentence in § 71, after the digression.

73. ὡς 8... γίνεσθαι, and when they came, ge. (G. 260, 2, N. 2). —
ἱρὸν ᾿Αθηναίης, Σκιράδον: this was probably on the southern point of
Salamis. — οὔτε τι... εἰδόσι for οὐδέν re... εἰδόσι. — ἠρῶντο (v. dpdo-
μαι), prayed.

74. οἷοί re, ready. — ἐπ᾿ ἐξεργασμένοισι, after all was over. — οὐ μέντοι,
&c.: Herodotus, who evidently disbelieved this story, (as Rawlinson re-
marks) ‘‘ recorded it more on account of its poetic character than from ill-
will towards Corinth.”

75. κατεφόνευσαν : this is represented by the messenger in the Persians
of Aeschylus as taking place after the battle, and as the worst disaster of
the day. The Persian here slain are called ‘‘the finest, the bravest, the
noblest, and the first in the King’s confidence.” (See § 54, above.)

Page 184. — 76. Ἰωλιάδα : this was on the Attic coast, a little more
than two miles southeast of Phaleram. — ἀποπλῆσαι, to fulfil, governs τὸν
χρησμόν, which is explained by τόν re ἄλλον... Moveraly, and irregular-
ly by rd εἰρημένον, &c.: for the latter we should expect τὸν κατὰ τὰ vavh-
για... εἰρημένον. --- ἐλελήθεε, had escaped the notice of. — φρύξουσι in the
oracle must mean shall roast (i. e. cook) with the wood of the oars which
shall drift ashore. The MSS. have φρίξονσι, which might mean shall
shudder at the sight of oars (ἢ). The following words, ἀπελάσαντος Bact-
Aéos, favor the common emendation φρύξουσι.

77. χώμα διαχοῦν, to build a mole or dam from the Attic shore to Sala-
mis. He also (ré) began a bridge of boats, and pretended to be preparing
for another sea-fight, while he was really planning a retreat (δρησμόν). ---
ἐκ παντὸς νόου, in real earnest. — πολεμήσειν is irregular after παρεσκεύα-
ora (G. 202, 3.

78. παραγίγνεται, travels (lit. comes in, arrives). — οὕτω, with such skill.
Page 185. — ὅσων ἂν ἡ (G. 225). — μὴ od (G. 288, 7; 268, 1, N.). —

104 HERODOTUS.

κατ᾽ ἄλλον, by one after another, a strange expression (perhaps a mistake) for
κατ᾽ ἄλλον καὶ ἄλλον. --- λαμπαδηφορίη, torch-race, like λαμπάς (1. § 7).

80. Μαρδόνιον : see below, § 86. --- wepgopevov, in attempt, i. 6. 80 far
as he could, belongs to the subject of ποιέειν. --- és τοσοῦτο ἐγίνετο, thus fur
did mutters advance, — ὧς τάχεος εἶχε (G. 168, N. 3). — διαφυλαξούσας ...
βασιλέϊ, to guard the bridges for the King’s passage (G. 265). — Zworipos :
Zoster is ἃ promontory of Attica about half-way between the Piraeus and
Sunium. — ἐπὶ πολλόν, fo a great distunce.

Page 186. — 81. ἤλπιζον, they supposed, followed by εἶναι in indirect
discourse (G. 203).

82. εἰ λύσουσι. ... τοῦτ᾽ dy... ἐργάσαιντο : the direct form would
have the same tenses and moods (G. 227, 1). — ἡσυχίην μὴ ἔχειν, to avoid
keeping quiet. — ἄγοντι μέν = ἐὰν μὲν ἄγῃ (G. 226, 1). — otre.. . ἔσται,
neither can anything succeed, — xopiSh, return. — τὸν ἐπέτεον αἰεὶ καρπόν,
the harvest of each successive year.— ἀλλά belongs to ἐατέον εἶναι (sc. ἔφη).
— ἐς ὃ ἔλθῃ, until he comes, without ἄν (G. 232, 3; 234).

83. μεταβαλών, turning, i. 6. from the others to the Athenians. — dppéa-
To, were eager (set out). — καὶ ἐπὶ σφέων αὐτῶν βαλλόμενοι, even taking it
upon themselves, i. e. on their own responsibility. — ὦλλοι = of ἄλλοι.

Page 18'%. — πολλοῖσι, many occasions. — ἀναλαμβάνειν, refrieve.
εὕρημα, good luck or godsend: the idea is, that the rescue of ourselves an
of Greece is a piece of special good fortune.

84. καταβάλλων τὰ ἀγάλματα : the Persian religion, like the Jewish,
was uncompromisingly hostile to idols (iconoclastic). A Persian therefore
might commit acts with no sacrilegious intent which would be gross im-
piety in the eyes of a Greek. — ἀπεμαστίγωσε : see 11. § 9, above. —
ἀλλ’... γάρ, but, since. — ἐπιμεληθῆναι (G. 270), let us care for: we should
expect Set here. — xal τις (G. 150, Ν.). --- ἀποθήκην : see note on § 53. —
τά περ ἐγένετο : Themistocles took refuge in Persia after the death of
Xerxes, when he claimed the favor of the King on the ground of the ser-
vices rendered to the Persian cause at this time, confessing and boasting
that his action had been treacherous to the Greeks. It may be doubted
whether he deceived the Greeks, or the Persians, or both. Grote remarks :
‘‘There existed in the mind of this eminent man an almost unparalleled
combination of splendid patriotism, long-sighted cunning, and selfish
rapacity. ... Moreover, a clever man tainted with such constant guilt
might naturally calculate on being one day detected and punished, even if
the Greeks proved successful.”

85. διέβαλλε, deceived them. — Connect σιγᾶν τὰ (= ἃ) ἐνετείλατο.

Page 188. - ἀπέπλωον ὀπίσω : after this, Themistocles sent threaten-
ing messages to many of the Greek islanders, by which he extorted large
sums of money, which laid the foundation of his great wealth of 80 or 100
talents. At Andros he demanded payment in the name of ‘‘ those mighty
Gods of Athens, Persuasion and Necessity”; but the Andrians refused in

HERODOTUS. 105

the name of their ‘‘two anprofitable Gods, who never desert their island,
Poverty and Helplessness,” and submitted to a siege, in which they baffled
all the efforts of the Athenians.

86. ἔδοξε with προπέμψαι (α΄. 202) means ἐξ seemed good; but with εἶναι
(G. 203) it means it seemed, and so with the following infinitive. — οὐκ
ἔφη, i. 6. said that he would not. — τριήκοντα μνριάδας : this is the army
which remained in Greece during the winter, and was defeated at Plataca
in the following year (479 B. c.).

87. οὐδὲν pépos, i. e. no important part, compared with the host with
which he entered.

Page 189. — twa... γίνοιτο ἐλαύνων, wherever he happened to come tn
his march, depends on the frequentative force of ἐπιτάσσων (GC. 283). —
ἅρμα τοῦ Διός : see note on II. § 13, above. — ἀπέλαβε, receive back: so
ἀποδίδωμι means give back or repay. — νεμομένας, as they were in pasture,
refers to the eight white mares (called simply ἵπποι λευκοί in II. 13)
which drew the sacred chariot : compare the poetic use of ἀφ᾽ ἵππων, &c.,
referring to the chariot.

88. τῇσι γηυσί:: see §§ 80 and 96. — ἐμπιπλάμενοι, gorging themselves.

89. ὅδε, as follows, after λεγόμενος ; not ὅδε λόγος (without δ) : this is
probably a specimen of the tales current in Greece which were invented to
malign the servile temper of the Asiatics. — χειμαίνεσθαι (ac. τὸν βασι-
Aéa), was suffering from the storm. — ὥστε = ἅτε (G. 277, N. 2). — ἐπιβα-
τέων, here probably simply passengers: see note on § 60.

90. κηδόμενος (G. 280). — οἶκε = ἔοικε,

Page 190. — ἀποσωθῆναι, was brought safe. — de δὲ ἐκβῆναι (G. 260, 2,
N. 2).

91. οὔτε ἄλλως οὔτε τὸ... πάθος, neither in other points, nor as to this
which [is said to have] happened to the Persians. — ἀντίξοον μὴ οὐκ ἂν ποιῆ-
σαι τοιόνδε, opposed to the idea that he would have done something like this: μή
is used because of the negative idea of ἀντίξοος (G. 283, 6), while οὐ is
added because of οὐκ ἔχω (G. 283, 7.) — τοὺς μὲν καταβιβάσαι (sc. ἄν) is
added (by apposition) to explain ποιῆσαι dv ; but ὅκως οὐκ dv... ἐξέ-
Bade reverts to the construction which ποιῆσαι ἄν represents (ἐποίησε ἄν).

92. τραπόμενοι, after the fruitless siege of Andros: see note on § 85, —
ἐγένετο ἀνδριάς, a statue was made.

93. τῷ γενομένῳ, to him who had shown himself. — διενέμοντο, gave their

votes ; lit. distributed among themselves, because all voted for some of those
present.

Page 491. — δεύτερα (adverb), in the second place. — συνεξέπιπτον, hap-
pened ( fell out) to agree: see ὃ 30. — dpovvoivro, had but one vote apiece,
94. ἀκρίτων, in active sense: Kriiger, however, interprets it unjudged,

with their merits undecided. — ἀριστήϊα μέν : we must understand ἀνδρα-
γαθίης or some such word ; Plutarch says (Them. XVII.), EvpuBidSp μὲν

106 THUCYDIDES.

ἀνδρείαρ, ἐκείνῳ (i. 6. Themistocles) δὲ σοφίας ἀριστεῖὸν ἔδοσαν. (Stein
will even insert the word in the text.) — ἱππέες : the 300 knights were
the regular body-guard of a Spartan king when he went into battle ; Leoni-
das, however, chose a special band of 300 to accompany him to Thermo-
pylae (see note on IIT. § 21).

95. ws... ἔχοι depends on the idea of saying in évelxee, — Τιμόδημος :
we must suppose this man to have been a native of Belbina, a little island
near Sunium, and to have been made an Attic citizen and enrolled in the
deme of Aphidnae. Plato and many other writers tell the same story of a
Seriphian, without making him a citizen of Athens. — ἐών, ¢f I were, = εἰ
ἣν (G. 222; 226, 1), and if thou wert. —’A@nvatos must here mean born in
Atheng,

96. ναντικός, sc. orparée. — ὁ ἘΖέρξεω περιγενόμενος, unless ὃ is insert-
ed before the participle, will mean which remained to (belonging to) Xerxes.
--- προσέμιξε, arrived at. — Kipy, in Acolis, on the coast of Asia Minor.

In the following spring, the army of Mardonius re-entered Central
Greece, and again occupied Athens; the Athenians, as before, retreat-
ed to Salamis. At the great battle of Plataea, in which the Greeks
were commanded by the Spartan Pausanias, Mardonius was defeated
and slain, and his army nearly annihilated. This disaster, with the
defeat in the sea-fight at Mycale, on the same day, was the final act
of the Persian wars in Greece,

THUCYDIDES.

THucypIDEs is by universal consent acknowledged to be the first of
Greek historians. The conscientious ,care with which he collected
and sifted his materials, the calm unprejudiced spirit in which he
judged both events and persons, the clear conception which he formed
of the tendencies of his age, and of the secret springs of political ac-
tion, and the acuteness displayed in the philosophic observations with
which (unfortunately too seldom) he accompanied his narrative, have
rarely been equalled and never surpassed. His sole work is the His-
tory of the Peloponnesian War, in eight books, which includes the
period from the beginning of the war in 431 B.c. to the middle of
411 8.c., where it breaks off suddenly. Xenophon finished the his-
tory of the war, and continued the narrative to the battle of Manti-
nea (in 362 8. c.), in his Hellenica, a work which makes the greatness
of Thucydides conspicuous by striking contrast.

Little is known of the life of Thucydides: in the first sentence of

THUCYDIDES. 107

his history he calls himself “an Athenian,” and states that he began to
write his account of the Peloponnesian War at the very beginning
of the struggle, foreseeing its magnitude and the importance of the
prize at stake. He elsewhere tells us that he continued his labors
until after the end of the war in 404 s.o. (See page 117.)

The passage here given is taken from the fourth book. It contains
the account of the fortifications of the Messenian Pylus in 425 s. o.
by the Athenians under Demosthenes (the same general who twelve
years later fell a victim in the disastrous Sicilian expedition), the at-
tempt of the Spartans to dislodge them, the blockade of the Lace-
daemonian force in the little island of Sphacteria, the appointment of
Cleon to the chief command, and the final surrender of 292 Lacedae-
monians, including 120 real Spartans, — such a prize as had never be-
fore fallen into an enemy’s hands. The account is especially enliv-
ened by the brilliant and amusing episode of Cleon, the leather-dresser
and politician, the great popular leader of the day at Athens, who
complained bitterly (and probably with reason) of want of energy in
the siege of Sphacteria, saying it would be easy to take the island
“if the generals were men,” and he would have done it himself if he
had been general. Nicias resigned his office of general, and nominated
Cleon as his successor. The latter accepted unwillingly, and only in
consequence of the clamor of the people; but he did it with the
characteristic boast, that within twenty days he would either bring
home the Lacedaemonians as prisoners or leave them dead on the
island. This promise he actually performed to the letter, and the
Spartan prisoners were brought back as Cleon’s prize. Thus the at-
tempt of Cleon’s enemies to make him ridiculous and to ruin him
ended in giving him still greater glory and wider influence.

The present extract begins with the second chapter of the fourth
book, and ends with the forty-first. About one third of the whole
passage, as it stands in Thucydides, is here omitted.

Page 192. —1. τοῦ ἦρος, i. 6. the spring of 425 B. 0. — ἡγεῖτο δὲ, &c.,
a form of words often used by Thucydides in describing the Peloponnesian
invasions of Attica, of which this was the fifth. — rds... vats, i. 6. the
ships mentioned at the end of Book III. In the preceding winter Athens
had voted to send 40 ships to Sicily, and had chosen three commanders,
one of whom, Pythodorus, went immediately ; -- whence the two others
are called here rots ὑπολοίπους.

2. ἅμα παραπλέονταφ, as they coasted along (G. 277, N. 1). Corcyra
(Corfu) lay on the route by which the Athenians usually sailed to Sicily,
following the coast as far as possible. — φυγάδων : these were of the ex-
pelled oligarchial party, restored and sustained by the Spartans: they had
already (B. c. 427) provoked a bloody and desperate revolution in Corcyra. —

108 THUCYDIDES.

αὐτόσε, i. 6. to Corcyra. — καὶ λιμοῦ ὄντος, &c.: here καί connects ripepol
and νομίζοντες, while ὄντος is causal. — κατασχήσειν τὰ πράγματα, that
they should gain the mastery. — ἐξ’ Axapvaylas, Demosthenes had commanded.
an army in Acarnania the year before. — αὐτῷ δεηθέντι, at his own request.
8. ἐγένοντο... κατὰ τὴν A., arrived off the coast of Laconia. — ἠπεί-
yovro, wished to press on (G. 200, N. 2).
4, ἠξίον, called upon them, asked them.

Page 193. — εὐπορίαν, sc. οὖσαν (G. 280). — ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς χώρας, i. 6.
a large extent of the country: ἐπὶ πολύ is used as a neuter noun and one of
the subjects of ὄν (see § 16). — σταδίους, i. 6. about 46 miles. — wore
οὔσῃ (G. 204, N. 1). --- τὴν πόλιν δαπανᾶν, to put the state to expense.

5. vorepoy... xotvéoas, implying that he communicated his plan to
them without success. — ὑπὸ ἀπλοίας, i. 6. detained by the storm which
brought them into Pylus. — περιστᾶσιν, coming round, or setting to work
(Arnold), agreeing with στρατιώταις. --- λογάδην, picking the stones, an ad-
verb of manner. — ds... EvpBalvor, as each piece happened to fit (G. 233).
— πηλόν, mortar. — ἐγκεκυφότες (sc. οὕτως) ὡς, stooping [in such a way]
that, as a final clause ; or ὧς μέλλοι may be taken like as... EvpBalvor,
above (G. 233). — ὅπως μὴ ἀποπίπτοι (G. 216).

6. τὰ ἐπιμαχώτατα, the parts most exposed to attack. — éfepyardpevor
(G. 279, 2). --- αὐτό, of itself, naturally. — ἐποιοῦντο, sc. τὸ πρᾶγμα. --- ὡς
... obx ὑπομενοῦντας σφᾶς, accusative absolute (G. 278, 2, Ν.; 277, N. 2),
in the belief that they (the Athenians) would not withstand them (σφᾶς, Spar-
tans). — ληψόμενοι agrees with the subject of ἐποιοῦντο, and is therefore
not in the accusative absolute. — ἐν ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις, in Aética, all of which
was politically a part of Athens: see, below, ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ.

7. ὡς... κατειλημμένης, we should expect the acc. (G. 280); but the
genitive is occasionally used, as this case generally follows πυνθάνομαι
(G. 171, 2). — οἰκεῖον σφίσι (sc. εἶναι), as we say, tt came hame to them.

Page 194. — πρὼ ἐσβαλόντες refers to the invasion of Attica. — ya-
pov, bad weather.

8. of ἐγγύτατα τῶν περιοίκων, i. 6. those who were nearest tothe city
of Sparta. The perioect were. descendants of the old Achaean population
of Laconia, which had been subjugated by the Dorian invasion ; they
formed an intermediate class between the Dorian aristocracy (of Σπαρτιᾶ-
ται αὐτοί) and the Helots (who were slaves). — ὑπερενεχθεῖσαι, carried
over the isthmus by machines. A canal had been cut through this Leuca-
dian isthmus about two centuries before, but it had since been choked by
sand so as to be impassable. — aef{és here means /and force, as it opposed to
naval forces: see note on Herod. 11. § 23. — προσπλεόντων (temporal). —
φθάσας, hastily. — ἀγγεῖλαι (G. 265).

9. καί connects εἰργασμένον and ἐνόντων, as both contain reasons for
ἐλπίζοντες... αἱρήσειν. --- ἣν ... ἕλωσι might have been eb... ἕλοιεν
(G. 248). — ἐφ αὐτόν (G. 191, Ν. 6).

THUCYDIDES. 109

10. Σφακτηρία, the long island now called Sphagia, which nearly closes
the entrance to the great bay of Navarino. The channels on both sides, how-
ever, are now much wider than they were in 425 B.c. See plan of Pylus.
--- ἢ piv... τῇ δέ, on one side (i. 6. the northern), and on the other.

Paye 195. — ὀκτὼ 4 ἐννέα, sc. vavol διάπλουν, i. 6. eight or nine ships
could sail through the channel abreast. — ἀντυπρῴρους, with their prows
facing (any one entering the bay).

11. τῶν καταλειφθεισῶν : of the five ships left him (§ 6) two had been
sent to summon Eurymedon (ὃ 8). — προσεσταύρωσε, he built a stockade
(to defend them) in addition to the protection afforded by the fort. — wapa-
γενόμενοι (G. 279, 2).

12. ἣν προσβάλλῃ, sc. ὁ πεζός (G. 248). — ἐκείνους, i. 6. the Lacedae-
monians.

13. ἄραντες : Thucydides often uses αἴρω intransitively (perhaps with
vats or στόλον understood) of making a movement with a fleet or an army.

Page 196. — of δὲ... ἐποιοῦντο : the meaning is, that they made
divisions, each containing few ships ; and made their attacks with single
divisions, allowing the others to rest in the mean time. — ἐν μέρει, in turn,
belongs equally to dvatwatovres and to the following words. — εἴ was...
ἕλοιεν, in case they should succeed in capturing the fort, gc. (G. 226, 3, N.).

14. ἐγένετο, made himself (not was). — σχεῖν, like προσσχεῖν above, to
effect a landing. — ἀποκνοῦντας follows ὁρῶν (G. 280). — τῶν νεῶν (sc. τι-
yds) belongs to ξννδιατρίψωσιν. --- ξύλων, (mere) timbers. — φειδομένους
belongs to the omitted subject of περιιδεῖν. --- πεποιημένους (G. 279, 3). —
ὀκείλαντας belongs to τοὺς ξυμμάχους, which is subject of κρατῆσαι as well
as of ἀποκνῆσαι.

15. τοιαῦτα and πολλά (G. 159,'N. 2). — παρεξειρεσία was applied to
those parts of the ship (either at the bow or the stern) which were beyond
the seats of the rowers, ἔξω τῆς εἰρεσίας. --- περιερρύη (v. wepippéw), slipped
jrom around (his arm). — προσβολῆς depends on &, being attracted from
the antecedent clause where it would depend on τρόπαιον. --- τῶν ᾿Αθη-
γαίων ... ὑποχωρούντων (G. 277, 2), connected by καί with the causal
dative χαλεπότητι.

16. καὶ ταύτης, and that too, as often καὶ ταῦτα. --- ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς δόξης
is nearly equivalent to πολὺ μέρος τῆς δόξης, ἐπὶ πολύ being used almost
like a substantive (see ὃ 4). The meaning is, it made at that time much of
the glory of the one (the Spartans) that they were peculiarly an inland people,
&c., and of the others (the Athenians) that they were maritime, §c.— ἐν τῷ
τότε (G. 141, N. 3). ἠπειρώταις, predicate after εἶναι (G. 138, N. 8) ; 80
θαλασσίοις, sc. εἶναι.

Page 197. -- 17. παρ-έπεμψαν, sent along (the coast). — ᾿Ασίνην,
a seaport on the Messenian Gulf. — ἐλπίζοντες . . . μηχαναῖς : the clause
ὕψος μὲν ἔχειν depends on the idea of thinking implied in ἐλπίζοντες, the
direct discourse being, ὕψος μὲν ἔχει, ἀποβάσεως δὲ μάλιστα οὔσης ἑλοῦμεν

110 THUCYDIDES.

μηχαναῖς, though the wall is high ; still, since this is the best place for landing,
we shall take it by engines. — ὅπῃ καθορμίσωνται (G. 244); the optative
might have been used here. — ἣν piv... ἐθέλωσι, sc. of Λακεδαιμόνιοι
(G. 247) ; an apodosis like ὧς ναυμαχήσοντες, to have a sea-fight, is to be
supplied from ὡς ἐπὶ vavpayxlav. — εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise ; see Greek Moods
and Tenses, § 52, 1, N. 2: the full sentence would be ἣν δὲ μὴ ἐθέλωσι. —
ὡς αὐτοὶ ἐπεσπλενυσούμενοι, with the intention of themselves sailing in against
them (G. 277, N. 2). — καὶ of μέν, i. 6. the Lacedaemonians. — ἃ διενοή-
θησαν : see § 9. — φράξαι, in apposition with the antecedent of & — οὔτε
oo» ἔτνχον ποιήσαντες (G. 279, 2), nor did they happen to do.

18. γνόντες, perceiving, i. 6. that the entrances were open. — ἑκάτερον :
see § 10. — καὶ μετεώρους ... ἀντυπρῴρους, both already afloat and with
prows pointing towards them. — ὡς διὰ βραχέος, as (was likely) at so short a
distance, belongs to what follows. — ἔτρωσαν, disabled, seldom used of
ships. — αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν (G. 188, 5, N.). — ἐν τῇ γῇ, where we should
expect és τὴν γῆν ; by a mixture of two expressions, ἐν τῇ γῇ οὔσαις and
ἐς τὴν γῆν καταπεφευγνίαις. Kriiger remarks that this use of ἐν for & is
found in Attic Greek only with the perfect. — πληρούμεναι, i. 6. as they were
taking their crews on Loard. — avadovpevor, muking fast to them (G. 123, N. 1).

19. ἐπεσβαίνοντες, see ἐπεσπλευσούμενοι in § 17, above.

Page 198. --- τῶν νεών, genitive after ἐπιλαμβανέμενοι (G. 171, 1), in-
stead of accusative after ἀνθεῖλκον. — ty τούτῳ... παρῆν (for ἐν τούτῳ τῷ
ἔργῳ... ᾧ τινι μὴ καὶ αὐτὸς παρῆν), each man believed that there had been
slow progress in any work in which he had not been personally present: κεκω-
λῦσθαι represents the impersonal ke:@Avrat, there hus been a hindrance, of
the direct discourse ; for ᾧ μή τινι παρῆν, see G. 232, 1. --- ἀντηλλαγμένος,
mutually changed. — περὶ τὰς ναῦς belongs to ἐγένετο θόρυβος. --- ὡς εἰπεῖν
(G. 268). — ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἥ, i. 6. they were doing nothing else than. — ὧς ἔπὶ
πλεῖστον, as far as possible. — περιέπλεον, they sailed round the island, in
token of defiance. — καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων, i. 6. from all, as well as from the few
mentioned in § 8.

20. τὰ τέλη, the magistrates, used like af ἀρχαί, the authorities: it takes
masculine participles (G. 138, ν. 4). — ὡς ἐπὶ συμφορᾷ μεγάλῇ, upon what
they acknowledged (ts) to be a great calamity. — παραχρῆμα, on the spot, be-
longs to ὁρῶνταφ ; and ὅ τι ἂν δοκῇ to βουλεύειν. --- ἀδύνατον Sy (G. 280).
— παθεῖν and κρατηθῆναι depend on κινδυνεύειν. --- παθεῖν τι is a common
euphemism for θανεῖν. ---- τὰ περὶ Πύλον is used as if σπεισαμένους pre-
ceded, having made a truce for the neighborhood of Pylus; like σπένδεσθαι
ἀναίρεσιν τοῖς νεκροῖς, to make a truce for the removal of the dead (Thucyd.
III. 24).

21. ΔΛακεδαιμονίονς ... παραδοῦναι (6. 271). --- ὅπλα émodpay, like
πόλεμον ἐπιφέρειν.

Page 199. -- σῖτον τακτὸν καὶ μεμαγμένον, meal (lit. grain) in a fixed
quantity and ready-kneaded: a χοῖνιξ was about a quart, and a κοτύλη
about half a pint. — κρέας, a piece of meat, of course limited in size. — θαρά-

THUCYDIDES. 111

sroyres are Helots. — ὁρώντων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, under the inspection of the
Athenians. — ὅσα, μὴ ἀποβαίνοντας, so far us (they can) without landing.

22. ὅ τι δ᾽ av... παραβαίνωσιν καὶ ὁτιοῦν, and whatever of these terms
either party shall transgress, even in any particular, = ἣν τι... παραβαίνωσιν
(6. 232, 8). --- λελύσθαι, shall (at once and beyond question) be roid (G. 202,
N. 3). --- ἐσππεῖσθαι αὐτάς, that it (the treaty) shall be considered as having
been made. — μέχρι οὗ, until, takes the subjunctive or optative like the simple
μέχρι (G. 239, 2): for dv omitted, see G. 239, 2, nN. — οὗ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνών,
lit. the ambassadors from Athens, by prolepsis (πρόληψις, anticipation). —
ἐλθόντων (sc. τῶν πρέσβεων), on their return. — λελύσθαι, perfect (as above),
shall be ( finally) void; while ἀποδοῦναι is the aorist infinitive in its ordi-
nary use (G. 202), shall return. — ὁμοίας οἴασπερ refers to the condition of
the ships. — παραλάβωσιν refers to the future (G. 232, 3), its apodosis
being found in ἀποδοῦναι. --- ἐπὶ τούτοις, on these terms.

Four chapters here omitted contain the speech of the Spartan embassy i in
the Athenian assembly. ‘‘ Their proposition was in substance a very sim-
ple one, — Give up to us the men in the island, and accept, in exchange for
this favor, peace, with the alliance of Sparta.” Grote.

23. τοσαῦτα (G. 148, N. 1) refers to the speech here omitted. — émév-
μεῖν, κωλύεσθαι, δέξεσθαι, and ἀποδώσειν represent in the direct discourse
ἐπεθύμουν, ἐκωλύοντο (G. 203, N. 1), δέξονται, and ἀποδώσουσιν. --- σφῶν,
the Spartans (G. 144, 2). --- διδομένης, offered (G. 200, N. 2). — τὰς σπον-
Sas... ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς αὐτούς, that they now had the treaty in their own
power, to negotiate it with them (the Spartans) whenever they might please. —
ἑτοῖμος is here declined with two terminations (G. 63, N). — ποιεῖσθαι is
middle, and has σπονδάς understood as its object.

24. τοὺς ἐν γήσῳ is subject of κομισθῆναι : ὅπλα and σφᾶς αὐτούς ara
objects οἵ παραδόντα-. --- ἐλθόντων, see § 22, above. — Λακεδαιμονίους,
subject of κομίσασθαι, recover. — awd... ξυμβάσεως, i. 6. by the Thirty
Years’ Truce, made in 445 B. c., by which Athens gave up all her rights in
Peloponnesus. (See Thucyd. I. 115; Grote, Vol. V. Chap. 45.) — κατὰ
ξυμφοράς, in consequence of defeats. — δεομένων. . . σπονδῶν, being then
somewhat more in need of a truce: for rt, see G. 160, 2.

Page ΦΘΟ. — 25. EvvéSpous, i. 6. α committee. — σφίσιν (G. 144, 2),
i. 6. for the Spartans. — οἵτινες... ξυμβήσονται (G. 236, N. 3). — πολὺς
ἐνέκειτο, was vehement against them (G. 138, N. 7). — γιγνώσκειν... πρότε-
ρον, imperfect infinitive (G. 203, Ν. 1). —txovras... αὐτούς (G. 280). —
οἵτινες; causal relative (G. 288). --- εἰ διανοοῦνται (G. 248, 1). — τι belongs
to Evyxwpety (G. 159), to make any concession. —odv τυχόντες, not having
gained [their object]. — ποιήσοντας, like ὄν, depends on ὁρῶντες.

26. ἰσχυριζόμενοι, maintaining stoutly (loyupes). — λελύσθαι, used as in
§ 22. — ἀδίκημα, as an act of injustice, follows τὸ τῶν νεῶν.

27. τὰ περὶ Πύλον ἐπολεμεῖτο, passive for rd περὶ τὸν Πύλον πολε-
μεῖν, to carry on the war about Pylus (G. 198). — ὁπότε... εἴη, belongs only

112 THUCYDIDES.

to the preceding clause, except, in case of a wind, ge. (G. 233). — βδομή-
κοντα, see § 17. :

Page 202.—e& τις παραπέσοι (sc. καιρός), in case one should occur
(G. 226, 3, N.), not an indirect question. —@oere... σῶσαι, connected
with καιρόν.

28. ὅτι μὴ pla, except one; here ὅτι was originally the relative ὅ τι,
and the ellipsis was ὅ τι μὴ ἦν pla (none which was not one). — οἷον εἰκὸς
ὕδωρ, such water as was to be expected (i. 6. on the coast, ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ).
—al piv... ὥρμουν, i. 6. some of the ships came near the shore for the
crews to take their meals, while others were anchored at some distance
from the shore.

29. οὕς, causal, = ἐπεὶ αὐτούς ((. 238). — ἡμερῶν (G. 179, 1). — ἐν
νήσῳ, sc. ὄντας. --- αἴτιον ἦν (G. 135, N. 4). — τὸν βουλόμενον, quemvia,
subject of todyav. — ἀληλεσμένον, v. ἀλέω (G. 104). — τάξαντες, &c.,
having fixed [its price] at a large sum, i. e. offering a high price for it. — toa-
γαγόντι,͵ past to the future idea of giving implied in ὑπισχνούμενοι. --- τῆς
γήσον, partitive genitive.

30. ἐτήρουν ἀνέμῳ καταφέρεσθαι, they watched [for a chance] to be car-
ried in by the wind: opposed to ὅσοι &... ἡλίσκοντο. The intermediate
words explain ἀνέμῳ καταφέρεσθαι. --- rots δέ, as if rots μέν (referring to
the Athenians) had preceded ἅπορον. --- ἀφειδής, reckless, without regard to
risk: the following clause with γάρ gives the reason of their recklessness.
— τετιμημένα χρημάτων, rated in money, i. 6. since it was understood that
a certain sum would be paid for them if they were injured (G. 142, 3). —
οἱ ὁπλῖται, i.e. of the besieged. —éptrAacwoy, were watching (for them). —
κατὰ τὸν λιμένα, i. 6. on the side of the great harbor. — καλωδίῳ, by a cord,
diminutive of kéAws. — μήκωνα, poppy-seed, which mixed with honey was
taken to relieve hunger. — λίνον σπέρμα, flaz-seed.

Page 2O@. — σφᾶς (G. 144, 2) is the object of λανθάνειν, to which rods
ἐσπέμποντας or τὸ ἐσπέμπειν is understood as subject.

31. τὴν φυλακὴν ἐπιλάβοι, might come upon their blockade. — tyovrds τι
ἰσχυρόν, having some strong ground of confidence. — δεξάμενοι (G. 277, 2).

32. κωλύμης, see § 24. --- ταὐτὰ οἷς διέβαλλεν = ταὐτὰ ἐκείνοις οὖς
(G. 153, Ν. 1). τ᾿ for the case οὗ εἰπών and ψευδής, see G. 138, Ν. 8. ---
φανήσεσθαι may depend on ἀναγκασθήσεται, in the exceptional construc-
tion noticed in G. 202, 3 (see Greek Moods and Tenses, § 27, N. 2, a)-; or
it may depend on γνούς irregularly, and by a change of construction. —
καὶ ὡρμημένους . . . γνώμῃ, even somewhat more inclined in mind. — ἀπεσή-
μαινεν, he alluded. — pddvov εἶναι depends on the idea of saying implied
either in ἀπεσήμαινεν or in ἐπιτιμών. --- παρασκευῇ), with a (proper) force.
— εἰ ἄνδρες εἶεν, if the generals were men, representing εἰ ἄνδρες εἰσίν of the
direct form (like εἰ μὴ πιστεύουσι and εἰ δοκεῖ above) ; not the same with
εἰ ἄνδρες ἦσαν. -- αὐτός γ᾽ ἂν... ποιῆσαι τοῦτο, he would have done this
himself, if he had been in command. See G. 211 and 222 (ποιῆσαι ἄν =
ἐποίησα ἄν). --- αὐτός is adjective (G. 145, 1); for its case see G. 138, N. 8.

THUCYDIDES. 113

33. ἐς τὸν Κλέωνα, against Cleon. — ὅ τι od... πλέει, [asking] why he
did not sail, even as things stood. — εἰ φαίνεται, if it appeared, might have
been et φαίνοιτο, like el... εἶεν in § 32. — τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι, so fur as they
(the generals) were concerned (G. 268, N.). — ἀφιέναι, resigned. — παρα-
δωσείοντα (desiderative of παραδίδωμι), wished to transfer tt [the com-
mand].

Page 203. - οὐκ ἔφη... στρατηγεῖν (G. 138, Ν. 8). — οὐκ ἂν oldpe-
γος . .. τολμῆσαι, here τολμῆσαι ἄν = τολμήσειεν ἄν (4. 211) : compare
ποιῆσαι ἄν in § 32.

34. ἐξανεχώρει (transitive), sought to escape from what he had said. — οὐκ
ἔχων ὅπως... . ἐξαπαλλαγῇ, indirect question for πῶς ἐξαπαλλαγώ; (G. 244),
not knowing how he should longer evade, §-c. — οὔτε φοβεῖσθαι... πλεύσεσθαί
τε λαβὼν, &c. represents οὔτε φοβοῦμαι... . πλεύσομαί re λαβὼν, &c., of
the direct form ; so below, ταῦτα ἔχων ἣ ἄξω. .. 4 αὐτοῦ ἀποκτενῶ For
λαβών and ἔχων see G. 138, N. 8. --- ἔκ τε Atvov, from Aenos, on the coast
of Thrace ; this τέ would naturally stand after πελταστάς. --- ἦσαν βεβοη-
θηκότες, periphrastic pluperfect (G. 98, 2, Ν.). --- αὐτοῦ, on the spot. —
ἀσμένοις ἐγίγνετο, were pleased with what had happened, lit. tt happened to
them pleased (ἃ. 184, 3, N. 6). — τοῦ ἑτέρου, one or the other (of two). —
ἀπαλλαγήσεσθαι depends (in sense) on λογιζομένοις, being in apposition
with τεύξεσθαι. ---- χειρώσασθαι would regularly stand in the same con-
struction (i. e. in the future), but it depends on the idea of hoping implied
in the preceding words (see G. 203, N. 2): translate ἢ σφαλεῖσι.... xa-
ρώσασθαι, or, if they should be disappointed tn this calculation (i. 6. in getting
rid of Cleon), [hoping] to get the Laceduemonians into their hands. — σφα-
λεῖσι = εἰ σφαλεῖμεν (G. 226, 1).

35. διαπράξαμενος and προσελόμενος belong to Κλέων understood. —
προσ-ελόμενος, faking, in addition to himself; so προσ-έλαβε. --- ὥρμηντο,
were eager. — ῥώμην . .. παρέσχεν, also the burning of the island gave him
encouragement. — στρατοπέδῳ follows προσβάλλοντας. --- βλάπτειν ἄν de-
pends on ἐνόμιζε, to be supplied from the preceding clause.

Page 204. — 36. προσίσχοντας agrees with the omitted subject of
ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι instead of standing in the genitive (G. 138, N. 8, end). —&a
προφυλακῆς, under guard (lit. an outpost). — κατὰ μικρὸν τῆς ὕλης, @ smull

extent of the forest: cf. éw\ πολύ, § 4, above, and note. — ἔλαθε κατακαυθέν

(G. 279, 2): for [καί] see below. — ἐλάσσοσι, for a less number than they
pretended : ὑπονοῶν (with πρότερον) is imperfect participle (G. 204, Ν. 1).
— Thy τε νῆσον ... οὖσαν : this clause is transferred from its usual place
after ποιεῖσθαι by Classen, on Kriiger’s suggestion: καί above is enclosed .
in brackets by Classen. Without these changes the passage is hardly
intelligible. — ἀξιόχρεων ... ποιεῖσθαι, i. 6. a thing which deserved greater
pains on the part of the Athenians.

87. ὡς ἥξων (G. 280, Ν. 4). — ἅμα γενόμενοι = ξυνελθόντες. --- σφίσι,
the Athenians. — κελεύειν παραδοῦναι depends on προκαλούμενοι, but is
also understood with βούλοιντο : summoning them, if they wished, to command,

8

114 THUCYDIDES.

gc. — ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, on condition that (G. 236, N. 2): τηρήσονται, as passive. —
ξυμβαθῇ : the active would be συμβαίνειν τι, to make some agreement (G. 159,
N. 2). See §§ 55, 56. — γυκτός, i. 6. before daybreak, included in τῇ
ὑστεραίᾳ. — ὀλίγον belongs to πρὸ τῆς be. — τῆς νήσον, partitive genitive
after ἑκατέρωθεν, which implies that they landed from both sides,

88. ὧδε, as follows. — διετετάχατο (G. 122, 2). — καὶ ὁμαλώτατόν τε
καὶ περὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, and what was at the same time (τέ) most level and near the
water. — αὐτὸ τοὔσχατον, the very farthest [corner] of the island, explained
by τὸ πρὸς τὴν Πύλον.

Page 203. -- λίθων (G. 167, 4). --- λογάδην : see § ὅ. --- εἰ .. . κατα-
λαμβάνοι, i. 6. if they should be driven to a forced retreat; βιαιοτέρα : the
comparative implies greater compulsion than they then had reason to ex-
pect.

89. οἷς ἐπέδραμον (G. 187), see δρόμῳ, end of § 37: ἐπιτρέχω in this
sense may take the accusative. — λαθόντες τὴν ἀπόβασιν, not being perceived
in their landing (G. 160, 1): although this belongs to ᾿Αθηναῖοι, it is
connected by καί to the other descriptive clause ἕν re ταῖς εὐναῖς ἔτι,
which refers to φύλακας. --- αὐτῶν refers to φύλακας : the participial clause
is more prominent in the genitive absolute than if the participle agreed
with its noun. — és ἔφορμον : see ὃ 27. --- ἅμα δὲ ἕῳ (G. 186). — θαλα-
plow : these were the rowers of the lowest bench of a trireme, those of the
upper and middle benches being called θρανῖται and fvytrat. — ὡς ἕκαστοι
(sc. ἔτυχον), in various ways. — κατεῖχον (neuter), were stationed.

40. διέστησαν, divided themselves. -- πρὸς ὅ τι dvruifevrat, indirect
question (G. 244). — ἀμφίβολοι, properly, in a position in which they
were attacked on every side (πανταχόθεν βαλλόμενοι) ; here perhaps simply
in perplexity, not knowing which way to turn: see § 47, below. — ἑκατέρωθεν :
on either side.

41. of περί (G. 141, N. 3). — ὅπερ hy πλεῖστον = τὸ πλεῖστον, or of
πλεῖστοι, the greater part. —& ἐναντίας, in front of them, opposed to ἐκ
πλαγίου, on the sides. — οὗτοι, i. 6. of ὁπλῖται, called ἐκεῖνοι below.

Page 206. — προσκέοιντο (G. 233 ; see 129, V.). — καὶ of, and they
(G. 151, ν. 3). — προλαμβάνοντες ris φυγῆς, getting the start in flight (lit.
securing beforehand a part of their flight), like προλαμβάνειν τῆς ὁδοῦ
(6. 170), — τραχέων ὄντων, sc. τῶν χωρίων, expressing the cause of wpo-
καταλαμβάνοντες, and connected by καί to the causal dative χαλεπότητι.
— ὅπλα, i. 6. the heavy arms of ὁπλῖται.

42. προσπίπτοιεν, sc. of ψιλοί (G. 233). — ὄντας (G. 280). — τῷ ἀμύ-
ψασθαι, in their defence. — νεωστὶ κεκαυμένης, see ὃ 36. — ἐχώρει πολὺς
ἄνω, rose thick. — τὸ πρὸ αὑτοῦ, what was before him, αὑτοῦ referring to τινά
understood as subject of ἰδεῖν.

43. πῖλοι, cutrasses of felt (Liddell and Scott), or perhaps ‘‘stuffed cloth-

ing of wool or felt” (Grote). — ἔστεγον, were proof against: στέγω (cf. Latin
tego) means to keep out what is outside (as applied to a ship which does not

THUCYDIDES, 115

leak), or to hold a liquid without leaking. — βαλλομένων, when they (the
Lacedaemonians) were hit. —~ οὐδὲν ... χρήσασθαι, compare τί τούτοιᾳ
χρήσομαι; (G. 188, 1, N. 2). — τοῦ προορᾶν (G. 262, 2): τῇ ὄψα adds
little to the meaning of προορᾶν, to look forward with the sight. — κιγδύνον
Te... καὶ οὐκ Eyovres, these two clauses denote the circumstances of what
precedes (G. 277, 6). —naO@’ ὅ τι... σωθῆναι, indirect question depend-
ing on ἐλπίδα ; the idea being, they were in despair when they thought
how they could defend themselves and be saved.

44. ἀναστρέφεσθαι (like Latin versari), to move about in a place ; some-
times simply to be. —€vyxAyjoavres, closing their ranks, forming a close
body. — ἐνέδοσαν, gave way, retired. — πολλῷ (G. 188, 2).

Page 207. — παρὰ way, sc. τοῦ ἐρύματος. — ἧπερ ἣν ἐπίμαχον refers
to παρὰ way, as if this were an adverb like πανταχῇ.

45. χωρίον ἰσχύϊ, owing to the strength of the place. — περίοδον αὐτῶν καὶ
κύκλωσιν οὐκ εἶχον = περιιέναι αὐτοὺς καὶ κυκλοῦσθαι οὐκ εἶχον : with the
verbal nouns ἔχω has the same force as with the infinitive. For αὐτῶν, see
G. 167, 3. — ἐξ ἐναντίας, in front, i. 6. directly upon them — ὥσασθαι, like
ἐξελάσασθαι below. —odav τῆς κυκλώσεως, like αὐτῶν κύκλωσιν above. —
és τὰ πλάγια, the act of surrounding, κύκλωσις, implies an attack upon the
sides (G. 191, N. 6).

46. ἀπέραντον ἦν, it (the business) was endless. — ἔφη, &c.: the direct
discourse would be: ἄλλως (in vain) πονοῦμεν ἡμεῖς ᾿ εἰ δὲ βούλεσθε ἐμοὶ
δοῦναι. .. μέρος τι, περιιέναι (α. 265) ... ὁδῷ ἡ ἂν αὐτὸς εὕρω, δοκῶ
βιάσασθαι (7 have a mind to force) τὴν ἔφοδον. When δοκῶ has this
meaning, the dependent infinitive does not stand in indirect discourse
(G. 202 and 203). — κατὰ νώτον αὐτοῖς, in their rear (G. 184, 8, N. 4). —
κατὰ Td del παρεῖκον.... νήσου, i. 6. wherever he could find a place which
offered a foothold on the steep cliffs of the island; ἀεί being used as in ὁ ἀεὶ
βασιλεύς, whoever was king. — περιελθὼν ἔλαθεν, he got round unobserved
(G. 279, 2). — τοὺς μέν, the Lacedaemonians; τοὺς δέ, his friends. — τῷ
ἀδοκήτῳ, by the unexpected act, or by the unexpectedness of the act (G. 139, 2).

47. γιγνόμενοι... ξυμπτώματι, falling into the same mischance: σύμ-
πτωμα (rare in classic Greek) means properly the coincidence of one thing
with another (whence our symptom) ; then accident, mischance. — ὧς εἰκά-
σαι (G. 268). — τῷ ἐν Θερμοπύλαις, sc. ξἐνμπτώματι, depending. on τῷ ad-
τῷ (G. 186). --- οὗτοί re corresponds to éxetvol re, and the following words
(through ὑπεχώρουν) belong to it, leaving of Δακεδαιμόνιοι without a
verb. — πολλοῖς te... καὶ ἀσθενείᾳ σωμάτων gives two reasons for
ὑπεχώρονν, and διὰ τὴν σιτοδείαν gives the reason for ἀσθενείᾳ.

48. γνούς (G. § 138, N. 2, 6) would regularly have been γνόντες : see
travoay. (G. 135, N. 1.)

Page 208. — ὅτι. . . διαφθαρησομένους : after γνούς we might have

either ὅτι διαφθαρήσονται (-cowro) or διαφθαρησομένους without ὅτι
(G. 280); a mixture of constructions like this in so simple a sentence

probably comes from mere carelessness. — εἴ wws ἐπικλασθεῖεν (G. 226, N. ;

116 THUCYDIDES.

248, 2), in case they should be broken in spirit: if [τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι is
not an interpolation here (as it seems to be), it must depend on the idea
of compulsion or persuasion implied in the preceding words. — τοῦ δεινοῦ
(G. 175, 2). — παραδοῦναι may depend on ἐκήρνξαν or on βούλοιντο (or
on both): either they proclaimed (to them) to surrender, §c., if they wished ;
or they proclaimed (to them), tf they wished to surrender, §-c., to do so. —
ὥστε βονλεῦσαι, on condition that (G. 266, 2) they (the Athenians) should
determine. — ὅ rr... δοκῇ (G. 232, 3). — παρῆκαν ... ἀνέσεισαν, lowered
their shields and waved their hands, to signify assent. — προσίεσθαι, assent to
(lit. admit): the participial construction common with δηλόω (G. 282) is
not used here, as the expression δηλοῦντες προσιέμενοι would be awkward.

49. ἐκείνων, the Lacedaemonians. — épypnpévov, chosen as successor
(ἐπι-). --- εἰ. .. πάσχοιεν, in case anything should happen to those (the other
two).

50. διακηρνκεύσασθαι, to send heralds over (δια-), implying to ask; on
which idea 8... ποιεῖν depends. — ἐκείνων... . ἀφέντων, the Athenians
not letting any one of them (the Lacedaemonians) go on this errand. — ἀπήγ-
γεῖλεν ὅτι (G. 241, 1, end): the quotation is here direct, and ὅτι is not to
be translated. — μηδὲν αἰσχρὸν ποιοῦντας, provided ye do nothing disgraceful.

51. διεκομίσαντο, carried their dead aver (Sva-) to the mainland.

Page 209. — 52. ὀκτώ, genitive with ἀποδέοντες (G. 77, 2). — Σπαρ-
mara: : of the 292 prisoners, about 120 were full-blooded Spartan citizens,
some of them of the first families in Sparta; the others were Lacedaemo-
nian periveci (see note on § 8).— οὐ σταδία, not'a regular hand-to-hand
battle, pugna stataria. — ἐν als... ἀπήεσαν, while the ambassadors went
away; but the emendation ἀπῆσαν, were absent, is generally accepted here.
— λάθρᾳ, as described in § 30. — ἐνδεεστέρως... ἐξουσίαν, i. 6. more spar-
ingly than the state of his supplies required.

53. ἀπέβη, was fulfilled (lit. came out). — ὥσπερ ὑπέστη, as he undertook
to do: see § 34. — μάλιστα qualifies παρὰ γνώμην. --- ἠξίουν. .. wapa-
δοῦναι, i. 6. they did not think it possible for the Lacedaemonians to sur-
render their arms (lit. they did not expect the Lacedaemonians to surrender,
§c.). — ἀἐξποθνήσκειν, sc. ἠξίουν.

54. μὴ εἶναι (G. 288, 6). — καί τινος... τῶν ξυμμάχων : Thucydides
seems to wish to relieve the Athenian citizens from the charge. — δι᾽ ἀχθ:)-
Sdva, to annoy him. — et... κἀγαθοί : the question was asked in a way
which implied that those who were not killed were not καλοὶ κἀγαθοί. ---
εἶναι ἄν = ἣν dv. — τὸν ἄτρακτον, the shaft, used both for a spindle and
for an arrow ; the words λέγων τὸν oloréy imply that ἄτρακτος was not
the common Attic name for arrow. — ὃ ἐντυγχάνων ... λίθοις, he who hap-
pened to be struck by (lit. he who met with) stones, gc. :

Page 210. — 55. μέχρι od τι ξυμβῶσιν (G. 239, N.), until they should
have come to some (τι) agreement: see § 37 (συμβαθῇ). — ἐξαγαγόντες

THUCYDIDES. 117

(G. 138, x. 8). — ὡς ἐς πατρίδα ταύτην, for és ταύτην ὡς ἐς πατρίδα, to be
joined with wéppavres. These ‘‘ Messenians of Naupactus” were settled
in this place (in Ozolian Locris, north of the Corinthian Gulf) by the
Athenians, who took them under their protection after the surrender of
Ithome (in Messenia) in 455 B. C. (For the revolt of the Helots and the
long siege of Ithome, see Grote, Chap. XLV.) — οὔσης, shown by ποτέ to
be imperfect (G. 204, N. 1), which was a part, &c. See ὃ 4, above; and
ἀμαθεῖς ὄντες, below. — ὁὀμόφωνοι, of the same (Greek) dialect. :

56. pth... τι νεωτερισθῇ, lest some revolution of still greater magnitude
should be stirred up for them in the country: this represents an active con-
struction νεωτερίζειν τι τῶν κατὰ τὴν χώραν, to revolutionize some of the
affairs in the country. For σφίσι, see G. 184, 3, N. 4. — ἔνδηλοι εἶναι :
a participle is understood, to be supplied from od ῥᾳδίως ἔφερον (G. 280,
N. 1). — κομίζεσθαι, to recover. — horrdvrey, genitive absolute with a pro-
noun to be supplied from αὐτούς. See note on § 39, above. — ἀπράκτονς,
active, = οὐδὲν πράξαντας.

In the year after the taking of Sphacteria (Β. σ. 424), the historian
Thucydides was appointed to a command in Thrace, where he had a
family estate in a district rich in gold mines. While he was in com-
mand, Amphipolis was suddenly attacked by the Spartan Brasidas.
Thucydides was summoned to bring aid; but Brasidas entered Am-
phipolis a few hours before Thucydides with his fleet sailed into the
mouth of the Strymon, at Hion, about three miles below Amphipolis.
For this misfortune or fault the historian was banished from Athens.
His exile (of “twenty years,” as he says) he spent in regions under
the Spartan rule, chiefly in Peloponnesus, gathering the materials of
his history. His death took place about B. 0. 401, when he was near
the age of seventy.

INDEX

TO THE SYNTAX OF GOODWIN’S ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR, WITH
PARALLEL REFERENCES TO HADLEY’S AND CROSBY’S GRAMMARS.

—_—

Goodwin. Hadley. Crosby, 1871. Goodwin. Hadley. Crosby, 1871.

§ 133 485 δ᾽ 8 δ 157, 1 589 400
134 485 400, 571, 666 5 2 548 484
135, 1 497 568 158 544 472

2 515 569 159 547 477 8
8 514 498 8 160, 1 549 481
136 540 69 a, 898 b 2 552 483
187 499 898 5 161 550 482
N. 1 675 894 ο 162 551 472
2 500 898 ἃ 168 545 476
8 601 896 164 558 480 ὁ
4 — 894 b 165 558 480 b
188 498 504, 498 5 166 656 480 8
189, 1 498 506 167 558 435 8
2 495 607 168 559 415 8
140 524 516 5 169 570 421 8
141 525 620 8 170 674 428 8
N.1 530 522 5 171, 1 576 424 5
2 527 530 6 2 = 432
8 492 526 8 = 407
4 609 527 8 172 575 414
5 = 627 178, 1 877 429
6 — 664 2 = 431¢
142, 1 538 623, 1 8 = 429 f
a = 523, 2, 8 174 579 404 8
8 ὡ- δ28 Ὁ 175 585 408
4 588 524 176 582 412
148 525 B18 8 177 583 699
144, 1 667 536 178 578 431
2 668 539 179 691 483
145 669 540 8 180 587 444
146 670 587 181 587 487 b
147 675 538 182 588 445
148 678 642 5 188 790 675
149 682 564 184 594 452 8
150 683 548 185 595 452 8
151 508 549 5 186 603 449 8
152 510 551 187 605 699
N.1 811 651 ἢ 188, 1 606 466 5
Δ 812 659 a 2 610 468
158 818 554 5 8 600 461
154 817 551 5 4 600 458
155 815 564 Ὁ 5 604 485 5

156 808 562 189 618 469 ἃ

© CO “16 Gt i 09 BO μὲ

219
220

224
225

230
231

INDEX.
Hadley. Crosby, 1871 Goodwin
612 469 b § 236
614 688 5 287
620 688 a 288
614 699 289
᾿Ξ 685 s 240
684 577 241
693 808 242
698 | 586 8 248
694 Ὁ 586 244
687 578 8 245
695 590 5 246
699 609 247
702 594 248
698 612 249
699 604 250
701 5918 251
712 268 252
- 609 5 253
-- 697 254
-- 601 255
696 —_ 256
720 590 5 257
733 648 5, 6598 258
788 - 660 259
697 602 260
707 606 261
746 616 262
744 618 268
745 620 264
47 619 265
748 618 266
788 658 a 267
757 821 5 268
719 613 5 269
727 623 270
739 624 5 271
739 624 s, 650 272
756 624 b 218
148 624 5, 660 214
732 631 8 275
745 681 5 276, 1
744 631 a 2
746 681 Ὁ 277
747 681 ς 278
748 631 d 279
729 Ὁ, 749 a 684 280
751, 722, 783 635 5 281
750 649 5 282
880 689 283, 1
755 549 2
755 640 8
757 641 4
761, 7578 641 5
758 641 6
759,788 641 7
760d 649 8

Hadley.

710 c, 885a 642
771, 8180 671d

822 558 a
755,758 641d
771 703d
788 8 62k
735, 788 643 9
735 5 643 8
7387 647

785 c, 86 ἃ 646

714, 788 659 s
788 θ48 5
729, 31 6486
868 Ὁ 701 i
869, 877, 781 701 3
721, 884 638

723,755 6558

720, 888 6288
720 Ὁ, 728 a 628 c

119

Crosby, 1871.

720e 617 b
720¢ 647

845 627

763 663 8
768, 778 668 a
764 663 d
767 663 d,e
780 -- 84 663 f
580, 764 664, 118
778 522 ἃ
765 664

770 671

813 671

772 665, 6716
784 670

508 b 670

id. 670 a
779, 541 670 Ὁ
508 b 669

769 703 a
785 673

785 678

786 678

788 674

790 675

796 677

8038 659, 677
804 6&2, 8
824 687

832 6&6 b
883 6&6 a
887 6&6 α
835 6&6 d
840 6&6 6
838 718d
846 718 ἢ

848 713 8, j

SOME OF THE IMPORTANT DATES OF GREEK HISTORY.

Legislation of Solon . . oe
Tyranny of Pisistratus and his Sons : . °
Conquest of Asia Minor by Cyrus . Ε Ξ ‘
Hippias, son of Pisistratus, expelled . o 8 ἢ
Democratic Constitution of Clisthenes . ἕ Σ

lonic Revolt in Asia Minor. : : : ᾿
Defeat of the Revolt: Miletus taken . ; ς
First Persian Invasion: Battle of Marathon ‘

Invasion of Xerxes: Thermopylae and Artemisium (J uly),

Salamis (September) : ‘ , ; ‘ .
Battles of Plataea and Mycale. ‘ ‘ ὡ ‘
Athens fortified by Themistocles . . ‘ : :
Confederacy of Delos. ‘ . .
Cimon banished : Ascendency οὗ Pericles : . .
Thirty Years’ Truce between Athens and Sparta.
PELOPONNESIAN WAR ‘ Ἢ : ; Ἶ ὲ

Death of Pericles . ὃ ‘ . ὃ .
Seditions at Corcyra . ᾿ ὃ . ᾿ .

Pylus and Sphacteria ; . ἃ
Peace of Nicias (Truce for Fifty Years) ὁ '
Sicilian Expedition . ‘ ὲ .

Revolution at Athens : Oligarchy of “400 . .
Sea-Fight at Arginusae . . . .

Battle οὗ Aegospotami . ; ; : .

Capture of Athens: Thirty Tyrants : . .
Athenian Democracy restored . ᾿ ‘ 5 °
Retreat of the Ten Thousand . : : ὃ Ξ

Death of Socrates ᾿

Battle of Leuctra : Spartans defeated by Epaminondas
Battle of Mantinea: Death of Epaminondas Ξ ‘
Accession of Philip of Macedon . . . .
Phocian or Sacred War . ὃ : ᾿ ‘ ᾿
Amphissean Sacred War . ς . . .
Battle of Chaeronea: Death of Isocrates . : .
Death of Philip: Accession of Alexander . .
Campaign of Alexander: Conquest of Persia . .
Death of Alexander ‘ ‘ ὲ : ‘ ‘
Death of Demosthenes . . . . . .

B. Cc. 594
560 — 510
- 546
i 510
- 507
. 500
. 494
᾿ 490

. 480
- 479
‘ 478

(about) 477

461

. 445
431 — 404
. 429
427

425

. 421
415 — 413
ὲ 41]
406

. 405
. 404
403

. 400

. 399
371

. 922

Digitized by Google

GREEK.

Wholesale. Retail.

GOODWIN’S GREEK GRAMMAR. Bv Wituam W.
pone ΕΝ ., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard eae Ὶ
ail mo 4 ° e e e . e e e . e . e

The object of this Grammar is to state general principles clearly and distiuctly,
with special regard to those who are preparing for college. In the sectiona on the
Moods are stated, for the first time ia an elementary form, the principles which are
elaborated in detail in the author's “" Syntax of the Greek Moods and ‘Tenses.”

GREEK MOODS AND TENSES. The Foorth Enition.
By Wuutiam W. Gocpwin, Eliot Professor of sees ee " Harvard Uni-
versity. lvol. 12mo. Cloth. pp 24 . ; Me

This work was first published in 1860, and it eoneared in 8 new (i — mach en-
larged and in grent part rewritten — i n 1865. In the present edition the whole has
been again revised; some sections and notes have been rewritten, and a few notws
dhave been added. Theobject of the work is to give a plain statement of the princi-
ples which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, — the most 1n-
portant and the most ditficult part of Greek Syntax.

GOODWIN’S GREEK READER. Consi'ting of Extracts
from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, aud Thucydides 3 being a full equivalent for
the seven books of the Anabasis, now required for adinission at Harvard. With
Maps, Notes, Keferences to GOODWIN’S GREEK GRAMM AR, and parallel Kef-
ereuces to CROSBY'S and HADLEY’S GRAMMARS. = Edited by Proressok W.
W. Goopwin, of pong meee and J. il. ue ὉΠΌΘΕΝ Half mo-
rocco. - 1.60

This book ΜΕ ΕΣ the third and fourth Ῥοοκα of the Awabasis (entire), the greater
part of the second book of the Hellenica, ani the first chapter of the Memorabilia, of

Xenophon ; the last part of the Apology, and the beginning and end of the Phaedo

of Plato; selections from the sixth, seventh, and eighth books of Herodotus, an

from the fourth book of Thucydides.

LEIGHTOW’S GREEK LESSONS. Prepared to accom-
pan. Goodwin’s Greek Grammar. By Rt. F. Leiguron, Master of pore High
School. Half morocco . ; ᾿ . a Ξ - 100

This work contains about one hundred ἜΝ with a Scdaveseive serie of exer-
cises (both Greek and English), mainly selected from the first book of Xevophon’s
Anxubasis. The exercises on the Moods are sufficient, it is believed, to develop the
geveral principles as stated in the Grammar. The text of four chapters of the Ana-
sous is given entire, with notes and references. Full vocabularies accompany the

ook

There lessons, with the additional exercises to be translated into Greek, are be-
lieved to be a sufficient preparation in Greek Composition for admission to any
American college.

LIDDELL & SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI-
CON. Abridged from the new Oxo Edition. 13th Edition
Morocco back . Ξ ° ‘ . . ‘ Ξ : ὃ ‘ ‘
Sheep binding . ᾿ ὡ : e ‘ : 2 . : :

LIDDELL & SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI-
CON. The sixth Oxford Edition unabridged. 4to. Moroce back. .
ee

We have made arrangements with Messrs. Macmillan & Co. to publish in this
country their pew edition of Liddeil & Scott’s Greek Lexicons, and are ready to
supply the trade

The English editions of Tiddell & Scott are not sterectyped; but each has been
thoroughly revised, enlarged, and printed anew. The sixth edition, just published
is larger by one eighth than the fifth. and contains 1865 pages. Itis an extirelu αὐ
Jerert wurk from the first edition, the whole department of etymology having been
rewritten in the Jight of modern investigations, and the forms of the irregular verbs
being given in greater detail by the aid of Veitch’s Catalogue. No student of Greek
can afford to dispense with this invaluable Lexicon, the price of which is now for the
first time brought within the means of the great body of American scholars

$1.56

175

200

1.25

LATIN.
Wholesale. Retail

ALLEN & GREENOUGH’S LATIN GRAMMAR.
A New Latin Grammar for Schools and Colleges. By J. H Atex, Cambridge,
and J. B. Ggerxouca, Instructor in Latin in Harvard College. and Lecturer on
Comparative Philology io the University course. Containing 226 pages, includ-
ing αὶ full exhibition of the forms and principles of the language, itwstrated, a
the most recent studies and researches. % $1.55

LEIGHTON’S LATIN LESSONS. Prepared to accompany

Allen & Greenough’'s Latin Grammar.

This work prexents a progressive series of exercises (both Latin and English) illus-
trating the grammatical forins and simpler principles of syntax. Synonymer and
rules of quantity are introduced from the first. The text consists of extracts from
1, Homond’s Viri Rome (Komulus aud Kemus; Horatii and Curatii; Life of Cw-
eur); the Helvetian War from Woodford’s Epitome of Cesar; the Nervian War
(entire); the War with the Veneti ;—all fully illustrated with notes, references, and
maps. Full vocabularies accompany the book.

ALLEN’S LATIN LESSONS. 12mo. 134 pages. Con-
sisting of a carefully prepared Method of Instruction and course of Exercises, on
the basis of Caesar, followed by half the First Book of the Gallic War, and exer-
cises in Prosody ; with Notes and Vocabulary. Cloth . . ; 10 125

ALLEN'’S LATIN READER. 12mo. 518 pages. Consist-
ing of Selections from Cesar, Curtius, Nepos, Sallust, Ovid, Virgil, Plautus,
Terence, Cicero, Pliny, and Tacitus, with Notes and a General Vocabulary of
Lativ of more than 16.000 words. With references to ALLEN‘’S, HARK-
NEss’S, MADVIG's, a a ANDREWS ἃ STOUDARD'S Latin

Grammars. Half morocco. - oe ee ae Σ . 200 260
ALLEN 8 LATIN LEXICON. 12mo. 205 pages. (Being

the Vocabulary to the Reader.) Cloth : ᾿ . i : i - 10 123
ALLEN’S LATIN SELECTION 5. one same as the Latin

Reader, without the Vocabulary. Cloth . - . 125 1.56
ALLEN’S LATIN PRIMER. A First Book of Latin ἯΙ

Hoys and Girls. By J. H ALLEN. 155 pages. Cloth ; 1.23

This is designed for the use of scholars of a younger class; and consists of. baie
lessons, carefully arranged (an adaptation of the Kobertsonian method), so as to give
a full outline of the Grammar, accompanied by Tables of Inflection, with DuecEnee
(Latino and English), and Selections for reading

ALLEN’S LATIN COMPOSITION. By W. F. Aten.
107 pages. Cloth. - 1.00 1.25

This book includes a careful τόνων οἵ the Principles of Syntax: as contained in the
Grainmar, with practice in various styles of composition (from classical models),
Vocabulary, and Parallel! Keferences to other Grammars.

ALLEN’S MANUAL LATIN GRAMMAR. Prepared
by W. F and J.H. Aten. 12mo, 148 pages, with Index. Cloth. . 1.00 1.25

Approved by Harvard Cullege as indicating the amount required fur Admission.
MADVIG’S LATIN GRAMMAR. Carefully Βασι δα oy

THomas A TaacueRr, Yale College. Half morocco. 8.00

The most complete and valuable Treatise on the Language ya published, a om
mirably adapted to the wants of Teachers and College Classes

THE ELEMENTS OF LATIN SYNTAX. Arranged
for the use of Schools. By K. H. Cuasg, Philadelphia . a> τνὸ 1.25

THE LATIN VERB. Illustrated by χὰ Sanskrit. By C. H.

Papkaurst. Cloth : ‘ . 40 0

WHITE’S JUNIOR STUDEVT’S COMPLETE
LATIN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-LATIN LEXICON. By
the Rev.J.T Warre, Ὁ. Ὁ. of Ὁ. C. C. Oxford, Rector of St. Martin Ludgate,
London. Revised Edition. Square 12mo. pp. 1058. Morocco back, price

‘The present work aims at furnishing in both its parts a sufficiently extensive
vocabulary for all the practical purposes for which a Junior Student is likely to
require it: 1nd consequently Da. Warre has introduced into the English-Latin
portion all English words likely to occur in passages not too difficult for transia-
tion by any boys uot in the highest forms. As his standard of authority for all
matters coming within its range of treatment, the Author has taken the larger
English Dictionary which is known as Warrs and Ripp.e’s; and for late Latin
terms, wherever such are introduced, he has had recourse to the best recognized
sources of information. The Latin words and phrases, go cited, are in all cases
followed by the name of some standard Latin writer, as a guaranty of their au-
thority ; and as the work is of a strictly elementary character, the conjugations of
the verbs and the genders and genitive cases of the substantives are uniformiy
added. In the preparation of this portion of the book, Dr. Wire has had the
axsistance of some of the best scholars both of Oxford and Cambridge.” —
Guardian.

WHITE’S JUNIOR STUDENTS COMPLETE
LATIN-ENGLISH LEXICON. From the above. Morocco back .
Sheep . ᾿ ᾿

WH:.TE’S COLLEGE LATIN-ENGLISH LEXI-
CON (intermediate size), abridged for University Students from the parent
work (as below). Medium 8vo, pp. 1048, price Moroceo back. . .

Sheep. . . . .

WHITE AND RIDDLE’S LARGE LATIN-ENG-
LISH LEXICON. By Rev. Joan T. Wurre and Rev. J. E. Rippie,
Oxford, England. (The parent work), founded on the larger Dictionary of
Freund. Third Edition, revised. 4to, pp. 2128, price, Morocco back . .

Sheep ‘
Calf . . . .
In two volumes, $2.00 Extra.

8.75

8 00

18.00
17.00
20 v0

We have contracted with Messrs. Loneman:, Green, & Cu, of London,

for the «οἷα agency in this country for the above Latin Lrexicons, and shall

endeavor to mect the ὦ mands of the trade.

NATIONAL MUSIC CHARTS.

Tuese charts will be found to commend themselves in the following par-
ticulars : —

_ 1. The lessons are printed from a newly invented and patented type, form-
ing a beautiful page, large and distinct enough to be seen by the whole class
at once.

2. They save the time of teacher and scholar.

8. They are used successfully by teachers who have no practical skill in
music.

4. They are arranged on a systematic and progressive plan ; embodying the

results of many years’ experience of a practical teacher of children.
Ἶ ἢ They answer equally well for adults, being truly scientific without being
ull.
6. They have been proved by use, having been permanently adopted in the
schools of Boston, Worcester, Salem, New Bedford, Cam-
bridge, Charlestown, Chelsea, Lynn, Haverhill, Lawrence,
Taunton, Newton, &c., Mass.; Manchester and Nashua,
N. H.; Hartford and Bridgeport, Ct.; Syracuse, N. Y.;
Providence, R. I.; Ann Arbor, Ypselanti, Adrian, Jones-
ville, Mich.; Newark, N. J.; Cincinnati, Louisville, San
Francisco, Selma, Ala., and numerous other cities and towns through-
out the Union.

7. They bring about the successful reading of music, in place of the parret-
like rote-singing hitherto prevalent in schools.

8. They furnish a good set of model school-songs in the various keys.

9. They secure a good position of the body (so essential to health) while
sinving, as the pupils are obliged to look upward in reading from them, in-
stead of bending over a book. ;

10. They accustom the smallest children to carry parts independently in
singing harmony.

11. They are neat and compact, requiring no use of chalk or crayon, and
occupying, for forty charts, no more space in the school-room than is required
for a single one of the ordinary pave tablets.

12. They are cheap and durable, costing but Ten Dollars for a complete set
that will last for years to successive classes.

From the Chairman of the Committee on Music in the Boston Public Schools.

I take great pleasure in recommending the music charts of Mr. L. W. Mason
to all who desire to see a real and rapid progress in this branch of common-
school instruction. They have been in constant use in the Boston schools for
several years, and are still growing in favor with the teachers as they become
habituated to their use. :

I know of no other aids to musical instruction which could fill their place.

J. BAXTER UPHAM.

From the Principal of the State Normal School, and Chairman of the Music Com-
mittee of the Public Schools of Salem, Mass.

With the aid of the charts, teachers who possess comparatively little knowl-
edye of the science of music are able to conduct elementary singing-exercises
with good success.

IT have no hesitation in recommending the charts as being well adapted to
use in schools. Yours truly, D. B. HAGAR.

3

From the“Teacher of Music in the Public Schools of Salem, Mass.

I am more and more impressed with their value as an appliance for the ad-
vancement of classes in singing. They are really an invention, by which many
of the difficulties attending the study of music in public schools are overcome.

ὶ W. 5. TILDEN.

*

From the Music-teacher of the Public Schools of Manchester, N. H.

Mr. Mason. Dear Sir,—I have used your music charts in the public
schools in Manchester for the past three years. I think their merits deserve
the highest commendation: and their practical use in the schools 1 consider
indispensable, J. D. JONES.

From the Music-teacher in the Public Schools of Chicago, Iil.
Mr. L. W. Mason. Dear Sir, — We have used your charts in the public
schools of this city during the last two years, and have found them very useful.

You will do a great good by making these exercises known.
Ο. BLACKMAR.

From the Superintendent of Instruction, Cleveland, Ohio.

We have had the National Music Charts in use in the Cleveland schools
for more than a year past, and I am therefore able to state from expericnce
that they are among the most useful devices for promoting the study of music
in schools with which I have ever met. We shall extend their use.

ANDREW J. RICKOFF.

From the Professor of Music at Harvard University.

The National Music Charts combine whatever is excellent in the German
methods of primary musical instruction ; and on the whole are superior, both
in typographical appearance and in progressive arrangement, to anything of
the kind published abroad. JOHN K. PAINE.

Experience has taught me that nothing can excel the use of the chart as a

- means of confining the attention of the class to the lesson in hand.
B. JEPSON.

From the Superintendent of Schools of Cincinnati.

Ι,. W. Mason, Esq. Dear Sir, — We have used your music charts in the
pe schools of this city for several years, with the most satisfactory results.
Ve have found these charts an invaluable auxiliary to the regular teachers of
the different departments in giving musical instruction. Especially is this true
in the lower grades. They are also quite a saving of labor to the music teach-
ers, lessening greatly the necessity of writing lessons on the blackhoard. The
charts, too, are ΕἸΟΟΒΡΗΣ progressive, and are in a convenient form for the
review of principles. I can scarcely see how music could be taught by non-
professional instructors without their aid.

JOHN HANCOCK.

_ he National Music Charts should be introduced into every public school
in the country. P. 5. GILMORE.

4

From the Secretary of Board of Education, Cincinnati, O.
L. W. Mason. Dear Sir.—I am satisfied that in the hands of the non-
professional teacher, for whom they were more particularly designed, the

utility of your music charts can hardly be over-estimated.
W. F. HORLBUT.

From the “ Massachusetts Teacher.’

With the aid of these charts, any person who can sing at all can train children
in the elements of singing.

Admirably adapted to the purposes for which they were intended, and their
introduction into our schools has been attended with the most satisfactory re-
sults. I commend them tu the Teachers and Educators of the country.

JOHN D. PHILBRICK,
Superintendent Public Instruction, Boston, Mass.

We have been astonished at the success met with in instructing pupils
thoroughly and in so short a period, and do with pleasure acknowledge that
we consider your method the most rare ever experienced.

CARL ΖΕΒΗΑΗΝ, ALFRED JAELL,
CARL BERGMANN, C. PLAGEMAN,
HENRY BANDT.

So elementary, well arranged, clear, and at the same time progressive, are
they, that any of our regular teachers who understand music at all, can effi-

ciently teach their scholars themselves.
HENRY F. HARRINGTON.
Superintendent Public Schools, New Bedford, Mass.

They have served a most excellent purpose in our work. Aside from their
value in an instrumental point of view, the saving of time in writing exercises
more than pays their cost ! J. S. PICKARD. |

Superintendent Public Schools, Chicago, Ill.

From the Annual Report of the Board of Trustees of the Public Schools of Louis- |
7 ville, Ky., for 1868.
In a good measure, the advance in this branch ts due to the use of the National
Musical Charts. PRESTON B. SCOTT, Chairman.
WILEY ROGERS,
LOUIS EICHRODT.

From “ Dwight’s Journal of Music.”

A right vital method, interesting master and pupil everywhere, and filling
them all with the spirit of teaching and of learning how to sing, and some
thing about music.

ο- AS

AC

--

THE NEW YORK p
REFERENCE D

UBLIC LIBRARY
EPARTMENT

Lat Sd a a”
«- ~c00@.t4 ew ae 2

{ ΣΤ * pe 4 + ee er pet eae) ἘΣ oO POE OG ΑΔ λιν 6 hs pod © + FO 6G Xt 0 HS Oar ee eae
rerrery il fe eet ee eae ΠΥ ΣΥΝ Oba sn 6h etme tens +4 > b> squint © opin
L Ν a ΓΤ oe ee ee) ie bo ed ees 0. a ¢ tees 4 £4 we ee te eee ΤΙ pee “Δ mad ase -
st oe -« συνε Fs Ae ee ee eee ee ee | Te nheee ete oS + oe
Ἵ ee ee ee & ΝΣ" -
‘ee a ee ἡ a ὃν sue Ψ ἌΣ.
. ‘Seth ye? eek re ok ee ey me Be tet ed Ohne he ba by tae tt +a 09 ae wore Fee od mares gant
a ee yoy 9 ΤΣ ee ΄ τον ὦ ΓΥΥΣΣΣΥΣ ΥΣ Σ Oe he ee eo ote wee ewe ae +t oe oe ΥΣ CEO
ἢ “ΨΥ eet as or? 644 ~~ See ee ch "Ste be Ory bee νῶϊ
i ee | ΠΥ ΣΕΥ 81 ΤΣ ΤΥ ΧΕ © eee eee ΣΝ ΣΤΥ ΣΣ Whee
‘ ΑΣΑ + hg de wee eRe eee ot oe Oe he ree Oo ων ror 5 wert a he © Rept |
ΟΝ o- 2004s +? wt we owes Se ee φι «ὃ: 4) ὁ. ee Ost νι ον να bee eee
ἃ ΓΞ ΥΣ ΤΥ ee oe eee ΧΥΣΥ Pee ee Pree Σ᾽ re OO. rt #48 Oe ve
ἃ ΓΣ eee *“*s eo he ee) ἃ. δέννν I pe mae or
& + ¢<4* ΎΎΥΥ Ps Σ ων» ey ie ΣΕ dt ee eee er Rene La
ome @®« oy sitet = ‘Aes ΡΥ re 7 ft hs ee —~- «= @ maw ete & | ΓΤ ee? * Ὁ pee ee
a o/) @¢@e see ts eae seas (<@* *@e03 @& + * lee owe PO es a teens ee OTe e+e 6
"ΣΧ ngewe dh ἐφ .ἴὺ «eed .% Sunes dene b@ ps bs ¢ 4 oe e-oe vite © Oo eme~eeds eee He
Se **4+6ere +a: Peale Ge & gs Om + ORO’ “νι NT A Aa oes σον ὃ = Pee ¢ me Be pee ee
.caem o | Bot 04 <0 εν ale ey Oe RS 1 et Oem Bie ekg et 4 oe | ome! Peet mm gue er © ‘abe
Sire Geeks et ae mee 4 ab) eke ghee νος, LET) oe ye Ay yy? "ep hee pee eee
| (am + ms 68” © 4.40 od 2 =. : ese rp ype en yD re A oe ate! @ «> 4 a:ée” A hows ἐν “4 «οὖ.
ΓΈ ΣΧΑΣ ΣΎ ΕΥΥ Se ὧν “9... © Gs rr. ν᾿ ΣΟ ee ἂυ * 4684 sed Φ 4
ot Pa ok 4 Se oe bet (Ss ot 6@e@ bet c=. "b= +1 eve ctrTY ἃ. 8» ὩΣ πΠΎΥΎΌ.
ΛΟ ΟΣ ee wel es ΤΥ ὁ ὁ ον» ΓΞ ΣΎ ΣΥΧΥΥΥ
Γ “ΨΥ ee ST ab Ore d 669 -- Oot 1 oe ee |b ee p EN
77° bie 64 +48 oe +4266 b60 O58 271... de "2 62 διφὲρ 4 ©
- ¢ ee νοεδόυ» ὐδϑ ὃ ae ee fh i . »οὐ *“»” . a ott aban
aS ee Pe eee ee ΙΝ Te oe IY eee wa titi * AAA ie” “,«*¢4 7 - ‘
oe ee ee ee eee ee | ef Oe oi to Ve ee ee ee eee | — Fs ΩΣ
ΓΙ - ὁ Ῥω » ὁ ΓΒ. & 4@ te “ie ὅν ae, ᾿ - ἅ ἋΣ ΥΥΓΥΥ ΣΕ ac? Ρὶ “
Α Poa εν. Ὑο. ims ere ee ee) ee OT eee ΔῈ Me my
ba Cmte Mt tage (the EASE OO Eee 4d Oe 4 Ν, ἜΣΧΕ, tho | Vad, ΟΣ Αὐὐὐλτ ".,
ΤΕ εἶ ὃ awe ὼὰ sb ee mn oh & “= >a Σ. ~ 8 &ee νυν» = o% μι "~evee.¢ e © a
506 et O06 mee Ob 6 4+8 444 © ὙΌΣ αν: ιν en oe ee ee
i, ee Ss Ob ke 1. 4a" the awe were. ee ee es τ ρξἔυ + he Abed eee en ὁ
14) Oey 2+ ad ned Oe ΝΥΝ ΝΥ τι wie ἔφ, CO cee Se + £449R4®O ὰ
- Γ eB eee ᾽ a ω 4 «2 + 4hiase ΠῚ ¢*-* 4 *c+te et | a ee) ΗΝ
iif aes Os Ἢ ν᾿ γ᾿ smahb~ +-#4§ae8* §+a4408 Stage em eh
wei Te ide ie . νν ee ere ὡ δ ο
Π ΕΞ ΤΥ ΤΥ i 4s e " O24 fom (0 664 ΟΥλφων Ὅν, ,
A a ee ὃ Φως * +.) wee bebidas 44650 eA’ ΨΥΣ +* & wee a Ht *2te ww ed ae 2 |
4 ee 64% 44 G8 464 wee 6 iva Bhe eee, les Ad ow be O60 64h 4 6 6 OOD +46. 9\6- tot * ee 666.44
P-4-@r ah O® & dons > * Seach ΥΥΥΥ tooo a ΚΙ mee OP CR eri biac "94 4) @ bs ome & &,
Sisa-s +. 054°e i be 2 ee tons meee (hb O60 0 0O4F © Bas Be O,64,* Fi RD ΣΌΣ thatne F
: 5 ὦ} ὡ ΓῚ A A δὰ Ἦν υκὶ od 4 : > ΓΥΥ bad @
chenms 6 2 & ὁ. +44 4 —) ἘΥ toa ee eh**
* ι οὐ .ἶῷ } ~* i ᾿ 5 ἂ ὁ ὁ ὁ “ ὁ 2¢680*
weno ao Bb OPS hme or *% 4 “sry vray tue ea*® wh Beere

+ ‘ ὁ ὦ “.» ΕΣ ΣῚ

᾿τ-τι 2 eee) 2
bn a * ‘s ye >. > ee 6 at i =
ΣΧ 6m Sth 5 . 4 40 at ὁ δ Heh 90 Gee
‘ = aD see ΤΥ ©4444 .4 ΨΙ
e+e a? - ΠῚ ‘ s νυνυω ον νενκ σνν « ΓΝ
* a+ * a « = ‘ 4 ᾿
ΡΨ er ᾽ ᾽ Vite < * = > + oa i pee ww A
- oe - +4! Ἀ a ᾽ 5. 4 . a te » ᾿ . ‘ ὁ Φτ ὁ Α Ps oa
ae eh 4 ΤΊ ΕΣ ee ee 2 wy © Ae ve ψΨ σὰν ee es ye Toes ho 1.0 e+ © 49 ΕΟ ΤΥῚ
he - ΓΕ ΣΕ - ΠΈΣ om? Ν +2 to % bh ¢ ΎΥ eee eee oF 4 +) oe 4 * be ote 6 OG
a δ so oa, be cet Ome Or 6 tt 0 8 Ot Ome + -9e ΨΥ ( Bw )D he 8 wi
4 im ~ « a oi cud ¢ 64 γον 2 +8 - ὦ ΕΓ ῪῸΣ ΤΥ
Ν + aoe 8O, 841 40 pe OM ΡΣ" ween ee wl ee yt wo
ἢ yoo + Φ "+26 is ὁ φῶν Paes? ae ee ae
> et & ib Ter. « See eee ST eS ΤΥ eee ee +26 a oe
> i220 4608 te 8 nm e@) @o@ i. tee Fae. ee
° ‘ii.e ΨΥ he * & FOF 4 +e” **ate Oe oe et ΤῊ ‘* ὁ 4, -
a . ὼ ΕΓ a ee > ee s.&e se — —. . Ss . —: es « & 4
oe * me 48 kee & ‘ee ee ee ~~ o me 4 ὁ wes
ΟΥ̓ :. . ν ὁ .««, ΤῈ ΣΎ ΓΎΣ ‘= | tee + -
ta = * ὁ, 4 th. _ oe ΤΥ ὧᾧ ᾧ » ὦ φὺυ a 7 "44 ΤΥ ΣΕΥ ΓΙ
.͵ ΓΣ. 4 ae |. ee @ a ~~ 5υ ae! « . * @ 4 Φ. ia . >= a? ) => i |
ΓΚ ΕΓ ΣΥΥ a « ΤΟ ΨΥ ΤΟΥ as fT. δι δου : +a @ ὁ * ‘ « ‘=e ΓῚ ΧΙ »-»- «-«
ἘΣ ΣΧ a eee ee Se oe ΥΡΎΌΣ ΥΥΣ ΣΎ , ach) ot γε oh edie oben © “=e eee
ae ee ΣΤ eee en ee er τὸ ἡ « . ΡΥ ΓῪΨ £444 - + §e« . ᾿ " ν » oom bm Oe ee Om Shee
ee ee ,ο.ὖ.16. . ee ee ΞΕ eS ee ee ee Se ee eee ee ee eee es ΕΣ ees
pa ~ 2h © Eee 4o4a4 Pry yo ee ἢ ΨΥ “ἦν. ἌΚΟΥΣ at 462 4 * + <> © gee oe ΣΕ. om ὃν
een ee 2 ee ~~? at as oe +b ΕΣ Ogee bem @ 6 O44 « 46 yd «δέ φέί »υν»..
ΝΥ we « oe ΚΧΕΌΟΥΣ od ale me = ΟΣ ΩΣ δῶν « Φ-.--...9
᾿ ee oe oe | Ν 2nd bo Υ ee a “ὦ be 04 6m & et 4 oe ed ᾿
ae 74. wah 2 mee 4 Ora φὼ 9 ~ * e- . ΓΤ - ᾿ Γ oo 4- *
—— - aes “πρώ ee ee ee 2 ee ee eee φα 5.» ee aos
ἜΣ ‘- — ~~ δὰ —T ST eee ΨΥ ee a oe ee JAP 444% ~6 Se wCoeasme- #@@ “
PA OMe ie ee OO ΠΥ ΨΚΧ be we OS ers ee ee ee ok een Υ ΨΥ ΥΎΎΝΥΨ
.. ΝΥ ΣΧ ΨΥΕΓΥΎΥΧΥ ΨΥ ΣΎ 6 i see © ag@et hs ΣΕΥ a Se ‘* = ee han cnn it te a! eo en
eT eee Ψ᾿ a oF a eee eqeryy pat ee sere erry 2. 9° see. ΤΩῦΣς - © vetert> ~~ eee a eee er
oe -e imeem + he @ emus νσ συν ἐν, illtienieatll tt 4. “Οὐ OM Ty |e δ toms νυ τὸ. δ. oat 676 A © ww 8.8? | BbHb 9
ke Ὁ. ἃ. - Ὡ πο 5» «ὦ ἃ ΙΣΤ ΥΣ 4“λωῳ. οἱ ὦ. o%t4 “θα Be oO age? . OO Γι te Ὁ ὁ oc => PF ee om ROE RO
ee ee en ee 5 ee - ee oe es 2 ee 2 ΨΌΓΟΣ el ee ΣΝ % Re,
pe el ey ἊΝ ΣΈ ** a4 9 ΤΣ ΣΤ ΝΣ -- ee Od dh ὧν ~ ae? ae
~ in 0.48 ag Baw temetae @4 jwrP O26) wit ew heme ee eo" «δ΄ σον OOO + Se+ se oo 7
SN ere ee ee Le MO 04. Oe 4 6 OE ee Bo Oe 8 Oe, 4 OT en eee ee ae 4 * Gy bel we
Bt RAD 9 AE A OE elt thn pe ee OO συ 4 Ae Pp eA ABU orgs @ APSO +e ae us To. oe Ύ ΩΝ
& Or Pe Oyo § OK |t wed 6 oe ne eee G OW OR e 08 4 A ROE hed Fol ΧΟ oh ae
ΣΑΣ Ἥ a “Ὁ t om ag go ®t oo? +) een thd && ee oe ee ee ee eee eS Υ ret ely υ' Re Ὁ
oO) (. Gowen. 2 4 6 4 + ΘΕ ΜΞ ΞΞΣΣ ΣΞΟΡΥΌϑΡΌΟ.-- Se ee Se ΕΞ Ὶ ΣΟ Ae eT ee ee” ΠΥ ΤΥ. πὰ ee ie | bees '
a ae mun « ee ee ee en ee eee ee. ee ΨΥ ee ee ee eS) ee ey ea ΤῊ
~ eo © et OO 8608 eee mee 9 .ὕ».. Ὁ... eae, ὁ But. 6 eget. & be ee ee ΟΣ 2 ΣΎ ee ΣΣΣΙ te
“Ὅν GMD ARM lta apy eae tegen, tent Ne GAGs Ma DG hp ne ΨΥ ΨΧΟΣ ete o¢ Germ bo w@ © 6 4b + Bdee »*
aor Ganererhdad eddie to ee eee Se ee A A at Oe ot ΞΟ Ae ees @ ΠΕΣ ae

Bi ὦ wean a eee ee Oe StS Fee ve Se Bete Le ee Te ?

ΡΣ ORM ccc tao Pm te ee ΣΞὩὠ ΦΧ ΝΣ ee ee ee ee
SP ΣΟ Oh be oO Al ΥΩ ΣΧ,
δον ρον ON tense © Ht, eye a ary ee Ot, &* + “δον, ὦ = 6e08 emmy ΞΕ ee ee oo ἘΣ ον) ‘ore
ee ei eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ere eee en a ΨΜΥΨΣ
ee ee) ee ees ἢ ee ee ee ee a ot ere ΥΧΌΥΣ
Ml he AE Ee ET ΝΥ ΨΎΧΟΥΣ ΟΣ,
OS pc Oy et Ree ee ἀφο ως ght, tay tl ὧδ... ὧἷἶἦο > = ES 8 AE ΧΦ. Dae, Ot me Nepean νον». te ed OOM EME HH Hm ©
ΠΣ ΟΣ ot ee ee ee eee ΟΝ gree OF = o* © tee nen 2m EN eee ren Severe” aay tem Oy
Pm brn tel ρον ον ha? ον den ΣΟ hat rts eas, ob ge ἡ ονόδο, bean) eer oF Ny αι
ΡΣ @ me Syme 8 ee en lt dee ees gre BO ©. 6 95 pew, *-* I A «τ. PNP νι tes os au oy See τοὶ Κὶ ἐδ τωδελόογ om δὲ

ere ΠΤ Lan eterimases te ee ee eee ee ΝΥΝ αν νοῦ
mie ee era Ὡρ ἃ. ee Tye ee ννον νυν ΟΣ ΟΣ
μου “ΠΟ — AD ae “«-. ἄν λα τῷ Ry td Ge υ WH ΣΟ ΣΎ Ὸνῳῳ ly tn, 2 ——Pe pet a bor ee 0. * 4 ews Ory gn Ae eI mre mm & ΓΣ
“πιο μων “αὐ TY σοι ΟΣ Aey+e Ὑ ttle even md been at οὐ ον νων οι
᾿ς Oe ee ne ne le EE νυ ὁ συσανυ σι συλ, tie “ewe a ee ee σὐγοια ooh oo, a "ει, 9:4 yy «Ὁ ΩΣ
eli Πα 6 ως δ» ae ΚΣ te MO σοι Gey . > pe «00» ee oe ee mre ee
| ΨΨΨΝ eee ee et ey al OR ont tu = Vey: et eon oo “οἷ ΡΝ a we fat ψὺν de amt
oie ed eine ee en et ee ee ee + "ὦ «ὁ΄.«“οοὶ am ee ohkneo ΩΝ dee nd . aren | ht wm
Pee ΡΝ wre a | eae ed emanate’ haoeald tee φ'ι Hpeebute ve res

Ap ete re Ce ee ee ree ΥΣ © obi eed © ογσύ νον δὲ ete ὁ. eee
ἡ τυ νυ epeereasiaeeumat Le ἄς ον ρῷς, φὰ bignd eo θεν 6) 058 pakpaice op ead mt howd by ayaa ΓΘ PEN,
OF Ome 5 κω δοοιλννν Me Cok ube preg ast νεῷ peer Pee tee wa 1 Pome oN ΨΨΎ Oy ste a W048 BO nh Ν᾿ my open Oya τας φώου heen δ ἐν δ᾽ αὐγὴ θ᾽

ay terre ° nd eS ro wey >

wre, ΣΝ δῦνθαν ϑν δου ὰνν ΠΥ Se ee ee ee ΩΣ νΦ͵

oe thes ο.φ...» δ Ore “ν ee ag ΣΝ ees wy 6+ ee σ΄. ΕΣ
Pena ἢ rh

a4
wt Praesens SAG ψ ὁ FORA TN αι pegraeee ~et

ee Ce Oe ᾧ, φρο». © —BeW 19, Oo
« + bere we ; ΚΣ
, AAD 4

wh ee ee ed eed

2 Oe cee
bee A fab yao se saver .

Soak 2 Seale eae thin hha ~~
a ek eg. ον were 4.
=—¥ * Pe Ζ με
a 4... γν γι 9. “
ἊΣ ΩΣ Φιο. δι ὦ
Te bt] Dake. re δ᾽ πὐτγοτὸ
ee ee

Pee -@, © Cav eerer™
te oh a om bee σιϑοοι αν
Vian ποῖον ay Mh er OO
ΝΥ he he a nr ON

et MPEG OHO Oe δ
VE Ty ad Nott EG ——
OTe OCR 06 88s οὖν
ee ee re ὦ Pee Hire 4 ae Ged Os GO| ὦ